Ngspice Users Manual
Version 26
(Describes ngspice-26 release version)

Paolo Nenzi, Holger Vogt

December 10, 2017

Locations

The project and download pages of ngspice may be found at

Ngspice home page http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/

Project page at sourceforge http://sourceforge.net/projects/ngspice/

Download page at sourceforge http://sourceforge.net/projects/ngspice/files/

Git source download http://sourceforge.net/scm/?type=cvs&group_id=38962

Status

This manual is a work in progress. Some to-dos are listed in the following. More is surely needed. You are invited to report bugs, missing items, wrongly described items, bad English style etc.

To Do

  1. Review of chapt. 1.3
  2. hfet1,2 model descriptions

How to use this manual

The manual is a “work in progress”. It may accompany a specific ngspice release, e.g. ngspice-24 as manual version 24. If its name contains “Version xxplus”, it describes the actual code status, found at the date of issue in the Git Source Code Management (SCM) tool. The manual is intended to provide a complete description of the ngspice functionality, its features, commands, or procedures. It is not a book about learning spice usage, but the novice user may find some hints how to start using ngspice. Chapter 21.1 gives a short introduction how to set up and simulate a small circuit. Chapter 32 is about compiling and installing ngspice from a tarball or the actual Git source code, which you may find on the ngspice web pages. If you are running a specific LINUX distribution, you may check if it provides ngspice as part of the package. Some are listed here.

Part I
Ngspice User Manual

Contents

4

I  Ngspice User Manual

Contents

Prefaces

 Preface to the first edition

 Preface to the actual edition (as of January 2013)

Acknowledgments

 ngspice contributors

 XSPICE

1 Introduction

 1.1 Simulation Algorithms

  1.1.1 Analog Simulation

  1.1.2 Digital Simulation

  1.1.3 Mixed-Mode Simulation

   1.1.3.1 User-Defined Nodes

  1.1.4 Mixed-Level Simulation

   1.1.4.1 CIDER (DSIM)

   1.1.4.2 GSS TCAD

 1.2 Supported Analyses

  1.2.1 DC Analyses

  1.2.2 AC Small-Signal Analysis

  1.2.3 Transient Analysis

  1.2.4 Pole-Zero Analysis

  1.2.5 Small-Signal Distortion Analysis

  1.2.6 Sensitivity Analysis

  1.2.7 Noise Analysis

  1.2.8 Periodic Steady State Analysis

 1.3 Analysis at Different Temperatures

1.1Instance temperature computationalgorithm

 1.4 Convergence

  1.4.1 Voltage convergence criterion

  1.4.2 Current convergence criterion

  1.4.3 Convergence failure

2 Circuit Description

 2.1 General Structure and Conventions

  2.1.1 Input file structure

  2.1.2 Circuit elements (device instances)

2.1 ngspice element types

  2.1.3 Some naming conventions

2.2 Ngspice scale factors

 2.2 Basic lines

  2.2.1 .TITLE line

  2.2.2 .END Line

  2.2.3 Comments

  2.2.4 End-of-line comments

 2.3 .MODEL Device Models

2.3 Ngspice model types

 2.4 .SUBCKT Subcircuits

  2.4.1 .SUBCKT Line

  2.4.2 .ENDS Line

  2.4.3 Subcircuit Calls

 2.5 .GLOBAL

 2.6 .INCLUDE

 2.7 .LIB

 2.8 .PARAM Parametric netlists

  2.8.1 .param line

  2.8.2 Brace expressions in circuit elements:

  2.8.3 Subcircuit parameters

  2.8.4 Symbol scope

  2.8.5 Syntax of expressions

  2.8.6 Reserved words

  2.8.7 Alternative syntax

 2.9 .FUNC

 2.10 .CSPARAM

 2.11 .TEMP

 2.12 .IF Condition-Controlled Netlist

 2.13 Parameters, functions, expressions, and command scripts

  2.13.1 Parameters

  2.13.2 Nonlinear sources

  2.13.3 Control commands, Command scripts

3 Circuit Elements and Models

 3.1 General options and information

  3.1.1 Simulating more devices in parallel

  3.1.2 Technology scaling

  3.1.3 Model binning

  3.1.4 Multiplier m, initial conditions

 3.2 Elementary Devices

  3.2.1 Resistors

  3.2.2 Semiconductor Resistors

  3.2.3 Semiconductor Resistor Model (R)

  3.2.4 Resistors, dependent on expressions (behavioral resistor)

  3.2.5 Capacitors

  3.2.6 Semiconductor Capacitors

  3.2.7 Semiconductor Capacitor Model (C)

  3.2.8 Capacitors, dependent on expressions (behavioral capacitor)

  3.2.9 Inductors

  3.2.10 Inductor model

  3.2.11 Coupled (Mutual) Inductors

  3.2.12 Inductors, dependent on expressions (behavioral inductor)

  3.2.13 Capacitor or inductor with initial conditions

  3.2.14 Switches

  3.2.15 Switch Model (SW/CSW)

4 Voltage and Current Sources

 4.1 Independent Sources for Voltage or Current

  4.1.1 Pulse

  4.1.2 Sinusoidal

  4.1.3 Exponential

  4.1.4 Piece-Wise Linear

  4.1.5 Single-Frequency FM

  4.1.6 Amplitude modulated source (AM)

  4.1.7 Transient noise source

  4.1.8 Random voltage source

  4.1.9 External voltage or current input

  4.1.10 Arbitrary Phase Sources

 4.2 Linear Dependent Sources

  4.2.1 Gxxxx: Linear Voltage-Controlled Current Sources (VCCS)

  4.2.2 Exxxx: Linear Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources (VCVS)

  4.2.3 Fxxxx: Linear Current-Controlled Current Sources (CCCS)

  4.2.4 Hxxxx: Linear Current-Controlled Voltage Sources (CCVS)

  4.2.5 Polynomial Source Compatibility

4.1 Dependent Polynomial Sources

5 Non-linear Dependent Sources (Behavioral Sources)

 5.1 Bxxxx: Nonlinear dependent source (ASRC)

  5.1.1 Syntax and usage

  5.1.2 Special B-Source Variables time, temper, hertz

  5.1.3 par(’expression’)

  5.1.4 Piecewise Linear Function: pwl

 5.2 Exxxx: non-linear voltage source*

  5.2.1 VOL

  5.2.2 VALUE

  5.2.3 TABLE

  5.2.4 POLY

  5.2.5 LAPLACE

 5.3 Gxxxx: non-linear current source*

  5.3.1 CUR

  5.3.2 VALUE

  5.3.3 TABLE

  5.3.4 POLY

  5.3.5 LAPLACE

  5.3.6 Example

 5.4 Debugging a behavioral source

6 Transmission Lines

 6.1 Lossless Transmission Lines

 6.2 Lossy Transmission Lines

  6.2.1 Lossy Transmission Line Model (LTRA)

 6.3 Uniform Distributed RC Lines

  6.3.1 Uniform Distributed RC Model (URC)

 6.4 KSPICE Lossy Transmission Lines

  6.4.1 Single Lossy Transmission Line (TXL)

  6.4.2 Coupled Multiconductor Line (CPL)

7 Diodes

 7.1 Junction Diodes

 7.2 Diode Model (D)

   Junction DC parameters

   Junction capacitance parameters

   Temperature effects

   Noise modeling

 7.3 Diode Equations

   Parameters Scaling

   Diode DC, Transient and AC model equations

7.1Diode breakdown current calculationalgorithm

   Temperature dependence

   Noise model

8 BJTs

 8.1 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)

 8.2 BJT Models (NPN/PNP)

   Gummel-Poon BJT Parameters (incl. model extensions)

9 JFETs

 9.1 Junction Field-Effect Transistors (JFETs)

 9.2 JFET Models (NJF/PJF)

  9.2.1 JFET level 1 model with Parker Skellern modification

  9.2.2 JFET level 2 Parker Skellern model

10 MESFETs

 10.1 MESFETs

 10.2 MESFET Models (NMF/PMF)

  10.2.1 Model by Statz e.a.

  10.2.2 Model by Ytterdal e.a.

  10.2.3 hfet1

  10.2.4 hfet2

11 MOSFETs

 11.1 MOSFET devices

 11.2 MOSFET models (NMOS/PMOS)

11.1 MOSFET model summary

  11.2.1 MOS Level 1

  11.2.2 MOS Level 2

  11.2.3 MOS Level 3

  11.2.4 MOS Level 6

  11.2.5 Notes on Level 1-6 models

   NGSPICE level 1, 2, 3 and 6 parameters

  11.2.6 BSIM Models

  11.2.7 BSIM1 model (level 4)

   Ngspice BSIM (level 4) parameters

  11.2.8 BSIM2 model (level 5)

  11.2.9 BSIM3 model (levels 8, 49)

  11.2.10 BSIM4 model (levels 14, 54)

  11.2.11 EKV model

  11.2.12 BSIMSOI models (levels 10, 58, 55, 56, 57)

  11.2.13 SOI3 model (level 60)

  11.2.14 HiSIM models of the University of Hiroshima

12 Mixed-Mode and Behavioral Modeling with XSPICE

 12.1 Code Model Element & .MODEL Cards

12.1 Port Type Modifiers

 12.2 Analog Models

  12.2.1 Gain

  12.2.2 Summer

  12.2.3 Multiplier

  12.2.4 Divider

  12.2.5 Limiter

  12.2.6 Controlled Limiter

  12.2.7 PWL Controlled Source

  12.2.8 Filesource

  12.2.9 multi_input_pwl block

  12.2.10 Analog Switch

  12.2.11 Zener Diode

  12.2.12 Current Limiter

  12.2.13 Hysteresis Block

  12.2.14 Differentiator

  12.2.15 Integrator

  12.2.16 S-Domain Transfer Function

  12.2.17 Slew Rate Block

  12.2.18 Inductive Coupling

  12.2.19 Magnetic Core

  12.2.20 Controlled Sine Wave Oscillator

  12.2.21 Controlled Triangle Wave Oscillator

  12.2.22 Controlled Square Wave Oscillator

  12.2.23 Controlled One-Shot

  12.2.24 Capacitance Meter

  12.2.25 Inductance Meter

  12.2.26 Memristor

 12.3 Hybrid Models

  12.3.1 Digital-to-Analog Node Bridge

  12.3.2 Analog-to-Digital Node Bridge

  12.3.3 Controlled Digital Oscillator

  12.3.4 Node bridge from digital to real with enable

  12.3.5 A Z**-1 block working on real data

  12.3.6 A gain block for event-driven real data

  12.3.7 Node bridge from real to analog voltage

 12.4 Digital Models

  12.4.1 Buffer

  12.4.2 Inverter

  12.4.3 And

  12.4.4 Nand

  12.4.5 Or

  12.4.6 Nor

  12.4.7 Xor

  12.4.8 Xnor

  12.4.9 Tristate

  12.4.10 Pullup

  12.4.11 Pulldown

  12.4.12 D Flip Flop

  12.4.13 JK Flip Flop

  12.4.14 Toggle Flip Flop

  12.4.15 Set-Reset Flip Flop

  12.4.16 D Latch

  12.4.17 Set-Reset Latch

  12.4.18 State Machine

  12.4.19 Frequency Divider

  12.4.20 RAM

  12.4.21 Digital Source

 12.5 Predefined Node Types for event driven simulation

  12.5.1 Digital Node Type

  12.5.2 Real Node Type

  12.5.3 Int Node Type

  12.5.4 (Digital) Input/Output

13 Verilog A Device models

 13.1 Introduction

 13.2 adms

 13.3 How to integrate a Verilog-A model into ngspice

  13.3.1 How to setup a *.va model for ngspice

  13.3.2 Adding admsXml to your build environment

14 Mixed-Level Simulation (ngspice with TCAD)

 14.1 Cider

 14.2 GSS, Genius

15 Analyses and Output Control (batch mode)

 15.1 Simulator Variables (.options)

  15.1.1 General Options

  15.1.2 DC Solution Options

   15.1.2.1 Matrix Conditioning info

  15.1.3 AC Solution Options

  15.1.4 Transient Analysis Options

  15.1.5 ELEMENT Specific options

  15.1.6 Transmission Lines Specific Options

  15.1.7 Precedence of option and .options commands

 15.2 Initial Conditions

  15.2.1 .NODESET: Specify Initial Node Voltage Guesses

  15.2.2 .IC: Set Initial Conditions

 15.3 Analyses

  15.3.1 .AC: Small-Signal AC Analysis

  15.3.2 .DC: DC Transfer Function

  15.3.3 .DISTO: Distortion Analysis

  15.3.4 .NOISE: Noise Analysis

  15.3.5 .OP: Operating Point Analysis

  15.3.6 .PZ: Pole-Zero Analysis

  15.3.7 .SENS: DC or Small-Signal AC Sensitivity Analysis

  15.3.8 .TF: Transfer Function Analysis

  15.3.9 .TRAN: Transient Analysis

  15.3.10 Transient noise analysis (at low frequency)

  15.3.11 .PSS: Periodic Steady State Analysis

 15.4 Measurements after AC, DC and Transient Analysis

  15.4.1 .meas(ure)

  15.4.2 batch versus interactive mode

  15.4.3 General remarks

  15.4.4 Input

  15.4.5 Trig Targ

  15.4.6 Find ... When

  15.4.7 AVG|MIN|MAX|PP|RMS|MIN_AT|MAX_AT

  15.4.8 Integ

  15.4.9 param

  15.4.10 par(’expression’)

  15.4.11 Deriv

  15.4.12 More examples

 15.5 Safe Operating Area (SOA) warning messages

  15.5.1 Resistor and Capacitor SOA model parameters

  15.5.2 Diode SOA model parameter

  15.5.3 BJT SOA model parameter

  15.5.4 MOS SOA model parameter

 15.6 Batch Output

  15.6.1 .SAVE: Name vector(s) to be saved in raw file

  15.6.2 .PRINT Lines

  15.6.3 .PLOT Lines

  15.6.4 .FOUR: Fourier Analysis of Transient Analysis Output

  15.6.5 .PROBE: Name vector(s) to be saved in raw file

  15.6.6 par(’expression’): Algebraic expressions for output

  15.6.7 .width

16 Starting ngspice

 16.1 Introduction

 16.2 Where to obtain ngspice

 16.3 Command line options for starting ngspice and ngnutmeg

 16.4 Starting options

  16.4.1 Batch mode

  16.4.2 Interactive mode

  16.4.3 Control mode (Interactive mode with control file or control section)

 16.5 Standard configuration file spinit

 16.6 User defined configuration file .spiceinit

 16.7 Environmental variables

  16.7.1 Ngspice specific variables

  16.7.2 Common environment variables

 16.8 Memory usage

 16.9 Simulation time

 16.10 Ngspice on multi-core processors using OpenMP

  16.10.1 Introduction

  16.10.2 Some results

16.1 OpenMP performance

  16.10.3 Usage

  16.10.4 Literature

 16.11 Server mode option -s

 16.12 Ngspice control via input, output fifos

 16.13 Compatibility

  16.13.1 Compatibility mode

  16.13.2 Missing functions

  16.13.3 Devices

   16.13.3.1 E Source with LAPLACE

   16.13.3.2 VSwitch

  16.13.4 Controls and commands

   16.13.4.1 .lib

   16.13.4.2 .step

 16.14 Tests

 16.15 Reporting bugs and errors

17 Interactive Interpreter

 17.1 Introduction

 17.2 Expressions, Functions, and Constants

 17.3 Plots

 17.4 Command Interpretation

  17.4.1 On the console

  17.4.2 Scripts

  17.4.3 Add-on to circuit file

 17.5 Commands

  17.5.1 Ac*: Perform an AC, small-signal frequency response analysis

  17.5.2 Alias: Create an alias for a command

  17.5.3 Alter*: Change a device or model parameter

  17.5.4 Altermod*: Change model parameter(s)

  17.5.5 Asciiplot: Plot values using old-style character plots

  17.5.6 Aspice*: Asynchronous ngspice run

  17.5.7 Bug: Mail a bug report

  17.5.8 Cd: Change directory

  17.5.9 Cdump: Dump the control flow to the screen

  17.5.10 Circbyline*: Enter a circuit line by line

  17.5.11 Codemodel*: Load an XSPICE code model library

  17.5.12 Compose: Compose a vector

  17.5.13 Dc*: Perform a DC-sweep analysis

  17.5.14 Define: Define a function

  17.5.15 Deftype: Define a new type for a vector or plot

  17.5.16 Delete*: Remove a trace or breakpoint

  17.5.17 Destroy: Delete an output data set

  17.5.18 Devhelp: information on available devices

  17.5.19 Diff: Compare vectors

  17.5.20 Display: List known vectors and types

  17.5.21 Echo: Print text

  17.5.22 Edit*: Edit the current circuit

  17.5.23 Eprint*: Print an event driven node (only used with XSPICE option)

  17.5.24 FFT: fast Fourier transform of vectors

     specwindow:

17.1 Spec and FFT window functions (Gaussian order = 4)

     specwindoworder:

  17.5.25 Fourier: Perform a Fourier transform

  17.5.26 Gnuplot: Graphics output via Gnuplot

  17.5.27 Hardcopy: Save a plot to a file for printing

  17.5.28 Help: Print summaries of Ngspice commands

  17.5.29 History: Review previous commands

  17.5.30 Inventory: Print circuit inventory

  17.5.31 Iplot*: Incremental plot

  17.5.32 Jobs*: List active asynchronous ngspice runs

  17.5.33 Let: Assign a value to a vector

  17.5.34 Linearize*: Interpolate to a linear scale

  17.5.35 Listing*: Print a listing of the current circuit

  17.5.36 Load: Load rawfile data

  17.5.37 Meas*: Measurements on simulation data

  17.5.38 Mdump*: Dump the matrix values to a file (or to console)

  17.5.39 Mrdump*: Dump the matrix right hand side values to a file (or to console)

  17.5.40 Noise*: Noise analysis

  17.5.41 Op*: Perform an operating point analysis

  17.5.42 Option*: Set a ngspice option

  17.5.43 Plot: Plot values on the display

  17.5.44 Pre_<command>: execute commands prior to parsing the circuit

  17.5.45 Print: Print values

  17.5.46 Quit: Leave Ngspice or Nutmeg

  17.5.47 Rehash: Reset internal hash tables

  17.5.48 Remcirc*: Remove the current circuit

  17.5.49 Reset*: Reset an analysis

  17.5.50 Reshape: Alter the dimensionality or dimensions of a vector

  17.5.51 Resume*: Continue a simulation after a stop

  17.5.52 Rspice*: Remote ngspice submission

  17.5.53 Run*: Run analysis from the input file

  17.5.54 Rusage: Resource usage

  17.5.55 Save*: Save a set of outputs

  17.5.56 Sens*: Run a sensitivity analysis

  17.5.57 Set: Set the value of a variable

  17.5.58 Setcirc*: Change the current circuit

  17.5.59 Setplot: Switch the current set of vectors

  17.5.60 Setscale: Set the scale vector for the current plot

  17.5.61 Settype: Set the type of a vector

  17.5.62 Shell: Call the command interpreter

  17.5.63 Shift: Alter a list variable

  17.5.64 Show*: List device state

  17.5.65 Showmod*: List model parameter values

  17.5.66 Snload*: Load the snapshot file

  17.5.67 Snsave*: Save a snapshot file

  17.5.68 Source: Read a ngspice input file

  17.5.69 Spec: Create a frequency domain plot

  17.5.70 Status*: Display breakpoint information

  17.5.71 Step*: Run a fixed number of time-points

  17.5.72 Stop*: Set a breakpoint

  17.5.73 Strcmp: Compare two strings

  17.5.74 Sysinfo*: Print system information

  17.5.75 Tf*: Run a Transfer Function analysis

  17.5.76 Trace*: Trace nodes

  17.5.77 Tran*: Perform a transient analysis

  17.5.78 Transpose: Swap the elements in a multi-dimensional data set

  17.5.79 Unalias: Retract an alias

  17.5.80 Undefine: Retract a definition

  17.5.81 Unlet: Delete the specified vector(s)

  17.5.82 Unset: Clear a variable

  17.5.83 Version: Print the version of ngspice

  17.5.84 Where*: Identify troublesome node or device

  17.5.85 Wrdata: Write data to a file (simple table)

  17.5.86 Write: Write data to a file (Spice3f5 format)

  17.5.87 Wrs2p: Write scattering parameters to file (Touchstone® format)

  17.5.88 Xgraph: use the xgraph(1) program for plotting.

 17.6 Control Structures

  17.6.1 While - End

  17.6.2 Repeat - End

  17.6.3 Dowhile - End

  17.6.4 Foreach - End

  17.6.5 If - Then - Else

  17.6.6 Label

  17.6.7 Goto

  17.6.8 Continue

  17.6.9 Break

 17.7 Internally predefined variables

 17.8 Scripts

  17.8.1 Variables

  17.8.2 Vectors

  17.8.3 Commands

  17.8.4 control structures

  17.8.5 Example script ’spectrum’

  17.8.6 Example script for random numbers

  17.8.7 Parameter sweep

  17.8.8 Output redirection

 17.9 Scattering parameters (s-parameters)

  17.9.1 Intro

  17.9.2 S-parameter measurement basics

  17.9.3 Usage

 17.10 MISCELLANEOUS (old stuff, has to be checked for relevance)

 17.11 Bugs (old stuff, has to be checked for relevance)

18 Ngspice User Interfaces

 18.1 MS Windows Graphical User Interface

18.1 MS Windows GUI
18.2 Plotting with white background

 18.2 MS Windows Console

 18.3 LINUX

 18.4 CygWin

 18.5 Error handling

 18.6 Postscript printing options

 18.7 Gnuplot

 18.8 Integration with CAD software and “third party” GUIs

  18.8.1 KJWaves

  18.8.2 GNU Spice GUI

  18.8.3 XCircuit

  18.8.4 GEDA

  18.8.5 CppSim

  18.8.6 NGSPICE Online

  18.8.7 Spicy Schematics

  18.8.8 MSEspice

  18.8.9 PartSim

19 ngspice as shared library or dynamic link library

 19.1 Compile options

  19.1.1 How to get the sources

  19.1.2 LINUX, MINGW, CYGWIN

  19.1.3 MS Visual Studio

 19.2 Linking shared ngspice to a calling application

  19.2.1 Linking during creating the caller

  19.2.2 Loading at runtime

 19.3 Shared ngspice API

  19.3.1 structs and types defined for transporting data

  19.3.2 Exported functions

   19.3.2.1 int ngSpice_Init(SendChar*, SendStat*, ControlledExit*, SendData*, SendInitData*, BGThreadRunning*, void)

   Pointers to callback functions (details see ø:ref subsec:Callback-functions):

   19.3.2.2 int ngSpice_Init_Sync(GetVSRCData* , GetISRCData* , GetSyncData* , int*, void*)

   19.3.2.3 int ngSpice_Command(char*)

   19.3.2.4 bool ngSpice_running (void)

   19.3.2.5 pvector_info ngGet_Vec_Info(char*)

   19.3.2.6 int ngSpice_Circ(char**)

   19.3.2.7 char* ngSpice_CurPlot(void)

   19.3.2.8 char** ngSpice_AllPlots(void)

   19.3.2.9 char** ngSpice_AllVecs(char*)

   19.3.2.10 bool ngSpice_SetBkpt(double)

  19.3.3 Callback functions

   19.3.3.1 typedef int (SendChar)(char*, int, void*)

   19.3.3.2 typedef int (SendStat)(char*, int, void*)

   19.3.3.3 typedef int (ControlledExit)(int, bool, bool, int, void*)

   19.3.3.4 typedef int (SendData)(pvecvaluesall, int, int, void*

   19.3.3.5 typedef int (SendInitData)(pvecinfoall, int, void*)

   19.3.3.6 typedef int (BGThreadRunning)(bool, int, void*)

 19.4 General remarks on using the API

  19.4.1 Loading a netlist

   19.4.1.1 Loading from file

   19.4.1.2 Loading line by line

   19.4.1.3 Loading as a string array

  19.4.2 Running the simulation

  19.4.3 Accessing data

   19.4.3.1 Synchronous access

   19.4.3.2 Asynchronous access

  19.4.4 Altering model or device parameters

  19.4.5 Output

  19.4.6 Error handling

 19.5 Example applications

 19.6 ngspice parallel

  19.6.1 Go parallel!

  19.6.2 Additional exported functions

   19.6.2.1 int ngSpice_Init_Sync(GetVSRCData* , GetISRCData* , GetSyncData* , int*, void*)

   Pointers to callback functions (details see ø:ref subsec:Callback-functions):

   More pointers

   19.6.2.2 bool ngSpice_SetBkpt(double)

  19.6.3 Additional callback functions

   19.6.3.1 typedef int (GetVSRCData)(double*, double, char*, int, void*)

   19.6.3.2 typedef int (GetISRCData)(double*, double, char*, int, void*)

   19.6.3.3 typedef int (GetSyncData)(double, double*, double, int, void*)

  19.6.4 Parallel ngspice example

20 TCLspice

 20.1 tclspice framework

 20.2 tclspice documentation

 20.3 spicetoblt

 20.4 Running TCLspice

 20.5 examples

  20.5.1 Active capacitor measurement

   20.5.1.1 Invocation:

   20.5.1.2 testbench1.tcl

  20.5.2 Optimization of a linearization circuit for a Thermistor

   20.5.2.1 Invocation:

   20.5.2.2 testbench3.tcl

  20.5.3 Progressive display

   20.5.3.1 testbench2.tcl

 20.6 Compiling

  20.6.1 LINUX

  20.6.2 MS Windows

   20.6.2.1 Downloads

   20.6.2.2 Tcl

   20.6.2.3 Tk

   20.6.2.4 blt

   20.6.2.5 tclspice

 20.7 MS Windows 32 Bit binaries

21 Example Circuits

21.1 Transistor Amplifier Simulation Example

 21.1 AC coupled transistor amplifier

21.2 node 1 and node ’base’ versus time
21.3 VCC, Collector and Emitter Voltages

 21.2 Differential Pair

 21.3 MOSFET Characterization

 21.4 RTL Inverter

 21.5 Four-Bit Binary Adder (Bipolar)

 21.6 Four-Bit Binary Adder (MOS)

 21.7 Transmission-Line Inverter

22 Statistical circuit analysis

 22.1 Introduction

 22.2 Using random param(eters)

 22.3 Behavioral sources (B, E, G, R, L, C) with random control

 22.4 ngspice scripting language

 22.5 Monte-Carlo Simulation

  22.5.1 Example 1

  22.5.2 Example 2

  22.5.3 Example 3

 22.6 Data evaluation with Gnuplot

23 Circuit optimization with ngspice

 23.1 Optimization of a circuit

 23.2 ngspice optimizer using ngspice scripts

 23.3 ngspice optimizer using tclspice

 23.4 ngspice optimizer using a Python script

 23.5 ngspice optimizer using ASCO

  23.5.1 Three stage operational amplifier

   amp3.cfg

   amp3.sp

   n.typ, p.typ

   Testing the set-up

   Running the simulation

23.1 Optimization speed

  23.5.2 Digital inverter

  23.5.3 Bandpass

  23.5.4 Class-E power amplifier

24 Notes

 24.1 Glossary

 24.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations

Bibliography

II  XSPICE Software User’s Manual

25 XSPICE Basics

 25.1 ngspice with the XSPICE option

 25.2 The XSPICE Code Model Subsystem

 25.3 XSPICE Top-Level Diagram

25.1 ngspice/XSPICE Top-Level Diagram

26 Execution Procedures

 26.1 Simulation and Modeling Overview

  26.1.1 Describing the Circuit

   26.1.1.1 Example Circuit Description Input

26.1 Example Circuit 1

   26.1.1.2 Models and Subcircuits

26.2 Example Circuit 2

   Device Models

   Subcircuits

   26.1.1.3 XSPICE Code Models

   26.1.1.4 Node Bridge Models

   26.1.1.5 Practical Model Development

 26.2 Circuit Description Syntax

  26.2.1 XSPICE Syntax Extensions

   26.2.1.1 Convergence Debugging Support

   26.2.1.2 Digital Nodes

   26.2.1.3 User-Defined Nodes

   26.2.1.4 Supply Ramping

 26.3 How to create code models

27 Example circuits

 27.1 Amplifier with XSPICE model “gain”

 27.2 XSPICE advanced usage

  27.2.1 Circuit example C3

27.1 Example Circuit C3

  27.2.2 Running example C3

27.2 Nutmeg Plot of Filter Input and Output
27.3 Nutmeg Plot of Subcircuit Internal Node

28 Code Models and User-Defined Nodes

 28.1 Code Model Data Type Definitions

   Boolean_t

   Complex_t

   Digital_State_t

   Digital_Strength_t

   Digital_t

 28.2 Creating Code Models

 28.3 Creating User-Defined Nodes

 28.4 Adding a new code model library

 28.5 Compiling and loading the new code model (library)

 28.6 Interface Specification File

  28.6.1 The Name Table

   28.6.1.1 C Function Name

   28.6.1.2 SPICE Model Name

   Description

  28.6.2 The Port Table

   28.6.2.1 Port Name

   28.6.2.2 Description

   28.6.2.3 Direction

   28.6.2.4 Default Type

   28.6.2.5 Allowed Types

   28.6.2.6 Vector

28.1 Port Types

   28.6.2.7 Vector Bounds

   28.6.2.8 Null Allowed

  28.6.3 The Parameter Table

   28.6.3.1 Parameter Name

   28.6.3.2 Description

   28.6.3.3 Data Type

   28.6.3.4 Null Allowed

   28.6.3.5 Default Value

   28.6.3.6 Limits

   28.6.3.7 Vector

   28.6.3.8 Vector Bounds

  28.6.4 Static Variable Table

   28.6.4.1 Name

   28.6.4.2 Description

   28.6.4.3 Data Type

 28.7 Model Definition File

  28.7.1 Macros

   28.7.1.1 Macro Definitions

   28.7.1.2 Circuit Data

   28.7.1.3 Parameter Data

   28.7.1.4 Port Data

   28.7.1.5 Input Data

   28.7.1.6 Output Data

   28.7.1.7 Partial Derivatives

   28.7.1.8 AC Gains

   28.7.1.9 Static Variables

   28.7.1.10 Accessor Macros

28.3 Accessor macros

  28.7.2 Function Library

   28.7.2.1 Overview

   28.7.2.2 Smoothing Functions

   28.7.2.3 Model State Storage Functions

   28.7.2.4 Integration and Convergence Functions

   28.7.2.5 Message Handling Functions

   28.7.2.6 Breakpoint Handling Functions

   28.7.2.7 Special Purpose Functions

   28.7.2.8 Complex Math Functions

 28.8 User-Defined Node Definition File

  28.8.1 Macros

28.4 User-Defined Node Macros

  28.8.2 Function Library

   28.8.2.1 Function udn_XXX_create

   28.8.2.2 Function udn_XXX_initialize

   28.8.2.3 Function udn_XXX_compare

   28.8.2.4 Function udn_XXX_copy

   28.8.2.5 Function udn_XXX_dismantle

   28.8.2.6 Function udn_XXX_invert

   28.8.2.7 Function udn_XXX_resolve

   28.8.2.8 Function udn_XXX_plot_val

   28.8.2.9 Function udn_XXX_print_val

   28.8.2.10 Function udn_XXX_ipc_val

  28.8.3 Example UDN Definition File

29 Error Messages

 29.1 Preprocessor Error Messages

 29.2 Simulator Error Messages

 29.3 Code Model Error Messages

  29.3.1 Code Model aswitch

  29.3.2 Code Model climit

  29.3.3 Code Model core

  29.3.4 Code Model d_osc

  29.3.5 Code Model d_source

  29.3.6 Code Model d_state

  29.3.7 Code Model oneshot

  29.3.8 Code Model pwl

  29.3.9 Code Model s_xfer

  29.3.10 Code Model sine

  29.3.11 Code Model square

  29.3.12 Code Model triangle

III  CIDER

30 CIDER User’s Manual

 30.1 SPECIFICATION

  30.1.1 Examples

 30.2 BOUNDARY, INTERFACE

  30.2.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.2.2 PARAMETERS

  30.2.3 EXAMPLES

 30.3 COMMENT

  30.3.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.3.2 EXAMPLES

 30.4 CONTACT

  30.4.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.4.2 PARAMETERS

  30.4.3 EXAMPLES

  30.4.4 SEE ALSO

 30.5 DOMAIN, REGION

  30.5.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.5.2 PARAMETERS

  30.5.3 EXAMPLES

  30.5.4 SEE ALSO

 30.6 DOPING

  30.6.1 DESCRIPTION

30.1 1D doping profiles with location > 0.
30.2 1D doping profiles with location < 0.

  30.6.2 PARAMETERS

  30.6.3 EXAMPLES

  30.6.4 SEE ALSO

 30.7 ELECTRODE

  30.7.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.7.2 PARAMETERS

  30.7.3 EXAMPLES

  30.7.4 SEE ALSO

 30.8 END

  30.8.1 DESCRIPTION

 30.9 MATERIAL

  30.9.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.9.2 PARAMETERS

  30.9.3 EXAMPLES

  30.9.4 SEE ALSO

 30.10 METHOD

  30.10.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.10.2 Parameters

  30.10.3 Examples

 30.11 Mobility

  30.11.1 Description

  30.11.2 Parameters

  30.11.3 Examples

  30.11.4 SEE ALSO

  30.11.5 BUGS

 30.12 MODELS

  30.12.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.12.2 Parameters

  30.12.3 Examples

  30.12.4 See also

  30.12.5 Bugs

 30.13 OPTIONS

  30.13.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.13.2 Parameters

  30.13.3 Examples

  30.13.4 See also

 30.14 OUTPUT

  30.14.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.14.2 Parameters

  30.14.3 Examples

  30.14.4 SEE ALSO

 30.15 TITLE

  30.15.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.15.2 EXAMPLES

  30.15.3 BUGS

 30.16 X.MESH, Y.MESH

  30.16.1 DESCRIPTION

30.3 Typical mesh for 2D devices

  30.16.2 Parameters

  30.16.3 EXAMPLES

  30.16.4 SEE ALSO

 30.17 NUMD

  30.17.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.17.2 Parameters

  30.17.3 EXAMPLES

  30.17.4 SEE ALSO

  30.17.5 BUGS

 30.18 NBJT

  30.18.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.18.2 Parameters

  30.18.3 EXAMPLES

  30.18.4 SEE ALSO

  30.18.5 BUGS

 30.19 NUMOS

  30.19.1 DESCRIPTION

  30.19.2 Parameters

  30.19.3 EXAMPLES

  30.19.4 SEE ALSO

 30.20 Cider examples

IV  Appendices

31 Model and Device Parameters

 31.1 Accessing internal device parameters

 31.2 Elementary Devices

  31.2.1 Resistor

   31.2.1.1 Resistor instance parameters

   31.2.1.2 Resistor model parameters

  31.2.2 Capacitor - Fixed capacitor

   31.2.2.1 Capacitor instance parameters

   31.2.2.2 Capacitor model parameters

  31.2.3 Inductor - Fixed inductor

   31.2.3.1 Inductor instance parameters

   31.2.3.2 Inductor model parameters

  31.2.4 Mutual - Mutual Inductor

   31.2.4.1 Mutual instance parameters

 31.3 Voltage and current sources

  31.3.1 ASRC - Arbitrary source

   31.3.1.1 ASRC instance parameters

  31.3.2 Isource - Independent current source

   31.3.2.1 Isource instance parameters

  31.3.3 Vsource - Independent voltage source

   31.3.3.1 Vsource instance parameters

  31.3.4 CCCS - Current controlled current source

   31.3.4.1 CCCS instance parameters

  31.3.5 CCVS - Current controlled voltage source

   31.3.5.1 CCVS instance parameters

  31.3.6 VCCS - Voltage controlled current source

   31.3.6.1 VCCS instance parameters

  31.3.7 VCVS - Voltage controlled voltage source

   31.3.7.1 VCVS instance parameters

 31.4 Transmission Lines

  31.4.1 CplLines - Simple Coupled Multiconductor Lines

   31.4.1.1 CplLines instance parameters

   31.4.1.2 CplLines model parameters

  31.4.2 LTRA - Lossy transmission line

   31.4.2.1 LTRA instance parameters

   31.4.2.2 LTRA model parameters

  31.4.3 Tranline - Lossless transmission line

   31.4.3.1 Tranline instance parameters

  31.4.4 TransLine - Simple Lossy Transmission Line

   31.4.4.1 TransLine instance parameters

   31.4.4.2 TransLine model parameters

  31.4.5 URC - Uniform R. C. line

   31.4.5.1 URC instance parameters

   31.4.5.2 URC model parameters

 31.5 BJTs

  31.5.1 BJT - Bipolar Junction Transistor

   31.5.1.1 BJT instance parameters

   31.5.1.2 BJT model parameters

  31.5.2 BJT - Bipolar Junction Transistor Level 2

   31.5.2.1 BJT2 instance parameters

   31.5.2.2 BJT2 model parameters

  31.5.3 VBIC - Vertical Bipolar Inter-Company Model

   31.5.3.1 VBIC instance parameters

   31.5.3.2 VBIC model parameters

 31.6 MOSFETs

  31.6.1 MOS1 - Level 1 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

   31.6.1.1 MOS1 instance parameters

   31.6.1.2 MOS1 model parameters

  31.6.2 MOS2 - Level 2 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

   31.6.2.1 MOS 2 instance parameters

   31.6.2.2 MOS2 model parameters

  31.6.3 MOS3 - Level 3 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

   31.6.3.1 MOS3 instance parameters

   31.6.3.2 MOS3 model parameters

  31.6.4 MOS6 - Level 6 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

   31.6.4.1 MOS6 instance parameters

   31.6.4.2 MOS6 model parameters

  31.6.5 MOS9 - Modified Level 3 MOSFET model

   31.6.5.1 MOS9 instance parameters

   31.6.5.2 MOS9 model parameters

  31.6.6 BSIM1 - Berkeley Short Channel IGFET Model

   31.6.6.1 BSIM1 instance parameters

   31.6.6.2 BSIM1 Model Parameters

  31.6.7 BSIM2 - Berkeley Short Channel IGFET Model

   31.6.7.1 BSIM2 instance parameters

   31.6.7.2 BSIM2 model parameters

  31.6.8 BSIM3

   31.6.8.1 BSIM3 accessible instance parameters

   31.6.8.2 BSIM3 manual

  31.6.9 BSIM4

   31.6.9.1 BSIM4 accessible instance parameters

   31.6.9.2 BSIM4 manual

32 Compilation notes

 32.1 Ngspice Installation under LINUX (and other ’UNIXes’)

  32.1.1 Prerequisites

  32.1.2 Install from Git

  32.1.3 Install from a tarball, e.g. ngspice-rework-25.tgz

  32.1.4 Compilation using an user defined directory tree for object files

  32.1.5 Advanced Install

   32.1.5.1 Options Specific to Using Ngspice

   32.1.5.2 Options Useful for Debugging Ngspice

  32.1.6 Compilers and Options

  32.1.7 Compiling For Multiple Architectures

  32.1.8 Installation Names

  32.1.9 Optional Features

  32.1.10 Specifying the System Type

  32.1.11 Sharing Defaults

  32.1.12 Operation Controls

 32.2 Ngspice Compilation under WINDOWS OS

  32.2.1 How to make ngspice with MINGW and MSYS

  32.2.2 64 Bit executables with MINGW-w64

  32.2.3 make ngspice with MS Visual Studio 2008 or 2010

32.1 ngspice standard installation tree under MS Windows

  32.2.4 make ngspice with pure CYGWIN

  32.2.5 ngspice mingw or cygwin console executable w/o graphics

  32.2.6 make ngspice with CYGWIN and external MINGW32

   The next two compilation options are deprecated and not tested any more!

  32.2.7 make ngspice with CYGWIN and internal MINGW32 (use config.h made above)

 32.3 Reporting errors

33 Copyrights and licenses

 33.1 Documentation license

  33.1.1 Spice documentation copyright

  33.1.2 XSPICE SOFTWARE (documentation) copyright

  33.1.3 CIDER RESEARCH SOFTWARE AGREEMENT (superseded by ø:ref subsec:New,-modified-BSD)

 33.2 ngspice license

  33.2.1 “Modified” BSD license

  33.2.2 XSPICE

  33.2.3 tclspice, numparam

  33.2.4 Linking to GPLd libraries (e.g. readline, fftw):

Prefaces

Preface to the first edition

This manual has been assembled from different sources:

  1. The spice3f5 manual,
  2. the XSPICE user’s manual,
  3. the CIDER user’s manual

and some original material needed to describe the new features and the newly implemented models. This cut and paste approach, while not being orthodox, allowed ngspice to have a full manual in a fraction of the time that writing a completely new text would have required. The use of LaTex and Lyx instead of TeXinfo, which was the original encoding for the manual, further helped to reduce the writing effort and improved the quality of the result, at the expense of an on-line version of the manual but, due to the complexity of the software I hardly think that users will ever want to read an on-line text version.

In writing this text I followed the cut of spice3f5 manual, both in the chapter sequence and presentation of material, mostly because that was already the user manual of spice.

Ngspice is an open source software, users can download the source code, compile, and run it. This manual has an entire chapter describing program compilation and available options to help users in building ngspice (see chapt. 32). The source package already comes with all “safe” options enabled by default, and activating the others can produce unpredictable results and thus is recommended to expert users only. This is the first ngspice manual and I have removed all the historical material that described the differences between ngspice and spice3, since it was of no use for the user and not so useful for the developer who can look for it in the Changelogs of in the revision control system.

I want to acknowledge the work dome Emmanuel Rouat and Arno W. Peters for converting to TE Xinfo the original spice3f documentation, their effort gave ngspice users the only available documentation that described the changes for many years. A good source of ideas for this manual comes from the on-line spice3f manual written by Charles D.H. Williams (Spice3f5 User Guide), constantly updated and useful for some insight that he gives in it.

As always, errors, omissions and unreadable phrases are only my fault.

Paolo Nenzi

Roma, March 24th 2001

Indeed. At the end of the day, this is engineering, and one learns to live

within the limitations of the tools.

Kevin Aylward , Warden of the Kings Ale

Preface to the actual edition (as of January 2013)

Due to the wealth of new material and options in ngspice the actual order of chapters has been revised. Several new chapters have been added. The LY X text processor has allowed adding internal cross references. The PDF format has become the standard format for distribution of the manual. Within each new ngspice distribution (starting with ngspice-21) a manual edition is provided reflecting the ngspice status at the time of distribution. At the same time, located at ngspice manuals, the manual is constantly updated. Every new ngspice feature should enter this manual as soon as it has been made available in the Git source code.

Holger Vogt

Mülheim, 2013

Acknowledgments

ngspice contributors

Spice was originally written at The University of California at Berkeley (USA).

Since then, there have been many people working on the software, most of them releasing patches to the original code through the Internet.

The following people have contributed in some way:

Vera Albrecht,

Cecil Aswell,

Giles C. Billingsley,

Phil Barker,

Steven Borley,

Stuart Brorson,

Mansun Chan,

Wayne A. Christopher,

Al Davis,

Glao S. Dezai,

Jon Engelbert,

Daniele Foci,

Noah Friedman,

David A. Gates,

Alan Gillespie,

John Heidemann,

Jeffrey M. Hsu,

JianHui Huang,

S. Hwang,

Chris Inbody,

Gordon M. Jacobs,

Min-Chie Jeng,

Beorn Johnson,

Stefan Jones,

Kenneth H. Keller,

Francesco Lannutti,

Robert Larice,

Mathew Lew,

Robert Lindsell,

Weidong Liu,

Kartikeya Mayaram,

Richard D. McRoberts,

Manfred Metzger,

Wolfgang Muees,

Paolo Nenzi,

Gary W. Ng,

Hong June Park,

Stefano Perticaroli,

Arno Peters,

Serban-Mihai Popescu,

Georg Post,

Thomas L. Quarles,

Emmanuel Rouat,

Jean-Marc Routure,

Jaijeet S. Roychowdhury,

Lionel Sainte Cluque,

Takayasu Sakurai,

Amakawa Shuhei,

Kanwar Jit Singh,

Bill Swartz,

Hitoshi Tanaka,

Steve Tell,

Andrew Tuckey,

Andreas Unger,

Holger Vogt,

Dietmar Warning,

Michael Widlok,

Charles D.H. Williams,

Antony Wilson,

and many others...

If someone helped in the development and has not been inserted in this list then this omission was unintentional. If you feel you should be on this list then please write to <ngspice-devel@lists.sourceforge.net>. Do not be shy, we would like to make a list as complete as possible.

XSPICE

The XSPICE simulator is based on the SPICE3 program developed by the Electronics Research Laboratory, Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences, University of California at Berkeley. The authors of XSPICE gratefully acknowledge UC Berkeley’s development and distribution of this software, and their licensing policies which promote further improvements to simulation technology.

We also gratefully acknowledge the participation and support of our U.S. Air Force sponsors, the Aeronautical Systems Center and the Warner Robins Air Logistics Command, without which the development of XSPICE would not have been possible.

Chapter 1
Introduction

Ngspice is a general-purpose circuit simulation program for nonlinear and linear analyses. Circuits may contain resistors, capacitors, inductors, mutual inductors, independent or dependent voltage and current sources, loss-less and lossy transmission lines, switches, uniform distributed RC lines, and the five most common semiconductor devices: diodes, BJTs, JFETs, MESFETs, and MOSFETs.

Some introductory remarks on how to use ngspice may be found in chapter 21.

Ngspice is an update of Spice3f5, the last Berkeley’s release of Spice3 simulator family. Ngspice is being developed to include new features to existing Spice3f5 and to fix its bugs. Improving a complex software like a circuit simulator is a very hard task and, while some improvements have been made, most of the work has been done on bug fixing and code refactoring.

Ngspice has built-in models for the semiconductor devices, and the user need specify only the pertinent model parameter values. There are three models for bipolar junction transistors, all based on the integral-charge model of Gummel and Poon; however, if the Gummel-Poon parameters are not specified, the basic model (BJT) reduces to the simpler Ebers-Moll model. In either case and in either models, charge storage effects, ohmic resistances, and a current-dependent output conductance may be included. The second bipolar model BJT2 adds dc current computation in the substrate diode. The third model (VBIC) contains further enhancements for advanced bipolar devices.

The semiconductor diode model can be used for either junction diodes or Schottky barrier diodes. There are two models for JFET: the first (JFET) is based on the model of Shichman and Hodges, the second (JFET2) is based on the Parker-Skellern model. All the original six MOSFET models are implemented: MOS1 is described by a square-law I-V characteristic, MOS2 [1] is an analytical model, while MOS3 [1] is a semi-empirical model; MOS6 [2] is a simple analytic model accurate in the short channel region; MOS9, is a slightly modified Level 3 MOSFET model - not to confuse with Philips level 9; BSIM 1 [3, 4]; BSIM2 [5] are the old BSIM (Berkeley Short-channel IGFET Model) models. MOS2, MOS3, and BSIM include second-order effects such as channel-length modulation, subthreshold conduction, scattering-limited velocity saturation, small-size effects, and charge controlled capacitances. The recent MOS models for submicron devices are the BSIM3 (Berkeley BSIM3 web page) and BSIM4 (Berkeley BSIM4 web page) models. Silicon-on-insulator MOS transistors are described by the SOI models from the BSIMSOI family (Berkeley BSIMSOI web page) and the STAG [18] one. There is partial support for a couple of HFET models and one model for MESA devices.

Ngspice supports mixed-level simulation and provides a direct link between technology parameters and circuit performance. A mixed-level circuit and device simulator can provide greater simulation accuracy than a stand-alone circuit or device simulator by numerically modeling the critical devices in a circuit. Compact models can be used for noncritical devices. The mixed-level extensions to ngspice are two:

Ngspice supports mixed-signal simulation through the integration of XSPICE code into it. XSPICE software, developed as an extension to Spice3C1 from GeorgiaTech, has been ported to ngspice to provide “board” level and mixed-signal simulation.

New devices can be added to ngspice by two means: the XSPICE code-model interface and the ADMS interface based on Verilog-A and XML.

Finally, numerous small bugs have been discovered and fixed, and the program has been ported to a wider variety of computing platforms.

1.1 Simulation Algorithms

Computer-based circuit simulation is often used as a tool by designers, test engineers, and others who want to analyze the operation of a design without examining the physical circuit. Simulation allows you to change quickly the parameters of many of the circuit elements to determine how they affect the circuit response. Often it is difficult or impossible to change these parameters in a physical circuit.

However, to be practical, a simulator must execute in a reasonable amount of time. The key to efficient execution is choosing the proper level of modeling abstraction for a given problem. To support a given modeling abstraction, the simulator must provide appropriate algorithms.

Historically, circuit simulators have supported either an analog simulation algorithm or a digital simulation algorithm. Ngspice inherits the XSPICE framework and supports both analog and digital algorithms and is a “mixed-mode” simulator.

1.1.1 Analog Simulation

Analog simulation focuses on the linear and non-linear behavior of a circuit over a continuous time or frequency interval. The circuit response is obtained by iteratively solving Kirchhoff’s Laws for the circuit at time steps selected to ensure the solution has converged to a stable value and that numerical approximations of integrations are sufficiently accurate. Since Kirchhoff’s laws form a set of simultaneous equations, the simulator operates by solving a matrix of equations at each time point. This matrix processing generally results in slower simulation times when compared to digital circuit simulators.

The response of a circuit is a function of the applied sources. Ngspice offers a variety of source types including DC, sine-wave, and pulse. In addition to specifying sources, the user must define the type of simulation to be run. This is termed the “mode of analysis”. Analysis modes include DC analysis, AC analysis, and transient analysis. For DC analysis, the time-varying behavior of reactive elements is neglected and the simulator calculates the DC solution of the circuit. Swept DC analysis may also be accomplished with ngspice. This is simply the repeated application of DC analysis over a range of DC levels for the input sources. For AC analysis, the simulator determines the response of the circuit, including reactive elements to small-signal sinusoidal inputs over a range of frequencies. The simulator output in this case includes amplitudes and phases as a function of frequency. For transient analysis, the circuit response, including reactive elements, is analyzed to calculate the behavior of the circuit as a function of time.

1.1.2 Digital Simulation

Digital circuit simulation differs from analog circuit simulation in several respects. A primary difference is that a solution of Kirchhoff’s laws is not required. Instead, the simulator must only determine whether a change in the logic state of a node has occurred and propagate this change to connected elements. Such a change is called an “event”.

When an event occurs, the simulator examines only those circuit elements that are affected by the event. As a result, matrix analysis is not required in digital simulators. By comparison, analog simulators must iteratively solve for the behavior of the entire circuit because of the forward and reverse transmission properties of analog components. This difference results in a considerable computational advantage for digital circuit simulators, which is reflected in the significantly greater speed of digital simulations.

1.1.3 Mixed-Mode Simulation

Modern circuits often contain a mix of analog and digital circuits. To simulate such circuits efficiently and accurately a mix of analog and digital simulation techniques is required. When analog simulation algorithms are combined with digital simulation algorithms, the result is termed “mixed-mode simulation”.

Two basic methods of implementing mixed-mode simulation used in practice are the “native mode” and “glued mode” approaches. Native mode simulators implement both an analog algorithm and a digital algorithm in the same executable. Glued mode simulators actually use two simulators, one of which is analog and the other digital. This type of simulator must define an input/output protocol so that the two executables can communicate with each other effectively. The communication constraints tend to reduce the speed, and sometimes the accuracy, of the complete simulator. On the other hand, the use of a glued mode simulator allows the component models developed for the separate executables to be used without modification.

Ngspice is a native mode simulator providing both analog and event-based simulation in the same executable. The underlying algorithms of ngspice (coming from XSPICE and its Code Model Subsystem) allow use of all the standard SPICE models, provide a pre-defined collection of the most common analog and digital functions, and provide an extensible base on which to build additional models.

1.1.3.1 User-Defined Nodes

Ngspice supports creation of “User-Defined Node” types. User-Defined Node types allow you to specify nodes that propagate data other than voltages, currents, and digital states. Like digital nodes, User-Defined Nodes use event-driven simulation, but the state value may be an arbitrary data type. A simple example application of User-Defined Nodes is the simulation of a digital signal processing filter algorithm. In this application, each node could assume a real or integer value. More complex applications may define types that involve complex data such as digital data vectors or even non-electronic data.

Ngspice digital simulation is actually implemented as a special case of this User-Defined Node capability where the digital state is defined by a data structure that holds a Boolean logic state and a strength value.

1.1.4 Mixed-Level Simulation

Ngspice can simulate numerical device models for diodes and transistors in two different ways, either through the integrated DSIM simulator or interfacing to GSS TCAD system. DSIM is an internal C-based device simulator which is part of the CIDER simulator, the mixed-level simulator based on spice3f5. CIDER within ngspice provides circuit analyses, compact models for semiconductor devices, and one- or two-dimensional numerical device models.

1.1.4.1 CIDER (DSIM)

DSIM provides accurate, one- and two-dimensional numerical device models based on the solution of Poisson’s equation, and the electron and hole current-continuity equations. DSIM incorporates many of the same basic physical models found in the Stanford two-dimensional device simulator PISCES. Input to CIDER consists of a SPICE-like description of the circuit and its compact models, and PISCES-like descriptions of the structures of numerically modeled devices. As a result, CIDER should seem familiar to designers already accustomed to these two tools. CIDER is based on the mixed-level circuit and device simulator CODECS, and is a replacement for this program. The basic algorithms of the two programs are the same. Some of the differences between CIDER and CODECS are described below. The CIDER input format has greater flexibility and allows increased access to physical model parameters. New physical models have been added to allow simulation of state-of-the-art devices. These include transverse field mobility degradation important in scaled-down MOSFETs and a polysilicon model for poly-emitter bipolar transistors. Temperature dependence has been included over the range from -50C to 150C. The numerical models can be used to simulate all the basic types of semiconductor devices: resistors, MOS capacitors, diodes, BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs. BJTs and JFETs can be modeled with or without a substrate contact. Support has been added for the management of device internal states. Post-processing of device states can be performed using the ngnutmeg user interface.

1.1.4.2 GSS TCAD

GSS is a TCAD software which enables two-dimensional numerical simulation of semiconductor device with well-known drift-diffusion and hydrodynamic method. GSS has Basic DDM (drift-diffusion method) solver, Lattice Temperature Corrected DDM solver, EBM (energy balance method) solver and Quantum corrected DDM solver which based on density-gradient theory. The GSS program is directed via input statements by a user specified disk file. Supports triangle mesh generation and adaptive mesh refinement. Employs PMI (physical model interface) to support various materials, including compound semiconductor materials such as SiGe and AlGaAs. Supports DC sweep, transient and AC sweep calculations. The device can be stimulated by voltage or current source(s).

GSS is no longer updated, but is still available as open source as a limited edition of the commercial GENIUS TCAD tool.

1.2 Supported Analyses

The ngspice simulator supports the following different types of analysis:

  1. DC Analysis (Operating Point and DC Sweep)
  2. AC Small-Signal Analysis
  3. Transient Analysis
  4. Pole-Zero Analysis
  5. Small-Signal Distortion Analysis
  6. Sensitivity Analysis
  7. Noise Analysis

Applications that are exclusively analog can make use of all analysis modes with the exception of Code Model subsystem that do not implements Pole-Zero, Distortion, Sensitivity and Noise analyses. Event-driven applications that include digital and User-Defined Node types may make use of DC (operating point and DC sweep) and Transient only.

In order to understand the relationship between the different analyses and the two underlying simulation algorithms of ngspice, it is important to understand what is meant by each analysis type. This is detailed below.

1.2.1 DC Analyses

The dc analysis portion of ngspice determines the dc operating point of the circuit with inductors shorted and capacitors opened. The dc analysis options are specified on the .DC, .TF, and .OP control lines.

There is assumed to be no time dependence on any of the sources within the system description. The simulator algorithm subdivides the circuit into those portions which require the analog simulator algorithm and those which require the event-driven algorithm. Each subsystem block is then iterated to solution, with the interfaces between analog nodes and event-driven nodes iterated for consistency across the entire system.

Once stable values are obtained for all nodes in the system, the analysis halts and the results may be displayed or printed out as you request them.

A dc analysis is automatically performed prior to a transient analysis to determine the transient initial conditions, and prior to an ac small-signal analysis to determine the linearized, small-signal models for nonlinear devices. If requested, the dc small-signal value of a transfer function (ratio of output variable to input source), input resistance, and output resistance is also computed as a part of the dc solution. The dc analysis can also be used to generate dc transfer curves: a specified independent voltage, current source, resistor or temperature1 is stepped over a user-specified range and the dc output variables are stored for each sequential source value.

1.2.2 AC Small-Signal Analysis

AC analysis is limited to analog nodes and represents the small signal, sinusoidal solution of the analog system described at a particular frequency or set of frequencies. This analysis is similar to the DC analysis in that it represents the steady-state behavior of the described system with a single input node at a given set of stimulus frequencies.

The program first computes the dc operating point of the circuit and determines linearized, small-signal models for all of the nonlinear devices in the circuit. The resultant linear circuit is then analyzed over a user-specified range of frequencies. The desired output of an ac small-signal analysis is usually a transfer function (voltage gain, transimpedance, etc). If the circuit has only one ac input, it is convenient to set that input to unity and zero phase, so that output variables have the same value as the transfer function of the output variable with respect to the input.

1.2.3 Transient Analysis

Transient analysis is an extension of DC analysis to the time domain. A transient analysis begins by obtaining a DC solution to provide a point of departure for simulating time-varying behavior. Once the DC solution is obtained, the time-dependent aspects of the system are reintroduced, and the two simulator algorithms incrementally solve for the time varying behavior of the entire system. Inconsistencies in node values are resolved by the two simulation algorithms such that the time-dependent waveforms created by the analysis are consistent across the entire simulated time interval. Resulting time-varying descriptions of node behavior for the specified time interval are accessible to you.

All sources which are not time dependent (for example, power supplies) are set to their dc value. The transient time interval is specified on a .TRAN control line.

1.2.4 Pole-Zero Analysis

The pole-zero analysis portion of Ngspice computes the poles and/or zeros in the small-signal ac transfer function. The program first computes the dc operating point and then determines the linearized, small-signal models for all the nonlinear devices in the circuit. This circuit is then used to find the poles and zeros of the transfer function. Two types of transfer functions are allowed: one of the form (output voltage)/(input voltage) and the other of the form (output voltage)/(input current). These two types of transfer functions cover all the cases and one can find the poles/zeros of functions like input/output impedance and voltage gain. The input and output ports are specified as two pairs of nodes. The pole-zero analysis works with resistors, capacitors, inductors, linear-controlled sources, independent sources, BJTs, MOSFETs, JFETs and diodes. Transmission lines are not supported. The method used in the analysis is a sub-optimal numerical search. For large circuits it may take a considerable time or fail to find all poles and zeros. For some circuits, the method becomes "lost" and finds an excessive number of poles or zeros.

1.2.5 Small-Signal Distortion Analysis

The distortion analysis portion of Ngspice computes steady-state harmonic and intermodulation products for small input signal magnitudes. If signals of a single frequency are specified as the input to the circuit, the complex values of the second and third harmonics are determined at every point in the circuit. If there are signals of two frequencies input to the circuit, the analysis finds out the complex values of the circuit variables at the sum and difference of the input frequencies, and at the difference of the smaller frequency from the second harmonic of the larger frequency. Distortion analysis is supported for the following nonlinear devices:

All linear devices are automatically supported by distortion analysis. If there are switches present in the circuit, the analysis continues to be accurate provided the switches do not change state under the small excitations used for distortion calculations.

If a device model does not support direct small signal distortion analysis, please use the Fourier statement and evaluate the output per scripting.

1.2.6 Sensitivity Analysis

Ngspice will calculate either the DC operating-point sensitivity or the AC small-signal sensitivity of an output variable with respect to all circuit variables, including model parameters. Ngspice calculates the difference in an output variable (either a node voltage or a branch current) by perturbing each parameter of each device independently. Since the method is a numerical approximation, the results may demonstrate second order affects in highly sensitive parameters, or may fail to show very low but non-zero sensitivity. Further, since each variable is perturb by a small fraction of its value, zero-valued parameters are not analyzed (this has the benefit of reducing what is usually a very large amount of data).

1.2.7 Noise Analysis

The noise analysis portion of Ngspice does analysis device-generated noise for the given circuit. When provided with an input source and an output port, the analysis calculates the noise contributions of each device (and each noise generator within the device) to the output port voltage. It also calculates the input noise to the circuit, equivalent to the output noise referred to the specified input source. This is done for every frequency point in a specified range - the calculated value of the noise corresponds to the spectral density of the circuit variable viewed as a stationary Gaussian stochastic process. After calculating the spectral densities, noise analysis integrates these values over the specified frequency range to arrive at the total noise voltage/current (over this frequency range). This calculated value corresponds to the variance of the circuit variable viewed as a stationary Gaussian process.

1.2.8 Periodic Steady State Analysis

(Experimental code, not yet made publicly available!)

PSS is a radio frequency periodical large-signal dedicated analysis. The implementation is based on a time domain shooting like method which make use of Transient analysis. As it is in early development stage, PSS performs analysis only on autonomous circuits, meaning that it is only able to predict fundamental frequency and amplitude (and also harmonics) for oscillators, VCOs, etc.. The algorithm is based on a minimum search of the error vector taken as the difference of RHS vectors between two occurrences of an estimated period. The convergence is reached when the mean of error vector decrease below a given threshold that can be set as a analysis parameter. Results of this analysis are the basis of every periodical large-signal analysis as PAC or PNoise.

1.3 Analysis at Different Temperatures

Temperature, in ngspice, is a property associated to the entire circuit, rather than an analysis option. Circuit temperature has a default (nominal) value of 27°C (300.15 K) that can be changed using the TEMP option in an .option control line (see 15.1.1) or by the .TEMP line (see 2.11), which has precedence over the .option TEMP line. All analyses are, thus, performed at circuit temperature, and if you want to simulate circuit behavior at different temperatures you should prepare a netlist for each temperature.

All input data for ngspice is assumed to have been measured at the circuit nominal temperature. This value can further be overridden for any device which models temperature effects by specifying the TNOM parameter on the .model itself. Individual instances may further override the circuit temperature through the specification of TEMP and DTEMP parameters on the instance. The two options are not independent even if you can specify both on the instance line, the TEMP option overrides DTEMP. The algorithm to compute instance temperature is described below:


IF TEMP is specified THEN

instance_temperature = TEMP

ELSE IF

instance_temperature = circuit_temperature + DTEMP

END IF

Algorithm 1.1: Instance temperature computation

Temperature dependent support is provided for all devices except voltage and current sources (either independent and controlled) and BSIM models. BSIM MOSFETs have an alternate temperature dependency scheme which adjusts all of the model parameters before input to ngspice.

For details of the BSIM temperature adjustment, see [6] and [7]. Temperature appears explicitly in the exponential terms of the BJT and diode model equations. In addition, saturation currents have a built-in temperature dependence. The temperature dependence of the saturation current in the BJT models is determined by:

              ( T  )XT I   ( Egq (T1T0))
IS (T1) = IS(T0) -1-     exp  ----------
                T0           k(T1 - T0)
(1.1)

where k is Boltzmann’s constant, q is the electronic charge, Eg is the energy gap which is a model parameter, and XT I is the saturation current temperature exponent (also a model parameter, and usually equal to 3).

The temperature dependence of forward and reverse beta is according to the formula:

              (    )X TB
B (T1) = B(T0)  T1-
                T0
(1.2)

where T 0 and T 1 are in degrees Kelvin, and XT B is a user-supplied model parameter. Temperature effects on beta are carried out by appropriate adjustment to the values of BF , ISE, BR, and ISC (spice model parameters BF, ISE, BR, and ISC, respectively).

Temperature dependence of the saturation current in the junction diode model is determined by:

               ( T1) XNTI   (  Egq (T1T0) )
IS(T1) = IS (T0)   ---    exp  ------------
                 T0          Nk (T1- T0)
(1.3)

where N is the emission coefficient, which is a model parameter, and the other symbols have the same meaning as above. Note that for Schottky barrier diodes, the value of the saturation current temperature exponent, XT I, is usually 2. Temperature appears explicitly in the value of junction potential, U (in Ngspice PHI), for all the device models.

The temperature dependence is determined by:

              (       )
        kT      N  N
U (T ) =--- ln   --a-d--
         q      Ni(T)2
(1.4)

where k is Boltzmann’s constant, q is the electronic charge, Na is the acceptor impurity density, Nd is the donor impurity density, Ni is the intrinsic carrier concentration, and Eg is the energy gap. Temperature appears explicitly in the value of surface mobility, M0(or U0), for the MOSFET model.

The temperature dependence is determined by:

         M0 (T0)
M0 (T) = (---)1.5-
           TT-
            0
(1.5)

The effects of temperature on resistors, capacitor and inductors is modeled by the formula:

             [                               ]
R (T) = R(T0)  1+ T C1(T - T0)+ T C2 (T - T0)2
(1.6)

where T is the circuit temperature, T 0 is the nominal temperature, and T C1 and T C2 are the first and second order temperature coefficients.

1.4 Convergence

Ngspice uses the Newton-Raphson algorithm to solve nonlinear equations arising from circuit description. The NR algorithm is interactive and terminates when both of the following conditions hold:

  1. The nonlinear branch currents converge to within a tolerance of 0.1% or 1 picoamp (1.0e-12 Amp), whichever is larger.
  2. The node voltages converge to within a tolerance of 0.1% or 1 microvolt (1.0e-6 Volt), whichever is larger.

1.4.1 Voltage convergence criterion

The algorithm has reached convergence if the difference between the last iteration k and the current one (k+1):

|           |
| (k+1)   (k)|
|vn   - vn  | ≤ RELTOL *vnmax + VNTOL
(1.7)

where

           (|      ||   |)
vn   = max  ||v(nk+1)||,||v(nk)||
  max
(1.8)

The RELTOL (RELative TOLerance) parameter, which default value is 10-3, specifies how small the solution update must be, relative to the node voltage, to consider the solution to have converged. The VNTOL (absolute convergence) parameter, which has 1μV as default becomes important when node voltages have near zero values. The relative parameter alone, in such case, would need too strict tolerances, perhaps lower than computer round-off error, and thus convergence would never be achieved. VNTOL forces the algorithm to consider as converged any node whose solution update is lower than its value.

1.4.2 Current convergence criterion

Ngspice checks the convergence on the non-linear functions that describe the non-linear branches in circuit elements. In semiconductor devices the functions defines currents through the device and thus the name of the criterion.

Ngspice computes the difference between the value of the nonlinear function computed for last voltage and the linear approximation of the same current computed with the actual voltage:

|             |
|(k+1)   (k)  |
||ibranch-  ibranch|| ≤ RELTOL * ibrmax + ABSTOL
(1.9)

where

           (             )
i    = max   i(k+1) ,i(k)
brmax          branch branch
(1.10)

In the two expressions above, the i
 branch indicates the linear approximation of the current.

1.4.3 Convergence failure

Although the algorithm used in ngspice has been found to be very reliable, in some cases it fails to converge to a solution. When this failure occurs, the program terminates the job. Failure to converge in dc analysis is usually due to an error in specifying circuit connections, element values, or model parameter values. Regenerative switching circuits or circuits with positive feedback probably will not converge in the dc analysis unless the OFF option is used for some of the devices in the feedback path, .nodeset control line is used to force the circuit to converge to the desired state.

Chapter 2
Circuit Description

2.1 General Structure and Conventions

2.1.1 Input file structure

The circuit to be analyzed is described to ngspice by a set of element instance lines, which define the circuit topology and element instance values, and a set of control lines, which define the model parameters and the run controls. All lines are assembled in an input file to be read by ngspice. Two lines are essential:

The order of the remaining lines is arbitrary (except, of course, that continuation lines must immediately follow the line being continued). This feature in the ngspice input language dates back to the punched card times where elements were written on separate cards (and cards frequently fell off). Leading white spaces in a line are ignored, as well as empty lines.

The lines decribed in sections 2.1 to 2.12 are typically used in the core of the input file, outside of a .control section (see 16.4.3). An exception is the .include includefile line (2.6) which may be placed anywhere in the input file. The contents of includefile will be inserted exactly in place of the .include line.

2.1.2 Circuit elements (device instances)

Each element in the circuit is a device instance specified by an instance line that contains:

The first letter of the element instance name specifies the element type. The format for the ngspice element types is given in the following manual chapters. In the rest of the manual, the strings XXXXXXX, YYYYYYY, and ZZZZZZZ denote arbitrary alphanumeric strings.

For example, a resistor instance name must begin with the letter R and can contain one or more characters. Hence, R, R1, RSE, ROUT, and R3AC2ZY are valid resistor names. Details of each type of device are supplied in a following section 3. Table 2.1 lists the element types which are available in ngspice, sorted by the first letter.





First letter Element description

Comments, links







A XSPICE code model

12 analog (12.2) digital (12.4) mixed signal (12.3)




B Behavioral (arbitrary) source

5.1




C Capacitor

3.2.5




D Diode

7




E Voltage-controlled voltage source (VCVS)

linear (4.2.2), non-linear (5.2)




F Current-controlled current source (CCCs)

linear (4.2.3)




G Voltage-controlled current source (VCCS)

linear (4.2.1), non-linear (5.3)




H Current-controlled voltage source (CCVS)

linear (4.2.4)




I Current source

4.1




J Junction field effect transistor (JFET)

9




K Coupled (Mutual) Inductors

3.2.11




L Inductor

3.2.9




M Metal oxide field effect transistor (MOSFET)

11 BSIM3 (11.2.9) BSIM4 (11.2.10)




N Numerical device for GSS

14.2




O Lossy transmission line

6.2




P Coupled multiconductor line (CPL)

6.4.2




Q Bipolar junction transistor (BJT)

8




R Resistor

3.2.1




S Switch (voltage-controlled)

3.2.14




T Lossless transmission line

6.1




U Uniformly distributed RC line

6.3




V Voltage source

4.1




W Switch (current-controlled)

3.2.14




X Subcircuit

2.4.3




Y Single lossy transmission line (TXL)

6.4.1




Z Metal semiconductor field effect transistor (MESFET)

10




Table 2.1: ngspice element types

2.1.3 Some naming conventions

Fields on a line are separated by one or more blanks, a comma, an equal (=) sign, or a left or right parenthesis; extra spaces are ignored. A line may be continued by entering a “+” (plus) in column 1 of the following line; ngspice continues reading beginning with column 2. A name field must begin with a letter (A through Z) and cannot contain any delimiters. A number field may be an integer field (12, -44), a floating point field (3.14159), either an integer or floating point number followed by an integer exponent (1e-14, 2.65e3), or either an integer or a floating point number followed by one of the following scale factors:





Suffix Name Factor






T Tera 1012



G Giga 109



Meg Mega 106



K Kilo 103



mil Mil 25.4×10-6



m milli 10-3



u micro 10-6



n nano 10-9



p pico 10-12



f femto 10-15



Table 2.2: Ngspice scale factors

Letters immediately following a number that are not scale factors are ignored, and letters immediately following a scale factor are ignored. Hence, 10, 10V, 10Volts, and 10Hz all represent the same number, and M, MA, MSec, and MMhos all represent the same scale factor. Note that 1000, 1000.0, 1000Hz, 1e3, 1.0e3, 1kHz, and 1k all represent the same number. Note that M or m denote ’milli’, i.e. 10-3. Suffix meg has to be used for 106.

Nodes names may be arbitrary character strings and are case insensitive, if ngspice is used in batch mode (16.4.1). If in interactive (16.4.2) or control (16.4.3) mode, node names may either be plain numbers or arbitrary character strings, not starting with a number. The ground node must be named “0” (zero). For compatibility reason “gnd” is accepted as ground node, and will internally be treated as a global node and be converted to “0”. Each circuit has to have a ground node (gnd or 0)! Note the difference in ngspice where the nodes are treated as character strings and not evaluated as numbers, thus “0” and “00” are distinct nodes in ngspice but not in SPICE2.

Ngspice requires that the following topological constraints are satisfied:

2.2 Basic lines

2.2.1 .TITLE line

Examples:

POWER AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT 
* additional lines following 
*... 
 
Test of CAM cell 
* additional lines following 
*...

The title line must be the first in the input file. Its contents are printed verbatim as the heading for each section of output.

As an alternative you may place a .TITLE <any title> line anywhere in your input deck. The first line of your input deck will be overridden by the contents of this line following the .TITLE statement.

.TITLE line example:

****************************** 
* additional lines following 
*... 
.TITLE Test of CAM cell 
* additional lines following 
*...

will internally be replaced by

Internal input deck:

Test of CAM cell 
* additional lines following 
*... 
*TITLE Test of CAM cell 
* additional lines following 
*...

2.2.2 .END Line

Examples:

.end

The ".End" line must always be the last in the input file. Note that the period is an integral part of the name.

2.2.3 Comments

General Form:

* <any comment>

Examples:

* RF=1K Gain should be 100 
* Check open-loop gain and phase margin

The asterisk in the first column indicates that this line is a comment line. Comment lines may be placed anywhere in the circuit description.

2.2.4 End-of-line comments

General Form:

<any command> ;<any comment> 
<any command> $ <any comment>

Examples:

RF2=1K ;Gain should be 100 
C1=10p $ Check open-loop gain and phase margin 
.param n1=1 //new value

ngspice supports comments that begin with single characters ’;’ or double characters ’$ ’ (dollar plus space) or ’//’. For readability you should precede each comment character with a space. ngspice will accept the single character ’$’, but only outside of a .control section.

2.3 .MODEL Device Models

General form:

.model mname type(pname1=pval1 pname2=pval2 ... )

Examples:

.model MOD1 npn (bf=50 is=1e-13 vbf=50)

Most simple circuit elements typically require only a few parameter values. However, some devices (semiconductor devices in particular) that are included in ngspice require many parameter values. Often, many devices in a circuit are defined by the same set of device model parameters. For these reasons, a set of device model parameters is defined on a separate .model line and assigned a unique model name. The device element lines in ngspice then refer to the model name.

For these more complex device types, each device element line contains the device name, the nodes to which the device is connected, and the device model name. In addition, other optional parameters may be specified for some devices: geometric factors and an initial condition (see the following section on Transistors (8 to 11) and Diodes (7) for more details). mname in the above is the model name, and type is one of the following fifteen types:




Code Model Type




R Semiconductor resistor model


C Semiconductor capacitor model


L Inductor model


SW Voltage controlled switch


CSW Current controlled switch


URC Uniform distributed RC model


LTRA Lossy transmission line model


D Diode model


NPN NPN BJT model


PNP PNP BJT model


NJF N-channel JFET model


PJF P-channel JFET model


NMOS N-channel MOSFET model


PMOS P-channel MOSFET model


NMF N-channel MESFET model


PMF P-channel MESFET model


Table 2.3: Ngspice model types

Parameter values are defined by appending the parameter name followed by an equal sign and the parameter value. Model parameters that are not given a value are assigned the default values given below for each model type. Models are listed in the section on each device along with the description of device element lines. Model parameters and their default values are given in chapter 31.

2.4 .SUBCKT Subcircuits

A subcircuit that consists of ngspice elements can be defined and referenced in a fashion similar to device models. Subcircuits are the way ngspice implements hierarchical modeling, but this is not entirely true because each subcircuit instance is flattened during parsing, and thus ngspice is not a hierarchical simulator.

The subcircuit is defined in the input deck by a grouping of element cards delimited by the .subckt and the .ends cards (or the keywords defined by the substart and subend options (see 17.7)); the program then automatically inserts the defined group of elements wherever the subcircuit is referenced. Instances of subcircuits within a larger circuit are defined through the use of an instance card which begins with the letter “X”. A complete example of all three of these cards follows:

Example:
* The following is the instance card: 
* 
xdiv1 10 7 0 vdivide 
 
* The following are the subcircuit definition cards: 
* 
.subckt vdivide 1 2 3 
r1 1 2 10K 
r2 2 3 5K 
.ends

The above specifies a subcircuit with ports numbered “1”, “2” and “3”:

The instance card, when placed in an ngspice deck, will cause subcircuit port “1” to be equated to circuit node “10”, while port “2” will be equated to node “7” and port “3” will equated to node “0”.

There is no limit on the size or complexity of subcircuits, and subcircuits may contain other subcircuits. An example of subcircuit usage is given in chapter 21.6.

2.4.1 .SUBCKT Line

General form:

.SUBCKT subnam N1 <N2 N3 ...>

Examples:

.SUBCKT OPAMP 1 2 3 4

A circuit definition is begun with a .SUBCKT line. SUBNAM is the subcircuit name, and N1, N2, ... are the external nodes, which cannot be zero. The group of element lines which immediately follow the .SUBCKT line define the subcircuit. The last line in a subcircuit definition is the .ENDS line (see below). Control lines may not appear within a subcircuit definition; however, subcircuit definitions may contain anything else, including other subcircuit definitions, device models, and subcircuit calls (see below). Note that any device models or subcircuit definitions included as part of a subcircuit definition are strictly local (i.e., such models and definitions are not known outside the subcircuit definition). Also, any element nodes not included on the .SUBCKT line are strictly local, with the exception of 0 (ground) which is always global. If you use parameters, the .SUBCKT line will be extended (see 2.8.3).

2.4.2 .ENDS Line

General form:

.ENDS <SUBNAM>

Examples:

.ENDS OPAMP

The .ENDS line must be the last one for any subcircuit definition. The subcircuit name, if included, indicates which subcircuit definition is being terminated; if omitted, all subcircuits being defined are terminated. The name is needed only when nested subcircuit definitions are being made.

2.4.3 Subcircuit Calls

General form:

XYYYYYYY N1 <N2 N3 ...> SUBNAM

Examples:

X1 2 4 17 3 1 MULTI

Subcircuits are used in ngspice by specifying pseudo-elements beginning with the letter X, followed by the circuit nodes to be used in expanding the subcircuit. If you use parameters, the subcircuit call will be modified (see 2.8.3).

2.5 .GLOBAL

General form:

.GLOBAL nodename

Examples:

.GLOBAL gnd vcc

Nodes defined in the .GLOBAL statement are available to all circuit and subcircuit blocks independently from any circuit hierarchy. After parsing the circuit, these nodes are accessible from top level.

2.6 .INCLUDE

General form:

.INCLUDE filename

Examples:

.INCLUDE /users/spice/common/bsim3-param.mod

Frequently, portions of circuit descriptions will be reused in several input files, particularly with common models and subcircuits. In any ngspice input file, the .INCLUDE line may be used to copy some other file as if that second file appeared in place of the .INCLUDE line in the original file.

There is no restriction on the file name imposed by ngspice beyond those imposed by the local operating system.

2.7 .LIB

General form:

.LIB filename libname

Examples:

.LIB /users/spice/common/mosfets.lib mos1

The .LIB statement allows to include library descriptions into the input file. Inside the *.lib file a library libname will be selected. The statements of each library inside the *.lib file are enclosed in .LIB libname <...> .ENDL statements.

If the compatibility mode (16.13) is set to ’ps’ by set ngbehavior=ps (17.7) in spinit (16.5) or .spiceinit (16.6), then a simplified syntax .LIB filename is available: a warning is issued and filename is simply included as described in chapt. 2.6.

2.8 .PARAM Parametric netlists

Ngspice allows for the definition of parametric attributes in the netlists. This is an enhancement of the ngspice front-end which adds arithmetic functionality to the circuit description language.

2.8.1 .param line

General form:

.param <ident> = <expr>  <ident> = <expr> ....

Examples:

.param pippo=5 
.param po=6 pp=7.8 pap={AGAUSS(pippo, 1, 1.67)} 
.param pippp={pippo + pp} 
.param p={pp} 
.param pop=’pp+p’

This line assigns numerical values to identifiers. More than one assignment per line is possible using a space as separator. Parameter identifier names must begin with an alphabetic character. The other characters must be either alphabetic, a number, or ! # $ % [ ] _ as special characters. The variables time, temper, and hertz (see 5.1.1) are no valid identifier names. Other restrictions on naming conventions apply as well, see 2.8.6.

The .param lines inside subcircuits are copied per call, like any other line. All assignments are executed sequentially through the expanded circuit. Before its first use, a parameter name must have been assigned a value. Expression defining a parameter have to be put into braces {p+p2}, alternatively into single quotes ’AGAUSS(pippo, 1, 1.67)’.

2.8.2 Brace expressions in circuit elements:

General form:

{ <expr> }

Examples:

These are allowed in .model lines and in device lines. A spice number is a floating point number with an optional scaling suffix, immediately glued to the numeric tokens (see chapt. 2.8.5). Brace expressions ({..}) cannot be used to parametrize node names or parts of names. All identifiers used within an <expr> must have known values at the time when the line is evaluated, else an error is flagged.

2.8.3 Subcircuit parameters

General form:

.subckt <identn> node node ...  <ident>=<value> <ident>=<value> ...

Examples:

.subckt myfilter in out rval=100k cval=100nF

<identn> is the name of the subcircuit given by the user. node is an integer number or an identifier, for one of the external nodes. The first <ident>=<value> introduces an optional section of the line. Each <ident> is a formal parameter, and each <value> is either a spice number or a brace expression. Inside the “.subckt” ... “.ends” context, each formal parameter may be used like any identifier that was defined on a .param control line. The <value> parts are supposed to be default values of the parameters. However, in the current version of , they are not used and each invocation of the subcircuit must supply the _exact_ number of actual parameters.

The syntax of a subcircuit call (invocation) is:

General form:

X<name> node node ... <identn> <ident>=<value> <ident>=<value> ...

Examples:

X1 input output myfilter rval=1k cval=1n

Here <name> is the symbolic name given to that instance of the subcircuit, <identn> is the name of a subcircuit defined beforehand. node node ... is the list of actual nodes where the subcircuit is connected. <value> is either a spice number or a brace expression { <expr> } . The sequence of <value> items on the X line must exactly match the number and the order of formal parameters of the subcircuit.

Subcircuit example with parameters:

* Param-example 
.param amplitude= 1V 
* 
.subckt myfilter in out rval=100k  cval=100nF 
Ra in p1   {2*rval} 
Rb p1 out  {2*rval} 
C1 p1 0    {2*cval} 
Ca in p2   {cval} 
Cb p2 out  {cval} 
R1 p2 0    {rval} 
.ends myfilter 
* 
X1 input output myfilter rval=1k cval=1n 
V1 input 0 AC {amplitude} 
.end

2.8.4 Symbol scope

All subcircuit and model names are considered global and must be unique. The .param symbols that are defined outside of any “.subckt” ... “.ends” section are global. Inside such a section, the pertaining “params:” symbols and any .param assignments are considered local: they mask any global identical names, until the .ends line is encountered. You cannot reassign to a global number inside a .subckt, a local copy is created instead. Scope nesting works up to a level of 10. For example, if the main circuit calls A which has a formal parameter xx, A calls B which has a param. xx, and B calls C which also has a formal param. xx, there will be three versions of ’xx’ in the symbol table but only the most local one - belonging to C - is visible.

A word of caution: Ngspice allows to define circuits with nested subcircuits. Currently it is not possible however to issue .param statements inside of a .subckt ... .ends section, when there are additional, nested .subckt ... .ends in the same section. This is a bug, which will be removed asap.

2.8.5 Syntax of expressions

<expr> ( optional parts within [ ...] ):

An expression may be one of:

 
<atom> where <atom> is either a spice number or an identifier 
<unary-operator> <atom> 
<function-name> ( <expr> [ , <expr> ...] ) 
<atom> <binary-operator> <expr> 
( <expr> )

As expected, atoms, built-in function calls and stuff within parentheses are evaluated before the other operators. The operators are evaluated following a list of precedence close to the one of the C language. For equal precedence binary ops, evaluation goes left to right. Functions operate on real values only!





Operator Alias Precedence Description








- 1 unary -




! 1 unary not




** ^ 2 power, like pwr




* 3 multiply




/ 3 divide




% 3 modulo




\ 3 integer divide




+ 4 add




- 4 subtract




== 5 equality




!= <> 5 non-equal




<= 5 less or equal




>= 5 greater or equal




< 5 less than




> 5 greater than




&& 6 boolean and




|| 7 boolean or




c?x:y 8 ternary operator




The number zero is used to represent boolean False. Any other number represents boolean True. The result of logical operators is 1 or 0. An example input file is shown below:

Example input file with logical operators:

* Logical operators 
 
v1or   1 0  {1 || 0} 
v1and  2 0  {1 && 0} 
v1not  3 0  {! 1} 
v1mod  4 0  {5 % 3} 
v1div  5 0  {5 \ 3} 
v0not  6 0  {! 0} 
 
.control 
op 
print allv 
.endc 
 
.end


Built-in function

Notes





sqr(x)

y = x * x



sqrt(x)

y = sqrt(x)



sin(x), cos(x), tan(x)



sinh(x), cosh(x), tanh(x)



asin(x), acos(x), atan(x)



asinh(x), acosh(x), atanh(x)



arctan(x)

atan(x), kept for compatibility



exp(x)



ln(x), log(x)



abs(x)



nint(x)

Nearest integer, half integers towards even



int(x)

Nearest integer rounded towards 0



floor(x)

Nearest integer rounded towards -



ceil(x)

Nearest integer rounded towards +



pow(x,y)

x raised to the power of y (pow from C runtime library)



pwr(x,y)

pow(fabs(x), y)



min(x, y)



max(x, y)



sgn(x)

1.0 for x > 0, 0.0 for x == 0, -1.0 for x < 0



ternary_fcn(x, y, z)

x ? y : z



gauss(nom, rvar, sigma)

nominal value plus variation drawn from Gaussian distribution with mean 0 and standard deviation rvar (relative to nominal), divided by sigma



agauss(nom, avar, sigma)

nominal value plus variation drawn from Gaussian distribution with mean 0 and standard deviation avar (absolute), divided by sigma



unif(nom, rvar)

nominal value plus relative variation (to nominal) uniformly distributed between +/-rvar



aunif(nom, avar)

nominal value plus absolute variation uniformly distributed between +/-avar



limit(nom, avar)

nominal value +/-avar, depending on random number in [-1, 1[ being > 0 or < 0



The scaling suffixes (any decorative alphanumeric string may follow):



suffix value




g 1e9


meg 1e6


k 1e3


m 1e-3


u 1e-6


n 1e-9


p 1e-12


f 1e-15


Note: there are intentional redundancies in expression syntax, e.g. x^y , x**y and pwr(x,y) all have nearly the same result.

2.8.6 Reserved words

In addition to the above function names and to the verbose operators ( not and or div mod ), other words are reserved and cannot be used as parameter names: and, or, not, div, mod, defined, sqr, sqrt, sin, cos, exp, ln, arctan, abs, pwr, time, temper, hertz.

2.8.7 Alternative syntax

The & sign is tolerated to provide some “historical” parameter notation: & as the first character of a line is equivalent to: .param.

Inside a line, the notation &(....) is equivalent to {....}, and &identifier means the same thing as {identifier} .

Comments in the style of C++ line trailers (//) are detected and erased.

Warning: this is NOT possible in embedded .control parts of a source file, these lines are outside of this scope.

Now, there is some possible confusion in ngspice because of multiple numerical expression features. The .param lines and the braces expressions (see next chapter 2.9) are evaluated in the front-end, that is, just after the subcircuit expansion. (Technically, the X lines are kept as comments in the expanded circuit so that the actual parameters can correctly be substituted). So, after the netlist expansion and before the internal data setup, all number attributes in the circuit are known constants. However, there are some circuit elements in Spice which accept arithmetic expressions that are NOT evaluated at this point, but only later during circuit analysis. These are the arbitrary current and voltage sources (B-sources, 5), as well as E- and G-sources and R-, L-, or C-devices. The syntactic difference is that "compile-time" expressions are within braces, but "run-time" expressions have no braces. To make things more complicated, the back-end ngspice scripting language also accepts arithmetic/logic expressions that operate on its own scalar or vector data sets (17.2). Please see also chapt. 2.13.

It would be desirable to have the same expression syntax, operator and function set, and precedence rules, for the three contexts mentioned above. In the current Numparam implementation, that goal is not yet achieved...

2.9 .FUNC

With this line a function may be defined. The syntax of its expression is equivalent to the expression syntax from the .param line (2.8.5).

General form:

.func <ident> { <expr> }

Examples:

.func icos(x) {cos(x) - 1} 
.func f(x,y) {x*y}

.func will initiate a replacement operation. After reading the input files, and before parameters are evaluated, all occurrences of the icos(x) function will be replaced by cos(x)-1. All occurrences of f(x,y) will be replaced by x*y. Function statements may be nested to a depth of t.b.d..

2.10 .CSPARAM

Create a constant vector (see 17.8.2) from a parameter in plot (17.3) “const”.

General form:

.csparam <ident> = <expr>

Examples:

.param pippo=5 
.param pp=6 
.csparam pippp={pippo + pp} 
.param p={pp} 
.csparam pap=’pp+p’

In the example shown, vectors pippp, and pap are added to the constants, which already reside in plot “const”, with length one and real values. These vectors are generated during circuit parsing and thus cannot be changed later (same as with ordinary parameters). They may be used in ngspice scripts and .control sections (see chapt. 17).

The use of .csparam is still experimental and has to be tested. A simple usage is shown below.

* test csparam

.param TEMPS = 27

.csparam newt = {3*TEMPS} 

.csparam mytemp = ’2 + TEMPS’

.control

echo $&newt $&mytemp

.endc

.end 

2.11 .TEMP

Sets the circuit temperature in degrees Celsius.

General form:

.temp value

Examples:

.temp 27

This card overrides the circuit temperature given in an .option line (15.1.1).

2.12 .IF Condition-Controlled Netlist

A simple IF-ELSE block allows condition-controlling of the netlist. boolean expression is any expression according to chapt. 2.8.5 which evaluates parameters and returns a boolean 1 or 0. The netlist block in between the .if ... .endif statements may contain device instances or .model cards which are selected according to the logic condition.

General form:

.if(boolean expression) 
... 
.elseif(boolean expression) 
... 
.endif

Example 1:

* device instance in IF-ELSE block 
.param ok=0 ok2=1 
 
v1 1 0 1 
R1 1 0 2 
 
.if (ok && ok2) 
R11 1 0 2 
.else 
R11 1 0 0.5   ; <-- selected 
.endif

Example 2:

* .model in IF-ELSE block 
.param m0=0 m1=1 
 
M1 1 2 3 4 N1 W=1 L=0.5 
 
.if(m0==1) 
.model N1 NMOS level=49 Version=3.1 
.elseif(m1==1) 
.model N1 NMOS level=49 Version=3.2.4  ; <-- selected 
.else 
.model N1 NMOS level=49 Version=3.3.0 
.endif

For now this is a very restricted version of an IF-ELSE block, so several netlist components are currently not supported within the IF-ELSE block: .SUBCKT, .INC, .LIB, .PARAM. Nesting of IF-ELSE blocks is not possible. Only one .elseif is allowed per block.

2.13 Parameters, functions, expressions, and command scripts

In ngspice there are several ways to describe functional dependencies. In fact there are three independent function parsers, being active before, during, and after the simulation. So it might be due to have a few words on their interdependence.

2.13.1 Parameters

Parameters (chapt. 2.8.1) and functions, either defined within the .param statement or with the .func statement (chapt. 2.9) are evaluated before any simulation is started, that is during the setup of the input and the circuit. Therefore these statements may not contain any simulation output (voltage or current vectors), because it is simply not yet available. The syntax is described in chapt. 2.8.5. During the circuit setup all functions are evaluated, all parameters are replaced by their resulting numerical values. Thus it will not be possible to get feedback from a later stage (during or after simulation) to change any of the parameters.

2.13.2 Nonlinear sources

During the simulation, the B source (chapt. 5) and their associated E and G sources, as well as some devices (R, C, L) may contain expressions. These expressions may contain parameters from above (evaluated immediately upon ngspice start up), numerical data, predefined functions, but also node voltages and branch currents which are resulting from the simulation. The source or device values are continuously updated during the simulation. Therefore the sources are powerful tools to define non-linear behavior, you may even create new ’devices’ by yourself. Unfortunately the expression syntax (see chapt. 5.1) and the predefined functions may deviate from the ones for parameters listed in 2.8.1.

2.13.3 Control commands, Command scripts

Commands, as described in detail in chapt. 17.5, may be used interactively, but also as a command script enclosed in .control ... .endc lines. The scripts may contain expressions (see chapt. 17.2). The expressions may work upon simulation output vectors (of node voltages, branch currents), as well as upon predefined or user defined vectors and variables, and are invoked after the simulation. Parameters from 2.8.1 defined by the .param statement are not allowed in these expressions. However you may define such parameters with .csparam (2.10). Again the expression syntax (see chapt. 17.2) will deviate from the one for parameters or B sources listed in 2.8.1 and 5.1.

If you want to use parameters from 2.8.1 inside your control script, you may use .csparam (2.10) or apply a trick by defining a voltage source with the parameter as its value, and then have it available as a vector (e.g. after a transient simulation) with a then constant output (the parameter). A feedback from here back into parameters (2.13.1) is never possible. Also you cannot access non-linear sources of the preceding simulation. However you may start a first simulation inside your control script, then evaluate its output using expressions, change some of the element or model parameters with the alter and altermod statements (see chapt. 17.5.3) and then automatically start a new simulation.

Expressions and scripting are powerful tools within ngspice, and we will enhance the examples given in chapt. 21 continuously to describe these features.

Chapter 3
Circuit Elements and Models

Data fields that are enclosed in less-than and greater-than signs (’< >’) are optional. All indicated punctuation (parentheses, equal signs, etc.) is optional but indicate the presence of any delimiter. Further, future implementations may require the punctuation as stated. A consistent style adhering to the punctuation shown here makes the input easier to understand. With respect to branch voltages and currents, ngspice uniformly uses the associated reference convention (current flows in the direction of voltage drop).

3.1 General options and information

3.1.1 Simulating more devices in parallel

If you need to simulate more devices of the same kind in parallel, you can use the “m” (often called parallel multiplier) option which is available for all instances except transmission lines and sources (both independent and controlled). The parallel multiplier is implemented by multiplying the value of m the element’s matrix stamp, thus it cannot be used to accurately simulate larger devices in integrated circuits. The netlist below show how to correctly use the parallel multiplier:

Multiple device example:

d1 2 0 mydiode m=10 
d01 1 0 mydiode 
d02 1 0 mydiode 
d03 1 0 mydiode 
d04 1 0 mydiode 
d05 1 0 mydiode 
d06 1 0 mydiode 
d07 1 0 mydiode 
d08 1 0 mydiode 
d09 1 0 mydiode 
d10 1 0 mydiode 
...

The d1 instance connected between nodes 2 and 0 is equivalent to the parallel d01-d10 connected between 1 and 0.

3.1.2 Technology scaling

Still to be implemented and written.

3.1.3 Model binning

Binning is a kind of range partitioning for geometry dependent models like MOSFET’s. The purpose is to cover larger geometry ranges (Width and Length) with higher accuracy then the model built-in geometry formulas. Each size range described by the additional model parameters LMIN, LMAX, WMIN and WMAX has its own model parameter set. These model cards are defined by a number extension, like “nch.1”. NGSPICE has a algorithm to choose the right model card by the requested W and L.

This is implemented for BSIM3 (11.2.9) and BSIM4 (11.2.10) models.

3.1.4 Multiplier m, initial conditions

The area factor “m” (often called parallel multiplier) used on the diode, BJT, JFET, and MESFET devices determines the number of equivalent parallel devices of a specified model. The affected parameters are marked with an asterisk under the heading “area” in the model descriptions (see the various chapters on models below). Several geometric factors associated with the channel and the drain and source diffusions can be specified on the MOSFET device line.

Two different forms of initial conditions may be specified for some devices. The first form is included to improve the dc convergence for circuits that contain more than one stable state. If a device is specified OFF, the dc operating point is determined with the terminal voltages for that device set to zero. After convergence is obtained, the program continues to iterate to obtain the exact value for the terminal voltages. If a circuit has more than one dc stable state, the OFF option can be used to force the solution to correspond to a desired state. If a device is specified OFF when in reality the device is conducting, the program still obtains the correct solution (assuming the solutions converge) but more iterations are required since the program must independently converge to two separate solutions.

The .NODESET control line (see chapt. 15.2.1) serves a similar purpose as the OFF option. The .NODESET option is easier to apply and is the preferred means to aid convergence. The second form of initial conditions are specified for use with the transient analysis. These are true “initial conditions” as opposed to the convergence aids above. See the description of the .IC control line (chapt. 15.2.2) and the .TRAN control line (chapt. 15.3.9) for a detailed explanation of initial conditions.

3.2 Elementary Devices

3.2.1 Resistors

General form:

RXXXXXXX n+ n- value <ac=val> <m=val> <scale=val> <temp=val> 
+ <dtemp=val> <tc1=val> <tc2=val> <noisy=0|1>

Examples:

R1 1 2 100 
RC1 12 17 1K 
R2 5 7 1K ac=2K 
RL 1 4 2K m=2

Ngspice has a fairly complex model for resistors. It can simulate both discrete and semiconductor resistors. Semiconductor resistors in ngspice means: resistors described by geometrical parameters. So, do not expect detailed modeling of semiconductor effects.

n+ and n- are the two element nodes, value is the resistance (in ohms) and may be positive or negative1 but not zero.

Simulating small valued resistors: If you need to simulate very small resistors (0.001 Ohm or less), you should use CCVS (transresistance), it is less efficient but improves overall numerical accuracy. Think about that a small resistance is a large conductance.

Ngspice can assign a resistor instance a different value for AC analysis, specified using the ac keyword. This value must not be zero as described above. The AC resistance is used in AC analysis only (not Pole-Zero nor noise). If you do not specify the ac parameter, it is defaulted to value. If you want to simulate temperature dependence of a resistor, you need to specify its temperature coefficients, using a .model line, like in the example below:

Example:

RE1 1 2 800 newres dtemp=5 
 
.MODEL newres R tc1=0.001

The temperature coefficients tc1 and tc2 describe a quadratic temperature dependence (see equation17.12) of the resistance. If given in the instance line (the R... line) their values will override the tc1 and tc2 of the .model line (3.2.3). Instance temperature is useful even if resistance does not vary with it, since the thermal noise generated by a resistor depends on its absolute temperature. Resistors in ngspice generates two different noises: thermal and flicker. While thermal noise is always generated in the resistor, to add a flicker noise2 source you have to add a .model card defining the flicker noise parameters. It is possible to simulate resistors that do not generate any kind of noise using the noisy keyword and assigning zero to it, as in the following example:

Example:

Rmd 134 57 1.5k noisy=0

Ngspice calculates the nominal resistance as described below:

          VALU-E*scale
 Rnom =        m
Racnom =    ac*scmale
(3.1)

If you are interested in temperature effects or noise equations, read the next section on semiconductor resistors.

3.2.2 Semiconductor Resistors

General form:

RXXXXXXX n+ n- <value> <mname> <l=length> <w=width> <temp=val> 
+ <dtemp=val> <m=val> <ac=val> <scale=val> <noisy = 0|1>

Examples:

RLOAD 2 10 10K 
RMOD 3 7 RMODEL L=10u W=1u

This is the more general form of the resistor presented before (3.2.1) and allows the modeling of temperature effects and for the calculation of the actual resistance value from strictly geometric information and the specifications of the process. If value is specified, it overrides the geometric information and defines the resistance. If mname is specified, then the resistance may be calculated from the process information in the model mname and the given length and width. If value is not specified, then mname and length must be specified. If width is not specified, then it is taken from the default width given in the model.

The (optional) temp value is the temperature at which this device is to operate, and overrides the temperature specification on the .option control line and the value specified in dtemp.

3.2.3 Semiconductor Resistor Model (R)

The resistor model consists of process-related device data that allow the resistance to be calculated from geometric information and to be corrected for temperature. The parameters available are:






Name Parameter Units Default Example










TC1 first order temperature coeff. ΩC 0.0 -





TC2 second order temperature coeff. ΩC2 0.0 -





RSH sheet resistance Ω - 50





DEFW default width m 1e-6 2e-6





NARROW narrowing due to side etching m 0.0 1e-7





SHORT shortening due to side etching m 0.0 1e-7





TNOM parameter measurement temperature C 27 50





KF flicker noise coefficient 0.0 1e-25





AF flicker noise exponent 0.0 1.0





R (RES) default value if element value not given Ω - 1000





The sheet resistance is used with the narrowing parameter and l and w from the resistor device to determine the nominal resistance by the formula:

R    = rsh -l--SH-ORT----
  nom       w-  NARROW
(3.2)

DEFW is used to supply a default value for w if one is not specified for the device. If either rsh or l is not specified, then the standard default resistance value of 1 mOhm is used. TNOM is used to override the circuit-wide value given on the .options control line where the parameters of this model have been measured at a different temperature. After the nominal resistance is calculated, it is adjusted for temperature by the formula:

                                                         2
R(T) = R(T NOM  )(1+  TC1(T - T NOM  )+ T C2(T - T NOM  ) )
(3.3)

where R(T NOM) = Rnom|Racnom. In the above formula, “T ” represents the instance temperature, which can be explicitly set using the temp keyword or calculated using the circuit temperature and dtemp, if present. If both temp and dtemp are specified, the latter is ignored. Ngspice improves spice’s resistors noise model, adding flicker noise (1f) to it and the noisy keyword to simulate noiseless resistors. The thermal noise in resistors is modeled according to the equation:

 ˉ2   4kT-
iR =  R  Δf
(3.4)

where "k" is the Boltzmann’s constant, and "T " the instance temperature.

Flicker noise model is:

       KF IAF
i2Rˉfn = ----R-Δf
         f
(3.5)

A small list of sheet resistances (in Ω) for conductors is shown below. The table represents typical values for MOS processes in the 0.5 - 1 um

range. The table is taken from: N. Weste, K. Eshraghian - Principles of CMOS VLSI Design 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley.





Material Min. Typ. Max.








Inter-metal (metal1 - metal2) 0.005 0.007 0.1




Top-metal (metal3) 0.003 0.004 0.05




Polysilicon (poly) 15 20 30




Silicide 2 3 6




Diffusion (n+, p+) 10 25 100




Silicided diffusion 2 4 10




n-well 1000 2000 5000




3.2.4 Resistors, dependent on expressions (behavioral resistor)

General form:

RXXXXXXX n+ n- R = ’expression’ <tc1=value> <tc2=value> 
RXXXXXXX n+ n- ’expression’ <tc1=value> <tc2=value>

Examples:

R1 rr 0 r = ’V(rr) < {Vt} ? {R0} : {2*R0}’ tc1=2e-03 tc2=3.3e-06 
R2 r2 rr r = {5k + 50*TEMPER}

Expression may be an equation or an expression containing node voltages or branch currents (in the form of i(vm)) and any other terms as given for the B source and described in chapter 5.1. It may contain parameters (2.8.1) and the special variables time, temper, and hertz (5.1.2). An example file is given below.

Example input file for non-linear resistor:

Non-linear resistor 
.param R0=1k Vi=1 Vt=0.5 
* resistor depending on control voltage V(rr) 
R1 rr 0 r = ’V(rr) < {Vt} ? {R0} : {2*R0}’ 
* control voltage 
V1 rr 0 PWL(0 0 100u {Vi}) 
.control 
set noaskquit 
tran 100n 100u uic 
plot i(V1) 
.endc 
.end

3.2.5 Capacitors

General form:

CXXXXXXX n+ n- <value> <mname> <m=val> <scale=val> <temp=val> 
+ <dtemp=val> <tc1=val> <tc2=val> <ic=init_condition>

Examples:

CBYP 13 0 1UF 
COSC 17 23 10U IC=3V

Ngspice provides a detailed model for capacitors. Capacitors in the netlist can be specified giving their capacitance or their geometrical and physical characteristics. Following the original SPICE3 "convention", capacitors specified by their geometrical or physical characteristics are called "semiconductor capacitors" and are described in the next section.

In this first form n+ and n- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively and value is the capacitance in Farads.

Capacitance can be specified in the instance line as in the examples above or in a .model line, as in the example below:

C1 15 5 cstd 
C2 2 7 cstd 
.model cstd C cap=3n

Both capacitors have a capacitance of 3nF.

If you want to simulate temperature dependence of a capacitor, you need to specify its temperature coefficients, using a .model line, like in the example below:

CEB 1 2 1u cap1 dtemp=5 
.MODEL cap1 C tc1=0.001

The (optional) initial condition is the initial (time zero) value of capacitor voltage (in Volts). Note that the initial conditions (if any) apply only if the uic option is specified on the .tran control line.

Ngspice calculates the nominal capacitance as described below:

Cnom = value *scale* m
(3.6)

The temperature coefficients tc1 and tc2 describe a quadratic temperature dependence (see equation17.12) of the capacitance. If given in the instance line (the C... line) their values will override the tc1 and tc2 of the .model line (3.2.7).

3.2.6 Semiconductor Capacitors

General form:

CXXXXXXX n+ n- <value> <mname> <l=length> <w=width> <m=val> 
+ <scale=val> <temp=val> <dtemp=val> <ic=init_condition>

Examples:

CLOAD 2 10 10P 
CMOD 3 7 CMODEL L=10u W=1u

This is the more general form of the Capacitor presented in section (3.2.5), and allows for the calculation of the actual capacitance value from strictly geometric information and the specifications of the process. If value is specified, it defines the capacitance and both process and geometrical information are discarded. If value is not specified, the capacitance is calculated from information contained model mname and the given length and width (l, w keywords, respectively).

It is possible to specify mname only, without geometrical dimensions and set the capacitance in the .model line (3.2.5).

3.2.7 Semiconductor Capacitor Model (C)

The capacitor model contains process information that may be used to compute the capacitance from strictly geometric information.






Name Parameter Units Default Example










CAP model capacitance F 0.0 1e-6





CJ junction bottom capacitance Fm2 - 5e-5





CJSW junction sidewall capacitance Fm - 2e-11





DEFW default device width m 1e-6 2e-6





DEFL default device length m 0.0 1e-6










NARROW narrowing due to side etching m 0.0 1e-7










SHORT shortening due to side etching m 0.0 1e-7










TC1 first order temperature coeff. FC 0.0 0.001










TC2 second order temperature coeff. FC2 0.0 0.0001










TNOM parameter measurement temperature C 27 50










DI relative dielectric constant Fm - 1










THICK insulator thickness m 0.0 1e-9





The capacitor has a capacitance computed as:

If value is specified on the instance line then

Cnom = value *scale* m
(3.7)

If model capacitance is specified then

Cnom =  CAP * scale *m
(3.8)

If neither value nor CAP are specified, then geometrical and physical parameters are take into account:

C0 = CJ(l-  SH ORT )(w - NARROW   )+ 2CJSW  (l- SH ORT  + w - NARROW    )
(3.9)

CJ can be explicitly given on the .model line or calculated by physical parameters. When CJ is not given, is calculated as:

If THICK is not zero:

     -DI*ϵ0-
CJ = THϵISiCOK   ifDIisspecified,
CJ = THIC2K-    otherwise.
(3.10)

If the relative dielectric constant is not specified the one for SiO2 is used. The values of the constants are: ϵ0 = 8.854214871e-12F-
m and ϵSiO2 = 3.4531479969e-11F-
m. The nominal capacitance is then computed as:

Cnom =  C0* scale *m
(3.11)

After the nominal capacitance is calculated, it is adjusted for temperature by the formula:

                                                         2
C(T) = C (T NOM  )(1 + TC1 (T - T NOM  )+  TC2(T - T NOM  ) )
(3.12)

where C(T NOM) = Cnom.

In the above formula, “T ” represents the instance temperature, which can be explicitly set using the temp keyword or calculated using the circuit temperature and dtemp, if present.

3.2.8 Capacitors, dependent on expressions (behavioral capacitor)

General form:

CXXXXXXX n+ n- C = ’expression’ <tc1=value> <tc2=value> 
CXXXXXXX n+ n- ’expression’ <tc1=value> <tc2=value>

Examples:

C1 cc 0 c = ’V(cc) < {Vt} ? {C1} : {Ch}’ tc1=-1e-03 tc2=1.3e-05

Expression may be an equation or an expression containing node voltages or branch currents (in the form of i(vm)) and any other terms as given for the B source and described in chapter 5.1. It may contain parameters (2.8.1) and the special variables time, temper, and hertz (5.1.2).

Example input file:

Behavioral Capacitor 
.param Cl=5n Ch=1n Vt=1m Il=100n 
.ic v(cc) = 0    v(cc2) = 0 
* capacitor depending on control voltage V(cc) 
C1 cc 0 c = ’V(cc) < {Vt} ? {Cl} : {Ch}’ 
*C1 cc 0 c ={Ch} 
I1 0 1 {Il} 
Exxx  n1-copy n2  n2 cc2  1 
Cxxx  n1-copy n2  1 
Bxxx  cc2 n2  I = ’(V(cc2) < {Vt} ? {Cl} : {Ch})’ * i(Exxx) 
I2 n2 22 {Il} 
vn2 n2 0 DC 0 
* measure charge by integrating current 
aint1 %id(1 cc) 2 time_count 
aint2 %id(22 cc2) 3 time_count 
.model time_count int(in_offset=0.0 gain=1.0 
+ out_lower_limit=-1e12 out_upper_limit=1e12 
+ limit_range=1e-9 out_ic=0.0) 
.control 
set noaskquit 
tran 100n 100u 
plot v(2) 
plot v(cc) v(cc2) 
.endc 
.end

3.2.9 Inductors

General form:

LYYYYYYY n+ n- <value> <mname> <nt=val> <m=val> <scale=val> <temp=val> 
+ <dtemp=val> <tc1=val> <tc2=val> <m=val> <ic=init_condition>

Examples:

LLINK 42 69 1UH 
LSHUNT 23 51 10U IC=15.7MA

The inductor device implemented into ngspice has many enhancements over the original one.n+ and n- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. value is the inductance in Henry. Inductance can be specified in the instance line as in the examples above or in a .model line, as in the example below:

L1 15 5 indmod1 
L2 2 7 indmod1 
.model indmod1 L ind=3n

Both inductors have an inductance of 3nH.

The nt is used in conjunction with a .model line, and is used to specify the number of turns of the inductor. If you want to simulate temperature dependence of an inductor, you need to specify its temperature coefficients, using a .model line, like in the example below:

Lload 1 2 1u ind1 dtemp=5 
.MODEL ind1 L tc1=0.001

The (optional) initial condition is the initial (time zero) value of inductor current (in Amps) that flows from n+, through the inductor, to n-. Note that the initial conditions (if any) apply only if the UIC option is specified on the .tran analysis line.

Ngspice calculates the nominal inductance as described below:

       value* scale
Lnom = -----m------
(3.13)

3.2.10 Inductor model

The inductor model contains physical and geometrical information that may be used to compute the inductance of some common topologies like solenoids and toroids, wound in air or other material with constant magnetic permeability.






Name Parameter Units Default Example










IND model inductance H 0.0 1e-3





CSECT cross section m2 0.0 1e-3





LENGTH length m 0.0 1e-2





TC1 first order temperature coeff. HC 0.0 0.001





TC2 second order temperature coeff. HC2 0.0 0.0001





TNOM parameter measurement temperature C 27 50





NT number of turns - 0.0 10





MU relative magnetic permeability Hm 0.0 -





The inductor has an inductance computed as:

If value is specified on the instance line then

       value*-scale
Lnom =      m
(3.14)

If model inductance is specified then

       IND  *scale
Lnom = -----------
            m
(3.15)

If neither value nor IND are specified, then geometrical and physical parameters are take into account. In the following formulas

NT refers to both instance and model parameter (instance parameter overrides model parameter):

If LENGTH is not zero:

{                 2
 Lnom =  MU-*μ0*NT-*CSECT-  ifMU  isspecified,
         μ0*NTLE2N*CGSTECHT--
 Lnom =    LENGT H         otherwise.
(3.16)

with:μ0 = 1.25663706143592e-6H-
m. After the nominal inductance is calculated, it is adjusted for temperature by the formula:

L(T) = L(T NOM  )(1+ T C1(T - T NOM  )+ T C2(T - T NOM  )2)
(3.17)

where L(T NOM) = Lnom. In the above formula, “T ” represents the instance temperature, which can be explicitly using the temp keyword or calculated using the circuit temperature and dtemp, if present.

3.2.11 Coupled (Mutual) Inductors

General form:

KXXXXXXX LYYYYYYY LZZZZZZZ value

Examples:

K43 LAA LBB 0.999 
KXFRMR L1 L2 0.87

LYYYYYYY and LZZZZZZZ are the names of the two coupled inductors, and value is the coefficient of coupling, K, which must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1. Using the “dot” convention, place a “dot” on the first node of each inductor.

3.2.12 Inductors, dependent on expressions (behavioral inductor)

General form:

LXXXXXXX n+ n- L = ’expression’ <tc1=value> <tc2=value> 
LXXXXXXX n+ n- ’expression’ <tc1=value> <tc2=value>

Examples:

L1 l2 lll L = ’i(Vm) < {It} ? {Ll} : {Lh}’ tc1=-4e-03 tc2=6e-05

Expression may be an equation or an expression containing node voltages or branch currents (in the form of i(vm)) and any other terms as given for the B source and described in chapter 5.1. It may contain parameters (2.8.1) and the special variables time, temper, and hertz (5.1.2).

Example input file:

Variable inductor 
.param Ll=0.5m Lh=5m It=50u Vi=2m 
.ic v(int21) = 0 
 
* variable inductor depending on control current i(Vm) 
L1 l2 lll L = ’i(Vm) < {It} ? {Ll} : {Lh}’ 
* measure current through inductor 
vm lll 0 dc 0 
* voltage on inductor 
V1 l2 0 {Vi} 
 
* fixed inductor 
L3 33 331 {Ll} 
* measure current through inductor 
vm33 331 0 dc 0 
* voltage on inductor 
V3 33 0 {Vi} 
 
* non linear inductor (discrete setup) 
F21 int21 0 B21 -
L21 int21 0 1 
B21 n1 n2 V = ’(i(Vm21) < {It} ? {Ll} : {Lh})’ * v(int21) 
* measure current through inductor 
vm21 n2 0 dc 0 
V21 n1 0 {Vi} 
 
.control 
set noaskquit 
tran 1u 100u uic 
plot i(Vm) i(vm33) 
plot i(vm21) i(vm33) 
plot i(vm)-i(vm21) 
.endc 
.end

3.2.13 Capacitor or inductor with initial conditions

The simulator supports the specification of voltage and current initial conditions on capacitor and inductor models, respectively. These models are not the standard ones supplied with SPICE3, but are in fact code models which can be substituted for the SPICE models when realistic initial conditions are required. For details please refer to chapt. 12. A XSPICE deck example using these models is shown below:

* 

* This circuit contains a capacitor and an inductor with 

* initial conditions on them. Each of the components 

* has a parallel resistor so that an exponential decay 

* of the initial condition occurs with a time constant of 

* 1 second. 

*

a1 1 0 cap 

.model cap capacitor (c=1000uf ic=1) 

r1 1 0 1k 

*

a2 2 0 ind 

.model ind inductor (l=1H ic=1) 

r2 2 0 1.0 

*

.control

tran 0.01 3

plot v(1) v(2)

.endc

.end

3.2.14 Switches

Two types of switches are available: a voltage controlled switch (type SXXXXXX, model SW) and a current controlled switch (type WXXXXXXX, model CSW). A switching hysteresis may be defined, as well as on- and off-resistances (0 < R < ).

General form:

SXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- MODEL <ON><OFF> 
WYYYYYYY N+ N- VNAM MODEL <ON><OFF>

Examples:

s1 1 2 3 4 switch1 ON 
s2 5 6 3 0 sm2 off 
Switch1 1 2 10 0 smodel1 
w1 1 2 vclock switchmod1 
W2 3 0 vramp sm1 ON 
wreset 5 6 vclck lossyswitch OFF

Nodes 1 and 2 are the nodes between which the switch terminals are connected. The model name is mandatory while the initial conditions are optional. For the voltage controlled switch, nodes 3 and 4 are the positive and negative controlling nodes respectively. For the current controlled switch, the controlling current is that through the specified voltage source. The direction of positive controlling current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node.

The instance parameters ON or OFF are required, when the controlling voltage (current) starts inside the range of the hysteresis loop (different outputs during forward vs. backward voltage or current ramp). Then ON or OFF determine the initial state of the switch.

3.2.15 Switch Model (SW/CSW)

The switch model allows an almost ideal switch to be described in ngspice. The switch is not quite ideal, in that the resistance can not change from 0 to infinity, but must always have a finite positive value. By proper selection of the on and off resistances, they can be effectively zero and infinity in comparison to other circuit elements. The parameters available are:






Name Parameter Units

Default

Switch model










VT threshold voltage V

0.0

SW





IT threshold current A

0.0

CSW





VH hysteresis voltage V

0.0

SW





IH hysteresis current A

0.0

CSW





RON on resistance Ω

1.0

SW,CSW





ROFF off resistance Ω

1.0e+12 (*)

SW,CSW





(*) Or 1∕GMIN, if you have set GMIN to any other value, see the .OPTIONS control line (15.1.2) for a description of GMIN, its default value results in an off-resistance of 1.0e+12 ohms.

The use of an ideal element that is highly nonlinear such as a switch can cause large discontinuities to occur in the circuit node voltages. A rapid change such as that associated with a switch changing state can cause numerical round-off or tolerance problems leading to erroneous results or time step difficulties. The user of switches can improve the situation by taking the following steps:

Example input file:

Switch test 
.tran 2us 5ms 
*switch control voltage 
v1 1 0 DC 0.0 PWL(0 0 2e-3 2 4e-3 0) 
*switch control voltage starting inside hysteresis window 
*please note influence of instance parameters ON, OFF 
v2 2 0 DC 0.0 PWL(0 0.9 2e-3 2 4e-3 0.4) 
*switch control current 
i3 3 0 DC 0.0 PWL(0 0 2e-3 2m 4e-3 0) $ <--- switch control current 
*load voltage 
v4 4 0 DC 2.0 
*input load for current source i3 
r3 3 33 10k 
vm3 33 0 dc 0 $ <--- measure the current 
* ouput load resistors 
r10 4 10 10k 
r20 4 20 10k 
r30 4 30 10k 
r40 4 40 10k 
* 
s1 10 0 1 0 switch1 OFF 
s2 20 0 2 0 switch1 OFF 
s3 30 0 2 0 switch1 ON 
.model switch1 sw vt=1 vh=0.2 ron=1 roff=10k 
* 
w1 40 0 vm3 wswitch1 off 
.model wswitch1 csw  it=1m ih=0.2m ron=1 roff=10k 
* 
.control 
run 
plot v(1) v(10) 
plot v(10) vs v(1) $ <-- get hysteresis loop 
plot v(2) v(20) $ <--- different initial values 
plot v(20) vs v(2) $ <-- get hysteresis loop 
plot v(2) v(30) $ <--- different initial values 
plot v(30) vs v(2) $ <-- get hysteresis loop 
plot v(40) vs vm3#branch $ <--- current controlled switch hysteresis 
.endc 
.end

Chapter 4
Voltage and Current Sources

4.1 Independent Sources for Voltage or Current

General form:

VXXXXXXX N+ N- <<DC> DC/TRAN VALUE> <AC <ACMAG <ACPHASE>>> 
+ <DISTOF1 <F1MAG <F1PHASE>>> <DISTOF2 <F2MAG <F2PHASE>>> 
IYYYYYYY N+ N- <<DC> DC/TRAN VALUE> <AC <ACMAG <ACPHASE>>> 
+ <DISTOF1 <F1MAG <F1PHASE>>> <DISTOF2 <F2MAG <F2PHASE>>>

Examples:

VCC 10 0 DC 6 
VIN 13 2 0.001 AC 1 SIN(0 1 1MEG) 
ISRC 23 21 AC 0.333 45.0 SFFM(0 1 10K 5 1K) 
VMEAS 12 9 
VCARRIER 1 0 DISTOF1 0.1 -90.0 
VMODULATOR 2 0 DISTOF2 0.01 
IIN1 1 5 AC 1 DISTOF1 DISTOF2 0.001

n+ and n- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Note that voltage sources need not be grounded. Positive current is assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. A current source of positive value forces current to flow out of the n+ node, through the source, and into the n- node. Voltage sources, in addition to being used for circuit excitation, are the “ammeters” for ngspice, that is, zero valued voltage sources may be inserted into the circuit for the purpose of measuring current. They of course have no effect on circuit operation since they represent short-circuits.

DC/TRAN is the dc and transient analysis value of the source. If the source value is zero both for dc and transient analyses, this value may be omitted. If the source value is time-invariant (e.g., a power supply), then the value may optionally be preceded by the letters DC.

ACMAG is the ac magnitude and ACPHASE is the ac phase. The source is set to this value in the ac analysis. If ACMAG is omitted following the keyword AC, a value of unity is assumed. If ACPHASE is omitted, a value of zero is assumed. If the source is not an ac small-signal input, the keyword AC and the ac values are omitted.

DISTOF1 and DISTOF2 are the keywords that specify that the independent source has distortion inputs at the frequencies F1 and F2 respectively (see the description of the .DISTO control line). The keywords may be followed by an optional magnitude and phase. The default values of the magnitude and phase are 1.0 and 0.0 respectively.

Any independent source can be assigned a time-dependent value for transient analysis. If a source is assigned a time-dependent value, the time-zero value is used for dc analysis. There are nine independent source functions:

If parameters other than source values are omitted or set to zero, the default values shown are assumed. (TSTEP is the printing increment and TSTOP is the final time (see the .TRAN control line for explanation)).

4.1.1 Pulse

General form:

PULSE(V1 V2 TD TR TF PW PER)

Examples:

VIN 3 0 PULSE(-1 1 2NS 2NS 2NS 50NS 100NS)




Name Parameter Default Value Units








V1 Initial value - V , A




V2 Pulsed value - V , A




TD Delay time 0.0 sec




TR Rise time TSTEP sec




TF Fall time TSTEP sec




PW Pulse width TSTOP sec




PER Period TSTOP sec




A single pulse so specified is described by the following table:



Time Value




0 V1


TD V1


TD+TR V2


TD+TR+PW V2


TD+TR+PW+TF V1


TSTOP V1


Intermediate points are determined by linear interpolation.

4.1.2 Sinusoidal

General form:

SIN(VO VA FREQ TD THETA)

Examples:

VIN 3 0 SIN(0 1 100MEG 1NS 1E10)




Name Parameter Default Value Units








VO Offset - V , A




VA Amplitude - V , A




FREQ Frequency 1T STOP Hz




TD Delay 0.0 sec




THETA Damping factor 0.0 1sec




The shape of the waveform is described by the following formula:

       {
         V 0                                            if0 ≤ t < T D
V (t) =           - (t-TD )THET A
         V 0+ V Ae             sin(2πF REQ  (t- T D ))   ifT D ≤ t < T ST OP
(4.1)

4.1.3 Exponential

General Form:

EXP(V1 V2 TD1 TAU1 TD2 TAU2)

Examples:

VIN 3 0 EXP(--1 2NS 30NS 60NS 40NS)




Name Parameter Default Value Units








V1 Initial value - V , A




V2 pulsed value - V , A




TD1 rise delay time 0.0 sec




TAU1 rise time constant TSTEP sec




TD2 fall delay time TD1+TSTEP sec




TAU2 fall time constant TSTEP sec




The shape of the waveform is described by the following formula:

Let V 21 = V 2-V 1V 12 = V 1-V 2:

        (
        ||{ V1       (            )                       if0 ≤ t < TD1,
V (t) =   V1 + V21  1 - e- (t-TTADU11)                       ifT D1 ≤  t < T D2,
        ||          (      (t-TD1))       (      (t-TD2))
        ( V1 + V21  1 - e--TAU1- + V 12  1- e- -TAU2-   ifT D2 ≤  t < T STOP.
(4.2)

4.1.4 Piece-Wise Linear

General Form:

PWL(T1 V1 <T2 V2 T3 V3 T4 V4 ...>) <r=value> <td=value>

Examples:

VCLOCK 7 5 PWL(0 -7 10NS -7 11NS -3 17NS -3 18NS -7 50NS -7) r=0 td=15NS

Each pair of values (T i, Vi) specifies that the value of the source is Vi (in Volts or Amps) at time = T i. The value of the source at intermediate values of time is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. The parameter r determines a repeat time point. If r is not given, the whole sequence of values (T i, Vi) is issued once, then the output stays at its final value. If r = 0, the whole sequence from time = 0 to time = Tn is repeated forever. If r = 10ns, the sequence between 10ns and 50ns is repeated forever. the r value has to be one of the time points T1 to Tn of the PWL sequence. If td is given, the whole PWL sequence is delayed by a delay time time = td. The current source still needs to be patched, td and r are not yet available.

4.1.5 Single-Frequency FM

General Form:

SFFM(VO VA FC MDI FS)

Examples:

V1 12 0 SFFM(0 1M 20K 5 1K)




Name Parameter Default value Units








VO Offset - V , A




VA Amplitude - V , A




FC Carrier frequency 1T STOP Hz




MDI Modulation index -




FS Signal frequency 1T STOP Hz




The shape of the waveform is described by the following equation:

V (t) = V + V  sin (2πF Ct+ MDI  sin(2πF St))
         O   A
(4.3)

4.1.6 Amplitude modulated source (AM)

General Form:

AM(VA VO MF FC TD)

Examples:

V1 12 0 AM(0.5 1 20K 5MEG 1m)




Name Parameter Default value Units








VA Amplitude - V , A




VO Offset - V , A




MF Modulating frequency - Hz




FC Carrier frequency 1T STOP Hz




TD Signal delay - s




The shape of the waveform is described by the following equation:

V(t) = VA* (VO + sin(2πMF  t))*sin(2πF Ct )
(4.4)

4.1.7 Transient noise source

General Form:

TRNOISE(NA NT NALPHA NAMP RTSAM RTSCAPT RTSEMT)

Examples:

VNoiw 1 0 DC 0 TRNOISE(20n 0.5n 0 0)      $ white 
VNoi1of 1 0 DC 0 TRNOISE(0 10p 1.1 12p)   $ 1/f 
VNoiw1of 1 0 DC 0 TRNOISE(20 10p 1.1 12p) $ white and 1/f 
IALL 10 0 DC 0 trnoise(1m 1u 1.0 0.1m 15m 22u 50u) $ white, 1/f, RTS

Transient noise is an experimental feature allowing (low frequency) transient noise injection and analysis. See chapter 15.3.10 for a detailed description. NA is the Gaussian noise rms voltage amplitude, NT is the time between sample values (breakpoints will be enforced on multiples of this value). NALPHA (exponent to the frequency dependency), NAMP (rms voltage or current amplitude) are the parameters for 1/f noise, RTSAM the random telegraph signal amplitude, RTSCAPT the mean of the exponential distribution of the trap capture time, and RTSEMT its emission time mean. White Gaussian, 1/f, and RTS noise may be combined into a single statement.





Name Parameter Default value Units








NA Rms noise amplitude (Gaussian) - V , A




NT Time step - sec




NALPHA 1/f exponent 0 < α < 2 -




NAMP Amplitude (1/f) - V , A




RTSAM Amplitude - V , A




RTSCAPT Trap capture time - sec




RTSEMT Trap emission time - sec




If you set NT and RTSAM to 0, the noise option TRNOISE ... is ignored. Thus you may switch off the noise contribution of an individual voltage source VNOI by the command

alter @vnoi[trnoise] = [ 0 0 0 0 ] $ no noise

alter @vrts[trnoise] = [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0] $ no noise

See chapt. 17.5.3 for the alter command.

You may switch off all TRNOISE noise sources by setting

set notrnoise

to your .spiceinit file (for all your simulations) or into your control section in front of the next run or tran command (for this specific and all following simulations). The command

unset notrnoise

will reinstate all noise sources.

The noise generators are implemented into the independent voltage (vsrc) and current (isrc) sources.

4.1.8 Random voltage source

The TRRANDOM option yields statistically distributed voltage values, derived from the ngspice random number generator. These values may be used in the transient simulation directly within a circuit, e.g. for generating a specific noise voltage, but especially they may be used in the control of behavioral sources (B, E, G sources 5, voltage controllable A sources 12, capacitors 3.2.8, inductors 3.2.12, or resistors 3.2.4) to simulate the circuit dependence on statistically varying device parameters. A Monte-Carlo simulation may thus be handled in a single simulation run.

General Form:

TRRANDOM(TYPE TS <TD <PARAM1 <PARAM2>>>)

Examples:

VR1 r1  0 dc 0 trrandom (2 10m 0 1) $ Gaussian

TYPE determines the random variates generated: 1 is uniformly distributed, 2 Gaussian, 3 exponential, 4 Poisson. TS is the duration of an individual voltage value. TD is a time delay with 0 V output before the random voltage values start up. PARAM1 and PARAM2 depend on the type selected.









TYPE description PARAM1 default PARAM2 default
















1 Uniform Range 1 Offset 0








2 Gaussian Standard Dev. 1 Mean 0








3 Exponential Mean 1 Offset 0








4 Poisson Lambda 1 Offset 0








4.1.9 External voltage or current input

General Form:

EXTERNAL

Examples:

Vex 1  0 dc 0 external 
Iex i1 i2 dc 0 external <m = xx>

Voltages or currents may be set from the calling process, if ngspice is compiled as a shared library and loaded by the process. See chapt 19.6.3 for an explanation.

4.1.10 Arbitrary Phase Sources

The XSPICE option supports arbitrary phase independent sources that output at TIME=0.0 a value corresponding to some specified phase shift. Other versions of SPICE use the TD (delay time) parameter to set phase-shifted sources to their time-zero value until the delay time has elapsed. The XSPICE phase parameter is specified in degrees and is included after the SPICE3 parameters normally used to specify an independent source. Partial XSPICE deck examples of usage for pulse and sine waveforms are shown below:

* Phase shift is specified after Berkeley defined parameters 

* on the independent source cards. Phase shift for both of the 

* following is specified as +45 degrees 

*

v1 1 0 0.0 sin(0 1 1k 0 0 45.0) 

r1 1 0 1k 

*

v2 2 0 0.0 pulse(-1 1 0 1e-5 1e-5 5e-4 1e-3 45.0) 

r2 2 0 1k 

*

4.2 Linear Dependent Sources

Ngspice allows circuits to contain linear dependent sources characterized by any of the four equations





i = gv v = ev i = fi v = hi




where g, e, f, and h are constants representing transconductance, voltage gain, current gain, and transresistance, respectively. Non-linear dependent sources for voltages or currents (B, E, G) are described in chapter 5.

4.2.1 Gxxxx: Linear Voltage-Controlled Current Sources (VCCS)

General form:

GXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- VALUE <m=val>

Examples:

G1 2 0 5 0 0.1

n+ and n- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative

node. nc+ and nc- are the positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. value is the transconductance (in mhos). m is an optional multiplier to the output current. val may be a numerical value or an expression according to 2.8.5 containing references to other parameters.

4.2.2 Exxxx: Linear Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources (VCVS)

General form:

EXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- VALUE

Examples:

E1 2 3 14 1 2.0

n+ is the positive node, and n- is the negative node. nc+ and nc- are the positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. value is the voltage gain.

4.2.3 Fxxxx: Linear Current-Controlled Current Sources (CCCS)

General form:

FXXXXXXX N+ N- VNAM VALUE <m=val>

Examples:

F1 13 5 VSENS 5 m=2

n+ and n- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. vnam is the name of a voltage source through which the controlling current flows. The direction of positive controlling current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node of vnam. value is the current gain. m is an optional multiplier to the output current.

4.2.4 Hxxxx: Linear Current-Controlled Voltage Sources (CCVS)

General form:

HXXXXXXX n+ n- vnam value

Examples:

HX 5 17 VZ 0.5K

n+ and n- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. vnam is the name of a voltage source through which the controlling current flows. The direction of positive controlling current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node of vnam. value is the transresistance (in ohms).

4.2.5 Polynomial Source Compatibility

Dependent polynomial sources available in SPICE2G6 are fully supported in ngspice using the XSPICE extension (25.1). The form used to specify these sources is shown in Table 4.1. For details on its usage please see chapter 5.2.4.




Dependent Polynomial Sources


Source Type Instance Card




POLYNOMIAL VCVS EXXXXXXX N+ N- POLY(ND) NC1+ NC1- P0 (P1...)


POLYNOMIAL VCCS GXXXXXXX N+ N- POLY(ND) NC1+ NC1- P0 (P1...)


POLYNOMIAL CCCS FXXXXXXX N+ N- POLY(ND) VNAM1 !VNAM2...? P0 (P1...)


POLYNOMIAL CCVS HXXXXXXX N+ N- POLY(ND) VNAM1 !VNAM2...? P0 (P1...)



Table 4.1: Dependent Polynomial Sources

Chapter 5
Non-linear Dependent Sources (Behavioral Sources)

The non-linear dependent sources B ( see chapt. 5.1), E (see 5.2), G see (5.3) described in this chapter allow to generate voltages or currents which result from evaluating a mathematical expression. Internally E and G sources are converted to the more general B source. All three sources may be used to introduce behavioral modeling and analysis.

5.1 Bxxxx: Nonlinear dependent source (ASRC)

5.1.1 Syntax and usage

General form:

BXXXXXXX n+ n- <i=expr> <v=expr> <tc1=value> <tc2=value> 
+ <temp=value> <dtemp=value>

Examples:

B1 0 1 I=cos(v(1))+sin(v(2)) 
B2 0 1 V=ln(cos(log(v(1,2)^2)))-v(3)^4+v(2)^v(1) 
B3 3 4 I=17 
B4 3 4 V=exp(pi^i(vdd)) 
B5 2 0 V = V(1) < {Vlow} ? {Vlow} : V(1) > {Vhigh} ? {Vhigh} : V(1)

n+ is the positive node, and n- is the negative node. The values of the V and I parameters determine the voltages and currents across and through the device, respectively. If I is given then the device is a current source, and if V is given the device is a voltage source. One and only one of these parameters must be given.

A simple model is implemented for temperature behavior by the formula:

                                                        2
I(T) = I(TNOM   )(1+ T C1(T - TNOM   )+ T C2(T - TNOM   ))
(5.1)

or

V (T) = V (TNOM  )(1 + TC1 (T - T NOM ) + TC2 (T - T NOM  )2)
(5.2)

In the above formula, “T ” represents the instance temperature, which can be explicitly set using the temp keyword or calculated using the circuit temperature and dtemp, if present. If both temp and dtemp are specified, the latter is ignored.

The small-signal AC behavior of the nonlinear source is a linear dependent source (or sources) with a proportionality constant equal to the derivative (or derivatives) of the source at the DC operating point. The expressions given for V and I may be any function of voltages and currents through voltage sources in the system.

The following functions of a single real variable are defined:

Trigonometric functions:
cos, sin, tan, acos, asin, atan
Hyperbolic functions:
cosh, sinh, acosh, asinh, atanh
Exponential and logarithmic:
exp, ln, log
Other:
abs, sqrt, u, u2, uramp, floor, ceil
Functions
of two variables are: min, max, pow
Functions
of three variables are: a ? b:c

The function “u” is the unit step function, with a value of one for arguments greater than zero and a value of zero for arguments less than zero. The function “u2” returns a value of zero for arguments less than zero, one for arguments greater than one and assumes the value of the argument between these limits. The function "uramp" is the integral of the unit step: for an input x, the value is zero if x is less than zero, or if x is greater than zero the value is x. These three functions are useful in synthesizing piece-wise non-linear functions, though convergence may be adversely affected.

The following standard operators are defined: +, -, *, /, ^, unary -

Logical operators are !=, <>, >=, <=, ==, >, <, ||, &&, ! .

A ternary function is defined as a ? b : c , which means IF a, THEN b, ELSE c. Be sure to place a space in front of ’?’ to allow the parser distinguishing it from other tokens.

Example: Ternary function

* B source test Clamped voltage source 
* C. P. Basso "Switched-mode power supplies", New York, 2008 
.param Vhigh = 4.6 
.param Vlow = 0.4 
Vin1 1 0 DC 0 PWL(0 0 1u 5) 
Bcl 2 0 V = V(1) < Vlow ? Vlow : V(1) > Vhigh ? Vhigh : V(1) 
.control 
set noaskquit 
tran  5n 1u 
plot V(2) vs V(1) 
.endc 
.end

If the argument of log, ln, or sqrt becomes less than zero, the absolute value of the argument is used. If a divisor becomes zero or the argument of log or ln becomes zero, an error will result. Other problems may occur when the argument for a function in a partial derivative enters a region where that function is undefined.

Parameters may be used like {Vlow} shown in the example above. Parameters will be evaluated upon set up of the circuit, vectors like V(1) will be evaluated during the simulation.

To get time into the expression you can integrate the current from a constant current source with a capacitor and use the resulting voltage (don’t forget to set the initial voltage across the capacitor).

Non-linear resistors, capacitors, and inductors may be synthesized with the nonlinear dependent source. Nonlinear resistors, capacitors and inductors are implemented with their linear counterparts by a change of variables implemented with the nonlinear dependent source. The following subcircuit will implement a nonlinear capacitor:

Example: Non linear capacitor

.Subckt nlcap pos neg 
* Bx: calculate f(input voltage) 
Bx 1 0 v = f(v(pos,neg)) 
* Cx: linear capacitance 
Cx 2 0 1 
* Vx: Ammeter to measure current into the capacitor 
Vx 2 1 DC 0Volts 
* Drive the current through Cx back into the circuit 
Fx pos neg Vx 1 
.ends

Example for f(v(pos,neg)):

Bx 1 0 V = v(pos,neg)*v(pos,neg)

Non-linear resistors or inductors may be described in a similar manner. An example for a nonlinear resistor using this template is shown below.

Example: Non linear resistor

* use of ’hertz’ variable in nonlinear resistor 
*.param rbase=1k 
* some tests 
B1  1 0  V = hertz*v(33) 
B2  2 0 V = v(33)*hertz 
b3  3 0 V = 6.283e3/(hertz+6.283e3)*v(33) 
V1 33 0 DC 0 AC 1 
*** Translate R1 10 0 R=’1k/sqrt(HERTZ)’ to B source *** 
.Subckt nlres pos neg rb=rbase 
* Bx: calculate f(input voltage) 
Bx   1    0    v = -1 / {rb} / sqrt(HERTZ) * v(pos, neg) 
* Rx: linear resistance 
Rx   2    0    1

Example: Non linear resistor (continued)

* Vx: Ammeter to measure current into the resistor 
Vx   2    1    DC 0Volts 
* Drive the current through Rx back into the circuit 
Fx   pos  neg  Vx 1 
.ends 
Xres 33 10 nlres rb=1k 
*Rres 33 10 1k 
Vres 10 0 DC 0 
.control 
define check(a,b) vecmax(abs(a - b)) 
ac lin 10 100 1k 
* some checks 
print v(1) v(2) v(3) 
if check(v(1), frequency) < 1e-12 
echo "INFO: ok" 
end 
plot vres#branch 
.endc 
.end

5.1.2 Special B-Source Variables time, temper, hertz

The special variables ’time’ and ’temper’ are available in a transient analysis, reflecting the actual simulation time and circuit temperature. ’temper’ returns the circuit temperature, given in degree C (see 2.11). The variable ’hertz’ is available in an AC analysis. ’time’ is zero in the AC analysis, ’hertz’ is zero during transient analysis. Using the variable ’hertz’ may cost some CPU time if you have a large circuit, because for each frequency the operating point has to be determined before calculating the AC response.

5.1.3 par(’expression’)

The B source syntax may also be used in output lines like .plot as algebraic expressions for output (see chapt.15.6.6 ).

5.1.4 Piecewise Linear Function: pwl

Both B source types may contain a piece-wise linear dependency of one network variable:

Example: pwl_current

Bdio 1 0 I = pwl(v(A), 0,0, 33,10m, 100,33m, 200,50m)

v(A) is the independent variable x. Each pair of values following describes the x,y functional relation: In this example at node A voltage of 0V the current of 0A is generated - next pair gives 10mA flowing from ground to node 1 at 33V on node A and so forth.

The same is possible for voltage sources:

Example: pwl_voltage

Blimit b 0 V = pwl(v(1), -4,0, -2,2, 2,4, 4,5, 6,5)

Monotony of the independent variable in the pwl definition is checked - non-monotonic x entries will stop the program execution. v(1) may be replaced by a controlling current source. v(1) may also be replaced by an expression, e.g. -2*i(Vin). The value pairs may also be parameters, which have to be defined before by a .param statement. An example for the pwl function using all of these options is shown below:

Example: pwl function in B source

Demonstrates usage of the pwl function in an B source (ASRC) 
* Also emulates the TABLE function with limits 
 
.param x0=-4 y0=0 
.param x1=-2 y1=2 
.param x2=2 y2=-
.param x3=4 y3=1 
.param xx0=x0-
.param xx3=x3+1 
 
Vin   1 0   DC=0V 
R 1 0 2 
 
* no limits outside of the tabulated x values (continues linearily) 
Btest2 2 0   I = pwl(v(1), ’x0’,’y0’, ’x1’,’y1’, ’x2’,’y2’, ’x3’,’y3’) 
 
* like TABLE function with limits: 
Btest3 3 0   I = (v(1) < ’x0’) ? ’y0’ :  (v(1) < ’x3’) ? 
+ pwl(v(1), ’x0’,’y0’, ’x1’,’y1’, ’x2’,’y2’, ’x3’,’y3’) : ’y3’ 
 
* more efficient and elegant TABLE function with limits 
*(voltage controlled): 
Btest4 4 0   I = pwl(v(1), 
+ ’xx0’,’y0’, ’x0’,’y0’, 
+              ’x1’,’y1’, 
+              ’x2’,’y2’, 
+              ’x3’,’y3’, ’xx3’,’y3’) 
* 
* more efficient and elegant TABLE function with limits 
* (controlled by current): 
Btest5 5 0   I = pwl(-2*i(Vin), 
+ ’xx0’,’y0’, ’x0’,’y0’, 
+              ’x1’,’y1’, 
+              ’x2’,’y2’, 
+              ’x3’,’y3’, ’xx3’,’y3’) 
 
Rint2 2 0 1 
Rint3 3 0 1 
Rint4 4 0 1 
Rint5 5 0 1 
.control 
dc  Vin  -6 6  0.2 
plot v(2) v(3) v(4)-0.5 v(5)+0.5 
.endc 
 
.end

5.2 Exxxx: non-linear voltage source*

5.2.1 VOL

General form:

EXXXXXXX n+ n- vol=’expr’

Examples:

E41 4 0 vol = ’V(3)*V(3)-Offs’

Expression may be an equation or an expression containing node voltages or branch currents (in the form of i(vm)) and any other terms as given for the B source and described in chapter 5.1. It may contain parameters (2.8.1) and the special variables time, temper, hertz (5.1.2). ’ or {, } may be used to delimit the function.

5.2.2 VALUE

Optional syntax:

EXXXXXXX n+ n- value={expr}

Examples:

E41 4 0 value = {V(3)*V(3)-Offs}

5.2.3 TABLE

Data may be entered from the listings of a data table similar to the pwl B-Source (5.1.4). Data are grouped into x, y pairs. Expression may be an equation or an expression containing node voltages or branch currents (in the form of i(vm)) and any other terms as given for the B source and described in chapter 5.1. It may contain parameters (2.8.1). ’ or {, } may be used to delimit the function. Expression delivers the x-value, which is used to generate a corresponding y-value, according to the tabulated value pairs, using linear interpolation. If the x-value is below x0 , y0 is returned, above x2 y2 is returned (limiting function). The value pairs have to be real numbers, parameters are not allowed!

Syntax for data entry from table:

Exxx n1 n2 TABLE {expression} = (x0, y0) (x1, y1) (x2, y2)

Example (simple comparator):

ECMP 11 0 TABLE {V(10,9)} = (-5MV, 0V) (5MV, 5V)

5.2.4 POLY

Polynomial sources are only available when the XSPICE option (see 32) is enabled.

General form:

EXXXX N+ N- POLY(ND) NC1+ NC1- (NC2+ NC2-...) P0 (P1...)

Example:

ENONLIN 100 101 POLY(2) 3 0 4 0 0.0 13.6 0.2 0.005

POLY(ND) Specifies the number of dimensions of the polynomial. The number of pairs of controlling nodes must be equal to the number of dimensions.

(N+) and (N-) nodes are output nodes. Positive current flows from the (+) node through the source to the (-) node.

The <NC1+> and <NC1-> are in pairs and define a set of controlling voltages. A particular node can appear more than once, and the output and controlling nodes need not be different.

The example yields a voltage output controlled by two input voltages v(3,0) and v(4,0). Four polynomial coefficients are given. The equivalent function to generate the output is:

0 + 13.6 * v(3) + 0.2 * v(4) + 0.005 * v(3) * v(3)

Generally you will set the equation according to

POLY(1) y = p0 + k1*X1  + p2*X1*X1    + p3*X1*X1*X1 + ...

POLY(2) y = p0 + p1*X1         + p2*X2 + 

               + p3*X1*X1      + p4*X2*X1    + p5*X2*X2    + 

               + p6*X1*X1*X1   + p7*X2*X1*X1 + p8*X2*X2*X1 +    

               + p9*X2*X2*X2   + ...

POLY(3) y = p0 + p1*X1    + p2*X2    + p3*X3    + 

               + p4*X1*X1 + p5*X2*X1 + p6*X3*X1 + 

               + p7*X2*X2 + p8*X2*X3 + p9*X3*X3 + ...

where X1 is the voltage difference of the first input node pair, X2 of the second pair and so on. Keeping track of all polynomial coefficient obviously becomes rather tedious for larger polynomials.

5.2.5 LAPLACE

Currently ngspice does not offer a direct E-Source element with the LAPLACE option. There is however, a XSPICE code model equivalent called x_fer (see chapt. 12.2.16), which you may invoke manually. The XSPICE option has to enabled (32.1). AC (15.3.1) and transient analysis (15.3.9) is supported.

The following E-Source:

ELOPASS 4 0 LAPLACE {V(1)} {10 / (s/6800 + 1)}

may be replaced by:

AELOPASS 1 int_4 filter1 
.model filter1 x_fer(gain=10 int_ic=[0 0] num_coeff=[1] 
+                    den_coeff=[1 1.47e-4] 
ELOPASS 4 0 int_4 0 1

where you have the voltage of node 1 as input, an intermediate output node int_4 and an E-source as buffer, so to keep the name ’ELOPASS’ available if further processing is required.

If the controlling expression is more complex than just a voltage node, you may add a B-Source (5.1) for evaluating the expression before entering the A-device.

E-Source with complex controlling expression:

ELOPASS 4 0 LAPLACE {V(1)*v(2)} {10 / (s/6800 + 1)}

may be replaced by:

BELOPASS int_1 0 V=V(1)*v(2) 
AELOPASS int_1 int_4 filter1 
.model filter1 x_fer(gain=10 int_ic=[0 0] num_coeff=[1] 
+                    den_coeff=[1 1.47e-4] 
ELOPASS 4 0 int_4 0 1

5.3 Gxxxx: non-linear current source*

5.3.1 CUR

General form:

GXXXXXXX n+ n- cur=’expr’ <m=val>

Examples:

G51 55 225 cur = ’V(3)*V(3)-Offs’

Expression may be an equation or an expression containing node voltages or branch currents (in the form of i(vm)) and any other terms as given for the B source and described in chapter 5.1. It may contain parameters (2.8.1) and special variables (5.1.2). m is an optional multiplier to the output current. val may be a numerical value or an expression according to 2.8.5 containing only references to other parameters (no node voltages or branch currents!), because it is evaluated before the simulation commences.

5.3.2 VALUE

Optional syntax:

GXXXXXXX n+ n- value=’expr’ <m=val>

Examples:

G51 55 225 value = ’V(3)*V(3)-Offs’

5.3.3 TABLE

A data entry by a tabulated listing is available with syntax similar to the E-Source (see chapt. 5.2.3).

Syntax for data entry from table:

Gxxx n1 n2 TABLE {expression} = (x0, y0) (x1, y1) (x2, y2) <m=val>

Example (simple comparator with current output and voltage control):

GCMP 0 11 TABLE {V(10,9)} = (-5MV, 0V) (5MV, 5V) 
R 11 0 1k

m is an optional multiplier to the output current. val may be a numerical value or an expression according to 2.8.5 containing only references to other parameters (no node voltages or branch currents!), because it is evaluated before the simulation commences.

5.3.4 POLY

see E-Source at chapt. 5.2.4.

5.3.5 LAPLACE

See E-Source, chapt. 5.2.5 , for an equivalent code model replacement.

5.3.6 Example

An example file is given below.

Example input file:

VCCS, VCVS, non-linear dependency 
.param Vi=1 
.param Offs=’0.01*Vi’ 
* VCCS depending on V(3) 
B21 int1 0 V = V(3)*V(3) 
G1 21 22 int1 0 1 
* measure current through VCCS 
vm 22 0 dc 0 
R21 21 0 1 
* new VCCS depending on V(3) 
G51 55 225 cur = ’V(3)*V(3)-Offs’ 
* measure current through VCCS 
vm5 225 0 dc 0 
R51 55 0 1 
* VCVS depending on V(3) 
B31 int2 0 V = V(3)*V(3) 
E1 1 0 int2 0 1 
R1 1 0 1 
* new VCVS depending on V(3) 
E41 4 0 vol = ’V(3)*V(3)-Offs’ 
R4 4 0 1 
* control voltage 
V1 3 0 PWL(0 0 100u {Vi}) 
.control 
set noaskquit 
tran 10n 100u uic 
plot i(E1) i(E41) 
plot i(vm) i(vm5) 
.endc 
.end

*) To get this functionality, the compatibility mode has to be set in spinit or .spiceinit by set ngbehavior=all.

5.4 Debugging a behavioral source

The B, E, G, sources and the behavioral R, C, L elements are powerful tools to set up user defined models. Unfortunately debugging these models is not very comfortable.

Example input file with bug (log(-2)):

B source debugging 
 
V1 1 0 1 
V2 2 0 -
 
E41 4 0 vol = ’V(1)*log(V(2))’ 
 
.control 
tran 1 1 
.endc 
 
.end

The input file given above results in an error message:

Error: -2 out of range for log

In this trivial example, the reason and location for the bug is obvious. However, if you have several equations using behavioral sources, and several occurrences of the log function, then debugging is nearly impossible.

However, if the variable ngdebug (see 17.7) is set (e.g. in file .spiceinit), a more distinctive error message is issued, which (after some closer investigation) will reveal the location and value of the buggy parameter.

Detailed error message for input file with bug (log(-2)):

Error: -2 out of range for log 
calling PTeval, tree = 
        (v0) * (log (v1)) 
d / d v0 : log (v1) 
d / d v1 : (v0) * ((0.434294) / (v1)) 
values:   var0 = 1 
          var1 = -2

If variable strict_errorhandling (see 17.7) is set, ngspice exits after this message. If not, gmin and source stepping may be started, typically without success.

Chapter 6
Transmission Lines

Ngspice implements both the original SPICE3f5 transmission lines models and the one introduced with KSPICE. The latter provide an improved transient analysis of lossy transmission lines. Unlike SPICE models, which uses the state-based approach to simulate lossy transmission lines, KSPICE simulates lossy transmission lines and coupled multiconductor line systems using the recursive convolution method. The impulse response of an arbitrary transfer function can be determined by deriving a recursive convolution from the Pade approximations of the function. We use this approach for simulating each transmission line’s characteristics and each multiconductor line’s modal functions. This method of lossy transmission line simulation has been proved to give a speedup of one to two orders of magnitude over SPICE3f5.

6.1 Lossless Transmission Lines

General form:

TXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 Z0=VALUE <TD=VALUE> <F=FREQ <NL=NRMLEN>> 
+ <IC=V1, I1, V2, I2>

Examples:

T1 1 0 2 0 Z0=50 TD=10NS

n1 and n2 are the nodes at port 1; n3 and n4 are the nodes at port 2. z0 is the characteristic impedance. The length of the line may be expressed in either of two forms. The transmission delay, td, may be specified directly (as td=10ns, for example). Alternatively, a frequency f may be given, together with nl, the normalized electrical length of the transmission line with respect to the wavelength in the line at the frequency “f”. If a frequency is specified but nl is omitted, 0.25 is assumed (that is, the frequency is assumed to be the quarter-wave frequency). Note that although both forms for expressing the line length are indicated as optional, one of the two must be specified.

Note that this element models only one propagating mode. If all four nodes are distinct in the actual circuit, then two modes may be excited. To simulate such a situation, two transmission-line elements are required. (see the example in chapt. 21.7 for further clarification.) The (optional) initial condition specification consists of the voltage and current at each of the transmission line ports. Note that the initial conditions (if any) apply “only” if the UIC option is specified on the .TRAN control line.

Note that a lossy transmission line (see below) with zero loss may be more accurate than the lossless transmission line due to implementation details.

6.2 Lossy Transmission Lines

General form:

OXXXXXXX n1 n2 n3 n4 mname

Examples:

O23 1 0 2 0 LOSSYMOD 
OCONNECT 10 5 20 5 INTERCONNECT

This is a two-port convolution model for single conductor lossy transmission lines. n1 and n2 are the nodes at port 1; n3 and n4 are the nodes at port 2. Note that a lossy transmission line with zero loss may be more accurate than the lossless transmission line due to implementation details.

6.2.1 Lossy Transmission Line Model (LTRA)

The uniform RLC/RC/LC/RG transmission line model (referred to as the LTRA model henceforth) models a uniform constant-parameter distributed transmission line. The RC and LC cases may also be modeled using the URC and TRA models; however, the newer LTRA model is usually faster and more accurate than the others. The operation of the LTRA model is based on the convolution of the transmission line’s impulse responses with its inputs (see [8]). The LTRA model takes a number of parameters, some of which must be given and some of which are optional.






Name

Parameter

Units/Type Default Example










R

resistance/length

Ωunit 0.0 0.2





L

inductance/length

Hunit 0.0 9.13e-9





G

conductance/length

mhosunit 0.0 0.0





C

capacitance/length

Funit 0.0 3.65e-12





LEN

length of line

unit no default 1.0





REL

breakpoint control

arbitrary unit 1 0.5





ABS

breakpoint control

1 5





NOSTEPLIMIT

don’t limit time-step to less than line delay

flag not set set





NO CONTROL

don’t do complex time-step control

flag not set set





LININTERP

use linear interpolation

flag not set set





MIXEDINTERP

use linear when quadratic seems bad

flag not set set





COMPACTREL

special reltol for history compaction

RELTOL 1.0e-3





COMPACTABS

special abstol for history compaction

ABSTOL 1.0e-9





TRUNCNR

use Newton-Raphson method for time-step control

flag not set set





TRUNCDONTCUT

don’t limit time-step to keep impulse-response errors low

flag not set set





The following types of lines have been implemented so far:

Any other combination will yield erroneous results and should not be tried. The length LEN of the line must be specified. NOSTEPLIMIT is a flag that will remove the default restriction of limiting time-steps to less than the line delay in the RLC case. NO CONTROL is a flag that prevents the default limiting of the time-step based on convolution error criteria in the RLC and RC cases. This speeds up simulation but may in some cases reduce the accuracy of results. LININTERP is a flag that, when specified, will use linear interpolation instead of the default quadratic interpolation for calculating delayed signals. MIXEDINTERP is a flag that, when specified, uses a metric for judging whether quadratic interpolation is not applicable and if so uses linear interpolation; otherwise it uses the default quadratic interpolation. TRUNCDONTCUT is a flag that removes the default cutting of the time-step to limit errors in the actual calculation of impulse-response related quantities. COMPACTREL and COMPACTABS are quantities that control the compaction of the past history of values stored for convolution. Larger values of these lower accuracy but usually increase simulation speed. These are to be used with the TRYTOCOMPACT option, described in the .OPTIONS section. TRUNCNR is a flag that turns on the use of Newton-Raphson iterations to determine an appropriate time-step in the time-step control routines. The default is a trial and error procedure by cutting the previous time-step in half. REL and ABS are quantities that control the setting of breakpoints.

The option most worth experimenting with for increasing the speed of simulation is REL. The default value of 1 is usually safe from the point of view of accuracy but occasionally increases computation time. A value greater than 2 eliminates all breakpoints and may be worth trying depending on the nature of the rest of the circuit, keeping in mind that it might not be safe from the viewpoint of accuracy.

Breakpoints may usually be entirely eliminated if it is expected the circuit will not display sharp discontinuities. Values between 0 and 1 are usually not required but may be used for setting many breakpoints.

COMPACTREL may also be experimented with when the option TRYTOCOMPACT is specified in a .OPTIONS card. The legal range is between 0 and 1. Larger values usually decrease the accuracy of the simulation but in some cases improve speed. If TRYTOCOMPACT is not specified on a .OPTIONS card, history compaction is not attempted and accuracy is high.

NO CONTROL, TRUNCDONTCUT and NOSTEPLIMIT also tend to increase speed at the expense of accuracy.

6.3 Uniform Distributed RC Lines

General form:

UXXXXXXX n1 n2 n3 mname l=len <n=lumps>

Examples:

U1 1 2 0 URCMOD L=50U 
URC2 1 12 2 UMODL l=1MIL N=6

n1 and n2 are the two element nodes the RC line connects, while n3 is the node to which the capacitances are connected. mname is the model name, len is the length of the RC line in meters. lumps, if specified, is the number of lumped segments to use in modeling the RC line (see the model description for the action taken if this parameter is omitted).

6.3.1 Uniform Distributed RC Model (URC)

The URC model is derived from a model proposed by L. Gertzberg in 1974. The model is accomplished by a subcircuit type expansion of the URC line into a network of lumped RC segments with internally generated nodes. The RC segments are in a geometric progression, increasing toward the middle of the URC line, with K as a proportionality constant. The number of lumped segments used, if not specified for the URC line device, is determined by the following formula:

        |                    |
        |    R C    2||(K-1)||2|
     log||FmaxL-L2πL  |--K--| ||
N  = -------------------------
               logK
(6.1)

The URC line is made up strictly of resistor and capacitor segments unless the ISPERL parameter is given a nonzero value, in which case the capacitors are replaced with reverse biased diodes with a zero-bias junction capacitance equivalent to the capacitance replaced, and with a saturation current of ISPERL amps per meter of transmission line and an optional series resistance equivalent to RSPERL ohms per meter.







Name Parameter Units Default Example Area












K Propagation Constant - 2.0 1.2 -






FMAX Maximum Frequency of interest Hz 1.0 G 6.5 Meg -






RPERL Resistance per unit length Ωm 1000 10 -






CPERL Capacitance per unit length Fm 10e-15 1 p -






ISPERL Saturation Current per unit length Am 0 - -






RSPERL Diode Resistance per unit length Ωm 0 - -






6.4 KSPICE Lossy Transmission Lines

Unlike SPICE3, which uses the state-based approach to simulate lossy transmission lines, KSPICE simulates lossy transmission lines and coupled multiconductor line systems using the recursive convolution method. The impulse response of an arbitrary transfer function can be determined by deriving a recursive convolution from the Pade approximations of the function. NGSPICE is using this approach for simulating each transmission line’s characteristics and each multiconductor line’s modal functions. This method of lossy transmission line simulation has shown to give a speedup of one to two orders of magnitude over SPICE3E. Please note that the following two models will support only transient simulation, no ac.

Additional Documentation Available:

6.4.1 Single Lossy Transmission Line (TXL)

General form:

YXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 mname <LEN=LENGTH>

Example:

Y1 1 0 2 0 ymod LEN=2 
.MODEL ymod txl R=12.45 L=8.972e-9 G=0 C=0.468e-12 length=16

n1 and n2 are the nodes of the two ports. The optional instance parameter len is the length of the line and may be expressed in multiples of [unit]. Typically unit is given in meters. len will override the model parameter length for the specific instance only.

The TXL model takes a number of parameters:






Name

Parameter

Units/Type Default Example










R

resistance/length

Ωunit 0.0 0.2





L

inductance/length

Hunit 0.0 9.13e-9





G

conductance/length

mhosunit 0.0 0.0





C

capacitance/length

Funit 0.0 3.65e-12





LENGTH

length of line

unit no default 1.0





Model parameter length must be specified as a multiple of unit. Typically unit is given in [m]. For transient simulation only.

6.4.2 Coupled Multiconductor Line (CPL)

The CPL multiconductor line model is in theory similar to the RLGC model, but without frequency dependent loss (neither skin effect nor frequency-dependent dielectric loss). Up to 8 coupled lines are supported in NGSPICE.

General form:

PXXXXXXX NI1 NI2...NIX GND1 NO1 NO2...NOX GND2 mname <LEN=LENGTH>

Example:

P1 in1 in2 0 b1 b2 0 PLINE 
.model PLINE CPL length={Len} 
+R=1 0 1 
+L={L11} {L12} {L22} 
+G=0 0 0 
+C={C11} {C12} {C22} 
.param Len=1 Rs=0 
+ C11=9.143579E-11 C12=-9.78265E-12 C22=9.143578E-11 
+ L11=3.83572E-7 L12=8.26253E-8 L22=3.83572E-7

ni1 ... nix are the nodes at port 1 with gnd1; no1 ... nox are the nodes at port 2 with gnd2. The optional instance parameter len is the length of the line and may be expressed in multiples of [unit]. Typically unit is given in meters. len will override the model parameter length for the specific instance only.

The CPL model takes a number of parameters:






Name

Parameter

Units/Type Default Example










R

resistance/length

Ωunit 0.0 0.2





L

inductance/length

Hunit 0.0 9.13e-9





G

conductance/length

mhosunit 0.0 0.0





C

capacitance/length

Funit 0.0 3.65e-12





LENGTH

length of line

unit no default 1.0





All RLGC parameters are given in Maxwell matrix form. For the R and G matrices the diagonal elements must be specified, for L and C matrices the lower or upper triangular elements must specified. The parameter LENGTH is a scalar and is mandatory. For transient simulation only.

Chapter 7
Diodes

7.1 Junction Diodes

General form:

DXXXXXXX n+ n- mname <area=val> <m=val> <pj=val> <off> <ic=vd> 
+ <temp=val> <dtemp=val>

Examples:

DBRIDGE 2 10 DIODE1 
DCLMP 3 7 DMOD AREA=3.0 IC=0.2

The pn junction (diode) implemented in ngspice expands the one found in SPICE3f5. Perimeter effects and high injection level have been introduced into the original model and temperature dependence of some parameters has been added. n+ and n- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. mname is the model name. Instance parameters may follow, dedicated to only the diode described in the respective line. area is the area scale factor, which may scale the saturation current given by the model parameters (and others, see table below). pj is the perimeter scale factor, scaling the sidewall saturation current and it’s associated capacitance. m is a multiplier to area and perimeter, and off indicates an (optional) starting condition on the device for dc analysis. If the area factor is omitted, a value of 1.0 is assumed. The (optional) initial condition specification using ic is intended for use with the uic option on the .tran control line, when a transient analysis is desired starting from other than the quiescent operating point. You should supply the initial voltage across the diode there. The (optional) temp value is the temperature at which this device is to operate, and overrides the temperature specification on the .option control line. The temperature of each instance can be can be specified as an offset to the circuit temperature with the dtemp option.

7.2 Diode Model (D)

The dc characteristics of the diode are determined by the parameters is and n. An ohmic resistance, rs, is included. Charge storage effects are modeled by a transit time, tt, and a nonlinear depletion layer capacitance which is determined by the parameters cjo, vj, and m. The temperature dependence of the saturation current is defined by the parameters eg, the energy and xti, the saturation current temperature exponent. The nominal temperature at which these parameters were measured is tnom, which defaults to the circuit-wide value specified on the .options control line. Reverse breakdown is modeled by an exponential increase in the reverse diode current and is determined by the parameters bv and ibv (both of which are positive numbers).

Junction DC parameters






Name Parameter Units Default Example Scale factor












BV Reverse breakdown voltage V 40






IBV Current at breakdown voltage A 1.0e-3 1.0e-4






IK (IKF) Forward knee current A 1.0e-3 1.0e-6






IKR Reverse knee current A 1.0e-3 1.0e-6






IS (JS) Saturation current A 1.0e-14 1.0e-16 area






JSW Sidewall saturation current A 1.0e-14 1.0e-15 perimeter






N Emission coefficient - 1 1.5






RS Ohmic resistance Ω 0.0 100 1area






Junction capacitance parameters






Name

Parameter

Units Default Example Scale factor












CJO (CJ0)

Zero-bias junction bottom-wall capacitance

F 0.0 2pF area






CJP (CJSW)

Zero-bias junction sidewall capacitance

F 0.0 .1pF perimeter






FC

Coefficient for forward-bias depletion bottom-wall capacitance formula

- 0.5 -






FCS

Coefficient for forward-bias depletion sidewall capacitance formula

- 0.5 -






M (MJ)

Area junction grading coefficient

- 0.5 0.5






MJSW

Periphery junction grading coefficient

- 0.33 0.5






VJ (PB)

Junction potential

V 1 0.6






PHP

Periphery junction potential

V 1 0.6






TT

Transit-time

sec 0 0.1ns






Temperature effects






Name Parameter Units Default Example Scale factor












EG Activation energy eV 1.11
1.11
Si
0.69
Sbd
0.67
Ge






TM1 1st order tempco for MJ 1C 0.0 -






TM2 2nd order tempco for MJ 1C2 0.0 -






TNOM (TREF) Parameter measurement temperature C 27 50






TRS1 (TRS) 1st order tempco for RS 1C 0.0 -






TRS2 2nd order tempco for RS 1C2 0.0 -






TM1 1st order tempco for MJ 1C 0.0 -






TM2 2nd order tempco for MJ 1C2 0.0 -






TTT1 1st order tempco for TT 1C 0.0 -






TTT2 2nd order tempco for TT 1C2 0.0 -






XTI Saturation current temperature exponent - 3.0
3.0
pn
2.0
Sbd






TLEV Diode temperature equation selector - 0






TLEVC Diode capac. temperature equation selector - 0






CTA (CTC) Area junct. cap. temperature coefficient 1C 0.0 -






CTP Perimeter junct. cap. temperature coefficient 1C 0.0 -






TCV Breakdown voltage temperature coefficient 1C 0.0 -






Noise modeling






Name Parameter Units Default Example Scale factor












KF Flicker noise coefficient - 0






AF Flicker noise exponent - 1






Diode models may be described in the input file (or an file included by .inc) according to the following example:

General form:

.model mname type(pname1=pval1 pname2=pval2 ... )

Examples:

.model DMOD D (bf=50 is=1e-13 vbf=50)

7.3 Diode Equations

The junction diode is the basic semiconductor device and the simplest one modeled in ngspice, but it’s model is quite complex, even if not all the physical phenomena affecting a pn junction are modeled. The diode is modeled in three different regions:

Parameters Scaling

Model parameters are scaled using the unit-less parameters area and pj and the multiplier m as depicted below:

AREAeff = AREAM

PJeff = PJ M

ISeff = ISAREAeff+JSW *PJeff

IBVeff = IBV AREAeff

IKeff = IK AREAeff

IKReff = IKRAREAeff

CJeff = CJ0AREAeff

CJPeff = CJP PJeff

Diode DC, Transient and AC model equations
     (        qV
     || ISeff(eNDkT - 1) + VD *GMIN,        ifVD ≥  - 3NkT-
     {             3NkT-3                            q        NkT-
ID = | - ISeff[1 + (qVDe) ]+ VD *GMIN,     if- BVeff < VD < - 3  q
     |(          -q(BVNefkfT+VD-)
       - ISeff(e         ) + VD* GMIN,    ifVD ≤  - BVeff
(7.1)

The breakdown region must be described with more depth since the breakdown is not modeled in physically. As written before, the breakdown modeling is based on two model parameters: the "nominal breakdown voltage" bv and the current at the onset of breakdown ibv. For the diode model to be consistent, the current value cannot be arbitrary chosen, since the reverse bias and breakdown regions must match. When the diode enters breakdown region from reverse bias, the current is calculated using the formula1 :

                -qBV
Ibdwn = - ISeff(e-NkT-- 1)
(7.2)

The computed current is necessary to adjust the breakdown voltage making the two regions match. The algorithm is a little bit convoluted and only a brief description is given here:


if IBVeff < Ibdwn then

IBVeff = Ibdwn
BVeff = BV

else

BVeff = BV -NVtln(IBV
-I-eff
 bdwn)

Algorithm 7.1: Diode breakdown current calculation

Most real diodes shows a current increase that, at high current levels, does not follow the exponential relationship given above. This behavior is due to high level of carriers injected into the junction. High injection effects (as they are called) are modeled with ik and ikr.

       (
       | ---I∘D---,   ifV  ≥ - 3NkT-
       ||{ 1+  --ID-       D       q
IDeff =       IKeff
       || ---∘ID----,  otherwise.
       |( 1+  IKIDReff
(7.3)

Diode capacitance is divided into two different terms:

Depletion capacitance is composed by two different contributes, one associated to the bottom of the junction (bottom-wall depletion capacitance) and the other to the periphery (sidewall depletion capacitance). The basic equations are:

CDiode = Cdiffusion + Cdepletion

Where the depletion capacitance i defined as:

Cdepletion = Cdeplbw + Cdeplsw

The diffusion capacitance, due to the injected minority carriers is modeled with the transit time tt:

              ∂-IDeff-
Cdiffusion = T T ∂ V
                  D

The depletion capacitance is more complex to model, since the function used to approximate it diverges when the diode voltage become greater than the junction built-in potential. To avoid function divergence, the capacitance function is approximated with a linear extrapolation for applied voltage greater than a fraction of the junction built-in potential.

            (
            { CJeff ⋅(1- -VD-)-MJ,         ifVD <  FC ⋅V J
Cdepl    =           1-FCV⋅(J1+MJI)+MJ ⋅VD                            (7.4)
     bw     ( CJeff ⋅----------(1+MJ)-VJ,  otherwise.
                         (1- FC)
         (              V
         { CJPeff ⋅(1 - PHDP-)-MJSW ,           ifVD  < FCS ⋅PHP
Cdeplsw = (         1-FCS⋅(1+MJSW-)+MJSW-⋅ VPHDP
           CJPeff ⋅     (1-FCS)(1+MJSW )     ,  otherwise.
(7.5)

Temperature dependence

The temperature affects many of the parameters in the equations above, the following equations show how. One of the most significant parameter that varies with the temperature for a semiconductor is the band-gap energy:

                            T NOM2
EGnom  = 1.16-  7.02e -4⋅----------------
                        T NOM   + 1108.0
(7.6)

                               T 2
EG (T ) = 1.16 - 7.02e-4⋅----------------
                         TNOM   + 1108.0
(7.7)

The leakage currents temperature dependence is:

             logfactor
IS(T) = IS⋅e   N
(7.8)

JSW (T) = JSW  ⋅elogfNactor
(7.9)

where "logfactor" is defined:

             ---EG------  -EG---          ---T---
logf actor = Vt(T NOM  ) - Vt(T) + XT I⋅ln(T NOM  )
(7.10)

The contact potentials (bottom-wall an sidewall) temperature dependence is:

                              [                                     ]
VJ(T ) = V J⋅(--T----)- Vt(T)⋅  3⋅ln(--T----)+ ---EGnom----  EG-(T)-
              TNOM                   TNOM      Vt(T NOM  )   Vt(T )
(7.11)

                                  [                                    ]
PH P(T ) = P H P ⋅(-T--- )- Vt(T)⋅ 3 ⋅ln (--T----)+ --EGnom-----  EG-(T)-
                 T NOM                   TNOM      Vt(T NOM  )   Vt(T )
(7.12)

The depletion capacitances temperature dependence is:

            [                                VJ (T )     ]
CJ(T ) = CJ ⋅ 1 + MJ ⋅(4.0e-4 ⋅(T - T NOM ) -------+  1)
                                               VJ
(7.13)

                   [                                               ]
CJSW  (T ) = CJSW  ⋅ 1+  MJSW  ⋅(4.0e-4 ⋅(T - T NOM  )-  PH-P(T-)+ 1 )
                                                        P H P
(7.14)

The transit time temperature dependence is:

T T(T ) = TT ⋅(1+ T T T1 ⋅(T - T NOM  )+  TT T2 ⋅(T - T NOM  )2)
(7.15)

The junction grading coefficient temperature dependence is:

MJ  (T ) = MJ ⋅(1+  TM1  ⋅(T - T NOM  )+ T M2  ⋅(T - T NOM  )2)
(7.16)

The series resistance temperature dependence is:

RS (T ) = RS ⋅(1 + T RS⋅(T - T NOM  )+ T RS2 ⋅(T - TNOM   )2)
(7.17)

Noise model

The diode has three noise contribution, one due to the presence of the parasitic resistance rs and the other two (shot and flicker) due to the pn junction.

The thermal noise due to the parasitic resistance is:

---   4kTΔf
i2RS = -------
        RS
(7.18)

The shot and flicker noise contributions are:

--            KF * IDAF
i2d = 2qIDΔf +  --------Δf
                 f
(7.19)

Chapter 8
BJTs

8.1 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)

General form:

QXXXXXXX nc nb ne <ns> mname <area=val> <areac=val> <areab=val> 
+ <m=val> <off> <ic=vbe,vce> <temp=val> <dtemp=val>

Examples:

Q23 10 24 13 QMOD IC=0.6, 5.0 
Q50A 11 26 4 20 MOD1

nc, nb, and ne are the collector, base, and emitter nodes, respectively. ns is the (optional) substrate node. If unspecified, ground is used. mname is the model name, area, areab, areac are the area factors (emitter, base and collector respectively), and off indicates an (optional) initial condition on the device for the dc analysis. If the area factor is omitted, a value of 1.0 is assumed.

The (optional) initial condition specification using ic=vbe,vce is intended for use with the uic option on a .tran control line, when a transient analysis is desired starting from other than the quiescent operating point. See the .ic control line description for a better way to set transient initial conditions. The (optional) temp value is the temperature at which this device is to operate, and overrides the temperature specification on the .option control line. Using dtemp option you can specify instance’s temperature relative to the circuit temperature.

8.2 BJT Models (NPN/PNP)

Ngspice provides three BJT device models, which are selected by the .model card.

.model QMOD1 BJT level=2

This is the minimal version, further optional parameters listed in the table below may replace the ngspice default parameters. The level keyword specifies the model to be used:

The bipolar junction transistor model in ngspice is an adaptation of the integral charge control model of Gummel and Poon. This modified Gummel-Poon model extends the original model to include several effects at high bias levels. The model automatically simplifies to the simpler Ebers-Moll model when certain parameters are not specified. The parameter names used in the modified Gummel-Poon model have been chosen to be more easily understood by the program user, and to reflect better both physical and circuit design thinking.

The dc model is defined by the parameters is, bf, nf, ise, ikf, and ne which determine the forward current gain characteristics, is, br, nr, isc, ikr, and nc which determine the reverse current gain characteristics, and vaf and var which determine the output conductance for forward and reverse regions.

Level 1 model has among the standard temperature model a extension which is compatible with most foundry provided process design kits (see parameter table below tlev).

Level 1 and 2 model includes substrate saturation current iss. Three ohmic resistances rb, rc, and re are included, where rb can be high current dependent. Base charge storage is modeled by forward and reverse transit times, tf and tr, the forward transit time tf being bias dependent if desired, and nonlinear depletion layer capacitances which are determined by cje, vje, and nje for the B-E junction, cjc, vjc, and njc for the B-C junction and cjs, vjs, and mjs for the C-S (Collector-Substrate) junction.

Level 1 and 2 model defines a substrate capacitance that will be connected to device’s base or collector, to model lateral or vertical devices dependent from the parameter subs. The temperature dependence of the saturation currents, is and iss (for level 2 model), is determined by the energy-gap, eg, and the saturation current temperature exponent, xti.

Additionally base current temperature dependence is modeled by the beta temperature exponent xtb in the new model. The values specified are assumed to have been measured at the temperature tnom, which can be specified on the .options control line or overridden by a specification on the .model line.

Level 4 model (VBIC) has the following improvements beyond the GP models: Improved Early effect modeling, Quasi-saturation modeling, Parasitic substrate transistor modeling, Parasitic fixed (oxide) capacitance modeling, Includes an avalanche multiplication model, Improved temperature modeling, Base current is decoupled from collector current, Electrothermal modeling, Smooth, continuous mode.

The BJT parameters used in the modified Gummel-Poon model are listed below. The parameter names used in earlier versions of SPICE2 are still accepted.

Gummel-Poon BJT Parameters (incl. model extensions)






Name

Parameters

Units Default Example Scale factor






SUBS

Substrate connection: for vertical geometry, -1 for lateral geometry (level 2 only).

1






IS

Transport saturation current.

A 1.0e-16 1.0e-15 area






ISS

Reverse saturation current, substrate-to-collector for vertical device or substrate-to-base for lateral (level 2 only).

A 1.0e-16 1.0e-15 area






BF

Ideal maximum forward beta.

- 100 100






NF

Forward current emission coefficient.

- 1.0 1






VAF (VA)

Forward Early voltage.

V 200






IKF

Corner for forward beta current roll-off.

A 0.01 area






NKF

High current Beta rolloff exponent

- 0.5 0.58






ISE

B-E leakage saturation current.

A 0.0 1e-13 area






NE

B-E leakage emission coefficient.

- 1.5 2






BR

Ideal maximum reverse beta.

- 1 0.1






NR

Reverse current emission coefficient.

- 1 1






VAR (VB)

Reverse Early voltage.

V 200






IKR

Corner for reverse beta high current roll-off.

A 0.01 area






ISC

B-C leakage saturation current (area is "areab" for vertical devices and "areac" for lateral).

A 0.0 1e-13 area






NC

B-C leakage emission coefficient.

- 2 1.5






RB

Zero bias base resistance.

Ω 0 100 area






IRB

Current where base resistance falls halfway to its min value.

A 0.1 area






RBM

Minimum base resistance at high currents.

Ω RB 10 area






RE

Emitter resistance.

Ω 0 1 area






RC

Collector resistance.

Ω 0 10 area






CJE

B-E zero-bias depletion capacitance.

F 0 2pF area






VJE (PE)

B-E built-in potential.

V 0.75 0.6






MJE (ME)

B-E junction exponential factor.

- 0.33 0.33






TF

Ideal forward transit time.

sec 0 0.1ns






XTF

Coefficient for bias dependence of TF.

- 0






VTF

Voltage describing VBC dependence of TF.

V






ITF

High-current parameter for effect on TF.

A 0 - area






PTF

Excess phase at freq=1.0/(TF*2PI) Hz.

deg 0






CJC

B-C zero-bias depletion capacitance (area is "areab" for vertical devices and "areac" for lateral).

F 0 2pF area






VJC (PC)

B-C built-in potential.

V 0.75 0.5






MJC

B-C junction exponential factor.

- 0.33 0.5






XCJC

Fraction of B-C depletion capacitance connected to internal base node.

- 1






TR

Ideal reverse transit time.

sec 0 10ns






CJS

Zero-bias collector-substrate capacitance (area is "areac" for vertical devices and"areab" for lateral).

F 0 2pF area






VJS (PS)

Substrate junction built-in potential.

V 0.75






MJS (MS)

Substrate junction exponential factor.

- 0 0.5






XTB

Forward and reverse beta temperature exponent.

- 0






EG

Energy gap for temperature effect on IS.

eV 1.11






XTI

Temperature exponent for effect on IS.

- 3






KF

Flicker-noise coefficient.

- 0






AF

Flicker-noise exponent.

- 1






FC

Coefficient for forward-bias depletion capacitance formula.

- 0.5 0






TNOM (TREF)

Parameter measurement temperature.

C 27 50






TLEV

BJT temperature equation selector

- 0






TLEVC

BJT capac. temperature equation selector

- 0






TRE1

1st order temperature coefficient for RE.

1C 0.0 1e-3






TRE2

2nd order temperature coefficient for RE.

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TRC1

1st order temperature coefficient for RC .

1C 0.0 1e-3






TRC2

2nd order temperature coefficient for RC.

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TRB1

1st order temperature coefficient for RB.

1C 0.0 1e-3






TRB2

2nd order temperature coefficient for RB.

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TRBM1

1st order temperature coefficient for RBM

1C 0.0 1e-3






TRBM2

2nd order temperature coefficient for RBM

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TBF1

1st order temperature coefficient for BF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TBF2

2nd order temperature coefficient for BF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TBR1

1st order temperature coefficient for BR

1C 0.0 1e-3






TBR2

2nd order temperature coefficient for BR

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TIKF1

1st order temperature coefficient for IKF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TIKF2

2nd order temperature coefficient for IKF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TIKR1

1st order temperature coefficient for IKR

1C 0.0 1e-3






TIKR2

2nd order temperature coefficient for IKR

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TIRB1

1st order temperature coefficient for IRB

1C 0.0 1e-3






TIRB2

2nd order temperature coefficient for IRB

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TNC1

1st order temperature coefficient for NC

1C 0.0 1e-3






TNC2

2nd order temperature coefficient for NC

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TNE1

1st order temperature coefficient for NE

1C 0.0 1e-3






TNE2

2nd order temperature coefficient for NE

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TNF1

1st order temperature coefficient for NF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TNF2

2nd order temperature coefficient for NF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TNR1

1st order temperature coefficient for IKF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TNR2

2nd order temperature coefficient for IKF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TVAF1

1st order temperature coefficient for VAF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TVAF2

2nd order temperature coefficient for VAF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TVAR1

1st order temperature coefficient for VAR

1C 0.0 1e-3






TVAR2

2nd order temperature coefficient for VAR

1C2 0.0 1e-5






CTC

1st order temperature coefficient for CJC

1C 0.0 1e-3






CTE

1st order temperature coefficient for CJE

1C 0.0 1e-3






CTS

1st order temperature coefficient for CJS

1C 0.0 1e-3






TVJC

1st order temperature coefficient for VJC

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TVJE

1st order temperature coefficient for VJE

1C 0.0 1e-3






TITF1

1st order temperature coefficient for ITF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TITF2

2nd order temperature coefficient for ITF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TTF1

1st order temperature coefficient for TF

1C 0.0 1e-3






TTF2

2nd order temperature coefficient for TF

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TTR1

1st order temperature coefficient for TR

1C 0.0 1e-3






TTR2

2nd order temperature coefficient for TR

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TMJE1

1st order temperature coefficient for MJE

1C 0.0 1e-3






TMJE2

2nd order temperature coefficient for MJE

1C2 0.0 1e-5






TMJC1

1st order temperature coefficient for MJC

1C 0.0 1e-3






TMJC2

2nd order temperature coefficient for MJC

1C2 0.0 1e-5






Chapter 9
JFETs

9.1 Junction Field-Effect Transistors (JFETs)

General form:

JXXXXXXX nd ng ns mname <area> <off> <ic=vds,vgs> <temp=t>

Examples:

J1 7 2 3 JM1 OFF

nd, ng, and ns are the drain, gate, and source nodes, respectively. mname is the model name, area is the area factor, and off indicates an (optional) initial condition on the device for dc analysis. If the area factor is omitted, a value of 1.0 is assumed. The (optional) initial condition specification, using ic=VDS,VGS is intended for use with the uic option on the .TRAN control line, when a transient analysis is desired starting from other than the quiescent operating point. See the .ic control line for a better way to set initial conditions. The (optional) temp value is the temperature at which this device is to operate, and overrides the temperature specification on the .option control line.

9.2 JFET Models (NJF/PJF)

9.2.1 JFET level 1 model with Parker Skellern modification

The level 1 JFET model is derived from the FET model of Shichman and Hodges. The dc characteristics are defined by the parameters VTO and BETA, which determine the variation of drain current with gate voltage, LAMBDA, which determines the output conductance, and IS, the saturation current of the two gate junctions. Two ohmic resistances, RD and RS, are included.

vgst = vgs - VT O
(9.1)

βp = BET  A* (1+ LAMBDA    *vds)
(9.2)

        --1---B---
bf ac = PB - V TO
(9.3)

       (
       |{ vds *GMIN,                                                                          ifvgst ≤ 0
IDrain=   βp *vds *(vds *(bf ac*vds - B) *vgst* (2*B + 3 *bf ac* (vgst - vds)))+ vds* GMIN,    ifvgst ≥ vds
       |(         2
         βp *vgst * (B + vgst*bf ac)+ vds *GMIN,                                             ifvgst < vds
(9.4)

Note that in Spice3f and later, the fitting parameter B has been added by Parker and Skellern. For details, see [9]. If parameter B is set to 1 equation above simplifies to

        (
        | vds* GMIN,                             ifvgst ≤ 0
        {
IDrain = | βp* vds* (2*vgst - vds)+ vds *GMIN,    ifvgst ≥ vds
        ( βp* vgst2 + vds* GMIN,                  ifvgst < vds
(9.5)

Charge storage is modeled by nonlinear depletion layer capacitances for both gate junctions which vary as the -12 power of junction voltage and are defined by the parameters CGS, CGD, and PB.







Name

Parameter

Units Default Example Scaling factor












VTO

Threshold voltage VT 0

V -2.0 -2.0






BETA

Transconductance parameter (β)

AV 1.0e-4 1.0e-3 area






LAMBDA

Channel-length modulation parameter (λ)

1V 0 1.0e-4






RD

Drain ohmic resistance

Ω 0 100 area






RS

Source ohmic resistance

Ω 0 100 area






CGS

Zero-bias G-S junction capacitance Cgs

F 0 5pF area






CGD

Zero-bias G-D junction capacitance Cgd

F 0 1pF area






PB

Gate junction potential

V 1 0.6






IS

Gate saturation current IS

A 1.0e-14 1.0e-14 area






B

Doping tail parameter

- 1 1.1






KF

Flicker noise coefficient

- 0






AF

Flicker noise exponent

- 1






NLEV

Noise equation selector

- 1 3






GDSNOI

Channel noise coefficient for nlev=3

1.0 2.0






FC

Coefficient for forward-bias depletion capacitance formula

0.5






TNOM

Parameter measurement temperature

C 27 50






TCV

Threshold voltage temperature coefficient

1°C 0.0 0.1






BEX

Mobility temperature exponent

- 0.0 1.1






Additional to the standard thermal and flicker noise model an alternative thermal channel noise model is implemented and is selectable by setting NLEV parameter to 3. This follows in a correct channel thermal noise in the linear region.

                                            2
Snoise = 2* 4* k* T *BET A * Vgst* (1+-α-+-α--)* GDSNOI
        3                            1 + α
(9.6)

with

     {
      1 - ---vds---, ifvgs- V TO  ≥ vds
α =       vgs- VTO
      0,            else
(9.7)

9.2.2 JFET level 2 Parker Skellern model

The level 2 model is an improvement to level 1. Details are available from Macquarie University. Some important items are:

The model equations are described in this pdf document and in [19].





Name Description Unit Type Default








ID Device IDText Text PF1




ACGAM Capacitance modulation None 0




BETA Linear-region transconductance scale None 10-4




CGD Zero-bias gate-source capacitance Capacitance 0 F




CGS Zero-bias gate-drain capacitance Capacitance 0 F




DELTA Thermal reduction coefficient None 0 W




FC Forward bias capacitance parameter None 0.5




HFETA High-frequency VGS feedback parameter None 0




HFE1 HFGAM modulation by VGD None 0V-1




HFE2 HFGAM modulation by VGS None 0 V-1




HFGAM High-frequency VGD feedback parameter None 0




HFG1 HFGAM modulation by VSG None 0 V-1




HFG2 HFGAM modulation by VDG None 0 V-1




IBD Gate-junction breakdown current Current 0 A




IS Gate-junction saturation current Current 10-14A




LFGAM Low-frequency feedback parameter None 0




LFG1 LFGAM modulation by VSG None 0 V-1




LFG2 LFGAM modulation by VDG None 0 V-1




MVST Subthreshold modulation None 0 V-1




N Gate-junction ideality factor None 1




P Linear-region power-law exponent None 2




Q Saturated-region power-law exponent None 2




RS Source ohmic resistance Resistance 0 Ohm




RD Drain ohmic resistance Resistance 0 Ohm




TAUD Relaxation time for thermal reduction Time 0 s




TAUG Relaxation time for gamma feedback Time 0 s




VBD Gate-junction breakdown potential Voltage 1 V




VBI Gate-junction potential Voltage 1 V




VST Subthreshold potential Voltage 0 V




VTO Threshold voltage Voltage -2.0 V




XC Capacitance pinch-off reduction factor None 0




XI Saturation-knee potential factor None 1000




Z Knee transition parameter None 0.5




RG Gate ohmic resistance Resistance 0 Ohm




LG Gate inductance Inductance 0 H




LS Source inductance Inductance 0 H




LD Drain inductance Inductance 0 H




CDSS Fixed Drain-source capacitance Capacitance 0 F




AFAC Gate-width scale factor None 1




NFING Number of gate fingers scale factor None 1




TNOM Nominal Temperature (Not implemented) Temperature 300 K




TEMP Temperature Temperature 300 K




Chapter 10
MESFETs

10.1 MESFETs

General form:

ZXXXXXXX ND NG NS MNAME <AREA> <OFF> <IC=VDS, VGS>

Examples:

Z1 7 2 3 ZM1 OFF

10.2 MESFET Models (NMF/PMF)

10.2.1 Model by Statz e.a.

The MESFET model level 1 is derived from the GaAs FET model of Statz et al. as described in [11]. The dc characteristics are defined by the parameters VTO, B, and BETA, which determine the variation of drain current with gate voltage, ALPHA, which determines saturation voltage, and LAMBDA, which determines the output conductance. The formula are given by:

     (           |              |
     |{ -B(Vgs--VT)2-||   ||     Vds||3||                        3-
       1+b(Vgs-VT)|1- |1 - A 3 | |(1 + LVds)  for0 < Vds < A
Id = |  B(Vgs- VT)2                                    3
     ( 1+b(Vgs-VT)(1+ LVds)                  forV > A-
(10.1)

Two ohmic resistances, rd and rs, are included. Charge storage is modeled by total gate charge as a function of gate-drain and gate-source voltages and is defined by the parameters cgs, cgd, and pb.







Name

Parameter

Units Default Example Area












VTO

Pinch-off voltage

V -2.0 -2.0






BETA

Transconductance parameter

AV2 1.0e-4 1.0e-3 *






B

Doping tail extending parameter

1V 0.3 0.3 *






ALPHA

Saturation voltage parameter

1V 2 2 *






LAMBDA

Channel-length modulation parameter

1V 0 1.0e-4






RD

Drain ohmic resistance

Ω 0 100 *






RS

Source ohmic resistance

Ω 0 100 *






CGS

Zero-bias G-S junction capacitance

F 0 5pF *






CGD

Zero-bias G-D junction capacitance

F 0 1pF *






PB

Gate junction potential

V 1 0.6






KF

Flicker noise coefficient

- 0






AF

Flicker noise exponent

- 1






FC

Coefficient for forward-bias depletion capacitance formula

- 0.5






Device instance:

z1 2 3 0 mesmod area=1.4

Model:

.model mesmod nmf level=1 rd=46 rs=46 vt0=-1.3 
+ lambda=0.03 alpha=3 beta=1.4e-3

10.2.2 Model by Ytterdal e.a.

level 2 (and levels 3,4) Copyright 1993: T. Ytterdal, K. Lee, M. Shur and T. A. Fjeldly

to be written

M. Shur, T.A. Fjeldly, T. Ytterdal, K. Lee, "Unified GaAs MESFET Model for Circuit Simulation", Int. Journal of High Speed Electronics, vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 201-233, 1992

10.2.3 hfet1

level 5

to be written

no documentation available

10.2.4 hfet2

level6

to be written

no documentation available

Chapter 11
MOSFETs

Ngspice supports all the original mosfet models present in SPICE3f5 and almost all the newer ones that have been published and made open-source. Both bulk and SOI (Silicon on Insulator) models are available. When compiled with the cider option, ngspice implements the four terminals numerical model that can be used to simulate a MOSFET (please refer to numerical modeling documentation for additional information and examples).

11.1 MOSFET devices

General form:

MXXXXXXX nd ng ns nb mname <m=val> <l=val> <w=val> 
+ <ad=val> <as=val> <pd=val> <ps=val> <nrd=val> 
+ <nrs=val> <off> <ic=vds, vgs, vbs> <temp=t>

Examples:

M1 24 2 0 20 TYPE1 
M31 2 17 6 10 MOSN L=5U W=2U 
M1 2 9 3 0 MOSP L=10U W=5U AD=100P AS=100P PD=40U PS=40U

Note the suffixes in the example: the suffix “u” specifies microns (1e-6 m) and “p” sq-microns (1e-12 m2).

The instance card for MOS devices starts with the letter ’M’. nd, ng, ns, and nb are the drain, gate, source, and bulk (substrate) nodes, respectively. mname is the model name and m is the multiplicity parameter, which simulates “m” paralleled devices. All MOS models support the “m” multiplier parameter. Instance parameters l and w, channel length and width respectively, are expressed in meters. The areas of drain and source diffusions: ad and as, in squared meters (m2).

If any of l, w, ad, or as are not specified, default values are used. The use of defaults simplifies input file preparation, as well as the editing required if device geometries are to be changed. pd and ps are the perimeters of the drain and source junctions, in meters. nrd and nrs designate the equivalent number of squares of the drain and source diffusions; these values multiply the sheet resistance rsh specified on the .model control line for an accurate representation of the parasitic series drain and source resistance of each transistor. pd and ps default to 0.0 while nrd and nrs to 1.0. off indicates an (optional) initial condition on the device for dc analysis. The (optional) initial condition specification using ic=vds,vgs,vbs is intended for use with the uic option on the .tran control line, when a transient analysis is desired starting from other than the quiescent operating point. See the .ic control line for a better and more convenient way to specify transient initial conditions. The (optional) temp value is the temperature at which this device is to operate, and overrides the temperature specification on the .option control line.

The temperature specification is ONLY valid for level 1, 2, 3, and 6 MOSFETs, not for level 4 or 5 (BSIM) devices.

BSIM3.2 version is also supporting the instance parameter delvto and mulu0 for local mismatch and NBTI (negative bias temperature instability) modeling:






Name Parameter Units Default Example










delvto Threshold voltage shift V 0.0 0.07





mulu0 Low-field mobility multiplier (U0) - 1.0 0.9





11.2 MOSFET models (NMOS/PMOS)

MOSFET models are the central part of ngspice, probably because they are the most widely used devices in the electronics world. Ngspice provides all the MOSFETs implemented in the original Spice3f and adds several models developed by UC Berkeley’s Device Group and other independent groups.

Each model is invoked with a .model card. A minimal version is:

.model MOSN NMOS level=8 version=3.3.0

The model name MOSN corresponds to the model name in the instance card (see 11.1). Parameter NMOS selects an n-channel device, PMOS would point to a p-channel transistor. The level and version parameters select the specific model. Further model parameters are optional and replace ngspice default values. Due to the large number of parameters (more than 100 for modern models), model cards may be stored in extra files and loaded into the netlist by the .include (2.6) command. Model cards are specific for a an IC manufacturing process and are typically provided by the IC foundry. Some generic parameter sets, not linked to a specific process, are made available by the model developers, e.g. UC Berkeley’s Device Group for BSIM4 and BSIMSOI.

Ngspice provides several MOSFET device models, which differ in the formulation of the I-V characteristic, and are of varying complexity. Models available are listed in table 11.1. Current models for IC design are BSIM3 (11.2.9, down to channel length of 0.35 µm), BSIM4 (11.2.10, below 0.35 µm), BSIMSOI (11.2.12, silicon-on-insulator devices), HiSIM2 and HiSIM_HV (11.2.14, surface potential models for standard and high voltage/high power MOS devices).


|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|Level--|Name--------|Model-------------|-Version---|Developer-----|-References-|-Notes-----------------------------|
|    1  |MOS1        |Shichman -Hodges  |     -     |Berkeley      |            | This is the classical quadratic model.
|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|----2--|MOS2--------|Grove--Frhoman-----|-----------|Berkeley------|------------|-Described in-[2]------------------|
|----3--|MOS3--------|------------------|-----------|Berkeley------|------------|-A-semi-empirical model-(see-[1-])---|
|----4--|BSIM1-------|------------------|-----------|Berkeley------|------------|-Described in-[3]------------------|
|    5  |BSIM2       |                  |           |Berkeley      |            | Described in [5]                  |
|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|----6--|MOS6--------|------------------|-----------|Berkeley------|------------|-Described in-[2]------------------|
|----9--|MOS9--------|------------------|-----------|Alan-Gillespie-|------------|-----------------------------------|
|-8, 49-|BSIM3v0-----|------------------|----3.0-----|Berkeley------|------------|-extensions-by-Alan-Gillespie--------|
| 8, 49 |BSIM3v1     |                  |    3.1     |Berkeley      |            | extensions by Serban Popescu       |
|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|-8, 49-|BSIM3v32----|------------------|3.2--3.2.4--|Berkeley------|------------|-Multi version code----------------|
|-8, 49-|BSIM3-------|------------------|---3.3.0----|Berkeley------|------------|-Described in-[13]-----------------|
|10, 58-|B4SOI-------|------------------|---4.3.1----|Berkeley------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|14, 54 |BSIM4v4     |                  | 4.0 -4.4  |Berkeley      |            | Multi version code                |
|14, 54-|BSIM4v5-----|------------------|---4.5.0----|Berkeley------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|14, 54-|BSIM4v6-----|------------------|---4.6.5----|Berkeley------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|14, 54-|BSIM4-------|------------------|---4.7.0----|Berkeley------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|   44  |EKV         |                  |           |EPFL          |            | adms configured                    |
|---45--|PSP---------|------------------|---1.0.2----|Gildenblatt---|------------|-adms-configured--------------------|
|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|---55--|B3SOIFD-----|------------------|-----------|Berkeley------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|---56--|B3SOIDD-----|------------------|-----------|Berkeley------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|   57  |B3SOIPD     |                  |           |Berkeley      |            |                                   |
|---60--|STAG--------|------------------|---SOI3----|Southampton---|------------|-----------------------------------|
|-------|------------|------------------|-----------|--------------|------------|-----------------------------------|
|61, 68-|HiSIM2------|------------------|---2.7.0----|Hiroshima-----|------------|-----------------------------------|
-62, 73--HiSIM_HV---------------------------1.2.2-----Hiroshima--------------------High-Voltage-Version-for LDMOS------
Table 11.1: MOSFET model summary

11.2.1 MOS Level 1

This model is also known as the “Shichman-Hodges” model. This is the first model written and the one often described in the introductory textbooks for electronics. This model is applicable only to long channel devices. The use of Meyer’s model for the C-V part makes it non charge conserving.

11.2.2 MOS Level 2

This model tries to overcome the limitations of the Level 1 model addressing several short-channel effects, like velocity saturation. The implementation of this model is complicated and this leads to many convergence problems. C-V calculations can be done with the original Meyer model (non charge conserving).

11.2.3 MOS Level 3

This is a semi-empirical model derived from the Level 2 model. In the 80s this model has often been used for digital design and, over the years, has proved to be robust. A discontinuity in the model with respect to the KAPPA parameter has been detected (see [10]). The supplied fix has been implemented in Spice3f2 and later. Since this fix may affect parameter fitting, the option “badmos3“ may be set to use the old implementation (see the section on simulation variables and the “.options” line). Ngspice level 3 implementation takes into account length and width mask adjustments (xl and xw) and device width narrowing due to diffusion (wd).

11.2.4 MOS Level 6

This model is described in [2]. The model can express the current characteristics of short-channel MOSFETs at least down to 0. 25 μm channel-length, GaAs FET, and resistance inserted MOSFETs. The model evaluation time is about 1/3 of the evaluation time of the SPICE3 mos level 3 model. The model also enables analytical treatments of circuits in short-channel region and makes up for a missing link between a complicated MOSFET current characteristics and circuit behaviors in the deep submicron region.

11.2.5 Notes on Level 1-6 models

The dc characteristics of the level 1 through level 3 MOSFETs are defined by the device parameters vto, kp, lambda, phi and gamma. These parameters are computed by ngspice if process parameters (nsub, tox, ...) are given, but users specified values always override. vto is positive (negative) for enhancement mode and negative (positive) for depletion mode N-channel (P-channel) devices.

Charge storage is modeled by three constant capacitors, cgso, cgdo, and cgbo which represent overlap capacitances, by the nonlinear thin-oxide capacitance which is distributed among the gate, source, drain, and bulk regions, and by the nonlinear depletion-layer capacitances for both substrate junctions divided into bottom and periphery, which vary as the mj and mjsw power of junction voltage respectively, and are determined by the parameters cbd, cbs, cj, cjsw, mj, mjsw and pb.

Charge storage effects are modeled by the piecewise linear voltages-dependent capacitance model proposed by Meyer. The thin-oxide charge-storage effects are treated slightly different for the level 1 model. These voltage-dependent capacitances are included only if tox is specified in the input description and they are represented using Meyer’s formulation.

There is some overlap among the parameters describing the junctions, e.g. the reverse current can be input either as is (in A) or as js (in Am2). Whereas the first is an absolute value the second is multiplied by ad and as to give the reverse current of the drain and source junctions respectively.

This methodology has been chosen since there is no sense in relating always junction characteristics with ad and as entered on the device line; the areas can be defaulted. The same idea applies also to the zero-bias junction capacitances cbd and cbs (in F) on one hand, and cj (in Fm2) on the other.

The parasitic drain and source series resistance can be expressed as either rd and rs (in ohms) or rsh (in ohms/sq.), the latter being multiplied by the number of squares nrd and nrs input on the device line.

NGSPICE level 1, 2, 3 and 6 parameters

 






Name

Parameter

Units Default Example










LEVEL

Model index

- 1





VTO

Zero-bias threshold voltage (VT 0)

V 0.0 1.0





KP

Transconductance parameter

AV2 2.0e-5 3.1e-5





GAMMA

Bulk threshold parameter

√ --
  V 0.0 0.37





PHI

Surface potential (U)

V 0.6 0.65





LAMBDA

Channel length modulation (MOS1 and MOS2 only) (λ)

1V 0.0 0.02





RD

Drain ohmic resistance

Ω 0.0 1.0





RS

Source ohmic resistance

Ω 0.0 1.0





CBD

Zero-bias B-D junction capacitance

F 0.0 20fF





CBS

Zero-bias B-S junction capacitance

F 0.0 20fF





IS

Bulk junction saturation current (IS)

A 1.0e-14 1.0e-15





PB

Bulk junction potential

V 0.8 0.87





CGSO

Gate-source overlap capacitance per meter channel width

Fm 0.0 4.0e-11





CGDO

Gate-drain overlap capacitance per meter channel width

Fm 0.0 4.0e-11





CGBO

Gate-bulk overlap capacitance per meter channel width

Fm 0.0 2.0e-11





RSH

Drain and source diffusion sheet resistance

Ω 0.0 10





CJ

Zero-bias bulk junction bottom cap. per sq-meter of junction area

Fm2 0.0 2.0e-4





MJ

Bulk junction bottom grading coeff.

- 0.5 0.5





CJSW

Zero-bias bulk junction sidewall cap. per meter of junction perimeter

Fm 0.0 1.0e-9





MJSW

Bulk junction sidewall grading coeff.

-
0.50
(level1)
0.33
(level2,3)





JS

Bulk junction saturation current






TOX

Oxide thickness

m 1.0e-7 1.0e-7





NSUB

Substrate doping

cm-3 0.0 4.0e15





NSS

Surface state density

cm-2 0.0 1.0e10





NFS

Fast surface state density

cm-2 0.0 1.0e10





TPG

Type of gate material: +1 opp. to substrate, -1 same as substrate, 0 Al gate

- 1.0





XJ

Metallurgical junction depth

m 0.0 1M





LD

Lateral diffusion

m 0.0 0.8M





UO

Surface mobility

cm2V sec 600 700





UCRIT

Critical field for mobility degradation (MOS2 only)

Vcm 1.0e4 1.0e4





UEXP

Critical field exponent in mobility degradation (MOS2 only)

- 0.0 0.1





UTRA

Transverse field coeff. (mobility) (deleted for MOS2)

- 0.0 0.3





VMAX

Maximum drift velocity of carriers

ms 0.0 5.0e4





NEFF

Total channel-charge (fixed and mobile) coefficient (MOS2 only)

- 1.0 5.0





KF

Flicker noise coefficient

- 0.0 1.0e-26





AF

Flicker noise exponent

- 1.0 1.2





FC

Coefficient for forward-bias depletion capacitance formula

- 0.5





DELTA

Width effect on threshold voltage (MOS2 and MOS3)

- 0.0 1.0





THETA

Mobility modulation (MOS3 only)

1V 0.0 0.1





ETA

Static feedback (MOS3 only)

- 0.0 1.0





KAPPA

Saturation field factor (MOS3 only)

- 0.2 0.5





TNOM

Parameter measurement temperature

C 27 50





11.2.6 BSIM Models

Ngspice implements many of the BSIM models developed by Berkeley’s BSIM group. BSIM stands for Berkeley Short-Channel IGFET Model and groups a class of models that is continuously updated. In general, all parameters of BSIM models are obtained from process characterization, in particular level 4 and level 5 (BSIM1 and BSIM2) parameters are can be generated automatically. J. Pierret [4] describes a means of generating a “process” file, and the program ngproc2mod provided with ngspice converts this file into a sequence of BSIM1 ”.model” lines suitable for inclusion in an ngspice input file.

Parameters marked below with an * in the l/w column also have corresponding parameters with a length and width dependency. For example, vfb is the basic parameter with units of Volts, and lvfb and wvfb also exist and have units of Volt-meter.

The formula

            PL         PW
P = P0+  --------+  ---------
         Leffective   Weffective
(11.1)

is used to evaluate the parameter for the actual device specified with

Leffective = Linput - DL
(11.2)

W        = W     - DW
 effective     input
(11.3)

Note that unlike the other models in ngspice, the BSIM models are designed for use with a process characterization system that provides all the parameters, thus there are no defaults for the parameters, and leaving one out is considered an error. For an example set of parameters and the format of a process file, see the SPICE2 implementation notes[3]. For more information on BSIM2, see reference [5]. BSIM3 (11.2.9) and BSIM4 (11.2.10) represent state of the art for submicron and deep submicron IC design.

11.2.7 BSIM1 model (level 4)

BSIM1 model (the first is a long series) is an empirical model. Developers placed less emphasis on device physics and based the model on parametrical polynomial equations to model the various physical effects. This approach pays in terms of circuit simulation behavior but the accuracy degrades in the submicron region. A known problem of this model is the negative output conductance and the convergence problems, both related to poor behavior of the polynomial equations.

Ngspice BSIM (level 4) parameters




Name

Parameter

Units l/w








VFB

Flat-band voltage

V *




PHI

Surface inversion potential

V *




K1

Body effect coefficient

√V-- *




K2

Drain/source depletion charge-sharing coefficient

- *




ETA

Zero-bias drain-induced barrier-lowering coefficient

- *




MUZ

Zero-bias mobility

cm2V sec




DL

Shortening of channel

μm




DW

Narrowing of channel

μm




U0

Zero-bias transverse-field mobility degradation coefficient

1V *




U1

Zero-bias velocity saturation coefficient

μV *




X2MZ

Sens. of mobility to substrate bias at v=0

cm2V2 sec *




X2E

Sens. of drain-induced barrier lowering effect to substrate bias

1V *




X3E

Sens. of drain-induced barrier lowering effect to drain bias at Vds = Vdd

1V *




X2U0

Sens. of transverse field mobility degradation effect to substrate bias

1V2 *




X2U1

Sens. of velocity saturation effect to substrate bias

μmV2 *




MUS

Mobility at zero substrate bias and at Vds = Vdd

cm2V2sec




X2MS

Sens. of mobility to substrate bias at Vds = Vdd

cm2V2sec *




X3MS

Sens. of mobility to drain bias at Vds = Vdd

cm2V2sec *




X3U1

Sens. of velocity saturation effect on drain bias at Vds=Vdd

μmV2 *




TOX

Gate oxide thickness

μm




TEMP

Temperature at which parameters were measured

C




VDD

Measurement bias range

V




CGDO

Gate-drain overlap capacitance per meter channel width

Fm




CGSO

Gate-source overlap capacitance per meter channel width

Fm




CGBO

Gate-bulk overlap capacitance per meter channel length

Fm




XPART

Gate-oxide capacitance-charge model flag

-




N0

Zero-bias subthreshold slope coefficient

- *




NB

Sens. of subthreshold slope to substrate bias

- *




ND

Sens. of subthreshold slope to drain bias

- *




RSH

Drain and source diffusion sheet resistance

Ω




JS

Source drain junction current density

Am2




PB

Built in potential of source drain junction

V




MJ

Grading coefficient of source drain junction

-




PBSW

Built in potential of source, drain junction sidewall

V




MJSW

Grading coefficient of source drain junction sidewall

-




CJ

Source drain junction capacitance per unit area

Fm2




CJSW

source drain junction sidewall capacitance per unit length

Fm




WDF

Source drain junction default width

m




DELL

Source drain junction length reduction

m




xpart = 0 selects a 40/60 drain/source charge partition in saturation, while xpart=1 selects a 0/100 drain/source charge partition. nd, ng, and ns are the drain, gate, and source nodes, respectively. mname is the model name, area is the area factor, and off indicates an (optional) initial condition on the device for dc analysis. If the area factor is omitted, a value of 1.0 is assumed. The (optional) initial condition specification, using ic=vds,vgs is intended for use with the uic option on the .tran control line, when a transient analysis is desired starting from other than the quiescent operating point. See the .ic control line for a better way to set initial conditions.

11.2.8 BSIM2 model (level 5)

This model contains many improvements over BSIM1 and is suitable for analog simulation. Nevertheless, even BSIM2 breaks transistor operation into several distinct regions and this leads to discontinuities in the first derivative in C-V and I-V characteristics that can cause numerical problems during simulation.

11.2.9 BSIM3 model (levels 8, 49)

BSIM3 solves the numerical problems of previous models with the introduction of smoothing functions. It adopts a single equation to describe device characteristics in the operating regions. This approach eliminates the discontinuities in the I-V and C-V characteristics. The original model, BSIM3 evolved through three versions: BSIM3v1, BSIM3v2 and BSIM3v3. Both BSIM3v1 and BSIM3v2 had suffered from many mathematical problems and were replaced by BSIM3v3. The latter is the only surviving release and has itself a long revision history

The following table summarizes the story of this model:





Release Date

Notes

Version flag









BSIM3v3.0 10/30/1995

3.0





BSIM3v3.1 12/09/1996

3.1





BSIM3v3.2 06/16/1998

Revisions available: BSIM3v3.2.2, BSIM3v3.2.3, and BSIM3v3.2.4

3.2, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4





BSIM3v3.3 07/29/2005

Parallel processing with OpenMP is available for this model.

3.3.0





BSIM3v2 and 3v3 models has proved for accurate use in 0.18 μm technologies. The model is publicly available as source code form from University of California, Berkeley.

A detailed description is given in the user’s manual available from here .

We recommend that you use only the most recent BSIM3 model (version 3.3.0), because it contains corrections to all known bugs. To achieve that, change the version parameter in your modelcard files to

VERSION = 3.3.0.

If no version number is given in the .model card, this (newest) version is selected as the default. The older models will not be supported, they are made available for reference only.

11.2.10 BSIM4 model (levels 14, 54)

This is the newest class of the BSIM family and introduces noise modeling and extrinsic parasitics. BSIM4, as the extension of BSIM3 model, addresses the MOSFET physical effects into sub-100nm regime. It is a physics-based, accurate, scalable, robust and predictive MOSFET SPICE model for circuit simulation and CMOS technology development. It is developed by the BSIM Research Group in the Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences (EECS) at the University of California, Berkeley (see BSIM4 home page). BSIM4 has a long revision history, which is summarized below.





Release Date Notes Version flag








BSIM4.0.0 03/24/2000




BSIM4.1.0 10/11/2000




BSIM4.2.0 04/06/2001




BSIM4.2.1 10/05/2001 * 4.2.1




BSIM4.3.0 05/09/2003 * 4.3.0




BSIM4.4.0 03/04/2004 * 4.4.0




BSIM4.5.0 07/29/2005 * 4.5.0




BSIM4.6.0 12/13/2006




...




BSIM4.6.5 09/09/2009 * ** 4.6.5




BSIM4.7.0 04/08/2011 * ** 4.7




*) supported in ngspice, using e.g. the version=<version flag> flag in the parameter file.

**) Parallel processing using OpenMP support is available for this model.

Details of any revision are to be found in the Berkeley user’s manuals, a pdf download of the most recent edition is to be found here .

We recommend that you use only the most recent BSIM4 model (version 4.7.0), because it contains corrections to all known bugs. To achieve that, change the version parameter in your modelcard files to

VERSION = 4.7.

If no version number is given in the .model card, this (newest) version is selected as the default. The older models will typically not be supported, they are made available for reference only.

11.2.11 EKV model

Level 44 model (EKV) is not available in the standard distribution since it is not released in source form by the EKV group. To obtain the code please refer to the (EKV model home page, EKV group home page). A verilog-A version is available contributed by Ivan Riis Nielsen 11/2006.

11.2.12 BSIMSOI models (levels 10, 58, 55, 56, 57)

BSIMSOI is a SPICE compact model for SOI (Silicon-On-Insulator) circuit design, created by University of California at Berkeley . This model is formulated on top of the BSIM3 framework. It shares the same basic equations with the bulk model so that the physical nature and smoothness of BSIM3v3 are retained. Four models are supported in ngspice, those based on BSIM3 and modeling fully depleted (FD, level 55), partially depleted (PD, level 57) and both (DD, level 56), as well as the modern BSIMSOI version 4 model (levels 10, 58). Detailed descriptions are beyond the scope of this manual, but see e.g. BSIMSOIv4.4 User Manual for a very extensive description of the recent model version. OpenMP support is available for levels 10, 58, version 4.4.

11.2.13 SOI3 model (level 60)

see literature citation [18] for a description.

11.2.14 HiSIM models of the University of Hiroshima

There are two model implementations available - see also HiSIM Research Center:

  1. HiSIM2 model: Surface-Potential-Based MOSFET Model for Circuit Simulation version 2.7.0 - level 61 & 68 (see link to HiSIM2 for source code and manual).
  2. HiSIM_HV model: Surface-Potential-Based HV/LD-MOSFET Model for Circuit Simulation version 1.2.2 - level 62 & 73 (see link to HiSIM_HV for source code and manual).

Chapter 12
Mixed-Mode and Behavioral Modeling with XSPICE

Ngspice implements XSPICE extensions for behavioral and mixed-mode (analog and digital) modeling. In the XSPICE framework this is referred to as code level modeling. Behavioral modeling may benefit dramatically because XSPICE offers a means to add analog functionality programmed in C. Many examples (amplifiers, oscillators, filters ...) are presented in the following. Even more flexibility is available because you may define your own models and use them in addition and in combination with all the already existing ngspice functionality. Mixed mode simulation is speeded up significantly by simulating the digital part in an event driven manner, in that state equations use only a few allowed states and are evaluated only during switching, and not continuously in time and signal as in a pure analog simulator.

This chapter describes the predefined models available in ngspice, stemming from the original XSPICE simulator. The instructions for writing new code models are given in chapter 28.

To make use of the XSPICE extensions, you need to compile them in. LINUX, CYGWIN, MINGW and other users may add the flag --enable-xspice to their ./configure command and then recompile. The prebuilt ngspice for Windows distribution has XSPICE already enabled. For detailed compiling instructions see chapter 32.1.

12.1 Code Model Element & .MODEL Cards

Ngspice includes a library of predefined “Code Models” that can be placed within any circuit description in a manner similar to that used to place standard device models. Code model instance cards always begin with the letter “A”, and always make use of a .MODEL card to describe the code model desired. Section 28 of this document goes into greater detail as to how a code model similar to the predefined models may be developed, but once any model is created and linked into the simulator it may be placed using one instance card and one .MODEL card (note here we conform to the SPICE custom of referring to a single logical line of information as a “card”). As an example, the following uses the predefined “gain” code model which takes as an input some value on node 1, multiplies it by a gain of 5.0, and outputs the new value to node 2. Note that, by convention, input ports are specified first on code models. Output ports follow the inputs.

Example:
a1 1 2 amp 
.model amp gain(gain=5.0)

In this example the numerical values picked up from single-ended (i.e. ground referenced) input node 1 and output to single-ended output node 2 will be voltages, since in the Interface Specification File for this code model (i.e., gain), the default port type is specified as a voltage (more on this later). However, if you didn’t know this, the following modifications to the instance card could be used to insure it:

Example:
a1 %v(1) %v(2) amp 
.model amp gain(gain=5.0)

The specification "%v" preceding the input and output node numbers of the instance card indicate to the simulator that the inputs to the model should be single-ended voltage values. Other possibilities exist, as described later.

Some of the other features of the instance and .MODEL cards are worth noting. Of particular interest is the portion of the .MODEL card which specifies gain=5.0. This portion of the card assigns a value to a parameter of the "gain" model. There are other parameters which can be assigned values for this model, and in general code models will have several. In addition to numeric values, code model parameters can take non-numeric values (such as TRUE and FALSE), and even vector values. All of these topics will be discussed at length in the following pages. In general, however, the instance and .MODEL cards which define a code model will follow the abstract form described below. This form illustrates that the number of inputs and outputs and the number of parameters which can be specified is relatively open-ended and can be interpreted in a variety of ways (note that angle-brackets “<” and “>” enclose optional inputs):

Example:
AXXXXXXX <%v,%i,%vd,%id,%g,%gd,%h,%hd, or %d> 
+ <[> <~><%v,%i,%vd,%id,%g,%gd,%h,%hd, or %d> 
+ <NIN1 or +NIN1 -NIN1 or "null"> 
+ <~>...<NIN2.. <]> > 
+ <%v,%i,%vd,%id,%g,%gd,%h,%hd,%d or %vnam> 
+ <[> <~><%v,%i,%vd,%id,%g,%gd,%h,%hd, 
      or %d><NOUT1 or +NOUT1 -NOUT1> 
+ <~>...<NOUT2.. <]>> 
+ MODELNAME 
 
.MODEL MODELNAME MODELTYPE 
+ <( PARAMNAME1= <[> VAL1 <VAL2... <]>> PARAMNAME2..>)>

Square brackets ([ ]) are used to enclose vector input nodes. In addition, these brackets are used to delineate vectors of parameters.

The literal string “null”, when included in a node list, is interpreted as no connection at that input to the model. "Null" is not allowed as the name of a model’s input or output if the model only has one input or one output. Also, “null” should only be used to indicate a missing connection for a code model; use on other XSPICE component is not interpreted as a missing connection, but will be interpreted as an actual node name.

The tilde, “~”, when prepended to a digital node name, specifies that the logical value of that node be inverted prior to being passed to the code model. This allows for simple inversion of input and output polarities of a digital model in order to handle logically equivalent cases and others that frequently arise in digital system design. The following example defines a NAND gate, one input of which is inverted:

a1 [~1 2] 3 nand1 
.model nand1 d_nand (rise_delay=0.1 fall_delay=0.2)

The optional symbols %v, %i, %vd, etc. specify the type of port the simulator is to expect for the subsequent port or port vector. The meaning of each symbol is given in Table 12.1.




Port Type Modifiers


Modifier

Interpretation





%v

represents a single-ended voltage port - one node name or number is expected for each port.



%i

represents a single-ended current port - one node name or number is expected for each port.



%g

represents a single-ended voltage-input, current-output (VCCS) port - one node name or number is expected for each port. This type of port is automatically an input/output.



%h

represents a single-ended current-input, voltage-output (CCVS) port - one node name or number is expected for each port. This type of port is automatically an input/output.



%d

represents a digital port - one node name or number is expected for each port. This type of port may be either an input or an output.



%vnam

represents the name of a voltage source, the current through which is taken as an input. This notation is provided primarily in order to allow models defined using SPICE2G6 syntax to operate properly in XSPICE.



%vd

represents a differential voltage port - two node names or numbers are expected for each port.



%id

represents a differential current port - two node names or numbers are expected for each port.



%gd

represents a differential VCCS port - two node names or numbers are expected for each port.



%hd

represents a differential CCVS port - two node names or numbers are expected for each port.




Table 12.1: Port Type Modifiers

The symbols described in Table 12.1 may be omitted if the default port type for the model is desired. Note that non-default port types for multi-input or multi-output (vector) ports must be specified by placing one of the symbols in front of EACH vector port. On the other hand, if all ports of a vector port are to be declared as having the same non-default type, then a symbol may be specified immediately prior to the opening bracket of the vector. The following examples should make this clear:

Example 1: - Specifies two differential voltage connections, one 

             to nodes 1 & 2, and one to nodes 3 & 4.

   %vd [1 2 3 4]

Example 2: - Specifies two single-ended connections to node 1 and 

             at node 2, and one differential connection to 

             nodes 3 & 4.

   %v [1 2 %vd 3 4]

Example 3: - Identical to the previous example...parenthesis 

             are added for additional clarity.

   %v [1 2 %vd(3 4)]

Example 4: - Specifies that the node numbers are to be treated in the 

             default fashion for the particular model. 

             If this model had “%v” as a default for this 

             port, then this notation would represent four single-ended 

             voltage connections.

   [1 2 3 4]

The parameter names listed on the .MODEL card must be identical to those named in the code model itself. The parameters for each predefined code model are described in detail in Sections 12.2 (analog), 12.3 (Hybrid, A/D) and 12.4 (digital) . The steps required in order to specify parameters for user-defined models are described in Chapter 28.

The following is a list of instance card and associated .MODEL card examples showing use of predefined models within an XSPICE deck:

a1 1 2 amp 

.model amp gain(in_offset=0.1 gain=5.0 out_offset=-0.01) 
a2 %i[1 2] 3 sum1 

.model sum1 summer(in_offset=[0.1 -0.2] in_gain=[2.0 1.0] 

+ out_gain=5.0 out_offset=-0.01) 
a21 %i[1 %vd(2 5) 7 10] 3 sum2 

.model sum2 summer(out_gain=10.0) 
a5 1 2 limit5 .model limit5 limit(in_offset=0.1 gain=2.5 

+ out_lower.limit=-5.0 out_upper_limit=5.0 limit_domain=0.10 

+ fraction=FALSE) 
a7 2 %id(4 7) xfer.cntl1 

.model xfer_cntl1 pwl(x_array=[-2.0 -1.0 2.0 4.0 5.0]

+ y_array=[-0.2 -0.2 0.1 2.0 10.0] 

+ input_domain=0.05 fraction=TRUE) 
a8 3 %gd(6 7) switch3 

.model switch3 aswitch(cntl_off=0.0 cntl_on=5.0 r_off=1e6 

+ r_on=10.0 log=TRUE)

12.2 Analog Models

The following analog models are supplied with XSPICE. The descriptions included consist of the model Interface Specification File and a description of the model’s operation. This is followed by an example of a simulator-deck placement of the model, including the .MODEL card and the specification of all available parameters.

12.2.1 Gain

NAME_TABLE: 
C_Function_Name:    cm_gain 
Spice_Model_Name:   gain 
Description:        "A simple gain block" 
 
PORT_TABLE: 
Port Name:          in                out 
Description:        "input"           "output" 
Direction:          in                out 
Default_Type:       v                 v 
Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]  [v,vd,i,id] 
Vector:             no                no 
Vector.Bounds:      -                 - 
Null.Allowed:       no                no 
 
PARAMETER_TABLE: 
Parameter_Name:     in_offset        gain      out_offset 
Description:        "input offset"   "gain"    "output offset" 
Data_Type:          real             real      real 
Default_Value:      0.0              1.0       0.0 
Limits:             -                -         - 
Vector:             no               no        no 
Vector_Bounds:      -                -         - 
Null_Allowed:       yes              yes       yes
Description:
This function is a simple gain block with optional offsets on the input and the output. The input offset is added to the input, the sum is then multiplied by the gain, and the result is produced by adding the output offset. This model will operate in DC, AC, and Transient analysis modes.

Example:

 
a1 1 2 amp 
.model amp gain(in_offset=0.1 gain=5.0 
+ out_offset=-0.01)

12.2.2 Summer

NAME_TABLE: 
C_Function_Name:    cm_summer 
Spice_Model_Name:   summer 
Description:        "A summer block" 
 
PORT_TABLE: 
Port Name:          in                out 
Description:        "input vector"    "output" 
Direction:          in                out 
Default_Type:       v                 v 
Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]  [v,vd,i,id] 
Vector:             yes               no 
Vector_Bounds:      -                 - 
Null_Allowed:       no                no 
 
PARAMETER_TABLE: 
Parameter_Name:     in_offset               in_gain 
Description:        "input offset vector"   "input gain vector" 
Data_Type:          real                    real 
Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0 
Limits:             -                       - 
Vector:             yes                     yes 
Vector_Bounds:      in                      in 
Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes 
 
PARAMETER_TABLE: 
Parameter_Name:     out_gain                out_offset 
Description:        "output gain"           "output offset" 
Data_Type:          real                    real 
Default_Value:      1.0                     0.0 
Limits:             -                       - 
Vector:             no                      no 
Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 
Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes
Description:
This function is a summer block with 2-to-N input ports. Individual gains and offsets can be applied to each input and to the output. Each input is added to its respective offset and then multiplied by its gain. The results are then summed, multiplied by the output gain and added to the output offset. This model will operate in DC, AC, and Transient analysis modes.

Example usage:

a2 [1 2] 3 sum1 
.model sum1 summer(in_offset=[0.1 -0.2] in_gain=[2.0 1.0] 
+ out_gain=5.0 out_offset=-0.01)

12.2.3 Multiplier

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_mult 

Spice_Model_Name:   mult 

Description:        "multiplier block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input vector"          "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]        [v,vd,i,id]

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset               in_gain 

Description:        "input offset vector"   "input gain vector" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      in                      in 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_gain                out_offset 

Description:        "output gain"           "output offset" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0                     0.0 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

Description:
This function is a multiplier block with 2-to-N input ports. Individual gains and offsets can be applied to each input and to the output. Each input is added to its respective offset and then multiplied by its gain. The results are multiplied along with the output gain and are added to the output offset. This model will operate in DC, AC, and Transient analysis modes. However, in ac analysis it is important to remember that results are invalid unless only ONE INPUT of the multiplier is connected to a node which bears an AC signal (this is exemplified by the use of a multiplier to perform a potentiometer function: one input is DC, the other carries the AC signal).

Example SPICE Usage:

a3 [1 2 3] 4 sigmult 
.model sigmult mult(in_offset=[0.1 0.1 -0.1] 
+ in_gain=[10.0 10.0 10.0] out_gain=5.0 out_offset=0.05)

12.2.4 Divider

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_divide 

Spice_Model_Name:   divide 

Description:        "divider block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          num                   den                    out 

Description:        "numerator"           "denominator"          "output" 

Direction:          in                    in                     out 

Default_Type:       v                     v                      v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]       [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no                     no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     num_offset            num_gain 

Description:        "numerator offset"    "numerator gain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     den_offset            den_gain 

Description:        "denominator offset"  "denominator gain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     den_lower_limit 

Description:        "denominator lower limit" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-10 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     den_domain 

Description:        "denominator smoothing domain" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-10 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fraction 

Description:        "smoothing fraction/absolute value switch" 

Data_Type:          boolean 

Default_Value:      false 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_gain              out_offset 

Description:        "output gain"         "output offset" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      1.0                   0.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     -

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

Description:
This function is a two-quadrant divider. It takes two inputs; num (numerator) and den (denominator). Divide offsets its inputs, multiplies them by their respective gains, divides the results, multiplies the quotient by the output gain, and offsets the result. The denominator is limited to a value above zero via a user specified lower limit. This limit is approached through a quadratic smoothing function, the domain of which may be specified as a fraction of the lower limit value (default), or as an absolute value. This model will operate in DC, AC and Transient analysis modes. However, in ac analysis it is important to remember that results are invalid unless only ONE INPUT of the divider is connected to a node which bears an AC signal (this is exemplified by the use of the divider to perform a potentiometer function: one input is DC, the other carries the AC signal).

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 1 2 4 divider 

.model divider divide(num_offset=0.1 num_gain=2.5 den_offset=-0.1 

+ den_gain=5.0 den_lower.limit=1e-5 den_domain=1e-6 

+ fraction=FALSE out_gain=1.0 out_offset=0.0)

12.2.5 Limiter

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_limit 

Spice_Model_Name:   limit 

Description:        "limit block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset             gain 

Description:        "input offset"        "gain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_lower_limit       out_upper_limit 

Description:        "output lower limit"  "output upper limit" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     limit_range 

Description:        "upper & lower smoothing range" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      1.0e-6 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fraction 

Description:        "smoothing fraction/absolute value switch" 

Data_Type:          boolean 

Default_Value:      FALSE 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The Limiter is a single input, single output function similar to the Gain Block. However, the output of the Limiter function is restricted to the range specified by the output lower and upper limits. This model will operate in DC, AC and Transient analysis modes. Note that the limit range is the value BELOW THE UPPER LIMIT AND ABOVE THE LOWER LIMIT at which smoothing of the output begins. For this model, then, the limit range represents the delta WITH RESPECT TO THE OUTPUT LEVEL at which smoothing occurs. Thus, for an input gain of 2.0 and output limits of 1.0 and -1.0 volts, the output will begin to smooth out at ±0.9 volts, which occurs when the input value is at ±0.4.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a5 1 2 limit5 

.model limit5 limit(in_offset=0.1 gain=2.5 out_lower_limit=-5.0 

+ out_upper_limit=5.0 limit_range=0.10 fraction=FALSE)

12.2.6 Controlled Limiter

NAME_TABLE:

C_Function_Name:    cm_climit 

Spice_Model_Name:   climit 

Description:        "controlled limiter block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          in                    cntl_upper 

Description:        "input"               "upper lim. control input" 

Direction:          in                    in 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]      [v,vd,i,id,vnam] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          cntl_lower                   out 

Description:        "lower limit control input"  "output" 

Direction:          in                           out 

Default_Type:       v                            v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]             [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                           no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                            - 

Null_Allowed:       no                           no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset             gain 

Description:        "input offset"        "gain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     -

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes 

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     upper_delta           lower_delta 

Description:        "output upper delta"  "output lower delta" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   0.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     limit_range                  fraction 

Description:        "upper & lower sm. range"    "smoothing %/abs switch" 

Data_Type:          real                         boolean 

Default_Value:      1.0e-6                       FALSE 

Limits:             -                            - 

Vector:             no                           no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                            - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                          yes

Description:
The Controlled Limiter is a single input, single output function similar to the Gain Block. However, the output of the Limiter function is restricted to the range specified by the output lower and upper limits. This model will operate in DC, AC, and Transient analysis modes. Note that the limit range is the value BELOW THE CNTL_UPPER LIMIT AND ABOVE THE CNTL_LOWER LIMIT at which smoothing of the output begins (minimum positive value of voltage must exist between the CNTL_UPPER input and the CNTL_LOWER input at all times). For this model, then, the limit range represents the delta WITH RESPECT TO THE OUTPUT LEVEL at which smoothing occurs. Thus, for an input gain of 2.0 and output limits of 1.0 and -1.0 volts, the output will begin to smooth out at ±0.9 volts, which occurs when the input value is at ±0.4. Note also that the Controlled Limiter code tests the input values of cntl_lower and cntl_upper to make sure that they are spaced far enough apart to guarantee the existence of a linear range between them. The range is calculated as the difference between (cntl_upper - upper_delta - limit_range) and (cntl_lower + lower_delta + limit_range) and must be greater than or equal to zero. Note that when the limit range is specified as a fractional value, the limit range used in the above is taken as the calculated fraction of the difference between cntl upper and cntl lower. Still, the potential exists for too great a limit range value to be specified for proper operation, in which case the model will return an error message.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a6 3 6 8 4 varlimit 

. 

. 

.model varlimit climit(in_offset=0.1 gain=2.5 upper_delta=0.0 

+ lower_delta=0.0 limit_range=0.10 fraction=FALSE)

12.2.7 PWL Controlled Source

NAME_TABLE:

C_Function_Name:    cm_pwl 

Spice_Model_Name:   pwl 

Description:        "piecewise linear controlled source"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,vnam]      [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     x_array               y_array

Description:        "x-element array"     "y-element array" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      -                     - 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             yes                   yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                 [2 -] 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_domain          fraction 

Description:        "input sm. domain"    "smoothing %/abs switch" 

Data_Type:          real                  boolean 

Default_Value:      0.01                  TRUE 

Limits:             [1e-12 0.5]           - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     -

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes 

STATIC_VAR_TABLE: 

Static_Var_Name:    last_x_value 

Data_Type:          pointer Description:  "iteration holding

                       variable for limiting"

Description:
The Piece-Wise Linear Controlled Source is a single input, single output function similar to the Gain Block. However, the output of the PWL Source is not necessarily linear for all values of input. Instead, it follows an I/O relationship specified by you via the x_array and y_array coordinates. This is detailed below.
The x_array and y_array values represent vectors of coordinate points on the x and y axes, respectively. The x_array values are progressively increasing input coordinate points, and the associated y_array values represent the outputs at those points. There may be as few as two (x_array[n], y_array[n]) pairs specified, or as many as memory and simulation speed allow. This permits you to very finely approximate a non-linear function by capturing multiple input-output coordinate points.
Two aspects of the PWL Controlled Source warrant special attention. These are the handling of endpoints and the smoothing of the described transfer function near coordinate points.
In order to fully specify outputs for values of “in” outside of the bounds of the PWL function (i.e., less than x_array[0] or greater than x_array[n], where n is the largest user-specified coordinate index), the PWL Controlled Source model extends the slope found between the lowest two coordinate pairs and the highest two coordinate pairs. This has the effect of making the transfer function completely linear for “in” less than x_array[0] and “in” greater than x_array[n]. It also has the potentially subtle effect of unrealistically causing an output to reach a very large or small value for large inputs. You should thus keep in mind that the PWL Source does not inherently provide a limiting capability.
In order to diminish the potential for non-convergence of simulations when using the PWL block, a form of smoothing around the x_array, y_array coordinate points is necessary. This is due to the iterative nature of the simulator and its reliance on smooth first derivatives of transfer functions in order to arrive at a matrix solution. Consequently, the “input_domain” and “fraction” parameters are included to allow you some control over the amount and nature of the smoothing performed.
“Fraction” is a switch that is either TRUE or FALSE. When TRUE (the default setting), the simulator assumes that the specified input domain value is to be interpreted as a fractional figure. Otherwise, it is interpreted as an absolute value. Thus, if fraction=TRUE and input_domain=0.10, The simulator assumes that the smoothing radius about each coordinate point is to be set equal to 10% of the length of either the x_array segment above each coordinate point, or the x_array segment below each coordinate point. The specific segment length chosen will be the smallest of these two for each coordinate point.
On the other hand, if fraction=FALSE and input=0.10, then the simulator will begin smoothing the transfer function at 0.10 volts (or amperes) below each x_array coordinate and will continue the smoothing process for another 0.10 volts (or amperes) above each x_array coordinate point. Since the overlap of smoothing domains is not allowed, checking is done by the model to ensure that the specified input domain value is not excessive.
One subtle consequence of the use of the fraction=TRUE feature of the PWL Controlled Source is that, in certain cases, you may inadvertently create extreme smoothing of functions by choosing inappropriate coordinate value points. This can be demonstrated by considering a function described by three coordinate pairs, such as (-1,-1), (1,1), and (2,1). In this case, with a 10% input_domain value specified (fraction=TRUE, input domain=0.10), you would expect to see rounding occur between in=0.9 and in=1.1, and nowhere else. On the other hand, if you were to specify the same function using the coordinate pairs (-100,-100), (1,1) and (201,1), you would find that rounding occurs between in=-19 and in=21. Clearly in the latter case the smoothing might cause an excessive divergence from the intended linearity above and below in=1.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a7 2 4 xfer_cntl1 

. 

. 

.model xfer_cntl1 pwl(x_array=[-2.0 -1.0 2.0 4.0 5.0] 

+                     y_array=[-0.2 -0.2 0.1 2.0 10.0] 

+                     input_domain=0.05 fraction=TRUE)

12.2.8 Filesource

NAME_TABLE:

C_Function_Name:       cm_filesource

Spice_Model_Name:      filesource

Description:           "File Source"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:             out

Description:           "output"

Direction:             out

Default_Type:          v

Allowed_Types:         [v,vd,i,id]

Vector:                yes

Vector_Bounds:         [1 -]

Null_Allowed:          no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     timeoffset       timescale

Description:        "time offset"    "timescale"

Data_Type:          real             real

Default_Value:      0.0              1.0

Limits:             -                -

Vector:             no               no

Vector_Bounds:      -                -

Null_Allowed:       yes              yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     timerelative     amplstep

Description:        "relative time"  "step amplitude"

Data_Type:          boolean          boolean

Default_Value:      FALSE            FALSE

Limits:             -                -

Vector:             no               no

Vector_Bounds:      -                -

Null_Allowed:       yes              yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     amploffset       amplscale

Description:        "ampl offset"    "amplscale"

Data_Type:          real             real

Default_Value:      -                -

Limits:             -                -

Vector:             yes              yes

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -]            [1 -]

Null_Allowed:       yes              yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     file

Description:        "file name"

Data_Type:          string

Default_Value:      "filesource.txt"

Limits:             -

Vector:             no

Vector_Bounds:      -

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The File Source is similar to the Piece-Wise Linear Source, except that the waveform data is read from a file instead of being taken from parameter vectors.
The file format is line oriented ASCII. # and ; are comment characters; all characters from a comment character until the end of the line are ignored.
Each line consists of two or more real values. The first value is the time; subsequent values correspond to the outputs. Values are separated by spaces.
Time values are absolute and must be monotonically increasing, unless timerelative is set to TRUE, in which case the values specify the interval between two samples and must be positive. Waveforms may be scaled and shifted in the time dimension by setting timescale and timeoffset.
Amplitudes can also be scaled and shifted using amplscale and amploffset. Amplitudes are normally interpolated between two samples, unless amplstep is set to TRUE.
Note:
The parameter filename in file="filename" has to give an absolute path or name a file placed in an input directory specified with the environmental variable NGSPICE_INPUT_DIR (see 16.7).

Example SPICE Usage: 

a8 %vd([1 0 2 0]) filesrc

. 

. 

.model filesrc filesource (file="sine.m" amploffset=[0 0] amplscale=[1 1]

+                          timeoffset=0 timescale=1

+                          timerelative=false amplstep=false)

Example input file:

# name: sine.m

# two output ports

# column 1: time

# columns 2, 3: values

 0 0 1

 3.90625e-09 0.02454122852291229 0.9996988186962042

 7.8125e-09 0.04906767432741801 0.9987954562051724

 1.171875e-08 0.07356456359966743 0.9972904566786902 

 ...

12.2.9 multi_input_pwl block

NAME_TABLE:

C_Function_Name:    cm_multi_input_pwl

Spice_Model_Name:   multi_input_pwl

Description:        "multi_input_pwl block"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:          in                   out

Description:        "input array"        "output"

Direction:          in                   out

Default_Type:       vd                   vd

Allowed_Types:      [vd,id]              [vd,id]

Vector:             yes                  no

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                -

Null_Allowed:       no                   no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     x                    y

Description:        "x array"            "y array"

Data_Type:          real                 real

Default_Value:      0.0                  0.0

Limits:             -                    -

Vector:             yes                  yes

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                [2 -]

Null_Allowed:       no                   no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     model

Description:        "model type"

Data_Type:          string

Default_Value:      "and"

Limits:             -

Vector:             no

Vector_Bounds:      -

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
Multi-input gate voltage controlled voltage source that supports and or or gating. The x’s and y’s represent the piecewise linear variation of output (y) as a function of input (x). Only one input determines the state of the outputs, seleczable by the parameter model. and: the smallest value of all the inputs is chosen as the controlling input and determines the output value, or: the smallest value of all the inputs is chosen as the controlling input and determines the output value.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a82 [1 0 2 0 3 0] 7 0 pwlm 

. 

. 

.model pwlm multi_input_pwl((x_array=[-2.0 -1.0 2.0 4.0 5.0] 

+                            y_array=[-0.2 -0.2 0.1 2.0 10.0]

+                            model="and")

12.2.10 Analog Switch

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_aswitch 

Spice_Model_Name:   aswitch 

Description:        "analog switch"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          cntl_in               out 

Description:        "input"               "resistive output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     gd 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [gd] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     cntl_off              cntl_on 

Description:        "control ‘off’ value" "control ‘on’ value" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     r_off                 log 

Description:        "off resistance"      "log/linear switch" 

Data_Type:          real                  boolean 

Default_Value:      1.0e12                TRUE 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     r_on 

Description:        "on resistance" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      1.0

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The Analog Switch is a resistor that varies either logarithmically or linearly between specified values of a controlling input voltage or current. Note that the input is not internally limited. Therefore, if the controlling signal exceeds the specified OFF state or ON state value, the resistance may become excessively large or excessively small (in the case of logarithmic dependence), or may become negative (in the case of linear dependence). For the experienced user, these excursions may prove valuable for modeling certain devices, but in most cases you are advised to add limiting of the controlling input if the possibility of excessive control value variation exists.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a8 3 (6 7) switch3 

. 

. 

.model switch3 aswitch(cntl_off=0.0 cntl_on=5.0 r_off=1e6 

+                      r_on=10.0 log=TRUE)

12.2.11 Zener Diode

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_zener 

Spice_Model_Name:   zener 

Description:        "zener diode"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          z 

Description:        "zener" 

Direction:          inout 

Default_Type:       gd 

Allowed_Types:      [gd] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     v_breakdown           i_breakdown 

Description:        "breakdown voltage"   "breakdown current" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      -                     2.0e-2 

Limits:             [1.0e-6 1.0e6]        [1.0e-9 -] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     i_sat                 n_forward 

Description:        "saturation current"  "forward emission coefficient" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12               1.0 

Limits:             [1.0e-15 -]           [0.1 10] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     limit_switch 

Description:        "switch for on-board limiting (convergence aid)"

Data_Type:          boolean 

Default_Value:      FALSE 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

STATIC_VAR_TABLE: 

Static_Var_Name:    previous_voltage 

Data_Type:          pointer 

Description:        "iteration holding variable for limiting"

Description:
The Zener Diode models the DC characteristics of most zeners. This model differs from the Diode/Rectifier by providing a user-defined dynamic resistance in the reverse breakdown region. The forward characteristic is defined by only a single point, since most data sheets for zener diodes do not give detailed characteristics in the forward region.
The first three parameters define the DC characteristics of the zener in the breakdown region and are usually explicitly given on the data sheet.
The saturation current refers to the relatively constant reverse current that is produced when the voltage across the zener is negative, but breakdown has not been reached. The reverse leakage current determines the slight increase in reverse current as the voltage across the zener becomes more negative. It is modeled as a resistance parallel to the zener with value v breakdown / i rev.
Note that the limit switch parameter engages an internal limiting function for the zener. This can, in some cases, prevent the simulator from converging to an unrealistic solution if the voltage across or current into the device is excessive. If use of this feature fails to yield acceptable results, the convlimit option should be tried (add the following statement to the SPICE input deck: .options convlimit)

Example SPICE Usage: 

a9 3 4 vref10 

. 

. 

.model vref10 zener(v_breakdown=10.0 i_breakdown=0.02 

+                   r_breakdown=1.0 i_rev=1e-6 i_sat=1e-12)

12.2.12 Current Limiter

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_ilimit 

Spice_Model_Name:   ilimit 

Description:        "current limiter block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    pos_pwr 

Description:        "input"               "positive power supply" 

Direction:          in                    inout

Default_Type:       v                     g 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd]                [g,gd] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    yes

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          neg_pwr                  out 

Description:        "negative power supply"  "output" 

Direction:          inout                    inout 

Default_Type:       g                        g 

Allowed_Types:      [g,gd]                   [g,gd] 

Vector:             no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                        - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset                gain 

Description:        "input offset"           "gain" 

Data_Type:          real                     real 

Default_Value:      0.0                      1.0 

Limits:             -                        - 

Vector:             no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                        - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     r_out_source             r_out_sink 

Description:        "sourcing resistance"    "sinking resistance" 

Data_Type:          real                     real

Default_Value:      1.0                      1.0 

Limits:             [1.0e-9 1.0e9]           [1.0e-9 1.0e9] 

Vector:             no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                        - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     i_limit_source 

Description:        "current sourcing limit" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      - 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     i_limit_sink 

Description:        "current sinking limit" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      - 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     v_pwr_range              i_source_range 

Description:        "upper & lower power     "sourcing current 

                     supply smoothing range"  smoothing range" 

Data_Type:          real                     real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-6                   1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-15 -]              [1.0e-15 -] 

Vector:             no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                        - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     i_sink_range 

Description:        "sinking current smoothing range"

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9

Limits:             [1.0e-15 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     r_out_domain 

Description:        "internal/external voltage delta smoothing range" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-15 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The Current Limiter models the behavior of an operational amplifier or comparator device at a high level of abstraction. All of its pins act as inputs; three of the four also act as outputs. The model takes as input a voltage value from the “in” connector. It then applies an offset and a gain, and derives from it an equivalent internal voltage (veq), which it limits to fall between pos pwr and neg pwr. If veq is greater than the output voltage seen on the “out” connector, a sourcing current will flow from the output pin. Conversely, if the voltage is less than vout, a sinking current will flow into the output pin.
Depending on the polarity of the current flow, either a sourcing or a sinking resistance value (r_out_source, r_out_sink) is applied to govern the vout/i_out relationship. The chosen resistance will continue to control the output current until it reaches a maximum value specified by either i_limit_source or i_limit_sink. The latter mimics the current limiting behavior of many operational amplifier output stages.
During all operation, the output current is reflected either in the pos_pwr connector current or the neg_pwr current, depending on the polarity of i_out. Thus, realistic power consumption as seen in the supply rails is included in the model.
The user-specified smoothing parameters relate to model operation as follows: v_pwr_range controls the voltage below vpos_pwr and above vneg_pwr inputs beyond which veq [= gain * (vin + voffset)] is smoothed; i_source_range specifies the current below i_limit_source at which smoothing begins, as well as specifying the current increment above i_out=0.0 at which i_pos_pwr begins to transition to zero; i_sink_range serves the same purpose with respect to i_limit_sink and i_neg_pwr that i_source_range serves for i_limit_source & i_pos_pwr; r_out_domain specifies the incremental value above and below (veq-vout)=0.0 at which r_out will be set to r_out_source and r_out_sink, respectively. For values of (veq-vout) less than r_out_domain and greater than -r_out_domain, r_out is interpolated smoothly between r_out_source & r_out_sink.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a10 3 10 20 4 amp3 

. 

. 

.model amp3 ilimit(in_offset=0.0 gain=16.0 r_out_source=1.0 

+                  r_out_sink=1.0 i_limit_source=1e-3 

+                  i_limit_sink=10e-3 v_pwr_range=0.2 

+                  i_source_range=1e-6 i_sink_range=1e-6 

+                  r_out_domain=1e-6)

12.2.13 Hysteresis Block

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_hyst 

Spice_Model_Name:   hyst 

Description:        "hysteresis block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_low                in_high 

Description:        "input low value"     "input high value" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     hyst                  out_lower_limit 

Description:        "hysteresis"          "output lower limit" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.1                   0.0 

Limits:             [0.0 -]               - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_upper_limit       input_domain 

Description:        "output upper limit"  "input smoothing domain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real

Default_Value:      1.0                   0.01 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fraction 

Description:        "smoothing fraction/absolute value switch" 

Data_Type:          boolean 

Default_Value:      TRUE 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The Hysteresis block is a simple buffer stage that provides hysteresis of the output with respect to the input. The in low and in high parameter values specify the center voltage or current inputs about which the hysteresis effect operates. The output values are limited to out lower limit and out upper limit. The value of “hyst” is added to the in low and in high points in order to specify the points at which the slope of the hysteresis function would normally change abruptly as the input transitions from a low to a high value. Likewise, the value of “hyst” is subtracted from the in high and in low values in order to specify the points at which the slope of the hysteresis function would normally change abruptly as the input transitions from a high to a low value. In fact, the slope of the hysteresis function is never allowed to change abruptly but is smoothly varied whenever the input domain smoothing parameter is set greater than zero.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a11 1 2 schmitt1 

. 

. 

.model schmitt1 hyst(in_low=0.7 in_high=2.4 hyst=0.5 

+                    out_lower_limit=0.5 out_upper_limit=3.0 

+                    input_domain=0.01 fraction=TRUE)

12.2.14 Differentiator

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_dt 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_dt 

Description:        "time-derivative block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     gain                  out_offset 

Description:        "gain"                "output offset" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      1.0                   0.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_lower_limit       out_upper_limit 

Description:        "output lower limit"  "output upper limit" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      -                     - 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:    

Parameter_Name:     limit_range 

Description:        "upper & lower limit smoothing range" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      1.0e-6 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The Differentiator block is a simple derivative stage that approximates the time derivative of an input signal by calculating the incremental slope of that signal since the previous time point. The block also includes gain and output offset parameters to allow for tailoring of the required signal, and output upper and lower limits to prevent convergence errors resulting from excessively large output values. The incremental value of output below the output upper limit and above the output lower limit at which smoothing begins is specified via the limit range parameter. In AC analysis, the value returned is equal to the radian frequency of analysis multiplied by the gain.
Note that since truncation error checking is not included in the d_dt block, it is not recommended that the model be used to provide an integration function through the use of a feedback loop. Such an arrangement could produce erroneous results. Instead, you should make use of the "integrate" model, which does include truncation error checking for enhanced accuracy.

Example SPICE Usage:

a12 7 12 slope_gen 

. 

. 

.model slope_gen d_dt(out_offset=0.0 gain=1.0 

+                     out_lower_limit=1e-12 out_upper_limit=1e12 

+                     limit_range=1e-9)

12.2.15 Integrator

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_int 

Spice_Model_Name:   int 

Description:        "time-integration block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset             gain 

Description:        "input offset"        "gain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_lower_limit       out_upper_limit 

Description:        "output lower limit"  "output upper limit" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      -                     - 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     limit_range 

Description:        "upper & lower limit smoothing range" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      1.0e-6 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_ic 

Description:        "output initial condition" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      0.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The Integrator block is a simple integration stage that approximates the integral with respect to time of an input signal. The block also includes gain and input offset parameters to allow for tailoring of the required signal, and output upper and lower limits to prevent convergence errors resulting from excessively large output values. Note that these limits specify integrator behavior similar to that found in an operational amplifier-based integration stage, in that once a limit is reached, additional storage does not occur. Thus, the input of a negative value to an integrator which is currently driving at the out upper limit level will immediately cause a drop in the output, regardless of how long the integrator was previously summing positive inputs. The incremental value of output below the output upper limit and above the output lower limit at which smoothing begins is specified via the limit range parameter. In AC analysis, the value returned is equal to the gain divided by the radian frequency of analysis.
Note that truncation error checking is included in the “int” block. This should provide for a more accurate simulation of the time integration function, since the model will inherently request smaller time increments between simulation points if truncation errors would otherwise be excessive.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a13 7 12 time_count 

. 

. 

.model time_count int(in_offset=0.0 gain=1.0 

+                     out_lower_limit=-1e12 out_upper_limit=1e12 

+                     limit_range=1e-9 out_ic=0.0)

12.2.16 S-Domain Transfer Function

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_s_xfer 

Spice_Model_Name:   s_xfer 

Description:        "s-domain transfer function"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset             gain 

Description:        "input offset"        "gain" 

Data_Type:          real                  real 

Default_Value:      0.0                   1.0 

Limits:             -                     - 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                   yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     num_coeff 

Description:        "numerator polynomial coefficients" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      - 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -]

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     den_coeff 

Description:        "denominator polynomial coefficients" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      - 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -] 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     int_ic 

Description:        "integrator stage initial conditions" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      0.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      den_coeff 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     denormalized_freq 

Description:        "denorm. corner freq.(radians) for 1 rad/s coeffs" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The s-domain transfer function is a single input, single output transfer function in the Laplace transform variable “s” that allows for flexible modulation of the frequency domain characteristics of a signal. Ac and transient simulations are supported. The code model may be configured to produce an arbitrary s-domain transfer function with the following restrictions:

1. The degree of the numerator polynomial cannot exceed that 

   of the denominator polynomial in the variable "s".

2. The coefficients for a polynomial must be stated 

   explicitly. That is, if a coefficient is zero, it must be 

   included as an input to the num coeff or den coeff vector. 

The order of the coefficient parameters is from that associated with the highest-powered term decreasing to that of the lowest. Thus, for the coefficient parameters specified below, the equation in “s” is shown:

.model filter s_xfer(gain=0.139713 int_ic=[0 0 0]

+ num_coeff=[1.0 0.0 0.07464102] 

+ den_coeff=[1.0 0.998942 0.01170077])

              ...specifies a transfer function of the form...

N(s) = 0.139713⋅{     2
s2+0.s998+904.724s6+401.0002117077-}

The s-domain transfer function includes gain and in_offset (input offset) parameters to allow for tailoring of the required signal. There are no limits on the internal signal values or on the output value of the s-domain transfer function, so you are cautioned to specify gain and coefficient values that will not cause the model to produce excessively large values. In AC analysis, the value returned is equal to the real and imaginary components of the total s-domain transfer function at each frequency of interest.

The denormalized_freq term allows you to specify coefficients for a normalized filter (i.e. one in which the frequency of interest is 1 rad/s). Once these coefficients are included, specifying the denormalized frequency value “shifts” the corner frequency to the actual one of interest. As an example, the following transfer function describes a Chebyshev low-pass filter with a corner (pass-band) frequency of 1 rad/s:

N(s) = 0.139713⋅{-------1.0-------
s2+1.09773s+1.10251}

In order to define an s_xfer model for the above, but with the corner frequency equal to 1500 rad/s (9425 Hz), the following instance and model lines would be needed:

a12 node1 node2 cheby1 

.model cheby1 s_xfer(num_coeff=[1] den_coeff=[1 1.09773 1.10251] 

+                    int_ic=[0 0 0] denormalized_freq=1500)

In the above, you add the normalized coefficients and scale the filter through the use of the denormalized freq parameter. Similar results could have been achieved by performing the denormalization prior to specification of the coefficients, and setting denormalized freq to the value 1.0 (or not specifying the frequency, as the default is 1.0 rad/s) Note in the above that frequencies are ALWAYS SPECIFIED AS RADIANS/SECOND.

Truncation error checking is included in the s-domain transfer block. This should provide for more accurate simulations, since the model will inherently request smaller time increments between simulation points if truncation errors would otherwise be excessive.

The int_ic parameter is an array that must be of the same size as the array of values specified for the den_coeff parameter. Even if a 0 start value is required, you have to add the specific int_ic vector to the set of coefficients (see the examples above and below).

Example SPICE Usage: 

a14 9 22 cheby_LP_3KHz

. 

. 

.model cheby_LP_3KHz s_xfer(in_offset=0.0 gain=1.0 int_ic=[0 0 0]

+                           num_coeff=[1.0] 

+                           den_coeff=[1.0 1.42562 1.51620])

12.2.17 Slew Rate Block

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_slew 

Spice_Model_Name:   slew 

Description:        "A simple slew rate follower block"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                    out 

Description:        "input"               "output" 

Direction:          in                    out 

Default_Type:       v                     v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]           [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_slope 

Description:        "maximum rising slope value" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e9 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fall_slope 

Description:        "maximum falling slope value" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e9 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     range 

Description:        "smoothing range" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      0.1 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
This function is a simple slew rate block that limits the absolute slope of the output with respect to time to some maximum or value. The actual slew rate effects of over-driving an amplifier circuit can thus be accurately modeled by cascading the amplifier with this model. The units used to describe the maximum rising and falling slope values are expressed in volts or amperes per second. Thus a desired slew rate of 0.5 V/μs will be expressed as 0.5e+6, etc.
The slew rate block will continue to raise or lower its output until the difference between the input and the output values is zero. Thereafter, it will resume following the input signal, unless the slope again exceeds its rise or fall slope limits. The range input specifies a smoothing region above or below the input value. Whenever the model is slewing and the output comes to within the input + or - the range value, the partial derivative of the output with respect to the input will begin to smoothly transition from 0.0 to 1.0. When the model is no longer slewing (output = input), dout/din will equal 1.0.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a15 1 2 slew1 

.model slew1 slew(rise_slope=0.5e6 fall_slope=0.5e6)

12.2.18 Inductive Coupling

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_lcouple 

Spice_Model_Name:   lcouple 

Description:        "inductive coupling (for use with ’core’ model)"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          l                     mmf_out 

Description:        "inductor"            "mmf output (in ampere-turns)" 

Direction:          inout                 inout 

Default_Type:       hd                    hd 

Allowed_Types:      [h,hd]                [hd] 

Vector:             no                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                     - 

Null_Allowed:       no                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     num_turns 

Description:        "number of inductor turns" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
This function is a conceptual model which is used as a building block to create a wide variety of inductive and magnetic circuit models. This function is normally used in conjunction with the “core” model, but can also be used with resistors, hysteresis blocks, etc. to build up systems which mock the behavior of linear and nonlinear components.
The lcouple takes as an input (on the “l” port) a current. This current value is multiplied by the num_turns value, N, to produce an output value (a voltage value which appears on the mmf_out port). The mmf_out acts similar to a magnetomotive force in a magnetic circuit; when the lcouple is connected to the “core” model, or to some other resistive device, a current will flow. This current value (which is modulated by whatever the lcouple is connected to) is then used by the lcouple to calculate a voltage “seen” at the “l” port. The voltage is a function of the derivative with respect to time of the current value seen at mmf_out.
The most common use for lcouples will be as a building block in the construction of transformer models. To create a transformer with a single input and a single output, you would require two lcouple models plus one “core” model. The process of building up such a transformer is described under the description of the “core” model, below.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a150 (7 0) (9 10) lcouple1 

.model lcouple1 lcouple(num_turns=10.0)

12.2.19 Magnetic Core

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_core 

Spice_Model_Name:   core 

Description:        "magnetic core"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          mc 

Description:        "magnetic core" 

Direction:          inout 

Default_Type:       gd 

Allowed_Types:      [g,gd] 

Vector: no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     H_array                 B_array 

Description:        "magnetic field array"  "flux density array" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      -                       - 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   [2 -] 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     area                    length 

Description:        "cross-sectional area"  "core length" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      -                       -  

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_domain 

Description:        "input sm. domain" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      0.01 

Limits:             [1e-12 0.5] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fraction 

Description:        "smoothing fraction/abs switch" 

Data_Type:          boolean 

Default_Value:      TRUE 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     mode 

Description:        "mode switch (1 = pwl, 2 = hyst)" 

Data_Type:          int 

Default_Value:      1 

Limits:             [1 2] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_low                  in_high 

Description:        "input low value"       "input high value" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     hyst                    out_lower_limit 

Description:        "hysteresis"            "output lower limit" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.1                     0.0 

Limits:             [0 -]                   - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       -

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_upper_limit 

Description:        "output upper limit" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
This function is a conceptual model which is used as a building block to create a wide variety of inductive and magnetic circuit models. This function is almost always expected to be used in conjunction with the “lcouple” model to build up systems which mock the behavior of linear and nonlinear magnetic components. There are two fundamental modes of operation for the core model. These are the pwl mode (which is the default, and which is the most likely to be of use to you) and the hysteresis mode. These are detailed below.

PWL Mode (mode = 1)

The core model in PWL mode takes as input a voltage which it treats as a magnetomotive force (mmf) value. This value is divided by the total effective length of the core to produce a value for the Magnetic Field Intensity, H. This value of H is then used to find the corresponding Flux Density, B, using the piecewise linear relationship described by you in the H array / B array coordinate pairs. B is then multiplied by the cross-sectional area of the core to find the Flux value, which is output as a current. The pertinent mathematical equations are listed below:

H = mmf =L, where L = Length

Here H, the Magnetic Field Intensity, is expressed in ampere-turns/meter.

B = f (H)

The B value is derived from a piecewise linear transfer function described to the model via the (H_array[],B_array[]) parameter coordinate pairs. This transfer function does not include hysteretic effects; for that, you would need to substitute a HYST model for the core.

ϕ = BA, where A = Area

The final current allowed to flow through the core is equal to ϕ. This value in turn is used by the "lcouple" code model to obtain a value for the voltage reflected back across its terminals to the driving electrical circuit.

The following example code shows the use of two “lcouple” models and one core model to produce a simple primary/secondary transformer.

Example SPICE Usage:

a1 (2 0) (3 0) primary 

.model primary lcouple (num_turns = 155)

a2 (3 4) iron_core 

.model iron_core core (H_array = [-1000 -500 -375 -250 -188 -125 -63 0 

+                                 63 125 188 250 375 500 1000] 

+                      B_array = [-3.13e-3 -2.63e-3 -2.33e-3 -1.93e-3 

+                                 -1.5e-3 -6.25e-4 -2.5e-4 0 2.5e-4 

+                                 6.25e-4 1.5e-3 1.93e-3 2.33e-3 

+                                 2.63e-3 3.13e-3] 

+                      area = 0.01 length = 0.01)

a3 (5 0) (4 0) secondary 

.model secondary lcouple (num_turns = 310) 

HYSTERESIS Mode (mode = 2)

The core model in HYSTERESIS mode takes as input a voltage which it treats as a magnetomotive force (mmf) value. This value is used as input to the equivalent of a hysteresis code model block. The parameters defining the input low and high values, the output low and high values, and the amount of hysteresis are as in that model. The output from this mode, as in PWL mode, is a current value which is seen across the mc port. An example of the core model used in this fashion is shown below:

Example SPICE Usage: 

a1 (2 0) (3 0) primary

.model primary lcouple (num_turns = 155)

a2 (3 4) iron_core 

.model iron_core core (mode = 2 in_low=-7.0 in_high=7.0 

+                      out_lower_limit=-2.5e-4 out_upper_limit=2.5e-4 

+                      hyst = 2.3 )

a3 (5 0) (4 0) secondary 

.model secondary lcouple (num_turns = 310)

One final note to be made about the two core model nodes is that certain parameters are available in one mode, but not in the other. In particular, the in_low, in_high, out_lower_limit, out_upper_limit, and hysteresis parameters are not available in PWL mode. Likewise, the H_array, B_array, area, and length values are unavailable in HYSTERESIS mode. The input domain and fraction parameters are common to both modes (though their behavior is somewhat different; for explanation of the input domain and fraction values for the HYSTERESIS mode, you should refer to the hysteresis code model discussion).

12.2.20 Controlled Sine Wave Oscillator

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_sine 

Spice_Model_Name:   sine 

Description:        "controlled sine wave oscillator"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          cntl_in                 out 

Description:        "control input"         "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     cntl_array              freq_array 

Description:        "control array"         "frequency array" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0e3 

Limits:             -                       [0 -] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   cntl_array 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_low                 out_high 

Description:        "output peak low value" "output peak high value" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      -1.0                    1.0 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

Description:
This function is a controlled sine wave oscillator with parametrizable values of low and high peak output. It takes an input voltage or current value. This value is used as the independent variable in the piecewise linear curve described by the coordinate points of the cntl array and freq array pairs. From the curve, a frequency value is determined, and the oscillator will output a sine wave at that frequency. From the above, it is easy to see that array sizes of 2 for both the cntl array and the freq array will yield a linear variation of the frequency with respect to the control input. Any sizes greater than 2 will yield a piecewise linear transfer characteristic. For more detail, refer to the description of the piecewise linear controlled source, which uses a similar method to derive an output value given a control input.

Example SPICE Usage: 

asine 1 2 in_sine 

.model in_sine sine(cntl_array = [-1 0 5 6] 

+                   freq_array=[10 10 1000 1000] out_low = -5.0 

+                   out_high = 5.0)

12.2.21 Controlled Triangle Wave Oscillator

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_triangle 

Spice_Model_Name:   triangle 

Description:        "controlled triangle wave oscillator"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          cntl_in                 out 

Description:        "control input"         "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     cntl_array              freq_array 

Description:        "control array"         "frequency array" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0e3 

Limits:             -                       [0 -] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   cntl_array 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_low                 out_high 

Description:        "output peak low value" "output peak high value" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      -1.0                    1.0 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     duty_cycle 

Description:        "rise time duty cycle" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      0.5 

Limits:             [1e-10 0.999999999] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
This function is a controlled triangle/ramp wave oscillator with parametrizable values of low and high peak output and rise time duty cycle. It takes an input voltage or current value. This value is used as the independent variable in the piecewise linear curve described by the coordinate points of the cntl_array and freq_array pairs.
From the curve, a frequency value is determined, and the oscillator will output a triangle wave at that frequency. From the above, it is easy to see that array sizes of 2 for both the cntl_array and the freq_array will yield a linear variation of the frequency with respect to the control input. Any sizes greater than 2 will yield a piecewise linear transfer characteristic. For more detail, refer to the description of the piecewise linear controlled source, which uses a similar method to derive an output value given a control input.

Example SPICE Usage: 

ain 1 2 ramp1 

.model ramp1 triangle(cntl_array = [-1 0 5 6] 

+                     freq_array=[10 10 1000 1000] out_low = -5.0 

+                     out_high = 5.0 duty_cycle = 0.9)

12.2.22 Controlled Square Wave Oscillator

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_square 

Spice_Model_Name:   square 

Description:        "controlled square wave oscillator"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          cntl_in                 out 

Description:        "control input"         "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     cntl_array              freq_array 

Description:        "control array"         "frequency array" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0e3 

Limits:             -                       [0 -] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   cntl_array 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_low                 out_high 

Description:        "output peak low value" "output peak high value" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      -1.0                    1.0 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER.TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     duty_cycle              rise_time 

Description:        "duty cycle"            "output rise time" 

Data_Type:          real                    real

Default_Value:      0.5                     1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1e-6 0.999999]         - 

Vector: no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fall_time 

Description:        "output fall time" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
This function is a controlled square wave oscillator with parametrizable values of low and high peak output, duty cycle, rise time, and fall time. It takes an input voltage or current value. This value is used as the independent variable in the piecewise linear curve described by the coordinate points of the cntl_array and freq_array pairs. From the curve, a frequency value is determined, and the oscillator will output a square wave at that frequency.
From the above, it is easy to see that array sizes of 2 for both the cntl_array and the freq_array will yield a linear variation of the frequency with respect to the control input. Any sizes greater than 2 will yield a piecewise linear transfer characteristic. For more detail, refer to the description of the piecewise linear controlled source, which uses a similar method to derive an output value given a control input.

Example SPICE Usage:

ain 1 2 pulse1 

.model pulse1 square(cntl_array = [-1 0 5 6] 

+                    freq_array=[10 10 1000 1000] out_low = 0.0 

+                    out_high = 4.5 duty_cycle = 0.2 

+                    rise_time = 1e-6 fall_time = 2e-6)

12.2.23 Controlled One-Shot

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_oneshot 

Spice_Model_Name:   oneshot 

Description:        "controlled one-shot"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          clk                     cntl_in 

Description:        "clock input"           "control input" 

Direction:          in                      in 

Default_Type:       v                       v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      yes

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          clear                   out 

Description:        "clear signal"          "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       v

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [v,vd,i,id]

Vector:             no                      no

Vector_Bounds:      -                       -

Null_Allowed:       yes                     no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     clk_trig                retrig

Description:        "clock trigger value"   "retrigger switch"

Data_Type:          real                    boolean

Default_Value:      0.5                     FALSE

Limits:             -                       -

Vector:             no                      no

Vector_Bounds:      -                       -

Null_Allowed:       no                      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     pos_edge_trig 

Description:        "positive/negative edge trigger switch" 

Data_Type:          boolean

Default_Value:      TRUE 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     cntl_array              pw_array 

Description:        "control array"         "pulse width array" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0e-6 

Limits:             -                       [0.00 -] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       cntl_array 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_low                 out_high 

Description:        "output low value"      "output high value" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fall_time               rise_time 

Description:        "output fall time"      "output rise time" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                        yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay 

Description:        "output delay from trigger" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             -

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     fall_delay 

Description:        "output delay from pw" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             -

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
This function is a controlled oneshot with parametrizable values of low and high peak output, input trigger value level, delay, and output rise and fall times. It takes an input voltage or current value. This value is used as the independent variable in the piecewise linear curve described by the coordinate points of the cntl_array and pw_array pairs. From the curve, a pulse width value is determined. The one-shot will output a pulse of that width, triggered by the clock signal (rising or falling edge), delayed by the delay value, and with specified rise and fall times. A positive slope on the clear input will immediately terminate the pulse, which resets with its fall time.
From the above, it is easy to see that array sizes of 2 for both the cntl_array and the pw_array will yield a linear variation of the pulse width with respect to the control input. Any sizes greater than 2 will yield a piecewise linear transfer characteristic. For more detail, refer to the description of the piecewise linear controlled source, which uses a similar method to derive an output value given a control input.

Example SPICE Usage: 

ain 1 2 3 4 pulse2 

.model pulse2 oneshot(cntl_array = [-1 0 10 11] 

+                     pw_array=[1e-6 1e-6 1e-4 1e-4] 

+                     clk_trig = 0.9 pos_edge_trig = FALSE 

+                     out_low = 0.0 out_high = 4.5

+                     rise_delay = 20.0-9 fall_delay = 35.0e-9)

12.2.24 Capacitance Meter

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_cmeter 

Spice_Model_Name:   cmeter 

Description:        "capacitance meter"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     gain 

Description:        "gain" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The capacitance meter is a sensing device which is attached to a circuit node and produces as an output a scaled value equal to the total capacitance seen on its input multiplied by the gain parameter. This model is primarily intended as a building block for other models which must sense a capacitance value and alter their behavior based upon it.

Example SPICE Usage: 

atest1 1 2 ctest 

.model ctest cmeter(gain=1.0e12)

12.2.25 Inductance Meter

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:     cm_lmeter 

Spice_Model_Name:    lmeter 

Description:         "inductance meter"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:           in                     out 

Description:         "input"                "output" 

Direction:           in                     out 

Default_Type:        v                      v 

Allowed_Types:       [v,vd,i,id]            [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector:              no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:       -                      - 

Null_Allowed:        no                     no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     gain 

Description:        "gain" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The inductance meter is a sensing device which is attached to a circuit node and produces as an output a scaled value equal to the total inductance seen on its input multiplied by the gain parameter. This model is primarily intended as a building block for other models which must sense an inductance value and alter their behavior based upon it.

Example SPICE Usage:

atest2 1 2 ltest 

.model ltest lmeter(gain=1.0e6)

12.2.26 Memristor

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:     cm_memristor 

Spice_Model_Name:    memristor 

Description:         "Memristor Interface"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:             memris

Description:           "memristor terminals"

Direction:             inout

Default_Type:          gd

Allowed_Types:         [gd]

Vector:                no

Vector_Bounds:         -

Null_Allowed:          no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:        rmin                      rmax

Description:           "minimum resistance"      "maximum resistance"

Data_Type:             real                      real

Default_Value:         10.0                      10000.0

Limits:                -                         -

Vector:                no                        no

Vector_Bounds:         -                         -

Null_Allowed:          no                        no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:        rinit                     vt

Description:           "initial resistance"      "threshold"

Data_Type:             real                      real

Default_Value:         7000.0                    0.0

Limits:                -                         -

Vector:                no                        no

Vector_Bounds:         -                         -

Null_Allowed:          no                        no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:        alpha                     beta

Description:           "model parameter 1"       "model parameter 2"

Data_Type:             real                      real

Default_Value:         0.0                       1.0

Limits:                -                         -

Vector:                no                        no

Vector_Bounds:         -                         -

Null_Allowed:          no                        no

Description:
The memristor is a two-terminal resistor with memory, whose resistance depends on the time integral of the voltage across its terminals. rmin and rmax provide the lower and upper limits of the resistance, rinit is its starting value (no voltage applied so far). The voltage has to be above a threshold vt to become effective in changing the resistance. alpha and beta are two model parameters. The memristor code model is derived from a SPICE subcircuit published in [23].

Example SPICE Usage:

amen 1 2 memr

.model memr memristor (rmin=1k rmax=10k rinit=7k 

+ alpha=0 beta=2e13 vt=1.6)

12.3 Hybrid Models

The following hybrid models are supplied with XSPICE. The descriptions included below consist of the model Interface Specification File and a description of the model’s operation. This is followed by an example of a simulator-deck placement of the model, including the .MODEL card and the specification of all available parameters.

A note should be made with respect to the use of hybrid models for other than simple digital-to-analog and analog-to-digital translations. The hybrid models represented in this section address that specific need, but in the development of user-defined nodes you may find a need to translate not only between digital and analog nodes, but also between real and digital, real and int, etc. In most cases such translations will not need to be as involved or as detailed as shown in the following.

12.3.1 Digital-to-Analog Node Bridge

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_dac_bridge 

Spice_Model_Name:   dac_bridge 

Description:        "digital-to-analog node bridge"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       v   

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [v,vd,i,id,d] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_low 

Description:        "0-valued analog output" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      0.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out.high 

Description:        "1-valued analog output" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     out_undef                 input_load 

Description:        "U-valued analog output"  "input load (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                      real 

Default_Value:      0.5                       1.0e-12

Limits:             -                         - 

Vector:             no                        no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                         - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     t_rise                    t_fall 

Description:        "rise time 0->1"          "fall time 1->0" 

Data_Type:          real                      real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                    1.0e-9 

Limits:             -                         - 

Vector:             no                        no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                         - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                       yes

Description:
The dac_bridge is the first of two node bridge devices designed to allow for the ready transfer of digital information to analog values and back again. The second device is the adc_bridge (which takes an analog value and maps it to a digital one).The dac_bridge takes as input a digital value from a digital node. This value by definition may take on only one of the values “0”, “1” or “U”. The dac_bridge then outputs the value “out_low”, “out_high” or “out_undef”, or ramps linearly toward one of these “final” values from its current analog output level. The speed at which this ramping occurs depends on the values of “t_rise” and “t_fall”. These parameters are interpreted by the model such that the rise or fall slope generated is always constant. Note that the dac_bridge includes test code in its cfunc.mod file for determining the presence of the out_undef parameter. If this parameter is not specified by you, and if out_high and out_low values are specified, then out_undef is assigned the value of the arithmetic mean of out_high and out_low. This simplifies coding of output buffers, where typically a logic family will include an out_low and out_high voltage, but not an out_undef value. This model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load.

Example SPICE Usage: 

abridge1 [7] [2] dac1 

.model dac1 dac_bridge(out_low = 0.7 out_high = 3.5 out_undef = 2.2 

+                      input_load = 5.0e-12 t_rise = 50e-9 

+                      t_fall = 20e-9)

12.3.2 Analog-to-Digital Node Bridge

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_adc_bridge 

Spice_Model_Name:   adc_bridge 

Description:        "analog-to-digital node bridge"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id,d]           [d] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_low 

Description:        "maximum 0-valued analog input" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_high 

Description:        "minimum 1-valued analog input" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      2.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay               fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"             "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                     real

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                   1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]              [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                        - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                      yes

Description:
The adc_bridge is one of two node bridge devices designed to allow for the ready transfer of analog information to digital values and back again. The second device is the dac_bridge (which takes a digital value and maps it to an analog one). The adc_bridge takes as input an analog value from an analog node. This value by definition may be in the form of a voltage, or a current. If the input value is less than or equal to in_low, then a digital output value of “0” is generated. If the input is greater than or equal to in_high, a digital output value of “1” is generated. If neither of these is true, then a digital “UNKNOWN” value is output. Note that unlike the case of the dac_bridge, no ramping time or delay is associated with the adc_bridge. Rather, the continuous ramping of the input value provides for any associated delays in the digitized signal.

Example SPICE Usage: 

abridge2 [1] [8] adc_buff 

.model adc_buff adc_bridge(in_low = 0.3 in_high = 3.5)

12.3.3 Controlled Digital Oscillator

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_osc 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_osc 

Description:        "controlled digital oscillator"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          cntl_in                 out 

Description:        "control input"         "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       v                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]             [d] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     cntl_array              freq_array 

Description:        "control array"         "frequency array" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.0                     1.0e6 

Limits:             -                       [0 -] 

Vector:             yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   cntl_array 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     duty_cycle              init_phase 

Description:        "duty cycle"            "initial phase of output" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      0.5                     0 

Limits:             [1e-6 0.999999]         [-180.0 +360.0] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real

Default_Value:      1e-9                    1e-9 

Limits:             [0 -]                   [0 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

Description:
The digital oscillator is a hybrid model which accepts as input a voltage or current. This input is compared to the voltage-to-frequency transfer characteristic specified by the cntl_array/freq_array coordinate pairs, and a frequency is obtained which represents a linear interpolation or extrapolation based on those pairs. A digital time-varying signal is then produced with this fundamental frequency.
The output waveform, which is the equivalent of a digital clock signal, has rise and fall delays which can be specified independently. In addition, the duty cycle and the phase of the waveform are also variable and can be set by you.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a5 1 8 var_clock 

.model var_clock d_osc(cntl_array = [-2 -1 1 2] 

+                      freq_array = [1e3 1e3 10e3 10e3] 

+                      duty_cycle = 0.4 init_phase = 180.0 

+                      rise_delay = 10e-9 fall_delay=8e-9)

12.3.4 Node bridge from digital to real with enable

NAME_TABLE:

Spice_Model_Name: d_to_real

C_Function_Name:  ucm_d_to_real

Description: "Node bridge from digital to real with enable"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:      in         enable     out

Description:    "input"    "enable"   "output"

Direction:      in         in         out

Default_Type:   d          d          real

Allowed_Types: [d]        [d]        [real]

Vector:         no         no         no

Vector_Bounds:  -          -           -

Null_Allowed:   no         yes        no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name: zero            one            delay

Description:    "value for 0"   "value for 1"  "delay"

Data_Type:      real            real           real

Default_Value:  0.0             1.0            1e-9

Limits:         -               -              [1e-15 -]

Vector:         no              no             no

Vector_Bounds:  -               -              -

Null_Allowed:   yes             yes            yes

12.3.5 A Z**-1 block working on real data

NAME_TABLE:

Spice_Model_Name: real_delay

C_Function_Name: ucm_real_delay

Description: "A Z ** -1 block working on real data"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:         in         clk         out

Description:       "input"    "clock"     "output"

Direction:         in         in          out

Default_Type:      real       d           real

Allowed_Types:     [real]     [d]         [real]

Vector:            no         no          no

Vector_Bounds:      -          -           -

Null_Allowed:      no         no          no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:    delay

Description:       "delay from clk to out"

Data_Type:         real

Default_Value:     1e-9

Limits:            [1e-15 -]

Vector:            no

Vector_Bounds:      -

Null_Allowed:      yes

12.3.6 A gain block for event-driven real data

NAME_TABLE:

Spice_Model_Name:      real_gain

C_Function_Name:       ucm_real_gain

Description:           "A gain block for event-driven real data"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:             in               out

Description:           "input"          "output"

Direction:             in               out

Default_Type:          real             real

Allowed_Types:         [real]           [real]

Vector:                no               no

Vector_Bounds:         -                -

Null_Allowed:          no               no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:        in_offset        gain            out_offset

Description:           "input offset"   "gain"          "output offset"

Data_Type:             real             real            real

Default_Value:         0.0              1.0             0.0

Limits:                -                -               -

Vector:                no               no              no

Vector_Bounds:         -                -               -

Null_Allowed:          yes              yes             yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:        delay            ic

Description:           "delay"          "initial condition"

Data_Type:             real             real

Default_Value:         1.0e-9           0.0

Limits:                -                -

Vector:                no               no

Vector_Bounds:         -                -

Null_Allowed:          yes              yes

12.3.7 Node bridge from real to analog voltage

NAME_TABLE:

Spice_Model_Name:      real_to_v

C_Function_Name:       ucm_real_to_v

Description:           "Node bridge from real to analog voltage"

PORT_TABLE:

Port_Name:             in               out

Description:           "input"          "output"

Direction:             in               out

Default_Type:          real             v

Allowed_Types:         [real]           [v, vd, i, id]

Vector:                no               no

Vector_Bounds:         -                -

Null_Allowed:          no               no

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:        gain             transition_time

Description:           "gain"           "output transition time"

Data_Type:             real             real

Default_Value:         1.0              1e-9

Limits:                -                [1e-15 -]

Vector:                no               no

Vector_Bounds:         -                -

Null_Allowed:          yes              yes

12.4 Digital Models

The following digital models are supplied with XSPICE. The descriptions included below consist of an example model Interface Specification File and a description of the model’s operation. This is followed by an example of a simulator-deck placement of the model, including the .MODEL card and the specification of all available parameters. Note that these models have not been finalized at this time.

Some information common to all digital models and/or digital nodes is included here. The following are general rules which should make working with digital nodes and models more straightforward:

  1. All digital nodes are initialized to ZERO at the start of a simulation (i.e., when INIT=TRUE). This means that a model need not post an explicit value to an output node upon initialization if its output would normally be a ZERO (although posting such would certainly cause no harm).

12.4.1 Buffer

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_buffer 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_buffer 

Description:        "digital one-bit-wide buffer"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The buffer is a single-input, single-output digital buffer which produces as output a time-delayed copy of its input. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be different. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a6 1 8 buff1 

.model buff1 d_buffer(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                     input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.2 Inverter

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_inverter 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_inverter 

Description:        "digital one-bit-wide inverter"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out           

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The inverter is a single-input, single-output digital inverter which produces as output an inverted, time-delayed copy of its input. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a6 1 8 inv1 

.model inv1 d_inverter(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                      input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.3 And

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_and 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_and 

Description:        "digital ‘and’ gate"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital ‘and’ gate is an n-input, single-output ‘and’ gate which produces an active “1” value if, and only if, all of its inputs are also “1” values. If ANY of the inputs is a “0”, the output will also be a “0”; if neither of these conditions holds, the output will be unknown. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a6 [1 2] 8 and1 

.model and1 d_and(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                 input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.4 Nand

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_nand 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_nand 

Description:        "digital ‘nand’ gate"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital ‘nand’ gate is an n-input, single-output ‘nand’ gate which produces an active “0” value if and only if all of its inputs are “1” values. If ANY of the inputs is a “0”, the output will be a “1”; if neither of these conditions holds, the output will be unknown. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a6 [1 2 3] 8 nand1 

.model nand1 d_nand(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                   input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.5 Or

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_or 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_or 

Description:        "digital ‘or’ gate"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital ‘or’ gate is an n-input, single-output ‘or’ gate which produces an active “1” value if at least one of its inputs is a “1” value. The gate produces a “0” value if all inputs are “0”; if neither of these two conditions holds, the output is unknown. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a6 [1 2 3] 8 or1 

.model or1 d_or(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+               input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.6 Nor

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_nor 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_nor 

Description:        "digital ‘nor’ gate"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital ‘nor’ gate is an n-input, single-output ‘nor’ gate which produces an active “0” value if at least one of its inputs is a “1” value. The gate produces a “0” value if all inputs are “0”; if neither of these two conditions holds, the output is unknown. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays.

Example SPICE Usage: 

anor12 [1 2 3 4] 8 nor12 

.model nor12 d_or(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                 input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.7 Xor

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_xor 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_xor 

Description:        "digital exclusive-or gate"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital ‘xor’ gate is an n-input, single-output ‘xor’ gate which produces an active “1” value if an odd number of its inputs are also “1” values. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently.
The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays. Note also that to maintain the technology-independence of the model, any UNKNOWN input, or any floating input causes the output to also go UNKNOWN.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a9 [1 2] 8 xor3 

.model xor3 d_xor(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                 input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.8 Xnor

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_xnor 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_xnor 

Description:        "digital exclusive-nor gate"

PORT_TABLE:         

Port Name:          in                      out 

Description:        "input"                 "output" 

Direction:          in                      out 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital ‘xnor’ gate is an n-input, single-output ‘xnor’ gate which produces an active “0” value if an odd number of its inputs are also “1” values. It produces a “1” output when an even number of “1” values occurs on its inputs. The delays associated with an output rise and those associated with an output fall may be specified independently. The model also posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameter input load. The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output strongly with the specified delays. Note also that to maintain the technology-independence of the model, any UNKNOWN input, or any floating input causes the output to also go UNKNOWN.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a9 [1 2] 8 xnor3 

.model xnor3 d_xnor(rise_delay = 0.5e-9 fall_delay = 0.3e-9 

+                   input_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.9 Tristate

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_tristate 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_tristate 

Description:        "digital tristate buffer"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in        enable        out 

Description:        "input"   "enable"      "output" 

Direction:          in        in            out 

Default_Type:       d         d             d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]       [d]           [d] 

Vector:             no        no            no 

Vector_Bounds:      -         -             - 

Null_Allowed:       no        no            no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     delay 

Description:        "delay" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     enable_load 

Description:        "enable load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital tristate is a simple tristate gate which can be configured to allow for open-collector behavior, as well as standard tristate behavior. The state seen on the input line is reflected in the output. The state seen on the enable line determines the strength of the output. Thus, a ONE forces the output to its state with a STRONG strength. A ZERO forces the output to go to a HI_IMPEDANCE strength. The delays associated with an output state or strength change cannot be specified independently, nor may they be specified independently for rise or fall conditions; other gate models may be used to provide such delays if needed. The model posts input and enable load values (in farads) based on the parameters input load and enable.The output of this model does NOT, however, respond to the total loading it sees on its output; it will always drive the output with the specified delay. Note also that to maintain the technology-independence of the model, any UNKNOWN input, or any floating input causes the output to also go UNKNOWN. Likewise, any UNKNOWN input on the enable line causes the output to go to an UNDETERMINED strength value.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a9 1 2 8 tri7 

.model tri7 d_tristate(delay = 0.5e-9 input_load = 0.5e-12 

+                      enable_load = 0.5e-12)

12.4.10 Pullup

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_pullup 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_pullup 

Description:        "digital pullup resistor"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          out 

Description:        "output" 

Direction:          out 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     load 

Description:        "load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital pullup resistor is a device which emulates the behavior of an analog resistance value tied to a high voltage level. The pullup may be used in conjunction with tristate buffers to provide open-collector wired “or” constructs, or any other logical constructs which rely on a resistive pullup common to many tristated output devices. The model posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameters “load”.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a2 9 pullup1 

.model pullup1 d_pullup(load = 20.0e-12)

12.4.11 Pulldown

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_pulldown 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_pulldown 

Description:        "digital pulldown resistor"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          out 

Description:        "output" 

Direction:          out 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     load 

Description:        "load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital pulldown resistor is a device which emulates the behavior of an analog resistance value tied to a low voltage level. The pulldown may be used in conjunction with tristate buffers to provide open-collector wired “or” constructs, or any other logical constructs which rely on a resistive pulldown common to many tristated output devices. The model posts an input load value (in farads) based on the parameters “load”.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 9 pulldown1 

.model pulldown1 d_pulldown(load = 20.0e-12)

12.4.12 D Flip Flop

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_dff 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_dff 

Description:        "digital d-type flip flop"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          data                    clk 

Description:        "input data"            "clock" 

Direction:          in                      in 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:         set                      reset 

Description:       "asynch. set"            "asynch. reset" 

Direction:         in                       in 

Default_Type:      d                        d 

Allowed_Types:     [d]                      [d] 

Vector:            no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:     -                        - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                      yes

PORT_TABLE:

Port Name:         out                      Nout 

Description:       "data output"            "inverted data output" 

Direction:         out                      out 

Default_Type:      d                        d  

Allowed_Types:     [d]                      [d] 

Vector:            no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:     -                        - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    clk_delay               set_delay 

Description:       "delay from clk"        "delay from set" 

Data_Type:         real                    real

Default_Value:     1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:            [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:            no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:     -                       - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    reset_delay             ic 

Description:       "delay from reset"      "output initial state" 

Data_Type:         real                    int 

Default_Value:     1.0                     0 

Limits:            [1.0e-12 -]             [0 2] 

Vector:            no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:     -                       - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    data_load               clk_load 

Description:       "data load value (F)"   "clk load value (F)" 

Data_Type:         real                    real 

Default_Value:     1.0e-12                 1.0e-12 

Limits:            -                       - 

Vector:            no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:     -                       - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    set_load                reset_load 

Description:       "set load value (F)"    "reset load (F)" 

Data_Type:         real                    real 

Default_Value:     1.0e-12                 1.0e-12 

Limits:            -                       - 

Vector:            no                      no 

Vector.Bounds:     -                       - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:       "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:         real                    real 

Default_Value:     1.0e-9                  1.0e-9

Limits:            [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:            no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:     -                       - 

Null_Allowed:      yes                     yes

Description:
The digital d-type flip flop is a one-bit, edge-triggered storage element which will store data whenever the clk input line transitions from low to high (ZERO to ONE). In addition, asynchronous set and reset signals exist, and each of the three methods of changing the stored output of the d_dff have separate load values and delays associated with them. Additionally, you may specify separate rise and fall delay values that are added to those specified for the input lines; these allow for more faithful reproduction of the output characteristics of different IC fabrication technologies.
Note that any UNKNOWN input on the set or reset lines immediately results in an UNKNOWN output.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a7 1 2 3 4 5 6 flop1 

.model flop1 d_dff(clk_delay = 13.0e-9 set_delay = 25.0e-9 

+                  reset_delay = 27.0e-9 ic = 2 rise_delay = 10.0e-9 

+                  fall_delay = 3e-9)

12.4.13 JK Flip Flop

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_jkff 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_jkff 

Description:        "digital jk-type flip flop"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          j                      k 

Description:        "j input"              "k input" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      -

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          clk 

Description:        "clock" 

Direction:          in 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          set                    reset 

Description:        "asynchronous set"     "asynchronous reset" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          out                    Nout 

Description:        "data output"          "inverted data output" 

Direction:          out                    out

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds       -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     clk_delay              set_delay 

Description:        "delay from clk"       "delay from set" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_delay            ic 

Description:        "delay from reset"     "output initial state" 

Data_Type:          real                   int 

Default_Value:      1.0                    0 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [0 2] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     jk_load                clk_load 

Description:        "j,k load values (F)"  "clk load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                      - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     set_load               reset_load 

Description:        "set load value (F)"   "reset load (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12

Limits:             -                      - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay             fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"           "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

Description:
The digital jk-type flip flop is a one-bit, edge-triggered storage element which will store data whenever the clk input line transitions from low to high (ZERO to ONE). In addition, asynchronous set and reset signals exist, and each of the three methods of changing the stored output of the d_jkff have separate load values and delays associated with them. Additionally, you may specify separate rise and fall delay values that are added to those specified for the input lines; these allow for more faithful reproduction of the output characteristics of different IC fabrication technologies.
Note that any UNKNOWN inputs other than j or k cause the output to go UNKNOWN automatically.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 flop2 

.model flop2 d_jkff(clk_delay = 13.0e-9 set_delay = 25.0e-9 

+                   reset_delay = 27.0e-9 ic = 2 rise_delay = 10.0e-9 

+                   fall_delay = 3e-9)

12.4.14 Toggle Flip Flop

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_tff 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_tff 

Description:        "digital toggle flip flop"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          t                      clk 

Description:        "toggle input"         "clock" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          set                    reset 

Description:        "set"                  "reset" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PORT.TABLE: 

Port Name:          out                    Nout 

Description:        "data output"          "inverted data output" 

Direction:          out                    out 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     clk_delay              set_delay 

Description:        "delay from clk"       "delay from set"

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds       -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_delay            ic 

Description:        "delay from reset"     "output initial state" 

Data_Type:          real                   int 

Default_Value:      1.0                    0 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [0 2] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     t_load                  clk_load 

Description:        "toggle load value (F)" "clk load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                 1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     set_load                reset_load 

Description:        "set load value (F)"    "reset load (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default.Value:      1.0e-12                 1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                  1.0e-9

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

Description:
The digital toggle-type flip flop is a one-bit, edge-triggered storage element which will toggle its current state whenever the clk input line transitions from low to high (ZERO to ONE). In addition, asynchronous set and reset signals exist, and each of the three methods of changing the stored output of the d_tff have separate load values and delays associated with them. Additionally, you may specify separate rise and fall delay values that are added to those specified for the input lines; these allow for more faithful reproduction of the output characteristics of different IC fabrication technologies.
Note that any UNKNOWN inputs other than t immediately cause the output to go UNKNOWN.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a8 2 12 4 5 6 3 flop3 

.model flop3 d_tff(clk_delay = 13.0e-9 set_delay = 25.0e-9 

+                  reset_delay = 27.0e-9 ic = 2 rise_delay = 10.0e-9 

+                  fall_delay = 3e-9 t_load = 0.2e-12)

12.4.15 Set-Reset Flip Flop

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_srff 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_srff 

Description:        "digital set-reset flip flop"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          s                      r 

Description:        "set input"            "reset input" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          clk 

Description:        "clock" 

Direction:          in 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PORT_TABLE:

Port Name:          set                    reset 

Description:        "asynchronous set"     "asynchronous reset" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d]

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          out                    Nout 

Description:        "data output"          "inverted data output" 

Direction:          out                    out

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     clk_delay              set_delay 

Description:        "delay from clk"       "delay from set" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_delay            ic 

Description:        "delay from reset"     "output initial state" 

Data_Type:          real                   int 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 0 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [0 2] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     sr_load                clk_load 

Description:        "set/reset loads (F)"  "clk load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                      - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     set_load               reset_load 

Description:        "set load value (F)"   "reset load (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12

Limits:             -                      -  

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay             fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"           "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

Description:
The digital sr-type flip flop is a one-bit, edge-triggered storage element which will store data whenever the clk input line transitions from low to high (ZERO to ONE). The value stored (i.e., the “out” value) will depend on the s and r input pin values, and will be:

out=ONE             if s=ONE and r=ZERO; 

out=ZERO            if s=ZERO and r=ONE; 

out=previous value  if s=ZERO and r=ZERO; 

out=UNKNOWN         if s=ONE and r=ONE;

In addition, asynchronous set and reset signals exist, and each of the three methods of changing the stored output of the d_srff have separate load values and delays associated with them. You may also specify separate rise and fall delay values that are added to those specified for the input lines; these allow for more faithful reproduction of the output characteristics of different IC fabrication technologies.

Note that any UNKNOWN inputs other than s and r immediately cause the output to go UNKNOWN.

Example SPICE Usage:

a8 2 12 4 5 6 3 14 flop7 

.model flop7 d_srff(clk_delay = 13.0e-9 set_delay = 25.0e-9 

+                   reset_delay = 27.0e-9 ic = 2 rise_delay = 10.0e-9 

+                   fall_delay = 3e-9)

12.4.16 D Latch

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_dlatch 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_dlatch 

Description:        "digital d-type latch"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          data                   enable 

Description:        "input data"           "enable input" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          set                    reset 

Description:        "set"                  "reset" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          out                    Nout 

Description:        "data output"          "inverter data output"

Direction:          out                    out 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     data_delay 

Description:        "delay from data" 

Data_Type:          real

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     enable_delay           set_delay 

Description:        "delay from enable"    "delay from SET" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_delay            ic 

Description:        "delay from RESET"     "output initial state" 

Data_Type:          real                   boolean 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 0 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     data_load              enable_load 

Description:        "data load (F)"        "enable load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                      - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     set_load               reset_load 

Description:        "set load value (F)"   "reset load (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                      -

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay             fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"           "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

Description:
The digital d-type latch is a one-bit, level-sensitive storage element which will output the value on the data line whenever the enable input line is high (ONE). The value on the data line is stored (i.e., held on the out line) whenever the enable line is low (ZERO).
In addition, asynchronous set and reset signals exist, and each of the four methods of changing the stored output of the d_dlatch (i.e., data changing with enable=ONE, enable changing to ONE from ZERO with a new value on data, raising set and raising reset) have separate delays associated with them. You may also specify separate rise and fall delay values that are added to those specified for the input lines; these allow for more faithful reproduction of the output characteristics of different IC fabrication technologies.
Note that any UNKNOWN inputs other than on the data line when enable=ZERO immediately cause the output to go UNKNOWN.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 12 4 5 6 3 14 latch1 

.model latch1 d_dlatch(data_delay = 13.0e-9 enable_delay = 22.0e-9 

+                      set_delay = 25.0e-9 

+                      reset_delay = 27.0e-9 ic = 2 

+                      rise_delay = 10.0e-9 fall_delay = 3e-9)

12.4.17 Set-Reset Latch

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_srlatch 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_srlatch

Description:        "digital sr-type latch"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          s                      r 

Description:        "set"                  "reset" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             yes                    yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [2 -]                  r 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          enable 

Description:        "enable" 

Direction:          in 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          set                    reset 

Description:        "set"                  "reset" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          out                    Nout 

Description:        "data output"          "inverted data output"

Direction:          out                    out

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector: no no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     sr_delay 

Description:        "delay from s or r input change" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      -

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     enable_delay           set_delay 

Description:        "delay from enable"    "delay from SET" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_delay            ic 

Description:        "delay from RESET"     "output initial state" 

Data_Type:          real                   boolean 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 0 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     sr_load                 enable_load 

Description:        "s & r input loads (F)" "enable load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                    real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                 1.0e-12

Limits:             -                       - 

Vector:             no                      no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                       - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     set_load               reset_load 

Description:        "set load value (F)"   "reset load (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                      - 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     rise_delay             fall_delay 

Description:        "rise delay"           "fall delay" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -]

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      -  

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

Description:
The digital sr-type latch is a one-bit, level-sensitive storage element which will output the value dictated by the state of the s and r pins whenever the enable input line is high (ONE). This value is stored (i.e., held on the out line) whenever the enable line is low (ZERO). The particular value chosen is as shown below:

   s=ZERO, r=ZERO => out=current value (i.e., not change in output) 

   s=ZERO, r=ONE  => out=ZERO 

   s=ONE,  r=ZERO => out=ONE 

   s=ONE,  r=ONE  => out=UNKNOWN

Asynchronous set and reset signals exist, and each of the four methods of changing the stored output of the d srlatch (i.e., s/r combination changing with enable=ONE, enable changing to ONE from ZERO with an output-changing combination of s and r, raising set and raising reset) have separate delays associated with them. You may also specify separate rise and fall delay values that are added to those specified for the input lines; these allow for more faithful reproduction of the output characteristics of different IC fabrication technologies.

Note that any UNKNOWN inputs other than on the s and r lines when enable=ZERO immediately cause the output to go UNKNOWN.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 12 4 5 6 3 14 16 latch2 

.model latch2 d_srlatch(sr_delay = 13.0e-9 enable_delay = 22.0e-9 

+                       set_delay = 25.0e-9 

+                       reset_delay = 27.0e-9 ic = 2 

+                       rise_delay = 10.0e-9 fall_delay = 3e-9)

12.4.18 State Machine

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_state 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_state 

Description:        "digital state machine"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          in                     clk 

Description:        "input"                "clock" 

Direction:          in                     in 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             yes                    no 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -]                  - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          reset                  out 

Description:        "reset"                "output" 

Direction:          in                     out 

Default_Type:       d                      d  

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      [1 -] 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     clk_delay              reset_delay 

Description:        "delay from CLK"       "delay from RESET" 

Data_Type:          real                   real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-9                 1.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -]            [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:    Parameter_Name:        state_file 

Description:        "state transition specification file name" 

Data_Type:          string

Default_Value:      "state.txt" 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_state 

Description:        "default state on RESET & at DC" 

Data_Type:          int 

Default_Value:      0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE:    

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input loading capacitance (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:    

Parameter_Name:     clk_load 

Description:        "clock loading capacitance (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      -  

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     reset_load 

Description:        "reset loading capacitance (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             -

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital state machine provides for straightforward descriptions of clocked combinatorial logic blocks with a variable number of inputs and outputs and with an unlimited number of possible states. The model can be configured to behave as virtually any type of counter or clocked combinatorial logic block and can be used to replace very large digital circuit schematics with an identically functional but faster representation.
The d state model is configured through the use of a state definition file (state.in) which resides in a directory of your choosing. The file defines all states to be understood by the model, plus input bit combinations which trigger changes in state. An example state.in file is shown below:

----------- begin file ------------- 

* This is an example state.in file. This file 

* defines a simple 2-bit counter with one input. The 

* value of this input determines whether the counter counts 

* up (in = 1) or down (in = 0).

0 0s 0s 0 -> 3

        1 -> 1

1 0s 1z 0 -> 0

        1 -> 2

2 1z 0s 0 -> 1

        1 -> 3

3 1z 1z 0 -> 2 

3 1z 1z 1 -> 0 

------------------ end file ---------------

Several attributes of the above file structure should be noted. First, ALL LINES IN THE FILE MUST BE ONE OF FOUR TYPES. These are:

  1. A comment, beginning with a “*” in the first column.
  2. A header line, which is a complete description of the current state, the outputs corresponding to that state, an input value, and the state that the model will assume should that input be encountered. The first line of a state definition must ALWAYS be a header line.
  3. A continuation line, which is a partial description of a state, consisting of an input value and the state that the model will assume should that input be encountered. Note that continuation lines may only be used after the initial header line definition for a state.
  4. A line containing nothing but white-spaces (space, form-feed, newline, carriage return, tab, vertical tab).

A line which is not one of the above will cause a file-loading error. Note that in the example shown, whitespace (any combination of blanks, tabs, commas) is used to separate values, and that the character "->" is used to underline the state transition implied by the input preceding it. This particular character is not critical in of itself, and can be replaced with any other character or non-broken combination of characters that you prefer (e.g. “==>”, “>>”, “:”, “resolves_to”, etc.)

The order of the output and input bits in the file is important; the first column is always interpreted to refer to the “zeroth” bit of input and output. Thus, in the file above, the output from state 1 sets out[0] to “0s”, and out[1] to “1z”.

The state numbers need not be in any particular order, but a state definition (which consists of the sum total of all lines which define the state, its outputs, and all methods by which a state can be exited) must be made on contiguous line numbers; a state definition cannot be broken into sub-blocks and distributed randomly throughout the file. On the other hand, the state definition can be broken up by as many comment lines as you desire.

Header files may be used throughout the state.in file, and continuation lines can be discarded completely if you so choose: continuation lines are primarily provided as a convenience.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 [2 3 4 5] 1 12 [22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29] state1 

.model state1 d_state(clk_delay = 13.0e-9 reset_delay = 27.0e-9

+                     state_file = "newstate.txt" reset_state = 2)

12.4.19 Frequency Divider

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_fdiv 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_fdiv 

Description:        "digital frequency divider"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          freq_in                freq_out 

Description:        "frequency input"      "frequency output" 

Direction:          in                     out 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             no                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     div_factor             high_cycles 

Description:        "divide factor"        "# of cycles for high out" 

Data_Type:          int                    int 

Default_Value:      2                      1 

Limits:             [1 -]                  [1 div_factor-1] 

Vector:             no                     no

Vector_Bounds:      -                      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                    yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    i_count 

Description:       "divider initial count value" 

Data_Type:         int 

Default_Value:     0 

Limits:            - 

Vector:            no 

Vector_Bounds:     - 

Null_Allowed:      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    rise_delay              fall_delay 

Description:       "rise delay"            "fall delay" 

Data_Type:         real                    real

Default_Value:     1.0e-9                  1.0e-9 

Limits:            [1.0e-12 -]             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:            yes                     yes 

Vector_Bounds:     in                      in 

Null_Allowed:      yes                     yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:    freq_in_load 

Description:       "freq_in load value (F)" 

Data_Type:         real 

Default_Value:     1.0e-12 

Limits:            - 

Vector:            no 

Vector_Bounds:     - 

Null_Allowed:      yes

Description:
The digital frequency divider is a programmable step-down divider which accepts an arbitrary divisor (div_factor), a duty-cycle term (high_cycles), and an initial count value (i_count). The generated output is synchronized to the rising edges of the input signal. Rise delay and fall delay on the outputs may also be specified independently.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 3 7 divider 

.model divider d_fdiv(div_factor = 5 high_cycles = 3

+                     i_count = 4 rise_delay = 23e-9 

+                     fall_delay = 9e-9)

12.4.20 RAM

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_ram 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_ram 

Description:        "digital random-access memory"

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          data_in                data_out 

Description:        "data input line(s)"   "data output line(s)" 

Direction:          in                     out 

Default_Type:       d                      d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                    [d] 

Vector:             yes                    yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -]                  data_in 

Null_Allowed:       no                     no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          address                 write_en 

Description:        "address input line(s)" "write enable line" 

Direction:          in                      in 

Default_Type:       d                       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d]                     [d] 

Vector:             yes                     no 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -]                   - 

Null_Allowed:       no                      no

PORT_TABLE: 

Port Name:          select 

Description:        "chip select line(s)" 

Direction:          in 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 16] 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     select_value 

Description:        "decimal active value for select line comparison"

Data_Type:          int 

Default_Value:      1 

Limits:             [0 32767] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:

Parameter_Name:     ic 

Description:        "initial bit state @ dc" 

Data_Type:          int 

Default_Value:      2 

Limits:             [0 2] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:   

Parameter_Name:     read_delay 

Description:        "read delay from address/select/write.en active" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      100.0e-9 

Limits:             [1.0e-12 -] 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     data_load                address_load 

Description:        "data_in load value (F)" "addr. load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real                     real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12                  1.0e-12 

Limits:             -                        - 

Vector:             no                       no 

Vector_Bounds:      -                        - 

Null_Allowed:       yes                      yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     select_load 

Description:        "select load value (F)"

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

PARAMETER_TABLE:    

Parameter_Name:     enable_load 

Description:        "enable line load value (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       yes

Description:
The digital RAM is an M-wide, N-deep random access memory element with programmable select lines, tristated data out lines, and a single write/~read line. The width of the RAM words (M) is set through the use of the word width parameter. The depth of the RAM (N) is set by the number of address lines input to the device. The value of N is related to the number of address input lines (P) by the following equation:
2P = N

There is no reset line into the device. However, an initial value for all bits may be specified by setting the ic parameter to either 0 or 1. In reading a word from the ram, the read delay value is invoked, and output will not appear until that delay has been satisfied. Separate rise and fall delays are not supported for this device.
Note that UNKNOWN inputs on the address lines are not allowed during a write. In the event that an address line does indeed go unknown during a write, THE ENTIRE CONTENTS OF THE RAM WILL BE SET TO UNKNOWN. This is in contrast to the data in lines being set to unknown during a write; in that case, only the selected word will be corrupted, and this is corrected once the data lines settle back to a known value. Note that protection is added to the write en line such that extended UNKNOWN values on that line are interpreted as ZERO values. This is the equivalent of a read operation and will not corrupt the contents of the RAM. A similar mechanism exists for the select lines. If they are unknown, then it is assumed that the chip is not selected.
Detailed timing-checking routines are not provided in this model, other than for the enable delay and select delay restrictions on read operations. You are advised, therefore, to carefully check the timing into and out of the RAM for correct read and write cycle times, setup and hold times, etc. for the particular device they are attempting to model.

Example SPICE Usage: 

a4 [3 4 5 6] [3 4 5 6] [12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19] 30 [22 23 24] ram2 

.model ram2 d_ram(select_value = 2 ic = 2 read_delay = 80e-9)

12.4.21 Digital Source

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    cm_d_source 

Spice_Model_Name:   d_source 

Description:        "digital signal source"

PORT_TABLE:         

Port Name:          out 

Description:        "output" 

Direction:          out 

Default_Type:       d 

Allowed_Types:      [d] 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE:    

Parameter_Name:     input_file 

Description:        "digital input vector filename" 

Data_Type:          string 

Default_Value:      "source.txt" 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     input_load 

Description:        "input loading capacitance (F)" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      1.0e-12 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             no 

Vector_Bounds:      - 

Null_Allowed:       no

Description:
The digital source provides for straightforward descriptions of digital signal vectors in a tabular format. The model reads input from the input file and, at the times specified in the file, generates the inputs along with the strengths listed.
The
format of the input file is as shown below. Note that comment lines are delineated through the use of a single “*” character in the first column of a line. This is similar to the way the SPICE program handles comments.

* T       c  n  n  n . . . 

* i       l  o  o  o . . . 

* m       o  d  d  d . . . 

* e       c  e  e  e . . . 

*         k  a  b  c . . .

0.0000    Uu Uu Us Uu . . . 

1.234e-9  0s 1s 1s 0z . . . 

1.376e-9  0s 0s 1s 0z . . . 

2.5e-7    1s 0s 1s 0z . . . 

2.5006e-7 1s 1s 1s 0z . . . 

5.0e-7    0s 1s 1s 0z . . .

Note that in the example shown, whitespace (any combination of blanks, tabs, commas) is used to separate the time and state/strength tokens. The order of the input columns is important; the first column is always interpreted to mean “time”. The second through the N’th columns map to the out[0] through out[N-2] output nodes. A non-commented line which does not contain enough tokens to completely define all outputs for the digital source will cause an error. Also, time values must increase monotonically or an error will result in reading the source file.

Errors will also occur if a line exists in source.txt which is neither a comment nor vector line. The only exception to this is in the case of a line that is completely blank; this is treated as a comment (note that such lines often occur at the end of text within a file; ignoring these in particular prevents nuisance errors on the part of the simulator).

Example SPICE Usage: 

a3 [2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17] input_vector 

.model input_vector d_source(input_file = "source_simple.text")

12.5 Predefined Node Types for event driven simulation

The following prewritten node types are included with the XSPICE simulator. These should provide you not only with valuable event-driven modeling capabilities, but also with examples to use for guidance in creating new UDN (user defined node) types. You may access these node data by the plot (17.5.43) or eprint (17.5.23) commands.

12.5.1 Digital Node Type

The “digital” node type is directly built into the simulator. 12 digital node values are available. They are described by a two character string (the state/strength token). The first character (0, 1, or U) gives the state of the node (logic zero, logic one, or unknown logic state). The second character (s, r, z, u) gives the "strength" of the logic state (strong, resistive, hi-impedance, or undetermined). So these are the values we have: 0s, 1s, Us, 0r, 1r, Ur, 0z, 1z, Uz, 0u, 1u, Uu.

12.5.2 Real Node Type

The “real” node type provides for event-driven simulation with double-precision floating point data. This type is useful for evaluating sampled-data filters and systems. The type implements all optional functions for User-Defined Nodes, including inversion and node resolution. For inversion, the sign of the value is reversed. For node resolution, the resultant value at a node is the sum of all values output to that node. The node is implemented as a user defined node in ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtraevt/real.

12.5.3 Int Node Type

The “int” node type provides for event-driven simulation with integer data. This type is useful for evaluating round-off error effects in sampled-data systems. The type implements all optional functions for User-Defined Nodes, including inversion and node resolution. For inversion, the sign of the integer value is reversed. For node resolution, the resultant value at a node is the sum of all values output to that node. The node is implemented as a user defined node in ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtraevt/int.

12.5.4 (Digital) Input/Output

The analog code models use the standard (analog) nodes provided by ngspice and thus are using all the commands for sourcing, storing, printing, and plotting data.

I/O for event nodes (digital, real, int, and UDNs) currently is much more limited to a few tools. For output you may use the plot (17.5.43) or eprint (17.5.23) commands. For input, you may create a test bench with existing code models (oscillator (12.3.3), frequency divider (12.4.19), state machine (12.4.18) etc.). Reading data from a file is offered by d_source (12.4.21). Some comments and hints have been provided by Sdaau. You may also use the analog input from file, (filesource 12.2.8) and convert its analog input to the digital type by the adc_bridge (12.3.2). If you want reading data from a VCD file, you may have a look at ngspice-users forum and apply a python script provided by Sdaau to translate the VCD data to d_source or filesource input.

Chapter 13
Verilog A Device models

13.1 Introduction

The ngspice-adms interface will implement extra HICUM level0 and level2 (HICUM model web page), MEXTRAM(MEXTRAM model web page), EKV(EKV model web page) and PSP(NXP MOS model 9 web page) models written in Verilog-A behavior language.

13.2 adms

To compile Verilog-A compact models into ngspice-ready C models the the program admsXml is required. Details of this software are described in adms home page.

13.3 How to integrate a Verilog-A model into ngspice

13.3.1 How to setup a *.va model for ngspice

The root entry for new Verilog-A models is \src\spicelib\devices\adms. Below the modelname entry the Verilog-A code should reside in folder admsva
(e.g.: ngspice\src\spicelib\devices\adms\ekv\admsva\ekv.va). The file extension is fixed to .va.

Certain files must modified to create the interface to ngspice - see the guideline README.adms in the ngspice root.

13.3.2 Adding admsXml to your build environment

To facilitate the installation of adms, a source code package has been assembled for use with ngspice, available as a zip file for download. It is based on adms source code from the subversion repository downloaded on August 1st, 2010, and has been slightly modified (see ChangeLog).

Under OS LINUX (tested with SUSE 11.2, 64 bit) you may expand the zip file and run
./autogen_lin.sh, followed by ’make’ and ’make install’.

Under OS CYGWIN (tested with actual CYGWIN on MS Windows 7, 64 bit), please use ./autogen_cyg.sh, followed by ’make’ and ’make install’.

Under OS MINGW, a direct compilation would require the additional installation of perl module XML-LibXML which is not as straightforward as it should be. However you may start with a CYGWIN compile as described above. If you then go to your MSYS window, cd to the adms top directory and start ./mingw-compile.sh, you will obtain admsXml.exe, copied to MSYS /bin, and you are ready to go. To facilitate installation under MS Windows, a admsXml.exe zipped binary is available. Just copy it to MSYS /bin directory and start working on your verilog models.

A short test of a successful installation is:

$ admsXml -v

$ [usage..] release name="admsXml" version="2.3.0" date="Aug 4 2010" 
time="10:24:18"

Compilation of admsXml with MS Visual Studio is not possible, because the source code has variable declarations not only at the top of a block, but deliberately also in the following lines. This is o.k. by the C99 standard, but not supported by MS Visual Studio.

Chapter 14
Mixed-Level Simulation (ngspice with TCAD)

14.1 Cider

Ngspice implements mixed-level simulation through the merging of its code with CIDER (details see chapt. 30).

CIDER is a mixed-level circuit and device simulator that provides a direct link between technology parameters and circuit performance. A mixed-level circuit and device simulator can provide greater simulation accuracy than a stand-alone circuit or device simulator by numerically modeling the critical devices in a circuit. Compact models can be used for noncritical devices.

CIDER couples the latest version of SPICE3 (version 3F.2) [JOHN92] to a internal C-based device simulator, DSIM. SPICE3 provides circuit analyses, compact models for semiconductor devices, and an interactive user interface. DSIM provides accurate, one- and two-dimensional numerical device models based on the solution of Poisson’s equation, and the electron and hole current-continuity equations. DSIM incorporates many of the same basic physical models found in the the Stanford two-dimensional device simulator PISCES [PINT85]. Input to CIDER consists of a SPICE-like description of the circuit and its compact models, and PISCES-like descriptions of the structures of numerically modeled devices. As a result, CIDER should seem familiar to designers already accustomed to these two tools. For example, SPICE3F.2 input files should run without modification, producing identical results.

CIDER is based on the mixed-level circuit and device simulator CODECS [MAYA88] and is a replacement for this program. The basic algorithms of the two programs are the same. Some of the differences between CIDER and CODECS are described below. The CIDER input format has greater flexibility and allows increased access to physical model parameters. New physical models have been added to allow simulation of state-of-the-art devices. These include transverse field mobility degradation [GATE90] that is important in scaled-down MOSFETs and a polysilicon model for poly-emitter bipolar transistors. Temperature dependence has been included for most physical models over the range from -50°C to 150°C. The numerical models can be used to simulate all the basic types of semiconductor devices: resistors, MOS capacitors, diodes, BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs. BJTs and JFETs can be modeled with or without a substrate contact. Support has been added for the management of device internal states. Post-processing of device states can be performed using the NUTMEG user interface of SPICE3. Previously computed states can be loaded into the program to provide accurate initial guesses for subsequent analyses. Finally, numerous small bugs have been discovered and fixed, and the program has been ported to a wider variety of computing platforms.

Berkeley tradition calls for the naming of new versions of programs by affixing a (number, letter, number) triplet to the end of the program name. Under this scheme, CIDER should instead be named CODECS2A.l. However, tradition has been broken in this case because major incompatibilities exist between the two programs and because it was observed that the acronym CODECS is already used in the analog design community to refer to coder-decoder circuits.

Details of the basic semiconductor equations and the physical models used by CIDER are not provided in this manual. Unfortunately, no other single source exists which describes all of the relevant background material. Comprehensive reviews of device simulation can be found in [PINT90] and the book [SELB84]. CODECS and its inversion-layer mobility model are described in [MAYA88] and LGATE90], respectively. PISCES and its models are described in [PINT85]. Temperature dependencies for the PISCES models used by CIDER are available in [SOLL90].

14.2 GSS, Genius

For LINUX users the cooperation of the TCAD software GSS with ngspice might be of interest, see http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/gss.html. This project is no longer maintained however, but has moved into the Genius simulator, still available as open source cogenda genius.

Chapter 15
Analyses and Output Control (batch mode)

The command lines described in this chapter are specifying analyses and outputs within the circuit description file. They start with a “.” (dot commands). Specifying analyses and plots (or tables) in the input file with dot commands is used with batch runs. Batch mode is entered when either the -b option is given upon starting ngspice

ngspice -b -r rawfile.raw circuitfile.cir

or when the default input source is redirected from a file (see also chapt. 16.4.1).

ngspice < circuitfile.cir

In batch mode, the analyses specified by the control lines in the input file (e.g. “.ac”, “.tran”, etc.) are immediately executed. If the -r rawfile option is given then all data generated is written to a ngspice rawfile. The rawfile may later be read by the interactive mode of ngspice using the “load” command (see 17.5.36). In this case, the .save line (see 15.6) may be used to record the value of internal device variables (see Appendix, chapter 31).

If a rawfile is not specified, then output plots (in “line-printer” form) and tables can be printed according to the .print, .plot, and .four control lines, described in chapter 15.6.

If ngspice is started in interactive mode (see chapt. 16.4.2), like

ngspice circuitfile.cir

and no control section (.control ... .endc, see 16.4.3) is provided in the circuit file, the dot commands are not executed immediately, but are waiting for manually receiving the command “run”.

15.1 Simulator Variables (.options)

Various parameters of the simulations available in Ngspice can be altered to control the accuracy, speed, or default values for some devices. These parameters may be changed via the “option” command (described in chapt. 17.5.42) or via the “.options” line:

General form:

.options opt1 opt2 ... (or opt=optval ...)

Examples:

.options reltol=.005 trtol=8

The options line allows the user to reset program control and user options for specific simulation purposes. Options specified to Ngspice via the “option” command (see chapt. ) are also passed on as if specified on a .options line. Any combination of the following options may be included, in any order. “x” (below) represents some positive number.

15.1.1 General Options

ACCT
causes accounting and run time statistics to be printed.
NOACCT
no printing of statistics, no printing of the Initial Transient Solution.
NOINIT
suppresses only printing of the Initial Transient Solution, maybe combined with ACCT.
LIST
causes the summary listing of the input data to be printed.
NOMOD
suppresses the printout of the model parameters.
NOPAGE
suppresses page ejects.
NODE
causes the printing of the node table.
OPTS
causes the option values to be printed.
TEMP=x
Resets the operating temperature of the circuit. The default value is 27 C (300K). TEMP can be overridden per device by a temperature specification on any temperature dependent instance. May also be generally overridden by a .TEMP card (2.11).
TNOM=x
resets the nominal temperature at which device parameters are measured. The default value is 27 C (300 deg K). TNOM can be overridden by a specification on any temperature dependent device model.
WARN=1|0
enables or turns of SOA (Safe Operating Area) voltage warning messages (default: 0).
MAXWARNS=x
specifies the maximum number of SOA (Safe Operating Area) warning messages per model (default: 5).

15.1.2 DC Solution Options

The following options controls properties pertaining to DC analysis and algorithms. Since transient analysis is based on DC many of the options affect the latter one.

ABSTOL=x
resets the absolute current error tolerance of the program. The default value is 1 pA.
GMIN=x
resets the value of GMIN, the minimum conductance allowed by the program. The default value is 1.0e-12.
ITL1=x
resets the dc iteration limit. The default is 100.
ITL2=x
resets the dc transfer curve iteration limit. The default is 50.
KEEPOPINFO
Retain the operating point information when either an AC, Distortion, or Pole-Zero analysis is run. This is particularly useful if the circuit is large and you do not want to run a (redundant) ".OP" analysis.
PIVREL=x
resets the relative ratio between the largest column entry and an acceptable pivot value. The default value is 1.0e-3. In the numerical pivoting algorithm the allowed minimum pivot value is determined by EPSREL=AMAX1(PIVREL*MAXVAL, PIVTOL) where MAXVAL is the maximum element in the column where a pivot is sought (partial pivoting).
PIVTOL=x
resets the absolute minimum value for a matrix entry to be accepted as a pivot. The default value is 1.0e-13.
RELTOL=x
resets the relative error tolerance of the program. The default value is 0.001 (0.1%).
RSHUNT=x
introduces a resistor from each analog node to ground. The value of the resistor should be high enough to not interfere with circuit operations. The XSPICE option has to be enabled (see 32.1.5) .
VNTOL=x
resets the absolute voltage error tolerance of the program. The default value is 1 μV .

15.1.2.1 Matrix Conditioning info

In most SPICE-based simulators, problems can arise with certain circuit topologies. One of the most common problems is the absence of a DC path to ground at some node. This may happen, for example, when two capacitors are connected in series with no other connection at the common node or when certain code models are cascaded. The result is an ill-conditioned or nearly singular matrix that prevents the simulation from completing. The XSPICE option introduces the “rshunt” option to help eliminate this problem. When used, this option inserts resistors to ground at all the analog nodes in the circuit. In general, the value of “rshunt” should be set to some very high resistance (e.g. 1000 Meg Ohms or greater) so that the operation of the circuit is essentially unaffected, but the matrix problems are corrected. If you should encounter a “no DC path to ground” or a “matrix is nearly singular” error message with your circuit, you should try adding the following .option card to your circuit description deck.

.option rshunt = 1.0e12 

Usually a value of 1.0e12 is sufficient to correct the matrix problems. However, if you still have problems, you may wish to try lowering this value to 1.0e10 or 1.0e9.

Another matrix conditioning problem might occur if you try to place an inductor in parallel to a voltage source. An ac simulation will fail, because it is preceded by an op analysis. Option noopac (15.1.3) will help if the circuit is linear. If the circuit is non-linear, you will need the op analysis. Then adding a small resistor (e.g. 1e-4 Ohms) in series to the inductor will help to obtain convergence.

.option rseries = 1.0e-4

will add a series resistor to each inductor in the circuit. Be careful if you use behavioral inductors (see 3.2.12), because the result may become unpredictable.

15.1.3 AC Solution Options

NOOPAC
Do not do an operating point (OP) analysis before the AC analysis. To become valid, this option requires that the circuit is linear, thus consists only of R, L, and C devices, independent V, I sources and linear dependent E, G, H, and F sources (without poly statement, non-behavioral). If a non-linear device is detected, the OP analysis will be executed automatically. This option is of interest for example in nested LC circuits, where there is no series resistance for the L device given, which during OP analysis may result in an ill formed matrix, yields an error message and aborts the simulation.

15.1.4 Transient Analysis Options

AUTOSTOP
stops a transient analysis after successfully calculating all measure functions (15.4) specified with the dot command .meas. autostop is not available with meas (17.5.37) used in control mode.
CHGTOL=x
resets the charge tolerance of the program. The default value is 1.0e-14.
CONVSTEP=x
relative step limit applied to code models.
CONVABSSTEP=x
absolute step limit applied to code models.
GMINSTEPS=x
[*] sets number of Gmin steps to be attempted. If the value is set to zero, the gmin stepping algorithm is disabled. In such case the source stepping algorithm becomes the standard when the standard procedure fails to converge to a solution.
ITL3=x
resets the lower transient analysis iteration limit. the default value is 4. (Note: not implemented in Spice3).
ITL4=x
resets the transient analysis time-point iteration limit. the default is 10.
ITL5=x
resets the transient analysis total iteration limit. the default is 5000. Set ITL5=0 to omit this test. (Note: not implemented in Spice3).
ITL6=x
[*] synonym for SRCSTEPS.
MAXEVITER=x
sets the number of event iterations that are allowed at an analysis point
MAXOPALTER=x
specifies the maximum number of analog/event alternations that the simulator can use in solving a hybrid circuit.
MAXORD=x
[*] specifies the maximum order for the numerical integration method used by SPICE. Possible values for the Gear method are from 2 (the default) to 6. Using the value 1 with the trapezoidal method specifies backward Euler integration.
METHOD=name
sets the numerical integration method used by SPICE. Possible names are "Gear" or "trapezoidal" (or just "trap"). The default is trapezoidal.
NOOPALTER=TRUE|FALSE
if set to false alternations between analog/event are enabled.
RAMPTIME=x
this options sets the rate of change of independent supplies and code model inductors and capacitors with initial conditions specified.
SRCSTEPS=x
[*] a non-zero value causes SPICE to use a source-stepping method to find the DC operating point. Its value specifies the number of steps.
TRTOL=x
resets the transient error tolerance. The default value is 7. This parameter is an estimate of the factor by which ngspice overestimates the actual truncation error. If XSPICE is enabled and ’A’ devices included, the value is internally set to 1 for higher precision. This will cost a factor of two in CPU time during transient analysis.

15.1.5 ELEMENT Specific options

BADMOS3
Use the older version of the MOS3 model with the “kappa” discontinuity.
DEFAD=x
resets the value for MOS drain diffusion area; the default is 0.0.
DEFAS=x
resets the value for MOS source diffusion area; the default is 0.0.
DEFL=x
resets the value for MOS channel length; the default is 100.0 μm.
DEFW=x
resets the value for MOS channel width; the default is 100.0 μm.
SCALE=x
set the element scaling factor for geometric element parameters whose default unit is meters. As an example: scale=1u and a MOSFET instance parameter W=10 will result in a width of 10μm for this device. An area parameter AD=20 will result in 20e-12 m2. Following instance parameters are scaled:

15.1.6 Transmission Lines Specific Options

TRYTOCOMPACT
Applicable only to the LTRA model (see 6.2.1). When specified, the simulator tries to condense LTRA transmission line’s past history of input voltages and currents.

15.1.7 Precedence of option and .options commands

There are various ways to set the above mentioned options in Ngspice. If no option or .options lines are set by the user, internal default values are given for each of the simulator variables.

You may set options in the init files spinit or .spiceinit via the option command (see chapt. 17.5.42). The values given here will supersede the default values. If you set options via the .options line in your input file, their values will supersede the default and init file data. Finally if you set options inside a .control ... .endc section, these values will supersede any values of the respective simulator variables given so far.

15.2 Initial Conditions

15.2.1 .NODESET: Specify Initial Node Voltage Guesses

General form:

.NODESET V(NODNUM)=VAL V(NODNUM)=VAL ... 
.NODESET ALL=VAL

Examples:

.NODESET V(12)=4.5 V(4)=2.23 
.NODESET ALL=1.5

The .nodeset line helps the program find the dc or initial transient solution by making a preliminary pass with the specified nodes held to the given voltages. The restriction is then released and the iteration continues to the true solution. The .nodeset line may be necessary for convergence on bistable or a-stable circuits. .nodeset all=val allows to set all starting node voltages (except for the ground node) in a single line. In general, the .nodeset line should not be necessary.

15.2.2 .IC: Set Initial Conditions

General form:

.ic v(nodnum)=val v(nodnum)=val ...

Examples:

.ic v(11)=5 v(4)=-5 v(2)=2.2

The .ic line is for setting transient initial conditions. It has two different interpretations, depending on whether the uic parameter is specified on the .tran control line. Also, one should not confuse this line with the .nodeset line. The .nodeset line is only to help dc convergence, and does not affect final bias solution (except for multi-stable circuits). The two interpretations of this line are as follows:

  1. When the uic parameter is specified on the .tran line, then the node voltages specified on the .ic control line are used to compute the capacitor, diode, BJT, JFET, and MOSFET initial conditions. This is equivalent to specifying the ic=... parameter on each device line, but is much more convenient. The ic=... parameter can still be specified and takes precedence over the .ic values. Since no dc bias (initial transient) solution is computed before the transient analysis, one should take care to specify all dc source voltages on the .ic control line if they are to be used to compute device initial conditions.
  2. When the uic parameter is not specified on the .tran control line, the dc bias (initial transient) solution is computed before the transient analysis. In this case, the node voltages specified on the .ic control line is forced to the desired initial values during the bias solution. During transient analysis, the constraint on these node voltages is removed. This is the preferred method since it allows ngspice to compute a consistent dc solution.

15.3 Analyses

15.3.1 .AC: Small-Signal AC Analysis

General form:

.ac dec nd fstart fstop 
.ac oct no fstart fstop 
.ac lin np fstart fstop

Examples:

.ac dec 10 1 10K 
.ac dec 10 1K 100MEG 
.ac lin 100 1 100HZ

dec stands for decade variation, and nd is the number of points per decade. oct stands for octave variation, and no is the number of points per octave. lin stands for linear variation, and np is the number of points. fstart is the starting frequency, and fstop is the final frequency. If this line is included in the input file, ngspice performs an AC analysis of the circuit over the specified frequency range. Note that in order for this analysis to be meaningful, at least one independent source must have been specified with an ac value. Typically it does not make much sense to specify more than one ac source. If you do, the result will be a superposition of all sources, thus difficult to interpret.

Example:

Basic RC circuit 
r 1 2 1.0 
c 2 0 1.0 
vin 1 0 dc 0 ac 1  $ <--- the ac source 
.options noacct 
.ac dec 10 .01 10 
.plot ac  vdb(2) xlog 
.end

In this ac (or ’small signal’) analysis all non-linear devices are linearized around their actual dc operating point. All Ls and Cs get their imaginary value, depending on the actual frequency step. Each output vector will be calculated relative to the input voltage (current) given by the ac value (Vin equals to 1 in the example above). The resulting node voltages (and branch currents) are complex vectors. Therefore you have to be careful using the plot command. Especially you may use the variants of vxx(node) described in chapter 15.6.2 like vdb(2) (see example above).

15.3.2 .DC: DC Transfer Function

General form:

.dc srcnam vstart vstop vincr [src2 start2 stop2 incr2]

Examples:

 
.dc VIN 0.25 5.0 0.25 
.dc VDS 0 10 .5 VGS 0 5 1 
.dc VCE 0 10 .25 IB 0 10U 1U 
.dc RLoad 1k 2k 100 
.dc TEMP -15 75 5

The .dc line defines the dc transfer curve source and sweep limits (again with capacitors open and inductors shorted). srcnam is the name of an independent voltage or current source, a resistor or the circuit temperature. vstart, vstop, and vincr are the starting, final, and incrementing values respectively. The first example causes the value of the voltage source VIN to be swept from 0.25 Volts to 5.0 Volts in increments of 0.25 Volts. A second source (src2) may optionally be specified with associated sweep parameters. In this case, the first source is swept over its range for each value of the second source. This option can be useful for obtaining semiconductor device output characteristics. See the example circuit description on transistor characteristics (21.3).

15.3.3 .DISTO: Distortion Analysis

General form:

.disto dec nd fstart fstop <f2overf1> 
.disto oct no fstart fstop <f2overf1> 
.disto lin np fstart fstop <f2overf1>

Examples:

.disto dec 10 1kHz 100Mhz 
.disto dec 10 1kHz 100Mhz 0.9

The .disto line does a small-signal distortion analysis of the circuit. A multi-dimensional Volterra series analysis is done using multi-dimensional Taylor series to represent the nonlinearities at the operating point. Terms of up to third order are used in the series expansions.

If the optional parameter f2overf1 is not specified, .disto does a harmonic analysis - i.e., it analyses distortion in the circuit using only a single input frequency F1, which is swept as specified by arguments of the .disto command exactly as in the .ac command. Inputs at this frequency may be present at more than one input source, and their magnitudes and phases are specified by the arguments of the distof1 keyword in the input file lines for the input sources (see the description for independent sources). (The arguments of the distof2 keyword are not relevant in this case).

The analysis produces information about the AC values of all node voltages and branch currents at the harmonic frequencies 2F1 and , vs. the input frequency F1 as it is swept. (A value of 1 (as a complex distortion output) signifies cos(2π(2F1)t) at 2F1 and cos(2π(3F1)t) at 3F1, using the convention that 1 at the input fundamental frequency is equivalent to cos(2πF1t).) The distortion component desired (2F1 or 3F1) can be selected using commands in ngnutmeg, and then printed or plotted. (Normally, one is interested primarily in the magnitude of the harmonic components, so the magnitude of the AC distortion value is looked at). It should be noted that these are the AC values of the actual harmonic components, and are not equal to HD2 and HD3. To obtain HD2 and HD3, one must divide by the corresponding AC values at F1, obtained from an .ac line. This division can be done using ngnutmeg commands.

If the optional f2overf1 parameter is specified, it should be a real number between (and not equal to) 0.0 and 1.0; in this case, .disto does a spectral analysis. It considers the circuit with sinusoidal inputs at two different frequencies F1 and F2. F1 is swept according to the .disto control line options exactly as in the .ac control line. F2 is kept fixed at a single frequency as F1 sweeps - the value at which it is kept fixed is equal to f2overf1 times fstart. Each independent source in the circuit may potentially have two (superimposed) sinusoidal inputs for distortion, at the frequencies F1 and F2. The magnitude and phase of the F1 component are specified by the arguments of the distof1 keyword in the source’s input line (see the description of independent sources); the magnitude and phase of the F2 component are specified by the arguments of the distof2 keyword. The analysis produces plots of all node voltages/branch currents at the intermodulation product frequencies F1 +F2, F1 -F2, and (2F1)-F2, vs the swept frequency F1. The IM product of interest may be selected using the setplot command, and displayed with the print and plot commands. It is to be noted as in the harmonic analysis case, the results are the actual AC voltages and currents at the intermodulation frequencies, and need to be normalized with respect to .ac values to obtain the IM parameters.

If the distof1 or distof2 keywords are missing from the description of an independent source, then that source is assumed to have no input at the corresponding frequency. The default values of the magnitude and phase are 1.0 and 0.0 respectively. The phase should be specified in degrees.

It should be carefully noted that the number f2overf1 should ideally be an irrational number, and that since this is not possible in practice, efforts should be made to keep the denominator in its fractional representation as large as possible, certainly above 3, for accurate results (i.e., if f2overf1 is represented as a fraction AB, where A and B are integers with no common factors, B should be as large as possible; note that A < B because f2overf1 is constrained to be < 1). To illustrate why, consider the cases where f2overf1 is 49/100 and 1/2. In a spectral analysis, the outputs produced are at F1 +F2, F1 -F2 and 2F1 -F2. In the latter case, F1 -F2 = F2, so the result at the F1 -F2 component is erroneous because there is the strong fundamental F2 component at the same frequency. Also, F1 +F2 = 2F1 -F2 in the latter case, and each result is erroneous individually. This problem is not there in the case where f2overf1 = 49/100, because F1 -F2 = 51100 F1 <> 49100 F1 = F2. In this case, there are two very closely spaced frequency components at F2 and F1 -F2. One of the advantages of the Volterra series technique is that it computes distortions at mix frequencies expressed symbolically (i.e. nF1 +mF2), therefore one is able to obtain the strengths of distortion components accurately even if the separation between them is very small, as opposed to transient analysis for example. The disadvantage is of course that if two of the mix frequencies coincide, the results are not merged together and presented (though this could presumably be done as a postprocessing step). Currently, the interested user should keep track of the mix frequencies himself or herself and add the distortions at coinciding mix frequencies together should it be necessary.

Only a subset of the ngspice nonlinear device models supports distortion analysis. These are

15.3.4 .NOISE: Noise Analysis

General form:

.noise v(output <,ref>) src ( dec | lin | oct ) pts fstart fstop 
+ <pts_per_summary>

Examples:

.noise v(5) VIN dec 10 1kHZ 100Mhz 
.noise v(5,3) V1 oct 8 1.0 1.0e6 1

The .noise line does a noise analysis of the circuit. output is the node at which the total output noise is desired; if ref is specified, then the noise voltage v(output) - v(ref) is calculated. By default, ref is assumed to be ground. src is the name of an independent source to which input noise is referred. pts, fstart and fstop are .ac type parameters that specify the frequency range over which plots are desired. pts_per_summary is an optional integer; if specified, the noise contributions of each noise generator is produced every pts_per_summary frequency points. The .noise control line produces two plots:

  1. one for the Noise Spectral Density curves and
  2. one for the total Integrated Noise over the specified frequency range.

All noise voltages/currents are in squared units (V2Hz and A2Hz for spectral density, V2 and A2 for integrated noise).

15.3.5 .OP: Operating Point Analysis

General form:

.op

The inclusion of this line in an input file directs ngspice to determine the dc operating point of the circuit with inductors shorted and capacitors opened.

Note: a DC analysis is automatically performed prior to a transient analysis to determine the transient initial conditions, and prior to an AC small-signal, Noise, and Pole-Zero analysis to determine the linearized, small-signal models for nonlinear devices (see the KEEPOPINFO variable 15.1.2).

15.3.6 .PZ: Pole-Zero Analysis

General form:

.pz node1 node2 node3 node4 cur pol 
.pz node1 node2 node3 node4 cur zer 
.pz node1 node2 node3 node4 cur pz 
.pz node1 node2 node3 node4 vol pol 
.pz node1 node2 NODE3 node4 vol zer 
.pz node1 node2 node3 node4 vol pz

Examples:

.pz 1 0 3 0 cur pol 
.pz 2 3 5 0 vol zer 
.pz 4 1 4 1 cur pz

cur stands for a transfer function of the type (output voltage)/(input current) while vol stands for a transfer function of the type (output voltage)/(input voltage). pol stands for pole analysis only, zer for zero analysis only and pz for both. This feature is provided mainly because if there is a nonconvergence in finding poles or zeros, then, at least the other can be found. Finally, node1 and node2 are the two input nodes and node3 and node4 are the two output nodes. Thus, there is complete freedom regarding the output and input ports and the type of transfer function.

In interactive mode, the command syntax is the same except that the first field is pz instead of .pz. To print the results, one should use the command “print all”.

15.3.7 .SENS: DC or Small-Signal AC Sensitivity Analysis

General form:

.SENS OUTVAR 
.SENS OUTVAR AC DEC ND FSTART FSTOP 
.SENS OUTVAR AC OCT NO FSTART FSTOP 
.SENS OUTVAR AC LIN NP FSTART FSTOP

Examples:

.SENS V(1,OUT) 
.SENS V(OUT) AC DEC 10 100 100k 
.SENS I(VTEST)

The sensitivity of OUTVAR to all non-zero device parameters is calculated when the SENS analysis is specified. OUTVAR is a circuit variable (node voltage or voltage-source branch current). The first form calculates sensitivity of the DC operating-point value of OUTVAR. The second form calculates sensitivity of the AC values of OUTVAR. The parameters listed for AC sensitivity are the same as in an AC analysis (see ".AC" above). The output values are in dimensions of change in output per unit change of input (as opposed to percent change in output or per percent change of input).

15.3.8 .TF: Transfer Function Analysis

General form:

.tf outvar insrc

Examples:

.tf v(5, 3) VIN 
.tf i(VLOAD) VIN

The .tf line defines the small-signal output and input for the dc small-signal analysis. outvar is the small signal output variable and insrc is the small-signal input source. If this line is included, ngspice computes the dc small-signal value of the transfer function (output/input), input resistance, and output resistance. For the first example, ngspice would compute the ratio of V(5, 3) to VIN, the small-signal input resistance at VIN, and the small signal output resistance measured across nodes 5 and 3.

15.3.9 .TRAN: Transient Analysis

General form:

.tran tstep tstop <tstart <tmax>> <uic>

Examples:

.tran 1ns 100ns 
.tran 1ns 1000ns 500ns 
.tran 10ns 1us

tstep is the printing or plotting increment for line-printer output. For use with the post-processor, tstep is the suggested computing increment. tstop is the final time, and tstart is the initial time. If tstart is omitted, it is assumed to be zero. The transient analysis always begins at time zero. In the interval <zero, tstart>, the circuit is analyzed (to reach a steady state), but no outputs are stored. In the interval <tstart, tstop>, the circuit is analyzed and outputs are stored. tmax is the maximum stepsize that ngspice uses; for default, the program chooses either tstep or (tstop-tstart)/50.0, whichever is smaller. tmax is useful when one wishes to guarantee a computing interval which is smaller than the printer increment, tstep.

An initial transient operating point at time zero is calculated according to the following procedure: all independent voltages and currents are applied with their time zero values, all capacitances are opened, inductances are shorted, the non linear device equations are solved iteratively.

uic (use initial conditions) is an optional keyword which indicates that the user does not want ngspice to solve for the quiescent operating point before beginning the transient analysis. If this keyword is specified, ngspice uses the values specified using IC=... on the various elements as the initial transient condition and proceeds with the analysis. If the .ic control line has been specified (see 15.2.2), then the node voltages on the .ic line are used to compute the initial conditions for the devices. IC=... will take precedence over the values given in the .ic control line. If neither IC=... nor the .ic control line is given for a specific node, node voltage zero is assumed.

Look at the description on the .ic control line (15.2.2) for its interpretation when uic is not specified.

15.3.10 Transient noise analysis (at low frequency)

In contrast to the analysis types described above the transient noise simulation (noise current or voltage versus time) is not implemented as a dot command, but is integrated with the independent voltage source vsrc (isrc still not yet available) (see 4.1.7) and used in combination with the .tran transient analysis (15.3.9).

Transient noise analysis deals with noise currents or voltages added to your circuits as a time dependent signal of randomly generated voltage excursion on top of a fixed dc voltage. The sequence of voltage values has random amplitude, but equidistant time intervals, selectable by the user (parameter NT). The resulting voltage waveform is differentiable and thus does not require any modifications of the matrix solving algorithms.

White noise is generated by the ngspice random number generator, applying the Box-Muller transform. Values are generated on the fly, each time when a breakpoint is hit.

The 1/f noise is generated with an algorithm provided by N. J. Kasdin (“Discrete simulation of colored noise and stochastic processes and 1∕fa power law noise generation”, Proceedings of the IEEE, Volume 83, Issue 5, May 1995 Page(s):802 – 827). The noise sequence (one for each voltage/current source with 1/f selected) is generated upon start up of the simulator and stored for later use. The number of point is determined by the total simulation time divided by NT, rounded up the the nearest power of 2. Each time a breakpoint (n⋆NT , relevant to the noise signal) is hit, the next value is retrieved from the sequence.

If you want a random, but reproducible sequence, you may select a seed value for the random number generator by adding

set rndseed=nn

to the spinit or .spiceinit file, nn being a positive integer number.

The transient noise analysis will allow the simulation of the three most important noise sources. Thermal noise is described by the Gaussian white noise. Flicker noise (pink noise or 1 over f noise) with an exponent between 0 and 2 is provided as well. Shot noise is dependent on the current flowing through a device and may be simulated by applying a non-linear source as demonstrated in the following example:

Example:

* Shot noise test with B source, diode 
* voltage on device (diode, forward) 
Vdev out 0 DC 0 PULSE(0.4 0.45 10u) 
* diode, forward direction, to be modeled with noise 
D1 mess 0 DMOD 
.model DMOD D IS=1e-14 N=1 
X1 0 mess out ishot 
* device between 1 and 2 
* new output terminals of device including noise: 1 and 3 
.subckt ishot 1 2 3 
* white noise source with rms 1V 
* 20000 sample points 
VNG 0 11 DC 0 TRNOISE(1 1n 0 0) 
*measure the current i(v1) 
V1 2 3 DC 0 
* calculate the shot noise 
* sqrt(2*current*q*bandwidth) 
BI 1 3 I=sqrt(2*abs(i(v1))*1.6e-19*1e7)*v(11) 
.ends ishot 
 
.tran 1n 20u 
.control 
run 
plot (-1)*i(vdev) 
.endc 
.end

The selection of the delta time step (NT) is worth discussing. Gaussian white noise has unlimited bandwidth and thus unlimited energy content. This is unrealistic. The bandwidth of real noise is limited, but it is still called "White" if it is the same level throughout the frequency range of interest, e.g. the bandwidth of your system. Thus you may select NT to be a factor of 10 smaller than the frequency limit of your circuit. A thorough analysis is still needed to clarify the appropriate factor! The transient method is probably most suited for circuits including switches, which are not amenable to the small signal .NOISE analysis (chapter 15.3.4).

This is the price you have to pay for transient noise analysis: the number of required time steps for simulation will increase, and thus the simulation time. But modern computers deliver a lot of speed, and it may be well worth of trying and experimenting.

In addition to white and 1/f noise the independent voltage and current sources offer a random telegraph signal (RTS) noise source, also known as burst noise or popcorn noise, again for transient analysis. For each voltage (current) source offering RTS noise an individual noise amplitude is required for input, as well as a mean capture time and a mean emission time. The amplitude resembles the influence of a single trap on the current or voltage. The capture and emission times emulate the filling and emptying of the trap, typically following a Poisson process. They are generated from an random exponential distribution with their respective mean values given by the user. To simulate an ensemble of traps, you may combine several current or voltage sources with different parameters.

All three sources (white, 1/f, and RTS) may be combined in a single command line.

RTS noise example:

* white noise, 1/f noise, RTS noise 
 
* voltage source 
VRTS2 13 12 DC 0 trnoise(0 0 0 0 5m 18u 30u) 
VRTS3 11 0 DC 0 trnoise(0 0 0 0 10m 20u 40u) 
VALL 12 11 DC 0 trnoise(1m 1u 1.0 0.1m 15m 22u 50u) 
 
VW1of 21 0 DC  trnoise(1m 1u 1.0 0.1m) 
 
* current source 
IRTS2 10 0 DC 0 trnoise(0 0 0 0 5m 18u 30u) 
IRTS3 10 0 DC 0 trnoise(0 0 0 0 10m 20u 40u) 
IALL 10 0 DC 0 trnoise(1m 1u 1.0 0.1m 15m 22u 50u) 
R10 10 0 1 
 
IW1of 9 0 DC  trnoise(1m 1u 1.0 0.1m) 
Rall 9 0 1 
 
* sample points 
.tran 1u 500u 
 
.control 
run 
plot v(13) v(21) 
plot v(10) v(9) 
.endc 
 
.end

Some details on RTS noise modeling are available in a recent article [20], available here.

Anyhow this transient noise feature is still experimental!

The following questions (among others) are to be solved:

15.3.11 .PSS: Periodic Steady State Analysis

(Experimental code, not yet made publicly available!)

General form:

.pss gfreq tstab oscnob psspoints harms sciter steadycoeff <uic>

Examples:

.pss 150 200e-3 2 1024 11 50 5e-3 uic 
.pss 624e6 1u v_plus 1024 10 150 5e-3 uic 
.pss 624e6 500n bout 1024 10 100 5e-3 uic

gfreq is guessed frequency of fundamental suggested by user. When performing transient analysis the PSS algorithm tries to infer a new rough guess rgfreq on the fundamental. If gfreq is out of ±10% with respect to rgfreq then gfreq is discarded.

tstab is stabilization time before the shooting begin to search for the PSS. It has to be noticed that this parameter heavily influence the possibility to reach the PSS. Thus is a good practice to ensure a circuit to have a right tstab, e.g. performing a separate TRAN analysis before to run PSS analysis.

oscnob is the node or branch where the oscillation dynamic is expected. PSS analysis will give a brief report of harmonic content at this node or branch.

psspoints is number of step in evaluating predicted period after convergence is reached. It is useful only in Time Domain plots. However this number should be higher than 2 times the requested harms. Otherwise the PSS analysis will properly adjust it.

harms number of harmonics to be calculated as requested by the user.

sciter number of allowed shooting cycle iterations. Default is 50.

steady_coeff is the weighting coefficient for calculating the Global Convergence Error (GCE) which is the reference value in order to infer is convergence is reached. The lower steady_coeff is set, the higher the accuracy of predicted frequency can be reached but at longer analysis time and sciter number. Default is 1e-3.

uic (use initial conditions) is an optional keyword which indicates that the user does not want ngspice to solve for the quiescent operating point before beginning the transient analysis. If this keyword is specified, ngspice uses the values specified using IC=... on the various elements as the initial transient condition and proceeds with the analysis. If the .ic control line has been specified, then the node voltages on the .ic line are used to compute the initial conditions for the devices. Look at the description on the .ic control line for its interpretation when uic is not specified.

15.4 Measurements after AC, DC and Transient Analysis

15.4.1 .meas(ure)

The .meas or .measure statement (and its equivalent meas command, see chapt. 17.5.37) are used to analyze the output data of a tran, ac, or dc simulation. The command is executed immediately after the simulation has finished.

15.4.2 batch versus interactive mode

.meas analysis may not be used in batch mode (-b command line option), if an output file (rawfile) is given at the same time (-r rawfile command line option). In this batch mode ngspice will write its simulation output data directly to the output file. The data is not kept in memory, thus is no longer available for further analysis. This is made to allow a very large output stream with only a relatively small memory usage. For .meas to be active you need to run the batch mode with a .plot or .print command. A better alternative may be to start ngspice in interactive mode.

If you need batch like operation, you may add a .control ... .endc section to the input file:

Example:

*input file 
... 
.tran 1ns 1000ns 
... 
********************************* 
.control 
run 
write outputfile data 
.endc 
********************************* 
.end

and start ngspice in interactive mode, e.g. by running the command

ngspice inputfile .

.meas<ure> then prints its user-defined data analysis to the standard output. The analysis includes propagation, delay, rise time, fall time, peak-to-peak voltage, minimum or maximum voltage, the integral or derivative over a specified period and several other user defined values.

15.4.3 General remarks

The measure type {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} depends on the data which are to be evaluated, either originating from a dc analysis, an ac analysis, a transient simulation. SP to analyze a spectrum from the spec or fft commands is only available when executed in a meas command, see 17.5.37.

result will be a vector containing the result of the measurement. trig_variable, targ_variable, and out_variable are vectors stemming from the simulation, e.g. a voltage vector v(out).

VAL=val expects a real number val. It may be as well a parameter in ” or {} expanding to a real number.

TD=td and AT=time expect a time value if measure type is tran. For ac and sp AT will be a frequency value, TD is ignored. For dc analysis AT is a voltage (or current), TD is ignored as well.

CROSS=# requires an integer number #. CROSS=LAST is possible as well. The same is expected by RISE and FALL.

Frequency and time values may start at 0 and extend to positive real numbers. Voltage (or current) inputs for the independent (scale) axis in a dc analysis may start or end at arbitrary real valued numbers.

*

************

Be careful because not all of the .measure commands have been implemented so far!

’deriv’ and ’error’ is missing

************

*

15.4.4 Input

In the following lines you will get some explanation on the .measure commands. A simple simulation file with two sines of different frequencies may serve as an example. The transient simulation delivers time as the independent variable and two voltages as output (dependent variables).

Input file:

File: simple-meas-tran.sp 
* Simple .measurement examples 
* transient simulation of two sine signals with different frequencies 
vac1 1 0 DC 0 sin(0 1 1k 0 0) 
vac2 2 0 DC 0 sin(0 1.2 0.9k 0 0) 
.tran 10u 5m 
* 
.measure tran ... $ for the different inputs see below! 
* 
.control 
run 
plot v(1) v(2) 
.endc 
.end

After displaying the general syntax of the .measurement statement, some examples are posted, referring to the input file given above.

15.4.5 Trig Targ

.measure according to general form 1 measures the difference in dc voltage, frequency or time between two points selected from one or two output vectors. The current examples all are using transient simulation. Measurements for tran analysis start after a delay time td. If you run other examples with ac simulation or spectrum analysis, time may be replaced by frequency, after a dc simulation the independent variable may become a voltage or current.

General form 1:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result TRIG trig_variable VAL=val <TD=td> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=# | RISE=LAST> <FALL=# | FALL=LAST> <TRIG AT=time> TARG targ_variable VAL=val <TD=td> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=# | RISE=LAST> <FALL=# | FALL=LAST> <TARG AT=time>

Measure statement example (for use in the input file given above):

.measure tran tdiff TRIG v(1) VAL=0.5 RISE=1 TARG v(1) VAL=0.5 RISE=2

measures the time difference between v(1) reaching 0.5 V for the first time on its first rising slope (TRIG) versus reaching 0.5 V again on its second rising slope (TARG). I.e. it measures the signal period.

Output:

tdiff = 1.000000e-003 targ= 1.083343e-003 trig= 8.334295e-005

Measure statement example:

.measure tran tdiff TRIG v(1) VAL=0.5 RISE=1 TARG v(1) VAL=0.5 RISE=3

measures the time difference between v(1) reaching 0.5 V for the first time on its rising slope versus reaching 0.5 V on its rising slope for the third time (i.e. two periods).

Measure statement:

.measure tran tdiff TRIG v(1) VAL=0.5 RISE=1 TARG v(1) VAL=0.5 FALL=1

measures the time difference between v(1) reaching 0.5V for the first time on its rising slope versus reaching 0.5 V on its first falling slope.

Measure statement:

.measure tran tdiff TRIG v(1) VAL=0 FALL=3 TARG v(2) VAL=0 FALL=3

measures the time difference between v(1) reaching 0V its third falling slope versus v(2) reaching 0 V on its third falling slope.

Measure statement:

.measure tran tdiff TRIG v(1) VAL=-0.6 CROSS=1 TARG v(2) VAL=-0.8 CROSS=1

measures the time difference between v(1) crossing -0.6 V for the first time (any slope) versus v(2) crossing -0.8 V for the first time (any slope).

Measure statement:

.measure tran tdiff TRIG AT=1m TARG v(2) VAL=-0.8 CROSS=3

measures the time difference between the time point 1ms versus the time when v(2) crosses -0.8 V for the third time (any slope).

15.4.6 Find ... When

The FIND and WHEN functions allow to measure any dependent or independent time, frequency, or dc parameter, when two signals cross each other or a signal crosses a given value. Measurements start after a delay TD and may be restricted to a range between FROM and TO.

General form 2:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result WHEN out_variable=val <TD=td> <FROM=val> <TO=val> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=# | RISE=LAST> <FALL=# | FALL=LAST>

Measure statement:

.measure tran teval WHEN v(2)=0.7 CROSS=LAST

measures the time point when v(2) crosses 0.7 V for the last time (any slope).

General form 3:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result WHEN out_variable=out_variable2  <TD=td> <FROM=val> <TO=val> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=# | RISE=LAST> <FALL=# | FALL=LAST>

Measure statement:

.measure tran teval WHEN v(2)=v(1) RISE=LAST

measures the time point when v(2) and v(1) are equal, v(2) rising for the last time.

General form 4:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result FIND out_variable WHEN out_variable2=val <TD=td> <FROM=val> <TO=val> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=# | RISE=LAST> <FALL=# | FALL=LAST>

Measure statement:

.measure tran yeval FIND v(2) WHEN v(1)=-0.4 FALL=LAST

returns the dependent (y) variable drawn from v(2) at the time point when v(1) equals a value of -0.4, v(1) falling for the last time.

General form 5:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result FIND out_variable WHEN out_variable2=out_variable3  <TD=td> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=#|RISE=LAST> <FALL=#|FALL=LAST>

Measure statement:

.measure tran yeval FIND v(2) WHEN v(1)=v(3) FALL=2

returns the dependent (y) variable drawn from v(2) at the time point when v(1) crosses v(3), v(1) falling for the second time.

General form 6:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result FIND out_variable AT=val

Measure statement:

.measure tran yeval FIND v(2) AT=2m

returns the dependent (y) variable drawn from v(2) at the time point 2 ms (given by AT=time).

15.4.7 AVG|MIN|MAX|PP|RMS|MIN_AT|MAX_AT

General form 7:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result {AVG|MIN|MAX|PP|RMS|MIN_AT|MAX_AT} out_variable <TD=td> <FROM=val> <TO=val>

Measure statements:

.measure tran ymax MAX v(2) from=2m to=3m

returns the maximum value of v(2) inside the time interval between 2 ms and 3 ms.

.measure tran tymax MAX_AT v(2) from=2m to=3m

returns the time point of the maximum value of v(2) inside the time interval between 2 ms and 3 ms.

.measure tran ypp PP v(1) from=2m to=4m

returns the peak to peak value of v(1) inside the time interval between 2 ms and 4 ms.

.measure tran yrms RMS v(1) from=2m to=4m

returns the root mean square value of v(1) inside the time interval between 2 ms and 4 ms.

.measure tran yavg AVG v(1) from=2m to=4m

returns the average value of v(1) inside the time interval between 2 ms and 4 ms.

15.4.8 Integ

General form 8:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result INTEG<RAL> out_variable <TD=td> <FROM=val> <TO=val>

Measure statement:

.measure tran yint INTEG v(2) from=2m to=3m

returns the area under v(2) inside the time interval between 2 ms and 3 ms.

15.4.9 param

General form 9:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result  param=’expression’

Measure statement:

.param fval=5

.measure tran yadd param=’fval + 7’

will evaluate the given expression fval + 7 and return the value 12.

’Expression’ is evaluated according to the rules given in chapt. 2.8.5 during start up of ngspice. It may contain parameters defined with the .param statement. It may also contain parameters resulting from preceding .meas statements.

.param vout_diff=50u

...

.measure tran tdiff TRIG AT=1m TARG v(2) VAL=-0.8 CROSS=3

.meas tran bw_chk param=’(tdiff < vout_diff) ? 1 : 0’

will evaluate the given ternary function and return the value 1 in bw_chk, if tdiff measured is smaller than parameter vout_diff.

The expression may not contain vectors like v(10), e.g. anything resulting directly from a simulation. This may be handled with the following .meas command option.

15.4.10 par(’expression’)

The par(’expression’) option (15.6.6) allows to use algebraic expressions in the .measure lines. Every out_variable may be replaced by par(’expression’) within the general forms 1-9 described above. Internally par(’expression’) will be substituted by a vector according to the rules of the B source (chapt. 5.1). A typical example of the general form is shown below:

General form 10:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result  FIND par(’expression’) AT=val

Measure statement:

.measure tran vtest find par(’(v(2)*v(1))’) AT=2.3m

will return the product of the two voltages at time point 2.3 ms.

15.4.11 Deriv

General form:

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result DERIV<ATIVE> out_variable AT=val 
 
.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result DERIV<ATIVE> out_variable WHEN out_variable2=val    + <TD=td> 
+ <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=#|RISE=LAST> <FALL=#|FALL=LAST> 
 
.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result DERIV<ATIVE> out_variable 
+ WHEN out_variable2=out_variable3 
+ <TD=td> 
+ <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=#|RISE=LAST> <FALL=#|FALL=LAST>

.MEASURE {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result DERIV<ATIVE> ... is not yet available.

15.4.12 More examples

Some other examples, also showing the use of parameters, are given below. Corresponding demonstration input files are distributed with ngspice in folder /examples/measure.

Other examples:

.meas tran inv_delay2 trig v(in) val=’vp/2’ td=1n fall=1 targ v(out) 
+val=’vp/2’ rise=1 
.meas tran test_data1 trig AT = 1n targ v(out) val=’vp/2’ rise=3 
.meas tran out_slew trig v(out) val=’0.2*vp’ rise=2 targ v(out) 
+val=’0.8*vp’ rise=2 
.meas tran delay_chk param=’(inv_delay < 100ps) ? 1 : 0’ 
.meas tran skew when v(out)=0.6 
.meas tran skew2 when v(out)=skew_meas 
.meas tran skew3 when v(out)=skew_meas fall=2 
.meas tran skew4 when v(out)=skew_meas fall=LAST 
.meas tran skew5 FIND v(out) AT=2n 
.meas tran v0_min  min i(v0) from=’dfall’ to=’dfall+period’ 
.meas tran v0_avg avg i(v0) from=’dfall’ to=’dfall+period’ 
.meas tran v0_integ integ i(v0) from=’dfall’ to=’dfall+period’ 
.meas tran v0_rms rms i(v0) from=’dfall’ to=’dfall+period’ 
.meas dc is_at FIND i(vs) AT=1 
.meas dc is_max max i(vs) from=0 to=3.5 
.meas dc vds_at when i(vs)=0.01 
.meas ac vout_at FIND v(out) AT=1MEG 
.meas ac vout_atd FIND vdb(out) AT=1MEG 
.meas ac vout_max max v(out) from=1k to=10MEG 
.meas ac freq_at when v(out)=0.1 
.meas ac vout_diff trig v(out) val=0.1 rise=1 targ v(out) val=0.1 fall=1 
.meas ac fixed_diff trig AT = 10k targ v(out) val=0.1 rise=1 
.meas ac vout_avg  avg   v(out)  from=10k to=1MEG 
.meas ac vout_integ integ v(out) from=20k to=500k 
.meas ac freq_at2 when v(out)=0.1 fall=LAST 
.meas ac bw_chk param=’(vout_diff < 100k) ? 1 : 0’ 
.meas ac vout_rms rms v(out) from=10 to=1G

15.5 Safe Operating Area (SOA) warning messages

By setting the .option warn=1 the Safe Operation Area check algorithm is enabled. In this case for .op, .dc and .tran analysis warning messages are issued if the branch voltages of devices (Resistors, Capacitors, Diodes, BJTs and MOSFETs) exceed limits which are specified by model parameters. All these parameters are positive with default value of infinity.

The check is executed after Newton-Raphson iteration is finished i.e. in transient analysis in each time step. The user can specify an additional .option maxwarns (default: 5) to limit the count of messages.

The output goes on default to stdout or alternatively to a file specified by command line option –soa-log=filename.

15.5.1 Resistor and Capacitor SOA model parameters

  1. Bv_max:   if |Vr| or |Vc| exceed Bv_max, SOA warning is issued.

15.5.2 Diode SOA model parameter

  1. Bv_max:   if |Vj| exceeds Bv_max, SOA warning is issued.
  2. Fv_max:   if |Vf| exceeds Fv_max, SOA warning is issued.

15.5.3 BJT SOA model parameter

  1. Vbe_max:   if |Vbe| exceeds Vbe_max, SOA warning is issued.
  2. Vbc_max:   if |Vbc| exceeds Vbc_max, SOA warning is issued.
  3. Vce_max:   if |Vce| exceeds Vce_max, SOA warning is issued.
  4. Vcs_max:   if |Vcs| exceeds Vcs_max, SOA warning is issued.

15.5.4 MOS SOA model parameter

  1. Vgs_max:   if |Vgs| exceeds Vgs_max, SOA warning is issued.
  2. Vgd_max:   if |Vgd| exceeds Vgd_max, SOA warning is issued.
  3. Vgb_max:   if |Vgb| exceeds Vgb_max, SOA warning is issued.
  4. Vds_max:   if |Vds| exceeds Vds_max, SOA warning is issued.
  5. Vbs_max:   if |Vbs| exceeds Vbs_max, SOA warning is issued.
  6. Vbd_max:   if |Vbd| exceeds Vbd_max, SOA warning is issued.

15.6 Batch Output

The following commands .print (15.6.2), .plot (15.6.3) and .four (15.6.4) are valid only if ngspice is started in batch mode (see 16.4.1), whereas .save and the equivalent .probe are aknowledged in all operating modes.

If you start ngspice in batch mode using the -b command line option, the outputs of .print, .plot, and .four are printed to the console output. You may use the output redirection of your shell to direct this printout into a file (not available with MS Windows GUI). As an alternative you may extend the ngspice command by specifying an output file:

ngspice -b -o output.log input.cir

If you however add the command line option -r to create a rawfile, .print and .plot are ignored. If you want to involve the graphics plot output of ngspice, use the control mode (16.4.3) instead of the -b batch mode option.

15.6.1 .SAVE: Name vector(s) to be saved in raw file

General form:

.save vector vector vector ...

Examples:

.save i(vin) node1 v(node2) 
.save @m1[id] vsource#branch 
.save all @m2[vdsat]

The vectors listed on the .SAVE line are recorded in the rawfile for use later with ngspice or ngnutmeg (ngnutmeg is just the data-analysis half of ngspice, without the ability to simulate). The standard vector names are accepted. Node voltages may be saved by giving the nodename or v(nodename). Currents through an independent voltage source are given by i(sourcename) or sourcename#branch. Internal device data are accepted as @dev[param].

If no .SAVE line is given, then the default set of vectors is saved (node voltages and voltage source branch currents). If .SAVE lines are given, only those vectors specified are saved. For more discussion on internal device data, e.g. @m1[id], see Appendix, chapt. 31.1. If you want to save internal data in addition to the default vector set, add the parameter all to the additional vectors to be saved. If the command .save vm(out) is given, and you store the data in a rawfile, only the original data v(out) are stored. The request for storing the magnitude is ignored, because this may be added later during rawfile data evaluation with ngnutmeg or ngspice. See also the section on the interactive command interpreter (chapter 17.5) for information on how to use the rawfile.

15.6.2 .PRINT Lines

General form:

.print prtype ov1 <ov2 ... ov8>

Examples:

.print tran v(4) i(vin) 
.print dc v(2) i(vsrc) v(23, 17) 
.print ac vm(4, 2) vr(7) vp(8, 3)

The .print line defines the contents of a tabular listing of one to eight output variables. prtype is the type of the analysis (DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO) for which the specified outputs are desired. The form for voltage or current output variables is the same as given in the previous section for the print command; Spice2 restricts the output variable to the following forms (though this restriction is not enforced by ngspice):



V(N1<,N2>)

specifies the voltage difference between nodes N1 and N2. If N2 (and the preceding comma) is omitted, ground (0) is assumed. See the print command in the previous section for more details. For compatibility with SPICE2, the following five additional values can be accessed for the ac analysis by replacing the "V" in V(N1,N2) with:



VR Real part


VI Imaginary part


VM Magnitude


VP Phase


VDB 20log10(magnitude)




I(VXXXXXXX)

specifies the current flowing in the independent voltage source named VXXXXXXX. Positive current flows from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. (Not yet implemented: For the ac analysis, the corresponding replacements for the letter I may be made in the same way as described for voltage outputs.)



Output variables for the noise and distortion analyses have a different general form from that of the other analyses. There is no limit on the number of .print lines for each type of analysis. The par(’expression’) option (15.6.6) allows to use algebraic expressions in the .print lines. .width (15.6.7) selects the maximum number of characters per line.

15.6.3 .PLOT Lines

.plot creates a printer plot output.

General form:

.plot pltype ov1 <(plo1, phi1)> <ov2 <(plo2, phi2)> ... ov8>

Examples:

.plot dc v(4) v(5) v(1) 
.plot tran v(17, 5) (2, 5) i(vin) v(17) (1, 9) 
.plot ac vm(5) vm(31, 24) vdb(5) vp(5) 
.plot disto hd2 hd3(R) sim2 
.plot tran v(5, 3) v(4) (0, 5) v(7) (0, 10)

The .plot line defines the contents of one plot of from one to eight output variables. pltype is the type of analysis (DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO) for which the specified outputs are desired. The syntax for the ovi is identical to that for the .print line and for the plot command in the interactive mode.

The overlap of two or more traces on any plot is indicated by the letter “X”. When more than one output variable appears on the same plot, the first variable specified is printed as well as plotted. If a printout of all variables is desired, then a companion .print line should be included. There is no limit on the number of .plot lines specified for each type of analysis. The par(’expression’) option (15.6.6) allows to use algebraic expressions in the .plot lines.

15.6.4 .FOUR: Fourier Analysis of Transient Analysis Output

General form:

.four freq ov1 <ov2 ov3 ...>

Examples:

.four 100K v(5)

The .four (or Fourier) line controls whether ngspice performs a Fourier analysis as a part of the transient analysis. freq is the fundamental frequency, and ov1 is the desired vector to be analyzed. The Fourier analysis is performed over the interval <TSTOP-period, TSTOP>, where TSTOP is the final time specified for the transient analysis, and period is one period of the fundamental frequency. The dc component and the first nine harmonics are determined. For maximum accuracy, TMAX (see the .tran line) should be set to period/100.0 (or less for very high-Q circuits). The par(’expression’) option (15.6.6) allows to use algebraic expressions in the .four lines.

15.6.5 .PROBE: Name vector(s) to be saved in raw file

General form:

.probe vector <vector vector ...>

Examples:

.probe i(vin) input output 
.probe @m1[id]

Same as .SAVE (see chapt. 15.6.1).

15.6.6 par(’expression’): Algebraic expressions for output

General form:

par(’expression’) 
output=par(’expression’)  $ not in .measure

Examples:

.four 1001 sq1=par(’v(1)*v(1)’) 
.measure tran vtest find par(’(v(2)*v(1))’) AT=2.3m 
.print tran output=par(’v(1)/v(2)’) v(1) v(2) 
.plot dc v(1) diff=par(’(v(4)-v(2))/0.01’) out222

In the output lines .four, .plot, .print, .save and in the .measure evaluation it is possible to add algebraic expression for output, in addition to vectors. All of these output lines accept par(’expression’), where expression is any expression as has already been defined for the B source (see chapter 5.1). Thus expression may contain predefined functions, numerical values, constants, simulator output like v(n1) or i(vdb), parameters predefined by a .param statement, and the variables hertz, temper, and time.

Internally expression is replaced by an internally generated voltage node, which is the output of a B source, one node and B source per par(’...’). Several par(’...’) are allowed in each line, up to 99 per input file. The internal nodes are named pa_00 to pa_99. If your input file already contains such node names, an error will occur, unless you rename these nodes.

In .four, .plot, .print, .save, but not in .measure, an alternative syntax
output=par(’expression’) is possible. par(’expression’) may be used as described above. output is the name of the new node to replace the expression. So output has to be unique and a valid node name.

The syntax of output=par(’expression’) is strict, no spaces between par and (’, or between ( and ’ are allowed, (’ and ’) both are required. Also there is not much error checking on your input, if there is a typo, for example, an error may pop up at an unexpected place.

15.6.7 .width

Set the width of a print-out or plot with the following card:

.with out = 256

Parameter out yields the maximum number of characters plotted in a row, if printing in columns or an ASCII-plot is selected.

Chapter 16
Starting ngspice

16.1 Introduction

Ngspice consists of the simulator and a front-end for data analysis and plotting. Input to the simulator is a netlist file, including commands for circuit analysis and output control. Interactive ngspice can plot data from a simulation on a PC or a workstation display.

Ngspice on LINUX (and OSs like Cygwin, BCD, Solaris ...) uses the X Window System for plotting (see chapter 18.3) if the environment variable DISPLAY is available. Otherwise, a console mode (non-graphical) interface is used. If you are using X on a workstation, the DISPLAY variable should already be set; if you want to display graphics on a system different from the one you are running ngspice or ngutmeg on, DISPLAY should be of the form "machine:0.0". See the appropriate documentation on the X Window System for more details.

The MS Windows versions of ngspice and ngnutmeg will have a native graphics interface (see chapter 18.1).

The front-end may be run as a separate "stand-alone" program under the name ngnutmeg. ngnutmeg is a subset of ngspice dedicated to data evaluation, still made available for historical reasons. Ngnutmeg will read in the "raw" data output file created by ngspice -r or by the write command during an interactive ngspice session.

16.2 Where to obtain ngspice

The actual distribution of ngspice may be downloaded from the ngspice download web page. The installation for LINUX or MS Windows is described in the file INSTALL to be found in the top level directory. You may also have a look at chapter 32 of this manual for compiling instructions.

If you want to check out the source code which is actually under development, you may have a look at the ngspice source code repository, which is stored using the Git Source Code Management (SCM) tool. The Git repository may be browsed on the Git web page, also useful for downloading individual files. You may however download (or clone) the complete repository including all source code trees from the console window (LINUX, CYGWIN or MSYS/MINGW) by issuing the command (in a single line)

git clone git://ngspice.git.sourceforge.net/gitroot/ngspice/ngspice

You need to have Git installed, which is available for all three OSs. The whole source tree is then available in <current directory>/ngspice. Compilation and local installation is again described in INSTALL (or chapter 32). If you later want to update your files and download the recent changes from sourceforge into your local repository, cd into the ngspice directory and just type

git pull

git pull will deny to overwrite modified files in your working directory. To drop your local changes first, you can run

git reset --hard

To learn more about git, which can be both powerful and difficult to master, please consult http://git-scm.com/, especially: http://git-scm.com/documentation which has pointers to documentation and tutorials.

16.3 Command line options for starting ngspice and ngnutmeg

Command Synopsis:

ngspice [ -o logfile ] [ -r rawfile] [ -b ] [ -i ] [ input file ... ] 
ngnutmeg [ - ] [ datafile ... ]

Options are:




Option Long option

Meaning







-

Don’t try to load the default data file ("rawspice.raw") if no other files are given (ngnutmeg only).




-n –no-spiceinit

Don’t try to source the file ".spiceinit" upon start-up. Normally ngspice and ngnutmeg try to find the file in the current directory, and if it is not found then in the user’s home directory (obsolete).




-t TERM –terminal=TERM

The program is being run on a terminal with mfb name term (obsolete).




-b –batch

Run in batch mode. Ngspice reads the default input source (e.g. keyboard) or reads the given input file and performs the analyses specified; output is either Spice2-like line-printer plots ("ascii plots") or a ngspice rawfile. See the following section for details. Note that if the input source is not a terminal (e.g. using the IO redirection notation of "<") ngspice defaults to batch mode (-i overrides). This option is valid for ngspice only.




-s –server

Run in server mode. This is like batch mode, except that a temporary rawfile is used and then written to the standard output, preceded by a line with a single "@", after the simulation is done. This mode is used by the ngspice daemon. This option is valid for ngspice only.

Example for using pipes from the console window:

cat adder.cir|ngspice -s|more




-i –interactive

Run in interactive mode. This is useful if the standard input is not a terminal but interactive mode is desired. Command completion is not available unless the standard input is a terminal, however. This option is valid for ngspice only.




-r FILE –rawfile=FILE

Use rawfile as the default file into which the results of the simulation are saved. This option is valid for ngspice only.




-p –pipe

Allow a program (e.g., xcircuit) to act as a GUI frontend for ngspice through a pipe. Thus ngspice will assume that the input pipe is a tty and allows to run in interactive mode.




-o FILE –output=FILE

All logs generated during a batch run (-b) will be saved in outfile.




-h –help

A short help statement of the command line syntax.




-v –version

Prints a version information.




-a –autorun

Start simulation immediately, as if a control section

.control

run

.endc

had been added to the input file.




–soa-log=FILE

output from Safe Operating Area (SOA) check




Further arguments to ngspice are taken to be ngspice input files, which are read and saved (if running in batch mode then they are run immediately). Ngspice accepts Spice3 (and also most Spice2) input files, and outputs ASCII plots, Fourier analyses, and node printouts as specified in .plot, .four, and .print cards. If an out parameter is given on a .width card (15.6.7), the effect is the same as set width = .... Since ngspice ASCII plots do not use multiple ranges, however, if vectors together on a .plot card have different ranges they do not provide as much information as they do in a scalable graphics plot.

For ngnutmeg, further arguments are taken to be data files in binary or ASCII raw file format (generated with -r in batch mode or the write (see 17.5.86) command) which are loaded into ngnutmeg. If the file is in binary format, it may be only partially completed (useful for examining output before the simulation is finished). One file may contain any number of data sets from different analyses.

16.4 Starting options

16.4.1 Batch mode

Let’s take as an example the Four-Bit binary adder MOS circuit shown in chapter 21.6, stored in a file adder-mos.cir. You may start the simulation immediately by calling

ngspice -b -r adder.raw -o adder.log adder-mos.cir

ngspice will start, simulate according to the .tran command and store the output data in a rawfile adder.raw. Comments, warnings and infos go to log file adder.log. Commands for batch mode operation are described in chapt. 15.

16.4.2 Interactive mode

If you call

ngspice

ngspice will start, load spinit (16.5) and .spiceinit (16.6, if available), and then waits for your manual input. Any of the commands described in 17.5 may be chosen, but many of them are useful only after a circuit has been loaded by

ngspice 1 -> source adder-mos.cir

others require the simulation being done already (e.g. plot):

ngspice 2 ->run 
ngspice 3 ->plot allv

If you call ngspice from the command line with a circuit file as parameter:

ngspice adder-mos.cir

ngspice will start, load the circuit file, parse the circuit (same circuit file as above, containing only dot commands (see chapt. 15) for analysis and output control). ngspice then just waits for your input. You may start the simulation by issuing the run command. Following completion of the simulation you may analyze the data by any of the commands given in chapter 17.5.

16.4.3 Control mode (Interactive mode with control file or control section)

If you add the following control section to your input file adder-mos.cir, you may call

ngspice adder-mos.cir

from the command line and see ngspice starting, simulating and then plotting immediately.

Control section:

*  ADDER - 4 BIT ALL-NAND-GATE BINARY ADDER 
.control 
set noaskquit 
save vcc#branch 
run 
plot vcc#branch 
rusage all 
.endc

Any suitable command listed in chapter 17.5 may be added to the control section, as well as control structures described in chapter 17.6. Batch-like behavior may be obtained by changing the control section to

Control section with batch-like behavior:

*  ADDER - 4 BIT ALL-NAND-GATE BINARY ADDER 
.control 
set noaskquit 
save vcc#branch 
run 
write adder.raw vcc#branch 
quit 
.endc

If you put this control section into a file, say adder-start.sp, you may just add the line

.include adder-start.sp

to your input file adder-mos.cir to obtain the batch-like behavior. In the following example the line .tran ... from the input file is overridden by the tran command given in the control section.

Control section overriding the .tran command:

*  ADDER - 4 BIT ALL-NAND-GATE BINARY ADDER 
.control 
set noaskquit 
save vcc#branch 
tran 1n 500n 
plot vcc#branch 
rusage all 
.endc

The commands within the .control section are executed in the order they are listed and only after the circuit has been read in and parsed. If you want to have a command being executed before circuit parsing, you may use the prefix pre_ (17.5.44) to the command.

A warning is due however: If your circuit file contains such a control section (.control ... .endc), you should not start ngspice in batch mode (with -b as parameter). The outcome may be unpredictable!

16.5 Standard configuration file spinit

Upon start up ngspice reads its configuration file spinit. spinit may be found in
C:\Spice\share\ngspice\scripts (Windows) or /usr/local/share/ngspice/scripts (LINUX). The path may be overridden by setting the environmental variable SPICE_SCRIPTS to a path where spinit is located. ngspice for Windows will also search for spinit in the directory where ngspice.exe resides. If spinit is not found, a warning message is issued, but ngspice will continue (but of course without code models etc.).

Standard spinit contents:

* Standard ngspice init file 
alias exit quit 
alias acct rusage all 
set x11lineararcs 
*set rndseed=12 
*set filetype=ascii 
*set ngdebug 
 
*unset brief 
 
strcmp __flag $program "ngspice" 
if $__flag = 0 
 
* For SPICE2 POLYs, edit the below line to point to the location 
* of your codemodel. 
 codemodel C:/Spice/lib/spice/spice2poly.cm 
 
* The other codemodels 
 codemodel C:/Spice/lib/spice/analog.cm 
 codemodel C:/Spice/lib/spice/digital.cm 
 codemodel C:/Spice/lib/spice/xtradev.cm 
 codemodel C:/Spice/lib/spice/xtraevt.cm 
 
end 
unset __flag

spinit contains a script which is run upon start up of ngspice. You may find details of scripting in the next chapter. Aliases (name equivalences) are set. set filetype=ascii will yield ASCII output in the output data file (rawfile), a more compact binary format is used otherwise. The asterisk ’*’ will comment out this line. If used by ngspice, spinit will then load the XSPICE code models from their absolute paths. You may also define relative paths here. set ngdebug will yield a lot of additional debug output. Any other contents of the script. e.g. plotting preferences, may be included here and started automatically by ngspice. The compatibility mode of ngspice has to be set in spinit by set ngbehavior=all.

If the standard path for the libraries (see standard spinit above or /usr/local/lib/spice under CYGWIN and LINUX) is not adequate, you may add for example the ./configure options --prefix=/usr --libdir=/usr/lib64 to set the codemodel search path to /usr/lib64/spice. Besides the standard lib only lib64 is acknowledged.

16.6 User defined configuration file .spiceinit

In addition to spinit you may define a file .spiceinit and put it into the current directory or in your home directory. This file will be read in and executed after spinit, but before any other input file is read. It may contain any script and override the commands given in spinit. If the command line option -n is used upon ngspice start up, this file will be ignored.

16.7 Environmental variables

16.7.1 Ngspice specific variables

SPICE_LIB_DIR
default: /usr/local/share/ngspice (LINUX, CYGWIN), C:\Spice\share\ngspice (Windows)
SPICE_EXEC_DIR
default: /usr/local/bin (LINUX, CYGWIN), C:\Spice\bin (Windows)
SPICE_BUGADDR
default: http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/bugrep.html
Where to send bug reports on ngspice.
SPICE_EDITOR
default: vi (LINUX, CYGWIN), notepad.exe (MINGW, Visual Studio)
Set the editor called in the edit command. Always overrides the EDITOR env. variable.
SPICE_ASCIIRAWFILE
default: 0
Format of the rawfile. 0 for binary, and 1 for ascii.
SPICE_NEWS
default: $SPICE_LIB_DIR/news
A file which is copied verbatim to stdout when ngspice starts in interactive mode.
SPICE_HELP_DIR
default: $SPICE_LIB_DIR/helpdir
Help directory, not used in Windows mode
SPICE_HOST
default: empty string
Used in the rspice command (probably obsolete, to be documented)
SPICE_SCRIPTS
default: $SPICE_LIB_DIR/scripts
In this directory the spinit file will be searched.
SPICE_PATH
default: $SPICE_EXEC_DIR/ngspice
Used in the aspice command (probably obsolete, to be documented)
NGSPICE_MEAS_PRECISION
default: 5
Sets the number of digits if output values are printed by the meas(ure) command.
SPICE_NO_DATASEG_CHECK
default: undefined
If defined, will suppress memory resource info (probably obsolete, not used on Windows or where the /proc information system is available.)
NGSPICE_INPUT_DIR
default: undefined
If defined, using a valid directory name„ will add the given directory to the search path when looking for input files (*.cir, *.inc, *.lib).

16.7.2 Common environment variables

TERM LINES COLS DISPLAY HOME PATH EDITOR SHELL POSIXLY_CORRECT

16.8 Memory usage

Ngspice started with batch option (-b) and rawfile output (-r rawfile) will store all simulation data immediately into the rawfile without keeping them in memory. Thus very large circuits may be simulated, the memory requested upon ngspice start up will depend on the circuit size, but will not increase during simulation.

If you start ngspice in interactive mode or interactively with control section, all data will be kept in memory, to be available for later evaluation. A large circuit may outgrow even Gigabytes of memory. The same may happen after a very long simulation run with many vectors and many time steps to be stored. Issuing the save <nodes> command will help to reduce memory requirements by saving only the data defined by the command.

16.9 Simulation time

Simulating large circuits may take an considerable amount of CPU time. If this is of importance, you should compile ngspice with the flags for optimum speed, set during configuring ngspice compilation. Under LINUX, MINGW, and CYGWIN you should select the following option to disable the debug mode, which slows down ngspice:

./configure --disable-debug

Adding --disable-debug will set the -O2 optimization flag for compiling and linking.

Under MS Visual Studio, you will have to select the release version which includes optimization for speed.

If you have selected XSPICE (see chapters 12 and II) as part of your compilation configuration (by adding the option --enable-xspice to your ./configure command), the value of trtol (see 15.1.4) is set internally to 1 (instead of default 7) for higher precision if XSPICE code model ’A’ devices included in the circuit. This may double or even triple the CPU time needed for any transient simulation, because the amount of time steps and thus iteration steps is more than doubled. For MS Visual Studio compilation there is currently no simple way to exclude XSPICE during compilation.

You may enforce higher speed during XSPICE usage by setting the variable xtrtol in your .spiceinit initialization file or in the .control section in front of the tran command (via set xtrtol=2 using the set command 17.5.57) and override the above trtol reduction. Beware however of precision or convergence issues if you use XSPICE ’A’ devices, especially if xtrtol is set to values larger than 2.

If your circuit comprises mostly of MOS transistors, and you have a multi-core processor at hand, you may benefit from OpenMP parallel processing, as described next (16.10).

16.10 Ngspice on multi-core processors using OpenMP

16.10.1 Introduction

Today’s computers typically come with CPUs having more than one core. It will thus be useful to enhance ngspice to make use of such multi-core processors.

Using circuits comprising mostly of transistors and e.g. the BSIM3 model, around 2/3 of the CPU time is spent in evaluating the model equations (e.g. in the BSIM3Load() function). The same happens with other advanced transistor models. Thus this function should be paralleled, if possible. Resulting from that the parallel processing has to be within a dedicated device model. Interestingly solving the matrix takes only about 10% of the CPU time, so paralleling the matrix solver is of secondary interest here!

A recent publication [1] has described a way to exactly do that using OpenMP, which is available on many platforms and is easy to use, especially if you want to parallel processing of a for-loop.

I have chosen the BSIM3 version 3.3.0 model, located in the BSIM3 directory, as the first example. The BSIM3load() function in b3ld.c contains two nested for-loops using linked lists (models and instances, e.g. individual transistors). Unfortunately OpenMP requires a loop with an integer index. So in file B3set.c an array is defined, filled with pointers to all instances of BSIM3 and stored in model->BSIM3InstanceArray.

BSIM3load() is now a wrapper function, calling the for-loop, which runs through functions BSIM3LoadOMP(), once per instance. Inside BSIM3LoadOMP() the model equations are calculated.

Typically you now need to synchronize the activities, in that storing the results into the matrix has to be guarded. The trick offered by the authors now is that the storage is moved out of the BSIM3LoadOMP() function. Inside BSIM3LoadOMP() the updated data are stored in extra locations locally per instance, defined in bsim3def.h. Only after the complete for-loop is exercised, the update to the matrix is done in an extra function BSIM3LoadRhsMat() in the main thread after the paralleled loop. No extra synchronization is required.

Then the thread programming needed is only a single line!!

#pragma omp parallel for num_threads(nthreads) private(here)

introducing the for-loop.

This of course is made possible only thanks to the OpenMP guys and the clever trick on no synchronization introduced by the above cited authors.

The time-measuring function getrusage() used with LINUX or Cygwin to determine the CPU time usage (with the rusage option enabled) counts tics from every core, adds them up, and thus reports a CPU time value enlarged by a factor of 8 if 8 threads have been chosen. So now ngspice is forced to use ftime for time measuring if OpenMP is selected.

16.10.2 Some results

Some results on an inverter chain with 627 CMOS inverters, running for 200ns, compiled with Visual Studio professional 2008 on Windows 7 (full optimization) or gcc 4.4, SUSE LINUX 11.2, -O2, on a i7 860 machine with four real cores (and 4 virtuals using hyperthreading) are shown in table 16.1.


Table 16.1: OpenMP performance



Threads CPU time [s] CPU time [s]



Windows LINUX






1 (standard) 167 165



1 (OpenMP) 174 167



2 110 110



3 95 94-120



4 83 107



6 94 90



8 93 91




So we see a ngspice speed up of nearly a factor of two! Even on an older notebook with dual core processor, I have got more than 1.5x improvement using two threads. Similar results are to be expected from BSIM4.

16.10.3 Usage

To state it clearly: OpenMP is installed inside the model equations of a particular model. So for the moment it is available only in BSIM3 version 3.3.0, not in version 3.2.4 nor in any other BSIM3 model, in BSIM4 versions 4.6.5 or 4.7, not in any other BSIM4 model, and in B4SOI, version 4.3.1, not in any other SOI model. Older parameter files of version 4.6.x (x any number up to 5) are accepted, you have to check for compatibility.

Under LINUX you may run

./autogen.sh

./configure ... --enable-openmp

make install

The same has been tested under MS Windows with CYGWIN and MINGW as well and delivers similar results.

Under MS Windows with Visual Studio Professional you have to place an additional preprocessor flag USE_OMP, and then enable /openmp. Visual Studio Express is not sufficient due to lack of OpenMP support. Even Visual Studio Professional lacks debugging support for OpenMP. There are local preprocessor flags (USE_OMP3 in bsim3def.h, USE_OMP4 in bsim4def.h, and USE_OMP4SOI in b4soidef.h) which you may modify individually if you want to switch off OpenMP in only one of the models BSIM3, BSIM4, or B4SOI.

The number of threads has to be set manually by placing

set num_threads=4

into spinit or .spiceinit. If OpenMP is enabled, but num_threads not set, a default value num_threads=2 is set internally.

If you run a circuit, please keep in mind to select BSIM3 (levels 8, 49) version 3.3.0 (11.2.9), by placing this version number into your parameter files, BSIM4 (levels 14, 54) version 4.6.5 or 4.7 (11.2.10), or B4SOI (levels 10, 58) version 4.3.1 (11.2.12).

If you run ./configure without --enable-openmp (or without USE_OMP preprocessor flag under MS Windows), you will get the standard, not paralleled BSIM3 and BSIM4 model, as has been available from Berkeley. If OpenMP is selected and the number of threads set to 1, there will be only a very slight CPU time disadvantage (typ. 3%) compared to the standard, non OpenMP build.

16.10.4 Literature

[1] R.K. Perng, T.-H. Weng, and K.-C. Li: "On Performance Enhancement of Circuit Simulation Using Multithreaded Techniques", IEEE International Conference on Computational Science and Engineering, 2009, pp. 158-165

16.11 Server mode option -s

A program may write the spice input to the console. This output is redirected to ngspice via ’|’. ngspice called with the -s option writes its output to the console, which again is redirected to a receiving program by ’|’. In the following simple example cat reads the input file and prints it content to the console, which is redirected to ngspice by a first pipe, ngspice transfers its output (similar to a raw file, see below) to less via another pipe.

Example command line:

cat input.cir|ngspice -s|less

Under MS Windows you will need to compile ngspice as a console application (see chapt. 32.2.5) for this server mode usage.

Example input file:

test -
v1 1 0 1 
r1 1 0 2k 
.options filetype=ascii 
.save i(v1) 
.dc v1 -1 1 0.5 
.end

If you start ngspice console with

ngspice -s

you may type in the above circuit line by line (not to forget the first line, which is a title and will be ignored). If you close your input with ctrl Z, and return, you will get the following output (this is valid for MINGW only) on the console, like a raw file:

Circuit: test -s 
 
Doing analysis at TEMP = 27.000000 and TNOM = 27.000000 
 
Title: test -s

Date: Sun Jan 15 18:57:13 2012

Plotname: DC transfer characteristic

Flags: real

No. Variables: 2

No. Points: 0

Variables:

No. of Data Columns : 2

0 v(v-sweep) voltage

1 i(v1) current

Values:

0   -1.000000000000000e+000

   5.000000000000000e-004

1   -5.000000000000000e-001

   2.500000000000000e-004

2    0.000000000000000e+000

   0.000000000000000e+000

3    5.000000000000000e-001

  -2.500000000000000e-004

4    1.000000000000000e+000

  -5.000000000000000e-004

@@@ 122 5

The number 5 of the last line @@@ 122 5 shows the number of data points, which is missing in the above line No. Points: 0 because at the time of writing to the console it has not yet been available.

ctrl Z is not usable here in LINUX, a patch to install ctrl D instead is being evaluated.

16.12 Ngspice control via input, output fifos

The following bash script (under LINUX)

- launches ngspice in another thread.

- writes some commands in ngspice input

- reads the output and prints them on the console.

Example:

#!/usr/bin/env bash 
 
NGSPICE_COMMAND="ngspice" 
 
rm input.fifo 
rm output.fifo 
 
mkfifo input.fifo 
mkfifo output.fifo 
 
$NGSPICE_COMMAND  --i <input.fifo >output.fifo & 
 
exec 3>input.fifo 
echo "I can write to input.fifo" 
 
echo "Start processing..." 
echo "" 
 
echo "source circuit.cir" >&3 
echo "set noaskquit" >&3 
echo "set nobreak" >&3 
echo "tran 0.01ms 0.1ms">&3 
echo "print n0" >&3 
echo "quit" >&3 
 
echo "Try to open output.fifo ..." 
exec 4<output.fifo 
echo "I can read from output.fifo" 
 
echo "Ready to read..." 
while read output 
do 
      echo $output 
done <&4 
 
exec 3>&- 
exec 4>&- 
 
echo "End processing"

The input file for spice is:

Circuit.cir:

* Circuit.cir 
V1 n0 0 SIN(0 10 1kHz) 
C1 n1 n0 3.3nF 
R1 0 n1 1k 
.end

16.13 Compatibility

ngspice is a direct derivative of spice3f5 from UC Berkeley and thus inherits all of the commands available in its predecessor. Thanks to the open source policy of UCB (original spice3 from 1994 is still available here), several commercial variants have sprung off, either being more dedicated to IC design or more concentrating on simulating discrete and board level electronics. None of the commercial and almost none of the freely downloadable spice providers publishes the source code. All of them have proceeded with the development, by adding functionality, or by adding a more dedicated user interface. Some have kept the original spice syntax for their netlist description, others have quickly changed some if not many of the commands, functions and procedures. Thus it is difficult, if not impossible, to offer a simulator which acknowledges all of these netlist dialects. ngspice includes some features which enhance compatibility which are included automatically. This selection may be controlled to some extend by setting the compatibility mode. Others may be invoked by the user by small additions to the netlist input file. Some of them are listed in this chapter, some will be integrated into ngspice at a later stage, others will be added if they are reported by users.

16.13.1 Compatibility mode

The variable (17.7) ngbehavior sets the compatibility mode. ’all’ is set as the default value. ’spice3’ as invoked by the command

set ngbehavior=spice3 

in spinit or .spiceinit will disable some of the advanced ngspice features. ’ps’ will enable including a library by a simple .lib <lib_filename> statement which is not compatible to the more comfortable library handling described in chapt. 2.7.

16.13.2 Missing functions

You may add one or more function definitions to your input file, as listed below.

.func LIMIT(x,a,b) {min(max(x, a), b)}

.func PWR(x,a) {abs(x) ** a}

.func PWRS(x,a) {sgn(x) * PWR(x,a)}

.func stp(x) {u(x)}

16.13.3 Devices

16.13.3.1 E Source with LAPLACE

see chapt. 5.2.5.

16.13.3.2 VSwitch

The VSwitch

S1 2 3 11 0 SW 

.MODEL SW VSWITCH(VON=5V VOFF=0V RON=0.1 ROFF=100K)

may become

a1 11 (2 3) sw

.MODEL SW aswitch(cntl_off=0.0 cntl_on=5.0 r_off=1e5

+ r_on=0.1 log=TRUE)

The XSPICE option has to be enabled.

16.13.4 Controls and commands

16.13.4.1 .lib

The ngspice .lib command (see 2.7) requires two parameters, a file name followed by a library name. If no library name is given, the line

.lib filename

should be replaced by

.inc filename

Alternatively, the compatibility mode (16.13.1) may be set to ’ps’.

16.13.4.2 .step

Repeated analysis in ngspice if offered by a short script inside of a .control section (see chapt. 17.8.7) added to the input file. A simple application (multiple dc sweeps) is shown below.

Input file with parameter sweep

parameter sweep 
* resistive divider, R1 swept from start_r to stop_r 
* replaces .STEP R1 1k 10k 1k 
 
R1 1 2 1k 
R2 2 0 1k 
 
VDD 1 0 DC 1 
.dc VDD 0 1 .1 
 
.control 
let start_r = 1k 
let stop_r = 10k 
let delta_r = 1k 
let r_act = start_r 
* loop 
while r_act le stop_r 
  alter r1 r_act 
  run 
  write dc-sweep.out v(2) 
  set appendwrite 
  let r_act = r_act + delta_r 
end 
plot dc1.v(2) dc2.v(2) dc3.v(2) dc4.v(2) dc5.v(2) 
+ dc6.v(2) dc7.v(2) dc8.v(2) dc9.v(2) dc10.v(2) 
.endc 
 
.end

16.14 Tests

The ngspice distribution is accompanied by a suite of test input and output files, located in the directory ngspice/tests. Originally this suite was meant to see if ngspice with all models was made and installed properly. It is started by

$ make check

from within your compilation and development shell. A sequence of simulations is thus started, its outputs compared to given output files by comparisons string by string. This feature is momentarily used only to check for the BSIM3 model (11.2.9) and the XSPICE extension (12). Several other input files located in directory ngspice/tests may serve as light-weight examples for invoking devices and simple circuits.

Today’s very complex device models (BSIM4 (see 11.2.10), HiSIM (see 11.2.14) and others) require a different strategy for verification. Under development for ngspice is the CMC Regression test by Colin McAndrew, which accompanies every new model. A major advantage is the scalability of the diff comparisons, which check for equality within a given tolerance. A set of Perl modules cares for input, output and comparisons of the models. Currently BSIM4, BSIMSOI4, HiSIM, and HiSIMHV models implement the new test. You may invoke it by running the command given above or by

$ make -i check 2>&1 | tee results

-i will make make to ignore any errors, tee will provide console output as well as printing to file ’results’. Be aware that under MS Windows you will need the console binary (see 32.2.5) to run the CMC tests, and you have to have Perl installed!

16.15 Reporting bugs and errors

Ngspice is a complex piece of software. The source code contains over 1500 files. Various models and simulation procedures are provided, some of them not used and tested intensively. Therefore errors may be found, some still evolving from the original spice3f5 code, others introduced during the ongoing code enhancements.

If you happen to experience an error during the usage of ngspice, please send a report to the development team. Ngspice is hosted on sourceforge, the preferred place to post a bug report is the ngspice bug tracker. We would prefer to have your bug tested against the actual source code available at Git, but of course a report using the most recent ngspice release is welcome! Please provide the following information with your report:

Ngspice version

Operating system

Small input file to reproduce the bug

Actual output versus the expected output

Chapter 17
Interactive Interpreter

17.1 Introduction

The simulation flow in ngspice (input, simulation, output) may be controlled by dot commands (see chapt. 15 and 16.4.1) in batch mode. There is, however, a much more powerful control scheme available in ngspice, traditionally coined “Interactive Interpreter”, but being much more than just that. In fact there are several ways to use this feature, truly interactively by typing commands to the input, but also running command sequences as scripts or as part of your input deck in a quasi batch mode.

You may type in expressions, functions (17.2) or commands (17.5) into the input console to elaborate on data already achieved from the interactive simulation session.

Sequences of commands, functions and control structures (17.6) may be assembled as a script (17.8) into a file, and then activated by just typing the file name into the console input of an interactive ngspice session.

Finally, and most useful, is it to add a script to the input file, in addition the the netlist and dot commands. This is achieved by enclosing the script into .control ... .endc (see 16.4.3, and 17.8.7 for an example). This feature enables a wealth of control options. You may set internal (17.7) and other variables, start a simulation, evaluate the simulation output, start a new simulation based on these data, and finally make use of many options for outputting the data (graphically or into output files).

17.2 Expressions, Functions, and Constants

Ngspice and ngnutmeg store data in the form of vectors: time, voltage, etc. Each vector has a type, and vectors can be operated on and combined algebraically in ways consistent with their types. Vectors are normally created as the output of a simulation, or when a data file (output raw file) is read in again (ngspice, ngnutmeg, see the load command 17.5.36), or when the initial data-file is loaded directly into ngnutmeg. They can also be created with the let command 817.5.33).

An expression is an algebraic formula involving vectors and scalars (a scalar is a vector of length 1) and the following operations:

- * / ^ % ,

% is the modulo operator, and the comma operator has two meanings: if it is present in the argument list of a user definable function, it serves to separate the arguments. Otherwise, the term x , y is synonymous with x + j(y). Also available are the logical operations & (and), | (or), ! (not), and the relational operations <, >, >=, <=, =, and <> (not equal). If used in an algebraic expression they work like they would in C, producing values of 0 or 1. The relational operators have the following synonyms:



Operator Synonym




gt >


lt <


ge >=


le <=


ne <>


and &


or |


not !


eq =


The operators are useful when < and > might be confused with the internal IO redirection (see 17.4, which is almost always happening). It is however safe to use < and > with the define command (17.5.14).

The following functions are available:



Name

Function





mag(vector)

Magnitude of vector (same as abs(vector)).



ph(vector)

Phase of vector.



cph(vector)

Phase of vector. Continuous values, no discontinuity at ±PI.



unwrap(vector)

Phase of vector. Continuous values, no discontinuity at ±PI. Real phase vector in degrees as input.



j(vector)

i(sqrt(-1)) times vector.



real(vector

The real component of vector.



imag(vector)

The imaginary part of vector.



db(vector)

20 log10(mag(vector)).



log(vector)

The logarithm (base 10) of vector.



ln(vector)

The natural logarithm (base e) of vector.



exp(vector)

e to the vector power.



abs(vector)

The absolute value of vector (same as mag).



sqrt(vector)

The square root of vector.



sin(vector)

The sine of vector.



cos(vector)

The cosine of vector.



tan(vector)

The tangent of vector.



atan(vector)

The inverse tangent of vector.



sinh(vector)

The hyperbolic sine of vector.



cosh(vector)

The hyperbolic cosine of vector.



tanh(vector)

The hyperbolic tangent of vector.



floor(vector)

Largest integer that is less than or equal to vector.



ceil(vector)

Smallest integer that is greater than or equal to vector.



norm(vector)

The vector normalized to 1 (i.e, the largest magnitude of any component is 1).



mean(vector)

The result is a scalar (a length 1 vector) that is the mean of the elements of vector (elements values added, divided by number of elements).



avg(vector)

The average of a vector.
Returns a vector where each element is the mean of the preceding elements of the input vector (including the actual element).



group_delay(vector)

Calculates the group delay -dphase[rad]/dω[rad/s]. Input is the complex vector of a system transfer function versus frequency, resembling damping and phase per frequency value. Output is a vector of group delay values (real values of delay times) versus frequency.



vector(number)

The result is a vector of length number, with elements 0, 1, ... number - 1. If number is a vector then just the first element is taken, and if it isn’t an integer then the floor of the magnitude is used.



unitvec(number)

The result is a vector of length number, all elements having a value 1.





Name

Function





length(vector)

The length of vector.



interpolate(plot.vector)

The result of interpolating the named vector onto the scale of the current plot. This function uses the variable polydegree to determine the degree of interpolation.



deriv(vector)

Calculates the derivative of the given vector. This uses numeric differentiation by interpolating a polynomial and may not produce satisfactory results (particularly with iterated differentiation). The implementation only calculates the derivative with respect to the real component of that vector’s scale.



vecd(vector)

Compute the differential of a vector.



vecmin(vector)

Returns the value of the vector element with minimum value. Same as minimum.



minimum(vector)

Returns the value of the vector element with minimum value. Same as vecmin.



vecmax(vector)

Returns the value of the vector element with maximum value. Same as maximum.



maximum(vector)

Returns the value of the vector element with maximum value. Same as vecmax.



fft(vector)

fast fourier transform (17.5.24)



ifft(vector)

inverse fast fourier transform (17.5.24)



sortorder(vector)

Returns a vector with the positions of the elements in a real vector after they have been sorted into increasing order using a stable method (qsort).



Several functions offering statistical procedures are listed in the following table:



Name

Function



rnd(vector)

A vector with each component a random integer between 0 and the absolute value of the input vector’s corresponding integer element value.



sgauss(vector)

Returns a vector of random numbers drawn from a Gaussian distribution (real value, mean = 0 , standard deviation = 1). The length of the vector returned is determined by the input vector. The contents of the input vector will not be used. A call to sgauss(0) will return a single value of a random number as a vector of length 1..



sunif(vector)

Returns a vector of random real numbers uniformly distributed in the interval [-1 .. 1[. The length of the vector returned is determined by the input vector. The contents of the input vector will not be used. A call to sunif(0) will return a single value of a random number as a vector of length 1.



poisson(vector)

Returns a vector with its elements being integers drawn from a Poisson distribution. The elements of the input vector (real numbers) are the expected numbers λ. Complex vectors are allowed, real and imaginary values are treated separately.



exponential(vector)

Returns a vector with its elements (real numbers) drawn from an exponential distribution. The elements of the input vector are the respective mean values (real numbers). Complex vectors are allowed, real and imaginary values are treated separately.



An input vector may be either the name of a vector already defined or a floating-point number (a scalar). A scalar will result in an output vector of length 1. A number may be written in any format acceptable to ngspice, such as 14.6Meg or -1.231e-4. Note that you can either use scientific notation or one of the abbreviations like MEG or G, but not both. As with ngspice, a number may have trailing alphabetic characters.

The notation expr [num] denotes the num’th element of expr. For multi-dimensional vectors, a vector of one less dimension is returned. Also for multi-dimensional vectors, the notation expr[m][n] will return the nth element of the mth subvector. To get a subrange of a vector, use the form expr[lower, upper]. To reference vectors in a plot that is not the current plot (see the setplot command, below), the notation plotname.vecname can be used. Either a plotname or a vector name may be the wildcard all. If the plotname is all, matching vectors from all plots are specified, and if the vector name is all, all vectors in the specified plots are referenced. Note that you may not use binary operations on expressions involving wildcards - it is not obvious what all + all should denote, for instance. Thus some (contrived) examples of expressions are:

Expressions examples:

cos(TIME) + db(v(3)) 
sin(cos(log([1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10]))) 
TIME * rnd(v(9)) - 15 * cos(vin#branch) ^ [7.9e5 8] 
not ((ac3.FREQ[32] & tran1.TIME[10]) gt 3) 
(sunif(0) ge 0) ? 1.0 : 2.0 
mag(fft(v(18)))

Vector names in ngspice may have look like @dname[param], where dname is either the name of a device instance or of a device model. This vector contains the value of the param parameter of the device or model. See Appendix, chapt. 31 for details of which parameters are available. The value is a vector of length 1. This function is also available with the show command, and is available with variables for convenience for command scripts.

There are a number of pre-defined constants in ngspice, which you may use by their name. They are stored in plot (17.3) “const” and are listed in the table below:




Name Description Value






pi π 3.14159...



e e (the base of natural logarithms) 2.71828...



c c (the speed of light) 299,792,500 msec



i i (the square root of -1) √ ---
  - 1



kelvin (absolute zero in centigrade) -273.15C



echarge q (the charge of an electron) 1.60219e-19 C



boltz k (Boltzmann’s constant) 1.38062e-23JK



planck h (Planck’s constant) 6.62620e-34



yes boolean 1



no boolean 0



TRUE boolean 1



FALSE boolean 0



These constants are all given in MKS units. If you define another variable with a name that conflicts with one of these then it takes precedence.

Additional constants may be generated during circuit setup (see .csparam, 2.10).

17.3 Plots

The output vectors of any analysis are stored in plots, a traditional SPICE notion. A plot is a group of vectors. A first tran command will generate several vectors within a plot tran1. A subsequent tran command will store their vectors in tran2. Then a linearize command will linearize all vectors from tran2 and store them in tran3, which then becomes the current plot. A fft will generate a plot spec1, again now the current plot. The display command always will show all vectors in the current plot. Echo $plots followed by Return lists all plots generated so far. Setplot followed by Return will show all plots and ask for a (new) plot to become current. A simple Return will end the command. Setplot name will change the current plot to ’name’ (e.g. setplot tran2 will make tran2 the current plot). A sequence name.vector may be used to access the vector from a foreign plot.

You may generate plots by yourself: setplot new will generate a new plot named unknown1, set curplottitle=”a new plot” will set a title, set curplotname=myplot will set its name as a short description, set curplotdate=”Sat Aug 28 10:49:42 2010” will set its date. Note that strings with spaces have to be given with double quotes.

Of course the notion ’plot’ will be used by this manual also in its more common meaning, denoting a graphics plot or being a plot command. Be careful to get the correct meaning.

17.4 Command Interpretation

17.4.1 On the console

On the ngspice console window (or into the Windows GUI) you may directly type in any command from 17.5. Within a command sequence Input/output redirection is available (see chapt. 17.8.8 for an example) - the symbols >, >>, >&, >>&, and < have the same effects as in the C-shell. This I/O-redirection is internal to ngspice commands, and should not be mixed up with the “external” I/O-redirection offered by the usual shells (LINUX, MSYS etc.), see 17.5.62. You may type multiple commands on one line, separated by semicolons.

17.4.2 Scripts

If a word is typed as a command, and there is no built-in command with that name, the directories in the sourcepath list are searched in order for a file with the name given by the word. If it is found, it is read in as a command file (as if it were sourced). Before it is read, however, the variables argc and argv are set to the number of words following the file-name on the command line, and a list of those words respectively. After the file is finished, these variables are unset. Note that if a command file calls another, it must save its argv and argc since they are altered. Also, command files may not be re-entrant since there are no local variables. Of course, the procedures may explicitly manipulate a stack.... This way one can write scripts analogous to shell scripts for ngnutmeg and ngspice.

Note that for the script to work with ngspice, it must begin with a blank line (or whatever else, since it is thrown away) and then a line with .control on it. This is an unfortunate result of the source command being used for both circuit input and command file execution. Note also that this allows the user to merely type the name of a circuit file as a command and it is automatically run. The commands are executed immediately, without running any analyses that may be specified in the circuit (to execute the analyses before the script executes, include a “run” command in the script).

There are various command scripts installed in /usr/local/lib/spice/scripts (or whatever the path is on your machine), and the default sourcepath includes this directory, so you can use these command files (almost) like built-in commands.

17.4.3 Add-on to circuit file

The problably most common way to invoke the commands described in the following chapter 17.5 is to add a .control ... .endc section to the circuit input file (see 16.4.3).

Example:

.control 
pre_set strict_errorhandling 
unset ngdebug 
*save outputs and specials 
save x1.x1.x1.7 V(9) V(10) V(11) V(12) V(13) 
run 
display 
* plot the inputs, use offset to plot on top of each other 
plot  v(1) v(2)+4 v(3)+8 v(4)+12 v(5)+16 v(6)+20 v(7)+24 v(8)+28 
* plot the outputs, use offset to plot on top of each other 
plot  v(9) v(10)+4 v(11)+8 v(12)+12 v(13)+16 
.endc

17.5 Commands

Commands marked with a * are only available in ngspice, not in ngnutmeg.

17.5.1 Ac*: Perform an AC, small-signal frequency response analysis

General Form:

ac ( DEC | OCT | LIN ) N Fstart Fstop

Do an small signal ac analysis (see also chapter 15.3.1) over the specified frequency range.

DEC decade variation, and N is the number of points per decade.

OCT stands for octave variation, and N is the number of points per octave.

LIN stands for linear variation, and N is the number of points.

fstart is the starting frequency, and fstop is the final frequency.

Note that in order for this analysis to be meaningful, at least one independent source must have been specified with an ac value.

In this ac analysis all non-linear devices are linearized around their actual dc operating point. All Ls and Cs get their imaginary value, depending on the actual frequency step. Each output vector will be calculated relative to the input voltage (current) given by the ac value (Iin equals to 1 in the example below). The resulting node voltages (and branch currents) are complex vectors. Therefore you have to be careful using the plot command.

Example:

* AC test 
Iin 1 0 AC 1 
R1 1 2 100 
L1 2 0 1 
 
.control 
AC LIN 101 10 10K 
plot v(2)       $ real part ! 
plot mag(v(2))  $ magnitude 
plot db(v(2))   $ same as vdb(2) 
plot imag(v(2)) $ imaginary part of v(2) 
plot real(v(2)) $ same as plot v(2) 
plot phase(v(2))  $ phase in rad 
plot cph(v(2))  $ phase in rad, continuous beyond pi 
plot 180/PI*phase(v(2)) $ phase in deg 
.endc 
.end

In addition to the plot examples given above you may use the variants of vxx(node) described in chapter 15.6.2 like vdb(2). An option to suppress OP analysis before AC may be set for linear circuits (15.1.3).

17.5.2 Alias: Create an alias for a command

General Form:

alias [word] [text ...]

Causes word to be aliased to text. History substitutions may be used, as in C-shell aliases.

17.5.3 Alter*: Change a device or model parameter

Alter changes the value for a device or a specified parameter of a device or model.

General Form:

alter dev = <expression> 
alter dev param = <expression> 
alter @dev[param] = <expression>

<expression> must be real (complex isn’t handled right now, integer is fine though, but no strings. For booleans, use 0/1.

Old style (pre 3f4):

alter device value 
alter device parameter value [ parameter value ]

Using the old style, its first form is used by simple devices which have one principal value (resistors, capacitors, etc.) where the second form is for more complex devices (bjt’s, etc.). Model parameters can be changed with the second form if the name contains a "#". For specifying a list of parameters as values, start it with "[", followed by the values in the list, and end with "]". Be sure to place a space between each of the values and before and after the "[" and "]".

Some examples are given below:

Examples (Spice3f4 style):

alter vd = 0.1 
alter vg dc = 0.6 
alter @m1[w]= 15e-06 
alter  @vg[sin] [ -1 1.5 2MEG ] 
alter @Vi[pwl] = [ 0 1.2 100p 0 ]

alter may have vectors (17.8.2) or variables (17.8.1) as parameters.

Examples (vector or variable in parameter list):

alter  @vg[sin] [ -1 1.5 $&newfreq ] 
alter @Vi[pwl] = [ 0 1.2 $newperiod 0 ]

You may change a parameter of a device residing in a subcircuit, e.g. of MOS transistor msub1 in subcircuit xm1 (see also chapt. 31.1).

Examples (parameter of device in subcircuit):

alter m.xm1.msub1 w = 20u 
alter @m.xm1.msub1[w] = 20u

17.5.4 Altermod*: Change model parameter(s)

General form:

altermod mod param = <expression> 
altermod @mod[param] = <expression>

Example:

altermod nc1 tox = 10e-
altermod @nc1[tox] = 10e-9

Altermod operates on models and is used to change model parameters. The above example will change the parameter tox in all devices using the model nc1, which is defined as

*** BSIM3v3 model

.MODEL nc1 nmos LEVEL=8 version = 3.2.2

+ acm = 2 mobmod = 1 capmod = 1 noimod = 1

+ rs = 2.84E+03 rd = 2.84E+03 rsh = 45

+ tox = 20E-9 xj = 0.25E-6 nch = 1.7E+17

+ ...

If you invoke the model by the MOS device

M1 d g s b nc1 w=10u l=1u

you might also insert the device name M1 for mod as in

altermod M1 tox = 10e-9

The model parameter tox will be modified, however not only for device M1, but for all devices using the associated MOS model nc1!

If you want to run corner simulations within a single simulation flow, the following option of altermod may be of help. The parameter set with name modn may be overrun by the altermod command specifying a model file. All parameter values fitting to the existing model which is defined as modn will be modified. As usual the ’reset’ command (see 17.5.49) restores the original values. The model file (see 2.3) has to use the standard specifications for an input file, the .model section is the relevant part. However the first line in the model file will be ignored by the input parser, so it should contain only some title information. The .model statement should appear then in the second or any later line. More than one .model section may reside in the file.

General form:

altermod mod1 [mod2 .. mod15] file = <model file name> 
altermod mod1 [mod2 .. mod15] file  <model file name>

Example:

altermod nch file = BSIM3_nmos.mod 
altermod pch nch file BSIM4_mos.mod

Be careful that the new model file corresponds to the existing model selected by modn. The existing models are defined during circuit setup at start up of ngspice. Models have been included by .model statements (2.3) in your input file or included by the .include command. In the example given above, the models nch (or nch and pch) have to be already available before calling altermod. If they are not found in the active circuit, ngspice will terminate with an error message. There is no checking however of the version and level parameters! So you have to be responsible for offering model data of the same model level (e.g. level 8 for BSIM3). Thus no new model is selectable by altermod, but the parameters of the existing model(s) may be changed (partially, completely, temporarily).

17.5.5 Asciiplot: Plot values using old-style character plots

General Form:

asciiplot plotargs

Produce a line printer plot of the vectors. The plot is sent to the standard output, or you can put it into a file with asciiplot args ... > file. The set options width, height, and nobreak determine the width and height of the plot, and whether there are page breaks, respectively. The ’more’ mode is the standard mode if printing to the screen, that is after a number of lines given by height, and after a page break printing stops with request for answering the prompt by <return>, ’c’ or ’q’. If everything shall be printed without stopping, put the command set nomoremode into .spiceinit 16.6 (or spinit 16.5). Note that you will have problems if you try to asciiplot something with an X-scale that isn’t monotonic (i.e, something like sin(TIME) ), because asciiplot uses a simple-minded linear interpolation. The asciiplot command doesn’t deal with log scales or the delta keywords.

17.5.6 Aspice*: Asynchronous ngspice run

General Form:

aspice input-file [output-file]

Start an ngspice run, and when it is finished load the resulting data. The raw data is kept in a temporary file. If output-file is specified then the diagnostic output is directed into that file, otherwise it is thrown away.

17.5.7 Bug: Mail a bug report

General Form:

bug

Send a bug report. Please include a short summary of the problem, the version number and name of the operating system that you are running, the version of ngspice that you are running, and the relevant ngspice input file. (If you have defined BUGADDR, the mail is delivered to there.)

17.5.8 Cd: Change directory

General Form:

cd [directory]

Change the current working directory to directory, or to the user’s home directory if none is given.

17.5.9 Cdump: Dump the control flow to the screen

General Form:

cdump

Dumps the control sequence to the screen (all statements inside the .control ... .endc structure before the line with cdump). Indentations show the structure of the sequence. The example below is printed if you add cdump to /examples/Monte_Carlo/MonteCarlo.sp.

Example (abbreviated):

let mc_runs=5 
let run=0 
... 
define agauss(nom, avar, sig) (nom + avar/sig * sgauss(0)) 
define limit(nom, avar) (nom + ((sgauss(0) >=0) ? avar : -avar)) 
dowhile run < mc_runs 
  alter c1=unif(1e-09, 0.1) 
... 
  ac oct 100 250k 10meg 
  meas ac bw trig vdb(out) val=-10 rise=1 targ vdb(out) val=-10 fall=1 
  set run="$&run" 
... 
  let run=run + 1 
end 
plot db({$scratch}.allv) 
echo 
print {$scratch}.bwh 
cdump

17.5.10 Circbyline*: Enter a circuit line by line

General Form:

circbyline line

Enter a circuit line by line. line is any circuit line, as found in the *.cir ngspice input files. The first line is a title line. The entry will be finished by entering .end. Circuit parsing is then started automatically.

Example:

circbyline test circuit 
circbyline v1 1 0 1 
circbyline r1 1 0 1 
circbyline .dc v1 0.5 1.5 0.1 
circbyline .end 
run 
plot i(v1)

17.5.11 Codemodel*: Load an XSPICE code model library

General Form:

codemodel [library file]

Load a XSPICE code model shared library file (e.g. analog.cm ...). Only available if ngspice is compiled with the XSPICE option (–enable-xspice) or with the Windows executable distributed since ngspice21. This command has to be called from spinit (see chapt. 16.5) (or .spiceinit for personal code models, 16.6).

17.5.12 Compose: Compose a vector

General Form:

compose name values value1 [ value2 ... ] 
compose name parm = val [ parm = val ... ]

The first form takes the values and creates a new vector, the values may be arbitrary expressions.

The second form has the following possible parameters:

start
The value at which the vector should start.
stop
The value at which the vector should end.
step
The difference between successive elements.
lin
The number of points, linearly spaced..

17.5.13 Dc*: Perform a DC-sweep analysis

General Form:

dc Source-Name Vstart Vstop Vincr [ Source2 Vstart2 Vstop2 Vincr2 ]

Do a dc transfer curve analysis. See the previous chapter 15.3.2 for more details. Several options may be set (15.1.2).

17.5.14 Define: Define a function

General Form:

define function(arg1, arg2, ...) expression

Define the user-definable function with the name function and arguments arg1, arg2, ... to be expression, which may involve the arguments. When the function is later used, the arguments it is given are substituted for the formal arguments when it is parsed. If expression is not present, any definition for function is printed, and if there are no arguments to define then all currently active definitions are printed. Note that you may have different functions defined with the same name but different arities. Some useful definitions are:

Example:

define max(x,y) (x > y) * x + (x <= y) * y 
define min(x,y) (x < y) * x + (x >= y) * y 
define limit(nom, avar) (nom + ((sgauss(0) >= 0) ? avar : -avar))

17.5.15 Deftype: Define a new type for a vector or plot

General Form:

deftype [v | p] typename abbrev

defines types for vectors and plots. abbrev will be used to parse things like abbrev(name) and to label axes with M<abbrev>, instead of numbers. It may be omitted. Also, the command "deftype p plottype pattern ..." will assign plottype as the name to any plot with one of the patterns in its Name: field.

Example:

deftype v capacitance F 
settype capacitance moscap 
plot moscap vs v(cc)

17.5.16 Delete*: Remove a trace or breakpoint

General Form:

delete [ debug-number ... ]

Delete the specified saved nodes and parameters, breakpoints and traces. The debug numbers are those shown by the status command (unless you do status > file, in which case the debug numbers are not printed).

17.5.17 Destroy: Delete an output data set

General Form:

destroy [plotnames | all]

Release the memory holding the output data (the given plot or all plots) for the specified runs.

17.5.18 Devhelp: information on available devices

General Form:

devhelp [[-csv] device_name [parameter]]

Devhelp command shows the user information about the devices available in the simulator. If called without arguments, it simply displays the list of available devices in the simulator. The name of the device is the name used inside the simulator to access that device. If the user specifies a device name, then all the parameters of that device (model and instance parameters) will be printed. Parameter description includes the internal ID of the parameter (id#), the name used in the model card or on the instance line (Name), the direction (Dir) and the description of the parameter (Description). All the fields are self-explanatory, except the “direction”. Direction can be “in”, “out” or “inout” and corresponds to a “write-only”, “read-only” or a “read/write” parameter. Read-only parameters can be read but not set, write only can be set but not read and read/write can be both set and read by the user.

The “-csv” option prints the fields separated by a comma, for direct import into a spreadsheet. This option is used to generate the simulator documentation.

Example:

devhelp 
devhelp resistor 
devhelp capacitor ic

17.5.19 Diff: Compare vectors

General Form:

diff plot1 plot2 [vec ...]

Compare all the vectors in the specified plots, or only the named vectors if any are given. If there are different vectors in the two plots, or any values in the vectors differ significantly, the difference is reported. The variables diff_abstol, diff_reltol, and diff_vntol are used to determine a significant difference.

17.5.20 Display: List known vectors and types

General Form:

display [varname ...]

Prints a summary of currently defined vectors, or of the names specified. The vectors are sorted by name unless the variable nosort is set. The information given is the name of the vector, the length, the type of the vector, and whether it is real or complex data. Additionally, one vector is labeled [scale]. When a command such as plot is given without a vs argument, this scale is used for the X-axis. It is always the first vector in a rawfile, or the first vector defined in a new plot. If you undefine the scale (i.e, let TIME = []), one of the remaining vectors becomes the new scale (which one is unpredictable). You may set the scale to another vector of the plot with the command setscale (17.5.60).

17.5.21 Echo: Print text

General Form:

echo [text...] [$variable] ["$&vector"]

Echos the given text, variable or vector to the screen. echo without parameters issues a blank line.

17.5.22 Edit*: Edit the current circuit

General Form:

edit [ file ]

Print the current ngspice input file into a file, call up the editor on that file and allow the user to modify it, and then read it back in, replacing the original file. If a file-name is given, then edit that file and load it, making the circuit the current one. The editor may be defined in .spiceinit or spinit by a command line like

set editor=emacs

Using MS Windows, to allow the edit command calling an editor, you will have to add the editor’s path to the PATH variable of the command prompt windows (see here). edit then calls cmd.exe with e.g. notepad++ and file as parameter, if you have set

set editor=notepad++.exe

to .spiceinit or spinit.

17.5.23 Eprint*: Print an event driven node (only used with XSPICE option)

General Form:

eprint node [node] 
eprint node [node] > nodeout.txt ; output redirected

Print an event driven node generated or used by an XSPICE ’A’ device. These nodes are vectors not organized in plots. See chapt. 27.2.2 for an example. Output redirection into a file is available.

17.5.24 FFT: fast Fourier transform of vectors

General Form:

fft vector1 [vector2] ...

This analysis provides a fast Fourier transform of the input vector(s) in forward direction. fft is much faster than spec (17.5.69) (about a factor of 50 to 100 for larger vectors) !

The fft command will create a new plot consisting of the Fourier transforms of the vectors given on the command line. Each vector given should be a transient analysis result, i.e. it should have ‘time’ as a scale. You will have got these vectors by the tran Tstep Tstop Tstart command.

The vector should have a linear equidistant time scale. Therefore linearization using the linearize command is recommended before running fft. Be careful selecting a Tstep value small enough for good interpolation, e.g. much smaller than any signal period to be resolved by fft (see linearize command). The Fast Fourier Transform will be computed using a window function as given with the specwindow variable. A new plot named specx will be generated with a new vector (having the same name as the input vector, see command above) containing the transformed data.

Ngspice has two FFT implementations:

  1. Standard code is based on the FFT function provided by John Green “FFTs for RISC 2.0”, downloaded 2012, now to be found here. These are a power-of-two routines for fft and ifft. If the input size doesn’t fit this requirement the remaining data will be zero padded upto the next 2N field size. You have to take care of the correlated change in the scale vector.
  2. If available on the operating system (see Chapter 32) ngspice can be linked to the famous FFTW-3 package, found here. This high performance package has advantages in speed and accuracy compared to most of the freely available FFT libraries. It makes arbitrary size transforms for even and odd data.

How to compute the fft from a transient simulation output:

ngspice 8 -> setplot tran1 
ngspice 9 -> linearize V(2) 
ngspice 9 -> set specwindow=blackman 
ngspice 10 -> fft V(2) 
ngspice 11 -> plot mag(V(2))

Linearize will create a new vector V(2) in a new plot tran2. The command fft V(2) will create a new plot spec1 with vector V(2) holding the resulting data.

The variables listed in the following table control operation of the fft command. Each can be set with the set command before calling fft.

specwindow: This variable is set to one of the following strings, which will determine the type of windowing used for the Fourier transform in the spec and fft command. If not set, the default is "hanning".

none
No windowing
rectangular
Rectangular window
bartlet
Bartlett (also triangle) window
blackman
Blackman window
hanning
Hanning (also hann or cosine) window
hamming
Hamming window
gaussian
Gaussian window
flattop
Flat top window


PIC
Figure 17.1: Spec and FFT window functions (Gaussian order = 4)


specwindoworder: This can be set to an integer in the range 2-8. This sets the order when the Gaussian window is used in the spec and fft commands. If not set, order 2 is used.

17.5.25 Fourier: Perform a Fourier transform

General Form:

fourier fundamental_frequency [expression ...]

Fourier is used to analyse the output vector(s) of a preceeding transient analysis (see 17.5.77). It does a Fourier analysis of each of the given values, using the first 10 multiples of the fundamental frequency (or the first nfreqs multiples, if that variable is set - see 17.7). The printed output is like that of the .four ngspice line (chapter 15.6.4). The expressions may be any valid expression (see 17.2), e.g. v(2). The evaluated expression values are interpolated onto a fixed-space grid with the number of points given by the fourgridsize variable, or 200 if it is not set. The interpolation is of degree polydegree if that variable is set, or 1. If polydegree is 0, then no interpolation is done. This is likely to give erroneous results if the time scale is not monotonic, though.

The fourier command not only issues a printout, but also generates vectors, one per expression. The size of the vector is 3 x nfreqs (per default 3 x 10). The name of the new vector is fouriermn, where m is set by the mth call to the fourier command, n is the nth expression given in the actual fourier command. fouriermn[0] is the vector of the 10 (nfreqs) frequency values, fouriermn[1] contains the 10 (nfreqs) magnitude values, fouriermn[2] the 10 (nfreqs) phase values of the result.

Example:

* do the transient analysis 
tran 1n 1m 
* do the fourier analysis 
fourier 3.34e6 v(2) v(3) ; first call 
fourier 100e6 v(2) v(3)  ; second call 
* get individual values 
let newt1 = fourier11[0][1] 
let newt2 = fourier11[1][1] 
let newt3 = fourier11[2][1] 
let newt4 = fourier12[0][4] 
let newt5 = fourier12[1][4] 
let newt6 = fourier12[2][4] 
* plot magnitude of seccond expression (v(3)) 
* from first call versus frequency 
plot fourier12[1] vs fourier12[0]

The plot command from the example plots the vector of the magnitude values, obtained by the first call to fourier and evaluating the first expression in this call, against the vector of the frequency values.

17.5.26 Gnuplot: Graphics output via Gnuplot

General Form:

gnuplot file plotargs

Like plot, but using gnuplot for graphics output and further data manipulation. ngspice creates a file called file.plt containing the gnuplot command sequence, a file called file.data containing the data to be plotted, and a file called file.eps containing a postscript hard-copy of the plot. On LINUX gnuplot is called via xterm, which offers a gnuplot console to manipulate the data. On Windows a plot window is opened, the gnuplot command console window is available at a mouse click. Of course you have to have gnuplot installed properly on your system. This option is tested with Gnuplot 4.6 (as of Jan 2014).

By setting the variable gnuplot_terminal inside the control section to png, gnuplot will generate a file file.png containing a compressed bitmap ready to including in text-processing programs like Word etc.

17.5.27 Hardcopy: Save a plot to a file for printing

General Form:

hardcopy file plotargs

Just like plot, except that it creates a file called file containing the plot. The file is a postscript image. As an alternative the plot(5) format is available by setting the hcopydevtype variable to plot5, and can be printed by either the plot(1) program or lpr with the -g flag. See also chapter 18.6 for more details (color etc.).

17.5.28 Help: Print summaries of Ngspice commands

Prints help. This help information, however, is spice3f5-like, stemming from 1991 and thus is outdated. If commands are given, descriptions of those commands are printed. Otherwise help for only a few major commands is printed. On Windows this help command is no longer available. Spice3f5 compatible help may be found in the Spice 3 User manual. For ngspice please use this manual.

17.5.29 History: Review previous commands

General Form:

history [number]

Print out the history, or the last number commands typed at the keyboard.

17.5.30 Inventory: Print circuit inventory

General Form:

inventory

This commands accepts no argument and simply prints the number of instances of a particular device in a loaded netlist.

17.5.31 Iplot*: Incremental plot

General Form:

iplot [ node ...]

Incrementally plot the values of the nodes while ngspice runs. The iplot command can be used with the where command to find trouble spots in a transient simulation.

The @name[param] notation (31.1) might not work yet.

17.5.32 Jobs*: List active asynchronous ngspice runs

General Form:

jobs

Report on the asynchronous ngspice jobs currently running. Ngnutmeg checks to see if the jobs are finished every time you execute a command. If it is done then the data is loaded and becomes available.

17.5.33 Let: Assign a value to a vector

General Form:

let name = expr

Creates a new vector called name with the value specified by expr, an expression as described above. If expr is [] (a zero-length vector) then the vector becomes undefined. Individual elements of a vector may be modified by appending a subscript to name (ex. name[0]). If there are no arguments, let is the same as display.

The command let creates a vector in the current plot, use setplot (17.5.59) to create a new plot.

See also unlet (17.5.81), compose (17.5.12).

17.5.34 Linearize*: Interpolate to a linear scale

General Form:

linearize vec ...

Create a new plot with all of the vectors in the current plot, or only those mentioned as arguments to the command, all data linearized onto an equidistant time scale.

How to compute the fft from a transient simulation output:

ngspice 8 -> setplot tran1 
ngspice 9 -> linearize V(2) 
ngspice 9 -> set specwindow=blackman 
ngspice 10 -> fft V(2) 
ngspice 11 -> plot mag(V(2))tstep

Linearize will redo the vectors vec or renew all vectors of the current plot (e.g. tran3) if no arguments are given and store them into a new plot (e.g. tran4). The new vectors are interpolated onto a linear time scale, which is determined by the values of tstep, tstart, and tstop in the currently active transient analysis. The currently loaded input file must include a transient analysis (a tran command may be run interactively before the last reset, alternately), and the current plot must be from this transient analysis. The length of the new vector is (tstop - tstart) / tstep + 1.5. This command is needed for example if you want to do a fft analysis (17.5.24). Please note that the parameter tstep of your transient analysis (see chapter 15.3.9) has to be small enough to get adequate resolution, otherwise the command linearize will do sub-sampling of your signal.

17.5.35 Listing*: Print a listing of the current circuit

General Form:

listing [logical] [physical] [deck] [expand] [param]

If the logical argument is given, the listing is with all continuation lines collapsed into one line, and if the physical argument is given the lines are printed out as they were found in the file. The default is logical. A deck listing is just like the physical listing, except without the line numbers it recreates the input file verbatim (except that it does not preserve case). If the word expand is present, the circuit is printed with all subcircuits expanded. The option param allows to print all parameters and their actual values.

17.5.36 Load: Load rawfile data

General Form:

load [filename] ...

Loads either binary or ascii format rawfile data from the files named. The default file-name is rawspice.raw, or the argument to the -r flag if there was one.

17.5.37 Meas*: Measurements on simulation data

General Form (example):

MEAS {DC|AC|TRAN|SP} result TRIG trig_variable VAL=val <TD=td> 
<CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> <RISE=#|RISE=LAST> <FALL=#|FALL=LAST> 
<TRIG AT=time> TARG targ_variable VAL=val <TD=td> <CROSS=# | CROSS=LAST> 
<RISE=#|RISE=LAST> <FALL=#|FALL=LAST> <TRIG AT=time>

Most of the input forms found in 15.4 may be used here with the command meas instead of .meas(ure). Using meas inside the .control ... .endc section offers additional features compared to the .meas use. meas will print the results as usual, but in addition will store its measurement result (typically the token result given in the command line) in a vector. This vector may be used in following command lines of the script as an input value of another command. For details of the command see chapt. 15.4. The measurement type SP is only available here, because a fft command will prepare the data for SP measurement. Option autostop (15.1.4) is not available.

Unfortunately par(’expression’) (15.6.6) will not work here, i.e. inside the .control section. You may use an expression by the let command instead, giving let vec_new = expression.

Replacement for par(’expression’) in meas inside the .control section

let vdiff = v(n1)-v(n0) 
meas tran vtest find vdiff at=0.04e-
*the following will not do here: 
*meas tran vtest find par(’v(n1)-v(n0)’) at=0.04e-3

17.5.38 Mdump*: Dump the matrix values to a file (or to console)

General Form:

mdump <filename>

If <filename> is given, the output will be stored in file <filename>, otherwise dumped to your console.

17.5.39 Mrdump*: Dump the matrix right hand side values to a file (or to console)

General Form:

mrdump <filename>

If <filename> is given, the output will be appended to file <filename>, otherwise dumped to your console.

Example usage after ngspice has started:

* Dump matrix and RHS values after 10 and 20 steps 
* of a transient simulation 
source rc.cir 
step 10 
mdump m1.txt 
mrdump mr1.txt 
step 10 
mdump m2.txt 
mrdump mr2.txt 
* just to continue to the end 
step 10000

You may create a loop using the control structures (chapt. 17.6).

17.5.40 Noise*: Noise analysis

See the .NOISE analysis (15.3.4) for details.

The noise command will generate two plots (typically named noise1 and noise2) with Noise Spectral Density Curves and Integrated Noise data. To write these data into output file(s), you may use the following command sequence:

Command sequence for writing noise data to file(s):

.control 
tran 1e-6 1e-
write test_tran.raw 
noise V(out) vinp dec 333 1 1e8 16 
print inoise_total onoise_total 
*first option to get all of the output (two files) 
setplot noise1 
write test_noise1.raw all 
setplot noise2 
write test_noise2.raw all 
* second option (all in one raw-file) 
write testall.raw noise1.all noise2.all 
.endc

17.5.41 Op*: Perform an operating point analysis

General Form:

op

Do an operating point analysis. See chapter 15.3.5 for more details.

17.5.42 Option*: Set a ngspice option

General Form:

option [option=val] [option=val] ...

Set any of the simulator variables as listed in chapt. 15.1. See this chapter also for more information on the available options. The option command without any argument lists the actual options set in the simulator (to be verified). Multiple options may be set in a single line.

The following example demonstrates a control section, which may be added to your circuit file to test the influence of variable trtol on the number of iterations and on the simulation time.

Command sequence for testing option trtol:

.control 
set noinit 
 
option trtol=1 
echo 
echo trtol=1 
run 
rusage traniter trantime 
reset 
option trtol=3 
echo 
echo trtol=3 
run 
rusage traniter trantime 
reset 
option trtol=5 
echo 
echo trtol=5 
run 
rusage traniter trantime 
reset 
option trtol=7 
echo 
echo trtol=7 
run 
rusage traniter trantime 
plot tran1.v(out25) tran1.v(out50) v(out25)  v(out50) 
.endc

17.5.43 Plot: Plot values on the display

General Form:

plot exprs [ylimit ylo yhi] [xlimit xlo xhi] [xindices xilo xihi] 
[xcompress comp] [xdelta xdel] [ydelta ydel] [xlog] [ylog] [loglog] 
[vs xname] [xlabel word] [ylabel word] [title word] [samep] 
[linear]

Plot the given vectors or exprs on the screen (if you are on a graphics terminal). The xlimit and ylimit arguments determine the high and low x- and y-limits of the axes, respectively. The xindices arguments determine what range of points are to be plotted - everything between the xilo’th point and the xihi’th point is plotted. The xcompress argument specifies that only one out of every comp points should be plotted. If an xdelta or a ydelta parameter is present, it specifies the spacing between grid lines on the X- and Y-axis. These parameter names may be abbreviated to xl, yl, xind, xcomp, xdel, and ydel respectively.

The xname argument is an expression to use as the scale on the x-axis. If xlog or ylog are present then the X or Y scale, respectively, is logarithmic (loglog is the same as specifying both). The xlabel and ylabel arguments cause the specified labels to be used for the X and Y axes, respectively.

If samep is given, the values of the other parameters (other than xname) from the previous plot, hardcopy, or asciiplot command is used unless re-defined on the command line.

The title argument is used in the headline of the plot window and replaces the default text, which is ’actual plot: first line of input file’.

The linear keyword is used to override a default logscale plot (as in the output for an AC analysis).

Finally, the keyword polar generates a polar plot. To produce a smith plot, use the keyword smith. Note that the data is transformed, so for smith plots you will see the data transformed by the function (x-1)/(x+1). To produce a polar plot with a smith grid but without performing the smith transform, use the keyword smithgrid.

If you specify plot all, all vectors (including the scale vector) are plotted versus the scale vector (see commands display (17.5.20) or setscale (17.5.60) on viewing the vectors of the current plot). The command plot ally will not plot the scale vector, but all other ’real’ y values. The command plot alli will yield all current vectors, the command plot allv all voltage vectors.

If the vector name to be plotted contains -, or / or other tokens which may be taken for operators of an expression, and plotting fails, try enclosing the name in double quotes, e.g. plot “/vout”.

Plotting of complex vectors, as may occur after an ac simulation, require some special considerations. Please see chapter 17.5.1 for details.

17.5.44 Pre_<command>: execute commands prior to parsing the circuit

General Form:

pre_<command>

All commands in a .control ... .endc section are executed after the circuit has been parsed. If you need command execution before circuit parsing, you may add these commands to the general spinit or local .spiceinit files. Another possibility is adding a leading pre_ to a command within the .control section of an ordinary input file, which forces the command to be executed before circuit parsing. Basically <command> may be any command listed in chapter 17.5, however only a few commands are indeed useful here. Some examples are given below:

Examples:

pre_unset ngdebug 
pre_set strict_errorhandling 
pre_codemodel mymod.cm

pre_<command> is available only in the .control mode (see 16.4.3), not in interactive mode, where the user may determine herself when a circuit is to be parsed, using the source command (17.5.68) .

17.5.45 Print: Print values

General Form:

print [col] [line] expr ...

Prints the vector(s) described by the expression expr. If the col argument is present, print the vectors named side by side. If line is given, the vectors are printed horizontally. col is the default, unless all the vectors named have a length of one, in which case line is the default. The options width (default 80) and height (default 24) are effective for this command (see asciiplot17.5.5). The ’more’ mode is the standard mode if printing to the screen, that is after a number of lines given by height, and after a page break printing stops with request for answering the prompt by <return> (print next page), ’c’ (print rest) or ’q’ (quit printing). If everything shall be printed without stopping, put the command set nomoremode into .spiceinit 16.6 (or spinit 16.5). If the expression is all, all of the vectors available are printed. Thus print col all > filename prints everything into the file filename in SPICE2 format. The scale vector (time, frequency) is always in the first column unless the variable noprintscale is true. You may use the vectors alli, allv, ally with the print command, but then the scale vector will not be printed.

Examples:

print all 
set width=300 
print v(1) > outfile.out

17.5.46 Quit: Leave Ngspice or Nutmeg

General Form:

quit 
quit [exitcode]

Quit ngnutmeg or ngspice. Ngspice will ask for an acknowledgment if parameters have not been saved. If ’set noaskquit’ is specified, ngspice will terminate immediately.

The optional parameter exitcode is an integer which set the exit code for ngspice, useful to return a success/fail value to the operating system.

17.5.47 Rehash: Reset internal hash tables

General Form:

rehash

Recalculate the internal hash tables used when looking up UNIX commands, and make all UNIX commands in the user’s PATH available for command completion. This is useless unless you have set unixcom first (see above).

17.5.48 Remcirc*: Remove the current circuit

General Form:

remcirc

This command removes the current circuit from the list of circuits sourced into ngspice. To select a specific circuit, use setcirc (17.5.58). To load another circuit, refer to source (17.5.68). The new actual circuit will be the circuit on top of the list of the remaining circuits.

17.5.49 Reset*: Reset an analysis

General Form:

reset

Throw out any intermediate data in the circuit (e.g, after a breakpoint or after one or more analyses have been done already), and re-parse the input file. The circuit can then be re-run from it’s initial state, overriding the affect of any set or alter commands.

Reset may be required in simulation loops preceding any run (or tran ...) command.

17.5.50 Reshape: Alter the dimensionality or dimensions of a vector

General Form:

reshape vector vector ... 
or 
reshape vector vector ... [ dimension, dimension, ... ] 
or 
reshape vector vector ... [ dimension ][ dimension ] ...

This command changes the dimensions of a vector or a set of vectors. The final dimension may be left off and it will be filled in automatically. If no dimensions are specified, then the dimensions of the first vector are copied to the other vectors. An error message of the form ’dimensions of x were inconsistent’ can be ignored.

Example:

* generate vector with all (here 30) elements 
let newvec=vector(30) 
* reshape vector to format 3 x 10 
reshape newvec [3][10] 
* access elements of the reshaped vector 
print newvec[0][9] 
print newvec[1][5] 
let newt = newvec[2][4]

17.5.51 Resume*: Continue a simulation after a stop

General Form:

resume

Resume a simulation after a stop or interruption (control-C).

17.5.52 Rspice*: Remote ngspice submission

General Form:

rspice input file

Runs a ngspice remotely taking the input file as a ngspice input file, or the current circuit if no argument is given. Ngnutmeg or ngspice waits for the job to complete, and passes output from the remote job to the user’s standard output. When the job is finished the data is loaded in as with aspice. If the variable rhost is set, ngnutmeg connects to this host instead of the default remote ngspice server machine. This command uses the “rsh” command and thereby requires authentication via a “.rhosts” file or other equivalent method. Note that “rsh” refers to the “remote shell” program, which may be “remsh” on your system; to override the default name of “rsh”, set the variable remote_shell. If the variable rprogram is set, then rspice uses this as the pathname to the program to run on the remote system.

Note: rspice will not acknowledge elements that have been changed via the “alter” or “altermod” commands.

17.5.53 Run*: Run analysis from the input file

General Form:

run [rawfile]

Run the simulation as specified in the input file. If there were any of the control lines .ac, .op, .tran, or .dc, they are executed. The output is put in rawfile if it was given, in addition to being available interactively.

17.5.54 Rusage: Resource usage

General Form:

rusage [resource ...]

Print resource usage statistics. If any resources are given, just print the usage of that resource. Most resources require that a circuit be loaded. Currently valid resources are:

decklineno
Number of lines in deck
netloadtime
Nelist loading time
netparsetime
Netlist parsing time
elapsed
The amount of time elapsed since the last rusage elapsed call.
faults
Number of page faults and context switches (BSD only).
space
Data space used.
time
CPU time used so far.
temp
Operating temperature.
tnom
Temperature at which device parameters were measured.
equations
Circuit Equations
time
Total Analysis Time
totiter
Total iterations
accept
Accepted time-points
rejected
Rejected time-points
loadtime
Time spent loading the circuit matrix and RHS.
reordertime
Matrix reordering time
lutime
L-U decomposition time
solvetime
Matrix solve time
trantime
Transient analysis time
tranpoints
Transient time-points
traniter
Transient iterations
trancuriters
Transient iterations for the last time point*
tranlutime
Transient L-U decomposition time
transolvetime
Transient matrix solve time
everything
All of the above.

* listed incorrectly as "Transient iterations per point".

17.5.55 Save*: Save a set of outputs

General Form:

save [all | outvec ...]

Save a set of outputs, discarding the rest (if not keyword “all” is given). Maybe used to dramatically reduce memory (RAM) requirements if only a few useful node voltages or branch currents are saved.

Node voltages may be saved by giving the nodename or v(nodename). Currents through an independent voltage source are given by i(sourcename) or sourcename#branch. Internal device data (31.1) are accepted as @dev[param]. The syntax is identical to the .save command (15.6.1).

Note: In the .control .... .endc section save must occur before the run or tran command to become effective.

If a node has been mentioned in a save command, it appears in the working plot after a run has completed, or in the rawfile written by the write (17.5.86) command. For backward compatibility, if there are no save commands given, all outputs are saved. If you want to trace (17.5.76) or plot (17.5.43) a node, you have to save it explicitly, except for “all” given or no save command at all.

When the keyword “all” appears in the save command, all node voltages, voltage source currents and inductor currents are saved in addition to any other vectors listed.

Save voltage and current:

save vd_node vs#branch v(vs_node) i(vs2)

Save allows to store and later access internal device parameters. e.g. in a command like

Save internal parameters:

save all @mn1[gm]

which saves all standard analysis output data plus gm of transistor mn1 to the internal memory (see also 31.1).

save may store data from nodes or devices residing inside of a subcircuit:

Save voltage on node 3 (top level), node 8 (from inside subcircuit x2) and current through vmeas (from subcircuit x1):

save 3 x1.x2.x1.x2.8 v.x1.x1.x1.vmeas#branch

Save internal parameters within subcircuit:

save @m.xmos3.mn1[gm]

Use commands listing expand (17.5.35, before the simulation) or display (17.5.20, after simulation) to obtain a list of all nodes and currents available. Please see chapter 31 for an explanation of the syntax for internal parameters.

Entering several save lines in a single .control section will accumulate the nodes and parameters to be saved. If you want to exclude a node, you have to get its number by calling status (17.5.70) and then calling delete number (17.5.16).

17.5.56 Sens*: Run a sensitivity analysis

General Form:

sens output_variable 
sens output_variable ac ( DEC | OCT | LIN ) N Fstart Fstop

Perform a Sensitivity analysis. output_variable is either a node voltage (ex. “v(1)” or “v(A,out)”) or a current through a voltage source (ex. “i(vtest)”). The first form calculates DC sensitivities, the second form calculates AC sensitivities. The output values are in dimensions of change in output per unit change of input (as opposed to percent change in output or per percent change of input).

17.5.57 Set: Set the value of a variable

General Form:

set [word] 
set [word = value] ...

Set the value of word to be value, if it is present. You can set any word to be any value, numeric or string. If no value is given then the value is the Boolean ’true’. If you enter a string containing spaces, you have to enclose it with double quotes.

The value of word may be inserted into a command by writing $word. If a variable is set to a list of values that are enclosed in parentheses (which must be separated from their values by white space), the value of the variable is the list.

The variables used by ngspice are listed in section 17.7.

Set entered without any parameter will list all variables set, and their values, if applicable.

17.5.58 Setcirc*: Change the current circuit

General Form:

setcirc [circuit name]

The current circuit is the one that is used for the simulation commands below. When a circuit is loaded with the source command (see below, 17.5.68) it becomes the current circuit.

Setcirc followed by ’return’ without any parameter will list all circuits loaded.

17.5.59 Setplot: Switch the current set of vectors

General Form:

setplot [plotname]

Set the current plot to the plot with the given name, or if no name is given, prompt the user with a menu. (Note that the plots are named as they are loaded, with names like tran1 or op2. These names are shown by the setplot and display commands and are used by diff, below.) If the “New plot” item is selected, the current plot becomes one with no vectors defined.

Note that here the word “plot” refers to a group of vectors that are the result of one ngspice run. When more than one file is loaded in, or more than one plot is present in one file, ngspice keeps them separate and only shows you the vectors in the current plot.

17.5.60 Setscale: Set the scale vector for the current plot

General Form:

setscale [vector]

Defines the scale vector for the current plot. If no argument is given, the current scale vector is printed. The scale vector delivers the values for the x-axis in a 2D plot.

17.5.61 Settype: Set the type of a vector

General Form:

settype type vector ...

Change the type of the named vectors to type. Type names can be found in the following table.






Type Unit Type Unit










notype pole





time s zero





frequency Hz s-param





voltage V temp-sweep Celsius





current A res-sweep Ohms





onoise-spectrum (V or A)^2/Hz impedance Ohms





onoise-integrated V or A admittance Mhos





inoise-spectrum (V or A)^2/Hz power W





inoise-integrated V or A phase Degree





decibel dB





17.5.62 Shell: Call the command interpreter

General Form:

shell [ command ]

Call the operating system’s command interpreter; execute the specified command or call for interactive use.

17.5.63 Shift: Alter a list variable

General Form:

shift [varname] [number]

If varname is the name of a list variable, it is shifted to the left by number elements (i.e, the number leftmost elements are removed). The default varname is argv, and the default number is 1.

17.5.64 Show*: List device state

General Form:

show devices [ : parameters ] , ...

The show command prints out tables summarizing the operating condition of selected devices. If devices is missing, a default set of devices are listed, if devices is a single letter, devices of that type are listed. A device’s full name may be specified to list only that device. Finally, devices may be selected by model by using the form “#modelname”.

If no parameters are specified, the values for a standard set of parameters are listed. If the list of parameters contains a “+”, the default set of parameters is listed along with any other specified parameters.

For both devices and parameters, the word “all” has the obvious meaning.

Note: there must be spaces separating the “:” that divides the device list from the parameter list.

17.5.65 Showmod*: List model parameter values

General Form:

showmod models [ : parameters ] , ...

The showmod command operates like the show command (above) but prints out model parameter values. The applicable forms for models are a single letter specifying the device type letter (e.g. m, or c), a device name (e.g. m.xbuf22.m4b), or #modelname (e.g. #p1).

17.5.66 Snload*: Load the snapshot file

General Form:

snload circuit-file file

snload reads the snapshot file generated by snsave (17.5.67). circuit-file is the original circuit input file. After reading the simulation may be continued by resume (17.5.51).

An input script for loading circuit and intermediate data, resuming simulation and plotting is shown below:

Typical usage:

*  SCRIPT: ADDER - 4 BIT BINARY 
* script to reload circuit and continue the simulation 
* begin with editing the file location 
* to be started with ’ngspice adder_snload.script’ 
 
.control 
* cd to where all files are located 
cd D:\Spice_general\ngspice\examples\snapshot 
* load circuit and snpashot file 
snload adder_mos_circ.cir adder500.snap 
* continue simulation 
resume 
* plot some node voltages 
plot v(10) v(11) v(12) 
.endc

Due to bug we currently need the term ’script’ in the title line (first line) of the script.

17.5.67 Snsave*: Save a snapshot file

General Form:

snsave file

If you run a transient simulation and interrupt it by e.g. a stop breakpoint (17.5.72), you may resume simulation immediately (17.5.51) or store the intermediate status in a snapshot file by snsave for resuming simulation later (using snload (17.5.66)), even with a new instance of ngspice.

Typical usage:

Example input file for snsave 
* load a circuit (including transistor models and .tran command) 
* starts transient simulation until stop point 
* store intermediate data to file 
* begin with editing the file location 
* to be run with ’ngspice adder_mos.cir’ 
 
.include adder_mos_circ.cir 
 
.control 
*cd to where all files are located 
cd D:\Spice_general\ngspice\examples\snapshot 
set noaskquit 
set noinit 
*interrupt condition for the simulation 
stop when time > 500n 
* simulate 
run 
* store snapshot to file 
snsave adder500.snap 
quit 
.endc 
 
.END

adder_mos_circ.cir is a circuit input file, including the netlist, .model and .tran statements.

Unfortunately snsave/snload will not work if you have XSPICE devices (or V/I sources with polynomial statement) in your input deck.

17.5.68 Source: Read a ngspice input file

General Form:

source infile

For ngspice: read the ngspice input file infile, containing a circuit netlist. Ngnutmeg and ngspice commands may be included in the file, and must be enclosed between the lines .control and .endc. These commands are executed immediately after the circuit is loaded, so a control line of ac ... works the same as the corresponding .ac card. The first line in any input file is considered a title line and not parsed but kept as the name of the circuit. Thus, a ngspice command script in infile must begin with a blank line and then with a .control line. Also, any line starting with the characters *# is considered as a control line (.control and .endc is placed around this line automatically.). The exception to these rules are the files spinit (16.5) and .spiceinit (16.6).

For ngutmeg: reads commands from the file infile. Lines beginning with the character * are considered comments and are ignored.

The following search path is executed to find infile: current directory (OS dependent), <prefix>/share/ngspice/scripts, env. variable NGSPICE_INPUT_DIR (if defined), see 16.7. This sequence may be overriden by setting the internal sourcepath variable (see 17.7) before calling source infile.

17.5.69 Spec: Create a frequency domain plot

General Form:

spec start_freq stop_freq step_freq vector [vector ...]

Calculates a new complex vector containing the Fourier transform of the input vector (typically the linearized result of a transient analysis). The default behavior is to use a Hanning window, but this can be changed by setting the variables specwindow and specwindoworder appropriately.

Typical usage:

ngspice 13 -> linearize 
ngspice 14 -> set specwindow = "blackman" 
ngspice 15 -> spec 10 1000000 1000 v(out) 
ngspice 16 -> plot mag(v(out))

Possible values for specwindow are: none, hanning, cosine, rectangular, hamming, triangle, bartlet, blackman, gaussian and flattop. In the case of a gaussian window specwindoworder is a number specifying its order. For a list of window functions see 17.5.24.

17.5.70 Status*: Display breakpoint information

General Form:

status

Display all of the saved nodes and parameters, traces and breakpoints currently in effect.

17.5.71 Step*: Run a fixed number of time-points

General Form:

step [number]

Iterate number times, or once, and then stop.

17.5.72 Stop*: Set a breakpoint

General Form:

stop [ after n] [ when value cond value ] ...

Set a breakpoint. The argument after n means stop after iteration number “n”, and the argument when value cond value means stop when the first value is in the given relation with the second value, the possible relations being




Symbol Alias Meaning






= eq equal to



<> ne not equal



> gt greater than



< lt less than



>= ge greater than or equal to



<= le less than or equal to



Symbol or alias may be used alternatively. All stop commands have to be given in the control flow before the run command. The values above may be node names in the running circuit, or real values. If more than one condition is given, e.g.

stop after 4 when v(1) > 4 when v(2) < 2,

the conjunction of the conditions is implied. If the condition is met, the simulation and control flow are interrupted, and ngspice waits for user input.

In a transient simulation the ’=’ or ’eq’ will only work with vector ’time’ in commands like

stop when time = 200n.

Internally a breakpoint will be set at the time requested. Multiple breakpoints may be set. If the first stop condition is met, the simulation is interrupted, the commands following run or tran (e.g. alter or altermod) are executed, then the simulation may continue at the first resume command. The next breakpoint requires another resume to continue automatically. Otherwise the simulation stops and ngspice waits for user input.

If you try to stop at

stop when V(1) eq 1

(or similar) during a transient simulation, you probably will miss this point, because it is not very likely that at any time step the vector v(1) will have the exact value of 1. Then ngspice simply will not stop.

17.5.73 Strcmp: Compare two strings

General Form:

strcmp _flag $string1 "string2"

The command compares two strings, either given by a variable (string1) or as a string in quotes (“string2”). _flag is set as an output variable to ’0’, if both strings are equal. A value greater than zero indicates that the first character that does not match has a greater value in str1 than in str2; and a value less than zero indicates the opposite (like the C strcmp function).

17.5.74 Sysinfo*: Print system information

General Form:

sysinfo

The command prints system information useful for sending bug report to developers. Information consists of:

The example below shows the use of this command.

ngspice 1 -> sysinfo 
OS: CYGWIN_NT-5.1 1.5.25(0.156/4/2) 2008-06-12 19:34 
CPU: Intel(R) Pentium(R) 4 CPU 3.40GHz 
Logical processors: 2 
Total DRAM available = 1535.480469 MB. 
DRAM currently available = 984.683594 MB. 
ngspice 2 ->

This command has been tested under Windows OS and LINUX. It may not be available in your operating system environment.

17.5.75 Tf*: Run a Transfer Function analysis

General Form:

tf output_node input_source

The tf command performs a transfer function analysis, returning:

between the given output node and the given input source. The analysis assumes a small-signal DC (slowly varying) input. The following example file

Example input file:

* Tf test circuit 
vs    1    0    dc 5 
r1    1    2    100 
r2    2    3    50 
r3    3    0    150 
r4    2    0    200 
 
.control 
tf v(3,5) vs 
print all 
.endc 
 
.end

will yield the following output:

transfer_function = 3.750000e-001

output_impedance_at_v(3,5) = 6.662500e+001

vs#input_impedance = 2.000000e+002

17.5.76 Trace*: Trace nodes

General Form:

trace [ node ...]

For every step of an analysis, the value of the node is printed. Several traces may be active at once. Tracing is not applicable for all analyses. To remove a trace, use the delete (17.5.16) command.

17.5.77 Tran*: Perform a transient analysis

General Form:

tran Tstep Tstop [ Tstart [ Tmax ] ] [ UIC ]

Perform a transient analysis. See chapter 15.3.9 of this manual for more details.

An interactive transient analysis may be interrupted by issuing a ctrl-c (control-C) command. The analysis then can be resumed by the resume command (17.5.51). Several options may be set to control the simulation (15.1.4).

17.5.78 Transpose: Swap the elements in a multi-dimensional data set

General Form:

transpose vector vector ...

This command transposes a multidimensional vector. No analysis in ngspice produces multidimensional vectors, although the DC transfer curve may be run with two varying sources. You must use the “reshape” command to reform the one-dimensional vectors into two dimensional vectors. In addition, the default scale is incorrect for plotting. You must plot versus the vector corresponding to the second source, but you must also refer only to the first segment of this second source vector. For example (circuit to produce the transfer characteristic of a MOS transistor):

How to produce the transfer characteristic of a MOS transistor:

ngspice > dc vgg 0 5 1 vdd 0 5 1 
ngspice > plot i(vdd) 
ngspice > reshape all [6,6] 
ngspice > transpose i(vdd) v(drain) 
ngspice > plot i(vdd) vs v(drain)[0]

17.5.79 Unalias: Retract an alias

General Form:

unalias [word ...]

Removes any aliases present for the words.

17.5.80 Undefine: Retract a definition

General Form:

undefine function

Definitions for the named user-defined functions are deleted.

17.5.81 Unlet: Delete the specified vector(s)

General Form:

unlet vector [ vector ... ]

Delete the specified vector(s). See also let (17.5.33).

17.5.82 Unset: Clear a variable

General Form:

unset [word ...]

Clear the value of the specified variable(s) (word).

17.5.83 Version: Print the version of ngspice

General Form:

version [-s | -f | <version id>]

Print out the version of ngnutmeg that is running, if invoked without argument or with -s or -f. If the argument is a <version id> (any string different from -s or -f is considered a <version id> ), the command checks to make sure that the arguments match the current version of ngspice. (This is mainly used as a Command: line in rawfiles.)

Options description:

The following example shows what the command returns is some situations:

Use of the version command:

ngspice 10 -> version 
****** 
** ngspice-24 : Circuit level simulation program 
** The U. C. Berkeley CAD Group 
** Copyright 1985-1994, Regents of the University of California. 
** Please get your ngspice manual from 
           http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/docs.html 
** Please file your bug-reports at 
           http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/bugrep.html 
** Creation Date: Jan  1 2011   13:36:34 
****** 
ngspice 2 -
ngspice 11 -> version 14 
Note: rawfile is version 14 (current version is 24) 
ngspice 12 -> version 24 
ngspice 13 ->

Note for developers: The option listing returned when version is called with the -f flag is built at compile time using #ifdef blocks. When new compile switches are added, if you want them to appear on the list, you have to modify the code in misccoms.c.

17.5.84 Where*: Identify troublesome node or device

General Form:

where

When performing a transient or operating point analysis, the name of the last node or device to cause non-convergence is saved. The where command prints out this information so that you can examine the circuit and either correct the problem or make a bug report. You may do this either in the middle of a run or after the simulator has given up on the analysis. For transient simulation, the iplot command can be used to monitor the progress of the analysis. When the analysis slows down severely or hangs, interrupt the simulator (with control-C) and issue the where command. Note that only one node or device is printed; there may be problems with more than one node.

17.5.85 Wrdata: Write data to a file (simple table)

General Form:

wrdata [file] [vecs]

Writes out the vectors to file.

This is a very simple printout of data in array form. Column one is the default scale data, column two the simulated data. If more than one vector is given, the third column again is the default scale, the fourth the data of the second vector. The default format is ASCII. All vectors have to stem from the same plot, otherwise a seg fault may occur. No further information is written to the file, so you have to keep track of your multiple outputs. The format may be changed in the near future.

output example from two vectors:

0.000000e+000  -1.845890e-006  0.000000e+000  0.000000e+000 
7.629471e+006   4.243518e-006  7.629471e+006 -4.930171e-006 
1.525894e+007  -5.794628e-006  1.525894e+007  4.769020e-006 
2.288841e+007   5.086875e-006  2.288841e+007 -3.670687e-006 
3.051788e+007  -3.683623e-006  3.051788e+007  1.754215e-006 
3.814735e+007   1.330798e-006  3.814735e+007 -1.091843e-006 
4.577682e+007  -3.804620e-007  4.577682e+007  2.274678e-006 
5.340630e+007   9.047444e-007  5.340630e+007 -3.815083e-006 
6.103577e+007  -2.792511e-006  6.103577e+007  4.766727e-006 
6.866524e+007   5.657498e-006  6.866524e+007 -2.397679e-006 
....

If variable appendwrite is set, the data may be added to an existing file.

17.5.86 Write: Write data to a file (Spice3f5 format)

General Form:

write [file] [exprs]

Writes out the expressions to file.

First vectors are grouped together by plots, and written out as such (i.e, if the expression list contained three vectors from one plot and two from another, then two plots are written, one with three vectors and one with two). Additionally, if the scale for a vector isn’t present, it is automatically written out as well.

The default format is a compact binary, but this can be changed to ASCII with the set filetype=ascii command. The default file name is rawspice.raw, or the argument to the -r flag on the command line, if there was one, and the default expression list is all.

If variable appendwrite is set, the data may be added to an existing file.

17.5.87 Wrs2p: Write scattering parameters to file (Touchstone® format)

General Form:

wrs2p [file]

Writes out the s-parameters of a two-port to file.

In the active plot the following is required: vectors frequency, S11 S12 S21 S22, all having the same length and having complex values (as a result of an ac analysis), and vector Rbase. For details how to generate these data see chapt. 17.9.

The file format is Touchstone® Version 1, ASCII, frequency in Hz, real and imaginary parts of Snn versus frequency.

The default file name is s-param.s2p.

output example:

!2-port S-parameter file 
!Title: test for scattering parameters 
!Generated by ngspice at Sat Oct 16 13:51:18  2010 
# Hz S RI R 50 
!freq            ReS11           ImS11           ReS21           ... 
 2.500000e+006  -1.358762e-003  -1.726349e-002   9.966563e-001 
 5.000000e+006  -5.439573e-003  -3.397117e-002   9.867253e-001 
....

17.5.88 Xgraph: use the xgraph(1) program for plotting.

General Form:

xgraph file [exprs] [plot options]

The ngspice/ngnutmeg xgraph command plots data like the plot command but via xgraph, a popular X11 plotting program. If file is either “temp” or “tmp” a temporary file is used to hold the data while being plotted. For available plot options, see the plot command. All options except for polar or smith plots are supported.

17.6 Control Structures

17.6.1 While - End

General Form:

while condition 
statement 
... 
end

While condition, an arbitrary algebraic expression, is true, execute the statements.

17.6.2 Repeat - End

General Form:

repeat [number] 
statement 
... 
end

Execute the statements number times, or forever if no argument is given.

17.6.3 Dowhile - End

General Form:

dowhile condition 
statement 
... 
end

The same as while, except that the condition is tested after the statements are executed.

17.6.4 Foreach - End

General Form:

foreach var value ... 
statement 
... 
end

The statements are executed once for each of the values, each time with the variable var set to the current one. (var can be accessed by the $var notation - see below).

17.6.5 If - Then - Else

General Form:

if condition 
statement 
... 
else 
statement 
... 
end

If the condition is non-zero then the first set of statements are executed, otherwise the second set. The else and the second set of statements may be omitted.

17.6.6 Label

General Form:

label word

If a statement of the form goto word is encountered, control is transferred to this point, otherwise this is a no-op.

17.6.7 Goto

General Form:

goto word

If a statement of the form label word is present in the block or an enclosing block, control is transferred there. Note that if the label is at the top level, it must be before the goto statement (i.e, a forward goto may occur only within a block). A block to just include goto on the top level may look like

Example noop block to include forward goto on top level:

if (1) 
... 
goto gohere 
... 
label gohere 
end

17.6.8 Continue

General Form:

continue

If there is a while, dowhile, or foreach block enclosing this statement, control passes to the test, or in the case of foreach, the next value is taken. Otherwise an error results.

17.6.9 Break

General Form:

break

If there is a while, dowhile, or foreach block enclosing this statement, control passes out of the block. Otherwise an error results.

Of course, control structures may be nested. When a block is entered and the input is the terminal, the prompt becomes a number of >’s corresponding to the number of blocks the user has entered. The current control structures may be examined with the debugging command cdump (see 17.5.9).

17.7 Internally predefined variables

The operation of both ngutmeg and ngspice may be affected by setting variables with the “set” command (17.5.57). In addition to the variables mentioned below, the “set” command in ngspice also affects the behavior of the simulator via the options previously described under the section on “.OPTIONS” (15.1). You also may define new variables or alter existing variables inside .control ... .endc for later use in your user-defined script (see chapter 17.8).

The following list is in alphabetical order. All of them are acknowledged by ngspice. Frontend variables (e.g. on circuits and simulation) are not defined in ngnutmeg. The predefined variables which may be set or altered by the “set” command are:

appendwrite
Append to the file when a write command is issued, if one already exists.
brief
If set to FALSE, the netlist will be printed.
colorN
These variables determine the colors used, if X is being run on a color display. N may be between 0 and 15. Color 0 is the background, color 1 is the grid and text color, and colors 2 through 15 are used in order for vectors plotted. The value of the color variables should be names of colors, which may be found in the file /usr/lib/rgb.txt. ngspice for Windows does support only white background (color0=white with black grid and text) or or color0=black with white grid and text.
cpdebug
Print control debugging information.
curplotdate
Sets the date of the current plot.
curplotname
Sets the name of the current plot.
curplottitle
Sets the title (a short description) of the current plot.
debug
If set then a lot of debugging information is printed.
device
The name (/dev/tty??) of the graphics device. If this variable isn’t set then the user’s terminal is used. To do plotting on another monitor you probably have to set both the device and term variables. (If device is set to the name of a file, nutmeg dumps the graphics control codes into this file – this is useful for saving plots.)
diff_abstol
The relative tolerance used by the diff command (default is 1e-12).
diff_reltol
The relative tolerance used by the diff command (default is 0.001).
diff_vntol
The absolute tolerance for voltage type vectors used by the diff command (default is 1e-6).
echo
Print out each command before it is executed.
editor
The editor to use for the edit command.
filetype
This can be either ascii or binary, and determines the format of the raw file (compact binary or text editor readable ascii). The default is binary.
fourgridsize
How many points to use for interpolating into when doing Fourier analysis.
gridsize
If this variable is set to an integer, this number is used as the number of equally spaced points to use for the Y axis when plotting. Otherwise the current scale is used (which may not have equally spaced points). If the current scale isn’t strictly monotonic, then this option has no effect.
gridstyle
Sets the grid during plotting with the plot command. Will be overridden by direct entry of gridstyle in the plot command. A linear grid is standard for both x and y axis. Allowed values are lingrid loglog xlog ylog smith smithgrid polar nogrid.
hcopydev
If this is set, when the hardcopy command is run the resulting file is automatically printed on the printer named hcopydev with the command lpr -Phcopydev -g file.
hcopyfont
This variable specifies the font name for hardcopy output plots. The value is device dependent.
hcopyfontsize
This is a scaling factor for the font used in hardcopy plots.
hcopydevtype
This variable specifies the type of the printer output to use in the hardcopy command. If hcopydevtype is not set, Postscript format is assumed. plot (5) is recognized as an alternative output format. When used in conjunction with hcopydev, hcopydevtype should specify a format supported by the printer.
hcopyscale
This is a scaling factor for the font used in hardcopy plots (between 0 and 10).
hcopywidth
Sets width of the hardcopy plot.
hcopyheight
Sets height of the hardcopy plot.
hcopypscolor
Sets the color of the hardcopy output. If not set, black & white plotting is assumed with different linestyles for each output vector plotted. Setting to any valid color integer value yields a colored plot background (0: black 1: white, others see below) and colored solid lines. This is valid for postscript only.
hcopypstxcolor
This variable sets the color of the text in the postscript hardcopy output. If not set, black is assumed on white background, white on black background. Valid colors are 0: black 1: white 2: red 3: blue 4: orange 5: green 6: pink 7: brown 8: khaki 9: plum 10: orchid 11: violet 12: maroon 13: turquoise 14: sienna 15: coral 16: cyan 17: magenta 18: gray for smith grid 19: gray for smith grid 20: gray for normal grid
height
The length of the page for asciiplot and print col.
history
The number of events to save in the history list.
lprplot5
This is a printf(3s) style format string used to specify the command to use for sending plot(5)-style plots to a printer or plotter. The first parameter supplied is the printer name, the second parameter supplied is a file name containing the plot. Both parameters are strings. It is trivial to cause ngspice to abort by supplying a unreasonable format string.
lprps
This is a printf(3s) style format string used to specify the command to use for sending Postscript plots to a printer or plotter. The first parameter supplied is the printer name, the second parameter supplied is a file name containing the plot. Both parameters are strings. It is trivial to cause ngspice to abort by supplying a unreasonable format string.
modelcard
The name of the model card (normally .MODEL)
nfreqs
The number of frequencies to compute in the Fourier command. (Defaults to 10.)
ngbehavior
Sets the compatibility mode of ngspice. To be set in spinit (16.5) or .spiceinit (16.6).Its value ’all’ will improve compatibility to commercial simulators. Full compatibility is however not the intention of ngspice! This value may be set as a standard in the future. ’ps’, ’hs’ and ’spice3’ are available. See chapt. 16.13.
noaskquit
Do not check to make sure that there are no circuits suspended and no plots unsaved. Normally ngspice warns the user when he tries to quit if this is the case.
nobjthack
BJTs can have either 3 or 4 nodes, which makes it difficult for the subcircuit expansion routines to decide what to rename. If the fourth parameter has been declared as a model name, then it is assumed that there are 3 nodes, otherwise it is considered a node. To disable this, you can set the variable "nobjthack" which forces BJTs to have 4 nodes (for the purposes of subcircuit expansion, at least).
nobreak
Don’t have asciiplot and print col break between pages.
noasciiplotvalue
Don’t print the first vector plotted to the left when doing an asciiplot.
nobjthack
Assume that BJTs have 4 nodes.
noclobber
Don’t overwrite existing files when doing IO redirection.
noglob
Don’t expand the global characters ‘*’, ‘?’, ‘[’, and ‘]’. This is the default.
nomoremode
If nomoremode is not set, whenever a large amount of data is being printed to the screen (e.g, the print or asciiplot commands), the output is stopped every screenful and continues when a carriage return is typed. If nomoremode is set then data scrolls off the screen without check.
nonomatch
If noglob is unset and a global expression cannot be matched, use the global characters literally instead of complaining.
noparse
Don’t attempt to parse input files when they are read in (useful for debugging). Of course, they cannot be run if they are not parsed.
noprintscale
Don’t print the scale in the leftmost column when a print col command is given.
nosort
Don’t have display sort the variable names.
nosubckt
Don’t expand subcircuits.
notrnoise
Switch off the transient noise sources (chapt. 4.1.7).
numdgt
The number of digits to print when printing tables of data (a, print col). The default precision is 6 digits. On the VAX, approximately 16 decimal digits are available using double precision, so p should not be more than 16. If the number is negative, one fewer digit is printed to ensure constant widths in tables.
num_threads
The number of of threads to be used if OpenMP (see chapt. 16.10) is selected. The default value is 2.
plotstyle
This should be one of linplot, combplot, or pointplot. linplot, the default, causes points to be plotted as parts of connected lines. combplot causes a comb plot to be done. It plots vectors by drawing a vertical line from each point to the X-axis, as opposed to joining the points. pointplot causes each point to be plotted separately.
pointchars
Set a string as a list of characters to be used as points in a point plot. Standard is ox*+#abcdefhgijklmnpqrstuvwyz. Characters §are not allowed.
polydegree
The degree of the polynomial that the plot command should fit to the data. If polydegree is N, then nutmeg fits a degree N polynomial to every set of N points and draw 10 intermediate points in between each end point. If the points aren’t monotonic, then it tries rotating the curve and reducing the degree until a fit is achieved.
polysteps
The number of points to interpolate between every pair of points available when doing curve fitting. The default is 10.
program
The name of the current program (argv[0]).
prompt
The prompt, with the character ‘!’ replaced by the current event number. Single quotes ’ ’ are required around the string entered!
rawfile
The default name for rawfiles created.
remote_shell
Overrides the name used for generating rspice runs (default is "rsh").
renumber
Renumber input lines when an input file has .includes.
rndseed
Seed value for random number generator (used by sgauss, sunif, and rnd functions). If not set, the process Id is used as seed value.
rhost
The machine to use for remote ngspice runs, instead of the default one (see the description of the rspice command, below).
rprogram
The name of the remote program to use in the rspice command.
sourcepath
A list of the directories to search when a source command is given. The default is the current directory and the standard ngspice library (/usr/local/lib/ngspice, or whatever LIBPATH is #defined to in the ngspice source). The command
set sourcepath = ( e:/ D:/ . c:/spice/examples ) 
will overwrite the default. The search sequence now is: current directory, e:/, d:/, current directory (again due to .), c:/spice/examples. ’Current directory’ is depending on the OS.
specwindow
Windowing for commands spec (17.5.69) or fft (17.5.24). May be one of the following:  
bartlet blackman cosine gaussian hamming hanning none rectangular triangle.
specwindoworder
Integer value 2 - 8 (default 2), used by commands spec or fft.
spicepath
The program to use for the aspice command. The default is /cad/bin/spice.
strict_errorhandling
If set by the user, an error detected during circuit parsing will immediately lead ngspice to exit with exit code 1 (see 18.5). May be set in files spinit (16.5) or .spiceinit (16.6) only.
subend
The card to end subcircuits (normally .ends).
subinvoke
The prefix to invoke subcircuits (normally X).
substart
The card to begin subcircuits (normally .subckt).
term
The mfb name of the current terminal.
ticmarks
An integer value n, n tics (a small ’x’) will be set on your graph. (Arrangement of the tics ?)
ticlist
A list of integers, e.g. ( 4 14 24 ) to set tics (small ’x’) on your graph.(Arrangement of the tics ?)
units
If this is degrees, then all the trig functions will use degrees instead of radians.
unixcom
If a command isn’t defined, try to execute it as a UNIX command. Setting this option has the effect of giving a rehash command, below. This is useful for people who want to use ngnutmeg as a login shell.
wfont
Set the font for the graphics plot in MS Windows. Typical fonts are courier, times, arial and all others found on your machine. Default is courier.
wfont_size
The size of the windows font. Default is depending on systems settings, something like
width
The width of the page for asciiplot and print col (see also 15.6.7).
x11lineararcs
Some X11 implementations have poor arc drawing. If you set this option, Ngspice will plot using an approximation to the curve using straight lines.
xbrushwidth
Linewidth for grid, border and graph.
xfont
Set the font for the graphics plot in X11 (LINUX, Cygwin, etc.). Input format has still to be checked.
xtrtol
Set trtol, e.g. to 7, so to avoid the speed reduction with XSPICE (see 16.9). Be aware of potential precision degradation or convergence issues using this option.

17.8 Scripts

Expressions, functions, constants, commands, variables, vectors, and control structures may be assembled into scripts within a .control ... .endc section of the input file. The script allows to automate a more complex ngspice behavior: simulations are performed, output data are the analyzed, simulations repeated with modified parameters, output vectors for plotting are assembled. The ngspice scripting language is not very powerful, but easily integrated into the simulation flow.

The ngspice input file for scripting contains the usual circuit netlist, modelcards, and a script, enclosed in the .control .. .endc section. ngspice is started in interactive mode with the input file in the command line (or sourced later with the source command). After reading the input file, the command sequence is immediately processed. Variables or vectors set by previous commands may be used in commands following their definition. data may be stored, plotted or grouped into new vectors for additional charts supporting data evaluation.

17.8.1 Variables

Variables are defined and initialized with the set command (17.5). set output=10 will defined the variable output and set it to a (real) number 10. Predefined variables, which are used inside ngspice for specific purposes, are listed in chapt. 17.7. Variables are accessible globally. The values of variables may be used in commands by writing $varname where the value of the variable is to appear, e.g. $output. The special variables $$ and $< refer to the process ID of the program and a line of input which is read from the terminal when the variable is evaluated, respectively. If a variable has a name of the form $&word, then word is considered a vector (see below), and its value is taken to be the value of the variable. If $foo is a valid variable, and is of type list, then the expression $foo[low-high] represents a range of elements. Either the upper index or the lower may be left out, and the reverse of a list may be obtained with $foo[len-0]. Also, the notation $?foo evaluates to 1 if the variable foo is defined, 0 otherwise, and $#foo evaluates to the number of elements in foo if it is a list, 1 if it is a number or string, and 0 if it is a Boolean variable.

17.8.2 Vectors

Ngspice and ngnutmeg data is in the form of vectors: time, voltage, etc. Each vector has a type, and vectors can be operated on and combined algebraically in ways consistent with their types. Vectors are normally created as a result of a transient or dc simulation. They are also established when a data file is read in (see the load command 17.5.36). They can also be created with the let command 17.5.33 inside a script. If a variable has a name of the form $&word, then ’word’ is considered a vector, and its value is taken to be the value of the variable.

17.8.3 Commands

Commands have been described in chapter 17.5.

17.8.4 control structures

Control structures have been described in chapter 17.6. Some simple examples will be given below.

Control structure examples:

Test sequences for ngspice control structures 
*vectors are used (except foreach) 
*start in interactive mode 
 
.control 
 
* test sequence for while, dowhile 
  let loop = 0 
  echo 
  echo enter loop with  "$&loop" 
  dowhile loop < 3 
    echo within dowhile loop "$&loop" 
    let loop = loop + 1 
  end 
  echo after dowhile loop "$&loop" 
  echo 
  let loop = 0 
  while loop < 3 
    echo within while loop "$&loop" 
    let loop = loop + 1 
  end 
  echo after while loop "$&loop" 
  let loop = 3 
  echo 
  echo enter loop with  "$&loop" 
  dowhile loop < 3 
    echo within dowhile loop "$&loop"     $ output expected 
    let loop = loop + 1 
  end 
  echo after dowhile loop "$&loop" 
  echo 
  let loop = 3 
  while loop < 3 
    echo within while loop "$&loop"       $ no output expected 
    let loop = loop + 1 
  end 
  echo after while loop "$&loop"

Control structure examples (continued):

* test for while, repeat, if, break 
  let loop = 0 
  while loop < 4 
    let index = 0 
    repeat 
      let index = index + 1 
      if index > 4 
        break 
      end 
    end 
    echo index "$&index"   loop "$&loop" 
    let loop = loop + 1 
  end 
 
* test sequence for foreach 
  echo 
  foreach outvar 0 0.5 1 1.5 
    echo parameters: $outvar   $ foreach parameters are variables, 
                               $ not vectors! 
  end 
 
* test for if ... else ... end 
  echo 
  let loop = 0 
  let index = 1 
  dowhile loop < 10 
    let index = index * 2 
    if index < 128 
      echo "$&index" lt 128 
    else 
      echo "$&index"  ge 128 
    end 
    let loop = loop + 1 
  end 
 
* simple test for label, goto 
  echo 
  let loop = 0 
  label starthere 
  echo start "$&loop" 
  let loop = loop + 1 
  if loop < 3 
    goto starthere 
  end 
  echo end "$&loop"

Control structure examples (continued):

* test for label, nested goto 
  echo 
  let loop = 0 
  label starthere1 
  echo start nested "$&loop" 
  let loop = loop + 1 
  if loop < 3 
    if loop < 3 
      goto starthere1 
    end 
  end 
  echo end "$&loop" 
 
* test for label, goto 
  echo 
  let index = 0 
  label starthere2 
  let loop = 0 
  echo We are at start with index "$&index" and loop "$&loop" 
  if index < 6 
    label inhere 
    let index = index + 1 
    if loop < 3 
      let loop = loop + 1 
      if index > 1 
        echo jump2 
        goto starthere2 
      end 
    end 
    echo jump 
    goto inhere 
  end 
  echo We are at end with index "$&index" and loop "$&loop"

Control structure examples (continued):

* test goto in while loop 
  let loop = 0 
  if 1    $ outer loop to allow nested forward label endlabel 
    while loop < 10 
      if loop > 5 
        echo jump 
        goto endlabel 
      end 
      let loop = loop + 1 
    end 
    echo before  $ never reached 
    label endlabel 
    echo after "$&loop" 
  end 
 
*test for using variables, simple test for label, goto 
  set loop = 0 
  label starthe 
  echo start $loop 
  let loop = $loop + 1  $ expression needs vector at lhs 
  set loop = "$&loop"   $ convert vector contents to variable 
  if $loop < 3 
    goto starthe 
  end 
  echo end $loop 
.endc

17.8.5 Example script ’spectrum’

A typical example script named spectrum is delivered with the ngspice distribution. Even if it is made obsolete by the internal spec command (see 17.5.69) and especially by the much faster fft command (see 17.5.24), it may act as a good example for getting acquainted with the ngspice (or nutmeg) post-processor language.

As a suitable input for spectrum you may run a ring-oscillator, delivered with ngspice in e.g. test/bsim3soi/ring51_41.cir. For an adequate resolution you will need a simulation time of 1 µs. Then a small control script may start ngspice by loading the R.O. simulation data and start spectrum.

Small script to start ngspice, read the simulation data and start spectrum:

* test for script ’spectrum’ 
.control 
load ring51_41.out 
spectrum 10MEG 2500MEG 1MEG v(out25) v(out50) 
.endc

17.8.6 Example script for random numbers

Generation and test of random numbers with Gaussian distribution

* agauss test in ngspice 
* generate a sequence of gaussian distributed random numbers. 
* test the distribution by sorting the numbers into 
* a histogram (buckets) 
.control 
  define agauss(nom, avar, sig) (nom + avar/sig * sgauss(0)) 
  let mc_runs = 200 
  let run = 0 
  let no_buck = 8                $ number of buckets 
  let bucket = unitvec(no_buck)  $ each element contains 1 
  let delta = 3e-11    $ width of each bucket, depends 
                       $ on avar and sig 
  let lolimit = 1e-09 - 3*delta 
  let hilimit = 1e-09 + 3*delta 
 
  dowhile run < mc_runs 
    let val = agauss(1e-09, 1e-10, 3) $ get the random number 
    if (val < lolimit) 
        let bucket[0] = bucket[0] + 1 $ ’lowest’ bucket 
    end 
    let part = 1 
    dowhile part < (no_buck - 1) 
      if ((val < (lolimit + part*delta)) & 
+ (val > (lolimit + (part-1)*delta))) 
        let bucket[part] = bucket[part] + 1 
                break 
      end 
      let part = part + 1 
    end 
    if (val > hilimit) 
* ’highest’ bucket 
      let bucket[no_buck - 1] = bucket[no_buck - 1] + 1 
    end 
    let run = run + 1 
  end 
 
  let part = 0 
  dowhile part < no_buck 
    let value = bucket[part] - 1 
    set value = "$&value" 
* print the buckets’ contents 
    echo $value 
    let part = part + 1 
  end 
 
.endc 
.end

17.8.7 Parameter sweep

While there is no direct command to sweep a device parameter during simulation, you may use a script to emulate such behavior. The example input file contains of an resistive divider with R1 and R2, where R1 is swept from a start to a stop value inside of the control section, using the alter command (see 17.5.3).

Input file with parameter sweep

parameter sweep 
* resistive divider, R1 swept from start_r to stop_r 
VDD 1 0 DC 1 
 
R1 1 2 1k 
R2 2 0 1k 
 
.control 
let start_r = 1k 
let stop_r = 10k 
let delta_r = 1k 
let r_act = start_r 
* loop 
while r_act le stop_r 
  alter r1 r_act 
  op 
  print v(2) 
  let r_act = r_act + delta_r 
end 
.endc 
 
.end

17.8.8 Output redirection

The console outputs delivered by commands like print (17.5.45), echo (17.5.21), or others may be redirected into a text file. ’print vec > filename’ will generate a new file or overwrite an existing file named ’filename’, ’echo text >> filename’ will append the new data to the file ’filename’. Output redirection may be mixed with commands like wrdata.

Input file with output redirection > and >>

 
** MOSFET Gain Stage (AC): Benchmarking Implementation of BSIM4.0.0 
** by Weidong Liu 5/16/2000. 
** output redirection into file 
 
M1 3 2 0 0 N1 L=1u W=4u 
Rsource 1 2 100k 
Rload 3 vdd 25k 
Vdd vdd 0 1.8 
Vin 1 0 1.2 ac 0.1 
 
.control 
ac dec 10 100 1000Meg 
plot v(2) v(3) 
let flen = length(frequency) $ length of the vector 
let loopcounter = 0 
echo output test > text.txt  $ start new file test.txt 
* loop 
while loopcounter lt flen 
  let vout2 = v(2)[loopcounter]  $ generate a single point complex vector 
  let vout2re = real(vout2)  $ generate a single point real vector 
  let vout2im = imag(vout2)  $ generate a single point imaginary vector 
  let vout3 = v(3)[loopcounter]  $ generate a single point complex vector 
  let vout3re = real(vout3)  $ generate a single point real vector 
  let vout3im = imag(vout3)  $ generate a single point imaginary vector 
  let freq = frequency[loopcounter] $ generate a single point vector 
  echo  bbb "$&freq" "$&vout2re" "$&vout2im" "$&vout3re" "$&vout3im" >> 
+text.txt   $ append text and data to file (continued fromm line above) 
  let loopcounter = loopcounter + 1 
end 
.endc 
 
.MODEL N1 NMOS LEVEL=14 VERSION=4.3.0 TNOM=27 
.end

17.9 Scattering parameters (s-parameters)

17.9.1 Intro

A command line script, available from the ngspice distribution at examples/control_structs/s-param.cir, together with the command wrs2p (see chapt. 17.5.87) allows to calculate, print and plot the scattering parameters S11, S21, S12, and S22 of any two port circuit at varying frequencies.

The printed output using wrs2p is a Touchstone® version 1 format file. The file follows the format according to The Touchstone File Format Specification, Version 2.0, available from here. An example is given as number 13 on page 15 of that specification.

17.9.2 S-parameter measurement basics

S-parameters allow a two-port description not just by permuting I1, U1, I2, U2, but using a superposition, leading to a power view of the port (We only look at two-ports here, because multi-ports are not (yet?) implemented.).

You may start with the effective power, being negative or positive

P = u⋅i
(17.1)

The value of P may be the difference of two real numbers, with K being another real number.

                                                                   {           }
ui = P = a2- b2 = (a+ b )(a - b) = (a+ b)(KK - 1)(a - b) = {K (a + b)}  K- 1(a- b)
(17.2)

Thus you get

K -1u = a+ b
(17.3)

Ki = a - b
(17.4)

and finally

         2
a = u+-K--i
      2K
(17.5)

    u- K2i
b = -------
      2K
(17.6)

By introducing the reference resistance Z0 := K2 > 0 we get finally the Heaviside transformation

a = u+√-Z0i,  b = u-√Z0i-
     2  Z0        2   Z0
(17.7)

In case of our two-port we subject our variables to a Heaviside transformation

a1 = U1-+√-Z0I1  b1 = U1--√-Z0I1
       2  Z0           2  Z0
(17.8)

     U2 + Z0I2       U2 - Z0I2
a2 = ---√-----  b2 = ---√-----
       2  Z0           2  Z0
(17.9)

The s-matrix for a two-port then is

(     )   (          ) (     )
   b1   =    s11 s12      a1
   b2        s21 s22      a2
(17.10)

Two obtain s11 we have to set a2 = 0. This is accomplished by loading the output port exactly with the reference resistance Z0, which sinks a current I2 = -U2∕Z0 from the port.

     (   )
s  =   b1-
11     a1  a2=0
(17.11)

      U1--Z0I1-
s11 = U1+ Z0I1
(17.12)

Loading the input port from an ac source U0 via a resistor with resistance value Z0, we obtain the relation

U0 = Z0I1 + U1
(17.13)

Entering this into 17.12, we get

s  =  2U1---U0-
 11      U0
(17.14)

For s21 we obtain similarly

     (   )
s21 =   b2-
       a1  a2=0
(17.15)

s21 = U2---Z0I2 = 2U2-
      U1 + Z0I1    U0
(17.16)

Equations 17.14 and 17.16 now tell us how to measure s11 and s21: Measure U1 at the input port, multiply by 2 using an E source, subtracting U0 which for simplicity is set to 1, and divide by U0. At the same time measure U2 at the output port, multiply by 2 and divide by U0. Biasing and measuring is done by subcircuit S_PARAM. To obtain s22 and s12, you have to exchange the input and output ports of your two-port and do the same measurement again. This is achieved by switching resistors from low (1mΩ) to high (1T Ω) and thus switching the input and output ports.

17.9.3 Usage

Copy and then edit s-param.cir. You will find this file in directory /examples/control_structs of the ngspice distribution.

The reference resistance (often called characteristic impedance) for the measurements is added as a parameter

.param Rbase=50

The bias voltages at the input and output ports of the circuit are set as parameters as well:

.param Vbias_in=1 Vbias_out=2

Place your circuit at the appropriate place in the input file, e.g. replacing the existing example circuits. The input port of your circuit has two nodes in, 0. The output port has the two nodes out, 0. The bias voltages are connected to your circuit via the resistances of value Rbase at the input and output respectively. This may be of importance for the operating point calculations if your circuit draws a large dc current.

Now edit the ac commands (see 17.5.1) according to the circuit provided, e.g.

ac lin 100 2.5MEG 250MEG $ use for Tschebyschef

Be careful to keep both ac lines in the .control ... .endc section the same and only change both in equal measure!

Select the plot commands (lin/log, or smith grid) or the ’write to file’ commands (write, wrdata, or wrs2p) according to your needs.

Run ngspice in interactive mode

ngspice s-param.cir

17.10 MISCELLANEOUS (old stuff, has to be checked for relevance)

C-shell type quoting with “ and “, and backquote substitution may be used. Within single quotes, no further substitution (like history substitution) is done, and within double quotes, the words are kept together but further substitution is done. Any text between backquotes is replaced by the result of executing the text as a command to the shell.

History substitutions, similar to C-shell history substitutions, are also available - see the C-shell manual page for all of the details. The characters ~, @{, and @} have the same effects as they do in the C-Shell, i.e., home directory and alternative expansion. It is possible to use the wildcard characters *, ?, [, and ] also, but only if you unset noglob first. This makes them rather useless for typing algebraic expressions, so you should set noglob again after you are done with wildcard expansion. Note that the pattern [^abc] matches all characters except a, b, and c.

If X is being used, the cursor may be positioned at any point on the screen when the window is up and characters typed at the keyboard are added to the window at that point. The window may then be sent to a printer using the xpr(1) program.

17.11 Bugs (old stuff, has to be checked for relevance)

When defining aliases like alias pdb plot db( ’!:1’ - ’!:2’ ) you must be careful to quote the argument list substitutions in this manner. If you quote the whole argument it might not work properly.

In a user-defined function, the arguments cannot be part of a name that uses the plot.vec syntax. For example: define check(v(1)) cos(tran1.v(1)) does not work.

Chapter 18
Ngspice User Interfaces

ngspice offers a variety of user interfaces. For an overview (several screen shots) please have a look at the ngspice web page.

18.1 MS Windows Graphical User Interface

If compiled properly (e.g. using the –with-wingui flag for ./configure under MINGW), ngspice for Windows offers a simple graphical user interface. In fact this interface does not offer much more for data input than a console would offer, e.g. command line inputs, command history and program text output. First of all it applies the Windows api for data plotting. If you run the sample input file given below, you will get an output as shown in fig. 16.1.

Input file:

*****Single NMOS Transistor For BSIM3V3.1  general purpose check (Id-Vd) *** 
* 
*** circuit description *** 
m1 2 1 3 0 n1 L=0.6u W=10.0u 
vgs 1 0 3.5 
vds 2 0 3.5 
vss 3 0 0 
* 
.dc vds 0 3.5 0.05 vgs 0 3.5 0.5 
* 
.control 
run 
plot vss#branch 
.endc 
* 
* UCB parameters BSIM3v3.2 
.include ../Exam_BSIM3/Modelcards/modelcard.nmos 
.include ../Exam_BSIM3/Modelcards/modelcard.pmos 
* 
.end

The GUI consists of an I/O port (lower window) and a graphics window, created by the plot command.


PIC

Figure 18.1: MS Windows GUI


The output window displays messages issued by ngspice. You may scroll the window to get more of the text. The input box (white box) may be activated by a mouse click to accept any of the valid ngspice commends. The lower left output bar displays the actual input file. ngspice progress during setup and simulation is shown in the progress window (“–ready–”). The Quit button allow to interrupt ngspice. If ngspice is actively simulating, due to using only a single thread, this interrupt has to wait until the window is accessible from within ngspice, e.g. during an update of the progress window.

In the plot window there is the upper left button, which activated a drop down menu. You may select to print the plot window shown (a very simple printer interface, to be improved), set up any of the printers available on your computer, or issue a postscript file of the actual plot window, either black&white or colored.

Instead of plotting with black background, you may set the background to any other color, preferably to “white” using the command shown below.

Input file modification for white background:

.control 
run 
* white background 
set color0=white 
* black grid and text (only needed with X11, automatic with MS Win) 
set color1=black 
* wider grid and plot lines 
set xbrushwidth=2 
plot vss#branch 
.endc


PIC

Figure 18.2: Plotting with white background


18.2 MS Windows Console

If the –with-wingui flag for ./configure under MINGW is omitted (see 32.2.5) or console_debug or console_release is selected in the MS Visual Studio configuration manager, then ngspice will compile without any internal graphical input or output capability. This may be useful if you apply ngspice in a pipe inside the MSYS window, or use it being called from another program, and just generating output files from a given input. The plot (17.5.43) command will not do and leads to an error message.

Only on the ngspice console binary in MS Windows input/output redirection is possible, if ngspice is called (e.g. within a MSYS shell or from a shell script) like

$ ngspice < input.

This feature is used in the new CMC model test suite (to be described elsewhere), thus requires a console binary.

You still may generate graphics output plots or prints by gnuplot (17.5.26), if installed properly (18.7), or by selecting a suitable printing option (18.6).

18.3 LINUX

The standard user interface is a console for input and the X11 graphics system for output with the interactive plot (17.5.43) command. If ngspice is compiled with the –without-x flag for ./configure, a console application without graphical interface results. For more sophisticated input user interfaces please have a look at chapt. 18.8.

18.4 CygWin

The CygWin interface is similar to the LINUX interface (18.3), i.e. console input and X11 graphics output. To avoid the warning of a missing graphical user interface, you have to start the X11 window manager by issuing the commands

$ export DISPLAY=:0.0

$ xwin -multiwindow -clipboard &

inside of the CygWin window before starting ngspice.

18.5 Error handling

Error messages and error handling in ngspice have grown over the years, include a lot of “traditional” behavior and thus are not very systematic and consistent.

Error messages may occur with the token ’Error:’. Often the errors are non-recoverable and will lead to exiting ngspice with error code 1. Sometimes, however, you will get an error message, but ngspice will continue, and may either bail out later because the error has propagated into the simulation, sometimes ngspice will continue, deliver wrong results and exit with error code 0 (no error detected!).

In addition ngspice may issue warning messages like ’Warning: ...’. These should cover recoverable errors only.

So there is still work to be done to define a consistent error messaging, recovery or exiting. A first step is the user definable variable strict_errorhandling. This variable may be set in files spinit (16.5) or .spiceinit (16.6) to immediately stop ngspice, after an error is detected during parsing the circuit. An error message is sent, the ngspice exit code is 1. This behavior deviates from traditional spice error handling and thus is introduced as an option only.

XSPICE error messages are explained in chapter 29.

18.6 Postscript printing options

This info is compiled from Roger L. Traylor’s web page. All the commands and variables you can set are described in chapt. 17.5. The corresponding input file for the examples given below is listed in chapt. 21.1. Just add the .control section to this file and run in interactive mode by

$ ngspice xspice_c1_print.cir

================================================================

One way is to setup your printing like this:

.control

set hcopydevtype=postscript

op

run

plot vcc coll emit

hardcopy temp.ps vcc coll emit

.endc

Then print the postscript file temp.ps to a postscript printer.

================================================================

You can add color traces to it if you wish:

.control

set hcopydevtype=postscript

* allow color and set background color if set to value > 0

set hcopypscolor=1

*color0 is background color

*color1 is the grid and text color

*colors 2-15 are for the vectors

set color0=rgb:f/f/f

set color1=rgb:0/0/0

op

run

hardcopy temp.ps vcc coll emit

.endc

Then print the postscript file temp.ps to a postscript printer.

================================================================

You can also direct your output directly to a designated printer (not available in MS Windows):

.control

set hcopydevtype=postscript

*send output to the printer kec3112-clr

set hcopydev=kec3112-clr

hardcopy out.tmp vcc coll emit

=================================================================

18.7 Gnuplot

Install Gnuplot (on LINUX available from the distribution, on Windows available here). On Windows expand the zip file to a directory of your choice, add the path <any directory>/gnuplot/bin to the PATH variable, and go... The command to invoke Gnuplot (17.5.26) is limited however to x/y plots (no polar etc.).

18.8 Integration with CAD software and “third party” GUIs

In this chapter you will find some links and comments on GUIs for ngspice offered from other projects and on the integration of ngspice into a circuit development flow. The data given rely mostly on information available from the web and thus is out of our control. It also may be far from complete. The GUIs KJWaves and GNUSpiceGUI help you to navigate the commands to need to perform your simulation. XCircuit and the GEDA tools gschem and gnetlist offer integrating schematic capture and simulation.

18.8.1 KJWaves

KJWaves was written to be a cross-platform SPICE tool in pure Java. It aids in viewing, modifying, and simulating SPICE CIRCUIT files. Output from SPICE3 (ngspice) can be read and displayed. Resulting graphs may be printed and saved. The Java executable will run under LINUX and Windows (and maybe other OSs). The development site is available at http://sourceforge.net/projects/kjwaves/. You may find the project home page at http://www.comefly.us/.

18.8.2 GNU Spice GUI

Another GUI, to be found at http://sourceforge.net/projects/gspiceui/.

18.8.3 XCircuit

CYGWIN and especially LINUX users may find XCircuit valuable to establish a development flow including schematic capture and circuit simulation.

18.8.4 GEDA

The gEDA project is developing a full GPL‘d suite and toolkit of Electronic Design Automation tools for use with a LINUX. Ngspice may be integrated into the development flow. Two web sites offer tutorials using gschem and gnetlist with ngspice:

http://geda.seul.org/wiki/geda:csygas

http://geda.seul.org/wiki/geda:ngspice_and_gschem

18.8.5 CppSim

A complete simulation environment called CppSim has been developed and made available for system level simulation of complex mixed signal circuits. ngspice has been integrated into the simulation flow, as described here.

18.8.6 NGSPICE Online

A web browser based interface is offered here. Simulation is performed on a remote server. The project is not directly linked to our ngspice development project.

18.8.7 Spicy Schematics

An IPAD and web interface (including schematics entry) to ngspice is offered here.Simulation is performed on a remote server.

18.8.8 MSEspice

A graphical front end to ngspice, using the Free Pascal cross platform RAD environment MSEide+MSEgui.

18.8.9 PartSim

A web based guiin your browser, including schematics entry. Simulation is performed on a remote server.

Chapter 19
ngspice as shared library or dynamic link library

ngspice may be compiled as a shared library. This allows adding ngspice to an application which then gains control over the simulator. The shared module offers an interface which exports functions controlling the simulator and callback functions for feedback.

So you may send an input "file" with a netlist to ngspice, start the simulation in a separate thread, read back simulation data at each time point, stop the simulator depending on some condition, alter device or model parameters and then resume the simulation.

Shared ngspice does not have any user interface. The calling process is responsible for this. It may offer a graphical user interface, add plotting capability or any other interactive element. You may develop and optimize these user interface elements without a need to alter the ngspice source code itself, using a console application or GUIs like gtk, Delphi, Qt or others.

19.1 Compile options

19.1.1 How to get the sources

Currently (as of ngspice-25 being the actual release), you will have to use the direct loading of the sources from the git repository (see chapt. 32.1.2).

19.1.2 LINUX, MINGW, CYGWIN

Compilation is done as described in chapts. 32.1 or 32.2.1. Use the configure option --with-ngshared instead of --with-x or --with-wingui.

Other operation systems (Mac OS, BSD, ...) have not been tested so far. Your input is welcome!

19.1.3 MS Visual Studio

Compilation is similar to what has been described in chapt. 32.2.3. There is however a dedicated project file coming with the source code to generate ngspice.dll. Go to the directory visualc-shared and start the project with double clicking on sharedspice.sln.

19.2 Linking shared ngspice to a calling application

Basically there are two methods (as with all *.so, *.dll libraries). The caller may link to a (small) library file during compiling/linking, and then immediately search for the shared library upon being started. It is also possible to dynamically load the ngspice shared library at runtime using the dlopen/LoadLibrary mechanisms.

19.2.1 Linking during creating the caller

While creating the ngspice shared lib, not only the *.so (*.dll) file is created, but also a small library file, which just includes references to the exported symbols. Depending on the OS, these may be called libngspice.dll.a, ngspice.lib. Linux and MINGW also allow linking to the shared object itself. The shared object is not included into the executable component but is tied to the execution.

19.2.2 Loading at runtime

dlopen (LINUX) or LoadLibrary (MS Windows) will load libngspice.so or ngspice.dll into the address space of the caller at runtime. The functions return a handle which may be used to acquire the pointers to the functions exported by libngspice.so. Detaching ngspice at runtime is equally possible (using dlclose/FreeLibrary), after the background thread has been stopped and all callbacks have returned.

19.3 Shared ngspice API

The sources for the ngspice shared library API are contained in a single c file (sharedspice.c) and a corresponding header file sharedspice.h. The type and function declarations are contained in sharedspice.h, which may be directly added to the calling application, if written in C or C++.

19.3.1 structs and types defined for transporting data

pvector_info is returned by the exported function ngGet_Vec_Info (see 19.3.2.5). Adresses of the vector name, type, real or complex data are transferred and may be read asynchronously during or after the simulation.

vector_info

typedef struct vector_info { 
    char *v_name;           /* Same as so_vname. *
    int v_type;             /* Same as so_vtype. *
    short v_flags;          /* Flags (a combination of VF_*). *
    double *v_realdata;     /* Real data. *
    ngcomplex_t *v_compdata;/* Complex data. *
    int v_length;           /* Length of the vector. *
} vector_info, *pvector_info;

The next two structures are used by the callback function SendInitData (see 19.3.3.5). Each time a new plot is generated during simulation, e.g. when a sequence of op, ac and tran is used or commands like linearize or fft are invoked, the function is called once by ngspice. Among its parameters you find a pointer to a struct vecinfoall, which includes an array of vecinfo, one for each vector. Pointers to the struct dvec, containing the vector, are included. This struct is declared in header file src/include/ngspice/dvec.h.

vecinfo

typedef struct vecinfo 

    int number;       /* number of vector, as postion in the 
                         linked list of vectors, starts with 0 *
    char *vecname;    /* name of the actual vector *
    bool is_real;     /* TRUE if the actual vector has real data *
    void *pdvec;      /* a void pointer to struct dvec *d, the 
                         actual vector *
    void *pdvecscale; /* a void pointer to struct dvec *ds, 
                         the scale vector *
} vecinfo, *pvecinfo;

vecinfoall

typedef struct vecinfoall 

    /* the plot *
    char *name; 
    char *title; 
    char *date; 
    char *type; 
    int veccount; 
 
    /* the data as an array of vecinfo with 
       length equal to the number of vectors 
       in the plot *
    pvecinfo *vecs; 
 
} vecinfoall, *pvecinfoall;

The next two structures are used by the callback function SendData (see 19.3.3.4). Each time a new data point (e.g. time value and simulation output value(s)) is added to the vector structure of the current plot, the function SendData is called by ngspice, among its parameters the actual pointer pvecvaluesall, which contains an array of pointers to pvecvalues, one for each vector.

vecvalues

typedef struct vecvalues { 
    char* name;      /* name of a specific vector *
    double creal;    /* actual data value *
    double cimag;    /* actual data value *
    bool is_scale;   /* if ’name’ is the scale vector *
    bool is_complex; /* if the data are complex numbers *
} vecvalues, *pvecvalues;

Pointer vecvaluesall to be found as parameter to callback function SendData.

vecvaluesall

typedef struct vecvaluesall { 
    int veccount;      /* number of vectors in plot *
    int vecindex;      /* index of actual set of vectors, i.e. 
                          the number of accepted data points *
    pvecvalues *vecsa; /* values of actual set of vectors, 
                          indexed from 0 to veccount - 1 *
} vecvaluesall, *pvecvaluesall;

19.3.2 Exported functions

The functions listed in this chapter are the (only) symbols exported by the shared library.

19.3.2.1 int ngSpice_Init(SendChar*, SendStat*, ControlledExit*, SendData*, SendInitData*, BGThreadRunning*, void)

After caller has loaded ngspice.dll, the simulator has to be initialized by calling ngSpice_Init(...). Address pointers of several callback functions (see 19.3.3), which are to be defined in the caller, are sent to ngspice.dll. The int return value is not used.

Pointers to callback functions (details see 19.3.3):

SendChar*
callback function for reading printf, fprintf, fputs (NULL allowed)
SendStat*
callback function for reading status string and percent value (NULL allowed)
ControlledExit*
callback function for transferring a flag to caller, generated by ngspice upon a call to function controlled_exit. May be used by caller to detach ngspice.dll, if dynamically loaded or to try any other recovery method, or to exit. (required)
SendData*
callback function for sending an array of structs containing data values of all vectors in the current plot (simulation output) (NULL allowed)
SendInitData*
callback function for sending an array of structs containing info on all vectors in the current plot (immediately before simulation starts) (NULL allowed)
BGThreadRunning*
callback function for sending a boolean signal (true if thread is running) (NULL allowed)
void*
Using the void pointer, you may send the object address of the calling function (’self’ or ’this’ pointer) to ngspice.dll. This pointer will be returned unmodified by any callback function (see the *void pointers in chapter 19.3.3). Callback functions are to be defined in the global section of the caller. Because they now have got the object address of the calling function, they may direct their actions to the calling object.

19.3.2.2 int ngSpice_Init_Sync(GetVSRCData* , GetISRCData* , GetSyncData* , int*, void*)

see chapt. 19.6.

19.3.2.3 int ngSpice_Command(char*)

Send a valid command (see the control or interactive commands) from caller to ngspice.dll. Will be executed immediately (as if in interactive mode). Some commands are rejected (e.g. ’plot’, because there is no graphics interface). Command ’quit’ will remove internal data, and then send a notice to caller via ngexit(). The function returns a ’1’ upon error, otherwise ’0’.

19.3.2.4 bool ngSpice_running (void)

Checks if ngspice is running in its background thread (returning ’true’).

19.3.2.5 pvector_info ngGet_Vec_Info(char*)

uses the name of a vector (may be in the form ’vectorname’ or <plotname>.vectorname) as parameter and returns a pointer to a vector_info struct. The caller may then directly assess the vector data (but better should not modify them).

19.3.2.6 int ngSpice_Circ(char**)

sends an array of null-terminated char* to ngspice.dll. Each char* contains a single line of a circuit (Each line is like it is found in an input file *.sp.). The last entry to char** has to be NULL. Upon receiving the array, ngspice.dll will immediately parse the input and set up the circuit structure (as if the circuit is loaded from a file by the ’source’ command). The function returns a ’1’ upon error, otherwise ’0’.

19.3.2.7 char* ngSpice_CurPlot(void)

returns to the caller a pointer to the name of the current plot. For a definition of the term ’plot’ see chapt. 17.3.

19.3.2.8 char** ngSpice_AllPlots(void)

returns to the caller a pointer to an array of all plots (listed by their typename).

19.3.2.9 char** ngSpice_AllVecs(char*)

returns to the caller a pointer to an array of all vector names in the plot named by the string in the argument.

19.3.2.10 bool ngSpice_SetBkpt(double)

see chapt. 19.6.

19.3.3 Callback functions

Callback functions are a means to return data from ngspice to the caller. These functions are defined as global functions in the caller, so to be reachable by the C-coded ngspice. They are declared according to the typedefs given below. ngspice receives their addresses from the caller upon initialization with the ngSpice_Init(...) function (see 19.3.2.1). If the caller will not make use of a callback, it may send NULL instead of the address (except for ControlledExit, which is always required).

If ngspice is run in the background thread (19.4.2), the callback functions (defined in the caller) also are called from within that thread. One has to be carefully judging how this behavior might influence the caller, where now you have the primary and the background thread running in parallel. So make the callback function thread safe. The integer identification number is only used if you run several shared libraries in parallel (see chapt. 19.6). Three additional callback function are described in chapt. 19.6.3.

19.3.3.1 typedef int (SendChar)(char*, int, void*)
char*
string to be sent to caller output
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib (default is 0, see chapt. 19.6)
void*
return pointer received from caller during initialization, e.g. pointer to object having sent the request

Sending output from stdout, stderr to caller. ngspice printf, fprintf, fputs, fputc functions are redirected to this function. The char* string is generated by assembling the print outputs of the above mentioned functions according to the following rules: The string commences with "stdout ", if directed to stdout by ngspice (with "stderr " respectively); all tokens are assembled in sequence, taking the printf format specifiers into account, until ’\n’ is hit. If ’set addescape’ is given in .spiceinit, the escape character \ is added to any character from $[]\" found in the string.

Each callback function has a void pointer as the last parameter. This is useful in object oriented programming. You may have sent the this (or self) pointer of the caller’s class object to ngspice.dll during calling ngSpice_Init (19.3.2.1). The pointer is returned unmodified by each callback, so the callback function may identify the class object which has initialized ngspice.dll.

19.3.3.2 typedef int (SendStat)(char*, int, void*)
char*
simulation status and value (in percent) to be sent to caller
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib (default is 0, see chapt. 19.6)
void*
return pointer received from caller

sending simulation status to caller, e.g. the string ’tran 34.5%’.

19.3.3.3 typedef int (ControlledExit)(int, bool, bool, int, void*)
int
exit status
bool
if true: immediate unloading dll, if false: just set flag, unload is done when function has returned
bool
if true: exit upon ’quit’, if false: exit due to ngspice.dll error
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib (default is 0, see chapt. 19.6)
void*
return pointer received from caller

asking for a reaction after controlled exit.

19.3.3.4 typedef int (SendData)(pvecvaluesall, int, int, void*
vecvaluesall*
pointer to array of structs containing actual values from all vectors
int
number of structs (one per vector)
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib (default is 0, see chapt. 19.6)
void*
return pointer received from caller

send back actual vector data.

19.3.3.5 typedef int (SendInitData)(pvecinfoall, int, void*)
vecinfoall*
pointer to array of structs containing data from all vectors right after initialization
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib (default is 0, see chapt. 19.6)
void*
return pointer received from caller

send back initialization vector data.

19.3.3.6 typedef int (BGThreadRunning)(bool, int, void*)
bool
true if background thread is running
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib (default is 0, see chapt. 19.6)
void*
return pointer received from caller

indicate if background thread is running

19.4 General remarks on using the API

19.4.1 Loading a netlist

Basically the input to shared ngspice is the same as if you would start a ngspice batch job, e.g. you enter a netlist and the simulation command (any .dot analysis command like .tran, .op, or .dc etc. as found in chapt. 15.3), as well as suitable options.

Typically you should not include a .control section in your input file. Any script described in a .control section for standard ngspice should better be emulated by the caller and be sent directly to ngspice.dll. Start the simulation according to chapt. 19.4.2 in an extra thread.

As an alternative, only the netlist has to be entered (without analysis command), then you may use any interactive command as listed in chapt. 17.5 (except for the plot command).

The “typical usage” examples given below are excerpted from a caller written in C.

19.4.1.1 Loading from file

As with interactive ngspice, you may use the ngspice internal command source (17.5.68) to load a complete netlist from a file.

Typical usage:

ngSpice_Command("source ../examples/adder_mos.cir");

19.4.1.2 Loading line by line

As with interactive ngspice, you may use the ngspice internal command circbyline (17.5.10) to send a netlist line by line to the ngspice circuit parser.

Typical usage:

ngSpice_Command("circbyline fail test"); 
ngSpice_Command("circbyline V1 1 0 1"); 
ngSpice_Command("circbyline R1 1 0 1"); 
ngSpice_Command("circbyline .dc V1 0 1 0.1"); 
ngSpice_Command("circbyline .end");

The first line is a title line, which will be ignored during circuit parsing. As soon as the line “.end” has been sent to ngspice, circuit parsing commences.

19.4.1.3 Loading as a string array

Typical usage:

circarray = (char**)malloc(sizeof(char** 7); 
circarray[0] = strdup("test array"); 
circarray[1] = strdup("V1 1 0 1"); 
circarray[2] = strdup("R1 1 2 1"); 
circarray[3] = strdup("C1 2 0 1 ic=0"); 
circarray[4] = strdup(".tran 10u 3 uic"); 
circarray[5] = strdup(".end"); 
circarray[6] = NULL; 
ngSpice_Circ(circarray);

An array of char pointers is malloc’d, each netlist line is then copied to the array. strdup will care for the memory allocation. The first entry to the array is a title line, the last entry has to contain NULL. ngSpice_Circ(circarray); sends the array to ngspice, where circuit parsing is started immediately. Don’t forget to free the array after sending it, to avoid a memory leak.

19.4.2 Running the simulation

The following commands are used to start the simulator in its own thread, halt the simulation and resume it again. The extra (background) thread enables the caller to continue with other tasks in the main thread, e.g. watching its own event loop. Of course you have to take care that the caller will not exit before ngspice is finished, otherwise you immediately will loose all data. After having halted the simulator by suspending the background thread, you may assess data, change ngspice parameters, or read output data using the caller’s main thread, before you resume simulation using a background thread again. While the background thread is running, ngspice will reject any other command sent by ngSpice_Command.

Typical usage:

ngSpice_Command("bg_run"); 
... 
ngSpice_Command("bg_halt"); 
... 
ngSpice_Command("bg_resume");

Basically you may send the commands ’run’ or ’resume’ (no prefix bg_), starting ngspice within the main thread. The caller then has to wait until ngspice returns from simulation. A command ’halt’ is not available then.

After simulation is finished (test with callback 19.3.3.6), you may send other commands from chapt. 17.5, emulating any .control script. These commands are executed in the main thread, which should be o.k., because execution time is typically short.

19.4.3 Accessing data

19.4.3.1 Synchronous access

The callback functions SendInitData (19.3.3.5) and SendData (19.3.3.4) allow access to simulator output data synchronized with the simulation progress.

Each time a new plot is generated during simulation, e.g. when a sequence of op, ac and tran is used or commands like linearize or fft are invoked, the callback SendInitData is called by ngspice. Immediately after setting up the vector structure of the new plot, the function is called once. Its parameter is a pointer to the structure vecinfoall (19.3.1), which contains an array of structures vecinfo, one for each vector in the actual plot. You may simply use vecname to get the name of any vector. This time the vectors are still empty, but pointers to the vector structure are available.

Each time a new data point (e.g. time value and simulation output value(s)) is added to the vector structure of the current plot, the function SendData is called by ngspice. This allows you to immediately access the simulation output synchronized with the simulation time, e.g. to interface it to a runtime plot or to use it for some controlled simulation by stopping the simulation based on a condition, altering parameters and resume the simulation. SendData returns a structure vecvaluesall as parameter, which contains an array of structures vecvalues, one for each vector.

Some code to demonstrate the callback function usage is referenced below (19.5).

19.4.3.2 Asynchronous access

During simulation, while the background thread is running, or after it is finished, you may use the functions ngSpice_CurPlot (19.3.2.7), ngSpice_AllPlots (19.3.2.8), ngSpice_AllVecs (19.3.2.9) to retrieve information about vectors available, and function ngGet_Vec_Info (19.3.2.5) to obtain data from a vector and its corresponding scale vector. The timing of the caller and the simulation progress are independent from each other and not synchronized.

Again some code to demonstrate the callback function usage is referenced below (19.5).

19.4.4 Altering model or device parameters

After halting ngspice by stopping the background thread (19.4.2), nearly all ngspice commands are available. Especially alter (17.5.3) and altermod (17.5.4) may be used to change device or model parameters. After the modification, the simulation may be resumed immediately. Changes to a circuit netlist, however, are not possible. You would need to load a complete new netlist (19.4.1) and restart the simulation from the beginning.

19.4.5 Output

After the simulation is finished, use the ngspice commands write (17.5.86) or wrdata (17.5.85) to output data to a file as usual, use the print command (17.5.45) to retrieve data via callback SendChar (19.3.3.1), or refer to accessing the data as described in chapter 19.4.3.

Typical usage:

ngSpice_Command("write testout.raw V(2)"); 
ngSpice_Command("print V(2)");

19.4.6 Error handling

There are several occasions where standard ngspice suffers from an error, cannot recover internally and then exits. If this is happening to the shared module this would mean that the parent application, the caller, is also forced to exit. Therefore (if not suffering form a seg fault) ngspice.dll will call the function ’controlled_exit’ as usual, this now calls the callback function ’ControlledExit’ (19.3.3.3), which hands over the request for exiting to the caller. The caller now has the task to handle the exit code for ngspice.

If ngspice has been linked at runtime by dlopen/LoadLibrary (see 19.2.2), the callback may close all threads, and then detach ngspice.dll by invoking dlclose/FreeLibrary. The caller may then restart ngspice by another loading and initialization (19.3.2.1).

If ngspice is included during linking the caller (see 19.2.1), there is not yet a good and general solution to error handling, if the error is non-recoverable from inside ngspice.

19.5 Example applications

Three executables (coming with source code) serve as examples for controlling ngspice. These are not meant to be "productive" programs, but just give some commented example usages of the interface.

ng_start.exe is a MS Windows application loading ngspice.dll dynamically. All functions and callbacks of the interface are assessed. The source code, generated with Turbo Delphi 2006, may be found here, the binaries compiled for 32 Bit are here.

Two console applications, compilable with LINUX, CYGWIN, MINGW or MS Visual Studio, are available here, demonstrating either linking upon start-up or loading shared ngspice dynamically at runtime. A simple feedback loop is shown in tests 3 and 4, where a device parameter is changed upon having an output vector value crossing a limit.

19.6 ngspice parallel

The following chapter describes an offer to the advanced user and developer community. If you are interested in evaluating the parallel and synchronized operation of several ngspice instances, this may be one way to go. However, no ready to use implementation is available. You will find a toolbox and some hints how to use it. Parallelization and synchronization is your task by developing a suitable caller! And of course another major input has to come from partitioning the circuit into suitable, loosely coupled pieces, each with its own netlist, one netlist per ngspice instance. And you have to define the coupling between the circuit blocks. Both are not provided by ngspice, but are again your responsibility. Both are under active research, and the toolbox described below is an offer to join that research.

19.6.1 Go parallel!

A simple way to run several invocations of ngspice in parallel for transient simulation is to define a caller which loads two or more ngspice shared libraries. There is one prerequisite however to do so: the shared libraries have to have different names. So compile ngspice shared lib (see 19.1), then copy and rename the library file, e.g. ngspice.dll may become ngspice1.dll, ngspice2.dll etc. Then dynamically load ngspice1.dll, retrieve its address, initialize it by calling ngSpice_init() (see 19.3.2.1), then continue initialization by calling ngSpice_init_Sync() (see 19.6.2.1). An integer identification number may be sent during this step to later uniquely identify each invocation of the shared library, e.g. by having any callback use this identifier. Repeat the sequence with ngspice2.dll and so on.

Inter-process communication and synchronization is now done by using three callback functions. To understand their interdependency, it might be useful to have a look at the transient simulation sequence as defined in the ngspice source file dctran.c. The following listing includes the shared library option (It differs somewhat from standard procedure.) and disregards XSPICE.

  1. initialization.
  2. calculation of operating point.
  3. next time step: set new breakpoints (VSRC, ISRC, TRA, LTRA).
  4. send simulation data to output, callback function SendData* datfcn.
  5. check for autostop and other end conditions.
  6. check for interrupting simulation (e.g. by bg_halt).
  7. breakpoint handling (e.g. enforce breakpoint, set new small cktdelta if directly after the breakpoint).
  8. calling ngspice internal function sharedsync() which calls callback function GetSyncData* getsync with location flag loc = 0.
  9. save the previous states.
  10. start endless loop.
  11. save cktdelta to olddelta, set new time point by adding cktdelta to ckttime.
  12. new iteration of circuit at new time point, which uses callback functions GetVSRCData* getvdat and GetISRCData* getidat to retrieve external voltage or current inputs, returns redostep=0, if converged, redostep=1 if not converged.
  13. if not converged, divide cktdelta by 8.
  14. check for truncation error with all non-linear devices, if necessary create a new (smaller) cktdelta to limit the error, optionally change integration order.
  15. calling ngspice internal function sharedsync() which calls callback function GetSyncData* getsync with location flag loc = 1: as a result either goto 3 (next time step) or to 10 (loop start), depending on ngspice and user data, see next paragraph.

The code of the synchronization procedure is handled in the ngspice internal function sharedsync() and its companion user defined callback function GetSyncData* getsync. The actual setup is as follows:

If no synchronization is asked for (GetSyncData* set to NULL), program control jumps to ’next time step’ (3) if redostep==0, or subtracts olddelta from ckttime and jumps to ’loop start’ (9) if redostep <> 0. This is the standard ngspice behavior.

If GetSyncData* has been set to a valid address by ngSpice_Init_Sync(), the callback function getsync is involved. If redostep <> 0, olddelta is subtracted from ckttime, getsync is called, either the cktdelta time suggested by ngspice is kept or the user provides his own deltatime, and the program execution jumps to (9) for redoing the last step with the new deltatime. The return value of getsync is not used. If redostep == 0, getsync is called. The user may keep the deltatime suggested by ngspice or define a new value. If the user sets the return value of getsync to 0, the program execution then jumps to ’next time step’ (3). If the return value of getsync is 1, olddelta is subtracted from ckttime, and the program execution jumps to (9) for redoing the last step with the new deltatime. Typically the user provided deltatime should be smaller than the value suggested by ngspice.

19.6.2 Additional exported functions

The following functions (exported or callback) are designed to support the parallel action of several ngspice invocations. They may be useful, however, also when only a single library is loaded into a caller, if you want to use external voltage or current sources or ’play’ with the advancing simulation time.

19.6.2.1 int ngSpice_Init_Sync(GetVSRCData* , GetISRCData* , GetSyncData* , int*, void*)

Pointers to callback functions (details see 19.3.3):

GetVSRCData*
callback function for retrieving a voltage source value from caller (NULL allowed)
GetISRCData*
callback function for retrieving a current source value from caller (NULL allowed)
GetSyncData*
callback function for synchronization (NULL allowed)

More pointers

int*
pointer to integer unique to this shared library (defaults to 0)
void*
pointer to user-defined data, will not be modified, but handed over back to caller during Callback, e.g. address of calling object. If NULL is sent here, userdata info from ngSpice_Init() will be kept, otherwise userdata will be overridden by new value from here.

19.6.2.2 bool ngSpice_SetBkpt(double)

Sets a breakpoint in ngspice, a time point which the simulator is enforced to hit during the transient simulation. After the breakpoint time has been hit, the next delta time starts with a small value and is ramped up again. A breakpoint should be set only when the background thread in ngspice is not running (before the simulation has started, or after the simulation has been paused by bg_halt). The time sent to ngspice should be larger than the current time (which is either 0 before start or given by the callback GetSyncData (19.6.3.3). Several breakpoints may be set.

19.6.3 Additional callback functions

19.6.3.1 typedef int (GetVSRCData)(double*, double, char*, int, void*)
double*
return voltage value
double
actual time
char*
node name
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib
void*
return pointer received from caller

Ask for a VSRC EXTERNAL voltage value. The independent voltage source (see chapt. 4.1) with EXTERNAL option allows to set a voltage value to the node defined in the netlist and named here at the time returned by the simulator.

19.6.3.2 typedef int (GetISRCData)(double*, double, char*, int, void*)
double*
return current value
double
actual time
char*
node name
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib
void*
return pointer received from caller

Ask for ISRC EXTERNAL value. The independent current source (see chapt. 4.1) with EXTERNAL option allows to set a current value to the node defined by the netlist and named here at the time returned by the simulator.

19.6.3.3 typedef int (GetSyncData)(double, double*, double, int, void*)
double
actual time (ckt->CKTtime)
double*
delta time (ckt->CKTdelta)
double
old delta time (olddelta)
int
identification number of calling ngspice shared lib
int
location of call for synchronization in dctran.c
void*
return pointer received from caller

Ask for new delta time depending on synchronization requirements. See 19.6.1 for an explanation.

19.6.4 Parallel ngspice example

A first example is available as a compacted 7z archive. It contains the source code of a controlling application, as well as its compiled executable and ngspice.dll (for MS Windows). As the input circuit an inverter chain has been divided into three parts. Three ngspice shared libraries are loaded, each simulates one partition of the circuit. Interconnections between the partitions are provided via a callback function. The simulation time is synchronized among the three ngspice invocations by another callback function.

Chapter 20
TCLspice

Spice historically comes as a simulation engine with a Command Line Interface. Spice engine now can be used with friendly Graphical User Interfaces. Tclspice represent a third approach to interfacing ngspice simulation functionality. Tclspice is nothing more than a new way of compiling and using spice source code Spice is no longer considered as a standalone program but as a library invoked by a TCL interpreter. It either permits direct simulation in a friendly TCL shell (this is quite analogous to the command line interface of ngspice), or it permits the elaboration of more complex, more specific, or more user friendly simulation programs, by writing TCL scripts.

20.1 tclspice framework

The technical difference between the ngspice CLI interface and tclspice is that the CLI interface is compiled as a standalone program, whereas tclspice is a shared object. Tclspice is designed to work with tools that expand the capabilities of ngspice: TCL for the scripting and programming language interface and BLT for data processing and display. This two tools give tclspice all of its relevance, with the insurance that the functionality is maintained by competent people.

Making tclspice (see 20.6) produces two files: libspice.so and pkgIndex.tcl. libspice.so is the executable binary that the TCL interpreter calls to handle spice commands. pkgIndex.tcl take place in the TCL directory tree, providing the spice package1 to the TCL user.

BLT is a TCL package. It is quite well documented. It permits to handle mathematical vector data structure for calculus and display, in a Tk interpreter like wish.

20.2 tclspice documentation

A detailed documentation on tclspice commands is available on the original tclspice web page.

20.3 spicetoblt

Tclspice opens its doors to TCL and BLT with a single specific command spicetoblt.

TCLspice gets its identity in the command spice::vectoblt This command copies data computed by the simulation engine into a tcl variable. vectoblt is composed of three words: vec, to and blt. Vec means spice vector data. To is the English preposition, and blt is a useful tcl package providing a vector data structure. Example:

blt::vector create Iex 
spice::vectoblt Vex#branch Iex

Here an empty blt vector is created. It is then filled with the vector representation of the current flowing out of source Vex. Vex#branch is native spices syntax. Iex is the name of the BLT vector.

The reverse operation is handled by native spice commands, such as alter, let and set.

20.4 Running TCLspice

TCLspice consists of a library or a package to include in your tcl console or script:

load /somepath/libspice.so 
package require spice

Then you can execute any native spice command by preceding it with spice:: For example if you want to source the testCapa.cir netlist, type the following:

spice::source testCapa.cir 
spice::spicetoblt example...

Plotting data is not a matter of spice, but of tcl. Once the data is stored in a blt vector, it can be plotted. Example:

blt::graph .cimvd -title "Cim = f(Vd)" 
pack .cimvd 
.cimvd element create line1 -xdata Vcmd -ydata Cim

With blt::graph a plotting structure is allocated in memory. With pack it is placed into the output window, and becomes visible. The last command, and not the least, plots the function Cim = f(Vcmd), where Cim and Vcmd are two BLT vectors.

20.5 examples

20.5.1 Active capacitor measurement

In this crude implementation of a circuit described by Marc KODRNJA, in his PhD thesis that I found on the Internet. This simulation outputs a graph representing the virtual capacitance versus the command voltage. The function C = f(V ) is calculated point by point. For each control voltage value, the virtual capacitance is calculated with the voltage and intensity across the output port in a frequency simulation. A control value that should be as close to zero as possible is calculated to assess simulation success.

20.5.1.1 Invocation:

This script can be invoked by typing wish testbench1.tcl

20.5.1.2 testbench1.tcl

This line loads the simulator capabilities

package require spice

This is a comment (Quite useful if you intend to live with other Human beings)

# Test of virtual capacitore circuit 
# Vary the control voltage and log the resulting capacitance

A good example of the calling of a spice command: precede it with spice::

spice::source "testCapa.cir"

This reminds that any regular TCL command is of course possible

set n 30 set dv 0.2 
set vmax [expr $dv/2] 
set vmin [expr -* $dv/2] 
set pas [expr $dv/ $n]

BLT vector is the structure used to manipulate data. Instantiate the vectors

blt::vector create Ctmp 
blt::vector create Cim 
blt::vector create check 
blt::vector create Vcmd

Data is, in my coding style, plotted into graph objects. Instantiate the graph

blt::graph .cimvd -title "Cim = f(Vd)" 
blt::graph .checkvd -title "Rim = f(Vd)" 
blt::vector create Iex 
blt::vector create freq 
blt::graph .freqanal -title "Analyse frequentielle" 

# First simulation: A simple AC plot 

set v [expr {$vmin + $n * $pas / 4}] 
spice::alter vd = $v 
spice::op 
spice::ac dec 10 100 100k

Retrieve a the intensity of the current across Vex source

spice::vectoblt {Vex#branch} Iex

Retrieve the frequency at which the current have been assessed

spice::vectoblt {frequency} freq

Room the graph in the display window

pack .freqanal

Plot the function Iex =f(V)

.freqanal element create line1 -xdata freq -ydata Iex 

# Second simulation: Capacitance versus voltage control 
# for {set i 0} {[expr $n - $i]} {incr i } 
#     { set v [expr {$vmin + $i * $pas}] 
spice::alter vd = $v 
spice::op spice::ac dec 10 100 100k

Image capacitance is calculated by spice, instead of TCL there is no objective reason

spice::let Cim = real(mean(Vex#branch/(2*Pi*i*frequency*(V(5)-V(6))))) 
spice::vectoblt Cim Ctmp

Build function vector point by point

Cim append $Ctmp(0:end)

Build a control vector to check simulation success

spice::let err = real(mean(sqrt((Vex#branch- 
        (2*Pi*i*frequency*Cim*V(5)-V(6)))^2))) 
spice::vectoblt err Ctmp check 
append $Ctmp(0:end)

Build abscissa vector

FALTA ALGO... Vcmd append $v }

Plot

pack .cimvd 
.cimvd element create line1 -xdata Vcmd -ydata Cim 
pack .checkvd 
.checkvd element create line1 -xdata Vcmd -ydata check

20.5.2 Optimization of a linearization circuit for a Thermistor

This example is both the first and the last optimization program I wrote for an electronic circuit. It is far from perfect.

The temperature response of a CTN is exponential. It is thus nonlinear. In a battery charger application floating voltage varies linearly with temperature. A TL431 voltage reference sees its output voltage controlled by two resistors (r10, r12) and a thermistor (r11). The simulation is run at a given temperature. The thermistor is modeled in spice by a regular resistor. Its resistivity is assessed by the TCL script. It is set with a spice::alter command before running the simulation. This script uses an iterative optimization approach to try to converge to a set of two resistor values which minimizes the error between the expected floating voltage and the TL431 output.

20.5.2.1 Invocation:

This script can be executed by the user by simply executing the file in a terminal.

./testbench3.tcl

Two issues are important to point out2 :

20.5.2.2 testbench3.tcl

This calls the shell sh who then runs wish with the file itself.

#!/bin/sh 
# WishFix \ 
exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"} 


#

Regular package for simulation

package require spice

Here the important line is source differentiate.tcl which contains optimization library

source differentiate.tcl

Generates a temperature vector

proc temperatures_calc {temp_inf temp_sup points} { 
set tstep [ expr " ( $temp_sup - $temp_inf ) / $points " ] 
set t $temp_inf 
set temperatures "" 
for { set i 0 } { $i < $points } { incr i } { 
set t [ expr { $t + $tstep } ] 
set temperatures "$temperatures $t" 

return $temperatures }

generates thermistor resistivity as a vector, typically run: thermistance_calc res B [ temperatures_calc temp_inf temp_sup points ]

proc thermistance_calc { res B points } { 
set tzero 273.15 
set tref 25 
set thermistance "" 
foreach t $points { 
set res_temp [expr " $res * exp ( $B * ( 1 / ($tzero + $t) - 1 / ( $tzero + $tref ) ) ) " ] 
set thermistance "$thermistance $res_temp" 

return $thermistance }

generates the expected floating value as a vector, typically run: tref_calc res B [ temperatures_calc temp_inf temp_sup points ]

proc tref_calc { points } { 
set tref "" 
foreach t $points { 
set tref " $tref [ expr " 6 * (2.275-0.005*($t - 20) ) - 9" ] " 

return $tref }

In the optimization algorithm, this function computes the effective floating voltage at the given temperature.

### NOTE: 
### As component values are modified by a spice::alter Component values can be considered as global variable. 
### R10 and R12 are not passed to iteration function because it is expected to be correct, ie to have been modified soon before proc iteration { t } { set tzero 273.15 spice::alter r11 = [ thermistance_calc 10000 3900 $t ] 
# Temperature simulation often crashes. Comment it out... 
#spice::set temp = [ expr " $tzero + $t " ] 
spice::op 
spice::vectoblt vref_temp tref_tmp 
###NOTE: 
###As the library is executed once for the whole script execution, it is important to manage the memory 
###and regularly destroy unused data set. The data computed here will not be reused. Clean it 
spice::destroy all return [ tref_tmp range 0 0 ] }

This is the cost function optimization algorithm will try to minimize. It is a 2-norm (Euclidean norm) of the error across the temperature range [-25:75]°C.

proc cost { r10 r12 } { 
tref_blt length 0 
spice::alter r10 = $r10 
spice::alter r12 = $r12 
foreach point [ temperatures_blt range 0 [ expr " [temperatures_blt length ] - 1" ] ] { 
tref_blt append [ iteration $point ] 

set result [ blt::vector expr " 1000 * sum(( tref_blt - expected_blt )^2 )" ] 
disp_curve $r10 $r12 
return $result }

This function displays the expected and effective value of the voltage, as well as the r10 and r12 resistor values

proc disp_curve { r10 r12 } { .g configure -title "Valeurs optimales: R10 = $r10 R12 = $r12" }

Main loop starts here


# Optimization 
# blt::vector create tref_tmp 
blt::vector create tref_blt 
blt::vector create expected_blt 
blt::vector create temperatures_blt temperatures_blt 
append [ temperatures_calc -25 75 30 ] expected_blt 
append [ tref_calc [temperatures_blt range 0 [ expr " [ temperatures_blt length ] - 1" ] ] ] 
blt::graph .g 
pack .g -side top -fill both -expand true 
.g element create real -pixels 4 -xdata temperatures_blt -ydata tref_blt 
.g element create expected -fill red -pixels 0 -dashes dot -xdata temperatures_blt -ydata expected_blt

Source the circuit and optimize it, result is retrieved in r10r12 variable and affected to r10 and r12 with a regular expression. A bit ugly.

spice::source FB14.cir 
set r10r12 [ ::math::optimize::minimumSteepestDescent cost { 10000 10000 } 0.1 50 ] 
regexp {([0-9.]*) ([0-9.]*)} $r10r12 r10r12 r10 r12

Outputs optimization result


# Results 
# spice::alter r10 = $r10 
spice::alter r12 = $r12 
foreach point [ temperatures_blt range 0 [ expr " [temperatures_blt length ] - 1" ] ] { 
tref_blt append [ iteration $point ] 

disp_curve $r10 $r12

20.5.3 Progressive display

This example is quite simple but it is very interesting. It displays a transient simulation result on the fly. You may now be familiar with most of the lines of this script. It uses the ability of BLT objects to automatically update. When the vector data is modified, the strip-chart display is modified accordingly.

20.5.3.1 testbench2.tcl
#!/bin/sh 
# WishFix \ 
  exec wish -f "$0" ${1+"$@"} 
### 
package require BLT package require spice

this avoids to type blt:: before the blt class commands

namespace import blt::* 
wm title . "Vector Test script" 
wm geometry . 800x600+40+40 pack propagate . false

A strip chart with labels but without data is created and displayed (packed)

stripchart .chart 
pack .chart -side top -fill both -expand true 
.chart axis configure x -title "Time" spice::source example.cir 
spice::bg 
run after 1000 vector 
create a0 vector 
create b0 vectorry 
create a1 vector 
create b1 vector 
create stime 
proc bltupdate {} { 
puts [spice::spice_data] 
spice::spicetoblt a0 a0 
spice::spicetoblt b0 b0 
spice::spicetoblt a1 a1 
spice::spicetoblt b1 b1 
spice::spicetoblt time stime 
after 100 bltupdate } 
bltupdate .chart element create a0 -color red -xdata stime -ydata a0 
.chart element create b0 -color blue -xdata stime -ydata b0 
.chart element create a1 -color yellow -xdata stime -ydata a1 
.chart element create b1 -color black -xdata stime -ydata b1

20.6 Compiling

20.6.1 LINUX

Get tcl8.4 from your distribution. You will need the blt plotting package (compatible to the old tcl 8.4 only) from here. See also the actual blt wiki.

./configure --with-tcl ..

make

sudo make install

20.6.2 MS Windows

Can be done, but is tedious. I will describe my procedure on Windows 7, 64 Bit Home Edition.

20.6.2.1 Downloads

download tcl8.6b2-src.zip from http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/download.html

download tk8.6b2-src.zip

download blt from http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/experimental/blt2.4z.7z

expand all to d:\software

20.6.2.2 Tcl

double click on D:\software\tcl8.6b2\win\tcl.dsw

convert to MS visual Studio 2008 project

select release or debug

create tcl as tcl86t.dll.

20.6.2.3 Tk

edit D:\software\tk8.6b2\win\buildall.vc.bat

line 31 to

call "C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 9.0\VC\vcvarsall.bat"

line 53 to

if "%TCLDIR%" == "" set TCLDIR=..\..\tcl8.6b2

open cmd window

cd to

d:\software\tk8.6b2\win>

then

d:\software\tk8.6b2\win> buildall.vc.bat debug

tk will be made as tk86t.dll, in addition wish86t.exe is generated.

20.6.2.4 blt

blt sorce files have been downloaded from the blt web page and modified for compatibility with TCL8.6. To facilitate making blt24.dll, the modified source code is available as a 7z compressed file, including a project file for MS Visual Studio 2008.

20.6.2.5 tclspice

ngspice is compiled and linked into a dll called spice.dll which may be loaded by wish86t.exe. MS Visual Studio 2008 is the compiler applied. A project file may be downloaded as a 7z compressed file. Expand this file in the ngspice main directory. The links to tcl and tk are hard-coded, so both have to be installed in the places described above (d:\software\...). spice.dll may be generated in Debug, Release or ReleaseOMP mode.

20.7 MS Windows 32 Bit binaries

You may download the compiled binaries, including tcl, tk, blt and tclspice, plus the examples, slightly modified, from http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/experimental/tclspice-25.7z.

Chapter 21
Example Circuits

This section starts with an ngspice example to walk you through the basic features of ngspice using its command line user interface. The operation of ngspice will be illustrated through several examples (chapters 20.1 to 20.7).

The first example uses the simple one-transistor amplifier circuit illustrated in Figure 21.1.


PIC

Figure 21.1: Transistor Amplifier Simulation Example


This circuit is constructed entirely with ngspice compatible devices and is used to introduce basic concepts, including:

The remainder of the section (from chapter 21.2 onwards) lists several circuits, which have been accompanying any ngspice distribution, and may be regarded as the “classical” SPICE circuits.

21.1 AC coupled transistor amplifier

The circuit shown in Figure 21.1 is a simple one-transistor amplifier. The input signal is amplified with a gain of approximately -(Rc/Re) = -(3.9K/1K) = -3.9. The circuit description file for this example is shown below.

Example:

A Berkeley SPICE3 compatible circuit 
* 
* This circuit contains only Berkeley SPICE3 components. 
* 
* The circuit is an AC coupled transistor amplifier with 
* a sinewave input at node "1", a gain of approximately -3.9, 
* and output on node "coll". 
* 
.tran 1e-5 2e-
* 
vcc vcc 0 12.0 
vin 1 0 0.0 ac 1.0 sin(0 1 1k) 
ccouple 1 base 10uF 
rbias1 vcc base 100k 
rbias2 base 0 24k 
q1 coll base emit generic 
rcollector vcc coll 3.9k 
remitter emit 0 1k 
* 
.model generic npn 
* 
.end

To simulate this circuit, move into a directory under your user account and copy the file xspice_c1.cir from directory /examples/xspice/. This file stems from the original XSPICE introduction, therefore its name, but you do not need installing the XSPICE option to run it.

$ cp /examples/xspice/xspice_c1.cir xspice_c1.cir

Now invoke the simulator on this circuit as follows:

$ ngspice xspice_c1.cir

After a few moments, you should see the ngspice prompt:

ngspice 1 ->

At this point, ngspice has read-in the circuit description and checked it for errors. If any errors had been encountered, messages describing them would have been output to your terminal. Since no messages were printed for this circuit, the syntax of the circuit description was correct.

To see the circuit description read by the simulator you can issue the following command:

ngspice 1 -> listing 

The simulator shows you the circuit description currently in memory:

a berkeley spice3 compatible circuit  

 1 : a berkeley spice3 compatible circuit        

 2 : .global gnd     

10 : .tran 1e-5 2e-3     

12 : vcc vcc 0 12.0     

13 : vin 1 0 0.0 ac 1.0 sin(0 1 1k)     

14 : ccouple 1 base 10uf     

15 : rbias1 vcc base 100k     

16 : rbias2 base 0 24k     

17 : q1 coll base emit generic     

18 : rcollector vcc coll 3.9k     

19 : remitter emit 0 1k     

21 : .model generic npn     

24 : .end

The title of this circuit is “A Berkeley SPICE3 compatible circuit”. The circuit description contains a transient analysis control command .TRAN 1E-5 2E-3 requesting a total simulated time of 2ms with a maximum time-step of 10us. The remainder of the lines in the circuit description describe the circuit of Figure 21.1.

Now, execute the simulation by entering the “run” command:

ngspice 1 -> run 

The simulator will run the simulation and when execution is completed, will return with the ngspice prompt. When the prompt returns, issue the rusage command again to see how much time and memory has been used now.

To examine the results of this transient analysis, we can use the “plot” command. First we will plot the nodes labeled “1” and “base”.

ngspice 2 -> plot v(1) base 

The simulator responds by displaying an X Window System plot similar to that shown in Figure 21.2.


PIC

Figure 21.2: node 1 and node ’base’ versus time


Notice that we have named one of the nodes in the circuit description with a number (“1”), while the others are words (“base”). This was done to illustrate ngspice’s special requirements for plotting nodes labeled with numbers. Numeric labels are allowed in ngspice for backwards compatibility with SPICE2. However, they require special treatment in some commands such as “plot”. The “plot” command is designed to allow expressions in its argument list in addition to names of results data to be plotted. For example, the expression plot (base - 1) would plot the result of subtracting 1 from the value of node “base”.

If we had desired to plot the difference between the voltage at node “base” and node “1”, we would need to enclose the node name “1” in the construction v( ) producing a command such as plot (base - v(1)).

Now, issue the following command to examine the voltages on two of the internal nodes of the transistor amplifier circuit:

ngspice 3 -> plot vcc coll emit 

The plot shown in Figure 21.3 should appear. Notice in the circuit description that the power supply voltage source and the node it is connected to both have the name "vcc". The plot command above has plotted the node voltage "vcc". However, it is also possible to plot branch currents through voltage sources in a circuit. ngspice always adds the special suffix "#branch" to voltage source names. Hence, to plot the current into the voltage source named "vcc", we would use a command such as plot vcc#branch.


PIC

Figure 21.3: VCC, Collector and Emitter Voltages


Now let’s run a simple DC simulation of this circuit and examine the bias voltages with the "print" command. One way to do this is to quit the simulator using the "quit" command, edit the input file to change the ".tran" line to ".op" (for ’operating point analysis’), re-invoke the simulator, and then issue the "run" command. However, ngspice allows analysis mode changes directly from the ngspice prompt. All that is required is to enter the control line, e.g. op (without the leading "."). ngspice will interpret the information on the line and start the new analysis run immediately, without the need to enter a new "run" command.

To run the DC simulation of the transistor amplifier, issue the following command:

ngspice 4 -> op 

After a moment the ngspice prompt returns. Now issue the "print" command to examine the emitter, base, and collector DC bias voltages.

ngspice 5 -> print emit base coll 

ngspice responds with:

emit = 1.293993e+00 base = 2.074610e+00 coll = 7.003393e+00

To run an AC analysis, enter the following command:

ngspice 6 -> ac dec 10 0.01 100 

This command runs a small-signal swept AC analysis of the circuit to compute the magnitude and phase responses. In this example, the sweep is logarithmic with "decade" scaling, 10 points per decade, and lower and upper frequencies of 0.01 Hz and 100 Hz. Since the command sweeps through a range of frequencies, the results are vectors of values and are examined with the plot command. Issue to the following command to plot the response curve at node "coll":

ngspice 7 -> plot coll 

This plot shows the AC gain from input to the collector. (Note that our input source in the circuit description "vin" contained parameters of the form "AC 1.0" designating that a unit-amplitude AC signal was applied at this point.) For plotting data from an AC analysis, ngspice chooses automatically a logarithmic scaling for the frequency (x) axis.

To produce a more traditional "Bode" gain phase plot (again with automatic logarithmic scaling on the frequency axis), we use the expression capability of the "plot" command and the built-in Nutmeg functions db( ) and ph( ):

ngspice 8 -> plot db(coll) ph(coll)

The last analysis supported by ngspice is a swept DC analysis. To perform this analysis, issue the following command:

ngspice 9 -> dc vcc 0 15 0.1 

This command sweeps the supply voltage "vcc" from 0 to 15 volts in 0.1 volt increments. To plot the results, issue the command:

ngspice 10 -> plot emit base coll 

Finally, to exit the simulator, use the "quit" command, and you will be returned to the operating system prompt.

ngspice 11 -> quit 

So long.

21.2 Differential Pair

The following deck determines the dc operating point of a simple differential pair. In addition, the ac small-signal response is computed over the frequency range 1Hz to 100MEGHz.

Example:

SIMPLE DIFFERENTIAL PAIR 
VCC 7 0 12 
VEE 8 0 -12 
VIN 1 0 AC 1 
RS1 1 2 1K 
RS2 6 0 1K 
Q1 3 2 4 MOD1 
Q2 5 6 4 MOD1 
RC1 7 3 10K 
RC2 7 5 10K 
RE 4 8 10K 
.MODEL MOD1 NPN BF=50 VAF=50 IS=1.E-12 RB=100 CJC=.5PF TF=.6NS 
.TF V(5) VIN 
.AC DEC 10 1 100MEG 
.END

21.3 MOSFET Characterization

The following deck computes the output characteristics of a MOSFET device over the range 0-10V for VDS and 0-5V for VGS.

Example:

MOS OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
.OPTIONS NODE NOPAGE 
VDS 3 0 
VGS 2 0 
M1 1 2 0 0 MOD1 L=4U W=6U AD=10P AS=10P 
* VIDS MEASURES ID, WE COULD HAVE USED VDS, BUT ID WOULD BE NEGATIVE 
VIDS 3 1 
.MODEL MOD1 NMOS VTO=-2 NSUB=1.0E15 UO=550 
.DC VDS 0 10 .5 VGS 0 5 1 
.END

21.4 RTL Inverter

The following deck determines the dc transfer curve and the transient pulse response of a simple RTL inverter. The input is a pulse from 0 to 5 Volts with delay, rise, and fall times of 2ns and a pulse width of 30ns. The transient interval is 0 to 100ns, with printing to be done every nanosecond.

Example:

SIMPLE RTL INVERTER 
VCC 4 0 5 
VIN 1 0 PULSE 0 5 2NS 2NS 2NS 30NS 
RB 1 2 10K 
Q1 3 2 0 Q1 
RC 3 4 1K 
.MODEL Q1 NPN BF 20 RB 100 TF .1NS CJC 2PF 
.DC VIN 0 5 0.1 
.TRAN 1NS 100NS 
.END

21.5 Four-Bit Binary Adder (Bipolar)

The following deck simulates a four-bit binary adder, using several subcircuits to describe various pieces of the overall circuit.

Example:

ADDER - 4 BIT ALL-NAND-GATE BINARY ADDER 
*** SUBCIRCUIT DEFINITIONS 
.SUBCKT NAND 1 2 3 4 
* NODES: INPUT(2), OUTPUT, VCC 
Q1 9 5 1 QMOD 
D1CLAMP 0 1 DMOD 
Q2 9 5 2 QMOD 
D2CLAMP 0 2 DMOD 
RB 4 5 4K 
R1 4 6 1.6K 
Q3 6 9 8 QMOD 
R2 8 0 1K 
RC 4 7 130 
Q4 7 6 10 QMOD 
DVBEDROP 10 3 DMOD 
Q5 3 8 0 QMOD 
.ENDS NAND

Continue 4 Bit adder :

.SUBCKT ONEBIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 
* NODES: INPUT(2), CARRY-IN, OUTPUT, CARRY-OUT, VCC 
X1 1 2 7 6 NAND 
X2 1 7 8 6 NAND 
X3 2 7 9 6 NAND 
X4 8 9 10 6 NAND 
X5 3 10 11 6 NAND 
X6 3 11 12 6 NAND 
X7 10 11 13 6 NAND 
X8 12 13 4 6 NAND 
X9 11 7 5 6 NAND 
.ENDS ONEBIT 
 
.SUBCKT TWOBIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
* NODES: INPUT - BIT0(2) / BIT1(2), OUTPUT - BIT0 / BIT1, 
* CARRY-IN, CARRY-OUT, VCC 
X1 1 2 7 5 10 9 ONEBIT 
X2 3 4 10 6 8 9 ONEBIT 
.ENDS TWOBIT 
 
.SUBCKT FOURBIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 
* NODES: INPUT - BIT0(2) / BIT1(2) / BIT2(2) / BIT3(2), 
* OUTPUT - BIT0 / BIT1 / BIT2 / BIT3, CARRY-IN, CARRY-OUT, VCC 
X1 1 2 3 4 9 10 13 16 15 TWOBIT 
X2 5 6 7 8 11 12 16 14 15 TWOBIT 
.ENDS FOURBIT 
 
*** DEFINE NOMINAL CIRCUIT 
.MODEL DMOD D 
.MODEL QMOD NPN(BF=75 RB=100 CJE=1PF CJC=3PF) 
VCC 99 0 DC 5V 
VIN1A 1 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 10NS 50NS) 
VIN1B 2 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 20NS 100NS) 
VIN2A 3 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 40NS 200NS) 
VIN2B 4 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 80NS 400NS) 
VIN3A 5 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 160NS 800NS) 
VIN3B 6 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 320NS 1600NS) 
VIN4A 7 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 640NS 3200NS) 
VIN4B 8 0 PULSE(0 3 0 10NS 10NS 1280NS 6400NS) 
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 13 99 FOURBIT 
RBIT0 9 0 1K 
RBIT1 10 0 1K 
RBIT2 11 0 1K 
RBIT3 12 0 1K 
RCOUT 13 0 1K 
 
*** (FOR THOSE WITH MONEY (AND MEMORY) TO BURN) 
.TRAN 1NS 6400NS 
.END

21.6 Four-Bit Binary Adder (MOS)

The following deck simulates a four-bit binary adder, using several subcircuits to describe various pieces of the overall circuit.

Example:

  ADDER - 4 BIT ALL-NAND-GATE BINARY ADDER 
*** SUBCIRCUIT DEFINITIONS 
.SUBCKT NAND in1 in2 out VDD 
* NODES:  INPUT(2), OUTPUT, VCC 
M1 out in2 Vdd Vdd p1 W=7.5u L=0.35u pd=13.5u ad=22.5p ps=13.5u as=22.5p 
M2 net.1 in2 0 0 n1   W=3u   L=0.35u pd=9u    ad=9p    ps=9u    as=9p 
M3 out in1 Vdd Vdd p1 W=7.5u L=0.35u pd=13.5u ad=22.5p ps=13.5u as=22.5p 
M4 out in1 net.1 0 n1 W=3u   L=0.35u pd=9u    ad=9p    ps=9u    as=9p 
.ENDS NAND 
.SUBCKT ONEBIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 AND 
X2   1  7  8  6   NAND 
X3   2  7  9  6   NAND 
X4   8  9 10  6   NAND 
X5   3 10 11  6   NAND 
X6   3 11 12  6   NAND 
X7  10 11 13  6   NAND 
X8  12 13  4  6   NAND 
X9  11  7  5  6   NAND 
.ENDS ONEBIT 
.SUBCKT TWOBIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
* NODES:  INPUT - BIT0(2) / BIT1(2), OUTPUT - BIT0 / BIT1, 
*         CARRY-IN, CARRY-OUT, VCC 
X1   1  2  7  5 10  9   ONEBIT 
X2   3  4 10  6  8  9   ONEBIT 
.ENDS TWOBIT 
.SUBCKT FOURBIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 
*NODES: INPUT - BIT0(2) / BIT1(2) / BIT2(2) / BIT3(2), 
*       OUTPUT - BIT0 / BIT1 / BIT2 / BIT3, CARRY-IN, 
*       CARRY-OUT, VCC 
X1   1  2  3  4  9 10 13 16 15   TWOBIT 
X2   5  6  7  8 11 12 16 14 15   TWOBIT 
.ENDS FOURBIT

Continue 4 Bit adder MOS:

*** POWER 
VCC   99  0   DC 3.3V 
*** INPUTS 
VIN1A  1  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS   20NS   50NS) 
VIN1B  2  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS   30NS  100NS) 
VIN2A  3  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS   50NS  200NS) 
VIN2B  4  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS   90NS  400NS) 
VIN3A  5  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS  170NS  800NS) 
VIN3B  6  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS  330NS 1600NS) 
VIN4A  7  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS  650NS 3200NS) 
VIN4B  8  0   DC 0 PULSE(0 3 0 5NS 5NS 1290NS 6400NS) 
*** DEFINE NOMINAL CIRCUIT 
X1     1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8  9 10 11 12  0 13 99 FOURBIT 
 
.option acct 
.save V(1) V(2) V(3) V(4) V(5) V(6) V(7) V(8) ; INPUTS 
.save V(9) V(10) V(11) V(12) V(13) ; OUTPUTS 
 
.TRAN 1NS 6400NS 
 
* use BSIM3 model with default parameters 
.model n1 nmos level=49 version=3.3.0 
.model p1 pmos level=49 version=3.3.0 
 
.END

21.7 Transmission-Line Inverter

The following deck simulates a transmission-line inverter. Two transmission-line elements are required since two propagation modes are excited. In the case of a coaxial line, the first line (T1) models the inner conductor with respect to the shield, and the second line (T2) models the shield with respect to the outside world.

Example:

TRANSMISSION-LINE INVERTER 
V1 1 0 PULSE(0 1 0 0.1N) 
R1 1 2 50 
X1 2 0 0 4 TLINE 
R2 4 0 50 
.SUBCKT TLINE 1 2 3 4 
T1 1 2 3 4 Z0=50 TD=1.5NS 
T2 2 0 4 0 Z0=100 TD=1NS 
.ENDS TLINE 
.TRAN 0.1NS 20NS 
.END

Chapter 22
Statistical circuit analysis

22.1 Introduction

Real circuits do not operate in a world with fixed values of device parameters, power supplies and environmental data. Even if a ngspice output offers 5 digits or more of precision, this should not mislead you thinking that your circuits will behave exactly the same. All physical parameters influencing a circuit (e.g. MOS Source/drain resistance, threshold voltage, transconductance) are distributed parameters, often following a Gaussian distribution with a mean value μand a standard deviation σ.

To obtain circuits operating reliably under varying parameters, it might be necessary to simulate them taking certain parameter spreads into account. ngspice offers several methods supporting this task. A powerful random number generator is working in the background. Its seed value is derived from the process id upon start-up of ngspice. If you need reproducible random numbers, you may start ngspice setting the command set rndseed=<int value> into spinit or .spiceinit. The following three chapters offer a short introduction to the statistical methods available in ngspice. The diversity of approaches stems from historical reasons, and from some efforts to make ngspice compatible to other simulators.

22.2 Using random param(eters)

The ngspice frontend (with its ’numparam’ parser) contains the .param (see chapt. 2.8.1) and .func (see chapt. 2.9) commands. Among the built-in functions supported (see 2.8.5) you will find the following statistical functions:



Built-in function

Notes





gauss(nom, rvar, sigma)

nominal value plus variation drawn from Gaussian distribution with mean 0 and standard deviation rvar (relative to nominal), divided by sigma



agauss(nom, avar, sigma)

nominal value plus variation drawn from Gaussian distribution with mean 0 and standard deviation avar (absolute), divided by sigma



unif(nom, rvar)

nominal value plus relative variation (to nominal) uniformly distributed between +/-rvar



aunif(nom, avar)

nominal value plus absolute variation uniformly distributed between +/-avar



limit(nom, avar)

nominal value +/-avar, depending on random number in [-1, 1[ being > 0 or < 0



The frontend parser evaluates all .param or .func statements upon start-up of ngspice, before the circuit is evaluated. The parameters aga, aga2, lim obtain their numerical values once. If the random function appears in a device card (e.g. v11 11 0 ’agauss(1,2,3)’), a new random number is generated.

Random number example using parameters:

* random number tests 
.param aga = agauss(1,2,3) 
.param aga2=’2*aga 
.param lim=limit(0,1.2) 
.func rgauss(a,b,c) ’5*agauss(a,b,c)’ 
* always same value as defined above 
v1 1 0  lim 
v2 2 0  lim 
* may be a different value 
v3 3 0  limit(0,1.2)’ 
* always new random values 
v11 11 0 agauss(1,2,3)’ 
v12 12 0 agauss(1,2,3)’ 
v13 13 0 agauss(1,2,3)’ 
* same value as defined above 
v14 14 0 aga 
v15 15 0 aga 
v16 16 0 aga2 
* using .func, new random values 
v17 17 0 rgauss(0,2,3)’ 
v18 18 0 rgauss(0,2,3)’ 
.op 
.control 
run 
print v(1) v(2) v(3) v(11) v(12) v(13) 
print v(14) v(15) v(16) v(17) v(18) 
.endc 
.end

So v1, v2, and v3 will get the same value, whereas v4 might differ. v11, v12, and v13 will get different values, v14, v15, and v16 will obtain the values set above in the .param statements. .func will start its replacement algorithm, rgauss(a,b,c) will be replaced everywhere by 5*agauss(a,b,c).

Thus device and model parameters may obtain statistically distributed starting values. You simply set a model parameter not to a fixed numerical value, but insert a ’parameter’ instead, which may consist of a token defined in a .param card, by calling .func or by using a built-in function, including the statistical functions described above. The parameter values will be evaluated once immediately after reading the input file.

22.3 Behavioral sources (B, E, G, R, L, C) with random control

All sources listed in the section header may contain parameters, which will be evaluated before simulation starts, as described in the previous section (22.2). In addition the nonlinear voltage or current sources (B-source, 5) as well as their derivatives E and G, but also the behavioral R, L, and C may be controlled during simulation by a random independent voltage source V with TRRANDOM option (chapt. 4.1.8).

An example circuit, a Wien bridge oscillator from input file /examples/Monte_Carlo/OpWien.sp is distributed with ngspice or available at Git. The two frequency determining pairs of R and C are varied statistically using four independent Gaussian voltage sources as the controlling units. An excerpt of this command sequence is shown below. The total simulation time ttime is divided into 100 equally spaced blocks. Each block will get a new set of control voltages, e.g. VR2, which is Gaussian distributed, mean 0 and absolute deviation 1. The resistor value is calculated with ±10% spread, the factor 0.033 will set this 10% to be a deviation of 1 sigma from nominal value.

Examples for control of a behavioral resistor:

* random resistor 
.param res = 10k 
.param ttime=12000m 
.param varia=100 
.param ttime10 = ’ttime/varia’ 
* random control voltage (Gaussian distribution) 
VR2 r2  0 dc 0 trrandom (2 ’ttime10’ 0 1) 
* behavioral resistor 
R2 4 6  R = ’res + 0.033 * res*V(r2)’

So within a single simulation run you will obtain 100 different frequency values issued by the Wien bridge oscillator. The voltage sequence VR2 is shown below.

PIC

22.4 ngspice scripting language

The ngspice scripting language is described in detail in chapter 17.8. All commands listed in chapter 17.5 are available, as well as the built-in functions decried in chapter 17.2, the control structures listed in chapter 17.6, and the predefined variables from chapt. 17.7. Variables and functions are typically evaluated after a simulation run. You may created loops with several simulation runs and change device and model parameters with the alter (17.5.3) or altermod (17.5.4) commands, as shown in the next section 22.5. You may even interrupt a simulation run by proper usage of the stop (17.5.72) and resume (17.5.51) commands. After stop you may change device or model parameters and then go on with resume, continuing the simulation with the new parameter values.

The statistical functions provided for scripting are listed in the following table:



Name

Function





rnd(vector)

A vector with each component a random integer between 0 and the absolute value of the input vector’s corresponding integer element value.



sgauss(vector)

Returns a vector of random numbers drawn from a Gaussian distribution (real value, mean = 0 , standard deviation = 1). The length of the vector returned is determined by the input vector. The contents of the input vector will not be used. A call to sgauss(0) will return a single value of a random number as a vector of length 1..



sunif(vector)

Returns a vector of random real numbers uniformly distributed in the interval [-1 .. 1[. The length of the vector returned is determined by the input vector. The contents of the input vector will not be used. A call to sunif(0) will return a single value of a random number as a vector of length 1.



poisson(vector)

Returns a vector with its elements being integers drawn from a Poisson distribution. The elements of the input vector (real numbers) are the expected numbers λ. Complex vectors are allowed, real and imaginary values are treated separately.



exponential(vector)

Returns a vector with its elements (real numbers) drawn from an exponential distribution. The elements of the input vector are the respective mean values (real numbers). Complex vectors are allowed, real and imaginary values are treated separately.



22.5 Monte-Carlo Simulation

The ngspice scripting language may be used to run Monte-Carlo simulations with statistically varying device or model parameters. Calls to the functions sgauss(0) or sunif(0) (see 17.2) will return Gaussian or uniform distributed random numbers (real numbers), stored in a vector. You may define (see 17.5.14) your own function using sgauss or sunif, e.g. to change the mean or range. In a loop (see 17.6) then you may call the alter (17.5.3) or altermod (17.5.4) statements with random parameters followed by an analysis like op, dc, ac, tran or other.

22.5.1 Example 1

The first examples is a LC band pass filter, where L and C device parameters will be changed 100 times. Each change is followed by an ac analysis. All graphs of output voltage versus frequency are plotted. The file is available in the distribution as /examples/Monte_Carlo/MonteCarlo.sp as well as from the CVS repository.

Monte-Carlo example 1

Perform Monte Carlo simulation in ngspice 
V1 N001 0 AC 1 DC 0 
R1 N002 N001 141 
* 
C1 OUT 0 1e-09 
L1 OUT 0 10e-06 
C2 N002 0 1e-09 
L2 N002 0 10e-06 
L3 N003 N002 40e-06 
C3 OUT N003 250e-12 
* 
R2 0 OUT 141 
* 
.control 
  let mc_runs = 100 
  let run = 1 
  set curplot = new       $ create a new plot 
  set scratch = $curplot  $ store its name to ’scratch’ 
* 
  define unif(nom, var) (nom + nom*var * sunif(0)) 
  define aunif(nom, avar) (nom + avar * sunif(0)) 
  define gauss(nom, var, sig) (nom + nom*var/sig * sgauss(0)) 
  define agauss(nom, avar, sig) (nom + avar/sig * sgauss(0)) 
* 
  dowhile run <= mc_runs 
*    alter c1 = unif(1e-09, 0.1) 
*    alter l1 = aunif(10e-06, 2e-06) 
*    alter c2 = aunif(1e-09, 100e-12) 
*    alter l2 = unif(10e-06, 0.2) 
*    alter l3 = aunif(40e-06, 8e-06) 
*    alter c3 = unif(250e-12, 0.15) 
    alter c1 = gauss(1e-09, 0.1, 3) 
    alter l1 = agauss(10e-06, 2e-06, 3) 
    alter c2 = agauss(1e-09, 100e-12, 3) 
    alter l2 = gauss(10e-06, 0.2, 3) 
    alter l3 = agauss(40e-06, 8e-06, 3) 
    alter c3 = gauss(250e-12, 0.15, 3) 
    ac oct 100 250K 10Meg 
    set run ="$&run"     $ create a variable from the vector 
    set dt = $curplot    $ store the current plot to dt 
    setplot $scratch     $ make ’scratch’ the active plot 
* store the output vector to plot ’scratch’ 
    let vout{$run}={$dt}.v(out) 
    setplot $dt          $ go back to the previous plot 
    let run = run + 1 
  end 
  plot db({$scratch}.all) 
.endc 
 
.end

22.5.2 Example 2

A more sophisticated input file for Monte Carlo simulation is distributed with the file /examples/Monte_Carlo/MC_ring.sp (or git repository). Due to its length it is not reproduced here, but some comments on its enhancements over example 1 (22.5.1) are presented in the following.

A 25-stage ring oscillator is the circuit used with a transient simulation. It comprises of CMOS inverters, modeled with BSIM3. Several model parameters (vth, u0, tox, L, and W) shall be varied statistically between each simulation run. The frequency of oscillation will be measured by a fft and stored. Finally a histogram of all measured frequencies will be plotted.

The function calls to sunif(0) and sgauss(0) return uniformly or Gaussian distributed random numbers. A function unif, defined by the line

define unif(nom, var) (nom + (nom*var) * sunif(0))

will return a value with mean nom and deviation var relative to nom.

The line

set n1vth0=@n1[vth0]

will store the threshold voltage vth0, given by the model parameter set, into a variable n1vth0, ready to be used by unif, aunif, gauss, or agauss function calls.

In the simulation loop the altermod command changes the model parameters before a call to tran. After the transient simulation the resulting vector is linearized, a fft is calculated, and the maximum of the fft signal is measured by the meas command and stored in a vector maxffts. Finally the contents of the vector maxffts is plotted in a histogram.

For more details, please have a look at the strongly commented input file MC_ring.sp.

22.5.3 Example 3

The next example is contained in the files MC_2_control.sp and MC_2_circ.sp from folder /examples/Monte_Carlo/. MC_2_control.sp is a ngspice script (see 17.8). It starts a loop by setting the random number generator seed value to the value of the loop counter, sources the circuit file MC_2_circ.sp, runs the simulation, stores a raw file, makes an fft, saves the oscillator frequency thus measured, deletes all outputs, increases the loop counter and restarts the loop. The netlist file MC_2_circ.sp contains the circuit, which is the same ring oscillator as of example 2. However, now the MOS model parameter set, which is included with this netlist file, inherits some AGAUSS functions (see 2.8.5) to vary threshold voltage, mobility and gate oxide thickness of the NMOS and PMOS transistors. This is an approach similar to what commercial foundries deliver within their device libraries. So this example may be your source for running Monte Carlo with commercial libs. Start example 3 by calling

ngspice -o MC_2_control.log MC_2_control.sp

22.6 Data evaluation with Gnuplot

Run the example file /examples/Monte_Carlo/OpWien.sp, described in chapt. 22.3. Generate a plot with Gnuplot by the ngspice command

gnuplotpl4mag v4mag xlimit 500 1500

Open and run the command file in the Gnuplot command line window by

load ’pl-v4mag.p’

A Gaussian curve will be fitted to the simulation data. The mean oscillator frequency and its deviation are printed in the curve fitting log in the Gnuplot window.

Gnuplot script for data evaluation:

 # This file: pl-v4mag.p 
 # ngspice file OpWien.sp 
 # ngspice command: 
 # gnuplot pl4mag v4mag xlimit 500 1500 
 # a gnuplot manual: 
 # http://www.duke.edu/~hpgavin/gnuplot.html 
 
 # Gauss function to be fitted 
 f1(x)=(c1/(a1*sqrt(2*3.14159))*exp(-((x-b1)**2)/(2*a1**2))) 
 # Gauss function to plot start graph 
 f2(x)=(c2/(a2*sqrt(2*3.14159))*exp(-((x-b2)**2)/(2*a2**2))) 
 # start values 
 a1=50 ; b1=900 ; c1=50 
 # keep start values in  a2, b2, c2 
 a2=a1 ; b2=b1 ; c2=c1 
 # curve fitting 
 fit f1(x) pl4mag.data using 1:2 via a1, b1, c1 
 # plot original and fitted curves with new a1, b1, c1 
 plot "pl4mag.data" using 1:2 with lines, f1(x), f2(x)

PIC

pl4mag.data is the simulation data, f2(x) the starting curve, f1(x) the fitted Gaussian distribution.

This is just a simple example. You might explore the powerful built-in functions of Gnuplot to do a much more sophisticated statistical data analysis.

Chapter 23
Circuit optimization with ngspice

23.1 Optimization of a circuit

Your circuit design (analog, maybe mixed-signal) has already the best circuit topology. There might be still some room for parameter selection, e.g. the geometries of transistors or values of passive elements, to best fit the specific purpose. This is, what (automatic) circuit optimization will deliver. In addition you may fine-tune, optimize and verify the circuit over voltage, process or temperature corners. So circuit optimization is a valuable tool in the hands of an experienced designer. It will relieve you from the routine task of ’endless’ repetitions of re-simulating your design.

You have to choose circuit variables as parameters to be varied during optimization (e.g. device size, component values, bias inputs etc.). Then you may pose performance constraints onto you circuits (e.g. Vnode < 1.2V, gain > 50 etc.). Optimization objectives are the variables to be minimized or maximized. The n objectives and m constraints are assembled into a cost function.

The optimization flow is now the following: The circuit is loaded. Several (perhaps only one) simulations are started with a suitable starter set of variables. Measurements are done on the simulator output to check for the performance constraints and optimization objectives. These data are fed into the optimizer to evaluate the cost function. A sophisticated algorithm now determines a new set of circuit variables for the next simulator run(s). Stop conditions have to be defined by the user to tell the simulator when to finish (e.g. fall below a cost function value, parameter changes fall below a certain threshold, number of iterations exceeded).

The optimizer algorithms, its parameters and the starting point influence the convergence behavior. The algorithms have to provide measures to reaching the global optimum, not to stick to a local one, and thus are tantamount for the quality of the optimizer.

ngspice does not have an integral optimization processor. Thus this chapter will rely on work done by third parties to introduce ngspice optimization capability.ngspice provides the simulation engine, a script or program controls the simulator and provides the optimizer functionality.

Four optimizers are presented here, using ngspice scripting language, using tclspice, using a Python script, and using ASCO, a c-coded optimization program.

23.2 ngspice optimizer using ngspice scripts

Friedrich Schmidt (see his web site) has intensively used circuit optimization during his development of Nonlinear loadflow computation with Spice based simulators. He has provided an optimizer using the internal ngspice scripting language (see chapt. 17.8). His original scripts are found here. A slightly modified and concentrated set of his scripts is available from the ngspice optimizer directory.

The simple example given in the scripts is o.k. with current ngspice. Real circuits have still to be tested.

23.3 ngspice optimizer using tclspice

ngspice offers another scripting capability, namely the tcl/tk based tclspice option (see chapt. 20). An optimization procedure may be written using a tcl script. An example is provided in chapter 20.5.2.

23.4 ngspice optimizer using a Python script

Werner Hoch has developed a ngspice optimization procedure based on the ’differential evolution’ algorithm [21]. On his web page he provides a Python script containing the control flow and algorithms.

23.5 ngspice optimizer using ASCO

The ASCO optimizer, developed by Joao Ramos, also applies the ’differential evolution’ algorithm [21]. An enhanced version 0.4.7.1, adding ngspice as a simulation engine, may be downloaded here (7z archive format). Included are executable files (asco, asco-mpi, ngspice-c for MS Windows). The source code should also compile and function under LINUX (not yet tested).

ASCO is a standalone executable, which communicates with ngspice via ngspice input and output files. Several optimization examples, originally provided by J. Ramos for other simulators, are prepared for use with ngspice. Parallel processing on a multi-core computer has been tested using MPI (MPICH2) under MS Windows. A processor network will be supported as well. A MS Windows console application ngspice_c.exe is included in the archive. Several stand alone tools are provided, but not tested yet.

Setting up an optimization project with ASCO requires advanced know-how of using ngspice. There are several sources of information. First of all the examples provided with the distribution give hints how to start with ASCO. The original ASCO manual is provided as well, or is available here. It elaborates on the examples, using a commercial simulator, and provides a detailed description how to set up ASCO. Installation of ASCO and MPI (under Windows) is described in a file INSTALL.

Some remarks on how to set up ASCO for ngspice are given in the following sections (more to be added). These a meant not as a complete description, but are an addition the the ASCO manual.

23.5.1 Three stage operational amplifier

This example is taken from chapter 6.2.2 “Tutorial #2” from the ASCO manual. The directory examples/ngspice/amp3 contains four files:

amp3.cfg This file contains all configuration data for this optimization. Of special interest is the following section, which sets the required measurements and the constraints on the measured parameters:

# Measurements #

ac_power:VDD:MIN:0

dc_gain:VOUT:GE:122

unity_gain_frequency:VOUT:GE:3.15E6

phase_margin:VOUT:GE:51.8

phase_margin:VOUT:LE:70

amp3_slew_rate:VOUT:GE:0.777E6

#

Each of these entries is linked to a file in the /extract subdirectory, having exactly the same names as given here, e.g. ac_power, dc_gain, unity_gain, phase_margin, and amp3_slew_rate. Each of these files contains an # Info # section, which is currently not used. The # Commands # section may contain a measurement command (including ASCO parameter #SYMBOL#, see file /extract/unity_gain_frequency). It also may contain a .control section (see file /extract/phase_margin_min). During set-up #SYMBOL# is replaced by the file name, a leading ’z’, and a trailing number according to the above sequence, starting with 0.

amp3.sp This is the basic circuit description. Entries like #LM2# are ASCO-specific, defined in the # Parameters # section of file amp3.cfg. ASCO will replace these parameter placeholders with real values for simulation, determined by the optimization algorithm. The .control ... .endc section is specific to ngspice. Entries to this section may deliver workarounds of some commands not available in ngspice, but used in other simulators. You may also define additional measurements, get access to variables and vectors, or define some data manipulation. In this example the .control section contains an op measurement, required later for slew rate calculation, as well as the ac simulation, which has to occur before any further data evaluation. Data from the op simulation are stored in a plot op1. Its name is saved in variable dt. The ac measurements sets another plot ac1. To retrieve op data from the former plot, you have to use the {$dt}.<vector> notation (see file /extract/amp3_slew_rate).

n.typ, p.typ MOSFET parameter files, to be included by amp3.sp.

Testing the set-up

Copy asco-test.exe and ngspice_c.exe (console executable of ngspice) into the directory, and run

$ asco-test -ngspice amp3

from the console window. Several files will be created during checking. If you look at <computer-name>.sp: this is the input file for ngspice_c, generated by ASCO. You will find the additional .measure commands and .control sections. The ’quit’ command will be added automatically just before the .end command in its own .control section. asco-test will display error messages on the console, if the simulation or communication with ASCO is not o.k.. The output file <computer-name>.out, generated by ngspice during each simulation, contains symbols like zac_power0, zdc_gain1, zunity_gain_frequency2, zphase_margin3, zphase_margin4, and zamp3_slew_rate5. These are used to communicate the ngspice output data to ASCO. ASCO is searching for something like ’zdc_gain1 =’, and then takes the next token as the input value. Calling phase_margin twice in amp3.cfg has lead to two measurements in two .control sections with different symbols (zphase_margin3, zphase_margin4).

A failing test may result in an error message from ASCO. Sometimes, however, ASCO freezes after some output statements. This may happen if ngspice issues an error message which cannot be handled by ASCO. Here it may help calling ngspice directly with the input file generated by ASCO:

$ ngspice_c <computer-name>.sp

Thus you may evaluate the ngspice messages directly.

Running the simulation

Copy (w)asco.exe, (w)asco-mpi.exe and ngspice_c.exe (console executable of ngspice) into the directory, and run

$ asco -ngspice amp3

or alternatively (if MPICH is installed)

$ mpiexec -n 7 asco-mpi -ngspice amp3

The following graph 23.1 shows the acceleration of the optimization simulation on a multi-core processor (i7 with 4 real or 8 virtual cores), 500 generations, if -n is varied. Speed is tripled, a mere 15 min suffices to optimize 21 parameters of the amplifier.


PIC

Figure 23.1: Optimization speed


23.5.2 Digital inverter

This example is taken from chapter 6.2.1 “Tutorial #1” from the ASCO manual. In addition to the features already mentioned above, it adds Monte-Carlo and corner simulations. The file inv.cfg contains the following section:

#Optimization Flow#

Alter:yes         $do we want to do corner analysis?

MonteCarlo:yes    $do we want to do MonteCarlo analysis?

AlterMC cost:3.00 $point at which we want to start ALTER and/or 
                   MONTECARLO

ExecuteRF:no      $Execute or no the RF module to add RF parasitics?

SomethingElse:    $

#

Monte Carlo is switched on. It uses the AGAUSS function (see chapt. 22.2). Its parameters are generated by ASCO from the data supplied by the inv.cfg section #Monte Carlo#. According to the paper by Pelgrom on MOS transistor matching [22] the AGAUSS parameters are calculated as

             (       ABeta      W          )
W =  AGAU  SS  W, √-----------⋅----⋅10 -6,1
                    2⋅W  ⋅L ⋅m  100
(23.1)

                 (                       )
delvto = AGAU SS   0,√---AVT-----⋅10 -9,1
                       2⋅W  ⋅L⋅m
(23.2)

The .ALTER command is not available in ngspice. However, a new option in ngspice to the altermod command (17.5.4) enables the simulation of design corners. The #Alter# section in inv.cfg gives details. Specific to ngspice, again several .control section are used.

# ALTER #

.control

* gate oxide thickness varied

altermod nm pm file [b3.min b3.typ b3.max]

.endc

.control

* power supply variation

alter vdd=[2.0 2.1 2.2] 

.endc

.control

run

.endc

#

NMOS (nm) and PMOS (pm) model parameter sets are loaded from three different model files, each containing both NMOS and PMOS sets. b3.typ is assembled from the original parameter files n.typ and p.typ, provided with original ASCO, with some adaptation to ngspice BSIM3. The min and max sets are artificially created in that only the gate oxide thickness deviates ±1 nm from what is found in model file b3.typ. In addition the power supply voltage is varied, so in total you will find 3 x 3 simulation combinations in the input file <computer-name>.sp (after running asco-test).

23.5.3 Bandpass

This example is taken from chapter 6.2.4 “Tutorial #4” from the ASCO manual. S11 in the passband is to be maximised. S21 is used to extract side lobe parameters. The .net command is not available in ngspice, so S11 and S21 are derived with a script in file bandpass.sp as described in chapt. 17.9. The measurements requested in bandpass.cfg as

# Measurements #

Left_Side_Lobe:---:LE:-20

Pass_Band_Ripple:---:GE:-1

Right_Side_Lobe:---:LE:-20

S11_In_Band:---:MAX:---

#

are realized as ’measure’ commands inside of control sections (see files in directory extract). The result of a ’measure’ statement is a vector, which may be processed by commands in the following lines. In file extract/S1_In_Band #Symbol# is made available only after a short calculation (inversion of sign), using the ’print’ command. ’quit’ has been added to this entry because it will become the final control section in <computer-name>.sp. A disadvantage of ’measure’ inside of a .control section is, that parameters from .param statements may not be used (as is done in example 23.5.4).

The bandpass example includes the calculation of RF parasitic elements defined in rfmodule.cfg (see chapt. 7.5 of the ASCO manual). This calculation is invoked by setting

ExecuteRF:yes     $Execute or no the RF module to add RF parasitics?

in bandpass.cfg. The two subcircuits LBOND_sub and CSMD_sub are generated in <computer-name>.sp to simulate these effects.

23.5.4 Class-E power amplifier

This example is taken from chapter 6.2.3 “Tutorial #3” from the ASCO manual. In this example the ASCO post processing is applied in file extract/P_OUT (see chapter 7.4 of the ASCO manual.). In this example .measurement statements are used. They allow using parameters from .param statements, because they will be located outside of .control sections, but do not allow to do data post processing inside of ngspice. You may use ASCO post processing instead.

Chapter 24
Notes

24.1 Glossary

card
A logical SPICE input line. A card may be extended through the use of the “+” sign in SPICE, thereby allowing it to take up multiple lines in a SPICE deck.
code
model A model of a device, function, component, etc. which is based solely on a C programming language-based function. In addition to the code models included with the XSPICE option of the ngspice simulator, you can use code models that you develop for circuit modeling.
deck
A collection of SPICE cards which together specify all input information required in order to perform an analysis. A “deck” of “cards” will in fact be contained within a file on the host computer system.
element
card A single, logical line in an ngspice circuit description deck which describes a circuit element. Circuit elements are connected to each other to form circuits (e.g., a logical card which describes a resistor, such as R1 2 0 10K, is an element card).
instance
A unique occurrence of a circuit element. See “element card”, in which the instance “R1” is specified as a unique element (instance) in a hypothetical circuit description.
macro
A macro, in the context of this document, refers to a C language macro which supports the construction of user-defined models by simplifying input/output and parameter-passing operations within the Model Definition File.
.mod
Refers to the Model Definition File in XSPICE. The file suffix reflects the file-name of the model definition file: cfunc.mod.
.model
Refers to a model card associated with an element card in ngspice. A model card allows for data defining an instance to be conveniently located in the ngspice deck such that the general layout of the elements is more readable.
Nutmeg
The ngspice default post-processor. This provides a simple stand-alone simulator interface which can be used with the ngspice simulator to display and plot simulator raw files.
subcircuit
A “device” within an ngspice deck which is defined in terms of a group of element cards and which can be referenced in other parts of the ngspice deck through element cards.

24.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations

ATE
Automatic Test Equipment
CAE
Computer-Aided Engineering
CCCS
Current Controlled Current Source.
CCVS
Current Controlled Voltage Source.
FET
Field Effect Transistor
IDD
Interface Design Document
IFS
Refers to the Interface Specification File. The abbreviation reflects the file name of the Interface Specification File: ifspec.ifs.
MNA
Modified Nodal Analysis
MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
PWL
Piece-Wise Linear
RAM
Random Access Memory
ROM
Read Only Memory
SDD
Software Design Document
SI
Simulator Interface
SPICE
Simulation Program with Integrated Circuit Emphasis. This program was developed at the University of California at Berkeley and is the origin of ngspice.
SPICE3
Version 3 of SPICE.
SRS
Software Requirements Specification
SUM
Software User’s Manual
UCB
University of California at Berkeley
UDN
User-Defined Node(s)
VCCS
Voltage Controlled Current Source.
VCVS
Voltage Controlled Voltage Source
XSPICE
Extended SPICE; option to ngspice integrating predefined or user defined code models for event-driven mixed-signal simulation.

Bibliography

[1]    A. Vladimirescu and S. Liu, The Simulation of MOS Integrated Circuits Using SPICE2 ERL Memo No. ERL M80/7, Electronics Research Laboratory University of California, Berkeley, October 1980

[2]    T. Sakurai and A. R. Newton, A Simple MOSFET Model for Circuit Analysis and its application to CMOS gate delay analysis and series-connected MOSFET Structure ERL Memo No. ERL M90/19, Electronics Research Laboratory, University of California, Berkeley, March 1990

[3]    B. J. Sheu, D. L. Scharfetter, and P. K. Ko, SPICE2 Implementation of BSIM ERL Memo No. ERL M85/42, Electronics Research Laboratory University of California, Berkeley, May 1985

[4]    J. R. Pierret, A MOS Parameter Extraction Program for the BSIM Model ERL Memo Nos. ERL M84/99 and M84/100, Electronics Research Laboratory University of California, Berkeley, November 1984

[5]    Min-Chie Jeng, Design and Modeling of Deep Submicrometer MOSFETSs ERL Memo Nos. ERL M90/90, Electronics Research Laboratory, University of California, Berkeley, October 1990

[6]    Soyeon Park, Analysis and SPICE implementation of High Temperature Effects on MOSFET, Master’s thesis, University of California, Berkeley, December 1986.

[7]    Clement Szeto, Simulation of Temperature Effects in MOSFETs (STEIM), Master’s thesis, University of California, Berkeley, May 1988.

[8]    J.S. Roychowdhury and D.O. Pederson, Efficient Transient Simulation of Lossy Interconnect, Proc. of the 28th ACM/IEEE Design Automation Conference, June 17-21 1991, San Francisco

[9]    A. E. Parker and D. J. Skellern, An Improved FET Model for Computer Simulators, IEEE Trans CAD, vol. 9, no. 5, pp. 551-553, May 1990.

[10]   R. Saleh and A. Yang, Editors, Simulation and Modeling, IEEE Circuits and Devices, vol. 8, no. 3, pp. 7-8 and 49, May 1992.

[11]   H.Statz et al., GaAs FET Device and Circuit Simulation in SPICE, IEEE Transactions on Electron Devices, V34, Number 2, February 1987, pp160-169.

[12]   Weidong Liu et al.: “BSIM3v3.2.3 MOSFET Model User’s Manual”, BSIM3v3.2.3

[13]   Weidong Lui et al.: “BSIM3.v3.3.0 MOSFET Model User’s Manual”, BSIM3v3.3.0

[14]   “SPICE3.C1 Nutmeg Programmer’s Manual”, Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences, University of California, Berkeley, California, April, 1987.

[15]   Thomas L. Quarles: SPICE3 Version 3C1 User’s Guide, Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences, University of California, Berkeley, California, April, 1989.

[16]   Brian Kernighan and Dennis Ritchie: “The C Programming Language”, Second Edition, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1988.

[17]   “Code-Level Modeling in XSPICE”, F.L. Cox, W.B. Kuhn, J.P. Murray, and S.D. Tynor, published in the Proceedings of the 1992 International Symposium on Circuits and Systems, San Diego, CA, May 1992, vol 2, pp. 871-874.

[18]   ”A Physically Based Compact Model of Partially Depleted SOI MOSFETs for Analog Circuit Simulation”, Mike S. L. Lee, Bernard M. Tenbroek, William Redman-White, James Benson, and Michael J. Uren, IEEE JOURNAL OF SOLID-STATE CIRCUITS, VOL. 36, NO. 1, JANUARY 2001, pp. 110-121

[19]   ”A Realistic Large-signal MESFET Model for SPICE”, A. E. Parker, and D. J. Skellern, IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques, vol. 45, no. 9, Sept. 1997, pp. 1563-1571.

[20]   ”Integrating RTS Noise into Circuit Analysis”, T. B. Tang and A. F. Murray, IEEE ISCAS, 2009, Proc. of IEEE ISCAS, Taipei, Taiwan, May 2009, pp 585-588 (link)

[21]   R. Storn, and K. Price: “Differential Evolution”, technical report TR-95-012, ICSI, March 1995, see report download, or the DE web page

[22]   M. J. M. Pelgrom e.a.: “Matching Properties of MOS Transistors”, IEEE J. Sol. State Circ, vol. 24, no. 5, Oct. 1989, pp. 1433-1440

[23]   Y. V. Pershin, M. Di Ventra: "SPICE model of memristive devices with threshold", arXiv:1204.2600v1 [physics.comp-ph] 12 Apr 2012, http://arxiv.org/pdf/1204.2600.pdf

Part II
XSPICE Software User’s Manual

Chapter 25
XSPICE Basics

25.1 ngspice with the XSPICE option

The XSPICE option allows you to add event-driven simulation capabilities to NGSPICE. NGSPICE now is the main software program that performs mathematical simulation of a circuit specified by you, the user. It takes input in the form of commands and circuit descriptions and produces output data (e.g. voltages, currents, digital states, and waveforms) that describe the circuit’s behavior.

Plain NGSPICE is designed for analog simulation and is based exclusively on matrix solution techniques. The XSPICE option adds even-driven simulation capabilities. Thus, designs that contain significant portions of digital circuitry can be efficiently simulated together with analog components. NGSPICE with XSPICE option also includes a “User-Defined Node” capability that allows event-driven simulations to be carried out with any type of data.

The XSPICE option has been developed by the Computer Science and Information Technology Laboratory at Georgia Tech Research Institute of the Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Georgia 30332 at around 1990 and enhanced by the NGSPICE team. The manual is based on the original XSPICE user’s manual, made available from Georgia Tech.

In the following, the term “XSPICE” may be read as “NGSPICE with XSPICE code model subsystem enabled”. You may enable the option by adding --enable-xspice to the ./configure command. The MS Windows distribution already contains the XSPICE option.

25.2 The XSPICE Code Model Subsystem

The new component of ngspice, the Code Model Subsystem, provides the tools needed to model the various parts of your system. While NGSPICE is targeted primarily at integrated circuit (IC) analysis, XSPICE includes features to model and simulate board-level and system-level designs as well. The Code Model Subsystem is central to this new capability, providing XSPICE with an extensive set of models to use in designs and allowing you to add your own models to this model set.

The NGSPICE simulator at the core of XSPICE includes built-in models for discrete components commonly found within integrated circuits. These “model primitives” include components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, and transistors. The XSPICE Code Model Subsystem extends this set of primitives in two ways. First, it provides a library of over 40 additional primitives, including summers, integrators, digital gates, controlled oscillators, s-domain transfer functions, and digital state machines. See chapter 12 for a description of the library entries. Second, it adds a code model generator to ngspice which provides a set of programming utilities to make it easy for you to create your own models by writing them in the C programming language.

The code models are generated upon compiling ngspice. They are stored in shared libraries, which may be distributed independently from the ngspice sources. Upon runtime ngspice will load the code model libraries and make the code model instances available for simulation.

25.3 XSPICE Top-Level Diagram

A top-level diagram of the XSPICE system integrated into ngspice is shown in Figure 25.1. The XSPICE Simulator is made up of the NGSPICE core, the event-driven algorithm, circuit description syntax parser extensions, a loading routine for code models, and the Nutmeg user interface. The XSPICE Code Model Subsystem consists of the Code Model Generator, 5 standard code model library sources with more than 40 code models, the sources for Node Type Libraries, and all the interfaces to User-Defined Code Models and to User-Defined Node Types.


PIC

Figure 25.1: ngspice/XSPICE Top-Level Diagram


Chapter 26
Execution Procedures

This chapter covers operation of the XSPICE simulator and the Code Model Subsystem. It begins with background material on simulation and modeling and then discusses the analysis modes supported in XSPICE and the circuit description syntax used for modeling. Detailed descriptions of the predefined Code Models and Node Types provided in the XSPICE libraries are also included.

26.1 Simulation and Modeling Overview

This section introduces the concepts of circuit simulation and modeling. It is intended primarily for users who have little or no previous experience with circuit simulators, and also for those who have not used circuit simulators recently. However, experienced SPICE users may wish to scan the material presented here since it provides background for new Code Model and User-Defined Node capabilities of the XSPICE option.

26.1.1 Describing the Circuit

This section provides an overview of the circuit description syntax expected by the XSPICE simulator. A general understanding of circuit description syntax will be helpful to you should you encounter problems with your circuit and need to examine the simulator’s error messages, or should you wish to develop your own models.

This section will introduce you to the creation of circuit description input files using the Nutmeg user interface. Note that this material is presented in an overview form. Details of circuit description syntax are given later in this chapter and in the previous chapters of this manual.

26.1.1.1 Example Circuit Description Input

Although different SPICE-based simulators may include various enhancements to the basic version from the University of California at Berkeley, most use a similar approach in describing circuits. This approach involves capturing the information present in a circuit schematic in the form of a text file that follows a defined format. This format requires the assignment of alphanumeric identifiers to each circuit node, the assignment of component identifiers to each circuit device, and the definition of the significant parameters for each device. For example, the circuit description below shows the equivalent input file for the circuit shown in Figure26.1.

Small Signal Amplifier 

* 

*This circuit simulates a simple small signal amplifier. 

* 

Vin          Input 0                    0 SIN(0 .1 500Hz)

R_source     Input Amp_In               100 

C1           Amp_In 0                   1uF 

R_Amp_Input  Amp_In 0                   1MEG 

E1           (Amp:Out 0) (Amp_In 0)    -10 

R_Load       Amp_Out 0                  1000

* 

.Tran 1.0u 0.01 

* 

.end


PIC
Figure 26.1: Example Circuit 1


This file exhibits many of the most important properties common to all SPICE circuit description files including the following:

In this example, the title of the circuit is ‘Small Signal Amplifier’. Three comment lines are included before the actual circuit description begins. The first device in the circuit is voltage source ‘Vin’, which is connected between node ‘Input’ and ‘0’ (ground). The parameters after the nodes specify that the source has an initial value of 0, a wave shape of ‘SIN’, and a DC offset, amplitude, and frequency of 0, .1, and 500 respectively. The next device in the circuit is resistor ‘R_Source’, which is connected between nodes ‘Input’ and ‘Amp_In’, with a value of 100 Ohms. The remaining device lines in the file are interpreted similarly.

The control directive that begins with ‘.Tran’ specifies that the simulator should carry out a simulation using the Transient analysis mode. In this example, the parameters to the transient analysis control directive specify that the maximum time-step allowed is 1 microsecond and that the circuit should be simulated for 0.01 seconds of circuit time.

Other control cards are used for other analysis modes. For example, if a frequency response plot is desired, perhaps to determine the effect of the capacitor in the circuit, the following statement will instruct the simulator to perform a frequency analysis from 100 Hz to 10 MHz in decade intervals with ten points per decade.

.ac dec 10 100 10meg 

To determine the quiescent operating point of the circuit, the following statement may be inserted in the file.

.op 

A fourth analysis type supported by ngspice is swept DC analysis. An example control statement for the analysis mode is

.dc Vin -0.1 0.2 .05 

This statement specifies a DC sweep which varies the source Vin from -100 millivolts to +200 millivolts in steps of 50 millivolts.

26.1.1.2 Models and Subcircuits

The file discussed in the previous section illustrated the most basic syntax rules of a circuit description file. However, ngspice (and other SPICE-based simulators) include many other features which allow for accurate modeling of semiconductor devices such as diodes and transistors and for grouping elements of a circuit into a macro or ‘subcircuit’ description which can be reused throughout a circuit description. For instance, the file shown below is a representation of the schematic shown in Figure 26.2.

Small Signal Amplifier with Limit Diodes

*

*This circuit simulates a small signal amplifier

*with a diode limiter.

*

.dc Vin -1 1 .05

*

Vin       Input 0 DC            0

R_source  Input Amp_In        100

*

D_Neg     0 Amp_In            1n4148

D_Pos     Amp_In 0            1n4148

*

C1        Amp_In 0            1uF

X1        Amp_In 0 Amp.Out    Amplifier

R_Load    Amp_Out 0           1000

*

.model 1n4148 D (is=2.495E-09 rs=4.755E-01 n=1.679E+00

+ tt=3.030E-09 cjo=1.700E-12 vj=1 m=1.959E-01 bv=1.000E+02

+ ibv=1.000E-04)

*

.subckt Amplifier Input Common Output

E1        (Output Common) (Input Common) -10

R_Input   Input           Common 1meg

.ends Amplifier

*

.end


PIC
Figure 26.2: Example Circuit 2


This is the same basic circuit as in the initial example, with the addition of two components and some changes to the simulation file. The two diodes have been included to illustrate the use of device models, and the amplifier is implemented with a subcircuit. Additionally, this file shows the use of the swept DC control card.

Device Models Device models allow you to specify, when required, many of the parameters of the devices being simulated. In this example, model statements are used to define the silicon diodes. Electrically, the diodes serve to limit the voltage at the amplifier input to values between about ±700 millivolts. The diode is simulated by first declaring the “instance” of each diode with a device statement. Instead of attempting to provide parameter information separately for both diodes, the label “1n4148” alerts the simulator that a separate model statement is included in the file which provides the necessary electrical specifications for the device (“1n4148” is the part number for the type of diode the model is meant to simulate).

The model statement that provides this information is:

.model 1n4148 D (is=2.495E-09 rs=4.755E-01 n=1.679E+00 

+                tt=3.030E-09 cjo=1.700E-12 vj=1 m=1.959E-01 

+                bv=1.000E+02 ibv=1.000E-04)

The model statement always begins with the string “.model” followed by an identifier and the model type (D for diode, NPN for NPN transistors, etc).

The optional parameters (‘is’, ‘rs’, ‘n’, ‘etc.’) shown in this example configure the simulator’s mathematical model of the diode to match the specific behavior of a particular part (e.g. a “1n4148”).

Subcircuits In some applications, describing a device by embedding the required elements in the main circuit file, as is done for the amplifier in Figure 26.1, is not desirable. A hierarchical approach may be taken by using subcircuits. An example of a subcircuit statement is shown in the second circuit file:

X1 Amp_In 0 Amp_Out 

Amplifier Subcircuits are always identified by a device label beginning with “X”. Just as with other devices, all of the connected nodes are specified. Notice, in this example, that three nodes are used. Finally, the name of the subcircuit is specified. Elsewhere in the circuit file, the simulator looks for a statement of the form:

.subckt <Name> <Node1> <Node2> <Node3> ...

This statement specifies that the lines that follow are part of the Amplifier subcircuit, and that the three nodes listed are to be treated wherever they occur in the subcircuit definition as referring, respectively, to the nodes on the main circuit from which the subcircuit was called. Normal device, model, and comment statements may then follow. The subcircuit definition is concluded with a statement of the form:

.ends <Name>

26.1.1.3 XSPICE Code Models

In the previous example, the specification of the amplifier was accomplished by using a NGSPICE Voltage Controlled Voltage Source device. This is an idealization of the actual amplifier. Practical amplifiers include numerous non-ideal effects, such as offset error voltages and non-ideal input and output impedances. The accurate simulation of complex, real-world components can lead to cumbersome subcircuit files, long simulation run times, and difficulties in synthesizing the behavior to be modeled from a limited set of internal devices known to the simulator.

To address these problems, XSPICE allows you to create Code Models which simulate complex, non-ideal effects without the need to develop a subcircuit design. For example, the following file provides simulation of the circuit in Figure 26.2, but with the subcircuit amplifier replaced with a Code Model called ‘Amp’ that models several non-ideal effects including input and output impedance and input offset voltage.

Small Signal Amplifier 

* 

*This circuit simulates a small signal amplifier 

*with a diode limiter. 

* 

.dc Vin -1 1 .05 

* 

Vin       Input 0             DC 0 

R_source  Input Amp_In        100 

* 

D_Neg 0   Amp_In              1n4148 

D_Pos     Amp_In 0            1n4148 

*

C1        Amp_In 0            1uF 

A1        Amp_In 0 Amp_Out    Amplifier 

R_Load    Amp_Out 0           1000 

* 

.model 1n4148 D (is=2.495E-09 rs=4.755E-01 n=1.679E+00

+ tt=3.030E-09 cjo=1.700E-12 vj=1 m=1.959E-01 bv=1.000E+02 

+ ibv=1.000E-04)

*

.model Amplifier Amp (gain = -10 in_offset = 1e-3 

+                     rin = 1meg rout = 0.4) 

* 

.end

A statement with a device label beginning with “A” alerts the simulator that the device uses a Code Model. The model statement is similar in form to the one used to specify the diode. The model label ‘Amp’ directs XSPICE to use the code model with that name. Parameter information has been added to specify a gain of -10, an input offset of 1 millivolt, an input impedance of 1 meg ohm, and an output impedance of 0.4 ohm. Subsequent sections of this document detail the steps required to create such a Code Model and include it in the XSPICE simulator.

26.1.1.4 Node Bridge Models

When a mixed-mode simulator is used, some method must be provided for translating data between the different simulation algorithms. XSPICE’s Code Model support allows you to develop models that work under the analog simulation algorithm, the event-driven simulation algorithm, or both at once.

In XSPICE, models developed for the express purpose of translating between the different algorithms or between different User-Defined Node types are called “Node Bridge” models. For translations between the built-in analog and digital types, predefined node bridge models are included in the XSPICE Code Model Library.

26.1.1.5 Practical Model Development

In practice, developing models often involves using a combination of NGSPICE passive devices, device models, subcircuits, and XSPICE Code Models. XSPICE’s Code Models may be seen as an extension to the set of device models offered in standard NGSPICE. The collection of over 40 predefined Code Models included with XSPICE provides you with an enriched set of modeling primitives with which to build subcircuit models. In general, you should first attempt to construct your models from these available primitives. This is often the quickest and easiest method.

If you find that you cannot easily design a subcircuit to accomplish your goal using the available primitives, then you should turn to the code modeling approach. Because they are written in a general purpose programming language (C), code models enable you to simulate virtually any behavior for which you can develop a set of equations or algorithms.

26.2 Circuit Description Syntax

If you need to debug a simulation, if you are planning to develop your own models, or if you are using the XSPICE simulator through the Nutmeg user interface, you will need to become familiar with the circuit description language.

The previous sections presented example circuit description input files. The following sections provide more detail on XSPICE circuit descriptions with particular emphasis on the syntax for creating and using models. First, the language and syntax of the NGSPICE simulator are described and references to additional information are given. Next, XSPICE extensions to the ngspice syntax are detailed. Finally, various enhancements to NGSPICE operation are discussed including polynomial sources, arbitrary phase sources, supply ramping, matrix conditioning, convergence options, and debugging support.

26.2.1 XSPICE Syntax Extensions

In the preceding discussion, NGSPICE syntax was reviewed, and those features of NGSPICE that are specifically supported by the XSPICE simulator were enumerated. In addition to these features, there exist extensions to the NGSPICE capabilities that provide much more flexibility in describing and simulating a circuit. The following sections describe these capabilities, as well as the syntax required to make use of them.

26.2.1.1 Convergence Debugging Support

When a simulation is failing to converge, the simulator can be asked to return convergence diagnostic information that may be useful in identifying the areas of the circuit in which convergence problems are occurring. When running through the Nutmeg user interface, these messages are written directly to the terminal.

26.2.1.2 Digital Nodes

Support is included for digital nodes that are simulated by an event-driven algorithm. Because the event-driven algorithm is faster than the standard SPICE matrix solution algorithm, and because all “digital”, “real”, “int” and User-Defined Node types make use of the event-driven algorithm, reduced simulation time for circuits that include these models can be anticipated compared to simulation of the same circuit using analog code models and nodes.

26.2.1.3 User-Defined Nodes

Support is provided for User Defined Nodes that operate with the event-driven algorithm. These nodes allow the passing of arbitrary data structures among models. The real and integer node types supplied with XSPICE are actually predefined User-Defined Node types.

26.2.1.4 Supply Ramping

A supply ramping function is provided by the simulator as an option to a transient analysis to simulate the turn-on of power supplies to a board level circuit. To enable this option, the compile time flag XSPICE_EXP has to be set, e.g. by adding CFLAGS="-DXSPICE_EXP" to the ./configure command line. The supply ramping function linearly ramps the values of all independent sources and the capacitor and inductor code models (code model extension) with initial conditions toward their final value at a rate which you define. A complete ngspice deck example of usage of the ramptime option is shown below.

Example:
Supply ramping option 
* 
* This circuit demonstrates the use of the option 
* "ramptime" which ramps independent sources and the 
* capacitor and inductor initial conditions from 
* zero to their final value during the time period 
* specified. 
* 
* 
.tran 0.1 5 
.option ramptime=0.2 
* a1 1 0 cap 
.model cap capacitor (c=1000uf ic=1) 
r1 1 0 1k 
* 
a2 2 0 ind 
.model ind inductor (l=1H ic=1) 
r2 2 0 1.0 
* 
v1 3 0 1.0 
r3 3 0 1k 
* 
i1 4 0 1e-3 
r4 4 0 1k 
* 
v2 5 0 0.0 sin(0 1 0.3 0 0 45.0) 
r5 5 0 1k 
* 
.end

26.3 How to create code models

The following instruction to create an additional code model uses the ngspice infrastructure and some ’intelligent’ copy and paste. As an example an extra code model d_xxor is created in the xtradev shared library, reusing the existing d_xor model from the digital library. More detailed information will be made available in chapter 28.

You should have downloaded ngspice, either the most recent distribution or from the Git repository, and compiled and installed it properly according to your operating system and the instructions given in chapter 32 of the Appendix, especially chapt. 32.1.4 (for LINUX users), or chapt. 32.2.1 for MINGW and MS Windows (MS Visual Studio will not do, because we not yet have integrated the code model generator into this compiler! You may however use all code models later with any ngspice executable.) . Then Cd into directory ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtradev.

Create a new directory

mkdir d_xxor

Copy the two files cfunc.mod and ifspec.ifs from ngspice/src/xspice/icm/digital/d_xor to ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtradev/d_xxor. These two files may serve as a template for your new model!

For simplicity reasons we do only a very simple editing to these files here, in fact the functionality is not changed, just the name translated to a new model. Edit the new cfunc.mod: In lines 5, 28, 122, 138, 167, 178 replace the old name (d_xor) by the new name d_xxor. Edit the new ifspec.ifs: In lines 16, 23, 24 replace cm_d_xor by cm_d_xxor and d_xor by d_xxor.

Make ngspice aware of the new code model by editing file
ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtradev/modpath.lst:

Add a line with the new model name d_xxor.

Redo ngspice by entering directory ngspice/release, and issuing the commands:

make

sudo make install

And that’s it! In ngspice/release/src/xspice/icm/xtradev/ you now will find cfunc.c and ifspec.c and the corresponding object files. The new code model d_xxor resides in the shared library xtradev.cm, and is available after ngspice is started. As a test example you may edit
ngspice/src/xspice/examples/digital_models1.deck, and change line 60 to the new model:

.model d_xor1 d_xxor (rise_delay=1.0e-6 fall_delay=2.0e-6 input_load=1.0e-12)

The complete input file follows:

Code Model Test: new xxor 
* 
*** analysis type *** 
.tran .01s 4s 
* 
*** input sources *** 
* 
v2 200 0 DC PWL( (0 0.0) (2 0.0) (2.0000000001 1.0) (3 1.0) ) 
* 
v1 100 0 DC PWL( (0 0.0) (1.0 0.0) (1.0000000001 1.0) (2 1.0) 
+     (2.0000000001 0.0) (3 0.0) (3.0000000001 1.0) (4 1.0) ) 
* 
*** resistors to ground *** 
r1 100 0 1k 
r2 200 0 1k 
* 
*** adc_bridge blocks *** 
aconverter [200 100] [2 1] adc_bridge1 
.model adc_bridge1 adc_bridge (in_low=0.1 in_high=0.9 
+                  rise_delay=1.0e-12 fall_delay=1.0e-12) 
* 
*** xor block *** 
a7 [1 2] 70 d_xor1 
.model d_xor1 d_xxor (rise_delay=1.0e-6 fall_delay=2.0e-6 
+                    input_load=1.0e-12) 
* 
*** dac_bridge blocks **** 
abridge1 [70] [out] dac1 
.model dac1 dac_bridge(out_low = 0.7 out_high = 3.5 
+ out_undef = 2.2 input_load = 5.0e-12 t_rise = 50e-9 
+ t_fall = 20e-9) 
* 
*** simulation and plotting *** 
.control 
run 
plot allv 
.endc 
* 
.end

An analog input, delivered by the pwl voltage sources, is transformed into the digital domain by an adc_bridge, processed by the new code model d_xxor, and then translated back into the analog domain.

If you want to change the functionality of the new model, you have to edit ifspec.ifs for the code model interface and cfunc.mod for the detailed functionality of the new model. Please see chapter 28, especially chapters 28.6 ff. for any details. And of course you may take the existing analog, digital, mixed signal and other existing code models (to be found in the subdirectories to ngspice/release/src/xspice/icm) as stimulating examples for your work.

Chapter 27
Example circuits

The following chapter is designed to demonstrate XSPICE features. The first example circuit models the circuit of Figure 26.2 using the XSPICE gain block code model to substitute for the more complex and computationally expensive ngspice transistor model. This example illustrates one way in which XSPICE code models can be used to raise the level of abstraction in circuit modeling to improve simulation speed.

The next example, shown in Figure 27.1, illustrates many of the more advanced features offered by XSPICE. This circuit is a mixed-mode design incorporating digital data, analog data, and User-Defined Node data together in the same simulation. Some of the important features illustrated include:

Throughout these examples, we assume that ngspice with XSPICE option has already been installed on your system and that your user account has been set up with the proper search path and environment variable data.

The examples also assume that you are running under LINUX and will use standard LINUX commands such as “cp” for copying files, etc. If you are using a different set up, with different operating system command names, you should be able to translate the commands shown into those suitable for your installation. Finally, file system path-names given in the examples assume that ngspice + XSPICE has been installed on your system in directory “/usr/local/xspice-1-0”. If your installation is different, you should substitute the appropriate root path-name where appropriate.

27.1 Amplifier with XSPICE model “gain”

The circuit, as has been shown in Figure 26.2, is extended here by using the XSPICE code model "gain". The ngspice circuit description for this circuit is shown below.

Example:

A transistor amplifier circuit 
* 
.tran 1e-5 2e-
* 
vin 1 0 0.0 ac 1.0 sin(0 1 1k) 
* 
ccouple 1 in 10uF 
rzin in 0 19.35k 
* 
aamp in aout gain_block 
.model gain_block gain (gain = -3.9 out_offset = 7.003) 
* 
rzout aout coll 3.9k 
rbig coll 0 1e12 
* 
.end

Notice the component "aamp". This is an XSPICE code model device. All XSPICE code model devices begin with the letter "a" to distinguish them from other ngspice devices. The actual code model used is referenced through a user-defined identifier at the end of the line - in this case"gain_block". The type of code model used and its parameters appear on the associated .model card. In this example, the gain has been specified as -3.9 to approximate the gain of the transistor amplifier, and the output offset (out_offset) has been set to 7.003 according to the DC bias point information obtained from the DC analysis in Example 1.

Notice also that input and output impedances of the one-transistor amplifier circuit are modeled with the resistors "rzin" and "rzout", since the "gain" code model defaults to an ideal voltage-input, voltage-output device with infinite input impedance and zero output impedance.

Lastly, note that a special resistor "rbig" with value "1e12" has been included at the opposite side of the output impedance resistor "rzout". This resistor is required by ngspice’s matrix solution formula. Without it, the resistor "rzout" would have only one connection to the circuit, and an ill-formed matrix could result. One way to avoid such problems without adding resistors explicitly is to use the ngspice "rshunt" option described in this document under ngspice Syntax Extensions/General Enhancements.

To simulate this circuit, copy the file xspice_c2.cir from the directory /src/xspice/examples into a directory in your account.

$ cp /examples/xspice/xspice_c2.cir xspice_c2.cir

Invoke the simulator on this circuit:

$ ngspice xspice_c2.cir 

After a few moments, you should see the ngspice prompt:

ngspice 1 -> 

Now issue the "run" command and when the prompt returns, issue the "plot" command to examine the voltage at the node "coll".

ngspice 1 -> run 

ngspice 2 -> plot coll

The resulting waveform closely matches that from the original transistor amplifier circuit simulated in Example 1.

When you are done, enter the "quit" command to leave the simulator and return to the command line.

ngspice 3 -> quit 

So long.

Using the "rusage" command, you can verify that this abstract model of the transistor amplifier runs somewhat faster than the full circuit of Example 1. This is because the code model is less complex computationally. This demonstrates one important use of XSPICE code models - to reduce run time by modeling circuits at a higher level of abstraction. Speed improvements vary and are most pronounced when a large amount of low-level circuitry can be replaced by a small number of code models and additional components.

27.2 XSPICE advanced usage

27.2.1 Circuit example C3

An equally important use of code models is in creating models for circuits and systems that do not easily lend themselves to synthesis using standard ngspice primitives (resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, etc.). This occurs often when trying to create models of ICs for use in simulating board-level designs. Creating models of operational amplifiers such as an LM741 or timer ICs such as an LM555 is greatly simplified through the use of XSPICE code models. Another example of code model use is shown in the next example where a complete sampled-data system is simulated using XSPICE analog, digital, and User-Defined Node types simultaneously.


PIC

Figure 27.1: Example Circuit C3


The circuit shown in Figure 27.1 is designed to demonstrate several of the more advanced features of XSPICE. In this example, you will be introduced to the process of creating code models and linking them into ngspice. You will also learn how to print and plot the results of event-driven analysis data. The ngspice/XSPICE circuit description for this example is shown below.

Example:

Mixed IO types 
* This circuit contains a mixture of IO types, including 
* analog, digital, user-defined (real), and ’null’. 
* 
* The circuit demonstrates the use of the digital and 
* user-defined node capability to model system-level designs 
* such as sampled-data filters. The simulated circuit 
* contains a digital oscillator enabled after 100us. The 
* square wave oscillator output is divided by 8 with a 
* ripple counter. The result is passed through a digital 
* filter to convert it to a sine wave. 
* 
.tran 1e-5 1e-
* 
v1 1 0 0.0 pulse(0 1 1e-4 1e-6) 
r1 1 0 1k 
* 
abridge1 [1] [enable] atod 
.model atod adc_bridge 
* 
aclk [enable clk] clk nand 
.model nand d_nand (rise_delay=1e-5 fall_delay=1e-5) 
* 
adiv2 div2_out clk NULL NULL NULL div2_out dff 
adiv4 div4_out div2_out NULL NULL NULL div4_out dff 
adiv8 div8_out div4_out NULL NULL NULL div8_out dff 
.model dff d_dff

Example (continued):

abridge2 div8_out enable filt_in node_bridge2 
.model node_bridge2 d_to_real (zero=-1 one=1) 
* 
xfilter filt_in clk filt_out dig_filter 
* 
abridge3 filt_out a_out node_bridge3 
.model node_bridge3 real_to_v 
* 
rlpf1 a_out oa_minus 10k 
* 
xlpf 0 oa_minus lpf_out opamp 
* 
rlpf2 oa_minus lpf_out 10k 
clpf lpf_out oa_minus 0.01uF 
*************************************** 
.subckt dig_filter filt_in clk filt_out 
.model n0 real_gain (gain=1.0) 
.model n1 real_gain (gain=2.0) 
.model n2 real_gain (gain=1.0) 
.model g1 real_gain (gain=0.125) 
.model zm1 real_delay 
.model d0a real_gain (gain=-0.75) 
.model d1a real_gain (gain=0.5625) 
.model d0b real_gain (gain=-0.3438) 
.model d1b real_gain (gain=1.0) 
* 
an0a filt_in x0a n0 
an1a filt_in x1a n1 
an2a filt_in x2a n2 
* 
az0a x0a clk x1a zm1 
az1a x1a clk x2a zm1 
* 
ad0a x2a x0a d0a 
ad1a x2a x1a d1a 
* 
az2a x2a filt1_out g1 
az3a filt1_out clk filt2_in zm1 
* 
an0b filt2_in x0b n0 
an1b filt2_in x1b n1 
an2b filt2_in x2b n2 
* 
az0b x0b clk x1b zm1 
az1b x1b clk x2b zm1 
* 
ad0 x2b x0b d0b 
ad1 x2b x1b d1b 
* 
az2b x2b clk filt_out zm1 
.ends dig_filter

Example (continued):

.subckt opamp plus minus out 
* 
r1 plus minus 300k 
a1 %vd (plus minus) outint lim 
.model lim limit (out_lower_limit = -12 out_upper_limit = 12 
+ fraction = true limit_range = 0.2 gain=300e3) 
r3 outint out 50.0 
r2 out 0 1e12 
* 
.ends opamp 
* 
.end

This circuit is a high-level design of a sampled-data filter. An analog step waveform (created from a ngspice "pulse" waveform) is introduced as "v1" and converted to digital by code model instance "abridge". This digital data is used to enable a Nand-Gate oscillator ("aclk") after a short delay. The Nand-Gate oscillator generates a square-wave clock signal with a period of approximately two times the gate delay, which is specified as 1e-5 seconds. This 50 KHz clock is divided by a series of D Flip Flops ("adiv2", "adiv4", "adiv8") to produce a square-wave at approximately 6.25 KHz. Note particularly the use of the reserved word "NULL" for certain nodes on the D Flip Flops. This tells the code model that there is no node connected to these ports of the flip flop.

The divide-by-8 and enable waveforms are converted by the instance "abridge2" to the format required by the User-Defined Node type "real", which expected real-valued data. The output of this instance on node "filt_in" is a real valued square wave which oscillates between values of -1 and 1. Note that the associated code model "d_to_real" is not part of the original XSPICE code model library but has been added later to ngspice.

This signal is then passed through subcircuit "xfilter" which contains a digital low-pass filter clocked by node "clk". The result of passing this square-wave through the digital low-pass filter is the production of a sampled sine wave (the filter passes only the fundamental of the square-wave input) on node "filt_out". This signal is then converted back to ngspice analog data on node "a_out" by node bridge instance "abridge3".

The resulting analog waveform is then passed through an op-amp-based low-pass analog filter constructed around subcircuit "xlpf" to produce the final output at analog node "lpf_out".

27.2.2 Running example C3

Now copy the file "xspice_c3.cir" from directory /examples/xspice/ into the current directory:

$ cp /examples/xspice/xspice_c3.cir xspice_c3.cir

and invoke the new simulator executable as you did in the previous examples.

$ ngspice xspice_c3.cir

Execute the simulation with the "run" command.

ngspice 1 -> run 

After a short time, the ngspice prompt should return. Results of this simulation are examined in the manner illustrated in the previous two examples. You can use the "plot" command to plot either analog nodes, event-driven nodes, or both. For example, you can plot the values of the sampled-data filter input node and the analog low-pass filter output node as follows:

ngspice 2 -> plot filt_in lpf_out

The plot shown in Figure 27.2 should appear.


PIC

Figure 27.2: Nutmeg Plot of Filter Input and Output


You can also plot data from nodes inside a subcircuit. For example, to plot the data on node "x1a" in subcircuit "xfilter", create a pathname to this node with a dot separator.

ngspice 3 -> plot xfilter.x1a 

The output from this command is shown in Figure 27.3. Note that the waveform contains vertical segments. These segments are caused by the non-zero delays in the "real gain" models used within the subcircuit. Each vertical segment is actually a step with a width equal to the model delay (1e-9 seconds).

Plotting nodes internal to subcircuits works for both analog and event-driven nodes.


PIC

Figure 27.3: Nutmeg Plot of Subcircuit Internal Node


To examine data such as the closely spaced events inside the subcircuit at node "xfilter.x1a", it is often convenient to use the "eprint" command to produce a tabular listing of events. Try this by entering the following command:

ngspice 4 -> eprint xfilter.x1a 
**** Results Data **** Time or Step

xfilter.x1a

0.000000000e+000 0.000000e+000  1.010030000e-004 2.000000e+000

1.010040000e-004 2.562500e+000  1.210020000e-004 2.812500e+000

1.210030000e-004 4.253906e+000  1.410020000e-004 2.332031e+000

1.410030000e-004 3.283447e+000  1.610020000e-004 2.014893e+000

1.610030000e-004 1.469009e+000  1.810020000e-004 2.196854e+000

1.810030000e-004 1.176232e+000

...

9.610030000e-004 3.006294e-001  9.810020000e-004 2.304755e+000

9.810030000e-004 9.506230e-001  9.810090000e-004 -3.049377e+000

9.810100000e-004 -4.174377e+000

**** Messages ****

**** Statistics ****

Operating point analog/event alternations: 1

Operating point load calls: 37

Operating point event passes: 2

Transient analysis load calls: 4299

Transient analysis timestep backups: 87

This command produces a tabular listing of event-times in the first column and node values in the second column. The 1 ns delays can be clearly seen in the fifth decimal place of the event times.

Note that the eprint command also gives statistics from the event-driven algorithm portion of XSPICE. For this example, the simulator alternated between the analog solution algorithm and the event-driven algorithm one time while performing the initial DC operating point solution prior to the start of the transient analysis. During this operating point analysis, 37 total calls were made to event-driven code model functions, and two separate event passes or iterations were required before the event nodes obtained stable values. Once the transient analysis commenced, there were 4299 total calls to event-driven code model functions. Lastly, the analog simulation algorithm performed 87 time-step backups that forced the event-driven simulator to backup its state data and its event queues.

A similar output is obtained when printing the values of digital nodes. For example, print the values of the node "div8 out" as follows:

ngspice 5 -> eprint div8_out 
**** Results Data **** Time or Step

div8_out

0.000000000e+000 1s

1.810070000e-004 0s

2.610070000e-004 1s

...

9.010070000e-004 1s

9.810070000e-004 0s

**** Messages ****

**** Statistics ****

Operating point analog/event alternations: 1

Operating point load calls: 37

Operating point event passes: 2

Transient analysis load calls: 4299

Transient analysis timestep backups: 87

From this printout, we see that digital node values are composed of a two character string. The first character (0, 1, or U) gives the state of the node (logic zero, logic one, or unknown logic state). The second character (s, r, z, u) gives the "strength" of the logic state (strong, resistive, hi-impedance, or undetermined).

If you wish, examine other nodes in this circuit with either the plot or eprint commands. When you are done, enter the "quit" command to exit the simulator and return to the operating system prompt:

ngspice 6 -> quit 

So long.

Chapter 28
Code Models and User-Defined Nodes

The following sections explain the steps required to create code models and User-Defined Nodes (UDNs), store them in shared libraries and load them into the simulator at runtime. The ngspice simulator already includes XSPICE libraries of predefined models and node types that span the analog and digital domains. These have been detailed earlier in this document (see Sections 12.2, 12.3, and 12.4). However, the real power of the XSPICE is in its support for extending these libraries with new models written by users. ngspice includes an XSPICE code model generator. Adding code models to ngspice will require a model definition plus some simple file operations, which are explained in this chapter.

The original manual cited an XSPICE “Code Model Toolkit” that enabled one to define new models and node data types to be passed between them offline, independent from ngspice. Whereas this Toolkit is still available in the original source code distribution at the XSPICE web page, it is neither required nor supported any more.

So we make use of the existing XSPICE infrastructure provided with ngspice to create new code models. With an ’intelligent’ copy and paste, and the many available code models serving as a guide you will be quickly able to create your own models. You have to have a compiler (gcc) available under LINUX, MS Windows (Cygwin, MINGW), maybe also for other OSs, including supporting software (Flex, Bison, and the autotools if you start from Git sources). The compilation procedures for ngspice are described in detail in chapter 32. Adding a code model may then require defining the functionality , interface, and eventually user defined nodes. Compiling into a shared library is only a simple ’make’, loading the shared lib(s) into ngspice is done by the ngspice command codemodel... (see chapt. 17.5.11). This will allow you to either add some code model to an existing library, or you may generate a new library with your own code models. The latter is of interest if you want to distribute your code models independently from the ngspice sources or executables.

These new code models are handled by ngspice in a manner analogous to its treating of SPICE devices and XSPICE Predefined Code Models. The basic steps required to create sources for new code models or User-Defined Nodes, compile them and load them into ngspice are similar. They consist of 1) creating the code model or UserDefined Node (UDN) directory and its associated model or data files, 2) inform ngspice about which code model or UDN directories have to be compiled and linked into ngspice, 3) compile them into a shared lib, and 4) load them into the ngspice simulator upon runtime. All code models finally reside in dynamically linkable shared libraries (*.cm), which in fact are .so files under LINUX or dlls under MS Windows. Currently we have 5 of them (analog.cm, digital.cm, spice2poly.cm, xtradev.cm, xtraevt.cm). Upon start up of ngspice they are dynamically loaded into the simulator by the ngspice codemodel command (which is located in file .spinit (see chapt. 16.5) for the standard code models). Once you have added your new code model into one of these libraries (or have created a new library file, e.g. my-own.cm), instances of the model can be placed into any simulator deck that describes a circuit of interest and simulated along with all of the other components in that circuit.

A quick entry to get a new code model has already been presented in chapter 26.3. You may find the details of the XSPICE language in chapters 28.6 ff.

28.1 Code Model Data Type Definitions

There are three data types which you can incorporate into a model and which have already been used extensively in the code model library included with the simulator. These are detailed below:

Boolean_t The Boolean type is an enumerated type which can take on values of FALSE (integer value 0) or TRUE (integer value 1). Alternative names for these enumerations are MIF FALSE and MIF TRUE, respectively.

Complex_t The Complex type is a structure composed of two double values. The first of these is the .real type, and the second is the .imag type. Typically these values are accessed as shown:

For complex value “data”, the real portion is “data.real”, and the imaginary portion is “data.imag”.

Digital_State_t The Digital State type is an enumerated value which can be either ZERO (integer value 0), ONE (integer value 1), or UNKNOWN (integer value 2).

Digital_Strength_t The Digital Strength type is an enumerated value which can be either STRONG (integer value 0), RESISTIVE (integer value 1), HI IMPEDANCE (integer value 2) or UNDETERMINED (integer value 3).

Digital_t The Digital type is a composite of the Digital_State_t and Digital_Strength_t enumerated data types. The actual variable names within the Digital type are .state and .strength and are accessed as shown below:

For Digital_t value “data”, the state portion is “data.state”, and the strength portion is “data.strength”.

28.2 Creating Code Models

The following description deals with extending one of the five existing code model libraries. Adding a new library is described in chapter 28.4. The first step in creating a new code model within XSPICE is to create a model directory inside of the selected library directory. The new directory name is the name of the new code model. As an example you may add a directory d_counter to the library directory digital.

cd ngspice/src/xspice/icm/digital

mkdir d_counter

Into this new directory you copy the following template files:

You may choose any of the existing files which are similar to the new code model you intend to integrate. The template Interface Specification File (ifspec.ifs) is edited to define the model’s inputs, outputs, parameters, etc (see chapt. 28.6). You then edit the template Model Definition File (cfunc.mod) to include the C-language source code that defines the model behavior (see chapt. 28.7). As a final step you have to notify ngspice of the new code model. You have to edit the file modpath.lst which resides in the library directory ngspice/src/xspice/icm/digital. Just add the entry d_counter to this file.

The Interface Specification File is a text file that describes, in a tabular format, information needed for the code model to be properly interpreted by the simulator when it is placed with other circuit components into a SPICE deck. This information includes such things as the parameter names, parameter default values, and the name of the model itself. The specific format presented to you in the Interface Specification File template must be followed exactly, but is quite straightforward. A detailed description of the required syntax, along with numerous examples, is included in Section 28.6.

The Model Definition File contains a C programming language function definition. This function specifies the operations to be performed within the model on the data passed to it by the simulator. Special macros are provided that allow the function to retrieve input data and return output data. Similarly, macros are provided to allow for such things as storage of information between iteration time-points and sending of error messages. Section 28.7 describes the form and function of the Model Definition File in detail and lists the support macros provided within the simulator for use in code models.

To allow compiling and linking (see chapt. 28.5) you have at least to adapt the names of the functions inside of the two copied files to get unique function and model names. If for example you have chosen ifspec.ifs and cfunc.mod from model d_fdiv as your template, simply replace all entries d_fdiv by d_counter inside of the two files.

28.3 Creating User-Defined Nodes

In addition to providing the capability of adding new models to the simulator, a facility exists which allows node types other than those found in standard SPICE to be created. Models may be constructed which pass information back and forth via these nodes. Such models are constructed in the manner described in the previous sections, with appropriate changes to the Interface Specification and Model Definition Files.

Because of the need of electrical engineers to have ready access to both digital and analog simulation capabilities, the “digital” node type is provided as a built-in node type along with standard SPICE analog nodes. For “digital” nodes, extensive support is provided in the form of macros and functions so that you can treat this node type as a standard type analogous to standard SPICE analog nodes when creating and using code models. In addition to “analog” and “digital” nodes, the node types “real” and “int” are also provided with the simulator. These were created using the User-Defined Node (UDN) creation facilities described below and may serve as a template for further node types.

The first step in creating a new node type within XSPICE is to set up a node type directory along with the appropriate template files needed.

cd ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtraevt

mkdir <directory name>

<directory name> should be the name of the new type to be defined. Copy file udnfunc.c from /icm/xtraevt/int into the new directory. Edit this file according to the new type you want to create.

Notify ngspice about this new UDN directory by editing
ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtraevt/udnpath.lst. Add a new line containing <directory name>. For compiling and linking see chapt. 28.5.

The UDN Definition File contains a set of C language functions. These functions perform operations such as allocating space for data structures, initializing them, and comparing them to each other. Section 28.8 describes the form and function of the User-Defined Node Definition File in detail and includes an example UDN Definition File.

28.4 Adding a new code model library

A group of code models may be assembled into a library. A new library is a means to distribute new code models, independently from the existing ones. This is the way to generate a new code model library:

cd ngspice/src/xspice/icm/

mkdir <directory name>

<directory name> is the name of the new library. Copy empty files modpath.lst and udnpath.lst into this directory.

Edit file ngspice/src/xspice/icm/GNUmakefile.in, add <directory name> to the end of line 10, which starts with CMDIRS = ... .

That’s all you have to do about a new library! Of course it is empty right now, so you have to define at least one code model according to the procedure described in chapt. 28.2.

28.5 Compiling and loading the new code model (library)

Compiling is now as simple as issuing the commands

cd ngspice/release

make

sudo make install

if you have installed ngspice according to chapter 32.1.4. This procedure will install the code model libraries into a directory <prefix>/lib/spice/, e.g. C:/Spice/lib/spice/ for standard Windows install or /usr/local/lib/spice/ for LINUX.

Thus the code model libraries are not linked into ngspice at compile time, but may be loaded at runtime using the codemodel command (see chapt. 17.5.11). This is done automatically for the predefined code model libraries upon starting ngspice. The appropriate commands are provided in the start up file spinit (see chapt. 16.5). So if you have added a new code model inside of one of the existing libraries, nothing has to be done, you will have immediate access to your new model.

If you have generated a new code model library, e.g. new_lib.cm, then you have to add the line

@XSPICEINIT@ codemodel @prefix@/@libname@/spice/new_lib.cm

to spinit.in in ngspice/src. This will create a new spinit if ngspice is recompiled from scratch.

To avoid the need for recompilation of ngspice, you also may directly edit the file spinit by adding the line

codemodel C:/Spice/lib/spice/new_lib.cm

(OS MS Windows) or the appropriate LINUX equivalent. Upon starting ngspice, the new library will be loaded and you have access to the new code model(s). The codemodel command has to be executed upon start-up of ngspice, so that the model information is available as soon as the circuit is parsed. Failing to do so will lead to an error message of a model missing. So spinit (or .spiceinit for personal code model libraries) is the correct place for codemodel.

28.6 Interface Specification File

The Interface Specification (IFS) file is a text file that describes the model’s naming information, its expected input and output ports, its expected parameters, and any variables within the model that are to be used for storage of data across an entire simulation. These four types of data are described to the simulator in IFS file sections labeled NAME TABLE, PORT TABLE, PARAMETER TABLE and STATIC VAR TABLE, respectively. An example IFS file is given below. The example is followed by detailed descriptions of each of the entries, what they signify, and what values are acceptable for them. Keywords are case insensitive.

NAME_TABLE: 

C_Function_Name:    ucm_xfer 

Spice_Model_Name:   xfer 

Description:        "arbitrary transfer function" 
PORT_TABLE: 

Port_Name:          in             out 

Description:        "input"        "output" 

Direction:          in             out 

Default_Type:       v              v 

Allowed_Types:      [v,vd,i,id]    [v,vd,i,id] 

Vector: no no 

Vector_Bounds:      -              - 

Null_Allowed:       no             no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     in_offset      gain 

Description:        "input offset" "gain" 

Data_Type:          real           real 

Default_Value:      0.0            1.0 

Limits:             -              - 

Vector:             no             no 

Vector_Bounds:      -              - 

Null_Allowed:       yes            yes

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     num_coeff 

Description:        "numerator polynomial coefficients" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      - 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -] 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     den_coeff 

Description:        "denominator polynomial coefficients" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      - 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      [1 -] 

Null_Allowed:       no

PARAMETER_TABLE: 

Parameter_Name:     int_ic 

Description:        "integrator stage initial conditions" 

Data_Type:          real 

Default_Value:      0.0 

Limits:             - 

Vector:             yes 

Vector_Bounds:      den_coeff 

Null_Allowed:       yes

STATIC_VAR_TABLE: 

Static_Var_Name:    x 

Data_Type:          pointer 

Description:        "x-coefficient array"

28.6.1 The Name Table

The name table is introduced by the “Name_Table:” keyword. It defines the code model’s C function name, the name used on a .MODEL card, and an optional textual description. The following sections define the valid fields that may be specified in the Name Table.

28.6.1.1 C Function Name

The C function name is a valid C identifier which is the name of the function for the code model. It is introduced by the “C_Function_Name:” keyword followed by a valid C identifier. To reduce the chance of name conflicts, it is recommended that user-written code model names use the prefix “ucm_” for this entry. Thus, in the example given above, the model name is “xfer”, but the C function is “ucm_xfer”. Note that when you subsequently write the model function in the Model Definition File, this name must agree with that of the function (i.e., “ucm_xfer”), or an error will result in the linking step.

28.6.1.2 SPICE Model Name

The SPICE model name is a valid SPICE identifier that will be used on SPICE .MODEL cards to refer to this code model. It may or may not be the same as the C function name. It is introduced by the “Spice_Model_Name:” keyword followed by a valid SPICE identifier.

Description The description string is used to describe the purpose and function of the code model. It is introduced by the “Description:” keyword followed by a C string literal.

28.6.2 The Port Table

The port table is introduced by the “Port_Table:” keyword. It defines the set of valid ports available to the code model. The following sections define the valid fields that may be specified in the port table.

28.6.2.1 Port Name

The port name is a valid SPICE identifier. It is introduced by the “Port_Name:” keyword followed by the name of the port. Note that this port name will be used to obtain and return input and output values within the model function. This will be discussed in more detail in the next section.

28.6.2.2 Description

The description string is used to describe the purpose and function of the code model. It is introduced by the “Description:” keyword followed by a C string literal.

28.6.2.3 Direction

The direction of a port specifies the data flow direction through the port. A direction must be one of “in”, “out”, or “inout”. It is introduced by the “Direction:” keyword followed by a valid direction value.

28.6.2.4 Default Type

The Default_Type field specifies the type of a port. These types are identical to those used to define the port types on a SPICE deck instance card (see Table 12.1), but without the percent sign (%) preceding them. Table 28.1 summarizes the allowable types.

28.6.2.5 Allowed Types

A port must specify the types it is allowed to assume. An allowed type value must be a list of type names (a blank or comma separated list of names delimited by square brackets, e.g. “[v vd i id]” or “[d]”). The type names must be taken from those listed in Table 28.1.

28.6.2.6 Vector

A port which is a vector can be thought of as a bus. The Vector field is introduced with the “Vector:” keyword followed by a Boolean value: “YES”, “TRUE”, “NO” or “FALSE”.





Default Types



Type Description Valid Directions






d digital in or out



g conductance (VCCS) inout



gd differential conductance (VCCS) inout



h resistance (CCVS) inout



hd differential resistance (CCVS) inout



i current in or out



id differential current in or out



v voltage in or out



vd differential voltage in or out



<identifier> user-defined type in or out




Table 28.1: Port Types

The values “YES” and “TRUE” are equivalent and specify that this port is a vector. Likewise, “NO” and “FALSE” specify that the port is not a vector. Vector ports must have a corresponding vector bounds field that specifies valid sizes of the vector port.

28.6.2.7 Vector Bounds

If a port is a vector, limits on its size must be specified in the vector bounds field. The Vector Bounds field specifies the upper and lower bounds on the size of a vector. The Vector Bounds field is usually introduced by the “Vector_Bounds:” keyword followed by a range of integers (e.g. “[1 7]” or “[3, 20]”). The lower bound of the vector specifies the minimum number of elements in the vector; the upper bound specifies the maximum number of elements. If the range is unconstrained, or the associated port is not a vector, the vector bounds may be specified by a hyphen (“-”). Using the hyphen convention, partial constraints on the vector bound may be defined (e.g., “[2, -]” indicates that the least number of port elements allowed is two, but there is no maximum number).

28.6.2.8 Null Allowed

In some cases, it is desirable to permit a port to remain unconnected to any electrical node in a circuit. The Null_Allowed field specifies whether this constitutes an error for a particular port. The Null_Allowed field is introduced by the “Null_Allowed:” keyword and is followed by a boolean constant: “YES”, “TRUE”, “NO” or “FALSE”. The values “YES” and “TRUE” are equivalent and specify that it is legal to leave this port unconnected. “NO” or “FALSE” specify that the port must be connected.

28.6.3 The Parameter Table

The parameter table is introduced by the “Parameter_Table:” keyword. It defines the set of valid parameters available to the code model. The following sections define the valid fields that may be specified in the parameter table.

28.6.3.1 Parameter Name

The parameter name is a valid SPICE identifier which will be used on SPICE .MODEL cards to refer to this parameter. It is introduced by the “Parameter_Name:” keyword followed by a valid SPICE identifier.

28.6.3.2 Description

The description string is used to describe the purpose and function of the parameter. It is introduced by the “Description:” keyword followed by a string literal.

28.6.3.3 Data Type

The parameter’s data type is specified by the Data Type field. The Data Type field is introduced by the keyword “Data_Type:” and is followed by a valid data type. Valid data types include boolean, complex, int, real, and string.

28.6.3.4 Null Allowed

The Null_Allowed field is introduced by the “Null_Allowed:” keyword and is followed by a boolean literal. A value of “TRUE” or “YES” specify that it is valid for the corresponding SPICE .MODEL card to omit a value for this parameter. If the parameter is omitted, the default value is used. If there is no default value, an undefined value is passed to the code model, and the PARAM_NULL( ) macro will return a value of “TRUE” so that defaulting can be handled within the model itself. If the value of Null_Allowed is “FALSE” or “NO”, then the simulator will flag an error if the SPICE .MODEL card omits a value for this parameter.

28.6.3.5 Default Value

If the Null_Allowed field specifies “TRUE” for this parameter, then a default value may be specified. This value is supplied for the parameter in the event that the SPICE .MODEL card does not supply a value for the parameter. The default value must be of the correct type. The Default Value field is introduced by the “Default_Value:” keyword and is followed by a numeric, boolean, complex, or string literal, as appropriate.

28.6.3.6 Limits

Integer and real parameters may be constrained to accept a limited range of values. The following range syntax is used whenever such a range of values is required. A range is specified by a square bracket followed by a value representing a lower bound separated by space from another value representing an upper bound and terminated with a closing square bracket (e.g.”[0 10]”). The lower and upper bounds are inclusive. Either the lower or the upper bound may be replaced by a hyphen (“-”) to indicate that the bound is unconstrained (e.g. “[10 -]” is read as “the range of values greater than or equal to 10”). For a totally unconstrained range, a single hyphen with no surrounding brackets may be used. The parameter value limit is introduced by the “Limits:” keyword and is followed by a range.

28.6.3.7 Vector

The Vector field is used to specify whether a parameter is a vector or a scalar. Like the PORT TABLE Vector field, it is introduced by the “Vector:” keyword and followed by a boolean value. “TRUE” or “YES” specify that the parameter is a vector. “FALSE” or “NO” specify that it is a scalar.

28.6.3.8 Vector Bounds

The valid sizes for a vector parameter are specified in the same manner as are port sizes (see Section 28.6.2.7). However, in place of using a numeric range to specify valid vector bounds it is also possible to specify the name of a port. When a parameter’s vector bounds are specified in this way, the size of the vector parameter must be the same as the associated vector port.

28.6.4 Static Variable Table

The Static Variable table is introduced by the “Static_Var_Table:” keyword. It defines the set of valid static variables available to the code model. These are variables whose values are retained between successive invocations of the code model by the simulator. The following sections define the valid fields that may be specified in the Static Variable Table.

28.6.4.1 Name

The Static variable name is a valid C identifier that will be used in the code model to refer to this static variable. It is introduced by the “Static_Var_Name:” keyword followed by a valid C identifier.

28.6.4.2 Description

The description string is used to describe the purpose and function of the static variable. It is introduced by the “Description:” keyword followed by a string literal.

28.6.4.3 Data Type

The static variable’s data type is specified by the Data Type field. The Data Type field is introduced by the keyword “Data_Type:” and is followed by a valid data type. Valid data types include boolean, complex, int, real, string and pointer.

Note that pointer types are used to specify vector values; in such cases, the allocation of memory for vectors must be handled by the code model through the use of the malloc() or calloc() C function. Such allocation must only occur during the initialization cycle of the model (which is identified in the code model by testing the INIT macro for a value of TRUE). Otherwise, memory will be unnecessarily allocated each time the model is called.

Following is an example of the method used to allocate memory to be referenced by a static pointer variable “x” and subsequently use the allocated memory. The example assumes that the value of “size” is at least 2, else an error would result. The references to STATIC_VAR(x) that appear in the example illustrate how to set the value of, and then access, a static variable named “x”. In order to use the variable “x” in this manner, it must be declared in the Static Variable Table of the code model’s Interface Specification File.

/* Define local pointer variable */ 
double *local.x; 
 
/* Allocate storage to be referenced by the static variable x. */ 
/* Do this only if this is the initial call of the code model. */ 
if (INIT == TRUE) { 
    STATIC_VAR(x) = calloc(size, sizeof(double)); 
} 
 
/* Assign the value from the static pointer value to the local */ 
/* pointer variable. */ 
local_x = STATIC_VAR(x); 
 
/* Assign values to first two members of the array */ 
local_x[0] = 1.234; 
local_x[1] = 5.678;

28.7 Model Definition File

The Model Definition File is a C source code file that defines a code model’s behavior given input values which are passed to it by the simulator. The file itself is always given the name “cfunc.mod”. In order to allow for maximum flexibility, passing of input, output, and simulator-specific information is handled through accessor macros, which are described below. In addition, certain predefined library functions (e.g. smoothing interpolators, complex arithmetic routines) are included in the simulator in order to ease the burden of the code model programmer. These are also described below.

28.7.1 Macros

The use of the accessor macros is illustrated in the following example. Note that the argument to most accessor macros is the name of a parameter or port as defined in the Interface Specification File. Note also that all accessor macros except “ARGS” resolve to an lvalue (C language terminology for something that can be assigned a value). Accessor macros do not implement expressions or assignments.

void code.model(ARGS) /* private structure accessed by 
                         accessor macros              */ 
{ 
/* The following code fragments are intended to show how 
   information in the argument list is accessed. The reader 
   should not attempt to relate one fragment to another. 
   Consider each fragment as a separate example. 
*/ 
 
   double p,/* variable for use in the following code fragments */ 
       x,   /* variable for use in the following code fragments */ 
       y;   /* variable for use in the following code fragments */ 
 
 
   int i,   /* indexing variable for use in the following */ 
       j;   /* indexing variable for use in the following */ 
 
   UDN_Example_Type *a_ptr, /* A pointer used to access a 
                                User-Defined Node type */ 
                    *y_ptr; /* A pointer used to access a 
                                User-Defined Node type */ 
 
   /* Initializing and outputting a User-Defined Node result */ 
   if(INIT) { 
      OUTPUT(y) = malloc(sizeof(user.defined.struct)); 
      y_ptr = OUTPUT(y); 
      y_ptr->component1 = 0.0; 
      y_ptr->component2 = 0.0; 
   } 
   else { 
      y_ptr = OUTPUT(y); 
      y_ptr->component1 = x1; 
      y_ptr->component2 = x2; 
   } 
 
   /* Determining analysis type */ 
   if(ANALYSIS == AC) { 
       /* Perform AC analysis-dependent operations here */ 
   } 
 
   /* Accessing a parameter value from the .model card */ 
   p = PARAM(gain); 
 
   /* Accessing a vector parameter from the .model card */ 
   for(i = 0; i < PARAM_SIZE(in_offset); i++) 
      p = PARAM(in_offset[i]); 
 
   /* Accessing the value of a simple real-valued input */ 
   x = INPUT(a); 
 
   /* Accessing a vector input and checking for null port */ 
   if( ! PORT_NULL(a)) 
      for(i = 0; i < PORT_SIZE(a); i++) 
         x = INPUT(a[i]); 
 
   /* Accessing a digital input */ 
   x = INPUT(a); 
 
   /* Accessing the value of a User-Defined Node input...     */ 
   /* This node type includes two elements in its definition. */ 
   a_ptr = INPUT(a); 
   x = a_ptr->component1; 
   y = a_ptr->component2; 
 
   /* Outputting a simple real-valued result */ 
   OUTPUT(out1) = 0.0; 
 
   /* Outputting a vector result and checking for null */ 
   if( ! PORT_NULL(a)) 
      for(i = 0; i < PORT.SIZE(a); i++) 
         OUTPUT(a[i]) = 0.0; 
 
   /* Outputting the partial of output out1 w.r.t. input a */ 
   PARTIAL(out1,a) = PARAM(gain); 
 
  /* Outputting the partial of output out2(i) w.r.t. input b(j) */ 
   for(i = 0; i < PORT_SIZE(out2); i++) { 
      for(j = 0; j < PORT_SIZE(b); j++) { 
         PARTIAL(out2[i],b[j]) = 0.0; 
      } 
   } 
 
  /* Outputting gain from input c to output out3 in an 
     AC analysis */ 
   complex_gain_real = 1.0; 
   complex_gain_imag = 0.0; 
   AC_GAIN(out3,c) = complex_gain; 
 
   /* Outputting a digital result */ 
   OUTPUT_STATE(out4) = ONE; 
 
   /* Outputting the delay for a digital or user-defined output */ 
   OUTPUT_DELAY(out5) = 1.0e-9; 
}

28.7.1.1 Macro Definitions

The full set of accessor macros is listed below. Arguments shown in parenthesis are examples only. Explanations of the accessor macros are provided in the subsections below.

Circuit Data:

    ARGS

    CALL_TYPE

    INIT

    ANALYSIS

    FIRST_TIMEPOINT

    TIME

    T(n)

    RAD_FREQ

    TEMPERATURE

Parameter Data:

    PARAM(gain)

    PARAM_SIZE(gain)

    PARAM_NULL(gain)

Port Data:

    PORT_SIZE(a)

    PORT_NULL(a)

    LOAD(a)

    TOTAL_LOAD(a)

Input Data:

    INPUT(a)

    INPUT_STATE(a)

    INPUT_STRENGTH(a)

Output Data:

    OUTPUT(y)

    OUTPUT_CHANGED(a)

    OUTPUT_DELAY(y)

    OUTPUT_STATE(a)

    OUTPUT_STRENGTH(a)

Partial Derivatives:

    PARTIAL(y,a)

AC Gains:

    AC_GAIN(y,a)

Static Variable:

    STATIC_VAR(x)

28.7.1.2 Circuit Data

ARGS 

CALL_TYPE 

INIT 

ANALYSIS 

FIRST_TIMEPOINT 

TIME 

T(n) 

RAD_FREQ 

TEMPERATURE

ARGS
is a macro which is passed in the argument list of every code model. It is there to provide a way of referencing each model to all of the remaining macro values. It must be present in the argument list of every code model; it must also be the only argument present in the argument list of every code model.
CALL_TYPE
is a macro which returns one of two possible symbolic constants. These are EVENT and ANALOG. Testing may be performed by a model using CALL TYPE to determine whether it is being called by the analog simulator or the event-driven simulator. This will, in general, only be of value to a hybrid model such as the adc bridge or the dac bridge.
INIT
is an integer (int) that takes the value 1 or 0 depending on whether this is the first call to the code model instance or not, respectively.
ANALYSIS
is an enumerated integer that takes values of DC, AC, or TRANSIENT.
FIRST
TIMEPOINT is an integer that takes the value 1 or 0 depending on whether this is the first call for this instance at the current analysis step (i.e., time-point) or not, respectively.
TIME
is a double representing the current analysis time in a transient analysis. T(n) is a double vector giving the analysis time for a specified time-point in a transient analysis, where n takes the value 0 or 1. T(0) is equal to TIME. T(1) is the last accepted time-point. (T(0) - T(1)) is the time-step (i.e., the delta-time value) associated with the current time.
RAD_FREQ
is a double representing the current analysis frequency in an AC analysis expressed in units of radians per second.
TEMPERATURE
is a double representing the current analysis temperature.

28.7.1.3 Parameter Data

PARAM(gain) 

PARAM_SIZE(gain) 

PARAM_NULL(gain)

PARAM(gain)
resolves to the value of the scalar (i.e., non-vector) parameter “gain” which was defined in the Interface Specification File tables. The type of “gain” is the type given in the ifspec.ifs file. The same accessor macro can be used regardless of type. If “gain” is a string, then PARAM(gain) would resolve to a pointer. PARAM(gain[n]) resolves to the value of the nth element of a vector parameter “gain”.
PARAM_SIZE(gain)
resolves to an integer (int) representing the size of the “gain” vector (which was dynamically determined when the SPICE deck was read). PARAM_SIZE(gain) is undefined if gain is a scalar.
PARAM_NULL(gain)
resolves to an integer with value 0 or 1 depending on whether a value was specified for gain, or whether the value is defaulted, respectively.

28.7.1.4 Port Data

PORT_SIZE(a) 

PORT_NULL(a) 

LOAD(a) 

TOTAL_LOAD(a)

PORT_SIZE(a)
resolves to an integer (int) representing the size of the “a” port (which was dynamically determined when the SPICE deck was read). PORT_SIZE(a) is undefined if gain is a scalar.
PORT_NULL(a)
resolves to an integer (int) with value 0 or 1 depending on whether the SPICE deck has a node specified for this port, or has specified that the port is null, respectively.
LOAD(a)
is used in a digital model to post a capacitive load value to a particular input or output port during the INIT pass of the simulator. All values posted for a particular event-driven node using the LOAD() macro are summed, producing a total load value which
TOTAL_LOAD(a)
returns a double value which represents the total capacitive load seen on a specified node to which a digital code model is connected. This information may be used after the INIT pass by the code model to modify the delays it posts with its output states and strengths. Note that this macro can also be used by non-digital event-driven code models (see LOAD(), above).

28.7.1.5 Input Data

INPUT(a) 

INPUT_STATE(a) 

INPUT_STRENGTH(a)

INPUT(a)
resolves to the value of the scalar input “a” that was defined in the Interface Specification File tables (“a” can be either a scalar port or a port value from a vector; in the latter case, the notation used would be “a[i]”, where “i” is the index value for the port). The type of “a” is the type given in the ifspec.ifs file. The same accessor macro can be used regardless of type.
INPUT_STATE(a)
resolves to the state value defined for digital node types. These will be one of the symbolic constants ZERO, ONE, or UNKNOWN.
INPUT_STRENGTH(a)
resolves to the strength with which a digital input node is being driven. This is determined by a resolution algorithm which looks at all outputs to a node and determines its final driven strength. This value in turn is passed to a code model when requested by this macro. Possible strength values are:
1. STRONG
2. RESISTIVE
3. HI_IMPEDANCE
4. UNDETERMINED

28.7.1.6 Output Data

OUTPUT(y) 

OUTPUT_CHANGED(a) 

OUTPUT_DELAY(y) 

OUTPUT_STATE(a) 

OUTPUT_STRENGTH(a)

OUTPUT(y)
resolves to the value of the scalar output “y” that was defined in the Interface Specification File tables. The type of “y” is the type given in the ifspec.ifs file. The same accessor macro can be used regardless of type. If “y” is a vector, then OUTPUT(y) would resolve to a pointer.
OUTPUT_CHANGED(a)
may be assigned one of two values for any particular output from a digital code model. If assigned the value TRUE (the default), then an output state, strength and delay must be posted by the model during the call. If, on the other hand, no change has occurred during that pass, the OUTPUT_CHANGED(a) value for an output can be set to FALSE. In this case, no state, strength or delay values need subsequently be posted by the model. Remember that this macro applies to a single output port. If a model has multiple outputs that have not changed, OUTPUT_CHANGED(a) must be set to FALSE for each of them.
OUTPUT_DELAY(y)
may be assigned a double value representing a delay associated with a particular digital or User-Defined Node output port. Note that this macro must be set for each digital or User-Defined Node output from a model during each pass, unless the OUTPUT_CHANGED(a) macro is invoked (see above). Note also that a non-zero value must be assigned to OUTPUT_DELAY(). Assigning a value of zero (or a negative value) will cause an error.
OUTPUT_STATE(a)
may be assigned a state value for a digital output node. Valid values are ZERO, ONE, and UNKNOWN. This is the normal way of posting an output state from a digital code model.
OUTPUT_STRENGTH(a)
may be assigned a strength value for a digital output node. This is the normal way of posting an output strength from a digital code model. Valid values are:
1. STRONG
2. RESISTIVE
3. HI_IMPEDANCE
4. UNDETERMINED

28.7.1.7 Partial Derivatives

PARTIAL(y,a) 

PARTIAL(y[n],a) 

PARTIAL(y,a[m]) 

PARTIAL(y[n],a[m])

PARTIAL(y,a)
resolves to the value of the partial derivative of scalar output “y” with respect to scalar input “a”. The type is always double since partial derivatives are only defined for nodes with real valued quantities (i.e., analog nodes).

The remaining uses of PARTIAL are shown for the cases in which either the output, the input, or both are vectors.

Partial derivatives are required by the simulator to allow it to solve the non-linear equations that describe circuit behavior for analog nodes. Since coding of partial derivatives can become difficult and error-prone for complex analog models, you may wish to consider using the cm analog auto partial() code model support function instead of using this macro.

28.7.1.8 AC Gains

AC_GAIN(y,a) 

AC_GAIN(y[n],a) 

AC_GAIN(y,a[m]) 

AC_GAIN(y[n],a[m])

AC_GAIN(y,a)
resolves to the value of the AC analysis gain of scalar output “y” from scalar input “a”. The type is always a structure (“Complex_t”) defined in the standard code model header file:

typedef struct Complex_s {

double real; /* The real part of the complex number */ 

double imag; /* The imaginary part of the complex number */ 

}Complex_t;

The remaining uses of AC_GAIN are shown for the cases in which either the output, the input, or both are vectors.

28.7.1.9 Static Variables

STATIC_VAR(x)

STATIC_VAR(x)
resolves to an lvalue or a pointer which is assigned the value of some scalar code model result or state defined in the Interface Spec File tables, or a pointer to a value or a vector of values. The type of “x” is the type given in the Interface Specification File. The same accessor macro can be used regardless of type since it simply resolves to an lvalue. If “x” is a vector, then STATIC_VAR(x) would resolve to a pointer. In this case, the code model is responsible for allocating storage for the vector and assigning the pointer to the allocated storage to STATIC_VAR(x).

28.7.1.10 Accessor Macros

Table 28.3 describes the accessor macros available to the Model Definition File programmer and their C types. The PARAM and STATIC_VAR macros, whose types are labeled CD (context dependent), return the type defined in the Interface Specification File. Arguments listed with “[i]” take an optional square bracket delimited index if the corresponding port or parameter is a vector. The index may be any C expression - possibly involving calls to other accessor macros (e.g.,” OUTPUT(out[PORT_SIZE(out)-1])”)





Name Type Args

Description





AC_GAIN Complex_t y[i],x[i]

AC gain of output y with respect to input x.





ANALYSIS enum <none>

Type of analysis: DC, AC, TRANSIENT.





ARGS Mif_Private_t <none>

Standard argument to all code model function.





CALL_TYPE enum <none>

Type of model evaluation call: ANALOG or EVENT.





INIT Boolean_t <none>

Is this the first call to the model?





INPUT double or void* name[i]

Value of analog input port, or value of structure pointer for User-Defined Node port.





INPUT_STATE enum name[i]

State of a digital input: ZERO, ONE, or UNKNOWN.





INPUT_STRENGHT enum name[i]

Strength of digital input: STRONG, RESISTIVE, HI IMPEDANCE, or UNDETERMINED.





INPUT_TYPE char* name[i]

The port type of the input.





LOAD double name[i]

The digital load value placed on a port by this model.





MESSAGE char* name[i]

A message output by a model on an event-driven node.





OUTPUT double or void* name[i]

Value of the analog output port or value of structure pointer for User-Defined Node port.





OUTPUT_CHANGED Boolean_t name[i]

Has a new value been assigned to this event-driven output by the model?





OUTPUT_DELAY double name[i]

Delay in seconds for an event-driven output.





OUTPUT_STATE enum name[i]

State of a digital output: ZERO, ONE, or UNKNOWN.





OUTPUT_STRENGTH enum name[i]

Strength of digital output: STRONG, RESISTIVE, HI_IMPEDANCE, or UNDETERMINED.





OUTPUT_TYPE char* name[i]

The port type of the output.





PARAM CD name[i]

Value of the parameter.





PARAM_NULL Boolean_t name[i]

Was the parameter not included on the SPICE .model card ?





PARAM_SIZE int name

Size of parameter vector.





PARTIAL double y[i],x[i]

Partial derivative of output y with respect to input x.





PORT_NULL Mif_Boolean_t name

Has this port been specified as unconnected?





PORT_SIZE int name

Size of port vector.





RAD_FREQ double <none>

Current analysis frequency in radians per second.





STATIC_VAR CD name

Value of a static variable.





STATIC_VAR_SIZE int name

Size of static var vector (currently unused).





T(n) int index

Current and previous analysis times (T(0) = TIME = current analysis time, T(1) = previous analysis time).





TEMPERATURE double <none>

Current analysis temperature.





TIME double <none>

Current analysis time (same as T(0)).





TOTAL_LOAD double name[i]

The total of all loads on the node attached to this event driven port.






Table 28.3: Accessor macros

28.7.2 Function Library

28.7.2.1 Overview

Aside from the accessor macros, the simulator also provides a library of functions callable from within code models. The header file containing prototypes to these functions is automatically inserted into the Model Definition File for you. The complete list of available functions follows:

Smoothing Functions:

    void cm_smooth_corner

    void cm_smooth_discontinuity

    double cm_smooth_pwl

Model State Storage Functions:

    void cm_analog_alloc

    void cm_event_alloc

    void *cm_analog_get_ptr

    void *cm_event_get_ptr

Integration and Convergence Functions:

    int cm_analog_integrate

    int cm_analog_converge

    void cm_analog_not_converged

    void cm_analog_auto_partial

    double cm_analog_ramp_factor

Message Handling Functions:

    char *cm_message_get_errmsg

    void cm_message_send

Breakpoint Handling Functions:

    int cm_analog_set_temp_bkpt

    int cm_analog_set_perm_bkpt

    int cm_event_queue

Special Purpose Functions:

    void cm_climit_fcn

    double cm_netlist_get_c

    double cm_netlist_get_l

Complex Math Functions:

    complex_t cm_complex_set

    complex_t cm_complex_add

    complex_t cm_complex_sub

    complex_t cm_complex_mult

    complex_t cm_complex_div

28.7.2.2 Smoothing Functions

void 

cm_smooth_corner(x_input, x_center, y_center, domain,

                 lower_slope, upper_slope, y_output, dy_dx)

 

    double x_input;     /* The value of the x input */ 

    double x_center;    /* The x intercept of the two slopes */ 

    double y_center;    /* The y intercept of the two slopes */ 

    double domain;      /* The smoothing domain */ 

    double lower_slope; /* The lower slope */ 

    double upper_slope; /* The upper slope */ 

    double *y_output;   /* The smoothed y output */

    double *dy_dx;      /* The partial of y wrt x */

 

void 

cm_smooth_discontinuity(x_input, x_lower, y_lower, x_upper, y_upper

                        y_output, dy_dx)

 

    double x_input;   /* The x value at which to compute y */ 

    double x_lower;   /* The x value of the lower corner */ 

    double y_lower;   /* The y value of the lower corner */ 

    double x_upper;   /* The x value of the upper corner */ 

    double y_upper;   /* The y value of the upper corner */ 

    double *y_output; /* The computed smoothed y value */ 

    double *dy_dx;    /* The partial of y wrt x */

 

double 

cm_smooth_pwl(x_input, x, y, size, input_domain, dout_din)

 

    double x_input;      /* The x input value */ 

    double *x;           /* The vector of x values */ 

    double *y;           /* The vector of y values */ 

    int size;            /* The size of the xy vectors */ 

    double input_domain; /* The smoothing domain */ 

    double *dout_din;    /* The partial of the output wrt the input */

cm_smooth_corner() automates smoothing between two arbitrarily-sloped lines that meet at a single center point. You specify the center point (x_center, y_center), plus a domain (x-valued delta) above and below x_center. This defines a smoothing region about the center point. Then, the slopes of the meeting lines outside of this smoothing region are specified (lower_slope, upper_slope). The function then interpolates a smoothly-varying output (*y_output) and its derivative (*dy_dx) for the x_input value. This function helps to automate the smoothing of piecewise-linear functions, for example. Such smoothing aids the simulator in achieving convergence.

cm_smooth_discontinuity() allows you to obtain a smoothly-transitioning output (*y_output) that varies between two static values (y_lower, y_upper) as an independent variable (x_input) transitions between two values (x_lower, x_upper). This function is useful in interpolating between resistances or voltage levels that change abruptly between two values.

cm_smooth_pwl() duplicates much of the functionality of the predefined pwl code model. The cm smooth pwl() takes an input value plus x-coordinate and y-coordinate vector values along with the total number of coordinate points used to describe the piecewise linear transfer function and returns the interpolated or extrapolated value of the output based on that transfer function. More detail is available by looking at the description of the pwl code model. Note that the output value is the function’s returned value.

28.7.2.3 Model State Storage Functions

void cm_analog_alloc(tag, size)

 

    int tag;  /* The user-specified tag for this block of memory */ 

    int size; /* The number of bytes to allocate */

 

void cm_event_alloc(tag, size)

 

    int tag; /* The user-specified tag for the memory block */ 

    int size; /* The number of bytes to be allocated */

 

void *cm_analog_get_ptr(tag, timepoint)

 

    int tag; /* The user-specified tag for this block of memory */ 

    int timepoint; /* The timepoint of interest - 0=current 1=previous */

 

void *cm_event_get_ptr(tag, timepoint)

 

    int tag; /* The user-specified tag for the memory block */ 

    int timepoint; /* The timepoint - 0=current, 1=previous */

cm_analog_alloc() and cm_event_alloc() allow you to allocate storage space for analog and event-driven model state information. The storage space is not static, but rather represents a storage vector of two values which rotate with each accepted simulator time-point evaluation. This is explained more fully below. The “tag” parameter allows you to specify an integer tag when allocating space. This allows more than one rotational storage location per model to be allocated. The “size” parameter specifies the size in bytes of the storage (computed by the C language “sizeof()” operator). Both cm_analog_alloc() and cm_event_alloc() will not return pointers to the allocated space, as has been available (and buggy) from the original XSPICE code. cm_analog_alloc() should be used by an analog model; cm_event_alloc() should be used by an event-driven model.

*cm_analog_get_ptr() and *cm_event_get_ptr() retrieve the pointer location of the rotational storage space previously allocated by cm_analog_alloc() or cm_event_alloc(). Important notice: These functions must be called only after all memory allocation (all calls to cm_analog_alloc() or cm_event_alloc()) have been done. All pointers returned between calls to memory allocation will become obsolete (point to freed memory because of an internal realloc). The functions take the integer “tag” used to allocate the space, and an integer from 0 to 1 which specifies the time-point with which the desired state variable is associated (e.g. timepoint = 0 will retrieve the address of storage for the current time-point; timepoint = 1 will retrieve the address of storage for the last accepted time-point). Note that once a model is exited, storage to the current time-point state storage location (i.e., timepoint = 0) will, upon the next time-point iteration, be rotated to the previous location (i.e., timepoint = 1). When rotation is done, a copy of the old “timepoint = 0” storage value is placed in the new “timepoint = 0” storage location. Thus, if a value does not change for a particular iteration, specific writing to “timepoint = 0” storage is not required. These features allow a model coder to constantly know which piece of state information is being dealt with within the model function at each time-point.

28.7.2.4 Integration and Convergence Functions

int cm_analog_integrate(integrand, integral, partial)

 

    double integrand; /* The integrand */ 

    double *integral; /* The current and returned value of integral */ 

    double *partial;  /* The partial derivative of integral wrt integrand */

 

int cm_analog_converge(state)

 

    double *state; /* The state to be converged */ 

 

void cm_analog_not_converged() 

void cm_analog_auto_partial() 

 

double cm_ramp_factor()

cm_analog_integrate() takes as input the integrand (the input to the integrator) and produces as output the integral value and the partial of the integral with respect to the integrand. The integration itself is with respect to time, and the pointer to the integral value must have been previously allocated using cm_analog_alloc() and *cm_analog_get_ptr(). This is required because of the need for the integrate routine itself to have access to previously-computed values of the integral.

cm_analog_converge() takes as an input the address of a state variable that was previously allocated using cm_analog_alloc() and *cm_analog_get_ptr(). The function itself serves to notify the simulator that for each time-step taken, that variable must be iterated upon until it converges.

cm_analog_not_converged() is a function that can and should be called by an analog model whenever it performs internal limiting of one or more of its inputs to aid in reaching convergence. This causes the simulator to call the model again at the current time-point and continue solving the circuit matrix. A new time-point will not be attempted until the code model returns without calling the cm_analog_not_converged() function. For circuits which have trouble reaching a converged state (often due to multiple inputs changing too quickly for the model to react in a reasonable fashion), the use of this function is virtually mandatory.

cm_analog_auto_partial() may be called at the end of a code model function in lieu of calculating the values of partial derivatives explicitly in the function. When this function is called, no values should be assigned to the PARTIAL macro since these values will be computed automatically by the simulator. The automatic calculation of partial derivatives can save considerable time in designing and coding a model, since manual computation of partial derivatives can become very complex and error-prone for some models. However, the automatic evaluation may also increase simulation run time significantly. Function cm_analog_auto_partial() causes the model to be called N additional times (for a model with N inputs) with each input varied by a small amount (1e-6 for voltage inputs and 1e-12 for current inputs). The values of the partial derivatives of the outputs with respect to the inputs are then approximated by the simulator through divided difference calculations.

cm_analog_ramp_factor() will then return a value from 0.0 to 1.0, which indicates whether or not a ramp time value requested in the SPICE analysis deck (with the use of .option ramptime=<duration>) has elapsed. If the RAMPTIME option is used, then cm_analog_ramp_factor returns a 0.0 value during the DC operating point solution and a value which is between 0.0 and 1.0 during the ramp. A 1.0 value is returned after the ramp is over or if the RAMPTIME option is not used. This value is intended as a multiplication factor to be used with all model outputs which would ordinarily experience a “power-up” transition. Currently, all sources within the simulator are automatically ramped to the "final" time-zero value if a RAMPTIME option is specified.

28.7.2.5 Message Handling Functions

char *cm_message_get_errmsg() 

int cm_message_send(char *msg)

char *msg; /* The message to output. */

*cm_message_get_errmsg() is a function designed to be used with other library functions to provide a way for models to handle error situations. More specifically, whenever a library function which returns type “int” is executed from a model, it will return an integer value, n. If this value is not equal to zero (0), then an error condition has occurred (likewise, functions which return pointers will return a NULL value if an error has occurred). At that point, the model can invoke *cm_message_get_errmsg to obtain a pointer to an error message. This can then in turn be displayed to the user or passed to the simulator interface through the cm_message_send() function. The C code required for this is as follows:

err = cm_analog_integrate(in, &out, &dout_din); 

if (err) {

     cm_message_send(cm_message_get_errmsg());

}

else { ...

cm_message_send() sends messages to either the standard output screen or to the simulator interface, depending on which is in use.

28.7.2.6 Breakpoint Handling Functions

int cm_analog_set_perm_bkpt(time)

 

    double time; /* The time of the breakpoint to be set */ 

 

int cm_analog_set_temp_bkpt(time)

 

    double time; /* The time of the breakpoint to be set */ 

 

int cm_event_queue(time)

 

    double time; /* The time of the event to be queued */

cm_analog_set_perm_bkpt() takes as input a time value. This value is posted to the analog simulator algorithm and is used to force the simulator to choose that value as a breakpoint at some time in the future. The simulator may choose as the next time-point a value less than the input, but not greater. Also, regardless of how many time-points pass before the breakpoint is reached, it will not be removed from posting. Thus, a breakpoint is guaranteed at the passed time value. Note that a breakpoint may also be set for a time prior to the current time, but this will result in an error if the posted breakpoint is prior to the last accepted time (i.e., T(1)).

cm_analog_set_temp_bkpt() takes as input a time value. This value is posted to the simulator and is used to force the simulator, for the next time-step only, to not exceed the passed time value. The simulator may choose as the next time-point a value less than the input, but not greater. In addition, once the next time-step is chosen, the posted value is removed regardless of whether it caused the break at the given time-point. This function is useful in the event that a time-point needs to be retracted after its first posting in order to recalculate a new breakpoint based on new input data (for controlled oscillators, controlled one-shots, etc), since temporary breakpoints automatically “go away” if not reposted each time-step. Note that a breakpoint may also be set for a time prior to the current time, but this will result in an error if the posted breakpoint is prior to the last accepted time (i.e., T(1)).

cm_event_queue() is similar to cm_analog_set_perm_bkpt(), but functions with event-driven models. When invoked, this function causes the model to be queued for calling at the specified time. All other details applicable to cm_analog_set_perm_bkpt() apply to this function as well.

28.7.2.7 Special Purpose Functions

void 

cm_climit_fcn(in, in_offset, cntl_upper, cntl_lower, lower_delta, upper_delta,

              limit_range, gain, fraction, out_final, pout_pin_final,                  

              pout_pcntl_lower_final, pout_pcntl_upper_final)

 

    double in;          /* The input value */ 

    double in-offset;   /* The input offset */ 

    double cntl_upper;  /* The upper control input value */ 

    double cntl_lower;  /* The lower control input value */ 

    double lower_delta; /* The delta from control to limit value */ 

    double upper_delta; /* The delta from control to limit value */ 

    double limit_range; /* The limiting range */ 

    double gain;        /* The gain from input to output */ 

    int percent;        /* The fraction vs. absolute range flag */ 

    double *out_final;  /* The output value */ 

    double *pout_pin_final; /* The partial of output wrt input */ 

    double *pout_pcntl_lower_final; /* The partial of output wrt lower

                                       control input */ 

    double *pout_pcntl_upper:final; /* The partial of output wrt upper

                                       control input */

 

double cm_netlist_get_c() 

 

double cm_netlist_get_l()

cm_climit_fcn() is a very specific function that mimics the behavior of the climit code model (see the Predefined Models section). In brief, the cm_climit_fcn() takes as input an “in” value, an offset, and controlling upper and lower values. Parameter values include delta values for the controlling inputs, a smoothing range, gain, and fraction switch values. Outputs include the final value, plus the partial derivatives of the output with respect to signal input, and both control inputs. These all operate identically to the similarly-named inputs and parameters of the climit model.

The function performs a limit on the “in” value, holding it to within some delta of the controlling inputs, and handling smoothing, etc. The cm_climit_fcn() was originally used in the ilimit code model to handle much of the primary limiting in that model, and can be used by a code model developer to take care of limiting in larger models that require it. See the detailed description of the climit model for more in-depth description.

cm_netlist_get_c() and cm_netlist_get_l() functions search the analog circuitry to which their input is connected, and total the capacitance or inductance, respectively, found at that node. The functions, as they are currently written, assume they are called by a model which has only one single-ended analog input port.

28.7.2.8 Complex Math Functions

Complex_t cm_complex_set (real_part, imag_part)

 

    double real_part; /* The real part of the complex number */ 

    double imag_part; /* The imaginary part of the complex number */

 

Complex_t cm_complex_add (x, y)

 

    Complex_t x; /* The first operand of x + y */ 

    Complex_t y; /* The second operand of x + y */

 

Complex_t cm_complex_sub (x, y)

 

    Complex_t x; /* The first operand of x - y */ 

    Complex_t y; /* The second operand of x - y */

 

Complex_t cm_complex_mult (x, y)

 

    Complex_t x; /* The first operand of x * y */ 

    Complex_t y; /* The second operand of x * y */

 

Complex_t cm_complex_div (x, y)

 

    Complex_t x; /* The first operand of x / y */ 

    Complex_t y; /* The second operand of x / y */

cm_complex_set() takes as input two doubles, and converts these to a Complex_t. The first double is taken as the real part, and the second is taken as the imaginary part of the resulting complex value.

cm_complex_add(), cm_complex_sub(), cm_complex_mult(), and cm_complex_div() each take two complex values as inputs and return the result of a complex addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division, respectively.

28.8 User-Defined Node Definition File

The User-Defined Node Definition File (udnfunc.c) defines the C functions which implement basic operations on user-defined nodes such as data structure creation, initialization, copying, and comparison. Unlike the Model Definition File which uses the Code Model Preprocessor to translate Accessor Macros, the User-Defined Node Definition file is a pure C language file. This file uses macros to isolate you from data structure definitions, but the macros are defined in a standard header file (EVTudn.h), and translations are performed by the standard C Preprocessor.

When you create a directory for a new User-Defined Node, e.g. /ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtraevt/new_type/, add a new User-Defined Node Definition File udnfunc.c (see the example in chapt. 28.8.3), and place a structure of type ’Evt_Udn_Info_t’ at its bottom.

This structure contains the type name for the node, a description string, and pointers to each of the functions that define the node. This structure is complete except for a text string that describes the node type. This string is stubbed out and may be edited by you if desired.

28.8.1 Macros





Name Type

Description







MALLOCED_PTR void *

Assign pointer to allocated structure to this macro




STRUCT_PTR void *

A pointer to a structure of the defined type




STRUCT_PTR_1 void *

A pointer to a structure of the defined type




STRUCT_PTR_2 void *

A pointer to a structure of the defined type




EQUAL Mif_Boolean_t

Assign TRUE or FALSE to this macro according to the results of structure comparison




INPUT_STRUCT_PTR void *

A pointer to a structure of the defined type




OUTPUT_STRUCT_PTR void *

A pointer to a structure of the defined type




INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY void **

An array of pointers to structures of the defined type




INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY_SIZE int

The size of the array




STRUCT_MEMBER_ID char *

A string naming some part of the structure




PLOT_VAL double

The value of the specified structure member for plotting purposes




PRINT_VAL char *

The value of the specified structure member for printing purposes





Table 28.4: User-Defined Node Macros

You must code the functions described in the following section using the macros appropriate for the particular function. You may elect whether not to provide the optional functions.

It is an error to use a macro not defined for a function. Note that a review of the sample directories for the “real” and “int” UDN types will make the function usage clearer.

The macros used in the User-Defined Node Definition File to access and assign data values are defined in Table 28.4. The translations of the macros and of macros used in the function argument lists are defined in the Interface Diesign Document for the XSPICE Simulator.

28.8.2 Function Library

The functions (required and optional) that define a User-Defined Node are listed below. For optional functions not used, the pointer in the Evt_Udn_Info_t structure can be changed to NULL.

Required functions:

create      Allocate data structure used as inputs and outputs to 

            code models.

 

initialize  Set structure to appropriate initial value for first use as

            model input.

 

copy        Make a copy of the contents into created but possibly

            uninitialized structure.

 

compare     Determine if two structures are equal in value.

Optional functions:

dismantle   Free allocations inside structure (but not structure itself). 

 

invert      Invert logical value of structure. 

 

resolve     Determine the resultant when multiple outputs are connected

            to a node.

 

plot_val    Output a real value for specified structure component for

            plotting purposes.

 

print_val   Output a string value for specified structure component for

            printing.

 

ipc_val     Output a binary representation of the structure suitable

            for sending over the IPC channel.

The required actions for each of these functions are described in the following subsections. In each function, you have to replace the XXX with the node type name specified. The macros used in implementing the functions are described in a later section.

28.8.2.1 Function udn_XXX_create

Allocate space for the data structure defined for the User-Defined Node to pass data between models. Then assign pointer created by the storage allocator (e.g. malloc) to MALLOCED_PTR.

28.8.2.2 Function udn_XXX_initialize

Assign STRUCT_PTR to a pointer variable of defined type and then initialize the value of the structure.

28.8.2.3 Function udn_XXX_compare

Assign STRUCT_PTR_1 and STRUCT_PTR_2 to pointer variables of the defined type. Compare the two structures and assign either TRUE or FALSE to EQUAL.

28.8.2.4 Function udn_XXX_copy

Assign INPUT_STRUCT_PTR and OUTPUT_STRUCT_PTR to pointer variables of the defined type and then copy the elements of the input structure to the output structure.

28.8.2.5 Function udn_XXX_dismantle

Assign STRUCT_PTR to a pointer variable of defined type and then free any allocated substructures (but not the structure itself!). If there are no substructures, the body of this function may be left null.

28.8.2.6 Function udn_XXX_invert

Assign STRUCT_PTR to a pointer variable of the defined type, and then invert the logical value of the structure.

28.8.2.7 Function udn_XXX_resolve

Assign INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY to a variable declared as an array of pointers of the defined type - e.g.:

<type> **struct_array; 

struct_array = INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY;

Then, the number of elements in the array may be determined from the integer valued INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY_SIZE macro.

Assign OUTPUT_STRUCT_PTR to a pointer variable of the defined type. Scan through the array of structures, compute the resolved value, and assign it into the output structure.

28.8.2.8 Function udn_XXX_plot_val

Assign STRUCT_PTR to a pointer variable of the defined type. Then, access the member of the structure specified by the string in STRUCT_MEMBER_ID and assign some real valued quantity for this member to PLOT_VALUE.

28.8.2.9 Function udn_XXX_print_val

Assign STRUCT_PTR to a pointer variable of the defined type. Then, access the member of the structure specified by the string in STRUCT_MEMBER_ID and assign some string valued quantity for this member to PRINT_VALUE.

If the string is not static, a new string should be allocated on each call. Do not free the allocated strings.

28.8.2.10 Function udn_XXX_ipc_val

Use STRUCT_PTR to access the value of the node data. Assign to IPC_VAL a binary representation of the data. Typically this can be accomplished by simply assigning STRUCT_PTR to IPC_VAL.

Assign to IPC_VAL_SIZE an integer representing the size of the binary data in bytes.

28.8.3 Example UDN Definition File

The following is an example UDN Definition File which is included with the XSPICE system. It illustrates the definition of the functions described above for a User-Defined Node type “int” (for “integer” node type), to be found in file /ngspice/src/xspice/icm/xtraevt/int/udnfunc.c.

#include <stdio.h> 
#include "ngspice/cm.h" 
#include "ngspice/evtudn.h" 
 
void *tmalloc(size_t); 
#define TMALLOC(t,n)  (t*) tmalloc(sizeof(t)*(size_t)(n)) 
 
/* macro to ignore unused variables and parameters */ 
#define NG_IGNORE(x)  (void)x 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_create(CREATE_ARGS) 
{ 
    /* Malloc space for an int */ 
    MALLOCED_PTR = TMALLOC(int, 1); 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_dismantle(DISMANTLE_ARGS) 
{ 
    NG_IGNORE(STRUCT_PTR); 
    /* Do nothing.  There are no internally malloced 
       things to dismantle */ 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_initialize(INITIALIZE_ARGS) 
{ 
    int  *int_struct = (int *) STRUCT_PTR; 
 
    /* Initialize to zero */ 
    *int_struct = 0; 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_invert(INVERT_ARGS) 
{ 
    int      *int_struct = (int *) STRUCT_PTR; 
 
    /* Invert the state */ 
    *int_struct = -(*int_struct); 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_copy(COPY_ARGS) 
{ 
    int  *int_from_struct = (int *) INPUT_STRUCT_PTR; 
    int  *int_to_struct   = (int *) OUTPUT_STRUCT_PTR; 
 
    /* Copy the structure */ 
    *int_to_struct = *int_from_struct; 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_resolve(RESOLVE_ARGS) 
{ 
    int **array    = (int**)INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY; 
    int *out       = (int *) OUTPUT_STRUCT_PTR; 
    int num_struct = INPUT_STRUCT_PTR_ARRAY_SIZE; 
 
    int         sum; 
    int         i; 
 
    /* Sum the values */ 
    for(i = 0, sum = 0; i < num_struct; i++) 
        sum += *(array[i]); 
 
    /* Assign the result */ 
    *out = sum; 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_compare(COMPARE_ARGS) 
{ 
    int  *int_struct1 = (int *) STRUCT_PTR_1; 
    int  *int_struct2 = (int *) STRUCT_PTR_2; 
 
    /* Compare the structures */ 
    if((*int_struct1) == (*int_struct2)) 
        EQUAL = TRUE; 
    else 
        EQUAL = FALSE; 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_plot_val(PLOT_VAL_ARGS) 
{ 
    int   *int_struct = (int *) STRUCT_PTR; 
    NG_IGNORE(STRUCT_MEMBER_ID); 
 
    /* Output a value for the int struct */ 
    PLOT_VAL = *int_struct; 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_print_val(PRINT_VAL_ARGS) 
{ 
    int   *int_struct = (int *) STRUCT_PTR; 
    NG_IGNORE(STRUCT_MEMBER_ID); 
 
    /* Allocate space for the printed value */ 
    PRINT_VAL = TMALLOC(char, 30); 
 
    /* Print the value into the string */ 
    sprintf(PRINT_VAL, "%8d", *int_struct); 
} 
 
/* ************************************************* */ 
 
static void udn_int_ipc_val(IPC_VAL_ARGS) 
{ 
    /* Simply return the structure and its size */ 
    IPC_VAL = STRUCT_PTR; 
    IPC_VAL_SIZE = sizeof(int); 
} 
 
Evt_Udn_Info_t udn_int_info = { 
    "int", 
    "integer valued data", 
 
    udn_int_create, 
    udn_int_dismantle, 
    udn_int_initialize, 
    udn_int_invert, 
    udn_int_copy, 
    udn_int_resolve, 
    udn_int_compare, 
    udn_int_plot_val, 
    udn_int_print_val, 
    udn_int_ipc_val 
};

Chapter 29
Error Messages

Error messages may be subdivided into three categories. These are:

  1. Error messages generated during the development of a code model (Preprocessor Error Messages).
  2. Error messages generated by the simulator during a simulation run (Simulator Error Messages).
  3. Error messages generated by individual code models (Code Model Error Messages).

These messages will be explained in detail in the following subsections.

29.1 Preprocessor Error Messages

The following is a list of error messages that may be encountered when invoking the directory-creation and code modeling preprocessor tools. These are listed individually, and explanations follow the name/listing.

Usage: cmpp [-ifs] [-mod [<filename>]] [-lst]

The Code Model Preprocessor (cmpp) command was invoked incorrectly.

ERROR - Too few arguments

The Code Model Preprocessor (cmpp) command was invoked with too few arguments.

ERROR - Too many arguments

The Code Model Preprocessor (cmpp) command was invoked with too many arguments.

ERROR - Unrecognized argument

The Code Model Preprocessor (cmpp) command was invoked with an invalid argument.

ERROR - File not found: s<filename>

The specified file was not found, or could not be opened for read access.

ERROR - Line <line number> of <filename> exceeds XX characters

The specified line was too long.

ERROR - Pathname on line <line number> of <filename> 

        exceeds XX characters. 

The specified line was too long.

ERROR - No pathnames found in file: <filename>

The indicated modpath.lst file does not have pathnames properly listed.

ERROR - Problems reading ifspec.ifs in directory <pathname>

The Interface Specification File (ifspec.ifs) for the code model could not be read.

ERROR - Model name <model name> is same as internal SPICE model name

A model has been given the same name as an intrinsic SPICE device.

ERROR - Model name ’<model name>’ in directory: <pathname>

        is same as 

        model name ’<model name>’ in directory: <pathname>

Two models in different directories have the same name.

ERROR - C function name ’<function name>’ in directory: <pathname>,

        is same as 

        C function name ’<function name>’ in directory: <pathname>

Two C language functions in separate model directories have the same names; these would cause a collision when linking the final executable.

ERROR - Problems opening CMextrn.h for write

The temporary file CMextern.h used in building the XSPICE simulator executable could not be created or opened. Check permissions on directory.

ERROR - Problems opening CMinfo.h for write

The temporary file CMinfo.h used in building the XSPICE simulator executable could not be created or opened. Check permissions on directory.

ERROR - Problems opening objects.inc file for write

The temporary file objects.inc used in building the XSPICE simulator executable could not be created or opened. Check permissions on directory.

ERROR - Could not open input .mod file: <filename>

The Model Definition File that contains the definition of the Code Model’s behavior (usually cfunc.mod) was not found or could not be read.

ERROR - Could not open output .c: <filename>

The indicated C language file that the preprocessor creates could not be created or opened. Check permissions on directory.

Error parsing .mod file: <filename>

Problems were encountered by the preprocessor in interpreting the indicated Model Definition File.

ERROR - File not found: <filename> 

The indicated file was not found or could not be opened.

Error parsing interface specification file

Problems were encountered by the preprocessor in interpreting the indicated Interface Specification File.

ERROR - Can’t create file: <filename>

The indicated file could not be created or opened. Check permissions on directory.

ERROR - write.port.info() - Number of allowed types cannot be zero

There must be at least one port type specified in the list of allowed types.

illegal quoted character in string (expected "\" or "\\")

A string was found with an illegal quoted character in it.

unterminated string literal

A string was found that was not terminated.

Unterminated comment

A comment was found that was not terminated.

Port ’<port name>’ not found

The indicated port name was not found in the Interface Specification File.

Port type ’vnam’ is only valid for ’in’ ports

The port type ‘vnam’ was used for a port with direction ‘out’ or ‘inout’. This type is only allowed on ‘in’ ports.

Port types ’g’, ’gd’, ’h’, ’hd’ are only valid for ’inout’ ports

Port type ‘g’, ‘gd’, ‘h’, or ‘hd’ was used for a port with direction ‘out’ or ‘in’. These types are only allowed on ‘inout’ ports.

Invalid parameter type - POINTER type valid only for STATIC_VARs

The type POINTER was used in a section of the Interface Specification file other than the STATIC_VAR section.

Port default type is not an allowed type

A default type was specified that is not one of the allowed types for the port.

Incompatible port types in ‘allowed_types’ clause

Port types listed under ‘Allowed_Types’ in the Interface Specification File must all have the same underlying data type. It is illegal to mix analog and eventdriven types in a list of allowed types.

Invalid parameter type (saw <parameter type 1> - expected <parameter type 2>)

A parameter value was not compatible with the specified type for the parameter.

Named range not allowed for limits

A name was found where numeric limits were expected.

Direction of port ’<port number>’ in <port name>()

 is not <IN or OUT> or INOUT

A problem exists with the direction of one of the elements of a port vector.

Port ’<port name>’ is an array - subscript required

A port was referenced that is specified as an array (vector) in the Interface Specification File. A subscript is required (e.g. myport[i])

Parameter ’<parameter name>’ is an array - subscript required

A parameter was referenced that is specified as an array (vector) in the Interface Specification File. A subscript is required (e.g. myparam[i])

Port ’<port name>’ is not an array - subscript prohibited

A port was referenced that is not specified as an array (vector) in the Interface Specification File. A subscript is not allowed.

Parameter ’<parameter name>’ is not an array - subscript prohibited

A parameter was referenced that is not specified as an array (vector) in the Interface Specification File. A subscript is not allowed.

Static variable ’<static variable name>’ is not an array - subscript prohibited

Array static variables are not supported. Use a POINTER type for the static variable.

Buffer overflow - try reducing the complexity of CM-macro array subscripts

The argument to a code model accessor macro was too long.

Unmatched )

An open ( was found with no corresponding closing ).

Unmatched ]

An open [ was found with no corresponding closing ].

29.2 Simulator Error Messages

The following is a list of error messages that may be encountered while attempting to run a simulation (with the exception of those error messages generated by individual code models). Most of these errors are generated by the simulator while attempting to parse a SPICE deck. These are listed individually, and explanations follow the name/listing.

ERROR - Scalar port expected, [ found

A scalar connection was expected for a particular port on the code model, but the symbol [ which is used to begin a vector connection list was found.

ERROR - Unexpected ]

A ] was found where not expected. Most likely caused by a missing [.

ERROR - Unexpected [ - Arrays of arrays not allowed

A [ character was found within an array list already begun with another [ character.

ERROR - Tilde not allowed on analog nodes

The tilde character ~ was found on an analog connection. This symbol, which performs state inversion, is only allowed on digital nodes and on User-Defined Nodes only if the node type definition allows it.

ERROR - Not enough ports

An insufficient number of node connections was supplied on the instance line. Check the Interface Specification File for the model to determine the required connections and their types.

ERROR - Expected node/instance identifier

A special token (e.g. [ ] < > ...) was found when not expected.

ERROR - Expected node identifier

A special token (e.g. [ ] < > ...) was found when not expected.

ERROR - unable to find definition of model <name>

A .model line for the referenced model was not found.

ERROR - model: %s - Array parameter expected - No array delimiter found

An array (vector) parameter was expected on the .model card, but enclosing [ ] characters were not found to delimit its values.

ERROR - model: %s - Unexpected end of model card

The end of the indicated .model line was reached before all required information was supplied.

ERROR - model: %s - Array parameter must have at least one value

An array parameter was encountered that had no values.

ERROR - model: %s - Bad boolean value

A bad values was supplied for a Boolean. Value used must be TRUE, FALSE, T, or F.

ERROR - model: %s - Bad integer, octal, or hex value

A badly formed integer value was found.

ERROR - model: %s - Bad real value

A badly formed real value was found.

ERROR - model: %s - Bad complex value

A badly formed complex number was found. Complex numbers must be enclosed in < > delimiters.

29.3 Code Model Error Messages

The following is a list of error messages that may be encountered while attempting to run a simulation with certain code models. These are listed alphabetically based on the name of the code model, and explanations follow the name and listing.

29.3.1 Code Model aswitch

cntl_error:

    *****ERROR***** 

    ASWITCH: CONTROL voltage delta less than 1.0e-12

This message occurs as a result of the cntl_off and cntl_on values being less than 1.0e-12 volts/amperes apart.

29.3.2 Code Model climit

climit_range_error:

    **** ERROR **** 

    * CLIMIT function linear range less than zero. *

This message occurs whenever the difference between the upper and lower control input values are close enough that there is no effective room for proper limiting to occur; this indicates an error in the control input values.

29.3.3 Code Model core

allocation_error:

    ***ERROR*** 

    CORE: Allocation calloc failed!

This message is a generic message related to allocating sufficient storage for the H and B array values.

limit_error:

   ***ERROR*** 

   CORE: Violation of 50% rule in breakpoints!

This message occurs whenever the input domain value is an absolute value and the H coordinate points are spaced too closely together (overlap of the smoothing regions will occur unless the H values are redefined).

29.3.4 Code Model d_osc

d_osc_allocation_error:

    **** Error **** 

    D_OSC: Error allocating VCO block storage

Generic block storage allocation error.

d_osc_array_error:

    **** Error **** 

    D_OSC: Size of control array different than frequency array

Error occurs when there is a different number of control array members than frequency array members.

d_osc_negative_freq_error:

    **** Error **** 

    D_OSC: The extrapolated value for frequency 

    has been found to be negative... 

     Lower frequency level has been clamped to 0.0 Hz.

Occurs whenever a control voltage is input to a model which would ordinarily (given the specified control/freq coordinate points) cause that model to attempt to generate an output oscillating at zero frequency. In this case, the output will be clamped to some DC value until the control voltage returns to a more reasonable value.

29.3.5 Code Model d_source

loading_error:

    ***ERROR*** 

    D_SOURCE: source.txt file was not read successfully.

This message occurs whenever the d source model has experienced any difficulty in loading the source.txt (or user-specified) file. This will occur with any of the following problems:

29.3.6 Code Model d_state

loading_error:

    ***ERROR*** 

    D_STATE: state.in file was not read successfully.

    The most common cause of this problem is a trailing 

    blank line in the state.in file

This error occurs when the state.in file (or user-named state machine input file) has not been read successfully. This is due to one of the following:

index_error:

   ***ERROR*** 

   D_STATE: An error exists in the ordering of states values 

   in the states->state[] array. This is usually caused 

   by non-contiguous state definitions in the state.in file

This error is caused by the different state definitions in the input file being non-contiguous. In general, it will refer to the different states not being defined uniquely, or being “broken up” in some fashion within the state.in file.

29.3.7 Code Model oneshot

oneshot_allocation_error:

    **** Error **** 

    ONESHOT: Error allocating oneshot block storage

Generic storage allocation error.

oneshot_array_error:

    **** Error **** 

    ONESHOT: Size of control array different than pulse-width array

This error indicates that the control array and pulse-width arrays are of different sizes.

oneshot_pw_clamp:

    **** Warning **** 

    ONESHOT: Extrapolated Pulse-Width Limited to zero

This error indicates that for the current control input, a pulse-width of less than zero is indicated. The model will consequently limit the pulse width to zero until the control input returns to a more reasonable value.

29.3.8 Code Model pwl

allocation_error:

    ***ERROR*** 

    PWL: Allocation calloc failed!

Generic storage allocation error.

limit_error:

    ***ERROR*** 

    PWL: Violation of 50% rule in breakpoints!

This error message indicates that the pwl model has an absolute value for its input domain, and that the x_array coordinates are so close together that the required smoothing regions would overlap. To fix the problem, you can either spread the x_array coordinates out or make the input domain value smaller.

29.3.9 Code Model s_xfer

num_size_error:

    ***ERROR*** 

    S_XFER: Numerator coefficient array size greater than 

    denominator coefficient array size.

This error message indicates that the order of the numerator polynomial specified is greater than that of the denominator. For the s_xfer model, the orders of numerator and denominator polynomials must be equal, or the order of the denominator polynomial must be greater than that or the numerator.

29.3.10 Code Model sine

allocation_error:

    **** Error **** 

    SINE: Error allocating sine block storage

Generic storage allocation error.

sine_freq_clamp:

    **** Warning **** 

    SINE: Extrapolated frequency limited to 1e-16 Hz

This error occurs whenever the controlling input value is such that the output frequency ordinarily would be set to a negative value. Consequently, the output frequency has been clamped to a near-zero value.

array_error:

    **** Error **** 

    SINE: Size of control array different than frequency array

This error message normally occurs whenever the controlling input array and the frequency array are different sizes.

29.3.11 Code Model square

square_allocation_error:

    **** Error **** 

    SQUARE: Error allocating square block storage

Generic storage allocation error.

square_freq_clamp:

    **** WARNING **** 

    SQUARE: Frequency extrapolation limited to 1e-16

This error occurs whenever the controlling input value is such that the output frequency ordinarily would be set to a negative value. Consequently, the output frequency has been clamped to a near-zero value.

square_array_error:

    **** Error **** 

    SQUARE: Size of control array different than frequency array

This error message normally occurs whenever the controlling input array and the frequency array are different sizes.

29.3.12 Code Model triangle

triangle_allocation_error:

    **** Error **** 

    TRIANGLE: Error allocating triangle block storage

Generic storage allocation error.

triangle_freq_clamp:

    **** Warning **** 

    TRIANGLE: Extrapolated Minimum Frequency Set to 1e-16 Hz

This error occurs whenever the controlling input value is such that the output frequency ordinarily would be set to a negative value. Consequently, the output frequency has been clamped to a near-zero value.

triangle_array_error:

    **** Error **** 

    TRIANGLE: Size of control array different than frequency array

This error message normally occurs whenever the controlling input array and the frequency array are different sizes.

Part III
CIDER

Chapter 30
CIDER User’s Manual

The CIDER User’s Manual that follows is derived from the original manual being part of the PhD thesis from David A. Gates from UC Berkeley. Unfortunately the manual here is not yet complete, so please refer to the thesis for detailed information. Literature on CODECS, the predecessor of CIDER, is available here from UCB: TechRpt ERL-90-96 and TechRpt ERL-88-71.

30.1 SPECIFICATION

Overview of numerical-device specification

The input to CIDER consists of a SPICE-like description of a circuit, its analyses and its compact device models, and PISCES-like descriptions of numerically analyzed device models. For a description of the SPICE input format, consult the SPICE3 Users Manual [JOHN92].

To simulate devices numerically, two types of input must be added to the input file. The first is a model description in which the common characteristics of a device class are collected. In the case of numerical models, this provides all the information needed to construct a device cross-section, such as, for example, the doping profile. The second type of input consists of one or more element lines that specify instances of a numerical model, describe their connection to the rest of the circuit, and provide additional element-specific information such as device layout dimensions ans initial bias information.

The format of a numerical device model description differs from the standard approach used for SPICE3 compact models. It begins the same way with one line containing the .MODEL keyword followed by the name of the model, device type and modeling level. However, instead of providing a single long list of parameters and their values, numerical model parameters are grouped onto cards. Each type of card has its own set of valid parameters. In all cases, the relative ordering of different types of cards is unimportant. However, for cards of the same type (such as mesh-specification cards), their order in the input file can be important in determining the device structure.

Each card begins on a separate line of the input file. In order to let CIDER know that card lines are continuations of a numerical model description, each must begin with the continuation character “+”. If there are too many parameters on a given card to allow it fit on a single line, the card can be continued by adding a second “+” to the beginning of the next line. However, the name and value of a parameter should always appear on the same line.

Several features are provided to make the numerical model format more convenient.

Blank space can follow the initial “+” to separate it from the name of a card or the card continuation “+”. Blank lines are also permitted, as long as they also begin with an initial “+”. Parentheses and commas can be used to visually group or separate parameter definitions. In addition, while it is common to add an equal sign between a parameter and its value, this is not strictly necessary.

The name of any card can be abbreviated, provided that the abbreviation is unique. Parameter name abbreviations can also be used if they are unique in the list of a card’s parameters. Numeric parameter values are treated identically as in SPICE3, so exponential notation, engineering scale factors and units can be attached to parameter values: tau=10ns, nc=3.0e19cm^-3. In SPICE3, the value of a FLAG model parameter is changed to TRUE simply by listing its name on the model line. In CIDER, the value of a numerical model FLAG parameter can be turned back to FALSE by preceding it by a caret “^”. This minimizes the amount of input change needed when features such as debugging are turned on and off. In certain cases it is necessary to include file names in the input description and these names may contain capital letters. If the file name is part of an element line, the inout parser will convert these capitals to lowercase letters. To protect capitalization at any time, simply enclose the string in double quotes “””.

The remainder of this manual describes how numerically analyzed elements and models can be used in CIDER simulations. The manual consists of three parts. First, all of the model cards and their parameters are described. This is followed by a section describing the three basic types of numerical models and their corresponding element lines. In the final section, several complete examples of CIDER simulations are presented.

Several conventions are used in the card descriptions. In the card synopses, the name of a card is followed by a list of parameter classes. Each class is represented by a section in the card parameter table, in the same order as it appears in the synopsis line. Classes which contain optional parameters are surrounded by brackets: [...]. Sometimes it only makes sense for a single parameter to take effect. (For example, a material can not simultaneously be both Si and SiO2.) In such cases, the various choices are listed sequentially, separated by colons. The same parameter often has a number of different acceptable names, some of which are listed in the parameter tables.1 These aliases are separated by vertical bars: “|”. Finally, in the card examples, the model continuation pluses have been removed from the card lines for clarity’s sake.

30.1.1 Examples

The model description for a two-dimensional numerical diode might look something like what follows. This example demonstrates many of the features of the input format described above. Notice how the .MODEL line and the leading pluses form a border around the model description:

Example: Numerical diode

.MODEL M_NUMERICAL NUPD LEVEL=2 
+ cardnamel numberl=val1 (number2 val2), (number3 = val3) 
+ cardname2 numberl=val1 string1 = name1 

+ cardname3 numberl=val1, flag1, ^flag2 
+ + number2=val2, flag3

The element line for an instance of this model might look something like the following. Double quotes are used to protect the file name from decapitalization:

dl 1 2 M_NUMERICAL area=lOOpm^2 ic.file = "diode.IC"

30.2 BOUNDARY, INTERFACE

Specify properties of a domain boundary or the interface between two boundaries

SYNOPSIS

boundary domain [bounding-box] [properties] 
interface domain neighbor [bounding-box] [properties]

30.2.1 DESCRIPTION

The boundary and interface cards are used to set surface physics parameters along the boundary of a specified domain. Normally, the parameters apply to the entire boundary, but there are two ways to restrict the area of interest. If a neighboring domain is also specified, the parameters are only set on the interface between the two domains. In addition, if a bounding box is given, only that portion of the boundary or interface inside the bounding box will be set.

If a semiconductor-insulator interface is specified, then an estimate of the width of any inversion or accumulation layer that may form at the interface can be provided. If the surface mobility model (cf. models card) is enabled, then the model will apply to all semiconductor portions of the device within this estimated distance of the interface. If a point lies within the estimated layer width of more than one interface, it belong to the interface specified first in the input file. If the layer width given is less than or equal to zero, it is automatically replaced by an estimate calculated from the doping near the interface. As a consequence, if the doping varies so will the layer width estimate.

Each edge of the bounding box can be specified in terms of its location or its mesh-index in the relevant dimension, or defaulted to the respective boundary of the simulation mesh.

30.2.2 PARAMETERS





Name Type Description Units








Domain Integer ID number of primary domain




Neighbor Integer ID number of neighboring domain




X.Low Real Lowest X location of bounding box μm
: IX.Low Integer Lowest X mesh-index of bounding box
X.High Real Highest X location of bounding box μm
: IX.High Integer Highest X mesh-index of bounding box
Y.Low Real Lowest Y location of bounding box μm
: IY.Low Integer Lowest Y mesh-index of bounding box
Y.High Real Highest Y location of bounding box μm
:IY.High Integer Highest Y mesh-index of bounding box




Qf Real Fixed interface charge Ccm2




SN Real Surface recombination velocity - electrons cms




SP Real Surface recombination velocity - holes cms




Layer.Width Real Width of surface layer μm




30.2.3 EXAMPLES

The following shows how the surface recombination velocities at an Si-SiO2 interface might be set:

interface dom=l neigh=2 sn=l.Oe4 sp=l.Oe4

In a MOSFET with a 2.0μm gate width and 0.1μm source and drain overlap, the surface channel can be restricted to the region between the metallurgical junctions and within 100 Ȧ ( 0.01 μm ) of the interface:

interface dom=l neigh=2 x.l=l.l x.h=2.9 layer.w=0.01

The inversion layer width in the previous example can be automatically determined by setting the estimate to 0.0:

interface dom=l neigh=% x.l=l.l x.h=2.9 layer.w=0.0

30.3 COMMENT

Add explanatory comments to a device definition

SYNOPSIS

comment [text] 
* [text] 
$ [text] 
# [text]

30.3.1 DESCRIPTION

Annotations can be added to a device definition using the comment card. All text on a comment card is ignored. Several popular commenting characters are also supported as aliases: ’*’ from SPICE, ’$’ from PISCES, and ’#’ from LINUX shell scripts.

30.3.2 EXAMPLES

A SPICE-like comment is followed by a PISCES-like comment and shell script comment:

* CIDER and SPICE would ignore this input line 
$ CIDER and PISCES would ignore this , but SPICE wouldn’t 
# CIDER and LINUX Shell scripts would ignore this input line

30.4 CONTACT

Specify properties of an electrode

SYNOPSIS

contact number [workfunction]

30.4.1 DESCRIPTION

The properties of an electrode can be set using the contact card. The only changeable property is the work-function of the electrode material and this only affects contacts made to an insulating material. All contacts to semiconductor material are assumed to be ohmic in nature.

30.4.2 PARAMETERS




Name Type Description






Number Integer ID number of the electrode



Work-function Real Work-function of electrode material. ( eV )



30.4.3 EXAMPLES

The following shows how the work-function of the gate contact of a MOSFET might be changed to a value appropriate for a P+ polysilicon gate:

contact num=2 workf=5.29

30.4.4 SEE ALSO

electrode, material

30.5 DOMAIN, REGION

Identify material-type for section of a device

SYNOPSIS

domain number material [position] 
region number material [position]

30.5.1 DESCRIPTION

A device is divided into one or more rectilinear domains, each of which has a unique identification number and is composed of a particular material.

Domain (aka region) cards are used to build up domains by associating a material type with a box-shaped section of the device. A single domain may be the union 0f multiple boxes. When multiple domain cards overlap in space, the one occurring last in the input file will determine the ID number and material type of the overlapped region.

Each edge of a domain box can be specified in terms of its location or mesh-index in the relevant dimension, or defaulted to the respective boundary of the simulation mesh.

30.5.2 PARAMETERS




Name Type Description






Number Integer ID number of this domain



Material Integer ID number of material used by this domain



X.Low Real Lowest X location of domain box, ( μm )
:IX.Low Integer Lowest X mesh-index of domain box
X.High Real Highest X location of domain box, ( μm )
:IX-High Integer Highest X mesh-index of domain box
Y.Low Real Lowest Y location of domain box, ( μm )
:IY.Low Integer Lowest Y mesh-index of domain box
Y.High Real Highest Y location of domain box, ( μm )
:IY.High Integer Highest Y mesh-index of domain box



30.5.3 EXAMPLES

Create a 4.0 pm wide by 2.0 pm high domain out of material #1:

domain num=l material=l x.l=O.O x.h=4.0 y.l=O.O y.h=2.0

The next example defines the two domains that would be typical of a planar MOSFET simulation. One occupies all of the mesh below y = 0 and the other occupies the mesh above y = 0. Because the x values are left unspecified, the low and high x boundaries default to the edges of the mesh:

domain n=l m=l y.l=O.O 
domain n=2 m=2 y.h=O.O

30.5.4 SEE ALSO

x.mesh, material

30.6 DOPING

Add dopant to regions of a device

SYNOPSIS

doping [domains] profile-type [lateral-profile-type] [axis] 
    [impurity-type1 [constant-box] [profile-specifications]

30.6.1 DESCRIPTION

Doping cards are used to add impurities to the various domains of a device. Initially each domain is dopant-free. Each new doping card creates a new doping profile that defines the dopant concentration as a function of position. The doping at a particular location is then the sum over all profiles of the concentration values at that position. Each profile can be restricted to a subset of a device’s domains by supplying a list of the desired domains.

Otherwise, all domains are doped by each profile.

A profile has uniform concentration inside the constant box. Outside this region, it varies according to the primary an lateral profile shapes. In 1D devices the lateral shape is unused and in 2D devices the y-axis is the default axis for the primary profile. Several analytic functions can be used to define the primary profile shape. Alternatively, empirical or simulated profile data can be extracted from a file. For the analytic profiles, the doping is the product of a profile function (e.g. Gaussian) and a reference concentration, which is either the constant concentration of a uniform profile, or the peak concentration for any of the other functions. If concentration data is used instead take from an ASCII file containing a list of location-concentration pairs or a SUPREM3 exported file, the name of the file must be provided. If necessary, the final concentration at a point is then found by multiplying the primary profile concentration by the value of the lateral profile function at that point. Empirical profiles must first be normalized by the value at 0.0 to provide a usable profile functions. Alternatively, the second dimension can be included by assigning the same concentration to all points equidistant from the edges of the constant box. The contours of the profile are the circular.

Unless otherwise specified, the added impurities are assumes to be N type. However, the name of a specific dopant species is needed when extracting concentration information for that impurity from a SUPREM3 exported file.

Several parameters are used to adjust the basic shape of a profile functions so that the final, constructed profile, matches the doping profile in the real device. The constant box region should coincide with a region of constant concentration in the device. For uniform profiles its boundaries default to the mesh boundaries. For the other profiles the constant box starts as a point and only acquires width or height if both the appropriate edges are specified. The location of the peak of the primary profile can be moved away from the edge of the constant box.


PIC

Figure 30.1: 1D doping profiles with location > 0.


A positive location places the peak outside the constant box (cf. Fig. 30.1), and a negative value puts it inside the constant box (cf. Fig. 30.2).


PIC

Figure 30.2: 1D doping profiles with location < 0.


The concentration in the constant box is then equal to the value of the profile when it intersects the edge of the constant box. The argument of the profile function is a distance expressed in terms of the characteristic length (by default equal to 1μm). The longer this length, the more gradually the profile will change. For example, in Fig. A.1 and Fig A.2, the profiles marked (a) have characteristic lengths twice those of the profiles marked (b). The location and characteristic length for the lateral profile are multiplied by the lateral ratio. This allows the use of different length scales for the primary and lateral profiles. For rotated profiles, this scaling is taken into account, and the profile contours are elliptical rather than circular.

30.6.2 PARAMETERS




Name Type Description






Domains Int List List of domains to dope



Uniform: Flag Primary profile type
Linear:
Erfc:
Exponential:
Suprem3:
Ascii:
Ascii Suprem3
InFile String Name of Suprem3, Ascii or Ascii Suprem3 input file



Lat.Rotate: Flag Lateral profile type
Lat.Unif:
Lat.Lin:
Lat.Gauss:
Lat.Erfc:
Lat.Exp



X.Axis:Y.Axis Flag Primary profile direction



N.Type: P.Type: Flag Impurity type
Donor: Acceptor:
Phosphorus:
Arsenic:
Antimony:
Boron



X.Low Real Lowest X location of constant box, (μm)
X.High Real Highest X location of constant box, (μm)
Y.Low Real Lowest Y location of constant box, (μm)
Y.High Real Highest Y location of constant box, (μm)



Conic | Peak.conic Real Dopant concentration, (cm-3)
Location | Range Real Location of profile edge/peak, (μm)
Char.Length Real Characteristic length of profile, (μm)
Ratio.Lat Real Ratio of lateral to primary distances



30.6.3 EXAMPLES

This first example adds a uniform background P-type doping of 1.0×1016cm-3 to an entire device:

doping uniform p.type conc=l.0el6

A Gaussian implantation with rotated lateral falloff, such as might be used for a MOSFET source, is then added:

doping gauss lat.rotate n.type conc=l.0el9 
+ x.l=0.0 x.h=0.5 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.2 ratio=0.7

Alternatively, an error-function falloff could be used:

doping gauss lat.erfc conc=l.0el9 
+ x.l=0.0 x.h=0.5 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.2 ratio=0.7

Finally, the MOSFET channel implant is extracted from an ASCII-format SUPREM3 file. The lateral profile is uniform, so that the implant is confined between X = 1μm and X = 3μm. The profile begins at Y = 0μm (the high Y value defaults equal to the low Y value):

doping ascii suprem3 infile=implant.s3 lat.unif boron 
+ x.l=1.0 x.h=3.0 y.l=0.0

30.6.4 SEE ALSO

domain, mobility, contact, boundary

30.7 ELECTRODE

Set location of a contact to the device

SYNOPSIS

electrode [number] [position]

30.7.1 DESCRIPTION

Each device has several electrodes which are used to connect the device to the rest of the circuit. The number of electrodes depends on the type of device. For example, a MOSFET needs 4 electrodes. A particular electrode can be identified by its position in the list of circuit nodes on the device element line. For example, the drain node of a MOSFET is electrode number 1, while the bulk node is electrode number 4. Electrodes for which an ID number has not been specified are assigned values sequentially in the order they appear in the input file.

For lD devices, the positions of two of the electrodes are predefined to be at the ends of the simulation mesh. The first electrode is at the low end of the mesh, and the last electrode is at the high end. The position of the special lD BJT base contact is set on the options card. Thus, electrode cards are used exclusively for 2D devices.

Each card associates a portion of the simulation mesh with a particular electrode. In contrast to domains, which are specified only in terms of boxes, electrodes can also be specified in terms of line segments. Boxes and segments for the same electrode do not have to overlap. If they don’t, it is assumed that the electrode is wired together outside the area covered by the simulation mesh. However, pieces of different electrodes must not overlap, since this would represent a short circuit. Each electrode box or segment can be specified in terms of the locations or mesh-indices of its boundaries. A missing value defaults to the corresponding mesh boundary.

30.7.2 PARAMETERS




Name Type Description






Number Integer ID number of this domain



X.Low Real Lowest X location of electrode, (μm)



:IX.Low Integer Lowest X mesh-index of electrode



X.High Real Highest X location of electrode, (μm)



:IX.High Integer Highest X mesh-index of electrode



Y.Low Real Lowest Y location of electrode, (μm)



:IY.Low Integer Lowest Y mesh-index of electrode



Y.High Real Highest Y location of electrode, (μm)



:IY.High Integer Highest Y mesh-index of electrode



30.7.3 EXAMPLES

The following shows how the four contacts of a MOSFET might be specified:

* DRAIN 
electrode x.l=0.0 x.h=0.5 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.0 
* GATE 
electrode x.l=1.0 x.h=3.0 iy.l=0 iy.h=0 
* SOURCE 
electrode x.l=3.0 x.h=4.0 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.0 
* BULK 
electrode x.l=0.0 x.h=4.0 y.l=2.0 y.h=2.0

The numbering option can be used when specifying bipolar transistors with dual base contacts:

* EMITTER 
electrode num=3 x.l=1.0 x.h=2.0 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.0 
* BASE 
electrode num=2 x.l=0.0 x.h=0.5 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.0 
electrode num=2 x.l=2.5 x.h=3.0 y.l=0.0 y.h=0.0 
* COLLECTOR 
electrode num=1 x.l=0.0 x.h=3.0 y.l=1.0 y.h=1.0

30.7.4 SEE ALSO

domain, contact

30.8 END

Terminate processing of a device definition

SYNOPSIS

end

30.8.1 DESCRIPTION

The end card stops processing of a device definition. It may appear anywhere within a definition. Subsequent continuation lines of the definition will be ignored. If no end card is supplied, all the cards will be processed.

30.9 MATERIAL

Specify physical properties of a material

SYNOPSIS

material number type [physical-constants]

30.9.1 DESCRIPTION

The material card is used to create an entry in the list of materials used in a device. Each entry needs a unique identification number and the type of the material. Default values are assigned to the physical properties of the material. Most material parameters are accessible either here or on the mobility or contact cards. However, some parameters remain inaccessible (e.g. the ionization coefficient parameters). Parameters for most physical effect models are collected here. Mobility parameters are handled separately by the mobility card. Properties of electrode materials are set using the contact card.

30.9.2 PARAMETERS




Name Type Description






Number Integer ID number of this material



Semiconductor : Silicon Flag Type of this material
: Polysilicon : GaAs
: Insulator : Oxide
: Nitride



Affinity Real Electron affinity (eV)



Permittivity Real Dielectric permittivity (Fcm)



Nc Real Conduction band density (cm-3)



Nv Real Valence band density (cm-3)



Eg Real Energy band gap (eV)



dEg.dT Real Bandgap narrowing with temperature (eVK)



Eg.Tref Real Bandgap reference temperature, ( °K )



dEg.dN Real Bandgap narrowing with N doping, (eVcm-3)



Eg.Nref Real Bandgap reference concentration - N type, (cm-3)



dEg.dP Real Bandgap narrowing with P doping, (eVcm-3)



Eg.Pref Real Bandgap reference concentration - P type, (cm-3)



TN Real SRH lifetime - electrons, (sec)



SRH.Nref Real SRH reference concentration - electrons (cm-3)



TP Real SRH lifetime - holes, (sec)



SRH.Pref Real SRH reference concentration - holes (cm-3)



CN Real Auger coefficient - electrons (cm6sec)



CP Real Auger coefficient - holes (cm6sec)



ARichN Real Richardson constant - electrons, ( A  2
cm∘K2-)



ARichP Real Richardson constant - holes, ( Acm2
∘K2)



30.9.3 EXAMPLES

Set the type of material #1 to silicon, then adjust the values of the temperature-dependent bandgap model parameters:

material num=1 silicon eg=1.12 deg.dt=4.7e-4 eg.tref=640.0

The recombination lifetimes can be set to extremely short values to simulate imperfect semiconductor material:

material num=2 silicon tn=1ps tp=1ps

30.9.4 SEE ALSO

domain, mobility, contact, boundary

30.10 METHOD

Choose types and parameters of numerical methods

SYNOPSIS

method [types] [parameters]

30.10.1 DESCRIPTION

The method card controls which numerical methods are used during a simulation and the parameters of these methods. Most of these methods are optimizations that reduce run time, but may sacrifice accuracy or reliable convergence.

For majority-carrier devices such as MOSFETs, one carrier simulations can be used to save simulation time. The systems of equations in AC analysis may be solved using either direct or successive-over-relaxation techniques. Successive-over-relaxation is faster, but at high frequencies, it may fail to converge or may converge to the wrong answer. In some cases, it is desirable to obtain AC parameters as functions of DC bias conditions. If necessary, a one-point AC analysis is performed at a predefined frequency in order to obtain these small-signal parameters. The default for this frequency is 1 Hz. The Jacobian matrix for DC and transient analyses can be simplified by ignoring the derivatives of the mobility with respect to the solution variables. However, the resulting analysis may have convergence problems. Additionally, if they are ignored during AC analyses, incorrect results may be obtained.

A damped Newton method is used as the primary solution technique for the device-level partial differential equations. This algorithm is based on an iterative loop that terminates when the error in the solution is small enough or the iteration limit is reached. Error tolerances are used when determining if the error is “small enough”. The tolerances are expressed in terms of an absolute, solution-independent error and a relative, solution-dependent error. The absolute-error limit can be set on this card. The relative error is computed by multiplying the size of the solution by the circuit level SPICE parameter RELTOL.

30.10.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






OneCarrier Flag Solve for majority carriers only



AC analysis String AC analysis method, ( either DIRECT or SOR)



NoMobDeriv Flag Ignore mobility derivatives



Frequency Real AC analysis frequency, ( Hz )



ItLim Integer Newton iteration limit



DevTol Real Maximum residual error in device equations



30.10.3 Examples

Use one carrier simulation for a MOSFET, and choose direct method AC analysis to ensure accurate, high frequency results:

method onec ac.an=direct

Tolerate no more than 10-10 as the absolute error in device-level equations, and perform no more than 15 Newton iterations in any one loop:

method devtol=1e-10 itlim=15

30.11 Mobility

Specify types and parameters of mobility models

SYNOPSIS

mobility material [carrier] [parameters] [models] [initialize]

30.11.1 Description

The mobility model is one of the most complicated models of a material’s physical properties. As a result, separate cards are needed to set up this model for a given material.

Mobile carriers in a device are divided into a number of different classes, each of which has different mobility modelling. There are three levels of division. First, electrons and holes are obviously handled separately. Second, carriers in surface inversion or accumulation layers are treated differently than carriers in the bulk. Finally, bulk carriers can be either majority or minority carriers.

For surface carriers, the normal-field mobility degradation model has three user-modifiable parameters. For bulk carriers, the ionized impurity scattering model has four controllable parameters. Different sets of parameters are maintained for each of the four bulk carrier types: majority-electron, minority-electron, majority-hole and minority-hole. Velocity saturation modeling can be applied to both surface and bulk carriers. However, only two sets of parameters are maintained: one for electrons and one for holes. These must be changed on a majority carrier card (i.e. when the majority flag is set).

Several models for the physical effects are available, along with appropriate default values. Initially, a universal set of default parameters usable with all models is provided. These can be overridden by defaults specific to a particular model by setting the initialization flag. These can then be changed directly on the card itself. The bulk ionized impurity models are the Caughey-Thomas (CT) model and the Scharfetter-Gummel (SG) model [CAUG671, [SCHA69]. Three alternative sets of defaults are available for the Caughey-Thomas expression. They are the Arora (AR) parameters for Si [AROR82], the University of Florida (UF) parameters for minority carriers in Si [SOLL90], and a set of parameters appropriate for GaAs (GA). The velocity-saturation models are the Caughey-Thomas (CT) and Scharfetter-Gummel (SG) models for Si, and the PISCES model for GaAs (GA). There is also a set of Arora (AR) parameters for the Caughey-Thomas model.

30.11.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






Material Integer ID number of material



Electron : Hole Flag Mobile carrier
Majority : Minority Flag Mobile carrier type



MUS Real Maximum surface mobility, ( cm2/Vs )
EC.A Real Surface mobility 1st-order critical field, ( V/cm )
EC.B Real Real Surface mobility 2nd-order critical field, ( V2/cm2 )



MuMax Real Maximum bulk mobility, ( cm2/Vs )
MuMin Real Minimum bulk mobility, ( cm2/Vs)
NtRef Real Ionized impurity reference concentration, ( cm-3 )
NtExp Real Ionized impurity exponent



Vsat Real Saturation velocity, ( cm/s )
Vwarm Real Warm carrier reference velocity, ( cm/s )



ConcModel String Ionized impurity model, ( CT, AR, UF, SG, Dr GA )
FieldModel String Velocity saturation model, ( CT, AR, SG, or GA )
Init Flag Copy model-specific defaults



30.11.3 Examples

The following set of cards completely updates the bulk mobility parameters for material #1:

mobility mat=l concmod=sg fieldmod=sg 
mobility mat=l elec major mumax=1000.0 mumin=l00.0 
+ ntref=l.0el6 ntexp=0.8 vsat=l.0e7 vwarm=3.0e6 
mobility mat=l elec minor mumax=1000.0 mumin=200.O 
+ ntref=l.0el7 ntexp=0.9 
mobility mat=l hole major mumax=500.0 mumin=50.0 
+ ntref=l.0el6 ntexp=0.7 vsat=8.0e6 vwarm=l.0e6 
mobility mat=l hole minor mumax=500.0 mumin=150.0 
+ ntref=l.0el7 ntexp=0.8

The electron surface mobility is changed by the following:

mobility mat=l elec mus=800.0 ec.a=3.0e5 ec.b=9.0e5

Finally, the default Scharfetter-Gummel parameters can be used in Si with the GaAs velocity-saturation model (even though it doesn’t make physical sense!):

mobility mat=l init elec major fieldmodel=sg 
mobility mat=l init hole major fieldmodel=sg 
mobility mat=l fieldmodel=ga

30.11.4 SEE ALSO

material

30.11.5 BUGS

The surface mobility model does not include temperature-dependence for the transverse-field parameters. Those parameters will need to be adjusted by hand.

30.12 MODELS

Specify which physical models should be simulated

SYNOPSIS

models [model flags]

30.12.1 DESCRIPTION

The models card indicates which physical effects should be modeled during a simulation. Initially, none of the effects are included. A flag can be set false by preceding by a caret.

30.12.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






BGN Flag Bandgap narrowing
SRH Flag Shockley-Reed-Hall recombination
ConcTau Flag Concentration-dependent SRH lifetimes
Auger Flag Auger recombination
Avalanche Flag Local avalanche generation
TempMob Flag Temperature-dependent mobility
ConcMob Flag Concentration-dependent mobility
FieldMob Flag Lateral-field-dependent mobility
TransMob Flag Transverse-field-dependent surface mobility
SurfMob Flag Activate surface mobility model



30.12.3 Examples

Turn on bandgap narrowing, and all of the generation-recombination effects:

models bgn srh conctau auger aval

Amend the first card by turning on lateral- and transverse-field-dependent mobility in surface charge layers, and lateral-field-dependent mobility in the bulk. Also, this line turns avalanche generation modeling off.

models surfmob transmob fieldmob ^aval

30.12.4 See also

material, mobility

30.12.5 Bugs

The local avalanche generation model for 2D devices does not compute the necessary contributions to the device-level Jacobian matrix. If this model is used, it may cause convergence difficulties and it will cause AC analyses to produce incorrect results.

30.13 OPTIONS

Provide optional device-specific information

SYNOPSIS

options [device-type] [initial-state] [dimensions] 
    [measurement-temperature]

30.13.1 DESCRIPTION

The options card functions as a catch-all for various information related to the circuit-device interface. The type of a device can be specified here, but will be defaulted if none is given. Device type is used primarily to determine how to limit the changes in voltage between the terminals of a device. It also helps determine what kind of boundary conditions are used as defaults for the device electrodes.

A previously calculated state, stored in the named initial-conditions file, can be loaded at the beginning of an analysis. If it is necessary for each instance of a numerical model to start in a different state, then the unique flag can be used to generate unique filenames for each instance by appending the instance name to the given filename. This is the same method used by CIDER to generate unique filenames when the states are originally saved. If a particular state file does not fit. this pattern, the filename can be entered directly on the instance line.

Mask dimension defaults can be set so that device sizes can be specified in terms of area or width. Dimensions for the special lD BJT base contact can also be controlled. The measurement temperature of material parameters, normally taken to be the circuit default, can be overridden.

30.13.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






Resistor Flag Resistor
: Capacitor Flag Capacitor
: Diode Flag Diode
: Bipolar|BJT Flag Bipolar transistor
: MOSFET Flag MOS field-effect transistor
: JFET Flag Junction field-effect transistor
: MESFET Flag MES field-effect transistor



IC.File String Initial-conditions filename
Unique Flag Append instance name to filename



DefA Real Default Mask Area, (m²)
DefW Real Default Mask Width, (m)
DefL Real Default Mask Length, (m)
Base.Area Real lD BJT base area relative to emitter area
Base.Length Real Real lD BJT base contact length, (µm)
Base.Depth Real lD BJT base contact depth, (µm)



TNom Real Nominal measurement temperature, (°C)



30.13.3 Examples

Normally, a ’numos’ device model is used for MOSFET devices. However, it can be changed into a bipolar-with-substrate-contact model, by specifying a bipolar structure using the other cards, and indicating the device-structure type as shown here. The default length is set to 1.0 µm so that when mask area is specified on the element line it can be divided by this default to obtain the device width.

options bipolar defl=1.0

Specify that a 1D BJT has base area 1/10th that of the emitter, has an effective depth of 0.2 µm and a length between the internal and external base contacts

options base.area=0.1 base.depth=0.2 base.len=1.5

If a circuit contains two instances of a bipolar transistor model named ’q1’ and ’q2’, the following line tells the simulator to look for initial conditions in the ’OP1.q2’, respectively. The period in the middle of the names is added automatically:

options unique ic.file="OP1"

30.13.4 See also

numd, nbjt, numos

30.14 OUTPUT

Identify information to be printed or saved

SYNOPSIS

output [debugging-flags] [general-info] [saved-solutions]

30.14.1 DESCRIPTION

The output card is used to control the amount of information that is either presented to or saved for the user. Three types of information are available. Debugging information is available as a means to monitor program execution. This is useful during long simulations when one is unsure about whether the program has become trapped at some stage of the simulation. General information about a device such as material parameters and resource usage can be obtained. Finally, information about the internal and external states of a device is available. Since this data is best interpreted using a post-processor, a facility is available for saving device solutions in auxiliary output files. Solution filenames are automatically generated by the simulator. If the named file already exists, the file will be overwritten. A filename unique to a particular circuit or run can be generated by providing a root filename. This root name will be added onto the beginning of the automatically generated name. This feature can be used to store solutions in a directory other than the current one by specifying the root filename as the path of the desired directory. Solutions are only saved for those devices that specify the ‘save’ parameter on their instance lines.

The various physical values that can be saved are named below. By default, the following values are saved: the doping, the electron and hole concentrations, the potential, the electric field, the electron and hole current densities, and the displacement current density. Values can be added to or deleted from this list by turning the appropriate flag on or off. For vector-valued quantities in two dimensions, both the X and Y components are saved. The vector magnitude can be obtained during post-processing.

Saved solutions can be used in conjunction with the options card and instance lines to reuse previously calculated solutions as initial guesses for new solutions.For example, it is typical to initialize the device to a known state prior to beginning any DC transfer curve or operating point analysis. This state is an ideal candidate to be saved for later use when it is known that many analyses will be performed on a particular device structure.

30.14.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






All.Debug Flag Debug all analyses
OP.Debug Flag .OP analyses
DC.Debug Flag .DC analyses
TRAN.Debug Flag .TRAN analyses
AC.Debug Flag .AC analyses
PZ.Debug Flag .PZ analyses



Material Flag Physical material information
Statistics | Resources Flag Resource usage information



RootFile String Root of output file names
Psi Flag Potential ( V )
Equ.Psi Flag Equilibrium potential ( V )
Vac.Psi Flag Vacuum potential ( V )
Doping Flag Net doping ( cm³ )
N.Conc Flag Electron concentration ( cm³ )
P.Conc Flag Hole concentration ( cm³ )
PhiN Flag Electron quasi-fermi potential ( V )
PhiP Flag Hole quasi-fermi potential ( V )
PhiC Flag Conduction band potential ( V )
PhiV Flag Valence band potential ( V )
E.Field Flag Electric field ( V/cm )
JC Flag Conduction current density ( A/cm² )
JD Flag Displacement current density ( A/cm² )
JN Flag Electron current density ( A/cm² )
JP Flag Hole current density ( A/cm² )
JT Flag Total current density ( A/cm² )
Unet Flag Net recombination ( 1/cm³ s )
MuN Flag Electron mobility (low-field) ( cm²/Vs )
MuP Flag Hole mobility (low-field) ( cm²/Vs )



30.14.3 Examples

The following example activates all potentially valuable diagnostic output:

output all.debug mater stat

Energy band diagrams generally contain the potential, the quasi-fermi levels, the energies and the vacuum energy. The following example enables saving of the r values needed to make energy band diagrams:

output phin phjp phic phiv vac.psi

Sometimes it is desirable to save certain key solutions, and then reload them for use in subsequent simulations. In such cases only the essential values ( Ψ, n, and p ) need to be saved. This example turns off the nonessential default values (and indicates the essential ones explicitly):

output psi n.conc p.conc ^e.f ^jn ^jp ^jd

30.14.4 SEE ALSO

options, numd, nbjt, numos

30.15 TITLE

Provide a label for this device’s output

SYNOPSIS

title [text]

30.15.1 DESCRIPTION

The title card provides a label for use as a heading in various output files. The text can be any length, but titles that fit on a single line will produce more aesthetically pleasing output.

30.15.2 EXAMPLES

Set the title for a minimum gate length NMOSFET in a 1.0µm BiCMOS process

title L=1.0um NMOS Device, 1.0um BiCMOS Process

30.15.3 BUGS

The title is currently treated like a comment.

30.16 X.MESH, Y.MESH

Define locations of lines and nodes in a mesh

SYNOPSIS

x.mesh position numbering-method [spacing-parameters] 
y.mesh position numbering-method [spacing-parameters]

30.16.1 DESCRIPTION

The domains of a device are discretized onto a rectangular finite-difference mesh using x.mesh cards for 1D devices, or x.mesh and y.mesh cards for 2D devices. Both uniform and non-uniform meshes can be specified.

A typical mesh for a 2D device is shown in Figure 30.3.


PIC

Figure 30.3: Typical mesh for 2D devices


The mesh is divided into intervals by the reference lines. The other lines in each interval are automatically generated by CIDER using the mesh spacing parameters. In general, each new mesh card adds one reference line and multiple automatic lines to the mesh. Conceptually, a 1D mesh is similar to a 2D mesh except that there are no reference or automatic lines needed in the second dimension.

The location of a reference line in the mesh must either be given explicitly (using Location) or defined implicitly relative to the location of the previous reference line (by using Width). (If the first card in either direction is specified using Width, an initial reference line is automatically generated at location 0.0.) The line number of the reference line can be given explicitly, in which case the automatic lines are evenly spaced within the interval, and the number of lines is determined from the difference between the current line number and that of the previous reference line. However, if the interval width is given, then the line number is interpreted directly as the number of additional lines to add to the mesh.

For a nonuniformly spaced interval, the number of automatic lines has to be determined using the mesh spacing parameters. Nonuniform spacing is triggered by providing a desired ratio for the lengths of the spaces between adjacent pairs of lines. This ratio should always be greater than one, indicating the ratio of larger spaces to smaller spaces. In addition to the ratio, one or both of the space widths at the ends of the interval must be provided. If only one is given, it will be the smallest space and the largest space will be at the opposite end of the interval. If both are given, the largest space will be in the middle of the interval. In certain cases it is desirable to limit the growth of space widths in order to control the solution accuracy. This can be accomplished by specifying a maximum space size, but this option is only available when one of the two end lengths is given. Note that once the number of new lines is determined using the desired ratio, the actual spacing ratio may be adjusted so that the spaces exactly fill the interval.

30.16.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






Location Real Location of this mesh line, ( µm )
:Width Real Width between this and previous mesh lines, ( µm )



Number | Node Integer Number of this mesh line
:Ratio Real Ratio of sizes of adjacent spaces



H.Start | H1 Real Space size at start of interval, ( µm )
H.End | H2 Real Space size at end of interval, ( µm )
H.Max | H3 Real Maximum space size inside interval, ( µm )



30.16.3 EXAMPLES

A 50 node, uniform mesh for a 5 µm long semiconductor resistor can be specified as:

x.mesh loc=0.0 n=1 
x.mesh loc=5.0 n=50

An accurate mesh for a 1D diode needs fine spacing near the junction. In this example, the junction is assumed to be 0.75 µm deep. The spacing near the diode ends is limited to a maximum of 0.1 µm:

x.mesh w=0.75 h.e=0.001 h.m=0.l ratio=1.5 
x.mesh w=2.25 h.s=0.001 h.m=0.l ratio=1.5

The vertical mesh spacing of a MOSFET can generally be specified as uniform through the gate oxide, very fine for the surface inversion layer, moderate down to the so source/drain junction depth, and then increasing all the way to the bulk contact:

y.mesh loc=-0.04 node=1 
y.mesh loc=0.0 node=6 
y.mesh width=0.5 h.start=0.001 h.max=.05 ratio=2.0 
y.mesh width=2.5 h.start=0.05 ratio=2.0

30.16.4 SEE ALSO

domain

30.17 NUMD

Diode / two-terminal numerical models and elements

SYNOPSIS Model:

.MODEL model-name NUMD [level] 
+ ...

SYNOPSIS Element:

DXXXXXXX nl n2 model-name [geometry] [temperature] [initial-conditions]

SYNOPSIS Output:

.SAVE [small-signal values]

30.17.1 DESCRIPTION

NUMD is the name for a diode numerical model. In addition, this same model can be used to simulate other two-terminal structures such as semiconductor resistors and MOS capacitors. See the options card for more information on how to customize the device type.

Both 1D and 2D devices are supported. These correspond to the LEVEL=l and LEVEL=2 models, respectively. If left unspecified, it is assumed that the device is one-dimensional.

All numerical two-terminal element names begin with the letter ‘D. The element name is then followed by the names of the positive (n1) and negative (n2) nodes. After this must come the name of the model used for the element. The remaining information can come in any order. The layout dimensions of an element are specified relative to the geometry of a default device. For 1D devices, the default device has an area of 1m², and for 2D devices, the default device has a width of 1 m. However, these defaults can be overridden on an options card. The operating temperature of a device can be set independently from that of the rest of the circuit in order to simulate non-isothermal circuit operation. Finally, the name of a file containing an initial state for the device can be specified. Remember that if the filename contains capital letters, they must be protected by surrounding the filename with double quotes. Alternatively, the device can be placed in an OFF state (thermal equilibrium) at the beginning of the analysis. For more information on the use of initial conditions, see the NGSPICE User’s Manual, chapt. 7.1.

In addition to the element input parameters, there are output-only parameters that can be shown using the NGSPICE show command (17.5.64) or captured using the save/.SAVE (17.5.55/15.6.1) command. These parameters are the elements of the indefinite conductance (G), capacitance (C), and admittance (Y) matrices where Y = G+jωC. By default, the parameters are computed at 1 Hz. Each element is accessed using the name of the matrix (g, c or y) followed by the node indices of the output terminal and the input terminal (e.g. g11). Beware that names are case-sensitive for save/show, so lower-case letters must be used.

30.17.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






Level Integer Dimensionality of numerical model



Area Real Multiplicative area factor
W Real Multiplicative width factor



Temp Real Element operating temperature



IC.File String Initial-conditions filename
Off Flag Device initially in OFF state



gIJ Flag Conductance element Gij, ( Ω )
cIJ Flag Capacitance element Cij, ( F )
yIJ Flag Admittance element Yij, ( Ω )



30.17.3 EXAMPLES

A one-dimensional numerical switching-diode element/model pair with an area twice that of the default device (which has a size of l µm x 1 µm) can be specified using:

DSWITCH 1 2 M_SWITCH_DIODE AREA=2 
.MODEL M_SWITCH_DIODE NUMD 
+ options defa=1p ... 
+ ...

A two-dimensional two-terminal MOS capacitor with a width of 20 µm and an initial condition of 3 V is created by:

DMOSCAP 11 12 M_MOSCAP W=20um IC=3v 
.MODEL M_MOSCAP NUMD LEVEL=2 
+ options moscap defw=1m 
+ ...

The next example shows how both the width and area factors can be used to create a power diode with area twice that of a 6µm-wide device (i.e. a 12µm-wide device). The device is assumed to be operating at a temperature of 100°C:

D1 POSN NEGN POWERMOD AREA=2 W=6um TEMP=100.0 
.MODEL POWERMOD NUMD LEVEL=2 
+ ...

This example saves all the small-signal parameters of the previous diode:

.SAVE @d1[g11] @d1[g12] @d1[g21] @d1[g22] 
.SAVE @d1[c11] @d1[c12] @d1[c21] @d1[c22] 
.SAVE @d1[y11] @d1[y12] @d1[y21] @d1[y22]

30.17.4 SEE ALSO

options, output

30.17.5 BUGS

Convergence problems may be experienced when simulating MOS capacitors due to singularities in the current-continuity equations.

30.18 NBJT

Bipolar / three-terminal numerical models and elements

SYNOPSIS Model:

.MODEL model-name NBJT [level] 
+ ...

SYNOPSIS Element:

QXXXXXXX nl n2 n3 model-name [geometry] 
+ [temperature] [initial-conditions]

SYNOPSIS Output:

.SAVE [small-signal values]

30.18.1 DESCRIPTION

NBJT is the name for a bipolar transistor numerical model. In addition, the 2D model can be used to simulate other three-terminal structures such as a JFET or MESFET. However, the 1D model is customized with a special base contact, and cannot be used for other purposes. See the options card for more information on how to customize the device type and setup the 1D base contact.

Both 1”and 2D devices are supported. These correspond to the LEVEL=l and models, respectively. If left unspecified, it is assumed that the device is one-dimensional.

All numerical three-terminal element names begin with the letter ’Q’. If the device is a bipolar transistor, then the nodes are specified in the order: collector (nl), base (n2), emitter (n3). For a JFET or MESFET, the node order is: drain (n1), gate (n2), source (n3). After this must come the name of the model used for the element. The remaining information can come in any order. The layout dimensions of an element are specified relative to the geometry of a default device. For the 1D BJT, the default device has an area of lm², and for 2D devices, the default device has a width of lm. In addition, it is assumed that the default 1D BJT has a base contact with area equal to the emitter area, length of 1µm and a depth automatically determined from the device doping profile. However, all these defaults can be overridden on an options card.

The operating temperature of a device can be set independently from the rest of that of the circuit in order to simulate non-isothermal circuit operation. Finally, the name of a file containing an initial state for the device can be specified. Remember that if the filename contains capital letters, they must be protected by surrounding the filename with double quotes. Alternatively, the device can be placed in an OFF state (thermal equilibrium) at the beginning of the analysis. For more information on the use of initial conditions, see the NGSPICE User’s Manual.

In addition to the element input parameters, there are output-only parameters that can be shown using the SPICE show command or captured using the save/.SAVE command. These parameters are the elements of the indefinite conductance (G), capacitance (C), and admittance (Y) matrices where Y = G +jωC. By default, the parameters are computed at 1Hz. Each element is accessed using the name of the matrix (g, c or y) followed by the node indices of the output terminal and the input terminal (e.g. g11). Beware that parameter names are case-sensitive for save/show, so lower-case letters must be used.

30.18.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






Level Integer Dimensionality of numerical model



Area Real Multiplicative area factor
W Real Multiplicative width factor



Temp Real Element operating temperature



IC.File String Initial-conditions filename
Off Flag Device initially in OFF state



gIJ Flag Conductance element Gij, ( Ω )
cIJ Flag Capacitance element Cij, ( F )
yIJ Flag Admittance element Yij, ( Ω )



30.18.3 EXAMPLES

A one-dimensional numerical bipolar transistor with an emitter stripe 4 times as wide as the default device is created using:

Q2 1 2 3 M_BJT AREA=4

This example saves the output conductance (go), transconductance (gm) and input conductance (gpi) of the previous transistor in that order:

.SAVE @q2[g11] @q2[g12] @q2[g22]

The second example is for a two-dimensional JFET with a width of 5pm and initial conditions obtained from file "IC.jfet":

QJ1 11 12 13 M_JFET W=5um IC.FILE="IC.jfet" 
.MODEL M_JFET NBJT LEVEL=2 
+ options jfet 
+ ...

A final example shows how to use symmetry to simulate half of a 2D BJT, avoiding having the user double the area of each instance:

Q2 NC2 NB2 NE2 BJTMOD AREA=1 
Q3 NC3 NB3 NE3 BJTMOD AREA=1 
.MODEL BJTMOD NBJT LEVEL=2 
+ options defw=2um 
* Define half of the device now 
+ ...

30.18.4 SEE ALSO

options, output

30.18.5 BUGS

MESFETs cannot be simulated properly yet because Schottky contacts have not been implemented.

30.19 NUMOS

MOSFET / four-terminal numerical models and elements

SYNOPSIS Model:

.MODEL model-name NUMOS [level] 
+ ...

SYNOPSIS Element:

MXXXXXXX nl n2 n3 n4 model-name [geometry] 
+ [temperature] [initial-conditions]

SYNOPSIS Output:

.SAVE [small-signal values]

30.19.1 DESCRIPTION

NUMOS is the name for a MOSFET numerical model. In addition, the 2D model can be used to simulate other four-terminal structures such as integrated bipolar and JFET devices with substrate contacts. However, silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) cannot be simulated because of the snapback in the transfer characteristic. See the options card for more information on how to customize the device type. The LEVEL parameter of two- and three-terminal devices is not needed, because only 2D devices are supported. However, it will accepted and ignored if provided.

All numerical four-terminal element names begin with the letter ‘M’. If the device is a MOSFET, or JFET with a bulk contact, then the nodes are specified in the order: drain (n1), gate (n2), source (n3), bulk (n4). If the device is a BJT, the node order is: collector (n1), base (n2), emitter (n3), substrate (n4). After this must come the name of the model 1used for the element. The remaining information can come in any order. The layout dimensions of an element are specified relative to the geometry of a default device. The default device has a width of lm. However, this default can be overridden on an options card. In addition, the element line will accept a length parameter, L, but does not use it in any calculations. This is provided to enable somewhat greater compatibility between numerical MOSFET models and the standard SPICE3 compact MOSFET models.

The operating temperature of a device can be set independently from that of the rest of the circuit in order to simulate non-isothermal circuit operation. Finally, the name of a file containing an initial state for the device can be specified. Remember that if the filename contains capital letters, they must be protected by surrounding the filename with double quotes. Alternatively, the device can be placed in an OFF state (thermal equilibrium) at the beginning of the analysis. For more information on the use of initial conditions, see the NGSPICE User’s Manual.

In addition to the element input parameters, there are output-only parameters that can be shown using the SPICE show command or captured using the save/.SAVE command.

These parameters are the elements of the indefinite conductance (G), capacitance (C), and admittance (Y) matrices where Y = G+jωC. By default, the parameters are computed at 1 Hz. Each element is accessed using the name of the matrix (g, c or y) followed by the node indices of the output terminal and the input terminal (e.g. g11). Beware that parameter names are case-sensitive for save/show, so lower-case letters must be used.

30.19.2 Parameters




Name Type Description






Level Integer Dimensionality of numerical model



Area Real Multiplicative area factor
W Real Multiplicative width factor
L Real Unused length factor



Temp Real Element operating temperature



IC.File String Initial-conditions filename
Off Flag Device initially in OFF state



gIJ Flag Conductance element Gij, ( Ω )
cIJ Flag Capacitance element Cij, ( F )
yIJ Flag Admittance element Yij, ( Ω )



30.19.3 EXAMPLES

A numerical MOSFET with a gate width of 5µm and length of 1µm is described below. However, the model can only be used for lµm length devices, so the length parameter is redundant. The device is initially biased near its threshold by taking an initial state from the file "NM1.vth".

M1 1 2 3 4 M_NMOS_1UM W=5um L=1um IC.FILE="NM1.vth" 
.MODEL MNMOS_1UM NUMOS 
* Description of a lum device 
+ ...

This example saves the definite admittance matrix of the previous MOSFET where the source terminal (3) is used as the reference. (The definite admittance matrix is formed by deleting the third row and column from the indefinite admittance matrix.)

.SAVE @m1[y11] @m1[y12] @ml[y14] 
.SAVE @m1[y21] @m1[y22] @ml[y24] 
.SAVE @m1[y41] @m1[y42] @ml[y44]

Bipolar transistors are usually specified in terms of their area relative to a unit device. The following example creates a unit-sized device:

MQ1 NC NB NE NS N_BJT 
.MODEL M_BJT NUMOS LEVEL=2 
+ options bipolar defw=5um 
+ ...

30.19.4 SEE ALSO

options, output

30.20 Cider examples

The original Cider User’s manual, in its Appendix A, lists a lot of examples, starting at page 226. We do not reproduce these pages here, but ask you to refer to the original document. If you experience any difficulties downloading it, please send a note to the ngspice users’ mailing list.

Part IV
Appendices

Chapter 31
Model and Device Parameters

The following tables summarize the parameters available on each of the devices and models in ngspice. There are two tables for each type of device supported by ngspice. Input parameters to instances and models are parameters that can occur on an instance or model definition line in the form keyword=value where keyword is the parameter name as given in the tables. Default input parameters (such as the resistance of a resistor or the capacitance of a capacitor) obviously do not need the keyword specified.

31.1 Accessing internal device parameters

Output parameters are those additional parameters which are available for many types of instances for the output of operating point and debugging information. These parameters are specified as @device[keyword] and are available for the most recent point computed or, if specified in a .save statement, for an entire simulation as a normal output vector. Thus, to monitor the gate-to-source capacitance of a MOSFET, a command

save @m1[cgs]

given before a transient simulation causes the specified capacitance value to be saved at each time-point, and a subsequent command such as

plot @m1[cgs]

produces the desired plot. (Note that the show command does not use this format).

Some variables are listed as both input and output, and their output simply returns the previously input value, or the default value after the simulation has been run. Some parameters are input only because the output system can not handle variables of the given type yet, or the need for them as output variables has not been apparent. Many such input variables are available as output variables in a different format, such as the initial condition vectors that can be retrieved as individual initial condition values. Finally, internally derived values are output only and are provided for debugging and operating point output purposes.

If you want to access a device parameter of a device used inside of a subcircuit, you may use the syntax as shown below.

General form:

@device_identifier.subcircuit_name.<subcircuit_name_nn> 
+.device_name[parameter]

Example input file:

* transistor output characteristics 
* two nested subcircuits 
vdd d1 0 2.0 
vss vsss 0 0 
vsig g1 vsss 0 
xmos1 d1 g1 vsss level1 
.subckt level1 d3 g3 v3 
xmos2  d3 g3 v3 level2 
.ends 
.subckt level2 d4 g4 v4 
m1 d4 g4 v4 v4 nmos w=1e-5 l=3.5e-007 
.ends 
.dc vdd 0 5 0.1 vsig 0 5 1 
.control 
save all @m.xmos1.xmos2.m1[vdsat] 
run 
plot vss#branch   $ current measured at the top level 
plot @m.xmos1.xmos2.m1[vdsat] 
.endc 
.MODEL NMOS NMOS  LEVEL   = 8 
+VERSION = 3.2.4  TNOM    = 27  TOX     = 7.4E-
.end

The device identifier is the first letter extracted from the device name, e.g. m for a MOS transistor.

Please note that the parameter tables presented below do not provide the detailed information available about the parameters provided in the section on each device and model, but are provided as a quick reference guide.

31.2 Elementary Devices

31.2.1 Resistor

31.2.1.1 Resistor instance parameters





# Name Direction Type

Description











1 resistance InOut real

Resistance






10 ac InOut real

AC resistance value






8 temp InOut real

Instance operating temperature






14 dtemp InOut real

Instance temperature difference with the rest of the circuit






3 l InOut real

Length






2 w InOut real

Width






12 m InOut real

Multiplication factor






16 tc InOut real

First order temp. coefficient






16 tc1 InOut real

First order temp. coefficient






17 tc2 InOut real

Second order temp. coefficient






13 scale InOut real

Scale factor






15 noisy InOut integer

Resistor generate noise






5 sens_resist In flag

flag to request sensitivity WRT resistance






6 i Out real

Current






7 p Out real

Power






206 sens_dc Out real

dc sensitivity






201 sens_real Out real

dc sensitivity and real part of ac sensitivity






202 sens_imag Out real

dc sensitivity and imag part of ac sensitivity






203 sens_mag Out real

ac sensitivity of magnitude






204 sens_ph Out real

ac sensitivity of phase






205 sens_cplx Out complex

ac sensitivity






31.2.1.2 Resistor model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










103 rsh InOut real Sheet resistance





106 narrow InOut real Narrowing of resistor





106 dw InOut real





109 short InOut real Shortening of resistor





109 dlr InOut real





101 tc1 InOut real First order temp. coefficient





102 tc2 InOut real Second order temp. coefficient





104 defw InOut real Default device width





104 w InOut real Default device width





105 l InOut real Default device length





110 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





111 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





108 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





107 r InOut real Resistance





107 res InOut real Resistance










r In flag Device is a resistor model





31.2.2 Capacitor - Fixed capacitor

31.2.2.1 Capacitor instance parameters





# Name Direction Type

Description











1 capacitance InOut real

Device capacitance






1 cap InOut real

Device capacitance






1 c InOut real

Device capacitance






2 ic InOut real

Initial capacitor voltage






8 temp InOut real

Instance operating temperature






9 dtemp InOut real

Instance temperature difference from the rest of the circuit






3 w InOut real

Device width






4 l InOut real

Device length






11 m InOut real

Parallel multiplier






10 scale InOut real

Scale factor






5 sens_cap In flag

flag to request sens. WRT cap.






6 i Out real

Device current






7 p Out real

Instantaneous device power






206 sens_dc Out real

dc sensitivity






201 sens_real Out real

real part of ac sensitivity






202 sens_imag Out real

dc sens. & imag part of ac sens.






203 sens_mag Out real

sensitivity of ac magnitude






204 sens_ph Out real

sensitivity of ac phase






205 sens_cplx Out complex

ac sensitivity






31.2.2.2 Capacitor model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










112 cap InOut real Model capacitance





101 cj InOut real Bottom Capacitance per area





102 cjsw InOut real Sidewall capacitance per meter





103 defw InOut real Default width





113 defl InOut real Default length





105 narrow InOut real width correction factor





106 short InOut real length correction factor





107 tc1 InOut real First order temp. coefficient





108 tc2 InOut real Second order temp. coefficient





109 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





110 di InOut real Relative dielectric constant





111 thick InOut real Insulator thickness





104 c In flag Capacitor model





31.2.3 Inductor - Fixed inductor

31.2.3.1 Inductor instance parameters





# Name Direction Type

Description











1 inductance InOut real

Inductance of inductor






2 ic InOut real

Initial current through inductor






5 sens_ind In flag

flag to request sensitivity WRT inductance






9 temp InOut real

Instance operating temperature






10 dtemp InOut real

Instance temperature difference with the rest of the circuit






8 m InOut real

Multiplication Factor






11 scale InOut real

Scale factor






12 nt InOut real

Number of turns






3 flux Out real

Flux through inductor






4 v Out real

Terminal voltage of inductor






4 volt Out real






6 i Out real

Current through the inductor






6 current Out real






7 p Out real

instantaneous power dissipated by the inductor






206 sens_dc Out real

dc sensitivity sensitivity






201 sens_real Out real

real part of ac sensitivity






202 sens_imag Out real

dc sensitivity and imag part of ac sensitivty






203 sens_mag Out real

sensitivity of AC magnitude






204 sens_ph Out real

sensitivity of AC phase






205 sens_cplx Out complex

ac sensitivity






31.2.3.2 Inductor model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










100 ind InOut real Model inductance





101 tc1 InOut real First order temp. coefficient





102 tc2 InOut real Second order temp. coefficient





103 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





104 csect InOut real Inductor cross section





105 length InOut real Inductor length





106 nt InOut real Model number of turns





107 mu InOut real Relative magnetic permeability





108 l In flag Inductor model





31.2.4 Mutual - Mutual Inductor

31.2.4.1 Mutual instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










401 k InOut real Mutual inductance





401 coefficient InOut real





402 inductor1 InOut instance First coupled inductor





403 inductor2 InOut instance Second coupled inductor





404 sens_coeff In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT coupling factor





606 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





601 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





602 sens_imag Out real dc sensitivity and imag part of ac sensitivty





603 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of AC magnitude





604 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of AC phase





605 sens_cplx Out complex mutual model parameters:





31.3 Voltage and current sources

31.3.1 ASRC - Arbitrary source

31.3.1.1 ASRC instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










2 i In parsetree Current source





1 v In parsetree Voltage source





7 i Out real Current through source





6 v Out real Voltage across source





3 pos_node Out integer Positive Node





4 neg_node Out integer Negative Node





31.3.2 Isource - Independent current source

31.3.2.1 Isource instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 dc InOut real DC value of source





2 acmag InOut real AC magnitude





3 acphase InOut real AC phase





5 pulse In real vector Pulse description





6 sine In real vector Sinusoidal source description





6 sin In real vector Sinusoidal source description





7 exp In real vector Exponential source description





8 pwl In real vector Piecewise linear description





9 sffm In real vector Single freq. FM description





21 am In real vector Amplitude modulation description





10 neg_node Out integer Negative node of source





11 pos_node Out integer Positive node of source





12 acreal Out real AC real part





13 acimag Out real AC imaginary part





14 function Out integer Function of the source





15 order Out integer Order of the source function





16 coeffs Out real vector Coefficients of the source





20 v Out real Voltage across the supply





17 p Out real Power supplied by the source





4 ac In real vector AC magnitude,phase vector





1 c In real Current through current source





22 current Out real Current in DC or Transient mode





18 distof1 In real vector f1 input for distortion





19 distof2 In real vector f2 input for distortion





31.3.3 Vsource - Independent voltage source

31.3.3.1 Vsource instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 dc InOut real D.C. source value





3 acmag InOut real A.C. Magnitude





4 acphase InOut real A.C. Phase





5 pulse In real vector Pulse description





6 sine In real vector Sinusoidal source description





6 sin In real vector Sinusoidal source description





7 exp In real vector Exponential source description





8 pwl In real vector Piecewise linear description





9 sffm In real vector Single freq. FM descripton





22 am In real vector Amplitude modulation descripton





16 pos_node Out integer Positive node of source





17 neg_node Out integer Negative node of source





11 function Out integer Function of the source





12 order Out integer Order of the source function





13 coeffs Out real vector Coefficients for the function





14 acreal Out real AC real part





15 acimag Out real AC imaginary part





2 ac In real vector AC magnitude, phase vector





18 i Out real Voltage source current





19 p Out real Instantaneous power





20 distof1 In real vector f1 input for distortion





21 distof2 In real vector f2 input for distortion





23 r In real pwl repeat start time value





24 td In real pwl delay time value





31.3.4 CCCS - Current controlled current source

31.3.4.1 CCCS instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 gain InOut real Gain of source





2 control InOut instance Name of controlling source





6 sens_gain In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT gain





4 neg_node Out integer Negative node of source





3 pos_node Out integer Positive node of source





7 i Out real CCCS output current





9 v Out real CCCS voltage at output





8 p Out real CCCS power





206 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





201 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





202 sens_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity





203 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of ac magnitude





204 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of ac phase





205 sens_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity





31.3.5 CCVS - Current controlled voltage source

31.3.5.1 CCVS instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 gain InOut real Transresistance (gain)





2 control InOut instance Controlling voltage source





7 sens_trans In flag flag to request sens. WRT transimpedance





3 pos_node Out integer Positive node of source





4 neg_node Out integer Negative node of source





8 i Out real CCVS output current





10 v Out real CCVS output voltage





9 p Out real CCVS power





206 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





201 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





202 sens_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity





203 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of ac magnitude





204 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of ac phase





205 sens_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity





31.3.6 VCCS - Voltage controlled current source

31.3.6.1 VCCS instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 gain InOut real Transconductance of source (gain)





8 sens_trans In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT transconductance





3 pos_node Out integer Positive node of source





4 neg_node Out integer Negative node of source





5 cont_p_node Out integer Positive node of contr. source





6 cont_n_node Out integer Negative node of contr. source





2 ic In real Initial condition of controlling source





9 i Out real Output current





11 v Out real Voltage across output





10 p Out real Power





206 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





201 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





202 sens_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity





203 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of ac magnitude





204 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of ac phase





205 sens_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity





31.3.7 VCVS - Voltage controlled voltage source

31.3.7.1 VCVS instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 gain InOut real Voltage gain





9 sens_gain In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT gain





2 pos_node Out integer Positive node of source





3 neg_node Out integer Negative node of source





4 cont_p_node Out integer Positive node of contr. source





5 cont_n_node Out integer Negative node of contr. source





7 ic In real Initial condition of controlling source





10 i Out real Output current





12 v Out real Output voltage





11 p Out real Power





206 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





201 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





202 sens_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity





203 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of ac magnitude





204 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of ac phase





205 sens_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity





31.4 Transmission Lines

31.4.1 CplLines - Simple Coupled Multiconductor Lines

31.4.1.1 CplLines instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 pos_nodes InOut string vector in nodes





2 neg_nodes InOut string vector out nodes





3 dimension InOut integer number of coupled lines





4 length InOut real length of lines





31.4.1.2 CplLines model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










101 r InOut real vector resistance per length





104 l InOut real vector inductance per length





102 c InOut real vector capacitance per length





103 g InOut real vector conductance per length





105 length InOut real length





106 cpl In flag Device is a cpl model





31.4.2 LTRA - Lossy transmission line

31.4.2.1 LTRA instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










6 v1 InOut real Initial voltage at end 1





8 v2 InOut real Initial voltage at end 2





7 i1 InOut real Initial current at end 1





9 i2 InOut real Initial current at end 2





10 ic In real vector Initial condition vector:v1,i1,v2,i2





13 pos_node1 Out integer Positive node of end 1 of t-line





14 neg_node1 Out integer Negative node of end 1 of t.line





15 pos_node2 Out integer Positive node of end 2 of t-line





16 neg_node2 Out integer Negative node of end 2 of t-line





31.4.2.2 LTRA model parameters





# Name Direction Type

Description











0 ltra InOut flag

LTRA model






1 r InOut real

Resistance per meter






2 l InOut real

Inductance per meter






3 g InOut real






4 c InOut real

Capacitance per meter






5 len InOut real

length of line






11 rel Out real

Rel. rate of change of deriv. for bkpt






12 abs Out real

Abs. rate of change of deriv. for bkpt






28 nocontrol InOut flag

No timestep control






32 steplimit InOut flag

always limit timestep to 0.8*(delay of line)






33 nosteplimit InOut flag

don’t always limit timestep to 0.8*(delay of line)






34 lininterp InOut flag

use linear interpolation






35 quadinterp InOut flag

use quadratic interpolation






36 mixedinterp InOut flag

use linear interpolation if quadratic results look unacceptable






46 truncnr InOut flag

use N-R iterations for step calculation in LTRAtrunc






47 truncdontcut InOut flag

don’t limit timestep to keep impulse response calculation errors low






42 compactrel InOut real

special reltol for straight line checking






43 compactabs InOut real

special abstol for straight line checking






31.4.3 Tranline - Lossless transmission line

31.4.3.1 Tranline instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 z0 InOut real Characteristic impedance





1 zo InOut real





4 f InOut real Frequency





2 td InOut real Transmission delay





3 nl InOut real Normalized length at frequency given





5 v1 InOut real Initial voltage at end 1





7 v2 InOut real Initial voltage at end 2





6 i1 InOut real Initial current at end 1





8 i2 InOut real Initial current at end 2





9 ic In real vector Initial condition vector:v1,i1,v2,i2





10 rel Out real Rel. rate of change of deriv. for bkpt





11 abs Out real Abs. rate of change of deriv. for bkpt





12 pos_node1 Out integer Positive node of end 1 of t. line





13 neg_node1 Out integer Negative node of end 1 of t. line





14 pos_node2 Out integer Positive node of end 2 of t. line





15 neg_node2 Out integer Negative node of end 2 of t. line





18 delays Out real vector Delayed values of excitation





31.4.4 TransLine - Simple Lossy Transmission Line

31.4.4.1 TransLine instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 pos_node In integer Positive node of txl





2 neg_node In integer Negative node of txl





3 length InOut real length of line





31.4.4.2 TransLine model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










101 r InOut real resistance per length





104 l InOut real inductance per length





102 c InOut real capacitance per length





103 g InOut real conductance per length





105 length InOut real length





106 txl In flag Device is a txl model





31.4.5 URC - Uniform R. C. line

31.4.5.1 URC instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










1 l InOut real Length of transmission line





2 n InOut real Number of lumps





3 pos_node Out integer Positive node of URC





4 neg_node Out integer Negative node of URC





5 gnd Out integer Ground node of URC





31.4.5.2 URC model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










101 k InOut real Propagation constant





102 fmax InOut real Maximum frequency of interest





103 rperl InOut real Resistance per unit length





104 cperl InOut real Capacitance per unit length





105 isperl InOut real Saturation current per length





106 rsperl InOut real Diode resistance per length





107 urc In flag Uniform R.C. line model





31.5 BJTs

31.5.1 BJT - Bipolar Junction Transistor

31.5.1.1 BJT instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





2 off InOut flag Device initially off





3 icvbe InOut real Initial B-E voltage





4 icvce InOut real Initial C-E voltage





1 area InOut real (Emitter) Area factor





10 areab InOut real Base area factor





11 areac InOut real Collector area factor





9 m InOut real Parallel Multiplier





5 ic In real vector Initial condition vector





6 sens_area In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT area





202 colnode Out integer Number of collector node





203 basenode Out integer Number of base node





204 emitnode Out integer Number of emitter node





205 substnode Out integer Number of substrate node





206 colprimenode Out integer Internal collector node





207 baseprimenode Out integer Internal base node





208 emitprimenode Out integer Internal emitter node





211 ic Out real Current at collector node





212 ib Out real Current at base node





236 ie Out real Emitter current





237 is Out real Substrate current





209 vbe Out real B-E voltage





210 vbc Out real B-C voltage





215 gm Out real Small signal transconductance





213 gpi Out real Small signal input conductance - pi





214 gmu Out real Small signal conductance - mu





225 gx Out real Conductance from base to internal base





216 go Out real Small signal output conductance





227 geqcb Out real d(Ibe)/d(Vbc)





228 gccs Out real Internal C-S cap. equiv. cond.





229 geqbx Out real Internal C-B-base cap. equiv. cond.





239 cpi Out real Internal base to emitter capactance





240 cmu Out real Internal base to collector capactiance





241 cbx Out real Base to collector capacitance





242 ccs Out real Collector to substrate capacitance





218 cqbe Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-E jct.





220 cqbc Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-C jct.





222 cqcs Out real Cap. due to charge storage in C-S jct.





224 cqbx Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-X jct.





226 cexbc Out real Total Capacitance in B-X junction





217 qbe Out real Charge storage B-E junction





219 qbc Out real Charge storage B-C junction





221 qcs Out real Charge storage C-S junction





223 qbx Out real Charge storage B-X junction





238 p Out real Power dissipation





235 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





230 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





231 sens_imag Out real dc sens. & imag part of ac sens.





232 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of ac magnitude





233 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of ac phase





234 sens_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity





7 temp InOut real instance temperature





8 dtemp InOut real instance temperature delta from circuit





31.5.1.2 BJT model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





309 type Out string NPN or PNP





101 npn InOut flag NPN type device





102 pnp InOut flag PNP type device





103 is InOut real Saturation Current





104 bf InOut real Ideal forward beta





105 nf InOut real Forward emission coefficient





106 vaf InOut real Forward Early voltage





106 va InOut real





107 ikf InOut real Forward beta roll-off corner current





107 ik InOut real





108 ise InOut real B-E leakage saturation current





110 ne InOut real B-E leakage emission coefficient





111 br InOut real Ideal reverse beta





112 nr InOut real Reverse emission coefficient





113 var InOut real Reverse Early voltage





113 vb InOut real





114 ikr InOut real reverse beta roll-off corner current





115 isc InOut real B-C leakage saturation current





117 nc InOut real B-C leakage emission coefficient





118 rb InOut real Zero bias base resistance





119 irb InOut real Current for base resistance=(rb+rbm)/2





120 rbm InOut real Minimum base resistance





121 re InOut real Emitter resistance





122 rc InOut real Collector resistance





123 cje InOut real Zero bias B-E depletion capacitance





124 vje InOut real B-E built in potential





124 pe InOut real





125 mje InOut real B-E junction grading coefficient





125 me InOut real





126 tf InOut real Ideal forward transit time





127 xtf InOut real Coefficient for bias dependence of TF





128 vtf InOut real Voltage giving VBC dependence of TF





129 itf InOut real High current dependence of TF





130 ptf InOut real Excess phase





131 cjc InOut real Zero bias B-C depletion capacitance





132 vjc InOut real B-C built in potential





132 pc InOut real





133 mjc InOut real B-C junction grading coefficient





133 mc InOut real





134 xcjc InOut real Fraction of B-C cap to internal base





135 tr InOut real Ideal reverse transit time





136 cjs InOut real Zero bias C-S capacitance





136 ccs InOut real Zero bias C-S capacitance





137 vjs InOut real Substrate junction built in potential





137 ps InOut real





138 mjs InOut real Substrate junction grading coefficient





138 ms InOut real





139 xtb InOut real Forward and reverse beta temp. exp.





140 eg InOut real Energy gap for IS temp. dependency





141 xti InOut real Temp. exponent for IS





142 fc InOut real Forward bias junction fit parameter





301 invearlyvoltf Out real Inverse early voltage:forward





302 invearlyvoltr Out real Inverse early voltage:reverse





303 invrollofff Out real Inverse roll off - forward





304 invrolloffr Out real Inverse roll off - reverse





305 collectorconduct Out real Collector conductance





306 emitterconduct Out real Emitter conductance





307 transtimevbcfact Out real Transit time VBC factor





308 excessphasefactor Out real Excess phase fact.





143 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





145 kf InOut real Flicker Noise Coefficient





144 af InOut real Flicker Noise Exponent





31.5.2 BJT - Bipolar Junction Transistor Level 2

31.5.2.1 BJT2 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





2 off InOut flag Device initially off





3 icvbe InOut real Initial B-E voltage





4 icvce InOut real Initial C-E voltage





1 area InOut real (Emitter) Area factor





10 areab InOut real Base area factor





11 areac InOut real Collector area factor





9 m InOut real Parallel Multiplier





5 ic In real vector Initial condition vector





6 sens_area In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT area





202 colnode Out integer Number of collector node





203 basenode Out integer Number of base node





204 emitnode Out integer Number of emitter node





205 substnode Out integer Number of substrate node





206 colprimenode Out integer Internal collector node





207 baseprimenode Out integer Internal base node





208 emitprimenode Out integer Internal emitter node





211 ic Out real Current at collector node





212 ib Out real Current at base node





236 ie Out real Emitter current





237 is Out real Substrate current





209 vbe Out real B-E voltage





210 vbc Out real B-C voltage





215 gm Out real Small signal transconductance





213 gpi Out real Small signal input conductance - pi





214 gmu Out real Small signal conductance - mu





225 gx Out real Conductance from base to internal base





216 go Out real Small signal output conductance





227 geqcb Out real d(Ibe)/d(Vbc)





228 gcsub Out real Internal Subs. cap. equiv. cond.





243 gdsub Out real Internal Subs. Diode equiv. cond.





229 geqbx Out real Internal C-B-base cap. equiv. cond.





239 cpi Out real Internal base to emitter capactance





240 cmu Out real Internal base to collector capactiance





241 cbx Out real Base to collector capacitance





242 csub Out real Substrate capacitance





218 cqbe Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-E jct.





220 cqbc Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-C jct.





222 cqsub Out real Cap. due to charge storage in Subs. jct.





224 cqbx Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-X jct.





226 cexbc Out real Total Capacitance in B-X junction





217 qbe Out real Charge storage B-E junction





219 qbc Out real Charge storage B-C junction





221 qsub Out real Charge storage Subs. junction





223 qbx Out real Charge storage B-X junction





238 p Out real Power dissipation





235 sens_dc Out real dc sensitivity





230 sens_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity





231 sens_imag Out real dc sens. & imag part of ac sens.





232 sens_mag Out real sensitivity of ac magnitude





233 sens_ph Out real sensitivity of ac phase





234 sens_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity





7 temp InOut real instance temperature





8 dtemp InOut real instance temperature delta from circuit





31.5.2.2 BJT2 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





309 type Out string NPN or PNP





101 npn InOut flag NPN type device





102 pnp InOut flag PNP type device





147 subs InOut integer Vertical or Lateral device





103 is InOut real Saturation Current





146 iss InOut real Substrate Jct. Saturation Current





104 bf InOut real Ideal forward beta





105 nf InOut real Forward emission coefficient





106 vaf InOut real Forward Early voltage





106 va InOut real





107 ikf InOut real Forward beta roll-off corner current





107 ik InOut real





108 ise InOut real B-E leakage saturation current





110 ne InOut real B-E leakage emission coefficient





111 br InOut real Ideal reverse beta





112 nr InOut real Reverse emission coefficient





113 var InOut real Reverse Early voltage





113 vb InOut real





114 ikr InOut real reverse beta roll-off corner current





115 isc InOut real B-C leakage saturation current





117 nc InOut real B-C leakage emission coefficient





118 rb InOut real Zero bias base resistance





119 irb InOut real Current for base resistance=(rb+rbm)/2





120 rbm InOut real Minimum base resistance





121 re InOut real Emitter resistance





122 rc InOut real Collector resistance





123 cje InOut real Zero bias B-E depletion capacitance





124 vje InOut real B-E built in potential





124 pe InOut real





125 mje InOut real B-E junction grading coefficient





125 me InOut real





126 tf InOut real Ideal forward transit time





127 xtf InOut real Coefficient for bias dependence of TF





128 vtf InOut real Voltage giving VBC dependence of TF





129 itf InOut real High current dependence of TF





130 ptf InOut real Excess phase





131 cjc InOut real Zero bias B-C depletion capacitance





132 vjc InOut real B-C built in potential





132 pc InOut real





133 mjc InOut real B-C junction grading coefficient





133 mc InOut real





134 xcjc InOut real Fraction of B-C cap to internal base





135 tr InOut real Ideal reverse transit time





136 cjs InOut real Zero bias Substrate capacitance





136 csub InOut real





137 vjs InOut real Substrate junction built in potential





137 ps InOut real





138 mjs InOut real Substrate junction grading coefficient





138 ms InOut real





139 xtb InOut real Forward and reverse beta temp. exp.





140 eg InOut real Energy gap for IS temp. dependency





141 xti InOut real Temp. exponent for IS





148 tre1 InOut real Temp. coefficient 1 for RE





149 tre2 InOut real Temp. coefficient 2 for RE





150 trc1 InOut real Temp. coefficient 1 for RC





151 trc2 InOut real Temp. coefficient 2 for RC





152 trb1 InOut real Temp. coefficient 1 for RB





153 trb2 InOut real Temp. coefficient 2 for RB





154 trbm1 InOut real Temp. coefficient 1 for RBM





155 trbm2 InOut real Temp. coefficient 2 for RBM





142 fc InOut real Forward bias junction fit parameter





301 invearlyvoltf Out real Inverse early voltage:forward





302 invearlyvoltr Out real Inverse early voltage:reverse





303 invrollofff Out real Inverse roll off - forward





304 invrolloffr Out real Inverse roll off - reverse





305 collectorconduct Out real Collector conductance





306 emitterconduct Out real Emitter conductance





307 transtimevbcfact Out real Transit time VBC factor





308 excessphasefactor Out real Excess phase fact.





143 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





145 kf InOut real Flicker Noise Coefficient





144 af InOut real Flicker Noise Exponent





31.5.3 VBIC - Vertical Bipolar Inter-Company Model

31.5.3.1 VBIC instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





1 area InOut real Area factor





2 off InOut flag Device initially off





3 ic In real vector Initial condition vector





4 icvbe InOut real Initial B-E voltage





5 icvce InOut real Initial C-E voltage





6 temp InOut real Instance temperature





7 dtemp InOut real Instance delta temperature





8 m InOut real Multiplier





212 collnode Out integer Number of collector node





213 basenode Out integer Number of base node





214 emitnode Out integer Number of emitter node





215 subsnode Out integer Number of substrate node





216 collCXnode Out integer Internal collector node





217 collCInode Out integer Internal collector node





218 baseBXnode Out integer Internal base node





219 baseBInode Out integer Internal base node





220 baseBPnode Out integer Internal base node





221 emitEInode Out integer Internal emitter node





222 subsSInode Out integer Internal substrate node





223 vbe Out real B-E voltage





224 vbc Out real B-C voltage





225 ic Out real Collector current





226 ib Out real Base current





227 ie Out real Emitter current





228 is Out real Substrate current





229 gm Out real Small signal transconductance dIc/dVbe





230 go Out real Small signal output conductance dIc/dVbc





231 gpi Out real Small signal input conductance dIb/dVbe





232 gmu Out real Small signal conductance dIb/dVbc





233 gx Out real Conductance from base to internal base





247 cbe Out real Internal base to emitter capacitance





248 cbex Out real External base to emitter capacitance





249 cbc Out real Internal base to collector capacitance





250 cbcx Out real External Base to collector capacitance





251 cbep Out real Parasitic Base to emitter capacitance





252 cbcp Out real Parasitic Base to collector capacitance





259 p Out real Power dissipation





243 geqcb Out real Internal C-B-base cap. equiv. cond.





246 geqbx Out real External C-B-base cap. equiv. cond.





234 qbe Out real Charge storage B-E junction





235 cqbe Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-E jct.





236 qbc Out real Charge storage B-C junction





237 cqbc Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-C jct.





238 qbx Out real Charge storage B-X junction





239 cqbx Out real Cap. due to charge storage in B-X jct.





258 sens_dc Out real DC sensitivity





253 sens_real Out real Real part of AC sensitivity





254 sens_imag Out real DC sens. & imag part of AC sens.





255 sens_mag Out real Sensitivity of AC magnitude





256 sens_ph Out real Sensitivity of AC phase





257 sens_cplx Out complex AC sensitivity





31.5.3.2 VBIC model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





305 type Out string NPN or PNP





101 npn InOut flag NPN type device





102 pnp InOut flag PNP type device





103 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





104 rcx InOut real Extrinsic coll resistance





105 rci InOut real Intrinsic coll resistance





106 vo InOut real Epi drift saturation voltage





107 gamm InOut real Epi doping parameter





108 hrcf InOut real High current RC factor





109 rbx InOut real Extrinsic base resistance





110 rbi InOut real Intrinsic base resistance





111 re InOut real Intrinsic emitter resistance





112 rs InOut real Intrinsic substrate resistance





113 rbp InOut real Parasitic base resistance





114 is InOut real Transport saturation current





115 nf InOut real Forward emission coefficient





116 nr InOut real Reverse emission coefficient





117 fc InOut real Fwd bias depletion capacitance limit





118 cbeo InOut real Extrinsic B-E overlap capacitance





119 cje InOut real Zero bias B-E depletion capacitance





120 pe InOut real B-E built in potential





121 me InOut real B-E junction grading coefficient





122 aje InOut real B-E capacitance smoothing factor





123 cbco InOut real Extrinsic B-C overlap capacitance





124 cjc InOut real Zero bias B-C depletion capacitance





125 qco InOut real Epi charge parameter





126 cjep InOut real B-C extrinsic zero bias capacitance





127 pc InOut real B-C built in potential





128 mc InOut real B-C junction grading coefficient





129 ajc InOut real B-C capacitance smoothing factor





130 cjcp InOut real Zero bias S-C capacitance





131 ps InOut real S-C junction built in potential





132 ms InOut real S-C junction grading coefficient





133 ajs InOut real S-C capacitance smoothing factor





134 ibei InOut real Ideal B-E saturation current





135 wbe InOut real Portion of IBEI from Vbei, 1-WBE from Vbex





136 nei InOut real Ideal B-E emission coefficient





137 iben InOut real Non-ideal B-E saturation current





138 nen InOut real Non-ideal B-E emission coefficient





139 ibci InOut real Ideal B-C saturation current





140 nci InOut real Ideal B-C emission coefficient





141 ibcn InOut real Non-ideal B-C saturation current





142 ncn InOut real Non-ideal B-C emission coefficient





143 avc1 InOut real B-C weak avalanche parameter 1





144 avc2 InOut real B-C weak avalanche parameter 2





145 isp InOut real Parasitic transport saturation current





146 wsp InOut real Portion of ICCP





147 nfp InOut real Parasitic fwd emission coefficient





148 ibeip InOut real Ideal parasitic B-E saturation current





149 ibenp InOut real Non-ideal parasitic B-E saturation current





150 ibcip InOut real Ideal parasitic B-C saturation current





151 ncip InOut real Ideal parasitic B-C emission coefficient





152 ibcnp InOut real Nonideal parasitic B-C saturation current





153 ncnp InOut real Nonideal parasitic B-C emission coefficient





154 vef InOut real Forward Early voltage





155 ver InOut real Reverse Early voltage





156 ikf InOut real Forward knee current





157 ikr InOut real Reverse knee current





158 ikp InOut real Parasitic knee current





159 tf InOut real Ideal forward transit time





160 qtf InOut real Variation of TF with base-width modulation





161 xtf InOut real Coefficient for bias dependence of TF





162 vtf InOut real Voltage giving VBC dependence of TF





163 itf InOut real High current dependence of TF





164 tr InOut real Ideal reverse transit time





165 td InOut real Forward excess-phase delay time





166 kfn InOut real B-E Flicker Noise Coefficient





167 afn InOut real B-E Flicker Noise Exponent





168 bfn InOut real B-E Flicker Noise 1/f dependence





169 xre InOut real Temperature exponent of RE





170 xrb InOut real Temperature exponent of RB





171 xrbi InOut real Temperature exponent of RBI





172 xrc InOut real Temperature exponent of RC





173 xrci InOut real Temperature exponent of RCI





174 xrs InOut real Temperature exponent of RS





175 xvo InOut real Temperature exponent of VO





176 ea InOut real Activation energy for IS





177 eaie InOut real Activation energy for IBEI





179 eaic InOut real Activation energy for IBCI/IBEIP





179 eais InOut real Activation energy for IBCIP





180 eane InOut real Activation energy for IBEN





181 eanc InOut real Activation energy for IBCN/IBENP





182 eans InOut real Activation energy for IBCNP





183 xis InOut real Temperature exponent of IS





184 xii InOut real Temperature exponent of IBEI,IBCI,IBEIP,IBCIP





185 xin InOut real Temperature exponent of IBEN,IBCN,IBENP,IBCNP





186 tnf InOut real Temperature exponent of NF





187 tavc InOut real Temperature exponent of AVC2





188 rth InOut real Thermal resistance





189 cth InOut real Thermal capacitance





190 vrt InOut real Punch-through voltage of internal B-C junction





191 art InOut real Smoothing parameter for reach-through





192 ccso InOut real Fixed C-S capacitance





193 qbm InOut real Select SGP qb formulation





194 nkf InOut real High current beta rolloff





195 xikf InOut real Temperature exponent of IKF





196 xrcx InOut real Temperature exponent of RCX





197 xrbx InOut real Temperature exponent of RBX





198 xrbp InOut real Temperature exponent of RBP





199 isrr InOut real Separate IS for fwd and rev





200 xisr InOut real Temperature exponent of ISR





201 dear InOut real Delta activation energy for ISRR





202 eap InOut real Exitivation energy for ISP





203 vbbe InOut real B-E breakdown voltage





204 nbbe InOut real B-E breakdown emission coefficient





205 ibbe InOut real B-E breakdown current





206 tvbbe1 InOut real Linear temperature coefficient of VBBE





207 tvbbe2 InOut real Quadratic temperature coefficient of VBBE





208 tnbbe InOut real Temperature coefficient of NBBE





209 ebbe InOut real exp(-VBBE/(NBBE*Vtv))





210 dtemp InOut real Locale Temperature difference





211 vers InOut real Revision Version





212 vref InOut real Reference Version





31.6 MOSFETs

31.6.1 MOS1 - Level 1 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

31.6.1.1 MOS1 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










21 m InOut real Multiplier





2 l InOut real Length





1 w InOut real Width





4 ad InOut real Drain area





3 as InOut real Source area





6 pd InOut real Drain perimeter





5 ps InOut real Source perimeter





8 nrd InOut real Drain squares





7 nrs InOut real Source squares





9 off In flag Device initially off





12 icvds InOut real Initial D-S voltage





13 icvgs InOut real Initial G-S voltage





11 icvbs InOut real Initial B-S voltage





20 temp InOut real Instance temperature





22 dtemp InOut real Instance temperature difference





10 ic In real vector Vector of D-S, G-S, B-S voltages





15 sens_l In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT length





14 sens_w In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT width





215 id Out real Drain current





18 is Out real Source current





17 ig Out real Gate current





16 ib Out real Bulk current





217 ibd Out real B-D junction current





216 ibs Out real B-S junction current





231 vgs Out real Gate-Source voltage





232 vds Out real Drain-Source voltage





230 vbs Out real Bulk-Source voltage





229 vbd Out real Bulk-Drain voltage





203 dnode Out integer Number of the drain node





204 gnode Out integer Number of the gate node





205 snode Out integer Number of the source node





206 bnode Out integer Number of the node





207 dnodeprime Out integer Number of int. drain node





208 snodeprime Out integer Number of int. source node





211 von Out real





212 vdsat Out real Saturation drain voltage





213 sourcevcrit Out real Critical source voltage





214 drainvcrit Out real Critical drain voltage





258 rs Out real Source resistance





209 sourceconductance Out real Conductance of source





259 rd Out real Drain conductance





210 drainconductance Out real Conductance of drain





219 gm Out real Transconductance





220 gds Out real Drain-Source conductance





218 gmb Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





218 gmbs Out real





221 gbd Out real Bulk-Drain conductance





222 gbs Out real Bulk-Source conductance





223 cbd Out real Bulk-Drain capacitance





224 cbs Out real Bulk-Source capacitance





233 cgs Out real Gate-Source capacitance





236 cgd Out real Gate-Drain capacitance





239 cgb Out real Gate-Bulk capacitance





235 cqgs Out real Capacitance due to gate-source charge storage





238 cqgd Out real Capacitance due to gate-drain charge storage





241 cqgb Out real Capacitance due to gate-bulk charge storage





243 cqbd Out real Capacitance due to bulk-drain charge storage





245 cqbs Out real Capacitance due to bulk-source charge storage





225 cbd0 Out real Zero-Bias B-D junction capacitance





226 cbdsw0 Out real





227 cbs0 Out real Zero-Bias B-S junction capacitance





228 cbssw0 Out real





234 qgs Out real Gate-Source charge storage





237 qgd Out real Gate-Drain charge storage





240 qgb Out real Gate-Bulk charge storage





242 qbd Out real Bulk-Drain charge storage





244 qbs Out real Bulk-Source charge storage





19 p Out real Instaneous power





256 sens_l_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt length





246 sens_l_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt length





247 sens_l_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt length





248 sens_l_mag Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac magnitude





249 sens_l_ph Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac phase





250 sens_l_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt length





257 sens_w_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt width





251 sens_w_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt width





252 sens_w_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt width





253 sens_w_mag Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac magnitude





254 sens_w_ph Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac phase





255 sens_w_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt width










# Name Direction Type Description





31.6.1.2 MOS1 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





133 type Out string N-channel or P-channel MOS





101 vto InOut real Threshold voltage





101 vt0 InOut real





102 kp InOut real Transconductance parameter





103 gamma InOut real Bulk threshold parameter





104 phi InOut real Surface potential





105 lambda InOut real Channel length modulation





106 rd InOut real Drain ohmic resistance





107 rs InOut real Source ohmic resistance





108 cbd InOut real B-D junction capacitance





109 cbs InOut real B-S junction capacitance





110 is InOut real Bulk junction sat. current





111 pb InOut real Bulk junction potential





112 cgso InOut real Gate-source overlap cap.





113 cgdo InOut real Gate-drain overlap cap.





114 cgbo InOut real Gate-bulk overlap cap.





122 rsh InOut real Sheet resistance





115 cj InOut real Bottom junction cap per area





116 mj InOut real Bottom grading coefficient





117 cjsw InOut real Side junction cap per area





118 mjsw InOut real Side grading coefficient





119 js InOut real Bulk jct. sat. current density





120 tox InOut real Oxide thickness





121 ld InOut real Lateral diffusion





123 u0 InOut real Surface mobility





123 uo InOut real





124 fc InOut real Forward bias jct. fit parm.





128 nmos In flag N type MOSfet model





129 pmos In flag P type MOSfet model





125 nsub InOut real Substrate doping





126 tpg InOut integer Gate type





127 nss InOut real Surface state density





130 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





131 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





132 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





31.6.2 MOS2 - Level 2 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

31.6.2.1 MOS 2 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type

Description






80 m InOut real

Multiplier






2 l InOut real

Length






1 w InOut real

Width






4 ad InOut real

Drain area






3 as InOut real

Source area






6 pd InOut real

Drain perimeter






5 ps InOut real

Source perimeter






34 id Out real

Drain current






34 cd Out real






36 ibd Out real

B-D junction current






35 ibs Out real

B-S junction current






18 is Out real

Source current






17 ig Out real

Gate current






16 ib Out real

Bulk current






50 vgs Out real

Gate-Source voltage






51 vds Out real

Drain-Source voltage






49 vbs Out real

Bulk-Source voltage






48 vbd Out real

Bulk-Drain voltage






8 nrd InOut real

Drain squares






7 nrs InOut real

Source squares






9 off In flag

Device initially off






12 icvds InOut real

Initial D-S voltage






13 icvgs InOut real

Initial G-S voltage






11 icvbs InOut real

Initial B-S voltage






77 temp InOut real

Instance operating temperature






81 dtemp InOut real

Instance temperature difference






10 ic In real vector

Vector of D-S, G-S, B-S voltages






15 sens_l In flag

flag to request sensitivity WRT length






14 sens_w In flag

flag to request sensitivity WRT width






22 dnode Out integer

Number of drain node






23 gnode Out integer

Number of gate node






24 snode Out integer

Number of source node






25 bnode Out integer

Number of bulk node






26 dnodeprime Out integer

Number of internal drain node






27 snodeprime Out integer

Number of internal source node






30 von Out real






31 vdsat Out real

Saturation drain voltage






32 sourcevcrit Out real

Critical source voltage






33 drainvcrit Out real

Critical drain voltage






78 rs Out real

Source resistance






28 sourceconductance Out real

Source conductance






79 rd Out real

Drain resistance






29 drainconductance Out real

Drain conductance






38 gm Out real

Transconductance






39 gds Out real

Drain-Source conductance






37 gmb Out real

Bulk-Source transconductance






37 gmbs Out real






40 gbd Out real

Bulk-Drain conductance






41 gbs Out real

Bulk-Source conductance






42 cbd Out real

Bulk-Drain capacitance






43 cbs Out real

Bulk-Source capacitance






52 cgs Out real

Gate-Source capacitance






55 cgd Out real

Gate-Drain capacitance






58 cgb Out real

Gate-Bulk capacitance






44 cbd0 Out real

Zero-Bias B-D junction capacitance






45 cbdsw0 Out real






46 cbs0 Out real

Zero-Bias B-S junction capacitance






47 cbssw0 Out real






54 cqgs Out real

Capacitance due to gate-source charge storage






57 cqgd Out real

Capacitance due to gate-drain charge storage






60 cqgb Out real

Capacitance due to gate-bulk charge storage






62 cqbd Out real

Capacitance due to bulk-drain charge storage






64 cqbs Out real

Capacitance due to bulk-source charge storage






53 qgs Out real

Gate-Source charge storage






56 qgd Out real

Gate-Drain charge storage






59 qgb Out real

Gate-Bulk charge storage






61 qbd Out real

Bulk-Drain charge storage






63 qbs Out real

Bulk-Source charge storage






19 p Out real

Instantaneous power






75 sens_l_dc Out real

dc sensitivity wrt length






70 sens_l_real Out real

real part of ac sensitivity wrt length






71 sens_l_imag Out real

imag part of ac sensitivity wrt length






74 sens_l_cplx Out complex

ac sensitivity wrt length






72 sens_l_mag Out real

sensitivity wrt l of ac magnitude






73 sens_l_ph Out real

sensitivity wrt l of ac phase






76 sens_w_dc Out real

dc sensitivity wrt width






65 sens_w_real Out real

dc sensitivity and real part of ac sensitivity wrt width






66 sens_w_imag Out real

imag part of ac sensitivity wrt width






67 sens_w_mag Out real

sensitivity wrt w of ac magnitude






68 sens_w_ph Out real

sensitivity wrt w of ac phase






69 sens_w_cplx Out complex

ac sensitivity wrt width






31.6.2.2 MOS2 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





141 type Out string N-channel or P-channel MOS





101 vto InOut real Threshold voltage





101 vt0 InOut real





102 kp InOut real Transconductance parameter





103 gamma InOut real Bulk threshold parameter





104 phi InOut real Surface potential





105 lambda InOut real Channel length modulation





106 rd InOut real Drain ohmic resistance





107 rs InOut real Source ohmic resistance





108 cbd InOut real B-D junction capacitance





109 cbs InOut real B-S junction capacitance





110 is InOut real Bulk junction sat. current





111 pb InOut real Bulk junction potential





112 cgso InOut real Gate-source overlap cap.





113 cgdo InOut real Gate-drain overlap cap.





114 cgbo InOut real Gate-bulk overlap cap.





122 rsh InOut real Sheet resistance





115 cj InOut real Bottom junction cap per area





116 mj InOut real Bottom grading coefficient





117 cjsw InOut real Side junction cap per area





118 mjsw InOut real Side grading coefficient





119 js InOut real Bulk jct. sat. current density





120 tox InOut real Oxide thickness





121 ld InOut real Lateral diffusion





123 u0 InOut real Surface mobility





123 uo InOut real





124 fc InOut real Forward bias jct. fit parm.





135 nmos In flag N type MOSfet model





136 pmos In flag P type MOSfet model





125 nsub InOut real Substrate doping





126 tpg InOut integer Gate type





127 nss InOut real Surface state density





129 delta InOut real Width effect on threshold





130 uexp InOut real Crit. field exp for mob. deg.





134 ucrit InOut real Crit. field for mob. degradation





131 vmax InOut real Maximum carrier drift velocity





132 xj InOut real Junction depth





133 neff InOut real Total channel charge coeff.





128 nfs InOut real Fast surface state density





137 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





139 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





140 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





31.6.3 MOS3 - Level 3 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

31.6.3.1 MOS3 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





80 m InOut real Multiplier





2 l InOut real Length





1 w InOut real Width





4 ad InOut real Drain area





3 as InOut real Source area





6 pd InOut real Drain perimeter





5 ps InOut real Source perimeter





34 id Out real Drain current





34 cd Out real Drain current





36 ibd Out real B-D junction current





35 ibs Out real B-S junction current





18 is Out real Source current





17 ig Out real Gate current





16 ib Out real Bulk current





50 vgs Out real Gate-Source voltage





51 vds Out real Drain-Source voltage





49 vbs Out real Bulk-Source voltage





48 vbd Out real Bulk-Drain voltage





8 nrd InOut real Drain squares





7 nrs InOut real Source squares





9 off In flag Device initially off





12 icvds InOut real Initial D-S voltage





13 icvgs InOut real Initial G-S voltage





11 icvbs InOut real Initial B-S voltage





10 ic InOut real vector Vector of D-S, G-S, B-S voltages





77 temp InOut real Instance operating temperature





81 dtemp InOut real Instance temperature difference





15 sens_l In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT length





14 sens_w In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT width





22 dnode Out integer Number of drain node





23 gnode Out integer Number of gate node





24 snode Out integer Number of source node





25 bnode Out integer Number of bulk node





26 dnodeprime Out integer Number of internal drain node





27 snodeprime Out integer Number of internal source node





30 von Out real Turn-on voltage





31 vdsat Out real Saturation drain voltage





32 sourcevcrit Out real Critical source voltage





33 drainvcrit Out real Critical drain voltage





78 rs Out real Source resistance





28 sourceconductance Out real Source conductance





79 rd Out real Drain resistance





29 drainconductance Out real Drain conductance





38 gm Out real Transconductance





39 gds Out real Drain-Source conductance





37 gmb Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





37 gmbs Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





40 gbd Out real Bulk-Drain conductance





41 gbs Out real Bulk-Source conductance





42 cbd Out real Bulk-Drain capacitance





43 cbs Out real Bulk-Source capacitance





52 cgs Out real Gate-Source capacitance





55 cgd Out real Gate-Drain capacitance





58 cgb Out real Gate-Bulk capacitance





54 cqgs Out real Capacitance due to gate-source charge storage





57 cqgd Out real Capacitance due to gate-drain charge storage





60 cqgb Out real Capacitance due to gate-bulk charge storage





62 cqbd Out real Capacitance due to bulk-drain charge storage





64 cqbs Out real Capacitance due to bulk-source charge storage





44 cbd0 Out real Zero-Bias B-D junction capacitance





45 cbdsw0 Out real Zero-Bias B-D sidewall capacitance





46 cbs0 Out real Zero-Bias B-S junction capacitance





47 cbssw0 Out real Zero-Bias B-S sidewall capacitance





63 qbs Out real Bulk-Source charge storage





53 qgs Out real Gate-Source charge storage





56 qgd Out real Gate-Drain charge storage





59 qgb Out real Gate-Bulk charge storage





61 qbd Out real Bulk-Drain charge storage





19 p Out real Instantaneous power





76 sens_l_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt length





70 sens_l_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt length





71 sens_l_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt length





74 sens_l_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt length





72 sens_l_mag Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac magnitude





73 sens_l_ph Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac phase





75 sens_w_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt width





65 sens_w_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt width





66 sens_w_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt width





67 sens_w_mag Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac magnitude





68 sens_w_ph Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac phase





69 sens_w_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt width





31.6.3.2 MOS3 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










144 type Out string N-channel or P-channel MOS





133 nmos In flag N type MOSfet model





134 pmos In flag P type MOSfet model





101 vto InOut real Threshold voltage





101 vt0 InOut real





102 kp InOut real Transconductance parameter





103 gamma InOut real Bulk threshold parameter





104 phi InOut real Surface potential





105 rd InOut real Drain ohmic resistance





106 rs InOut real Source ohmic resistance





107 cbd InOut real B-D junction capacitance





108 cbs InOut real B-S junction capacitance





109 is InOut real Bulk junction sat. current





110 pb InOut real Bulk junction potential





111 cgso InOut real Gate-source overlap cap.





112 cgdo InOut real Gate-drain overlap cap.





113 cgbo InOut real Gate-bulk overlap cap.





114 rsh InOut real Sheet resistance





115 cj InOut real Bottom junction cap per area





116 mj InOut real Bottom grading coefficient





117 cjsw InOut real Side junction cap per area





118 mjsw InOut real Side grading coefficient





119 js InOut real Bulk jct. sat. current density





120 tox InOut real Oxide thickness





121 ld InOut real Lateral diffusion





145 xl InOut real Length mask adjustment





146 wd InOut real Width Narrowing (Diffusion)





147 xw InOut real Width mask adjustment





148 delvto InOut real Threshold voltage Adjust





148 delvt0 InOut real





122 u0 InOut real Surface mobility





122 uo InOut real





123 fc InOut real Forward bias jct. fit parm.





124 nsub InOut real Substrate doping





125 tpg InOut integer Gate type





126 nss InOut real Surface state density





131 vmax InOut real Maximum carrier drift velocity





135 xj InOut real Junction depth





129 nfs InOut real Fast surface state density





138 xd InOut real Depletion layer width





139 alpha InOut real Alpha





127 eta InOut real Vds dependence of threshold voltage





128 delta InOut real Width effect on threshold





140 input_delta InOut real





130 theta InOut real Vgs dependence on mobility





132 kappa InOut real Kappa





141 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





142 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





143 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





31.6.4 MOS6 - Level 6 MOSFET model with Meyer capacitance model

31.6.4.1 MOS6 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





2 l InOut real Length





1 w InOut real Width





22 m InOut real Parallel Multiplier





4 ad InOut real Drain area





3 as InOut real Source area





6 pd InOut real Drain perimeter





5 ps InOut real Source perimeter





215 id Out real Drain current





215 cd Out real Drain current





18 is Out real Source current





17 ig Out real Gate current





16 ib Out real Bulk current





216 ibs Out real B-S junction capacitance





217 ibd Out real B-D junction capacitance





231 vgs Out real Gate-Source voltage





232 vds Out real Drain-Source voltage





230 vbs Out real Bulk-Source voltage





229 vbd Out real Bulk-Drain voltage





8 nrd InOut real Drain squares





7 nrs InOut real Source squares





9 off In flag Device initially off





12 icvds InOut real Initial D-S voltage





13 icvgs InOut real Initial G-S voltage





11 icvbs InOut real Initial B-S voltage





20 temp InOut real Instance temperature





21 dtemp InOut real Instance temperature difference





10 ic In real vector Vector of D-S, G-S, B-S voltages





15 sens_l In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT length





14 sens_w In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT width





203 dnode Out integer Number of the drain node





204 gnode Out integer Number of the gate node





205 snode Out integer Number of the source node





206 bnode Out integer Number of the node





207 dnodeprime Out integer Number of int. drain node





208 snodeprime Out integer Number of int. source node





258 rs Out real Source resistance





209 sourceconductance Out real Source conductance





259 rd Out real Drain resistance





210 drainconductance Out real Drain conductance





211 von Out real Turn-on voltage





212 vdsat Out real Saturation drain voltage





213 sourcevcrit Out real Critical source voltage





214 drainvcrit Out real Critical drain voltage





218 gmbs Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





219 gm Out real Transconductance





220 gds Out real Drain-Source conductance





221 gbd Out real Bulk-Drain conductance





222 gbs Out real Bulk-Source conductance





233 cgs Out real Gate-Source capacitance





236 cgd Out real Gate-Drain capacitance





239 cgb Out real Gate-Bulk capacitance





223 cbd Out real Bulk-Drain capacitance





224 cbs Out real Bulk-Source capacitance





225 cbd0 Out real Zero-Bias B-D junction capacitance





226 cbdsw0 Out real





227 cbs0 Out real Zero-Bias B-S junction capacitance





228 cbssw0 Out real





235 cqgs Out real Capacitance due to gate-source charge storage





238 cqgd Out real Capacitance due to gate-drain charge storage





241 cqgb Out real Capacitance due to gate-bulk charge storage





243 cqbd Out real Capacitance due to bulk-drain charge storage





245 cqbs Out real Capacitance due to bulk-source charge storage





234 qgs Out real Gate-Source charge storage





237 qgd Out real Gate-Drain charge storage





240 qgb Out real Gate-Bulk charge storage





242 qbd Out real Bulk-Drain charge storage





244 qbs Out real Bulk-Source charge storage





19 p Out real Instaneous power





256 sens_l_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt length





246 sens_l_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt length





247 sens_l_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt length





248 sens_l_mag Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac magnitude





249 sens_l_ph Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac phase





250 sens_l_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt length





257 sens_w_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt width





251 sens_w_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt width





252 sens_w_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt width





253 sens_w_mag Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac magnitude





254 sens_w_ph Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac phase





255 sens_w_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt width





31.6.4.2 MOS6 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










140 type Out string N-channel or P-channel MOS





101 vto InOut real Threshold voltage





101 vt0 InOut real





102 kv InOut real Saturation voltage factor





103 nv InOut real Saturation voltage coeff.





104 kc InOut real Saturation current factor





105 nc InOut real Saturation current coeff.





106 nvth InOut real Threshold voltage coeff.





107 ps InOut real Sat. current modification par.





108 gamma InOut real Bulk threshold parameter





109 gamma1 InOut real Bulk threshold parameter 1





110 sigma InOut real Static feedback effect par.





111 phi InOut real Surface potential





112 lambda InOut real Channel length modulation param.





113 lambda0 InOut real Channel length modulation param. 0





114 lambda1 InOut real Channel length modulation param. 1





115 rd InOut real Drain ohmic resistance





116 rs InOut real Source ohmic resistance





117 cbd InOut real B-D junction capacitance





118 cbs InOut real B-S junction capacitance





119 is InOut real Bulk junction sat. current





120 pb InOut real Bulk junction potential





121 cgso InOut real Gate-source overlap cap.





122 cgdo InOut real Gate-drain overlap cap.





123 cgbo InOut real Gate-bulk overlap cap.





131 rsh InOut real Sheet resistance





124 cj InOut real Bottom junction cap per area





125 mj InOut real Bottom grading coefficient





126 cjsw InOut real Side junction cap per area





127 mjsw InOut real Side grading coefficient





128 js InOut real Bulk jct. sat. current density





130 ld InOut real Lateral diffusion





129 tox InOut real Oxide thickness





132 u0 InOut real Surface mobility





132 uo InOut real





133 fc InOut real Forward bias jct. fit parm.





137 nmos In flag N type MOSfet model





138 pmos In flag P type MOSfet model





135 tpg InOut integer Gate type





134 nsub InOut real Substrate doping





136 nss InOut real Surface state density





139 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





31.6.5 MOS9 - Modified Level 3 MOSFET model

31.6.5.1 MOS9 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





80 m InOut real Multiplier





2 l InOut real Length





1 w InOut real Width





4 ad InOut real Drain area





3 as InOut real Source area





6 pd InOut real Drain perimeter





5 ps InOut real Source perimeter





34 id Out real Drain current





34 cd Out real Drain current





36 ibd Out real B-D junction current





35 ibs Out real B-S junction current





18 is Out real Source current





17 ig Out real Gate current





16 ib Out real Bulk current





50 vgs Out real Gate-Source voltage





51 vds Out real Drain-Source voltage





49 vbs Out real Bulk-Source voltage





48 vbd Out real Bulk-Drain voltage





8 nrd InOut real Drain squares





7 nrs InOut real Source squares





9 off In flag Device initially off





12 icvds InOut real Initial D-S voltage





13 icvgs InOut real Initial G-S voltage





11 icvbs InOut real Initial B-S voltage





10 ic InOut real vector Vector of D-S, G-S, B-S voltages





77 temp InOut real Instance operating temperature





81 dtemp InOut real Instance operating temperature difference





15 sens_l In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT length





14 sens_w In flag flag to request sensitivity WRT width





22 dnode Out integer Number of drain node





23 gnode Out integer Number of gate node





24 snode Out integer Number of source node





25 bnode Out integer Number of bulk node





26 dnodeprime Out integer Number of internal drain node





27 snodeprime Out integer Number of internal source node





30 von Out real Turn-on voltage





31 vdsat Out real Saturation drain voltage





32 sourcevcrit Out real Critical source voltage





33 drainvcrit Out real Critical drain voltage





78 rs Out real Source resistance





28 sourceconductance Out real Source conductance





79 rd Out real Drain resistance





29 drainconductance Out real Drain conductance





38 gm Out real Transconductance





39 gds Out real Drain-Source conductance





37 gmb Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





37 gmbs Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





40 gbd Out real Bulk-Drain conductance





41 gbs Out real Bulk-Source conductance





42 cbd Out real Bulk-Drain capacitance





43 cbs Out real Bulk-Source capacitance





52 cgs Out real Gate-Source capacitance





55 cgd Out real Gate-Drain capacitance





58 cgb Out real Gate-Bulk capacitance





54 cqgs Out real Capacitance due to gate-source charge storage





57 cqgd Out real Capacitance due to gate-drain charge storage





60 cqgb Out real Capacitance due to gate-bulk charge storage





62 cqbd Out real Capacitance due to bulk-drain charge storage





64 cqbs Out real Capacitance due to bulk-source charge storage





44 cbd0 Out real Zero-Bias B-D junction capacitance





45 cbdsw0 Out real Zero-Bias B-D sidewall capacitance





46 cbs0 Out real Zero-Bias B-S junction capacitance





47 cbssw0 Out real Zero-Bias B-S sidewall capacitance





63 qbs Out real Bulk-Source charge storage





53 qgs Out real Gate-Source charge storage





56 qgd Out real Gate-Drain charge storage





59 qgb Out real Gate-Bulk charge storage





61 qbd Out real Bulk-Drain charge storage





19 p Out real Instantaneous power





76 sens_l_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt length





70 sens_l_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt length





71 sens_l_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt length





74 sens_l_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt length





72 sens_l_mag Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac magnitude





73 sens_l_ph Out real sensitivity wrt l of ac phase





75 sens_w_dc Out real dc sensitivity wrt width





65 sens_w_real Out real real part of ac sensitivity wrt width





66 sens_w_imag Out real imag part of ac sensitivity wrt width





67 sens_w_mag Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac magnitude





68 sens_w_ph Out real sensitivity wrt w of ac phase





69 sens_w_cplx Out complex ac sensitivity wrt width





31.6.5.2 MOS9 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










144 type Out string N-channel or P-channel MOS





133 nmos In flag N type MOSfet model





134 pmos In flag P type MOSfet model





101 vto InOut real Threshold voltage





101 vt0 InOut real





102 kp InOut real Transconductance parameter





103 gamma InOut real Bulk threshold parameter





104 phi InOut real Surface potential





105 rd InOut real Drain ohmic resistance





106 rs InOut real Source ohmic resistance





107 cbd InOut real B-D junction capacitance





108 cbs InOut real B-S junction capacitance





109 is InOut real Bulk junction sat. current





110 pb InOut real Bulk junction potential





111 cgso InOut real Gate-source overlap cap.





112 cgdo InOut real Gate-drain overlap cap.





113 cgbo InOut real Gate-bulk overlap cap.





114 rsh InOut real Sheet resistance





115 cj InOut real Bottom junction cap per area





116 mj InOut real Bottom grading coefficient





117 cjsw InOut real Side junction cap per area





118 mjsw InOut real Side grading coefficient





119 js InOut real Bulk jct. sat. current density





120 tox InOut real Oxide thickness





121 ld InOut real Lateral diffusion





145 xl InOut real Length mask adjustment





146 wd InOut real Width Narrowing (Diffusion)





147 xw InOut real Width mask adjustment





148 delvto InOut real Threshold voltage Adjust





148 delvt0 InOut real





122 u0 InOut real Surface mobility





122 uo InOut real





123 fc InOut real Forward bias jct. fit parm.





124 nsub InOut real Substrate doping





125 tpg InOut integer Gate type





126 nss InOut real Surface state density





131 vmax InOut real Maximum carrier drift velocity





135 xj InOut real Junction depth





129 nfs InOut real Fast surface state density





138 xd InOut real Depletion layer width





139 alpha InOut real Alpha





127 eta InOut real Vds dependence of threshold voltage





128 delta InOut real Width effect on threshold





140 input_delta InOut real





130 theta InOut real Vgs dependence on mobility





132 kappa InOut real Kappa





141 tnom InOut real Parameter measurement temperature





142 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





143 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





31.6.6 BSIM1 - Berkeley Short Channel IGFET Model

31.6.6.1 BSIM1 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





2 l InOut real Length





1 w InOut real Width





14 m InOut real Parallel Multiplier





4 ad InOut real Drain area





3 as InOut real Source area





6 pd InOut real Drain perimeter





5 ps InOut real Source perimeter





8 nrd InOut real Number of squares in drain





7 nrs InOut real Number of squares in source





9 off InOut flag Device is initially off





11 vds InOut real Initial D-S voltage





12 vgs InOut real Initial G-S voltage





10 vbs InOut real Initial B-S voltage





13 ic In unknown vector Vector of DS,GS,BS initial voltages





31.6.6.2 BSIM1 Model Parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





101 vfb InOut real Flat band voltage





102 lvfb InOut real Length dependence of vfb





103 wvfb InOut real Width dependence of vfb





104 phi InOut real Strong inversion surface potential





105 lphi InOut real Length dependence of phi





106 wphi InOut real Width dependence of phi





107 k1 InOut real Bulk effect coefficient 1





108 lk1 InOut real Length dependence of k1





109 wk1 InOut real Width dependence of k1





110 k2 InOut real Bulk effect coefficient 2





111 lk2 InOut real Length dependence of k2





112 wk2 InOut real Width dependence of k2





113 eta InOut real VDS dependence of threshold voltage





114 leta InOut real Length dependence of eta





115 weta InOut real Width dependence of eta





116 x2e InOut real VBS dependence of eta





117 lx2e InOut real Length dependence of x2e





118 wx2e InOut real Width dependence of x2e





119 x3e InOut real VDS dependence of eta





120 lx3e InOut real Length dependence of x3e





121 wx3e InOut real Width dependence of x3e





122 dl InOut real Channel length reduction in um





123 dw InOut real Channel width reduction in um





124 muz InOut real Zero field mobility at VDS=0 VGS=VTH





125 x2mz InOut real VBS dependence of muz





126 lx2mz InOut real Length dependence of x2mz





127 wx2mz InOut real Width dependence of x2mz





128 mus InOut real Mobility at VDS=VDD VGS=VTH, channel length modulation





129 lmus InOut real Length dependence of mus





130 wmus InOut real Width dependence of mus





131 x2ms InOut real VBS dependence of mus





132 lx2ms InOut real Length dependence of x2ms





133 wx2ms InOut real Width dependence of x2ms





134 x3ms InOut real VDS dependence of mus





135 lx3ms InOut real Length dependence of x3ms





136 wx3ms InOut real Width dependence of x3ms





137 u0 InOut real VGS dependence of mobility





138 lu0 InOut real Length dependence of u0





139 wu0 InOut real Width dependence of u0





140 x2u0 InOut real VBS dependence of u0





141 lx2u0 InOut real Length dependence of x2u0





142 wx2u0 InOut real Width dependence of x2u0





143 u1 InOut real VDS depence of mobility, velocity saturation





144 lu1 InOut real Length dependence of u1





145 wu1 InOut real Width dependence of u1





146 x2u1 InOut real VBS depence of u1





147 lx2u1 InOut real Length depence of x2u1





148 wx2u1 InOut real Width depence of x2u1





149 x3u1 InOut real VDS depence of u1





150 lx3u1 InOut real Length dependence of x3u1





151 wx3u1 InOut real Width depence of x3u1





152 n0 InOut real Subthreshold slope





153 ln0 InOut real Length dependence of n0





154 wn0 InOut real Width dependence of n0





155 nb InOut real VBS dependence of subthreshold slope





156 lnb InOut real Length dependence of nb





157 wnb InOut real Width dependence of nb





158 nd InOut real VDS dependence of subthreshold slope





159 lnd InOut real Length dependence of nd





160 wnd InOut real Width dependence of nd





161 tox InOut real Gate oxide thickness in um





162 temp InOut real Temperature in degree Celcius





163 vdd InOut real Supply voltage to specify mus





164 cgso InOut real Gate source overlap capacitance per unit channel width(m)





165 cgdo InOut real Gate drain overlap capacitance per unit channel width(m)





166 cgbo InOut real Gate bulk overlap capacitance per unit channel length(m)





167 xpart InOut real Flag for channel charge partitioning





168 rsh InOut real Source drain diffusion sheet resistance in ohm per square





169 js InOut real Source drain junction saturation current per unit area





170 pb InOut real Source drain junction built in potential





171 mj InOut real Source drain bottom junction capacitance grading coefficient





172 pbsw InOut real Source drain side junction capacitance built in potential





173 mjsw InOut real Source drain side junction capacitance grading coefficient





174 cj InOut real Source drain bottom junction capacitance per unit area





175 cjsw InOut real Source drain side junction capacitance per unit area





176 wdf InOut real Default width of source drain diffusion in um





177 dell InOut real Length reduction of source drain diffusion





180 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





181 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





178 nmos In flag Flag to indicate NMOS





179 pmos In flag Flag to indicate PMOS





31.6.7 BSIM2 - Berkeley Short Channel IGFET Model

31.6.7.1 BSIM2 instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description










2 l InOut real Length





1 w InOut real Width





14 m InOut real Parallel Multiplier





4 ad InOut real Drain area





3 as InOut real Source area





6 pd InOut real Drain perimeter





5 ps InOut real Source perimeter





8 nrd InOut real Number of squares in drain





7 nrs InOut real Number of squares in source





9 off InOut flag Device is initially off





11 vds InOut real Initial D-S voltage





12 vgs InOut real Initial G-S voltage





10 vbs InOut real Initial B-S voltage





13 ic In unknown vector Vector of DS,GS,BS initial voltages





31.6.7.2 BSIM2 model parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





101 vfb InOut real Flat band voltage





102 lvfb InOut real Length dependence of vfb





103 wvfb InOut real Width dependence of vfb





104 phi InOut real Strong inversion surface potential





105 lphi InOut real Length dependence of phi





106 wphi InOut real Width dependence of phi





107 k1 InOut real Bulk effect coefficient 1





108 lk1 InOut real Length dependence of k1





109 wk1 InOut real Width dependence of k1





110 k2 InOut real Bulk effect coefficient 2





111 lk2 InOut real Length dependence of k2





112 wk2 InOut real Width dependence of k2





113 eta0 InOut real VDS dependence of threshold voltage at VDD=0





114 leta0 InOut real Length dependence of eta0





115 weta0 InOut real Width dependence of eta0





116 etab InOut real VBS dependence of eta





117 letab InOut real Length dependence of etab





118 wetab InOut real Width dependence of etab





119 dl InOut real Channel length reduction in um





120 dw InOut real Channel width reduction in um





121 mu0 InOut real Low-field mobility, at VDS=0 VGS=VTH





122 mu0b InOut real VBS dependence of low-field mobility





123 lmu0b InOut real Length dependence of mu0b





124 wmu0b InOut real Width dependence of mu0b





125 mus0 InOut real Mobility at VDS=VDD VGS=VTH





126 lmus0 InOut real Length dependence of mus0





127 wmus0 InOut real Width dependence of mus





128 musb InOut real VBS dependence of mus





129 lmusb InOut real Length dependence of musb





130 wmusb InOut real Width dependence of musb





131 mu20 InOut real VDS dependence of mu in tanh term





132 lmu20 InOut real Length dependence of mu20





133 wmu20 InOut real Width dependence of mu20





134 mu2b InOut real VBS dependence of mu2





135 lmu2b InOut real Length dependence of mu2b





136 wmu2b InOut real Width dependence of mu2b





137 mu2g InOut real VGS dependence of mu2





138 lmu2g InOut real Length dependence of mu2g





139 wmu2g InOut real Width dependence of mu2g





140 mu30 InOut real VDS dependence of mu in linear term





141 lmu30 InOut real Length dependence of mu30





142 wmu30 InOut real Width dependence of mu30





143 mu3b InOut real VBS dependence of mu3





144 lmu3b InOut real Length dependence of mu3b





145 wmu3b InOut real Width dependence of mu3b





146 mu3g InOut real VGS dependence of mu3





147 lmu3g InOut real Length dependence of mu3g





148 wmu3g InOut real Width dependence of mu3g





149 mu40 InOut real VDS dependence of mu in linear term





150 lmu40 InOut real Length dependence of mu40





151 wmu40 InOut real Width dependence of mu40





152 mu4b InOut real VBS dependence of mu4





153 lmu4b InOut real Length dependence of mu4b





154 wmu4b InOut real Width dependence of mu4b





155 mu4g InOut real VGS dependence of mu4





156 lmu4g InOut real Length dependence of mu4g





157 wmu4g InOut real Width dependence of mu4g





158 ua0 InOut real Linear VGS dependence of mobility





159 lua0 InOut real Length dependence of ua0





160 wua0 InOut real Width dependence of ua0





161 uab InOut real VBS dependence of ua





162 luab InOut real Length dependence of uab





163 wuab InOut real Width dependence of uab





164 ub0 InOut real Quadratic VGS dependence of mobility





165 lub0 InOut real Length dependence of ub0





166 wub0 InOut real Width dependence of ub0





167 ubb InOut real VBS dependence of ub





168 lubb InOut real Length dependence of ubb





169 wubb InOut real Width dependence of ubb





170 u10 InOut real VDS depence of mobility





171 lu10 InOut real Length dependence of u10





172 wu10 InOut real Width dependence of u10





173 u1b InOut real VBS depence of u1





174 lu1b InOut real Length depence of u1b





175 wu1b InOut real Width depence of u1b





176 u1d InOut real VDS depence of u1





177 lu1d InOut real Length depence of u1d





178 wu1d InOut real Width depence of u1d





179 n0 InOut real Subthreshold slope at VDS=0 VBS=0





180 ln0 InOut real Length dependence of n0





181 wn0 InOut real Width dependence of n0





182 nb InOut real VBS dependence of n





183 lnb InOut real Length dependence of nb





184 wnb InOut real Width dependence of nb





185 nd InOut real VDS dependence of n





186 lnd InOut real Length dependence of nd





187 wnd InOut real Width dependence of nd





188 vof0 InOut real Threshold voltage offset AT VDS=0 VBS=0





189 lvof0 InOut real Length dependence of vof0





190 wvof0 InOut real Width dependence of vof0





191 vofb InOut real VBS dependence of vof





192 lvofb InOut real Length dependence of vofb





193 wvofb InOut real Width dependence of vofb





194 vofd InOut real VDS dependence of vof





195 lvofd InOut real Length dependence of vofd





196 wvofd InOut real Width dependence of vofd





197 ai0 InOut real Pre-factor of hot-electron effect.





198 lai0 InOut real Length dependence of ai0





199 wai0 InOut real Width dependence of ai0





200 aib InOut real VBS dependence of ai





201 laib InOut real Length dependence of aib





202 waib InOut real Width dependence of aib





203 bi0 InOut real Exponential factor of hot-electron effect.





204 lbi0 InOut real Length dependence of bi0





205 wbi0 InOut real Width dependence of bi0





206 bib InOut real VBS dependence of bi





207 lbib InOut real Length dependence of bib





208 wbib InOut real Width dependence of bib





209 vghigh InOut real Upper bound of the cubic spline function.





210 lvghigh InOut real Length dependence of vghigh





211 wvghigh InOut real Width dependence of vghigh





212 vglow InOut real Lower bound of the cubic spline function.





213 lvglow InOut real Length dependence of vglow





214 wvglow InOut real Width dependence of vglow





215 tox InOut real Gate oxide thickness in um





216 temp InOut real Temperature in degree Celcius





217 vdd InOut real Maximum Vds





218 vgg InOut real Maximum Vgs





219 vbb InOut real Maximum Vbs





220 cgso InOut real Gate source overlap capacitance per unit channel width(m)





221 cgdo InOut real Gate drain overlap capacitance per unit channel width(m)





222 cgbo InOut real Gate bulk overlap capacitance per unit channel length(m)





223 xpart InOut real Flag for channel charge partitioning





224 rsh InOut real Source drain diffusion sheet resistance in ohm per square





225 js InOut real Source drain junction saturation current per unit area





226 pb InOut real Source drain junction built in potential





227 mj InOut real Source drain bottom junction capacitance grading coefficient





228 pbsw InOut real Source drain side junction capacitance built in potential





229 mjsw InOut real Source drain side junction capacitance grading coefficient





230 cj InOut real Source drain bottom junction capacitance per unit area





231 cjsw InOut real Source drain side junction capacitance per unit area





232 wdf InOut real Default width of source drain diffusion in um





233 dell InOut real Length reduction of source drain diffusion





236 kf InOut real Flicker noise coefficient





237 af InOut real Flicker noise exponent





234 nmos In flag Flag to indicate NMOS





235 pmos In flag Flag to indicate PMOS





31.6.8 BSIM3

The accessible device parameters (see chapt. 31.1 for the syntax) are listed here.

31.6.8.1 BSIM3 accessible instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





1 id Out real Drain current





2 vgs Out real Gate-Source voltage





3 vds Out real Drain-Source voltage





4 vbs Out real Bulk-Source voltage





5 gm Out real Transconductance





6 gds Out real Drain-Source conductance





7 gmbs Out real Bulk-Source transconductance





8 vdsat Out real Saturation voltage





9 vth Out real Threshold voltage





10 ibd Out real





11 ibs Out real





12 gbd Out real





13 gbs Out real





14 qb Out real Qbulk





15 cqb Out real





16 qg Out real Qgate





17 cqg Out real





18 qd Out real Qdrain





19 cqd Out real





20 cgg Out real





21 cgd Out real





22 cgs Out real





23 cdg Out real





24 cdd Out real





25 cds Out real





26 cbg Out real





27 cbd Out real





28 cbs Out real





29 capbd Out real Diode capacitance





30 capbs Out real Diode capacitance





The parameters are available in the BSIM3 models (level=8 or level=49) version=3.2.4 and version=3.3.0 only. Negative capacitance values may occur, depending on the internal calculation. Please see the note in chapter 31.6.9.1.

31.6.8.2 BSIM3 manual

Further detailed descriptions will not be given here. Unfortunately the details on these parameters are not documented, even not in the otherwise excellent pdf manual (tarred) issued by University of California at Berkeley.

31.6.9 BSIM4

The accessible device parameters (see chapt. 31.1 for the syntax) are listed here.

31.6.9.1 BSIM4 accessible instance parameters





# Name Direction Type Description





gmbs Out real Body effect (Back gate) transconductance





gm Out real Transconductance





gds Out real Drain-Source conductance





vdsat Out real Saturation voltage





vth Out real Threshold voltage





id Out real Drain current





ibd Out real Diode current





ibs Out real Diode current





gbd Out real Diode conductance





gbs Out real Diode conductance





isub Out real Substrate current





igidl Out real Gate-Induced Drain Leakage current





igisl Out real Gate-Induced Source Leakage current





igs Out real Gate-Source current





igd Out real Gate-drain current





igb Out real Gate-Bulk current





igcs Out real





vbs Out real Bulk-Source voltage





vgs Out real Gate-Source voltage





vds Out real Drain-Source voltage





cgg Out real





cgs Out real





cgd Out real





cbg Out real





cbd Out real





cbs Out real





cdg Out real





cdd Out real





cds Out real





csg Out real





csd Out real





css Out real





cgb Out real





cdb Out real





csb Out real





cbb Out real





capbd Out real Diode capacitance





capbs Out real Diode capacitance





qg Out real Gate charge





qb Out real Bulk charge





qd Out real Drain charge





qs Out real





qinv Out real





qdef Out real





gcrg Out real





gtau Out real





The parameters are available in all BSIM4 models (level=14 or level=54) version=4.2.1 to version=4.7.

Negative capacitance values may occur, depending on the internal calculation. To comparing with measured data, please just use the absolute values of the capacitance data. For an explanation of negative values and the basics on how capacitance values are evaluated in a BSIM model, please refer to the book BSIM4 and MOSFET modeling by Liu and Hu, chapter 5.2.

31.6.9.2 BSIM4 manual

Detailed descriptions will not be given here. Unfortunately the details on these parameters are not documented, even not in the otherwise excellent pdf manual issued by University of California at Berkeley.

Chapter 32
Compilation notes

This file describes the procedures to install ngspice from sources.

32.1 Ngspice Installation under LINUX (and other ’UNIXes’)

32.1.1 Prerequisites

Ngspice is written in C and thus a complete C compilation environment is needed. Almost any UNIX comes with a complete C development environment. Ngspice is developed on GNU/Linux with gcc and GNU make.

The following software must be installed in your system to compile ngspice: bison, flex, and X11 headers and libs.

The X11 headers and libraries are typically available in an X11 development package from your LINUX distribution.

If you want to compile the Git source you need additional software: autoconf, automake, libtool, texinfo.

The following software may be needed when enabling additional features: readline, editline, tcl/tk, blt.

If you want have high performance and accurate FFT’s you should install: fftw-3. Ngspice configure script will find the library and will induce the build process to link against it.

32.1.2 Install from Git

This section describes how to install from source code taken direct from Git. This will give you access to the most recent enhancements and corrections. However be careful as the code in Git may be under development and thus still unstable. For user install instructions using source from released distributions, please see the sections titled ’Install from tarball’ (32.1.3) and ’Advanced Install’ (32.1.5).

Download source from Git as described on the sourceforge ngspice Git page. Define and enter a directory of your choice, e.g. /home/myname/software/. Download the complete ngspice repository from Git, for example by anonymous access issuing the command

git clone git://git.code.sf.net/p/ngspice/ngspice

or via http protocol

git clone http://git.code.sf.net/p/ngspice/ngspice

You will find the sources in directory /home/myname/software/ngspice. Now enter the ngspice top level directory ngspice (where the installation instruction file INSTALL can be found).

The project uses the GNU build process. You should be able to do the following:

$ ./autogen.sh

$ ./configure --enable-xspice --enable-cider 
--disable-debug --with-readline=yes

$ make

$ sudo make install

See the section titled ’Advanced Install’ (32.1.5) for instructions about arguments that can be passed to ./configure to customize the build and installation. The following arguments are already used here and may be called sort of “standard”:

--enable-xspice Include the XSPICE extensions (see chapters 12 and 28)

--enable-cider Include CIDER numerical device simulator (see chapter 30)

--disable-debug No debugging information included (optimized and compact code)

--with-readline=yes Include an editor for the input command line (command history, backspace, insert etc.). If readline is not available, editline may be used.

--enable-openmp Compile ngspice for multi-core processors. Paralleling is done by OpenMP (see chapt. 16.10), and is enabled for certain MOS models.

If a problem is found with the build process, please submit a report to the Ngspice development team. Please provide information about your system and any ./configure arguments you are using, together with any error messages. Ideally you would have tried to fix the problem yourself first. If you have fixed the problem then the development team will love to hear from you.

If you need updating your local source code tree from Git, just enter ngspice directory and issue the command

git pull

git pull will deny to overwrite modified files in your working directory. To drop your local changes first, you can run

git reset --hard

To learn more about Git, which can be both powerful and difficult to master, please consult http://git-scm.com/, especially: http://git-scm.com/documentation which has pointers to documentation and tutorials.

32.1.3 Install from a tarball, e.g. ngspice-rework-25.tgz

This covers installation from a tarball (for example ngspice-rework-25.tgz, to be found at http://sourceforge.net/projects/ngspice/files/). After downloading the tar ball to a local directory unpack it using:

$ tar -zxvf ngspice-rework-25.tgz

Now change directories in to the top-level source directory (where this text from the INSTALL file can be found).

You should be able to do:

$ ./configure --enable-xspice --disable-debug --with-readline=yes

$ make

$ sudo make install

The default install dir is /usr/local/bin

See the section titled ’Advanced Install’ (32.1.5) for instructions about arguments that can be passed to ./configure to customize the build and installation.

32.1.4 Compilation using an user defined directory tree for object files

The procedures described above will store the *.o files (output of the compilation step) into the directories where the sources (*.c) are located. This may not be the best option if you want for example to maintain a debug version and in parallel a release version of ngspice (./configure --disable-debug). So if you intend to create a separate object file tree like ngspice/ngbuild/release, you may do the following, starting from the default directory ngspice:

mkdir -p release

cd release

../configure --enable-xspice --disable-debug --with-readline=yes <more options>

make install

This will create an object file directory tree, similar to the source file directory tree, the object files are now separated from the source files. For the debug version, you may do the same as described above, replacing ’release’ by ’debug’, and obtain another separated object file directory tree. If you already have run ./configure in ngspice, you have to do a maintainer-clean, before the above procedure will work.

32.1.5 Advanced Install

Some extra options can be provided to ’./configure’. To get all available options do:

$ ./configure --help

Some of these options are generic to the GNU build process that is used by Ngspice, other are specific to Ngspice.

The following sections provide some guidance and descriptions for many, but not all, of these options.

32.1.5.1 Options Specific to Using Ngspice

--enable-openmp Compile ngspice for multi-core processors. Paralleling is done by OpenMP (see chapt. 16.10).

--enable-xspice Enable XSPICE enhancements, yielding a mixed signal simulator integrated into ngspice with codemodel dynamic loading support. See chapter 12 and section II for details.

--with-readline=yes Enable GNU readline support for the command line interface.

--enable-cider Cider is a mixed-level simulator that couples Spice3 and DSIM to simulate devices from their technological parameters. This part of the simulator is not compiled by default.

--enable-adms ADMS is an experimental model compiler that translates Verilog-A compact models into C code that can be compiled into ngspice. This is still experimental, but working with some limitations to the models (e.g. no noise models). If you want to use it, please refer to the ADMS section on ngspice web site .

--with-editline=yes Enables the use of the BSD editline library (libedit).
See http://www.thrysoee.dk/editline/.

--without-x Disable the X-Windows graphical system. Compile without needing X headers and X libraries. The plot command (17.5.43) is now disabled. You may use gnuplot (17.5.26) instead.

--with-tcl=tcldir When configured with this option the tcl module "tclspice" is compiled and installed instead of plain ngspice.

--with-ngshared This option will create a shared library (*.so in LINUX) or dynamic link library (*.dll) instead of plain ngspice.

The following options are seldom used today, not tested, some may even no longer be implemented.

--enable-capbypass Bypass calculation of cbd/cbs in the mosfets if the vbs/vbd voltages are unchanged.

--enable-capzerobypass Bypass all the cbd/cbs calculations if Czero is zero. This is enabled by default since rework-18.

--enable-cluster Clustering code for distributed simulation. This is a contribution never tested. This code comes from TCLspice implementation and is implemented for transient analysis only.

--enable-expdevices Enable experimental devices. This option is used by developers to mask devices under development. Almost useless for users.

--enable-experimental This enables some experimental code. Specifically it enables: * support for altering options in interactive mode by adding the interactive keyword ’options’. * The ability to save and load snapshots: adds interactive keywords ’savesnap’ and ’loadsnap’.

--enable-help Force building nghelp. This is deprecated.

--enable-newpred Enable the NEWPRED symbol in the code.

--enable-newtrunc Enable the newtrunc option

--enable-ndev Enable NDEV interface, (experimental) A TCP/IP interface to external device simulator such as GSS. For more information, please visit the homepage of GSS at http://gss-tcad.sourceforge.net

--enable-nodelimiting Experimental damping scheme

--enable-nobypass Don’t bypass recalculations of slowly changing variables

--enable-nosqrt Use always log/exp for non-linear capacitances –enable-predictor Enable a predictor method for convergence

--enable-sense2 Use spice2 sensitivity analysis

--enable-xgraph Compile the Xgraph plotting program. Xgraph is a plotting package for X11 and was once very popular.

32.1.5.2 Options Useful for Debugging Ngspice

--disable-debug This option will remove the ’-g’ option passed to the compiler. This speeds up execution time, creates a small executable, and is recommended for normal use. If you want to run ngspice in a debugger (e.g. gdb), you should not select this option.

The following options are seldom used today, not tested, some may even no longer be implemented.

--enable-ansi Configure will try to find an option for your compiler so that it expects ansi-C.

--enable-asdebug Debug sensitivity code *ASDEBUG*.

--enable-blktmsdebug Debug distortion code *BLOCKTIMES*

--enable-checkergcc Option for compilation with checkergcc.

--enable-cpdebug Enable ngspice shell code debug.

--enable-ftedebug Enable ngspice frontend debug.

--enable-gc Enable the Boehm-Weiser Conservative Garbage Collector.

--enable-pzdebug Debug pole/zero code.

--enable-sensdebug Debug sensitivity code *SENSDEBUG*.

--enable-smltmsdebug Debug distortion code *SMALLTIMES*

--enable-smoketest Enable smoketest compile.

--enable-stepdebug Turns on debugging of convergence steps in transient analysis

32.1.6 Compilers and Options

Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that the ‘configure’ script does not know about. You can give ‘configure’ initial values for variables by setting them in the environment. Using a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like this:

CC=c89

CFLAGS=-O2

LIBS=-lposix

./configure

Or on systems that have the ‘env’ program, you can do it like this:

env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include

LDFLAGS=-s

./configure

32.1.7 Compiling For Multiple Architectures

You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their own directory. To do this, you must use a version of ‘make’ that supports the ‘VPATH’ variable, such as GNU ‘make’. ‘cd’ to the directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run the ‘configure’ script. ‘configure’ automatically checks for the source code in the directory that ‘configure’ is in and in ‘..’.

If you have to use a ‘make’ that does not supports the ‘VPATH’ variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time in the source code directory. After you have installed the package for one architecture, use ‘make distclean’ before reconfiguring for another architecture.

32.1.8 Installation Names

By default, ‘make install’ will install the package’s files in ‘/usr/local/bin’, ‘/usr/local/man’, etc. You can specify an installation prefix other than ‘/usr/local’ by giving ‘configure’ the option ‘–prefix=PATH’.

You can specify separate installation prefixes for architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you give ‘configure’ the option ‘–exec-prefix=PATH’, the package will use PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries. Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix.

In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give options like ‘–bindir=PATH’ to specify different values for particular kinds of files. Run ‘configure –help’ for a list of the directories you can set and what kinds of files go in them.

If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving ‘configure’ the option ‘–program-prefix=PREFIX’ or ‘–program-suffix=SUFFIX’.

When installed on MinGW with MSYS alternative paths are not fully supported. See ’How to make ngspice with MINGW and MSYS’ below for details.

32.1.9 Optional Features

Some packages pay attention to ‘–enable-FEATURE’ options to ‘configure’, where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package. They may also pay attention to ‘–with-PACKAGE’ options, where PACKAGE is something like ‘gnu-as’ or ‘x’ (for the X Window System). The ‘README’ should mention any ‘–enable-’ and ‘–with-’ options that the package recognizes.

For packages that use the X Window System, ‘configure’ can usually find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn’t, you can use the ‘configure’ options ‘–x-includes=DIR’ and ‘–x-libraries=DIR’ to specify their locations.

32.1.10 Specifying the System Type

There may be some features ‘configure’ can not figure out automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package will run on. Usually ‘configure’ can figure that out, but if it prints a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the ‘–host=TYPE’ option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system type, such as ‘sun4’, or a canonical name with three fields: CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM

See the file ‘config.sub’ for the possible values of each field. If ‘config.sub’ isn’t included in this package, then this package doesn’t need to know the host type.

If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also use the ‘–target=TYPE’ option to select the type of system they will produce code for and the ‘–build=TYPE’ option to select the type of system on which you are compiling the package.

32.1.11 Sharing Defaults

If you want to set default values for ‘configure’ scripts to share, you can create a site shell script called ‘config.site’ that gives default values for variables like ‘CC’, ‘cache_file’, and ‘prefix’. ‘configure’ looks for ‘PREFIX/share/config.site’ if it exists, then ‘PREFIX/etc/config.site’ if it exists. Or, you can set the ‘CONFIG_SITE’ environment variable to the location of the site script. A warning: not all ‘configure’ scripts look for a site script.

32.1.12 Operation Controls

‘configure’ recognizes the following options to control how it operates.

‘--cache-file=FILE’ Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of ‘./config.cache’. Set FILE to ‘/dev/null’ to disable caching, for debugging ‘configure’.

‘--help’ Print a summary of the options to ‘configure’, and exit.

‘--quiet’ ‘--silent’ ‘-q’ Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. To suppress all normal output, redirect it to ‘/dev/null’ (any error messages will still be shown).

‘--srcdir=DIR’ Look for the package’s source code in directory DIR. Usually ‘configure’ can determine that directory automatically.

‘--version’ Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the ‘configure’ script, and exit.

‘configure’ also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.

32.2 Ngspice Compilation under WINDOWS OS

32.2.1 How to make ngspice with MINGW and MSYS

Creating ngspice with MINGW is now a straight forward procedure, if you have MSYS/MINGW installed properly. Unfortunately the installation is rather tedious because you will need several enhancements to the standard install, especially if you want to include XSpice. Some links are given below which describe the procedures. The default installation location of ngspice is the Windows path C:\spice. The install path can be altered by passing --prefix=NEWPATH as an argument to ./configure during the build process.

Put the install path you desire inside "", e.g. "D:/NewSpice". Be careful to use forward slashes "/", not backward slashes "\" (something still to be fixed). Then add --prefix="D:/NewSpice" as an argument to ./configure in the normal way.

The procedure of compiling a distribution (for example, a the most recent stable distribution from the ngspice website, e.g. ngspice-25.tar.gz), is as follows:

$ cd ngspice

$ cd release

$ ../configure --with-wingui ...and other options

$ make

$ make install

The useful options are:

--enable-xspice (this requires FLEX and BISON available in MSYS, see below).

--enable-cider

--disable-debug (-O2 optimization, no debug information)

A complete ngspice (release version, no debug info, optimized executable) may be made available just by

$ cd ngspice

$ ./compile_min.sh

If you want to compile the Git source you need additional software packages autoconf, automake, libtool, available from the MSYS distribution and git, available for example here.

Download source from Git as described on the sourceforge ngspice Git page. Define and enter a directory of your choice, e.g. /d/spice/. Download the complete ngspice repository from Git, for example by anonymous access issuing the command

git clone git://ngspice.git.sourceforge.net/gitroot/ngspice/ngspice

You will find the sources in directory /d/spice/ngspice/. Now enter the ngspice top level directory ngspice. This is the procedure for compilation:

$ cd ngspice

$ ./autogen.sh

$ mkdir release

$ cd release

$ ../configure --with-wingui ...and other options

$ make

$ make install

The user defined build tree saves the object files, instead of putting them into the source tree, in a release (and a debug) tree. Please see chapt. 32.1.4 for instructions.

If you need updating your local source code tree from Git, just enter ngspice directory and issue the command

git pull

git pull will deny to overwrite modified files in your working directory. To drop your local changes first, you can run

git reset --hard

To learn more about Git, which can be both powerful and difficult to master, please consult http://git-scm.com/, especially: http://git-scm.com/documentation which has pointers to documentation and tutorials.

MINGW and MSYS can be downloaded from http://www.mingw.org/. The making of the code models *.cm for XSpice and one of the ngspice parsers require the installation of BISON and FLEX to MSYS. A typical installation was tested with: bison-2.0-MSYS.tar.gz flex-2.5.4a-1-bin.zip libiconv-1.9.2-1-bin.zip libintl-0.14.4-bin.zip

Bison 2.0 is now superseded by newer releases
(Bison 2.3, see http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2435&package_id=67879)

The last three are fromhttp://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=23617.

You may also look at

http://www.mingw.org/wiki/HOWTO_Install_the_MinGW_GCC_Compiler_Suite

http://www.mingw.org/wiki/MSYS

http://www.mingw.org/wiki/HOWTO_Create_an_MSYS_Build_Environment.

32.2.2 64 Bit executables with MINGW-w64

Procedure:

Install MSYS, plus bison, flex, auto tools, perl, libiconv, libintl

Install MINGW-w64, activate OpenMP support

See either http://mingw-w64.sourceforge.net/ or http://tdm-gcc.tdragon.net/

(allows to generate both 32 or 64 bit executables by setting flag -m32 or -m64)

Set path to compiler in msys/xx/etc/fstab (e.g. c:/MinGW64 /mingw)

Start compiling with

’./compile_min.sh’ or ’./compile_min.sh 64’

Options used in the script:

–adms and –enable-adms ADMS is an experimental model compiler that translates Verilog-A compact models into C code that can be compiled into ngspice. This is still experimental, but working with some limitations to the models (e.g. no noise models). If you want to use it, please refer to the ADMS section on ngspice web site .

CIDER, XSPICE, and OpenMP may be selected at will.

–disable-debug will give O2 optimization (versus O0 for debug) and removes all debugging info.

The install script will copy all files to C:\Spice or C:\Spice64, the code models for XSPICE will be stored in C:\Spice\lib\spice or C:\Spice64\lib\spice respectively.

A word of caution: Be aware that there might be some bugs in your 64 bit code. We still have some compiler warnings about integer incompatibility (e.g. integer versus size_t etc.)! We will take care of that for the next release.

32.2.3 make ngspice with MS Visual Studio 2008 or 2010

ngspice may be compiled with MS Visual Studio 2008. Support for MS Visual Studio 2010 is easily achieved by using the automatic project migration offered by Microsoft.

CIDER and XSPICE are included, but the code models for XSPICE (*.cm) are not (yet) made. You may however use the code models (which in fact are dlls) created with MINGW, as e.g. found in the ngspice binary distribution. There is currently no installation procedure provided, you may however install the executable manually as described in the installation tree below. The directory (visualc) with its files vngspice.sln (project starter) and vngspice.vcproj (project contents) allows to compile and link ngspice with MS Visual Studio 2008. The project is probably not compatible with Visual Studio 2005, but may be translated for use with 2010.

/visualc/include contains a dedicated config.h file. It contains the preprocessor definitions required to properly compile the code. strings.h has been necessary during setting up the project.

Install Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 C++. The MS VS 2008 C++ Express Edition (which is available at no cost from http://www.microsoft.com/express/product/default.aspx) is adequate, if you do not wish to have OpenMP or 64 bit support. So the express edition will allow a 32 bit Release and a Debug version of ngspice, using the Win32 flag. In addition you may select a console version without graphics interface. The professional edition will offer Release and Debug and Console also for 64 bit (flag x64), as well as an OpenMP variant for 32 or 64 bit.

Procedure:

Goto /ngspice/visualc.

Start MS Visual Studio 2008 by double click onto vngspice.sln. After MS Visual Studio has opened up, select debug or release version by checking ’Erstellen’ , ’Konfigurations-Manager’ ’Debug’ or ’Release’. Start making ngspice (called vngspice.exe) by selecting ’Erstellen’ and ’vngspice neu erstellen’. Object files will be created and stored in visualc/debug or visualc/release. The executable will be stored to visualc/debug/bin or visualc/release/bin.

An installation tree (as provided with MINGW make install) and also used by vngspice in its current distribution is shown in the following table (maybe created manually):


C:\Spice\

  bin\

    ngspice.exe

    nghelp.exe

    ngmakeidx.exe

    ngnutmeg.exe

    cmpp.exe

  lib\

    spice\

      analog.cm

      digital.cm

      spice2poly.cm

      extradev.cm

      extravt.cm

  share\

    info\

      dir

      ngspice.info

      ngspice.info-1

      ..

      ngspice.info-10

    man\

      man1\

        ngmultidec.1

        ngnutmeg.1

        ngsconvert.1

        ngspice.1

    ngspice\

      helpdir\

        ngspice.idx

        ngspice.txt

      scripts\

        ciderinit

        devaxis

        devload

        setplot

        spectrum

        spinit

Table 32.1: ngspice standard installation tree under MS Windows

If you intend to install vngspice into another directory, e.g. D:\MySpice, you have to edit /visualc/include/config.h and alter the following entries from:

#define NGSPICEBINDIR "C:/Spice/bin"

#define NGSPICEDATADIR "C:/Spice/share/ngspice"

to

#define NGSPICEBINDIR "D:/MySpice/bin"

#define NGSPICEDATADIR "D:/MySpice/share/ngspice"

nghelp.exe is deprecated and no longer offered, but still available in the binary distribution. If the code model files *.cm are not available, you will get warning messages, but you may use ngspice in the normal way (of course without XSPICE extensions). To-Do: Some commands in how-to-ngspice-vstudio.txt and mentioned above have to be translated to English.

To use the FFTW-3 library, download the precompiled MS Windows distribution (either 32 bit or 64 bit) from http://www.fftw.org/install/windows.html. Extract at least the files fftw3.h, libfftw3-3.def, and libfftw3-3.dll to directory fftw-3.3.3-dll32 (from 32 bit fftw3 for ngspice 32 bit), or to directory fftw-3.3.3-dll64 (from 64 bit fftw3 for ngspice 64 bit). Then select the MS VC++ project file visualc/vngspice-fftw.vcproj for starting VC++, select the appropriate configuration and platform, and off you go.

32.2.4 make ngspice with pure CYGWIN

The procedure of compiling is the same as with Linux (see chapt. 32.1). After you have moved to the ngspice directory, the following command sequence may do the work for you:

$ ./autogen.sh

$ mkdir release-cyg

$ cd release-cyg

$ ../configure --with-x --disable-debug --with-readline=yes --enable-xspice --enable-pss --enable-cider --enable-openmp

$ make clean 2>&1 | tee make_clean.log

$ make 2>&1 | tee make.log

$ make install 2>&1 | tee make_install.log

The CYGWIN console executable you have been creating is an X11 application. This is a not a Windows native environment. So you have to add an X11 graphics interface by installing the XServer from the CYGWIN project. Before starting ngspice, you have to start the XServer by the following commands within the CYGWIN window:

$ export DISPLAY=:0.0

$ xwin -multiwindow -clipboard &

If you don’t have libdl.a you may need to link libcygwin.a to libdl.a symbolically, for example:

$ cd /lib $ ln -s libcygwin.a libdl.a.

32.2.5 ngspice mingw or cygwin console executable w/o graphics

If you omit the configure flag “–with-wingui” or “–with-x”, you will obtain a console application without graphics interface.

./configure --enable-xspice --enable-cider --enable-openmp 
 --disable-debug CFLAGS=-m32 LDFLAGS=-m32 prefix=C:/Spice

is an example for TDM mingw, 32 Bit ngspice console. No graphics interface is provided. A warning message will be issued upon starting ngspice. However, you may invoke ’gnuplot’ for plotting (see 17.5.26).

32.2.6 make ngspice with CYGWIN and external MINGW32

The next two compilation options are deprecated and not tested any more!

according to http://www.geocrawler.com/lists/3/SourceForge/6013/0/7321042/

$ cd ngspice

$ export PATH="/cygdrive/g/gcc_mingw/bin:$PATH"

$ autoconf

$ rm config.cache

$ ./configure --with-wingui --prefix="/cygdrive/g/gcc_mingw/bin"

$ make clean

$ make 2> make.err

$ cp config.h config_ming.h

ngspice.exe is o.k.,but make tests does not work (cannot direct console output into file). Needs to add .save "what" "where.test" to every input (*.cir) file. Also all given output files have to be adapted to WINDOWS (CR/LF instead of only LF at each line ending) for allowing proper comparison.

32.2.7 make ngspice with CYGWIN and internal MINGW32 (use config.h made above)

$ cd ngspice

$ rm config.cache

$ export CFLAGS="-mno-cygwin -g -O2"

$ export LDFLAGS="-L/lib/mingw"

$ export CPPFLAGS="-I/usr/include/mingw"

$ ./configure --with-wingui

$ cp config_ming.h config.h

$ make clean

$ make 2> make.err

./configure does not work correctly: It finds headers and libs which are not really available in the -mno-cygwin port of MINGW32. Therefore config.h is not o.k.

To-Do: find appropriate presets for variables ? rewrite tests for headers and libs (search exclusively in mingw directories)

32.3 Reporting errors

Setting up ngspice is a complex task. The source code contains over 1500 files. ngspice should run on various operating systems. Therefore errors may be found, some still evolving from the original spice3f5 code, others introduced during the ongoing code enhancements.

If you happen to experience an error during compilation of ngspice, please send a report to the development team. Ngspice is hosted on sourceforge, the preferred place to post a bug report is the ngspice bug tracker. We would prefer to have your bug tested against the actual source code available at Git, but of course a report using the most recent ngspice release is welcome! Please provide the following information with your report:

Ngspice version

Operating system

Small input file to reproduce the bug (if to report a runtime error)

Actual output versus the expected output

Chapter 33
Copyrights and licenses

33.1 Documentation license

33.1.1 Spice documentation copyright

Copyright 1996 The Regents of the University of California.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for educational, research and non-profit purposes, without fee, and without a written agreement is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice, this paragraph and the following three paragraphs appear in all copies. This software program and documentation are copyrighted by The Regents of the University of California. The software program and documentation are supplied "as is", without any accompanying services from The Regents. The Regents does not warrant that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error-free. The end-user understands that the program was developed for research purposes and is advised not to rely exclusively on the program for any reason.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS NO OBLIGATIONS TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.

33.1.2 XSPICE SOFTWARE (documentation) copyright

Code added to SPICE3 to create the XSPICE Simulator and the XSPICE Code Model Subsystem was developed at the Computer Science and Information Technology Laboratory, Georgia Tech Research Institute, Atlanta GA, and is covered by license agreement the following copyright:

Copyright © 1992 Georgia Tech Research Corporation All Rights Reserved. This material may be reproduced by or for the U.S. Government pursuant to the copyright license under the clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct. 1988)

Refer to U.C. Berkeley and Georgia Tech license agreements for additional information.

This license is now superseded by chapt. 33.2.2

33.1.3 CIDER RESEARCH SOFTWARE AGREEMENT (superseded by 33.2.1)

This chapter specifies the terms under which the CIDER software and documentation coming with the original distribution are provided. This agreement is superseded by 33.2.1, the “modified” BSD license.

Software is distributed as is, completely without warranty or service support. The University of California and its employees are not liable for the condition or performance of the software.

The University does not warrant that it owns the copyright or other proprietary rights to all software and documentation provided under this agreement, notwithstanding any copyright notice, and shall not be liable for any infringement of copyright or proprietary rights brought by third parties against the recipient of the software and documentation provided under this agreement.

THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE UNIVERSITY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES INCURRED BY THE RECIPIENT IN USE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

The University of California grants the recipient the right to modify, copy, and redistribute the software and documentation, both within the recipient’s organization and externally, subject to the following restrictions:

(a) The recipient agrees not to charge for the University of California code itself. The recipient may, however, charge for additions, extensions, or support.

(b) In any product based on the software, the recipient agrees to acknowledge the research group that developed the software. This acknowledgment shall appear in the product documentation.

(c) The recipient agrees to obey all U.S. Government restrictions governing redistribution or export of the software and documentation.

All BSD licenses have been changed to the “modified” BSD license by UCB in 1999 (see chapt. 33.2.1).

33.2 ngspice license

The SPICE license is the “Modified” BSD license,
(see http://embedded.eecs.berkeley.edu/pubs/downloads/spice/index.htm).
ngspice adopts this “Modified” BSD license as well for all of its source code (except of tclspice, and numparam which are under LGPLv2, and XSPICE, which is public domain (see 33.2.2))!

*****************************************************************************

Copyright (c) 1985-1991 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.

*****************************************************************************

33.2.1 “Modified” BSD license

All “old” BSD licenses (of SPICE or CIDER) have been changed to the “modified” BSD license according to the following publication
(see ftp://ftp.cs.berkeley.edu/pub/4bsd/README.Impt.License.Change):

July 22, 1999

To All Licensees, Distributors of Any Version of BSD:

As you know, certain of the Berkeley Software Distribution ("BSD") source code files require that further distributions of products containing all or portions of the software, acknowledge within their advertising materials that such products contain software developed by UC Berkeley and its contributors.

Specifically, the provision reads:

" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors."

Effective immediately, licensees and distributors are no longer required to include the acknowledgment within advertising materials. Accordingly, the foregoing paragraph of those BSD Unix files containing it is hereby deleted in its entirety.

William Hoskins

Director, Office of Technology Licensing

University of California, Berkeley

33.2.2 XSPICE

According to http://users.ece.gatech.edu/mrichard/Xspice/ (as of Feb. 2012) the XSPICE source code and documentation have been put into the public domain by the Georgia Institute of Technology.

33.2.3 tclspice, numparam

Both software packages are copyrighted and are released under LGPLv2
(see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl-2.1.html).

33.2.4 Linking to GPLd libraries (e.g. readline, fftw):

The readline manual at http://tiswww.case.edu/php/chet/readline/rltop.html states: Readline is free software, distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 3. This means that if you want to use Readline in a program that you release or distribute to anyone, the program must be free software and have a GPL-compatible license.

According to http://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html, the modified BSD license, thus also the ngspice license, belongs to the family of GPL-Compatible Free Software Licenses. Therefore the linking restrictions to readline, which have existed with the old BSD license, are no longer in effect.